Skip to main content

Full text of "Report of the second Norwegian Arctic Expedition in the "Fram", 1898-1902. Published by Videnskabs-selskabet i Kristiania, at the expense of the Fridjof Nansen Fund for the Advancement of Science"

See other formats 


IIST  • 


O< 


REPORT 


OF  THE 


SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC 
EXPEDITION  IN  THE  "FRAM" 

1898-1902 

VOL.  III. 


- 

AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED  BY 
VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 


KRISTIANIA 

IN  COMMISSION  BY  T.  0.  BR0GGER 

PRINTED    BY    A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1911 


\KV\!f // 


CONTENTS  OF  VOL.  III. 

No.  14.    PAULBJERKAN:  Ascidien.    Mit  1  Tafel.  (Gedruckt Murz,  1908)    1-12 

-  15.    HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN:    Annulata  polychaeta.    Taf.  I — III. 

(Gedruckt  Murz,  1909) 1  -  28 

-  16.    H.  G.  SIMMONS:  A  Revised  List  of  the  FloweringPlants  and 

Ferns  of  North  Western  Greenland,  with  some  short 
Notes  about  the  Affinities  of  the  Flora.  (With  one  map  in 
the  text.)  (Printed  April,  1909)  1-110 

-  17.    HANS  KLER:    On   the  Bottom  Deposits  from  the  Second 

Norwegian    Arctic    Expedition    in    the    "Fram".    (Printed 

May,  1909) ' 1-8 

—  18     G.  0.  SARS:   Crustacea.   (With  12  autogr.  plates.)   (Printed 

June,  1909) 1-4-7 

-  19.    H.  G.  SIMMONS:  Stray  Contributions  to  the  Botany  of  North 

Devon  and  some  other  Islands,  Visited  in  1900 — 1902. 
With  one  Map  in  the  text  and  an  alphabetical  index  to 
No.  2.  Flora  of  Ellesmereland,  No.  16,  Plants  of  N.  W. 
Greenland,  and  this  paper.  (Printed  Jane,  1909) 1-36 

-  20.    JAMES  A.  GRIEG:  Brachiopods  and  Molluscs,  with  a  Supple- 

ment to  the  Echinoderms.  (With  a  Table.)  (Printed 
October,  1909) 1-45 

-  21.    OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE:    Lichens   Collected  during   the  2"d 

Norwegian    Polar   Expedition    in    1898-1902.    With   2 

Plates.     (Printed  October,  1909) '.     .     1-  68 

-  22.    CARL  BUGGE:    Petrographische  Resultate  der  2ten  Fram- 

Expedition.  (Mit5  Tafeln  und  Karteji.)  (Gedruckt  October,  1910)    1  -  38 

-  23.    CONRAD  FRISTEDT:  Sponges  from  the  Coast  of  Ellesmere- 

Land.     (Printed  October,  1909) 1-5 

—  24    FREDRIK  INGVARSON:  Die  Treibholzer  auf  dem  Ellesmere- 

Land.     (Gedruckt  June,  1910)  .     .     ,     i 1-57 

-25.     AD.  S.JENSEN:     Fishes.    (Printed  December,  1910) 1-15 

-  26.    A.  APPELLOF:   Pycnogoniden.    (Gedruckt  November,  1910)  .    .    1-    7 

—  27.    H.  H.  GRAN:    Phytoplankton.    (Gedruckt  Februar,  1911)     .    .1-28 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM",   1898—1902.     No.   14. 


PAUL  BJERKAN: 

ASCIDIEN 


(MIT  1  TAFEL) 


AT     THE     EXPENCE     OF    THE    FHIDTJOF    NANSEK 
FUND     FOR     THE     ADVANCEMENT     OF      SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 


KHLSTIANIA 
PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGEH 

1908 


• 


D, 


"as  Material  ist  leider  nicht  sehr  reich  an  Arten,  hat  aber  in  Ver- 
bindung  mil  einer  Samnilung  nordamerikanischer  Ascidien  im  zoologischen 
Museum  der  Universitat  zu  Kristiania  grosses  Interesse,  speziell  fur  die 
Ausbreitung  vieler  Arten.  Viele  Arten,  die  im  Meere  nordlich  von  Eu- 
ropa  ihre  Heimat  haben  oder  dort  eingedrungen  sind,  findet  man  auch 
in  Gronland  und  dem  arktisch-amerikanischen  Archipel  oder  an  der  Ost- 
kiiste  von  Nord-Amerika,  sogar  weit  nach  Si'iden  hinein.  Wegen  der 
speziellen  Strom  verhaltnisse  des  Eismeeres  ist  dies  ja  auch  sehr  natur- 
lich.  Die  Eier  und  Larven  der  verschiedenen  Ascidien  lassen  sich  leicht 
mil  dem  Strome  forttreiben,  und  wenn  sie  nur  die  fiir  sie  geeignete  Was- 
sertemperatur  vorfinden,  machen  sie  ihre  Entwicklung  durch  und  wer- 
den  sesshaft  ebensogut  weit  von  der  Stelle,  wo  die  Eltern  befestigt  waren, 
als  in  deren  Nahe.  Durch  die  Arbeiten  von  TRAUSTEDT  (1880)  und  HART- 
MEYER  (1903)  sind  viele  Arten,  die  frilher  vom  nordlichen  Europa  be- 
schrieben  worden  sind,  auch  fur  Gronland  und  die  benachbarten  Meere 
nachgewiesen.  Viele  von  diesen  sind  an  den  Kiisten  Nord-Asiens 
gefunden,  und  weni:  man  sie  auch  zwischen  den  Inseln  des  arktisch- 
amerikanischen  Archipels  findet,  hat  es  keinen  Zweck,  ihre  Zirkumpo- 
laritat  in  Abrede  zu  stellen. 

Die  Ascidien  der  2ten  "Fram"-Expedition  sind  auf76— 79°  N.  B. 
und  75 — 90°  W.  L.  (Greenwich),  in  den  Sunden  und  Fjorden,  die  von 
Smiths  Sund  gegen  Westen  und  von  Jones'  Sund  gegen  Norden  in  das 
Ellesmere  Land  eindringen,  genommen.  Speziell  sind  durch  Dreggen  an 
den  Kiisten  von  Simmons  Halbinsel  zwischen  Gaase fjord  und 
Helvedesporten  viele  Ascidien  gefunden  worden.  Im  Gaasefjord  lag  die 
"Fram"  eingefroren  in  den  zwei  Wintern  1900—01  und  1901—02.  Uber 
die  Meeresfauna  dieses  Fjords  sagt  SvERDRUP1):  WBAY  (der  Zoologe  der 
Expedition)  erzahlte,  dass  er  niemals  an  irgend  welcher  Stelle  in  den 
arktischen  Gegenden  eine  so  reiche  Fauna  gefunden  habe.  Seine  Funde 


1  OTTO  SVERDRUP,  Nyt  Land,  v,  II,  p.  112. 


PAUL  BJERKAN.  [2ND  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


waren  in  mehreren  Beziehungen  uberraschend.  Schade  nur,  dass  er 
nicht  langere  Zeit  arbeiten  konnte."  Der  letzte  Passus  zeigt,  wie  schwierig 
es  ist,  in  den  hocharktischen  Gegenden  mit  der  Dregge  zu  arbeiten.  Die 
langste  Zeit  des  Jahres  deckt  das  Eis  alles,  und  nur  in  den  Monaten 
Juli  und  August,  oder  vvenn  man  gliicklich  ist,  auch  einige  Tage  im  Sep- 
tember, kann  man  die  See  offen  finden.  Uber  die  Verhaltnisse  der  oben 
erwahnten  Meeresstrasse  Helvedesporten  kann  man  in  SIMMONS'  "Rapport"1) 
lesen.  Man  sieht,  wie  der  Strom  hier  sehr  stark  zwischen  Jones'  Sund 
und  der  nordlich  liegenden  Norskebugt  zieht  Verhaltnisse,  die  speziell 
fur  festsitzende  Tiere  sehr  vorteilhaft  sein  miissen.  Die  Schwierigkeiten 
beim  Dreggen  waren  aber  sehr  gross.  Eis,  Strom  und  Wind  bewirkten, 
dass  man  nur  an  einzelnen  vom  Zufall  bestimmten  Stellen  dreggen  konnte. 
Dass  das  Material  unter  diesen  Umstanden  etwas  luckenhaft  werden 
musste,  ist  leicht  zu  verstehen. 

Das  Material  enthalt  6  Arten,  die  5  Genera  reprasentieren.  Alle  ge- 
horen  zu  den  einfachen  Ascidien  und  trotz  sorgfaltiger  Untersuchungen 
des  iibrigen  Materials,  zum  Beispiel  der  Balaniden,  bin  ich  nicht  im 
Stande  gewesen,  irgend  eine  nSynascidien"-Kolonie  zu  finden. 

Wenn  ich  im  folgenden  die  Arten  naher  bespreche,  muss  ich  bemerken, 
dass  von  Synonymie  des  Platzes  wegen  nur  das  Notvvendigste  mitgenom- 
men  ist.  tJbrigens  verweise  ich  auf  HARTMEYERS,  ^Ascidien  der  Arktis", 
wo  die  Synonymie  aller  arktischen  Ascidien  ausfiihrlich  behandelt  ist. 
Wenn  ich  von  dem  obenerwiihnten  Verfasser  abweiche,  wird  dies  im 
Texte  ausdrilcklich  bemerkt. 

Hinsichtlich  der  naheren  Angaben  der  Fundstellen  ist  auf  die  Karten 
in  ISACHSEN,  Astronomical  und  Geodetical  Observations"  (No.  5  dieses 
„ Report")  hinzuweisen3).  Um  den  Gebrauch  der  Karten  zu  erleichtern, 
schreibe  ich  wie  in  diesen  Karten  die  Namen,  die  von  der  nF  ram  "-Expedi- 
tion gegeben  sind,  norwegisch,  schicke  aber  eine  Ubersetzung  in  deutscher 
und  englischer  Sprache  voraus: 

Gaasefjord  =  Gansefjord  =  Geese  Fjord. 

Renbugten  =  Renntierbucht  =  Reindeer  Bay. 

Helvedesporten  =  Hollenpforte  =  Hell  Gate. 

Havnefjord  =  Hafenfjord  =  Harbour  Fjord. 

Norskebugt  =  Norwegische  Bucht  =  Norwegian  Bay. 


1   OTTO  SVERDRUP,  Nyt  Land,  v.  II,  p,  374. 
*  ROMER  und  SCHAUDINN,  Fauna  Arctica,  v.  Ill,  2. 

3  Dieselben    Karten,    von    ISACHSEN    gezeichnet,    sind  auch  in  OTTO  SVERDRUP,  Nyt 
Land,  v.  I— II  zu  finden. 


1898-1902.  No.  14.1  ASCID1EN. 


Fam :  Halocynttiiidae. 

Halocynthia  (part.)  VERRILL,  1879. 

Halocynthia  arctica  (HARTM.) 
Syn:  Cynthia  echinata,  Autores. 

1879,  Halocynthia  echinata,  VERRILL,  p.  148. 
1903,  „  arctica,  HARTMEVER,  p.  190. 

F  n  n  d  s  t  e  1 1  e : 

24  Juli,  1900,  Havnefjord,  85  m.  (am  Winterhafen),  1  Expl. 

Diese  Art  ist  von  HARTMEYER  (1899)  von  der  H.  echinata  (L)  als 
spezifisch  arktisch  ausgeschieden  worden.  Uber  die  nahere  Synonymie 
siehe  HARTMEYER  (1903,  p.  190).  Eine  aussere  Eigentiimlichkeit  der  Art 
sind  nach  dem  erwahnten  Verfasser  die  kreisformig  angeordneten  Dornen 
mil  einem  langeren,  peilschenformigen  Dot  n  in  der  Mitte.  Ich  habe  doch 
,  ofters  Exemplare  vom  nordlichen  Norwegen  gefunden,  die  sowohl  nach 
der  Fundstelle  als  nach  der  inneren  Organisation  zu  der  vorliegenden 
Art  gehorten,  bei  denen  aber  der  zentrale  Dorn  und  die  regelmassige 
Anordnung  der  Dornen  iiberhaupt  fehlten.  Das  einzigste  Expl.  im  Ma- 
teriale  hatte  typische  Dornenanordnung,  7  Kiemensackfalten  und  Dor- 
salfalte  mit  zungenformigen  Fortsatzen  und  ist  demnach  eine  sichere  H. 
arctica 

Die  Art  ist  frtiher  im  arktisch-amerikanischen  Archipel,  in  der  Banks- 
strasse,  von  HARTMEYER  (1903)  nachgewiesen  worden,  und  da  sie  auch 
vom  nordlichen  Europa  und  Asien  (SWEDERUS  1887)  bekannt  ist,  ist  sie 
somit  ganz  zirkumpolar. 


Halocynthia  aurantium  (PALL.) 

Syn:  Cynthia  pyriformis  (RATHKE),  Autores. 

1879,  Halocynthia     „          VERRILL,  p.  147. 

1880,  Cynthia  papillosa,  TRAUSTEDT,  p.  407. 

1903,  Halocynthia  aurantium,  HARTMEYER,  p.  195. 

Fundstelle: 

24  Juli,  1900,  Havnefjord,  85  m.  (am  Winterhafen),  1  Expl. 

Diese  arktische  Art  ist,  vvie  durch  zahlreiche  Befunde  sicher  fest- 
gestellt  worden,  zirkumpolar.  Die  sudlichste  Fundstelle  ist  an  der  Ost- 
kiiste  von  Nord-Amerika  in  der  Massachusetts  Bay  (VERRILL,  1871), 
wo  das  kalte  Wasser  vom  Norden  eine  weite  Strecke  sildwarts  dringt. 


PAUL  BJERKAN.  [2ND  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


An  der  europaischen  Seite  des  Atlantischen  Meeres  geht  sie  nicht  siid- 
licher  als  bis  Vestfjorden  in  Norwegen.  TRAUSTEDT  (1880)  hat  sie  aber 
auch  von  Island. 

Das  Exemplar  von  Havnefjord  ist  von  mittlerer  Grosse,  durch  einen 
kurzen  Stiel  an  einem  Stein  befestigt.  Die  Dornen  sind  bei  weitem  nicht 
so  regelmassig,  weder  mil  Bezug  auf  Anzahl  noch  auf  Anordnung,  wie 
man  aus  den  Beschreibungen  herausfinden  kann.  Nur  hie  und  da  wird 
man  eine  Platte  finden  mit  zentralem  Dorn,  sonst  streben  die  Dornen 
nach  aussen  ohne  ausgesprochene  Regelmassigkeit.  Dasselbe  habe  ich 
bei  Exemplaren  von  den  verschiedensten  Stellen  gefunden.  Speziell  bei 
einigen  Expl.  von  New-Foundland  im  zoologischen  Museum  der  Universi- 
tat  zu  Kristiania  habe  ich  die  Dornen  sehr  riickgebildet  gesehen.  Die 
Tiere  selbst  sind  gross  und  wohl  ausgebildet,  die  Dornen  aber  sind  klein 
und  sparlich  vertreten,  in  einer  Anzahl  von  2  auf  iecler  Platte  und 

i  J 

dariiber. 

Fam :     Styelidae. 
Styela  MAC  LEAY,  1824. 
Styela  rnstica  (L.) 

Syn:  1857,  Cynthia  rustica,  KINK,  p.  104. 

1871,        „         monoceros,  VERRIIX,  p.  93. 
.   1879,  Halocynthia  rustica,  VERRILL,  p.  147. 
1903,  Styela  „         HARTMEYER,  p.  217. 

Fundstelleh: 

12  Juli,  1901,  Bucht  bei  Landsend,  ca.  35  m.,  1  Expl. 

16  &  30  August,  1901,  Gaasefjord,  13  m.,  1  Expl.  &  8  m..  2  Expl. 

Die  Synonymic  dieser  Art  ist  etvvas  schwierig,  da  sie  sehr  oft  mit 
anderen  verwechselt  worden  ist.  Der  erste,  der  die  in  Frage  kommenden 
Arten  von  Nordwest-Europa  klar  auseinander  gehalten  bat,  ist  J.  KLER 
(1893).  HARTMEYER  (1903)  hat  seine  Resultate  bestiitigt;  da  aber  sein 
reiches  Material  aus  den  verschiedensten  Teilen  der  nordlichen  Meere 
stammle,  kamen  viele  vervvandte  Arten  hinzu,  und  er  fand  es  notwendig, 
die  von  KL*:R  unter  Styela  gestellten  Arten  auf  die  alten  Gattungen 
Styela,  Dendrodoa  und  Styelopsis  zu  verteilen.  Let/teres  scheint  mir 
auch  sehr  berechtigt  zu  sein,  doch  ist  die  Gattung  Styelopsis  moglicher- 
weise  etwas  schwach  fundiert.  Mit  Riicksicht  auf  die  vorliegende  Art 
verweise  ich  auf  die  Zusammenstellung  der  verwechselten  Arten  bei 
HARTMEYER  (1903,  p.  222).  PACKARD'S  Styela  condylomata  (1867,  p.  277) 
von  Labrador  mit  „ a  square,  truncate,  corneous  projektion  between  the  two 


1898-1902.    No.  14.1  ASCIDIEN. 


orifices,"  spater  von  VERRILL  (1871)  als  6'.  monoceres  (M0I1.)  bestimmt  wor- 
den,  ist  dieselbe  Art.  (Jberhaupt  hat  das  Horn  zwichen  den  Offnungen  den 
Verfassern  Schwierigkeiten  verursacht.  Von  den  vorliegenden  Exemplaren 
war  das  eine  aus  Gaasefjord  ohne  Horn,  hatte  aber  statt  dessen  eine 
Falte  oder  Verdickung  des  Mantels. 

Die  Art  scheint  in  den  Meeresstrassen  zwischen  Gronland  und  dein 
arktisch-amerikanischen  Archipel  sehr  haufig  zu  sein,  im  sibirischen  Eis- 
meer  ist  sie  auch  gefunden  worden  (HELLER,  1878),  wohl  aber  nicht  nord- 
lich  von  der  Beringsstrasse,  doch  muss  sie  als  zirkumpolar  charakterisiert 
werden. 

Dendrodoa  MAC  LEAY,  1824. 

Dendrodoa  cylindrica  n.  sp. 

(Fig.  1-6). 
Korper:  cylindrisch. 
Cellulose  mantel:  vorn  gerunzelt,  hinten  glatter,  aber  sch  wach  langs- 

gestreift. 

Tentakel:   etvva  16,  alternierend  von  2  (3)  Grossen. 
F 1  i m  m  e  ro  r ga  n :    hufeisenformig. 
Kiemensack:    alle    Fallen    ausgebildet,    aber  verschieden  stark,  1 

intermediares,    inneres    Langsgefass,    die    grossten  Felder  mit 

10—12  Kiemenspalten. 
Dorsalfalte:   glattrandig,  etvvas  gekraust. 
Darm:    ziemlich  lang,  Magen  knrz  mit  Blindsack,  gestreift,  links  etwa 

10  Langsstreifen. 
G  o  n  a  d  e :   4-astig. 

Fundstelle; 

12  Juli  1901,  Bucht  bei  Landsend,  ca  35  m.,  2  Expl. 

Die  beiden  vorliegenden  Exemplare  waren  an  Balanus  crenatus 
befestigt.  Das  abgebildete  Expl.  (Fig.  1)  hatte  den  Mantel  in  einen  Stiel 
verlangert,  der  etvvas  seitlich  vom  Korper  hinausging.  Die.  Befestigung 
gehtaberauch  etwas  auf  die  rechte  Seite,  ventral  iiber.  Das  andere  Expl. 
muss  irgendwie  im  Leben  eine  Wunde  bekommen  haben.  Auf  der  linken 
Seite  war  im  Mantel  ein  grosses,  rundes  Loch  mit  eingewuchertem  Rande, 
woran  der  Innenkorper  festgewachsen  war. 

Die  Form  des  Korpers  ist  kurz  cylindrisch,  wird  jedoch  durch  den 
Stiel  etwas  schief.  Die  Runzeln  am  vordersten  Teil  sind  in  der  Haupt- 
sache  peripherisch  zu  der  Ingestionsoffnung  geordnet,  und  es  ist  sehr 
wahrscheinlich,  dass  die  meisten  durch  Kontraktion  des  Tieres  hervor- 


8  PAUL    BJERKAN.  [2ND  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

gerufen  sind.  Das  andere  Expl.  ist  auch  hinten  etwas  runzlig.  Die  Lange 
der  konservierten  Tiere  ist  etwa  15  mm.  Die  Farbe  ist  in  Alkohol 
weisslichgelb,  wahrscheinlich  sind  sie  im  Leben  etwas  rotlich  gevvesen. 
Der  Cellulosemantel  ist  zahe,  aber  wenig  derb. 

Die  Muskulatur  des  Innenkorpers  ist  nur  schvvach  entwickelt, 
doch  befinden  sich  in  der  Nahe  der  Offnungen  deutliche  Langs-  und  Quer- 
ziige.  In  der  Muskulatur  sind  kleine  Kalkkorperchen  zerstreut  (Fig.  5). 
Sie  reducieren  sich  mil  Salzsaure  unter  Entwicklung  von  Kohlensaure  (?) 
Ob  sie  Exkretionsprodukte  reprasentieren,  oder  durch  Parasiten  hervor- 
gerufen  sind,  kann  ich  nicht  entscheiden.  Sie  sind  aber  nur  in  der  Mus- 
kulatur zu  finden.  Ich  habe  dergleichen  bei  der  Familie  der  Styelidae 
friiher  nicht  beobachtet. 

Die  Tentakel  sind  von  verschiedener  Grosse.  Die  Anordnuog 
scheint  an  einigen  Stellen  2,  an  anderen  3  Grossen  anzudeuten. 

Das  Flimmerorgan  hat  eingebogene  Fliigel;  die  Offnung  ist 
nach  vorn. 

Der  Kiemensack  (Fig.  4)  ist.  wohl  entwickelt.  Die  Ordnung  der 
Langsgefiisse  ist  rechts,  vorn: 

1,  (etwa  10),  1,  (7),  1,  (8),  1,  (4),  1. 

In  den  Fallen  reduciert  sich  ihre  Anzahl  nach  hinten  derart,  dass 
zum  Beispiel  die  4te  Falte,  wie  in  Figure  zu  sehen  ist,  nur  ein  Langs- 
gefass  hat.  Die  Quergefasse  zeigen  3  Ordnungen:  I— III — II— III— I 
o.  s.  v.  Die  Anzahl  der  Kiemenspalten  jedes  Feldes  ist  sehr  verschieden, 
7 — 12,  hinten  am  geringsten. 

Der  Darmkanal  (Fig.  2)  ist  stark  gebogen,  aber  nicht  geknickt. 
Der  Magen  ist  scharf  abgesetzt,  der  Blindsack  und  die  Falten  deutlich 
zu  sehen.  Die  2  obersten  Falten  gehen  langs  vom  Oesophagus  bis  zum 
Blindsack,  die  iibrigen  gehen  mehr  schrage.  Der  After  (Fig.  3)  mit  glat- 
tem,  ausgebogenem  Rande,  dorsal  eingeschnitten. 

Die   Gonade  ist  bei  beiden  Expl.  4-astig. 

Systematisches: 

HARTMEJER  (1903)  hat  die  Arten  der  arktischen  Gattung  Dendrodoa 
klar  auseinander  gelegt.  Ich  finde  mit  ihm,  dass  die  Berechtigung  der 
Gattung  trotz  HERDMANS  (1883)  und  J.  KLERS  (1893)  Beclenken  nicht 
in  Abrede  zu  stellen  ist.  Erstgenannter  unterschatzt  uberhaupt  den  Wert 
der  Geschlechtsorgane  als  systematisches  Kennzeichen  bei  der  Familie 
Styelidae.  Dendrodoa  bildet  unter  den  arktischen  Ascidien  einen  ausge- 
zeichnet  gut  begrenzten  Formenkreis,  und  die  stattliche  Anzahl  von 
8  Arten,  die  HARTMEYER  aufmarschieren  lasst,  spricht  fiir  sich  selbst. 


1898-1902.  No.  14.]  ASCIDIEN.  9 

Mil  einigem  Zweifel  stelle  ich  die  neue  Art  auf  nach  den  2  mir  vor- 
liegenden  Exemplaren.  In  mehreren  Beziehungen  sind  sie  aber  von  den 
bis  jetzt  beschriebenen  Arten  der  Gattung  so  verschieden,  dass  ich  bei 
dern  jetzigen  Stand  des  Wissens  Tiber  Variation  und  Ausbreitung  der 
Dendrodoa- Arten  sie  nicht  unter  irgend  eine  andere  anbringen  kann. 

Die  alien  Arten  D.  aggregata  und  D.  adolphi  sind  durch  mindestens 
2  intermediate  Langsgefasse  und  viel  langeren  Mageu  von  der  nenen  zu 
halten.  Die  2  Ritterschen  Arten  haben  beide  Magen  ohne  Fallen,  und 
D.  uniplicata  (BONNEVIE,  1896)  ist  durch  fortgeschrittene  Riickbildung 
der  Kiemensackfalten  und  eigentiimliche  Gonade  gekennzeichnet.  Am 
meisten  scheint  die  neue  Art  mil  D.  lineata  (TRAUSTEDT,  1880)  und 
kiikenthali  (HARTMEYER,  1899)  gemein  zu  haben.  Von  beiden  unter- 
scheidet  sie  sich  durch  die  kleine  Anzahl  der  Tentakel,  von  der  ersten 
auch  dnrch  Mangel  an  ausseren  Langsleisten  und  durch  konstanle  An- 
wesenheit  der  intermediaren  Langsgefasse,  von  der  zweiten  durch  die 
Form  des  Magens  und  Anzahl  Aste  der  Gonade.  Wenn  dazu  kommt, 
-dass  die  beiden  Alien  bis  jetzt  nur  als  Lokalformen  fur  Spitzbergen  und 
benachbarte  Gegenden  bekannt  sind,  so  finde  ich  es  zu  bedenklich,  die 
vorliegenden  Tiere  mil  irgend  welcher  dieser  Arten  zu  identificieren. 

Spatere  Befunde  werden  moglicherweise  die  Variationsgrenzen  der 
in  Frage  kommenden  Arten  nach  verschiedenen  Richtungen  bin  erweilern. 
Zur  Zeil  ist  es  aber  nicht  leicht  zu  sagen,  in  welcher  Beziehung  die 
Diagnosen  am  konstanteslen  sind. 


Styelopsis  TRAUSTEDT,  1882. 
Styelopsis  grossularia  (BENEDEN). 

Syn:    ?  1852,  Cynthia  gutta,  STIMPSON,  p.  231. 

1880,  Styela  grossularia,  TBAUSTEDT,  p.  416. 

Fundslelle: 

18  Juli  1901,  Gaasefjord, .  ca.  60  m.  (an  der  Miindung)  1.  Expl. 

Die  Art  isl  friiher  von  TRAUSTEDT  fur  Gronland  nachgewiesen  wor- 
den.  Derselbe  Verfasser  hat  spater  (1882),  wie  mir  scheint  mil  Recht, 
sie  von  Styela  ausgeschieden  und  die  neue  Gattung  Styelopsis  gebildet. 
Jedenfalls  ist  sie  eher  zur  Gattung  Dendrodoa  zu  rechnen  als  zu  Styela  1. 


1  Nachdem  dies  schon  im  Druck  ist,  bin  ich  durch  eine  mir  von  Dr.  HARTMEYER 
geschickte  Arbeit  darauf  aufmerksam  gemacht,  dass  dieser  Autor  und  Dr. 
MICHAELSEN  in  ihren  jiingsten  Arbeiten  die  vorliegende  Art  zur  Gattung  Dendrodoa 
rechnen  und  folglich  die  Gattung  Styelopsis  unterdriicken. 


10  PAUL  BJERKAN.  [2ND  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Das  Exemplar  unter  dem  Materiale  der  ,,Fram"  war  an  B.  crenatus 
befestigt,  1st  sehr  klein,  nur  3  mm.  Diameter  und  vvenig  abgeflacht,  etwa 
so  hoch  wie  breit. 

Die  Art  ist  mehr  subarktisch,  als  arktisch,  ist  jedoch  wahrscheinlich 
zirkumpolar,  da  sie  von  beiden  Seiten  gegen  das  offene  Meer  nordlich 
der  Beringsstrasse  vordringt. 

Wegen  eines  alien  Exemplares  der  Cynthia  gutta  unter  dem  fruher 
erwahnten  Materiale  im  Universitatsmuseum  zu  Kristiania  habe  ich  diese 
Art  als  fragliches  Synonym  aufgenommen.  Ich  hoffe  durch  genaue 
Untersuchung  die  Sache  entscheiden  zu  konnen.  Jedenfalls  ist  das  Exem- 
plar der  Sammlung  ein  Styelopsis,  und  da  es,  wie  es  scheint,  vori  Stimpson 
selbst  nach  Kristiania  geschickt  ist,  muss  es  ein  sicheres  Kriterium  ab- 
geben  fur  die  Stellung  der  zweifelhaften  C.  gutta.  HARTMEYER  (1903) 
hat  die  Stimpsonische  Art  als  unsicheres  Synonym  fur  D.  aggregata  (juv.) 
aufgenommen,  wahrscheinlich  auf  Grund  von  VERRILLS  Behauptung 
(1871,  p.  95),  dass  es  eine  junge  C.  carnea  sei. 

Fam :     Ascidiidae. 

Ascidia  LINNE  1767. 

Ascidia  prunum  MULL. 

(Fig.  7-8). 
Syn:  Ascidia  complanata,  Autores. 

1852,       „         callosa  STIMPSON,  p.  228. 

1872,  Asddiopsis  complanata,  VEHRILL,  p.  289. 

1903,  Ascidia  prunum,  HARTMEYER,  p.  285. 

Fundstellen: 

24  August,        1898,  Rice  Strait,  1  Expl. 
20  September,  1900,  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.  (am  Winterhafen),  Lehm 

und  Steinchen,  1  Expl. 

8    Juli,  1901,  Renbugten,  Helvedesporten,  4  Expl. 

12     „  1901,  Bucht  bei  Landsend,  ca.  65  m,  mehrere    Expl. 

18      „  1901,  Gaasefjord,  60  m.  (an  der  Mundung), 

30     „  1901,  Gaasefjord,    8    m.,    Lehm    und    Steinchen    mil 

Braunalgen,  Mehrere  Expl. 

Wie  aus  einer  frtiheren  Arbeit  (1905)  hervorgeht,  bin  ich  mit  HART- 
MEYER  von  der  Identitat  der  A.  prunum  und  complanata  uberzeugt. 
Dass  A.  callosa  STIMPS.  und  Asddiopsis  complanala  und  complanatus 
von  VERRILL,  dieselbe  Art  ist,  habe  ich  im  zoologischen  Museum  zu  Kri- 
stiania Gelegenheit  gehabt,  zu  konstatieren.  Dort  befinden  sich  namlich 


1898-1902.  No.  14.] ASCIDIEN.  _11 

Stimpsonische  Exemplare  der  A.  callosa,  nebst  Expl.  der  Ascidiopsis 
complanata,  die  dem  Museum  durch  die  U.  S.  Fish.  Commission  zuge- 
gangen  sind,  und  diese  stimmen  ganz  mil  der  vorliegenden  Art  (iberein. 
Der  spezielle  Bau  des  Kiemensackes,  der  VERRILL  zur  Aufstellung  der 
neuen  Gattung  bewogen  hat,  ist  von  ihm  (1.  c.  fig.  8)  abgebildet  worden. 
Man  kann  diesen  aber  bei  jedem  erwachsenen  Tier  finden,  wenn  man 
den  Kiemensack  von  aussen  ansieht. 

Unter  dem  Materiale  der  ,,Fram"  befanden  sich  viele  Exemplare  der 
Art;  oft  waren  sie  aggregiert.  Die  grossten  sind  bis  9  cm.  lang  bei  einer 
Breite  von  6  cm.  An  B.  crenatus  waren  oft  sehr  kleine  Expl.,  nur  bis 
5  mm.  lang,  befestigt.  Bemerkenswert  ist  bei  den  grosseren  Tieren  die 
enorme  Entwicklung  des  Darmes.  Oft  war  die  ganze  linke  Seite  des 
Innenkorpers  davon  eingenommen.  Zwischen  dieser  Extremitat  und  der 
gewohnlichen  Grosse  des  Darmes  waren  die  schonsten  Ubergange  zu 
finden. 

Man  findet  bei  den  verschiedenen  Verfassern  die  Anzahl  der  Kiemen- 
spalten  jedes  Feldes  fur  eine  und  dieselbe  Art  verschieden  angegeben. 
So  hat  HARTMEYER  (1903,  p.  286)  fur  A.  prunum  5—7  (—12)  Spalten 
als  Norm  herausgefunden.  Es  zeigt  sich  bei  meinem  Materiale,  dass 
man  von  den  verschiedenen  Stellen  des  Kiemensackes  sehr  verschiedene 
Zahlen  erhalten  kann.  Nach  der  Grosse  des  Tieres  sind  auf  der  rechten 
Seite,  vorn  (Fig.  7)  2—12,  auf  der  linken  Seite,  hinten  (Fig.  8)  5—24 
Kiemenspalten  in  jedem  Felde  zu  finden.  Dieselben  Verhaltnisse  habe 
ich  auch  bei  anderen  Arten  bemerkt.  Ist  dies  konstant,  so  ist  es 
bemerkenswert.  Man  darf  behaupten,  dass  es  eine  Anpassung  ist,  um 
gleich  schnellen  Ablaut'  des  Kiemenwassers  auf  jeder  Seite  zu  bewerk- 
stelligen.  Speziell,  wenn  der  Darmkanal  und  die  Geschlechtsorgane  sehr 
entwickelt  sind,  mussen  sie  die  Peribranchialhohle  der  linken  Seite  be- 
deutend  verengern  und  das  Durchfliessen  des  Wassers  durch  die  Kiemen- 
spalten in  hohem  Grade  hemmen. 


12  PAUL  BJERKAN.     ASCIDIEN. 


Liste  der  citierten  Ascidien-Literatur. 


1905,  BJERKAN,  P.,    Ascidien    von    ,,M.  Sars"  1900—04  gesamraelt  (Bergens    Museums 

Aarb.  1905,  5). 
1893,  BONNEVIE,  K.,  Ascidiae  simplices  and  Ascidia?  composite.     (Norske  Nordh.  Exp. 

1876-78,  v.  VII,  2). 
1899,  HARTMEYER,  R.,  Monascidien  der  Bremer-Exp.  nach  Ostspitzbergen  1889.    (Zool. 

Jahrb.  Syst,  v.  XII). 
1903,       —  Die  Ascidien  der  Arktis  (Fauna  arctica,  v.  Ill,  2). 

1878.  HELLER,  C.  Die  Crustaceen,  Pycnogoniden  und  Tunicaten  der  6st.-ung.  Nordpol- 

Exp.  (Denksehr.  Ak.-Wien,  v.  35). 
1883,  HERDMAN,  W.  A.,  Report  on  the  Tunicata  of  H.  M.  S.  ,,Challenger"  1873-76,  I. 

(Rep.  Voy.  Challenger,  v.  VI). 
1893,  KI.-ER,  J,  Oversigt  over  Norges  Ascidiae  simplices.     (Forh.  Vid-Selsk.   Kristiania 

1893,  9). 
1867,  PACKARD,  A.  S.,  On  the   recent    Inverterbrate   Fauna   of  Labrador.     (M.  Boston 

Soc.,  v.  I). 

1857,  RINK,  H.,  GrOnlands  sjOpunge.  (Nat.  Tillaeg  geogr.  og  stat.  Beskr.  GrOnland,  v.  II). 
1852,  STIMPSON,  W.,  Some    remarks    of  Ascidians    found  in  Mass.     Bay.     (P.  Boston 

Soc.,  v.  IV). 
1887,  SWEDERUS,  M.  B.,   Tunica ter   fran    Sibiriens  Ishaf  och  Beringshaf.     (Vega  Exp. 

v.  IV). 
1880,  TRAUSTEDT,  M    P.  A.,  Oversigt  over  de  fra  Danmark  og  nordl.  Bilande  kjendte 

Ascidiae  simplices.     (Medd.  Vid.  Foren.  1879 — 80). 
1882,  Vestindiske    Ascidiee    simplices,    I.     (Medd.    Vid.  Foren.  1881-82). 

1871,  VERRILL,  A.  E.,  Description  of  some  imperfectly  known  and  new  Ascidians  from 

New  England.     (Am.  Journ.     Sc.  &  Arts,  ser.  Ill,  v.  2). 

1872,  —         Molluscan   Fauna    of   New  England.     (Am.    Journ.     Sc.  &   Arts,    ser. 

Ill,  v.  3). 

1879,  -        Molluscoids.    (Bui.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,   15). 


Tafelerklarung. 


Fig.  1—6.  Dendrodoa  cylindrical  n.  sp. 

1.  Das  ganze  Tier  von  links  gesehen  (-}•). 

2.  InnenkOrper  „         „  „        $). 

3.  After  (?). 

4.  Teil  des  Kiemensackes  von  innen  gesehen  (V). 

5.  EigenUimliches  Kalkkfirperchen  von  der  Muskulatnr  (3|-6). 

6.  Gonade  (?). 

Fig.  7—8.  Ascidia  prunum. 

7.  Teil  des  Kiemensackes  der  rechten  Seite,  von  innen  gesehen 

8.  Teil  des  Kiemensackes  der  linken  Seite,  von  innen  gesehen 


Gedruckt  2.  Marz  1908. 


He1,.<)f(lH-l.""lXorvvt..;..AI-H.I'i1),.(l.iiillieFrciii!  IM'U!    IMOL'.Xo.  ] 'i . 


Taf.  I. 


Paul  Bjerkan 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  15. 


HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN: 

ANNULATA   POLYCHAETA 


AT   THE    EXPENCE    OF    THE   FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT   OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


-ooo- 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1909 


_t5ei  den  von  ,,Fram"  eingesammelten  polychaeten  Chaetopoden 
k  nil  pit  sich  das  Interesse  in  erster  Reihe  an  die  Formen,  von  welchen 
eine  grosse  Anzahl  erbeutet  worden  ist,  und  an  die  Aufschliisse  ilber 
deren  Variieren  und  Biologic,  die  man  hierdurch  gewinnt.  Ich  will  in 
dieser  Beziehung  die  beiden  einander  nahestehende  Species  Harmothoe 
imbricata  (L.)  und  Harmothoe  rarispina  SARS  nennen,  auf  deren  gegen- 
seitige  Verwandtschaftsverhaltnisse  neues  Licht  geworfen  wird.  Nicht 
weniger  interessant  sind  einige  eigentilmliche  Individuen  von  Dasychone 
infarcta.  Ubrigens  ist  aber  die  Zahl  der  erbeuteten  Arten  keine  geringe, 
in  allem  betragt  sie  44.  Und  selbst  wenn  unter  ihnen  keine  fur  die 
Wissenschaft  neue  Formen  sicb  finden,  gibt  es  doch  mehrere  sellene 
und  weniger  haufig  vorkommende  Formen;  von  solchen  will  ich  bier 
nur  die  grossen,  schonen  Individuen  von  Melcenis  Loveni  MALMGREN  - 
in  dem  Gansefjord  erbeutet  -  -  nennen  und  ein  Exemplar  von  Ana'iiis 
Wahlbergi  MALMGREN,  welches  an  Grosse  die  von  MALMGREN  erwahnten 
spitzbergischen  Individuen  ubertrifft  und  das  auch  in  Beziehung  zur 
Form  der  Borsten  etwas  von  diesen  abvveicht. 


HJALMAR  D1TLEVSEN.  [.SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


Polynoidse. 
Nychia  ci'rrosa  PALL. 

1865.     MALMGREN:  Overs,  af  Kgl.  Vet.  Akad.  Forh.  p.  58. 

Lokali  tat: 

Aug.        4.     1898.  Upernivik  20  Mt. 

Juli        21.     1899.  Der  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord  16  Mt. 

Aug.        4.     1900.  Der  Tintenfisch-Grund  20—30  Mt. 

Aug.        8.     1900.  Der  Winterhafen  c.  30  Mt. 

Septbr.  20.     1900.  Der  Winterhafen,    Havnefjord  9-40  Mt.     Lehm  und 

Steinchen. 

Juli         12.     1901.  Die  Bucht  bei  Landsend. 

Ein    Teil    der   vorliegenden    Exemplare   weicht  etwas  von  der  typi- 
schen  Form  ab,   dadurch,  dass  die  Skulptur  der  Oberflache   der  Elytren 
im  ganzen  mehr  robust  1st;    sie  scheinen   in  der  Beziehung  mil  einigen 
nordgronlandischen    Formen,   von    MOORE  1    erwahnt,  iibereinzustiminen. 
MOORE  erwahnt   dies  Verhaltnis  in   folgender  Weise:    rThe   elytra   are 
rougher  than  those  figured   by  MALMGREN  and  M'!NTOSH,  the  numerous 
papillaB    being    rough,    horny,    and    spinous   of  the  tip.     The  specimens 
from    Gape   York   are  covered    with    wochreous  deposit"    mentioned   by 
M'INTOSH,  which  appears  to  be  derived  from  the  bottom  soil".     Ebenso 
sind    mehrere    von    nFram's"    Exemplare    mit  einem   solchen  ,,ochreous 
deposit"  bedeckt,  welches  sich  in  reichlicher  Menge  in  den  verzweigten  Aus- 
wuchsen    hauft,    die   die  Oberflache  des  Elytrons  bei  dieser  Art  charak- 
terisieren.      Eins    der    Individuen    wurde   in  einem   aus   kleinen  Steinen 
gebauten  Rohrchen  gefunden,  wahrscheinlich  einem  Telepus  circinnatus 
oder  einer  Scione  lobata  gehorig;    es  ist  scheinbar  langlicher  und  von 
schlankerer   Form    als    die    ubrigen;    wahrscheinlich    hat   ihn    der  enge 
Raum  in  dem  Rohrchen  gehindert,   sich   bei  der  Konservierung  so  sehr 
zusammenzuziehen,  wie  sonst  geschehen  ware. 


1  Proc.  of  the  Acad.  of  Nat.  Sc.  of  Philadelphia  1902,  p.  259. 


1898-1902.   No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA. 


Harmothoe  nodosa  (SARS). 

18G5.  Ennoe  Orstedi:  MAI.MGREN  1.  c.  p.  01. 
1865.  Ennoe  nodosa:  MALMGREN  1.  c.  p.  64-. 
1879.  Polynoe  scabra:  THEEL,  K.  Sv.  Vet.  Akad.  Handl.  Vol.  XVI  p.  7. 

Lokali  tat: 

Aug.    4.     1900.     Landspitze  der  Seewalzen  30—50  Mt.     Steinchen. 
Juni  26.     1901.     Gegentiber  dem  Zeltplatz. 
Juli      8.     1901.     Renntier-Bucht. 
Juli    15.     1902.     Dem  Havhestefjeld  gegeniiber. 

Diese  Form  scheint  sehr  zu  variieren,  und  es  1st  verstandlich,  dass 
sie  die  Bildung  mehrerer  Arten  veranlasst  hat.  Unter  den  von  ,,Frama 
mitgebrachten  Exemplaren  sind  -  -  ein  kleines  Individuum  ausgenom- 
men,  welches  nur  noch  wenig  entwickelt  ist  —  augerischeinlich  drei 
verschiedene  Typen.  Bezuglich  der  Grosse  ubeitreffen  die  Individuen 
von  der  Seewalzenspitze  weit  die  iibrigen;  das  grosste  davon  misst  in 
der  Lange  90  mm.,  in  der  Breite"  (mil  den  Borsten)  38  mm.,  und  scheint 
am  nachsten  mit  dem  von  WIREN  1  erwahnten  ersteren  Typus  ilberein- 
zustimmen,  welcher  mit  Polynoe  nodosa  SARS  identisch  sein  sollte. 
Das  Exemplar  von  der  Renntier-Bucht  entspricht  am  nachsten  dem 
Typus  4  von  WIREN,  wahrend  das  vor  dem  Zeltplatze  entnommene 
Exemplar  dem  Typus  2  desselben  Verfassers  ahnlich  ist,  oder  vielleicht 
vielmehr  einer  Zwischenform  zwischen  Typus  1  und  2. 

Harmothoe  badia  THEEL. 

1878.     Kgl.  Sv.  Vet.  Akad.  Handl.  Vol.  XVI.  p.  18. 

Wahrend  H.  Sarsi  ganzlich  fehlt,  findet  man  diese  Art  in  zwei 
Exemplaren,  beide  von  dem  Giinsefjord,  eins  im  September  20,  1900, 
das  andere  ein  Jahr  nachher,  Aug.  8,  1901,  erbeutet.  Das  grosste  Expl. 
misst  in  der  Lange  c.  55  mm.,  das  kleinere  c.  45  mm. 

Harmothoe  rarispina  (SARS). 

1860.     Polynoe  rarispina,  SARS:   Forh.  Vidensk.  Selsk.  Christiania  1860,  p.  60. 
1865.     Lagisca  rarispina,  MALMGREN  1.  c.  p.  65. 

L  o  k  a  I  i  t  a  t : 

Septbr.  19.     1900.  Vor  dem  Verbannungsthale  4—40  Mt. 

Septbr.  20.     1900.  Gansefjord  6-40  Mt.  Lehm  und  Steinchen. 

Juli  9.     1901.  Die  Renbucht 

Juli         18.     1901.  Die   Mundung   des   Gansefjords  2-4  Mt.    Lehm  und 

Steinchen. 

Aug.         2.     1901.  Ganz  hinten  in  dem  Gansefjord. 

Aug.       30.     1901.  Gansefjord  8  Mt.     Lehm  und  Steinchen. 


1   WIREN:    Vega-Exp.  vetenskapl.  lakttagels.  II.  1883,  p.  388. 


HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


Wie  bekannt  machte  MALMGREN  sein  Gattung  Lagisca  u.  a.  davon 
abhangig,  dass  der  hintere  Teil  des  Riickens  nicht  von  den  Elytren 
bedeckt  wird:  ndorsum  totum,  segmentis  circiter  X  ultimis  exceptis,  tegen- 
tia",  1.  c.  p.  65.  Spatere  Verfasser  scheinen  doch  nicht  die  Berechti- 
gung  dieses  Gattung  anzuerkennen :  WIREN  (1.  c.  p.  389)  und  THEEL 
(1.  c.  p.  8)  fuhren  es  unter  dem  Geschlechtsnamen  Polynoe  ein,  andere, 
z.  B.  LEVINSEN  1  unter  dem  Geschlechtsnamen  Harmothoe.  LEVINSEN, 
dessen  Systematik  ich  in  dieser  Beziehung  folge,  schreibt  1.  c.  p.  29: 
wUm  iiber  die  Verwirrung  und  Ungewissheit  hinauszukomrnen,  die 
augenblicklich  in  der  Systematik  dieser  Formen  herrscht,  schlage  ich 
vor,  bei  der  Geschlechtsbegrenzung  besonders  Gewicht  auf  die  Formen 
der  Ruckenborsten  zu  legen,  die  im  Gegensatz  zu  den  Bauchborsten  eine 
sehr  geringe  oder  fast  keine  Variation  darbieten,  weder  bei  dem  einzelnen 
Individ  noch  bei  Gruppen  verwandter  Arten.  So  sind  die  Ruckenborsten 
wesentlich  vom  selben  Bau  bei  alien  Formen,  die  zu  den  Geschlechtern 
Harmothoe,  Evarne,  Antinoe,  Lcenilla,  Lagisca,  Ennoe,  Parinenis 
und  Eucrante  gerechnet  werden,  kurz  bei  all  den  Geschlechtern,  die 
weder  durch  die  Form  der  Borsten  noch  das  Verhaltnis  der  Riicken- 
platten  scharf  auseinander  zu  halten  sind.  Fiir  dies  so  durch  eine 
Zusammenschmelzung  der  eben  genannten  8  Geschlechtern  gebildete 
Geschlecht  schlage  ich  vor  den  Namen  Harmothoe  zu  behalten,  da  der 
Name  Polynoe  fur  Polynoe  scolopendrina  beizubehalten  ist,  welcher 
mil  der  Beschreibung  SAVIGNYS  zu  slimmen  scheint".2 

Bezuglich  der  vorliegenden  Art  werde  ich  nun  gleich  bemerken, 
dass  ich  den  Charakter  mil  den  hinteren  von  den  Elytren  unbedeckten 
Ringen  nicht  konstant  finde,  indem  unter  den  von  nFram"  mitgebrachten 
Exemplaren  iibrigens  typische  Individuen  sich  finden,  wo  der  Riicken 
in  seiner  ganzen  Lange  bedeckt  ist,  ganz  wie  bei  der  folgenden  Art. 
Auch  in  Bezug  auf  die  auf  den  Elytren  sitzenden  Korperchen  wechselt 
die  Art,  eine  Tatsache,  welche  auch  von  WIREN  erortert  ist,  der 
schreibt:  1.  c.  p.  389:  whvilka  afvika  fran  den  vanliga  formen  derut- 
innan,  att  fjallens  taggar  fran  smal  bas  blifva  betydligt  tjockare  mot 
midten,  t.  o.  m.  aggformiga".  Unter  den  Exemplaren  ,,Frams"  finde 
ich  einen  ganz  allmahlichen  Ubergang  von  solchen  Korperchen  auf  den 
Elytren,  die  fur  die  Art  rarispina  typisch  sind,  zu  solchen,  die  bei  der 
Art  imbricata  gevvohnlich  und  fur  dieselbe  typisch  sind.  Ich  habe 
deshalb  in  meiner  Bestimmung  der  in  der  nFramsammlung"  vorliegen- 


1  LEVINSEN:    Systematisk,  geografisk  Oversigt  over  de  nordiske  Annulata,    Gephy- 
rea,  Cheetognathi  og  Balanoglossi,  Kebenhavn  1883. 

2  Von  dem  Verfasser  dieser  Abhandlung  in's  Deutsche  ubersetzt. 


1898-1902.   No.  15.1  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.' 

den  Exemplare,  nur  die  Formen  zu  H.  rarispina  hinzugerechnet, 
deren  Korperchen  auf  den  Ruckenplatten  dem  Ausdruck  MALMGRENS: 
,,spinis,  raris  brunneis,  elongato  fusiformibus  aut  eylindricis"  entsprechen. 

Harmothoe  imbricata,  (L.). 

1865.    MALMGREN  1.  c.  p.  66. 

L  o  k  a  1  i  t  a  t : 

Aug.       16.  1898.  Reindeer  Point,  Foulke  Fjord  4-20  Mt. 

Aug.       18.  1898.  Camp  Clay.     Cap  Sabine  4-10  Mt. 

Aug.      24.  1898.  Rice  Strait. 

Juli        21.  1899.  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord  16  Mt. 

Juli        29.  1899.  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord  12  Mt. 

Juli        22.  1900.  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord  c.  60  Mt. 

Juli        23.  1900.  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord  c.  40  Mt. 

Juli        25.  1900.  Winterhafen,  Havnefjord. 

Juli        30.  1900.  Miindung  des  Grosstals. 

Juli        31.  1900.  Gegend  von  Vestersund. 

Aug.        3.  1900.  Fosheims    Peak    und   das   Tal   an  der  Wcstseite  des 

Fjords  4—40  Mt. 

Aug.        4.  1900.  Tintenfisch-Grund  30-40  Mt. 

Septbr.  19.  1900.  Vor  dem  Verbannungstale  4-20  Mt. 

Septbr.  20.  1900.  Boden  des  Gansefjords  6-40  Mt. 

Juli         12.  1901.  Bucht  bei  Landsend. 

Aug.      30.  1901.  Gansefjord  c.  8  Mt. 

Juli         15.  1902.  Havhestefjeld  gegeniiber. 

Juli         17.  1902.  Ostlich  von  dem  grossen  Gletscher,  North  Devon 

c.  6  Mt. 

Aug.         4.  1902.  Gansefjord,  nordlich  von  der  Halbinsel  20-40  Mt. 

Unter  den  vielen  vorliegenden  Exemplaren  dieser  Art  finden  sich 
verschiedene  Varietaten  in  Bezug  auf  Form,  Grosse  und  nicht  am 
wenigsten  in  Bezug  auf  das  Verhaltnis  der  Ruckenplatten.  Die  Bemer- 
kungen  MOORE'S  I.  c.  p.  270  tiber  einige  nordgronlandische  Individuen 
gelten  in  dieser  Beziehung  auch  fur  die  von  ,,Fram"  eingesammelten : 
,,The  elytra  vary  from  those  without  any  trace  either  of  horny  papillae 
or  soft  marginal  papillae  to  very  rough  ones  with  numerous  hard  promi- 
nences easily  visible  under  a  magnification  of  five  diameters  -  — ". 
Und  wie  ich  in  der  Erwahnung  der  vorhergehenden  Art  bemerkt 
habe  -  was  die  grosseren  Korper  auf  den  Elytren  betrifft,  findet  man 
einen  vollstandig  allmahlichen  Ubergang  von  den  tranenformigen  oder 
fast  kugelformigen,  die  fur  diese  Art  charakteristisch  sind,  zu  den 
langen,  cylindrischen  bei  H.  rarispina.  Es  gibt  in  Fram's  Material 
Individuen,  die  man  --  nach  der  Form  dieser  Korperchen  --  ebensogut 
zu  rarispina  als  zu  imbricata  rechnen  kann  (Fig.  4).  Die  Form 
der  Korper  des  in  Fig.  1  abgebildeten  Elytron  muss  man  wohl  am 
besten  als  typisch  fur  H.  imbricata  betrachten,  wahrend  Figg.  2  u.  3 


8  HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

dem  rarispina  entspricht;  bei  Fig.  2  haben  die  Korperchen  die  Form, 
welche  MALMGREN  mit  dem  Ausdruck  ,,fusiforme"  bezeichnet.  Wie  man 
sehen  wird,  liegen  die  in  Fig.  4  abgebildeten  Korperchen  so  zu  sagen 
gerade  dazwischen  und  entsprechen  wahrscheinlich  denen,  die  WIREN, 
(1.  c.  p.  389)  einige  sibirische  rarispina-Formen  betreffend,  erwahnt. 
Es  wird  sich  also  schwierig  --  wenn  nicht  etwa  unmoglich  zeigen,  die 
Form  dieser  Korperchen  als  entscheidendes  Artkennzeichen  zu  benutzen. 
Noch  mehr  iiberzeugt  hiervon  wird  man  durch  die  nahere  Betrachtung 
des  Aussehens  dieser  Korperchen:  Untersucht  man  sie  bei  starkerer 
Vergrosserung,  kommt  man  namlich  zu  dem  Ergebnis,  dass  die  grossen 
Korper  durch  Hypertrophie  von  den  kleinen,  mikroskopischen  Korperchen 
gebildet  scheinen.  Fig.  5  stellt  ein  kleines  Stuck  von  einem  Elytron 
eines  H.  imbricata  dar,  125  mal  vergrossert.  Man  sieht  hier  die 
kleinen  mikroskopischen  Korperchen,  dornenahnlich,  mit  einer  stumpfen 
Spitze,  ein  wenig  schief  dreieckig  im  optischen  Durchschnitt,  gegen  die 
Flache  des  Elytrons  schrag  gestellt.  Zwar  sieht  man  von  ihrer  Struktur 
nicht  viel,  doch  findet  man  eine  deutliche,  recht  dicke,  homogen  aus- 
sehende  Hautschicht  —  moglicher  Weise  eine  Cuticula  um  einen  inneren 
Hohlraum,  der  mit  einer  structurlosen  und  farblosen  Masse  gefullt 
scheint,  Zellen  werden  nicht  unterschieden ;  und  eine  absolute  Entschei- 
dung  des  Baues  dieser  Korperchen  wird  kaum  zu  erlangen  sein  ausser 
durch  histologische  Untersuchung  von  Schnittpraparaten,  aber  hierzu 
ware  ein  in  dieser  Hinsicht  konserviertes  Material  notig.  Betrachten 
wir  einen  der  grosseren  Korper,  so  sehen  wir,  dass  dieser  mit  der- 
selben  strukturlosen  klaren  Hautschicht  bedeckt  ist,  wie  die  kleinen, 
mikroskopischen  Korper,  aber  das  innere  sehen  wir  mit  einer  braun- 
lichen  Masse  gefullt,  die  gegen  das  aussere  des  Korpers  mit  eigen- 
tumlichen,  schuppenfOrmigen  Flecken  hervortritt.  Diesen  Bau  sieht  man 
iiberall  bei  den  grosseren  Korpern,  unangesehen  welche  Form  diese  im 
iibrigen  haben.  Betrachtet  man  nun  die  kleinen  Korper,  so  sieht  man, 
dass  einzelne  von  diesen,  innerhalb  der  homogen  aussehenden  Haut- 
schicht, an  der  Spitze  dunkelbraun  werden,  die  dunkle  Farbe  breitet 
sich  nach  und  nach  abwarts  gegen  die  Basis,  iiber  den  Inhalt  des  ganzen 
Korpers  aus,  wahrend  dieser  gleichzeitig  die  obenerwahnte  gefleckte  Zeich- 
nung,  die  bei  den  grosseren  Korpern  zu  sehen  ist,  zu  zeigen  anfangt; 
jetzt  fangt  der  kleine  Korper  zu  wachsen  an ;  er  wird  dick  an  der  Spitze, 
nach  und  nach  tranen-  oder  spindelformig,  oder  er  entwickelt  sich  zu 
einem  langen,  cylindrischen  Pflock,  wie  bei  H.  rarispina.  Auf  Fig.  5 
sind  mehrere  dieser  Stadien  zu  sehen,  und  fallt  einem  erst  mal  das 
Geschilderte  auf,  so  scheint  es  ganz  ohne  Zweifel,  dass  die  grossen  und 


1898-1902.   No.  15]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA. 


grosseren  Knolen  durcli  Hypertrophie  von  einzelnen  kleinen,  mikrosko- 
pischen  Korpern  gebildet  sind.  Was  diese  Hypertrophie  verursacht,  ist 
natiirlich  nicht  leicht  zu  sagen,  der  Gedanke,  das  konne  etwas  patolo- 
gisches,  vielleicht  parasitisches  sein,  liegt  ja  nahe;  das  ist  darum 
interessant,  da  dann  diese  Knoten  und  Pflficke  wenn  meine 

Auffassung  die  richtige  ist  --  also  wohl  ohne  systematische  Bedeutung 
sein  werden.  Eine  weitere  Beobachtung,  welche  bei  dieser  Auffassung 
auch  verstandlich  wird,  ist  das  ganz  launenhafte  Auftreten  dieser  erwahnten 
Korper:  Man  trifft  Individuen,  denen  sie  ganzlich  fehlen,  man  trifft 
Individuen  mit  einzelnen  oder  wenigen  KQrpern  zerstreut  auf  der  Ober- 
flache  des  Elytrons,  und  man  trifft  einen  Teil  dieser  Oberflache  ganz 
dicht  mit  ihnen  besaet.  Sie  scheinen  immer  nahe  am  Rande  des  Ely- 
trons am  dichtesten  zu  sitzen,  und  scheinen  auf  demjenigen  Teil  des 
Elytrons,  der  von  dem  vorangehenden  gedeckt  wird,  gar  nicht  —  oder 
wenigstens  ausserst  sparsam  zu  finden  zu  sein.  Sind  es  Parasiten, 
die  durch  Invasion  in  die  mikroskopischen  Korper  dieselben  zur  Hyper- 
trophie bringen,  so  kann  man  sich  jnsehr  wohl  denken,  dass  die  verschie- 
dene  Form  der  Geschwiire  durch  mehrfache  Arten  von  einander  nahe- 
stehender,  parasitischer  Formen  verursacht  ist.  Aber  deshalb  brauchen 
die  Wirttiere  ja  nicht  von  verschiedener  Art  zu  sein.  Soweit  ich  sehen 
kann,  konnen  die  Borsten  auch  nicht  als  konstante  Artscharaktere 
zwischen  H.  imbricata  und  H.  rarispina  benutzt  werden.  Die  Figg. 
1  a  und  1  b  stellen  zwei  Bauchborsten  desselben  Individuums  dar,  dessen 
Elytron  von  Fig.  1  genommen  wird.  Wie  man  sehen  wird,  hat  das 
eine  (Fig.  1  a)  einen  Zahn  unter  der  Spitze,  das  andere  keinen.  Die 
etwas  verschiedene  Form  riihrt  von  dem  verschiedenen  Platze,  den  die 
zwei  Borsten  in  dem  Paropodium  gehabt  haben,  her:  Die  in  Fig.  Ib 
abgebildete  Borste,  deren  aussere,  breite  Teil  verhaltnismassig  kurzer 
und  scharfer  abgesetzt  von  dem  Schafte  ist,  hat  ganz  ventral  gesessen, 
wahrend  Fig.  1  a  eine  Borste  darstellt,  die  dem  Riickenbund  am  nachsten 
gesessen  hat.  Die  Fig.  2  a  und  2  b  entsprechen  dem  Riickenblatt,  wovon 
ein  Teil  in  Fig.  2  abgebildet  ist,  also  eine  Rarispina-Form  mit  spindel- 
formigen  Korpern.  Keine  der  zwei  Borsten  ist  wesentlich  von  denen 
in  Fig.  1  a  und  1  b  abgebildeten  verschieden;  beide  haben  einen  Zahn 
unter  der  Spitze,  in  Fig.  2  a  ist  er  sehr  abgeniitzt,  doch  immer  noch 
deutlich.  Fig.  3  a  und  3b  gehoren  demselben  Individuum  an,  welchem 
das  Elytron,  von  dem  ein  Teil  in  Fig.  3  abgebildet  ist,  gehort.  Auch 
diese  variieren  nicht  nennenswert.  Fig.  3  b  hat  keinen  Zahn  unter  der 
Spitze,  aber  wie  wir  gesehen  haben,  trifft  man  auch  Borsten  ohne  Zahn 
bei  typischen  H.  imbricata-Yormen.  Endlich  stellen  Figg.  4  a  und  4b 


10  HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Bauchborsten  dar  von  einem  Individuum,  welches,  vvie  aus  Fig.  4 
zu  sehen  ist,  in  Bezug  auf  das  Verhaltnis  der  Korper,  eine  Zwischen- 
form  zwischen  den  typischen  H.  rarispina  und  H.  imbricata  bildet; 
auch  diese  Borsten  zeigen  ganz  dieselbe  Form.  -  -  Ich  werde  noch  hinzu- 
ftigen,  dass  MOORE  (1.  c.  p.  269)  meint,  in  der  Stellung  des  vorderen 
Augenpaares  ein  fur  H,  rarispina  charakteristisches  Artkennzeichen 
gefunden  zu  haben.  Er  schreibt:  nThe  anterior  pair  of  eyes  is  borne 
on  the  anterior  face  of  prominently  outstanding  lobes,  which  give  to 
the  head  a  very  characteristic  form  not  shown  in  any  of  the  published 
figures.  These  ocular  lobes  are  situated  slightly  posterior  to  the  middle 
of  the  head,  which  is  very  much  narrower  anterior  than  posterior  of 
them".  Doch  auch  diesen  Charakter  finde  ich  nicht  konstant.  Erstens 
scheinen  die  erwahnten  nocular  lobes"  bei  den  verschiedenen  Individuen 
an  Grosse  ziemlich  viel  zu  variieren,  ebenso  wie  die  Stellung  der  Augen 
(des  vorderen  Augenpaares)  auch  nicht  immer  ganz  dieselbe  ist  im  Ver- 
haltnis zu  diesen  „ lobes":  Sie  konnen  ganz  dorsal  sitzen,  aber  auch 
etwas  gegen  die  Seite  des  Kopfes  hin,  ferner  konnen  sie  der  Spitze  des 
erwahnten  Vorsprunges  naher  oder  ferner  sitzen,  was  vielleicht  von  den 
verschiedenen  Zusammenziehungsverhaltnissen  der  verschiedenen  Indi- 
viduen herriihren  mag.  Doch  zuletzt  finde  ich  ganz  ahnliche  Vorspri'mge 
bei  H.  imbricata.  Es  wird  somit  meiner  Ansicht  nach  kaum  weiteres 
zu  tun  sein,  als  zukunftig  die  zwei  Formen  H.  rarispina  (SARS)  und 
H.  imbricata  (L.)  unter  dem  Namen  H.  imbricata  (L.)  zu  vereinen, 
indem  H.  rarispina  kaum  noch  als  Varietat  zu  behaupten  sein  wird. 


Melsenis  Loveni  MGRN. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  J.  c.  p.  78. 
1883.    WIREN,  1.  c.  p.  391. 

Lokalitftt: 

Septbr.  19.     1900.     Vor  dem  Verbannungstale  4-40  Mt. 
Septbr.  20.     1900.     Gfinsefjord  6-40  Mt.     Lehm  und  Steinchen. 

Die  vorliegenden  Individuen  sind  typische  Formen  und  stimmen 
genau  mit  der  Beschreibung  MALMGREN'S  uberein,  jedoch  mit  derselben 
Einschrankung,  die  WIREN  fur  die  typischen  Exemplare  der  Vega- 
expedition  anfuhrt,  namlich  dass  die  3  letzten  Ringe  von  den  Rucken- 
platten  unbedeckt  sind.  Das  grosste  Exemplar  hat  eine  Lange  von 
73  mm.,  das  kleinste  von  c.  60  mm. 


1898-1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  11 

Sigalionidse. 

Pholoe  minuta  (FABR.). 

1865.     MALMGREN,  J.  c.  p.  89. 

Es  liegt  nur  ein  ganz  kleines  Individuum  von  etwa  5  mm.  Lange 
vor;  es  ist  im  Aug.  26,  1898,  erbeutet,  ist  aber  mil  keiner  Lokalitat 
bezeichnet.  Nach  dem  Zeitpunkt,  wann  es  genommen  ist,  stammt  es 
von  einer  Stelle  in  Smiths  Sund,  wahrscheinlich  von  Rice  Strait  oder 
da  in  der  Nahe. 

Phyllodocidse. 
Phyllodoce  maculata  (L.). 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  94-98. 
1883.    LEVINSEN,  1.  c.  p.  48. 

Lokalitat: 

Aug.     1.     1900.     Mundung  des  Grosstals  4-60  Mt. 
Juli     19.     1901.     Gansefjord. 
Aug.  16.     1901.     Gansefjord  c.  15  Mt. 

Aug.     2.     1902.     Ganz  hinten  im  Gansefjord  2— 4Mt.  LehmundSteinchen. 
Aug.     4.     1902.     Gansefjord,  Nordlich  von  der  Halbinsel  20-30  Mt. 

Die  vorliegenden  Individuen  sind  durchgehend  klein ;  das  kleinste 
misst  nur  c.  60  mm.  in  der  Lange.  Eins  davon  zeigt  recht  sonderbare 
Verhaltnisse,  namlich  dasjenige  von  der  Mundung  des  grossen  Tales:  es 
misst  in  der  Lange  275  mm.,  und  darf  also  sehr  lang  genannt  werden ; 
und  es  zahlt  c.  350  Segmente;  der  hintere  Teil  macht  den  Eindruck 
regeneriert  zu  sein,  und  die  letzten  Segmente  hier  sind  schwierig  genau 
zu  zahlen;  aber  dieser  Lange  entspricht  keine  verhaltnissmassige  Dicke, 
indem  die  Breite  des  Thieres  nicht  mehr  als  4  mm.  misst.  Sonst  scheint 
nichts  merkwiirdiges  an  seinen  Bau  zu  sein.  Die  Papillen  des  Russels 
sind  wie  bei  den  iibrigen  Individuen,  in  Bezug  auf  Form,  Grosse  und 
Arrangement;  die  Verhaltnisse  des  Parapodiums  bieten  auch  nichts 
Merkwiirdiges. 

Eteone  cylindrica  0RST. 

1843.     0RSTED:  Gronl.  Anniilata  dorsibrandriata,    Kgl.    Danske  Vidensk. 
Selsk.  p.  35. 

Loka  li  tat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 
Juli  9.     1901.     Renbucht. 


12  HJALMAR  DltLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Ana'itis  Wahlbergi  MGRN. 

1865.     MALMGREN  1.  c.  A.  kostcriensis  p.  94. 

1867.    MALMGREN1    p.    20. 

Lokalitat: 
Aug.  4.     Gansefjord. 

Fur  die  auf  Spitzbergen  gefundenen  Individuen  dieser  Art  giebt 
MALMGREN  eine  Lange  von  70  mm,,  eine  Breite  von  6  mm  an.  Er 
schreibt  daruber,  dass  es  nrarissime  ad  oras  maxime  boreales  Spetsbergise" 
gefunden  wird.  WJREN  nennt  eins  von  der  Vegaexpedition  aus  dem 
Sibirischen  Eismeere  mitgebrachtes  Exemplar,  wie  auch  THEEL  ein  von 
dem  Karameere  mitgebrachtes  erwahnt.  Die  zwei  letzteren  Verfasser 
machen  keine  Angaben  der  Grosse.  Das  Exemplar  von  dem  Gansefjord 
ist  90  mm.  lang  und  9  mm.  breit.  Es  ist  also  bedeutend  grosser  als 
die  von  Spitzbergen,  scheint  aber  im  iibrigen  nicht  wesentlich  von  denen 
MALMGREN'S  abzuweichen;  doch  sind  die  Borsten  etwas  verschieden: 
Wahrend  deren  Schaft  bei  der  Figur  MALMGREN'S  uberall  fast  gleich- 
massig  dick  ist,  zeigt  sich  bei  dem  Individmim  von  dem  Gansefjord  an 
dem  oberen  Ende  eine  sehr  bedeutende  Erweiterung  die  nach  oben  in 
mehrere,  unregelmassige  Spilzen  ausgezogen  ist.  Auch  scheint  das  End- 
blatt  der  Borsten  verhiiltnismassig  langer  bei  dem  von  ,,Fram"  mil- 
gebrachten  Individuum  (Figg.  6  a  und  6  b).  Im  zoologischen  Museum 
in  Kopenhagen  befindet  sich  ein  Individuum  aus  dem  Kattegat.  Die  Art 
scheint  somit  weit  verbreitet  zu  sein.  Das  Exemplar  aus  dem  Kattegat 
misst  nur  c.  30  mm.  in  der  Lange. 

Nepthydse. 
Nepthys  ciliata  (MULL.). 

1865.     MALMGREN  1.  c,  p.  104. 

Lokalitet: 
Aug.  2.     1901.     Gansefjord. 

Glyceridse. 
Glycera  capitata  0RST. 

1843.       0RSTED    1.    C.    p.    196. 

Lokalitat: 

Juli  22.     1900.     Winterhafen  c.  60  Mt. 
Aug.  3.     1900.     Fosheim's  Peak  und  das  Tal  an  der  Westseite  des  Fjords 

4-40  Mt. 
Aug.  4.     1900.     Seewalzenspitze  20-50  ML  Steinchen. 


1  A.  J.  MALMGREN:     Annulata    polychaeta    Spetsbergiae,     Gronlandiar,    Islandiae    et 
Scandinavia?  hactenus  congenita,  Helsingforsiae  1867. 


1898-1902.   No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  13 

Lumbrinereidse. 
Lumbrinereis  fragilis  MULL. 

1867.     MALMGREN  I.  c.  p.  63. 

Lokalitat: 

Juli    21.     1899.    Winterhafen  c.  16  Mt. 
Juli    29.     1899.     Winterhafen  c.  12  Mt. 

Aug.    3.     1900.     Fosheim's    Peak    und    der   Tal    an    der   Westseite    des 
Fjords  4-40  Mt. 

Onuphidse. 
Onuphis  conchylega  SARS. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  G6. 

Lokalitat: 

Juli    22.     1900.     Winterhafen  c.  60  Mt. 
Juli    25.     1900.     Winterhafen. 
Juli    30.     1900.     Mundung  des  grossen  Tales. 
Aug.    4.     1900.     Seewalzenspitze  20-25  Mt.  Steinchen. 
Aug.    7.     1900.    Ostkap  20-50  Mt. 

Lycoridse. 
Nereis  zonata  MALMGREN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  46. 

Lo  kalitat: 

Aug.         8.     1900.  Winterhafen  c.  20  Mt. 

Septbr.  19.     1900.  Vor  dem  Verbannungstale,  4-40  Mt. 

Juli          8.     1901.  Renbucht. 

Juli         12.     1901.  Bucht  bei  Landsend. 

Juli         18.     1901.  Mundung  des  Gansefjords. 

Juli         19.     1902.  North  Devon;  dem  Zeltplatz  gegenuber,  6-15  Mt. 

Moglicherweise  vvird  es  sich  zeigen,  dass  die  zwei  nahestehenden 
Formen,  AT.  pelagica  L.  und  N.  zonata  MALMGREN  durch  Zwischen- 
formen  allmahlich  in  einander  iibergehen:  HJ.  THEEL  erwahnt  (1.  c.  p.  42) 
einPaar  geschlechtlich  umgebildete,  epitoke  Individuen,  die  mil  Heteronereis 
assimilis  und  Heteronereis  grandifolia  MALMGREN  ubereinstimmen,  und 
die  nach  MALMGREN  epitoke  Formen  von  N.  pelagica  L.  sein  sollten ;  da 
diese  Art  indessen  an  den  Stellen,  wovon  THEEL'S  Individuen  stam- 
men,  ganz  zu  fehlen  scheint,  nimmt  er  an,  dass  die  von  ihm  erbeuteten 
Exemplare  epitoke  Formen  von  N.  zonata  MGRN.  sind.  Es  sind  unter 
den  von  ,,Fram"  mitgebrachten  Exemplaren  des  Geschlechtes  Nereis 
kerne  epitoke  Individuen,  dagegen  scheinen  zwei  von  denen  die,  ich  als 


14  HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

N.  sonata  MGRN.  bestimmt  habe,  sich  sehr  der  Form  N.  pelagica  L. 
za  nahern.  Die  hellen  Bander  der  Ringe  sind  sehr  undeutlich  und  die 
Parapodienlappchen  sind  recht  slumpf  und  abgerundet.  Die  Verhaltnisse 
der  Paragnathen  zeigen  keinen  wesentlichen  Unterschied  von  den  iibrigen 
Individuen,  sondern  gerade  in  dieser  Hinsichl  stehen  die  zwei  Arten 
einander  sehr  nahe.  Da  all  die  iibrigen  Individuen  indessen  der  Form 
N.  sonata  MGRN.  gut  genug  entsprechen,  und  N.  pelagica  L.  in  den 
Sammlungen  wFram"s  sonst  ganzlich  fehlt,  habe  ich  auch  diese  zwei  als 
N.  sonata  MGRN.  bestimmt.  —  Es  scheint  iibrigens  eine  Regel  zu  sein, 
dass  die  hellen  Querbander  der  Ringe  bei  den  jungeren  Individuen  starker 
hervortreten  und  bei  den  alteren  schvvacher  werden.  Alle  von  wFram" 
gesammelten  Exemplare  sind  klein;  dass  grosste  misst  c.  75  mm.  Die 
grossten  von  THEEL  erbeuteten  Exemplare  sind  125  mm.  in  der  Lange. 

Hesionidse. 
Castalia  Fabricii  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  32.    C.  arctica. 
1878.    THEEL,  1.  c.  p.  37. 

Lokalitat: 

Aug.  26.     1898.    Rice  strait. 
Juli    21.     1899.     Winterhafen  c.  16  Mt. 
Juli    29.     1899.     Winlerhafen  c.  12  Mt. 
Aug.    3.     1900.     Fosheim's  Peak  und  das  Tal  an  der  Westseite  des  Fjords 

4-40  Mt. 
Juli     19.     1902.     North  Devon;  vor  dem  Zeltplatz  6-14  Mt. 

Syllidse. 
Syllis  Fabricii  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  44. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli    8.     1901.     Renbucht. 

Syllis  fasciata  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  43. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 

SyJh's  monilicornis  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  41. 

Lokalitat: 
Juni  28.     1901.     Mundung  des  Walross-Fjord. 


1898-1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  15 

Sphserodoridse. 
Ephesia  gracilis  PATHKE. 

RATHKE:  Beitr3ge  z.  Fauna  Norvvegens  (Nova  Acta  Natur.  Curios.  XX.  1.) 

Lokal  i  tat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 

Spionidse. 
Poly  dor  a  ciliata  JOHNST. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  95. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 

Cirratulidse. 
Cirratulus  cirratus  MULL. 

1867.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  95. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli      9.     1901.     Renbucht. 
Juli     12.     1901.    Bucht  bei  Landsend. 

Aug.  30.     1901.     Gansefjord,  c.  8  Mt.    Lehm  und  Steinchen. 
Juli     10.     1902.     North  Devon;  von  dem  Zeltplatz,  6-14  Mt. 

Chsetozone  setosa  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  96. 
1878.    THEEL,  I.  c.  p.  54-. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  22.     1899.     Winterhafen.    Pelagisch. 

Ariciidse. 

Aricia  armiger  (MULL.). 

• 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1    c.  p.  72. 

Lokal  i  tat: 
Aug.  26.     1898.     Rice  strait. 

OpheljidaB. 

Ammotrypane  aulogaster  RATHKE. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  73. 

Lokal  itat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 


16  HJALMAR  D1TLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

ChlorsemidBe. 
Brada  granulata  MGRN. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  85. 

Lokalitfi  t: 
Juli  22.     1900.     Winterhafen. 

Flabelligera  a f finis  SARS. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  83. 

LokaliUt: 

Septbr.20.     1900.  Gansefjord,  4-40  Mt.  Lehm  und  Steinchen. 

Juli         9.     1901.  Renbucht. 

Juli        12.     1901.  Bucht  bei  Landsend. 

Aug.       2.     1901.  Gansefjord.    Bis  40  Mt. 

Fast  alle  von  nFrarn"  mitgebrachten  Individuen  sind  recht  gross; 
einige  haben  eine  Lange  von  c.  80  mm.  Diese  Wiirmer  leben  oft  massen- 
haft  zusammen,  und  man  kann  bisvveilen,  wo  dies  der  Fall  ist,  tatsitch- 
lich  das  Schabeisen  damit  gefiillt  bekommen.  Ich  habe  etwas  dergleichen 
an  der  zool.  Station  wKristineberg"  in  Schweden  im  Sommer  1905 
gesehen.  —  Von  den  vorliegenden  Individuen  sind  20  demselben  Ort  ent- 
nommen. 

Trophonia  plumosa  MULL. 

1867.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  82. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  8.     1901.     Renbucht. 

Amphicthenidse. 
Pectinaria  hyperborea  MGRN. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  360. 

Lokalitat: 
Aug.  1.     1900.     Mundung  des  grossen  Tales. 

Ainpharetidee. 
Samytha  sexcirrata  SARS. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  370. 

Lokalitfit: 
Aug.  2.     1901.     Gansefjord. 


1898  -1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  17 

Terebellidse. 
Terebellides  Stromi  SARS. 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  398. 

L  o  k  al  i  t  a  t: 
Aug.  2.     1901.      Ganz  hinten  in  dem  Gansefjord.    Lehm  und  Steinchen. 

Axionice  fiexuosa  (Gn,). 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  384 

Lokali  tftt: 

Aug.  24.     1898.    Rice  strait. 
Juli    21.     1899.     Winterhafen  c.  16  Mt. 
Juli      9.     1901.     Renbucht. 

Bei  dem  grossten  Exemplar,  dessen  Tentakeln  aus  der  Miindung 
hervorragen,  misst  die  Rohre  c.  53  mm.,  und  die  Grosse  ist  --da  die 
unterste  Spitze  der  Rohre  abgebrochen,  und  es  deshalb  nicht  zu  unter- 
scheiden  ist,  wie  viel  von  dieser  fehlt  —  wohl  etwa,  wie  MALMGREN  als 
Maximalgrosse  angibt,  55  mm.,  vielleicht  etwas  mehr.  Die  iibrigen 
Exemplare  sind  etwas  kleiner. 

Pistsb  cristata,  (MtiLL.). 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  382. 

Lokalitat: 
Septbr.  19.     1900.     Vor  dem  Verbannungstale,  4-40  Mt. 

Scione  lobata  MGRN. 

1865.    MALMGREN,  I.  c.  p.  383. 

Lokalitat: 

Juli         22.     1900.  Winterhafen  c.  60  Mt. 

Aug.         4.     1900.  Seewalzenspitze,  30—50  Mt.    Steinchen. 

Septbr.  19.     1900.  Vor  dem  Verbannungstale,  4-40  Mt. 

Juli          5.     1901.  Der  Sund. 

Juli          8.     1901.  Renbucht. 

Juli          9.     1901.  Renbucht. 

Juli        19.     1901.  Gansefjord. 

Aug.        2.     1901.  Ganz  hinten  in  dem  Gansefjord,  2-4  Mt. 

Dieser  Wurm  ist  offenbar  einer  der  am  haufigsten  vorkommenden 
Arten  in  den  von  ,,Fram"  besuchten  Gegenden.  Es  liegen  eine  Menge 
von  Exemplaren  vor,  und  mehrere  Glaser  sind  mil  dessen  Rohrchen 
gefullt.  Diese  bestehen,  die  kleineren  Individuen  betreffend,  aus  For- 
aminiferen  und  Steinchen,  die  grosseren  betreffend,  aus  etwas  gro- 
berem  Material,  mit  Schlamm  vermischt.  Wahrscheinlich  richtet  sich 

2 


18  HJALMAR  D1TLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

jedoch  der  Bau  des  Rohrchens  wesentlich  nach  der  Beschaffenheit  des 
Bodens.  Ein  Individuum  hat,  im  Gegensatz  zu  den  tibrigen,  [sein 
Rohrchen  aus  ziemlich  feinem  Sand  gebaut,  und  dasselbe  fast  in  seiner 
ganzen  Lange  an  einer  Laminaria  geheftet. 

Thelepus  circinnatus  (FABR.). 
1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  387. 

Lokalitat: 

Juni  29.     1901.     Vor  dem  Zeltplatz. 
Juli     8.     1901.     Die  Renbucht. 
Juli     9.     1901.     Die  Renbucht. 
Juli    12.     1901.     Bucht  bei  Landsend. 
Juli    19.     1902.     Vor  dem  Zeltplatz  North  Devon,  6-14  Mt. 

Diese  Art  ist  ebenso  wie  die  vorhergehende  in  einer  Menge  von 
Exemplaren  erbeutet,  und  die  Rohrchen  sind  im  hohen  Grade  denen  der 
Scione  ahnlich,  vielleicht  aus  etwas  groberem  Material  gebaut. 

Amphitrite  cirrata  MULL. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  375. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  21.     1899.     Winterhafen  c.  12  Mt. 

Nicolea  zostericola  (0RST.). 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  381. 

Lokal  i  tat: 

Aug.  18.     1898.    Camp  Clay,  Cap  Sabine,  4-10  Mt. 
Juli    19.     1902.     Vor  dem  Zeltplatz,  North  Devon,  6-40  Mt. 

Leaena  abranchiate  MGRN. 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  385. 

Lokalitat: 
Juli  7.     1899.    Winterhafen  c.  12  Mt. 


Sabelh'dee. 
Sabella  Fabricii  BR. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  399.    Sabella  Spitsbergensis. 

Lokalitat- 
Septbr.  19.     1900.    Vor  dem  Verbannungstale,  4-40  Mt. 


1898-1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  '  19 

Euchone  papillosa  SARS. 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1,  c.  p.  407. 

Lokali  tat: 
Juli  21.     1899.    Winterhafen  c.  12  Mi 

Ein  Fragment  einer  Euchone,  auf  c.  30  Mt.,  im  Winterhafen  8.  8. 1900 
genommen,  hat  nichl  naher  bestimmt  werden  konnen. 

^ 

Chone  infundibuliformis  KR. 

1865.    MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  404. 

Lokalitfit: 

Juli  28.     1901.     Die  Miindung  des  Walrossfjords. 
Juli  18.     1901.    Die  Miindung  des  Gftnsefjords. 
Juli  19.     1901.     Der  Gansefjord. 

Dasychone  infarcta  (KR.). 

1865.     MALMGREN,  1.  c.  p.  403. 

Lokali  tat: 
Septbr.  20.     1900.    Der  Gansefjord,  4-40  Mt.    Lehm  und  Steinchen. 

Die  ersten  Worte,  die  sowohl  SARS  als  auch  MALMGREN  in  ihrer 
Geschlechtsdiagnose  uber  die  Dasychone  brauchen,  namlich:  ,,Corpus 
crassum"  —  KROYER  hat  sogar  ,,crassissima"  —  passen  nicht  auf  die  von 
wFram"  mitgebrachten  Individuen  dieses  Geschlechtes.  Wenn  nicht  be- 
sonders  schlank  ist  er  doch  auf  der  anderen  Seite  so  langgestrecht,  dass 
das  genannte  Adjektiv  gar  nicht  bezeichnend  ist.  Ein  aus  dem  Rohr- 
chen  herausgenommenes  Expl.  misst  somit  c.  115  mm.  in  der  Lange, 
wahrend  die  Breite  nur  c.  8  mm.  ist.  Die  Lange  des  Thieres  enthalt 
also  die  Breite  14—15  mal,  wahrend  MALMGREN  fur  die  von  ihm  an- 
gefiihrten  Exemplare  desselben  Geschlechls,  D.  infarcta  und  D.  argus 
das  Verhaltnis  zwischen  Lange  und  Breite  wie  1  zu  4,5  angibt.  Da 
die  vorliegenden  Individuen  ubrigens  in  alien  Beziehungen  typische 
Dasychone  sind,  trage  ich  keine  Bedenken,  sie  zu  diesem  Geschlecht 
hinzufuhren. 

Das  Rohrchen  (Fig.  7),  aus  sehr  feinem,  dunkel  chokoladegefarbtem 
Schlamm  gebildet,  ist  ein  Stuck  langer  als  das  Tierchen.  Derjenige  Teil, 
der  nicht  mit  diesem  ausgefilllt  ist,  ist  bei  Spiritusexemplaren  zusammcn- 
gefallen  und  urngebogen;  dieser  ist  indessen,  wie  auch  der  iibrige  Teil, 
nicht  schlaff,  sondern  -  -  wie  man  gewohnlich  bei  den  Sabelliden  sieht 

von   einer   recht   festen  Konsistenz,    fast   lederartig   oder  hart  mem- 


20  HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

branos,  was  durch  den,  aus  der  Haut  des  Tieres  ausgeschiedenen 
die  Lehmpartikeln  verbindenden  Stoff,  verursacht  ist.  Es  scheint  mir, 
indessen  ohne  Zweifel,  dass  das  Rohrchen  in  dieser  Beziehung  bei  den 
lebenden  Tieren  anders  gewesen  sein  muss;  es  ware  absurd  anzu- 
nehmen,  dass  das  Tier  seinem  Aufenthaltsort  eine  solche  unbrauch- 
bare,  zusammengeklappte,  unregelmassig  umgebogene  Partie  anbauen 
wiirde,  in  welche  es  kaum  mil  seiner  ganzen  Kraft  seinen  weichen 
Korper  wurde  hineinpressen  konnen;  das  ganze  Rohrchen  muss 
weich  gewesen  sein  -  -  jedenfalls  l)edeutend  weicber  als  jetzt,  nacb  der 
Konservierung  --  und  das  Tier  sich  auf  und  ab  oder  bin  und  her  in 
der  ganzen  Lange  des  Rohrchens  haben  bewegen  konnen,  und  die 
Hartung  muss  somit  nach  dem  Tode  des  Tieres  eingetrelen,  und  wahr- 
scheinlich  durch  den  Alkohol  verursacht  sein.  Ein  anderes  Verhaltnis 
zeigt  aueh  daraufhin:  Bei  Tieren,  die  in  dem  Rohrchen  gestorben  sind, 
und  die  sich  in  dasselbe  hineingezogen  haben,  klebt  dies  so  an  dem 
Korper  des  Tieres,  dass  es  ganz  unmoglich  ist,  es  von  demselben  zu 
losen.  Wenn  man  das  Rohrchen  mil  ein  Paar  Nadeln  stiickweise  weg- 
priipariert,  kommt  das  Tier  zum  Vorschein,  mil  einer  hellgelben,  glatten, 
recht  harten,  firnisartigen  Schicht  iiberzogen,  die  nicht  auf  mechanischem 
Wege  wegzubringen  ist;  die  Parapodien  liegen  darunter,  dem  Korper 
des  Tieres  dicht  angepresst,  die  Ringteilung  ist  nur  undeutlich  /.u  unter- 
scheiden,  und  nur  die  schwarzen  Pigmentfleckchen  zwischen  den  Para- 
podien treten  einigermassen  scharf  hervor  an  der  Seite  des  Tieres.  So 
war  das  Verhaltnis  bei  dem  Fig.  7  a  abgebildelen  Individuum.  Auf 
zwei  Stellen  zeigt  es  sich  deutlich,  dass  es  sich  so  verhalt,  namlich  an 
dem  Hinterteil  des  Tieres,  welcher  offenbar  nicht  an  dem  Rohrchen 
geklebt  hat,  und  an  einer  grosseren  Partie  auf  der  einen  Seite  des 
Tieres,  wo  eine  Hohlung  zwischen  dem  Korper  des  Tieres  und  dem 
Rohrchen  sich  vorfand.  Alle  5  Individuen  dieser  Art  sind  leider  in 
dieser  Weise  in  ihren  Rohrchen  festgeleimt,  und  ich  habe  nur  eins  in 
der  vorherbeschriebenen  Weise  herausgenommen.  Dass  dies  Verhaltnis 
die  genaue  Untersuchung  des  Tieres  hindert,  ist  selbstverstiindlich,  und  es 
ware  zu  wiinschen,  dass  die  Zoologen,  die  in  der  Zukumft  Gelegenheit 
haben  werden  Sabelliden  einzufangen  —  denn  dies  gilt  wohl  den  meisten 
hierhergehorenden  Formen  —  dafiir  sorgen  wiirden,  wenigstens  einige 
Individuen  aus  den  Rohrchen  zu  nehmen,  vvahrend  die  Tiere  noch  am 
Leben  sind.  Dass  sie  in  solchem  Falle  sich  nicht  mit  einer  solchen 
firnisartigen  Schicht  umgeben,  sieht  man  bei  Sabelliden,  die  frei  in  dem 
Alkohol  liegen,  und  die  sich  also  jedenfalls  vor  dem  Tode  selbst  aus 
dem  Rohrchen  herausgearbeitet  haben. 


1898-1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.   '  21 

Wie  wir  sehen  werden,  zeigen  ,,Fram"s  Exemplaren  sich  in  keiner 
nennenswerteii  Beziehung  von  der  typischen  Dasychone  infarcta  KR, 
verschieden,  die  aussere  Form  ausgenommen,  und  auf  dieser  allein  kann 
ich  mil  einiger  Wahrscheinlichkeit  keine  neue  Art  grQnden. 

Das  aus  dem  Rohrchen  herausgenommene  Individuum  (Fig.  7  a)  ist 
c.  115  mm.  lang  und  c.  8  mm.  breit;  es  ist  leicht  dorsi-ventral  zusammen- 
gedrilckt  mil  elliptischem  Durchschnitt;  das  Hinterteil  des  Tieres  ist 
dorsal  aufgebogen,  sodass  es  mit  dem  iibrigen  Korper  des  Tieres  fast 
einen  rechten  Winkel  bildet.  Die  Kiemen,  die  c.  28  mm.  in  der  Lange 
messen,  sind  unten  durch  eine  Haul  verbunden,  und  ihre  zusammen- 
gewachsene  Basis  ist  von  jeder  Seite  spiralformig  eingerollt;  man  zahlt 
auf  jeder  Seite  c.  40.  Die  einzelnen  Kiemenstamme  haben  dunkle  rot- 
liche  Querbander  unter  den  paarweise  gestellten,  dorsalen  Anhangen; 
diese  sind  liinglich  elliptisch  mit  schmaler  Basis  und  stumpf  abgerundeter 
Spitze  (Fig.  7  c).  Die  fadenformigen  Kiemenstrahlen  reichen  ungefahr 
bis  zur  Spitze  des  Kiemenstammes  (Fig.  7  b).  Der  Halskragen  hat 
einen  ventralen  und  auf  jeder  Seite  einen  lateralen  Einschnitt.  Auf  der 
Ruckenseite  gebt  er  abwarts  mit  einem  abgerundeten  Lappchen  auf 
jeder  Seite,  welches  so  mit  dem  Korper  des  Tieres  zusammengewachsen 
ist,  dass  die  rechte  und  linke  Seite  des  Kragens  durch  eine  breite, 
offene  Partie  getrennt  werden.  Die  beiden  Tentakeln,  die  auf  jeder  Seite 
zwischen  den  Spiralen  der  Kiemenkrone  versteckt  liegen,  sind  stark 
zugespitzt,  messerformig  mit  scharfer  Schneide.  Das  Tier  besteht  aus 
einer  sehr  grossen  Anzahl  von  Ringen;  der  vorderste  Teil  zahlt  8  haar- 
borstentragende  Riickenparapodien,  7  hackenborstentragende  Bauchpara- 
podien,  indem  d.er  erste  Ring  nur  Riickenborsten  tragt.  Die  Rticken- 
borsten,  die  alle  gleichartig  sind,  haben  einseitige,  gestreifte  Verbramung 
und  weit  ausgezogene  feine  Spitze  (Figg.  7  e  und  7  f).  Die  Bauch- 
borsten,  die  vogelformig  sind  (Figg.  7  g  und  7  h),  sind  im  Vorder-  und 
Hinterteil  des  Tieres  ein  wenig  verschieden  geformt.  Zwischen  den 
Rucken-  und  Bauchparapodien  findet  man  fast  in  der  ganzen  Lange  des 
Tieres  deutliche,  schwarze  Pigrnentflecke.  Bei  starkerer  Lupe-Ver- 
grosserung  zeigt  sich  jeder  aus  einer  kleinen  Gruppe  schwarzer  Punkt- 
chen  bestehend  (Fig.  7  d). 

Ausser  den  von  dem  Gansefjord  erwahnten  Individuen,  findet  sich 
das  Vorderteil  von  einem,  leider  nur  mit  den  fiinf  ersten  Parapodien; 
es  ist  in  der  Renbucht  genommen.  An  diesem  kleinen  Bruchstuck  sieht 
man  indessen,  dass  das  Tier  wenigstens  mit  dem  Vorderteile  aus  dem 
Rohrchen  herausgekrochen  ist,  denn  die  Parapodien  stehen  hier  frei 
heraus,  und  es  ist  nichts  von  der  glanzenden,  gelben,  h'rnisartigen 


22  HJALMAR  DITLEVSEN.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Schicht  zu  entdecken  wie  sonst  bei  den  iibrigen  von  dem  Gansefjord 
stammenden  Individuen.  An  diesem  Bruchstiick  von  der  Renbucht  sind 
die  zwei  ventralen  Lappchen  des  Halskragens  nach  unten  gebogen,  was 
nicht  der  Fall  ist  bei  dem  aus  dem  Rohrchen  herausgenommenen  Indi- 
vid von  dem  Gansefjord,  ein  Faktum,  welches  zeigt,  dass  dies  Verhaltnis 
als  Geschlechts-  oder  Artscharakter  keinen  Wert  hat.  Wahrscheinlich 
konnen  die  Tiere  die  Lappchen  ganz  nach  Belieben  umbiegen  oder  sie 
ausbreiten;  und  wahrscheinlich  ist  es  vielleicht,  dass  das  Tier,  wenn  es 
sich  in  das  Rohrchen  hineinzieht,  sie  ausbreitet.  Diese  Vorgang  der 
Ventrallappchen  des  Kragens  ist  von  WIREN  (I.  c.  p.  422)  erwahnt. 

Serpulidse. 

Spirorbis  verruca  FABR. 

188:3.     LEVINSEN,  I.  c.  p.  208,  Tab.  II,  Fig.  8h-j;  Tab.  Ill,  Fig.  2-3. 

Lokalitat: 

Juli  24.     1899.     Einige  Individuen  an  der  Sttdspitze  des  Pern-Island  mil  Hand- 
Schabeisen  genoramen. 

Spirorbis  spirillum  L. 

1883.     LEVINSEN,  1.  c.  p.  211,  Tab.  II,  Fig.  8k;  Tab.  Ill,  Fig    14-1G. 

Lokalitat: 

Aug.    5.     1898.     Upernivik,  20-26  Mt. 
Aug.  16.     1898.     Foulkefjord,  Reindeerpoint,  4-20  Mt. 
Aug.  30.     1901.     Der  Gansefjord. 

Juli     15.     1902.     Vor  dem    Meerrossfelsen,    North    Devon.     Boden   steinig   mil 
Laminarien. 


1898-1902.  No.  15.]  ANNULATA  POLYCHAETA.  23 


Erklarung  der  Abbildungen. 


Fig.  1.   Harmothoe  intbricata  (L.).    Elytron.    Zeiss  a3  Oc.  2. 

a.  und  b.    Bauchborsten  desselben  Tieres.     Zeiss  C.  Oc.  3. 
Fig.  2.   Harmothoe  rarispina  SARS.    Teil  eines  Elytrons.    Zeiss  a3  Oc.  2. 

a.  und  b.     Bauchborsten  desselben  Tieres.    Zeiss  A.  Oc.  3. 
Fig.  3.  Harmothoe  rarispina  SARS.    Teil  eines  Elytrons.    Zeiss  a3  Cc.  2. 

a.  und  b.     Bauchborsten  desselben  Tieres.    Zeiss  A.  Oc.  3. 
Fig.  4.    Zwischenform  zwischen    H.    imbricata    (L.)    und    H.    rarispina  Sars.    Teil  des 

Elytrons.    Zeiss  A.  Oc.  2. 

a.  und  b.     Bauchborsten  desselben  Tieres.    Zeiss  C.  Oc.  3. 
Fig.  5.   Harmothoe  imbricata  L.    Teil  eines  Elytrons.    Zeiss  C.  Oc.  2. 
Fig.  6.   a.  und  b,    Ana/His   Wahlbergi  MGRN.    Haarborsten 

a.  Zeiss  C.  Oc.  2. 

b.  Zeiss  E.  Oc   2 

Fig.  1.   Dasychone  infarcta  (Kn ).    Tier  im  Rohrchen  eingezogen. 
a.    Tier  aus  dem  Rohrchen  herausprapariert. 

—  b.    Die  Spitze  einer  Kieme.    Zeiss  a3  Oc  2. 

c.  Mittlere  Teil  einer  Kieme,  Loupenvergr. 

d.  Einige  Ringe  des  hintersten  Teils  des  Tieres,  die  Pigmentfleckchen  zeigend. 
e     Haarborste  des  achten  Parapodiums.    Zeiss  C.  Oc.  2 

f.    Haarborste  eines  der  hintersten  Parapodien.    Zeiss  C.  Oc.  2. 

—  g.    Hackenborste  des  zweiten  Parapodiums.    Zeiss  E.  Oc.  2. 

—  h.    Hackenborste  eines  der  hintersten  Parapodien.    Zeiss  E.  Oc.  2. 


Gedruckt  19.  Mfirz  1909. 


.oi'the  2-  Norwe^.Arct.Exp.in  t'lie  Fram  1898  -\B02.No.lB 


Taf.  I. 


'    -    ,     ©     .  r 

,'     '• 


• 


' 


'^ 


Za 


Hjalmar  Ditlevsen  del. 


I  ;,•[,.  of  the  2-  Nonveg.Arct.Exp.iu  the  From  1»!)H    I902.No.15. 


Taf. 


3a 


• 


6a 


•A 


Hjalmar  Ditlevsen  del. 


Rep.oHlic  L""'\iir\\-i'tv.Arr».!':Y]).in  tin-  Fivuu  1,'i'ili    1'10'J  .No.lS. 


Taf.  III. 


Th 


Hjalmar  Ditlevsen  del. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  16. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS: 

A  REVISED  LIST 

OF  THE 

FLOWERING  PLANTS  AND  FERNS 

OF 

NOETH  WESTERN  GREENLAND 

WITH  SOME  SHORT  NOTES  ABOUT  THE  AFFINITIES  OF  THE  FLORA 
(WITH  ONE  MAP  IN  THE  TEXT) 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1909 


Introduction. 


.r\jnong  all  the  arctic  lands,  Greenland  is  by  far  the  largest, 
extending  from  Cape  Farewell,  in  lat.  59°  46',  to  Gape  Morris  Jesup, 
lat.  83°  39',  and  Cape  Bridgeman,  in  lat.  83°  35',  and  from  Cape 
Alexander,  in  long.  W.  fr.  Gr.  75°  30',  to  the  east  coast  of  Shannon 
Island,  in  long.  W.  17°  30'.  Its  area  may  very  roughly  be  reckoned 
as  600,000  square  miles.  From  a  botanical  point  of  view,  however,  only 
a  comparatively  small  part  of  its  wide  expanse  is  of  any  interest,  the 
whole  interior  being  covered  up  by  the  inland  ice,  the  widest  ice  sheet 
of  the  Northern  Hemisphere,  which  sends  out  numerous  arms  of  different 
size  to  the  coast,  thus  separating  the  habitable  land  into  many  parts, 
that  may,  however,  be  naturally  grouped  as  follows: 

Danish  West  Greenland,  from  Cape  Farewell  up  to  the  southern 
side  of  Melville  Bay  about  lat.  74°.  In  the  south,  it  is  not  sharply 
defined  from  the  coastland  of  the  east  coast,  but  to  the  north  it  is 
separated  from  the  land  beyond  Melville  Bay  by  the  many  and  mighty 
glaciers  that,  except  for  some  coast  mountains  and  nunataks,  alone 
surround  the  interior  of  the  bay,  forming  a  very  natural  and  well- 
defined  demarcation-line  between  the  southern  and  northern  coast  districts 
with  their,  in  many  respects,  different  floras  and  types  of  vegetation. 

North  Western  Greenland,  beginning  at  the  north  side  of  Melville 
Bay  in  about  lat.  76°  and  stretching  up  to  the  northernmost  point, 
where  it  merges  into  the  east  coast,  may  be  looked  upon  as  being 
formed  of  two  differents  parts,  the  southern  or  Smith  Sound  region  up 
to  about  lat.  79°,  and  the  northern,  from  about  80°  northwards.  The 
boundary  between  them  is  formed  by  the  enormous  Humboldt  Glacier, 
forming  the  coast-line  for  nearly  one  degree  of  latitude  —  a  barrier 
which  is  not  easily  surmounted  by  any  plant  migration. 

Eastern  Greenland  is  not  so  easily  separated  into  natural  divisions. 
A  tolerably  well  defined  line,  however,  may  be  drawn  about  lat.  73°  30', 

1 


H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


at  Cape  Hold  with  Hope,  south  of  which  the  great  fjord  district  begins, 
stretching  to  the  south  side  of  Scoresby  Sound  (about  lat.  70°)  and 
showing  a  climate  and  other  natural  conditions  that  make  it  little  apt 
to  be  drawn  into  comparison  with  North-Western  Greenland.  I  shall 
not  here  enter  further  upon  the  question  about  the  possibilities  of  distin- 
guishing phyto-geographical  subdivions  of  this  coast-land,  but  will  only 
mention  that  when  in  the  following  pages,  I  speak  of  North-Eastern 
Greenland,  I  draw  the  southern  boundary  at  Cape  Dalton  in  69°  25', 
where  the  comparatively  well-examined  area  of  Scoresby  Sound  ends 
and  a  coast-strech  with  many  great  glaciers  begins. 

Of  these  different  parts  of  Greenland,  the  first  mentioned  is  by  far 
the  best  surveyed  in  botanical  as  well  as  in  other  respects.  The  Danish 
colonization,  now  of  nearly  two  hundred  years'  standing,  has  made  it 
more  easily  accessible,  many  of  the  officials  of  the  colonies  have 
materially  contributed  to  our  knowledge  about  it,  and  the  Danish  Govern- 
ment has  encouraged  and  supported  the  scientific  exploration  of  its 
colonial  districts  in  many  ways,  so  as  to  make  that  district  the  best 
known  of  all  the  arctic  lands.  The  other  parts  of  the  country  have 
been  explored  only  by  casual  expeditions,  many  of  them  even  lacking 
members  qualified  for  careful  and  reliable  scientific  work;  long  stretches 
of  the  coast  have  never  been  visited,  at  least  not  during  the  favorable 
season  and  therefore  they  still  form  a  veritable  terra  incognita  so  far 
as  their  natural  conditions  are  concerned. 

This  also  is  the  case  with  North- Western  Greenland,  notwithstand- 
ing the  many  expeditions  that  have  visited  at  least  some  parts  of  it. 
I  am  now  going  to  give  a  sketch  of  the  nature  of  this  region,  so  far 
as  it  may  be  compiled  from  the  works  of  the  different  explorers;  but 
first  I  will  give  a  historical  summary  of  the  expeditions  which  have 
contributed  to  our  present  knowledge  about  Greenland  north  of  Mel- 
ville Bay. 

The  first  European  who  sighted  the  land  north  of  that  wide  bay 
was  WILLIAM  BAFFIN1,  who  in  1616  navigated  up  through  the  great 
inland  sea  now  bearing  his  name.  After  passing  Melville  Bay  by  the 
"middle  passage"  as  the  whalers  have  since  termed  it,  he  entered  the 
"North  water"  which  led  him  up  to  Smith  Sound.  His  northernmost 


1  I  now  leave  quite  out  of  consideration  the  very  problematic  voyages  of  the  first 
Scandinavian  colonists  of  Greenland  who  are  thought  to  have  gone  beyond 
Melville  Bay.  Some  passages  in  the  chronicles  of  the  Greenland  colonies  point 
indeed  to  their  having  visited  the  "North  water"  but  they  certainly  did  not 
pass  Smith  Sound,  and  their  discoveries  were  at  all  events  lost. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.        5 

point  was  at  lat.  77°  45',  from  whence  he  sighted  the  entrance  to  Ingle- 
field  Gulf  (Whale  Sound)  with  Hakluyt  Island,  Smith  Sound,  the  Carey 
Islands  and  some  points  on  the  Greenland  coast,  which  were  named 
by  him,  as  well  as  Ellesmereland  on  the  west  side. 

For  fully  two  hundred  years  after  BAFFIN'S  voyage  none,  except 
perhaps  some  dutch  whalers,  entered  the  upper  part  of  Baffin's  Bay 
and  it  was  even  erased  from  the  maps;  but  in  1818  the  English  Govern- 
ment sent  out  an  expedition  under  the  command  of  JOHN  Ross,  who 
verified  the  discoveries  of  BAFFIN  and  sailed  up  Smith  Sound  as  far  as 
to  within  sight  of  Gape  Alexander.  Ross  also  effected  the  first  landing 
here,  on  Bushnan  Island  and,  later,  at  Gape  York  and  other  points. 

In  1849 — 50  the  transport  ship  North  Star,  under  the  command  of 
SAUNDERS,  wintered  in  North  Star  Bay  in  Wolstenholme  Sound,  where, 
however,  no  exploration  of  any  extent  was  undertaken. 

The  next  visitor  was  E.  A.  INGLEFIELD,  who,  in  the  summer  of 
1852,  made  a  cruise  up  to  Smith  Sound  in  search  of  Sir  JOHN  FRANKLIN. 
He  landed  at  several  places;  among  others  he  carefully  examined 
Wolstenholme  Sound,  entered  Granville  Bay  and,  following  the  shore, 
came  to  a  small  inlet,  evidently  Burdin  Bay,  where  an  Eskimo  village 
was  visited.  Further,  he  ascertained  the  position  of  the  islands  at  the 
mouth  of  what  we  now  call  Inglefield  Gulf  and,  passing  Cape  Alexander, 
obtained  a  view  through  Smith  Sound  into  what  is  now  termed  Kane 
Basin,  naming  several  points  on  both  coasts.  In  lat.  78°  28'  he  turned 
back  because  of  unfavorable  ice-conditions. 

Already  in  the  following  year,  an  american  expedition  came  up 
through  Smith  Sound,  commanded  by  ELISHA  KENT  KANE.  He  was 
able  to  round  Cairn  Point  at  the  northern  entrance  of  the  Sound  and, 
proceeding  along  the  coast,  he  took  up  his  winter  quarters  in  Rensselaer 
Bay.  From  thence  he  examined  not  only  the  shore  up  to  the  Hum- 
boldt  Glacier,  but  also  sent  forward  sledging  expeditions.  His  mate 
MORTON  and  the  Greenlander  HANS  HENDRIK  were  thus  the  first  who 
visited  what  KANE  called  Washington  Land,  that  is  to  say,  the  Green- 
land coast  from  the  Humboldt  Glacier  northwards  to  the  southern  part 
of  the  Kennedy  Channel.  KANE'S  expedition,  which  lasted  two  years, 
brougt  home  some  rather  valuable  information  about  these  regions,  be- 
sides mapping  a  long  stretch  of  coast-line. 

The  next  explorer  was  again  an  american,  J.  J.  HAYES,  who  in 
1860—61  wintered  in  Port  l^oulke  and  examined  the  adjoining  region 
besides  making  journeys  to  the  western  side. 


6  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Then  came  in  1871  CHARLES  FRANCIS  HALL  in  the  "Polaris'',  who, 
finding  the  ice  conditions  unusually  good,  sailed  up  to  the  northern  ex- 
tremity of  the  Robson  Channel,  where  the  Greenland  coast  begins  to 
trend  more  eastward.  A  long  stretch  of  coast  was  made  known  by 
this  expedition,  which  was  soon  followed  by  the  english  government 
expedition  under  the  command  of  G.  S.  NARES,  who,  in  1875,  went  along 
the  route  of  the  Polaris  up  to  the  northern  part  of  Robson  Channel. 
Indeed,  most  of  the  explorations  carried  out  by  this  expedition  fell  on 
the  west  side  of  the  channels;  but  it  has  also  contributed  to  our  know- 
ledge of  the  Greenland  coast  along  them  as  well  as  to  the  north,  where 
BEAUMONT  reached  lat.  82°  25'. 

After  the  lapse  of  a  few  years,  the  northern  parts  of  Greenland 
were  again  visited  by  an  exploring  party  of  an  expedition,  which  had 
its  principal  field  of  work  in  Grinnelland.  Lieutenant  LOCKWOOD,  of  the 
GREELY-expedition,  then  made  a  sledge  journey  along  the  Greenland 
coast,  from  which  he  was  able  to  state  that  it  extended  to  lat.  83°  35', 
a  little  south  of  which  LOCKWOOD  turned  in  May  1882. 

Some  other  expeditions  have  contributed  to  the  knowledge  of  these 
parts  of  Greenland,  or  have  at  least  visited  them  on  the  way  to  other 
fields  of  work.  I  may  mention  among  them  the  english  Franklin  Search 
expedition  under  PENNY  in  1850;  the  Swedish  expedition  in  the  Sofia  in 
1883;  the  ill-fated  expedition  of  BJORLING  in  1893  which,  after  visiting 
the  Carey  Islands  and  the  Greenland  coast,  proceeded  up  to  Southern 
Ellesmereland  never  to  be  seen  again;  the  Fram  expedition  in  which  I 
myself  took  part,  which  visited  Foulke  Fjord  in  1898  and  1899;  and  the 
Danish  literary  expedition  under  the  late  Mr.  MYLIUS  ERICHSEN,  who  has 
since  succumbed  to  the  hardships  of  another  expedition. 

A  wide  field  of  work  in  the  northern  parts  of  Greenlands  is  that 
which  has  been  covered  by  R.  E.  PEARY  in  his  different  voyages  be- 
tween 1891  and  1906.  He  has  also  had  an  opportunity  of  stating  that 
Greenland  does  not  extend  as  far  as,  or  beyond,  the  Pole,  as  has  for- 
merly been  believed,  but  that  it  ends  at  lat.  83°  39'.  It  is  only  to  be 
regretted  that  so  indefatigable  an  explorer  should  not  have  shown  more 
interest  in  the  different  fields  of  scientific  investigation,  that  could  have 
yielded  so  rich  a  harvest  and  that  would  have  given  a  far  greater  value 
to  his  voyages.  Some  important  work  is,  however,  done  both  by  mem- 
bers of  his  own  expeditions  and  of  the  auxiliary  parties  which  have  been 
sent  up  year  after  year. 

Before  I  pass  on  to  the  special  botanic  information  due  to  the 
different  expeditions,  I  will  try  to  give  a  summary  account  of  the  phys- 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.        7 

ical  geography  of  the  region  in  question.  A  first  look  at  the  map  of 
N.  W.  Greenland  shows  that  most  parts  of  it  are  typical  fjord-lands. 
There  are  exceptions  to  this  in  the  shore  of  Melville  Bay,  and  along  the 
Kane  Basin  and  Kennedy  Channel,  all  of  which  are  less  indented.  Most 
parts  of  the  coast  are  high  and  bold,  either  forming  a  tableland  falling 
abruptly  down  to  the  shore,  or  broken  up  by  deep  valleys.  Many  favo- 
rable localities  for  the  development  of  a,  thriving  vegetation  are  thus 
formed;  and  in  many  places  the  richness  of  bird-life  also  helps  to  make 
the  soil  favorable  for  plant-life.  The  rich  green  of  the  manured  soil  in 
and  below  the  rookeries  of  auks  and  other  sea-birds,  makes  them  dis- 
cernible from  afar.  Doubtless,  therefore,  the  arms  of  the  larger  fjords 
also,  —  especially  Inglefield  Gulf  —  where  the  climate  is  less  severe  than 
along  the  outer  coast,  where  the  cliffs  form  breedingplaces  for  in- 
numerable birds,  and  where  valleys  of  considerable  extent  trend 
inland  are  by  far  the  richest  in  number  of  species  as  well  as  in  density 
of  vegetation,  whereas  the  open  coast  is  comparatively  poor.  Along  the 
shore  of  Melville  Bay,  where  every  valley  is  filled  by  a  glacier,  there  is 
of  course  space  for  very  little  vegetation.  Further  northwards  come  the 
richest  districts,  Wolstenholme  Sound,  Inglefield  Gulf  and  Foulke  Fjord 
with  their  adjacent  ice-free  land.  Now,  indeed,  this  ice-free  coast  land 
is  continued  by  a  fairly  broad  stretch  along  the  Kane  Basin  to  the 
Humboldt  Glacier;  and  to  the  north  there  occurs  a  still  broader  expanse 
of  ice-free  land,  but  very  few  plants  are  known  from  these  parts.  How- 
ever, I  am  inclined  to  think  that,  for  instance,  the  slopes  and  table-lands 
along  the  Kennedy  Channel  might  be  apt  to  contain  a  rather  well-deve- 
loped vegetation.  It  must,  however,  be  borne  in  mind,  that  these  regi- 
ons are  far  less  accurately  investigated  than  the  southern  coast  parts. 
Only  one  of  the  expeditions  which  have  been  there  has  had  a  member 
specially  acting  as  botanist;  and,  apart  from  the  wintering  of  the  Polaris 
at  Thank  God  Harbour,  only  casual  visits  have  been  made  to  the  north- 
ern parts  of  the  North- Western  Greenland  coast,  mostly  during  the  un- 
favorable season. 

Another  point  always  to  be  borne  in  mind  is  the  diversity  of  the 
geological  nature  of  the  different  parts  of  the  coast-line.  About  this 
there  is,  however,  very  little  known,  as  most  expeditions  have  had  no 
members  able  either  to  recognize  the  rocks  belonging  to  different  geolog- 
ical systems,  or  to  determine  fossils;  and,  in  most  cases,  no  collections 
seem  to  have  been  made.  Yet  some  indications  are  to  be  found, 
especially  in  DE  RANGE  and  FEILDEN,  Appendix  15,  Geology,  in  NARES, 
Narrative.  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  also  mentions  that  at  Ivsugigsok  the 


8  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

rocks  were  formed  of  gneiss  and  micaslate  with  veins  of  quarts  which, 
according  to  him,  forms  generally  in  arctic  lands  a  poor  soil  for  the 
development  of  vegetation.  Indeed,  my  own  experience  from  Ellesmere- 
land  is  quite  different;  the  regions  with  an  underground  of  primary  rock 
there  being  by  far  the  richest  in  density  of  vegetation  and  number  of 
species.  Now  this  seems  principally  due  to  the  stability  of  the  rock, 
which,  as  being  less  easily  attacked  by  the  frost,  gives  a  less  changing 
surface;  the  debris  of  other  strata  may  form  a  richer  soil  if  it  is  only 
preserved  long  enough  to  be  come  clad  with  vegetation.  A  soil  formed 
of  debris,  for  instance  of  Silurian  limestone,  but  resting  on  Archaean 
rock,  is  probably  the  most  favorable;  and  the  richness  of  the  Foulke 
Fjord  flora  mentioned  in  the  following,  may  perhaps  be  partly  due  to 
such  a  combination  in  the  geological  nature  of  the  place. 

From  Gape  York  the  Archaean  rocks  may  be  followed  northwards 
at  least  to  Littleton  Island,  forming  the  basement  of  the  mountains  along 
the  outer  coast  and  also  the  upper  parts  of  some  of  them.  According 
to  DE  RANGE  and  FEILDEN,  lower  Silurian  (Cambrian?)  strata  of  grit  and 
conglomerate  appear  between  Wolstenholme  and  Whale  Sounds,  and  in 
Foulke  Fjord  there  rest  upon  a  basement  of  gneiss,  thick  layers  of  Ter- 
tiary, probably  Miocene,  sandstone  and  conglomerate  overlaid  by  basalt. 
As  far  as  could  be  judged  from  a  distance,  the  architecture  of  Gape 
Alexander  is  the  same  as  in  Foulke  Fjord,  and  probably  the  same  geo- 
logical structure  continues  further  north  as  far  as  to  the  great  gap  in  the 
coast  filled  by  the  Humboldt  Glacier.  North  of  the  great  glacier  appear 
Silurian  strata,  mostly  limestone,  through  Washington  Land  to  Peter- 
mann  Fjord,  and  from  Hall  Land  northwards  the  coast,  according  to  the 
last-mentioned  authors,  is  built  up  of  older,  azoic  rocks  (Algonkian?). 

The  loose  deposits,  resting  on  the  rock  basement,  are  principally  of 
three  kinds:  —  either  debris  fallen  from  the  cliffs,  or  washed  down  dur- 
ing the  melting  of  the  snow,  or  formed  under  the  surface  of  the  sea 
and  afterwards  raised  to  their  present  position.  This  upheaval  of  the 
land  has  evidently  taken  place  at  a  rather  late  period,  as  may  be  seen 
from  the  well-preserved  organic  remains  found  at  various  heights  above 
the  present  shore-line.  Indeed  the  observations  concerning  these  pheno- 
mena, are  mostly  made  on  the  other  side  of  the  Channels,  but  the  same 
feature  is  also  prevalent  in  North- Western  Greenland.  Raised  beaches 
and  deposits  containing  marine  shells  and  other  remains  proving  their 
origin  on  the  sea  bottom,  play  a  very  important  part  in  the  formation 
of  the  loose  soil  of  these  regions, 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.         9 

So  far  as  can  be  gathered  from  the  literature  at  present  available, 
there  are  hardly  any  deposits  of  an  extent  worth  noting,  that  are  due 
to  glacial  action  in  former  times.  Indeed,  there  are  very  few  indications 
from  which  an  opinion  may  be  formed,  especially  concerning  the  north- 
ern parts  of  our  area;  but  I  think  I  may  be  allowed  to  conclude  from 
them,  that  the  same  holds  true  for  this  region  as  SCHEI  says  in  his 
Prel.  Rep.  Geol.,  p.  9,  about  Ellesmereland:  "there  are  no  materials  lying 
on  those  parts  of  the  country  that  are  not  now  glaciated  that  could,  with 
any  probability,  be  considered  to  result  from  the  action  of  glaciers/' 

Indeed,  the  map  showing  the  extent  of  glaciation  in  America,  which 
accompanies  chapter  XLI  in  GEIKIE,  The  Great  Ice  Age,  Ed.  3,  gives  the 
north-western  part  of  the  land  a  complete  covering  of  ice.  I  am  at  a 
loss  to  understand  why  the  author  of  that  chapter,  Professor  T.  C.  CHAM- 
BERLIN,  has  presumed  that  the  inland  ice  has  reached  so  far,  the  more 
so  as  he  has  not  drawn  the  entire  Arctic  Archipelago  ice-covered,  as  it 
is  in  older  maps.  It  would,  of  course,  be  of  no  small  interest  to  know 
if  such  an  ice  sheet  ever  existed,  as  then  every  species  of  the  present 
flora  must  have  immigrated  in  post-glacial  time.  I  am  most  inclined 
to  think,  indeed,  that  hardly  any  higher  plants  have  lived  there  during 
the  maximum  of  glaciation,  but  still  I  look  upon  the  existence  of  ice- 
free  land  as  probable,  even  if  perhaps  much  larger  glaciers  have  pro- 
truded into  the  fjords.  The  geological  map  of  DAWSON  gives  no  enlight- 
enment about  the  existence  of  glacial  deposits,  and  no  geological  explor- 
ation has  been  made  north  of  Smith  Sound  since  the  time  of  the  NARES 
expedition. 

About  the  present  extension  of  the  ice-sheet  also,  there  are  different 
statements.  The  new  danish  map  shows  in  several  points  the  ice-border 
further  west  than,  for  instance,  it  is  shown  in  the  english  Admiralty 
Chart  and  the  maps  from  which  that  is  compiled.  In  all  probability,  how- 
ever, the  ice-free  land  in  most  parts  of  N.  W.  Greenland  is  rather  broad, 
and  consequently  affords  room  for  the  development  of  vegetation  inland 
also.  As  to  the  approximate  extent  of  the  ice-free,  habitable  land,  it  is, 
of  course,  impossible  to  form  an  opinion  at  present. 

Another  factor  of  great  importance  is  to  be  found  in  the  climate 
of  the  region  and  especially  in  the  amount  of  yearly  precipitation.  Con- 
cerning this,  however,  there  is  but  little  to  be  found  in  the  existing 
literature.  The  results  obtained  in  the  adjacent  Ellesmereland  by  the 
expeditions  of  NARES,  GREELY  and  ourselves  may,  however,  together 
with  what  is  to  be  found  in  the  publications  about  the  voyages  of  KANE, 
HAYES  and  HALL,  enable  us  to  form  the  conclusion  that  the  amount  of 


10  H.  G.   SIMMONS.  [SEC.ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

precipitation  is  very  small  indeed,  probably  not  much  above  100  mm. 
in  most  parts,  perhaps  somewhat  greater  in  the  southern  part,  where 
the  open  "north  water"  is  always  to  be  found  some  miles  from  the 
coast,  perhaps  also  locally  here  and  there  along  the  Kennedy  and  Rob- 
son  Channels.  The  same  circumstances  consequently  prevail  here  as 
throughout  the  Arctic  Islands.  I  shall  not  enter  here  upon  the  influence 
of  temperature  and  snow  covering. 


Historical  Review  of  the  Botanical  Explorations. 

After  this  short  sketch  of  the  physical  geography  of  the  region  in 
question,  I  have  to  discuss,  in  some  detail,  the  material  for  the  know- 
ledge of  the  flora  of  North-Western  Greenland,  contained  in  the  jour- 
nals and  other  publications  from  the  above-mentioned  expeditions.  I  very 
much  regret  not  to  have  had  the  collections  of  the  different  american 
expeditions  for  inspection.  That  those  who  have  determined  the  plants 
have  made  mistakes  on  many  points  cannot  be  doubted,  and  in  several 
cases,  most  probably,  the  collections  from  different  localities,  or  even 
from  far  avay  districts  in  Greenland,  have  been  confounded,  either  by 
the  collectors  themselves  or  afterwards,  thus  causing  a  confusion  which 
makes  it  hardly  possible  to  use  the  statements  at  all;  for  instance,  about 
the  botanical  harvest  of  KANE  and  HAYES.  The  collections  of  the  eng- 
lish  expeditions  I  have  had  an  opportunity  of  revising  at  the  Natural 
History  Museum  of  London  and  at  the  Herbarium  of  the  Royal  Gar- 
dens, Kew,  but  still  here  there  is  much  evidence  lacking  also,  as  the 
localities  are,  in  many  cases,  not  mentioned  in  the  labels;  it  is  also 
impossible  to  see  under  what  different  species  the  specimen  may  have 
originally  been  placed.  In  some  cases,  not  a  single  specimen  bears  out 
the  statements  for  instance  of  HART  or  OLIVER. 

The  first  record  of  plants  from  our  area,  is  to  be  found  in  the  jour- 
nal of  JOHN  Ross's  voyage  in  1818.  The  list  of  plants  in  his  work  is 
unfortunately  of  very  little  value,  as  not  only  are  no  special  localities 
mentioned,  but  even  the  plants,  collected  in  Danish  and  N.  W.  Green- 
land as  well  as  in  Possession  Bay  in  Baffins  Land,  are  not  kept  sepa- 
rate. A  few  notes,  however,  are  found  in  the  running  text  of  Ross's 
journal,  and  of  these  I  have  tried  to  make  use,  as  far  as  possible,  in 
the  following  treatment  of  each  species. 

The  next  explorer  who  collected  plants  in  N.  W.  Greenland  was 
Dr.  PETER  C.  SUTHERLAND  who,  as  a  member  of  the  Franklin  Search 


1893-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      11 

expedition  under  the  commando  of  PENNY,  visited,  on  August  10,  1850. 
Bushnan  Island  where  Ross  had  also  landed.  SUTHERLAND,  who  was 
a  trained  botanist,  has  given  a  list  of  the  plants  collected  during  the 
expedition,  with  localities  mentioned  for  every  species,  most  of  which  are, 
however,  only  collected  to  the  west. 

SUTHERLAND  again  visited  N.  W.  Greenland  in  1852  as  surgeon  of 
the  search-expedition  under  INGLEFIELD,  where  he  probably  took  a  large 
part  in  bringing  together  the  collection  of  plants  named  in  the  "Notes  of 
Flowering  Plants  and  Algae"  which  forms  one  of  the  Appendices  to  INGLE- 
FIELD'S  Summer  Search.  Some  plants  were,  however,  collected  by  the  com- 
mander and  other  members  of  the  expedition.  Collections  were  made 
at  Wolstenholme  Sound  and  Whale  Sound.  Detailed  information  about 
the  points  in  the  first-mentioned  inlet,  where  plants  were  collected,  is 
wanting;  but  from  some  details  and  a  small  list  of  plants  contained  in 
the  journal,  it  may  be  concluded  where  this  collection  was  made  (1.  c., 
p.  59 — 62) :  "After  running  twenty-one  miles  from  Cape  Parry  along  the 
shore,  huts  were  observed  in  a  bight  that  proved  to  be  a  small  deep  water 
bay".  The  place  so  designed  can  only  be  Burdin  Bay,  and,  as  no  other 
landing  in  Inglefield  Gulf  is  mentioned,  I  think  the  Whale  Sound  plants 
were  all  collected  at  Burdin  Bay. 

Dr.  E.  K.  KANE,  who  spent  two  years  (1853 — 55)  in  N.  W.  Green- 
land, has  made  a  good  many  notes  about  the  flora  and  vegetation  of 
the  different  points  visited  during  the  expedition,  and  a  fairly  extensive 
collection  was  brought  home  too,  which  had  been  gathered  by  himself 
and  others,  for  instance  the  Danish  interpreter  PETERSEN.  KANE  had 
also  made  collections  and  notes  when,  in  1850,  he  visited  the  neighbour- 
hood of  Cape  York  in  the  first  GRiNELL-expedition  under  DE  HAVEN. 
His  collections  were  given  to  Mr.  ELIAS  DURAND  who  used  them  for  his 
memoir  "Plantae  Kaneanae  Groenlandicae".  It  is,  however,  to  be  re- 
gretted that  KANE  was  not  more  of  a  trained  botanist,  for  he  had  an 
opportunity  of  examining  parts  of  the  coast  never  visited  by  any  other 
explorer;  and  he  had  doubtless  as  well,  a  keen  eye  for  detecting  even 
the  more  insignificant  species,  and  a  greater  interest  in  botany  than  most 
of  the  travellers  in  these  regions.  Now,  many  of  his  notes  are  deci- 
dedled  based  upon  wrong  identifications.  Another  unfortunate  circum- 
stance is,  that  his  collections,  made  partly  in  Danish  Greenland,  partly 
to  the  north,  have  doubtless  in  some  cases  been  confounded  during  the 
difficult  and  hazardous  retreat  of  the  expedition  after  the  abandonment 
of  the  "Advance".  Much  had  to  be  left  behind;  and  even  if,  through 
KANE'S  indefatigable  exertions,  as  much  was  carried  along  in  the  boats 


12  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

as  could  be  taken  besides  the  indispensable  outfit,  I  think  the  fact  that 
many  specimens  came  into  the  hands  of  the  editor  without  references 
to  the  special  locality,  must  be  accounted  for  by  the  circumstances  of 
the  retreat. 

That  DURAND,  who  was  entrusted  with  the  treatment  of  these  valu- 
able collections,  was  by  no  means  able  to  do  it  in  a  satisfactory  man- 
ner is  clearly  shown,  both  by  the  many  evidently  wrong  identifications 
in  his  paper  —  which  have  since  caused  many  wrong  statements  to  be 
made  about  the  distribution  and  range  of  different  plants,  and  false 
conclusions  to  be  based  upon  them  by  later  authors  —  and  also  by  the 
curious  theoretical  speculations  which  he  has  inserted  in  the  introduc- 
tion to  his  list.  I  have  tried  to  make  as  much  use  as  possible  of  his 
indications  about  the  occurrence  of  the  different  plants,  as  also  of  the 
remarks  to  be  found  in  KANE'S  own  journal;  but  in  many  cases  I  have 
been  obliged  to  take  refuge  in  more  conjecture  based  upon  my  know- 
ledge about  the  plants  that  may  be  really  meant,  or  the  occurrence  of 
which  is  probable.  Where  that  has  not  been  possible,  for  instance  where 
the  record  may  equally  well  be  referred  to  one  species  as  to  another, 
I  have  preferred  to  leave  it  quite  out  of  consideration.  KANE'S  collec- 
tions and  notes  also  form  the  first  contribution  of  the  botany  of  the 
region  north  of  the  Humboldt  Glacier. 

The  collections  brought  home  by  HAYES  from  his  expedition  in 
1860 — 61,  were  also  treated  by  DURAND.  His  list  of  the  plants,  collec- 
ted for  the  greater  part  in  Port  Foulke,  but  some  also  in  other  points 
of  the  N.  W.  Greenland  coast  or  in  Ellesmereland,  has  already  been 
criticized  by  other  authors,  especially  MALMGREN  (Grinnell.  Fl.)  and  NAT- 
HORST  (N.  W.  Gronl.).  Besides  the  evidently  wrong  statements  based 
upon  mistakes  in  identification  of  species,  there  are  also  other  more  or 
less  doubtfull  points  about  the  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  especially,  that  the 
dates  and  localities  given  there,  disagree  in  several  points  with  the  jour- 
nal of  HAYES.  According  to  DURAND,  all  the  plants  were  collected  in 
1861,  none  during  the  autumn  of  1860,  and  at  the  following  places  in 
the  following  order: 

July  (15th  specially  mentioned)  and  August     :  Port  Foulke 
12th  4th:  Netlik 

27th  and  29th:  Gale  Point  (Ellesmereland) 
28th  :  Cape  Isabella 

Sept.    4th  :  Tessiussak. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      13 

According  to  HAYES'S  own  Journal  and  his  address  to  the  American 
Philosophical  Society  of  Philadelphia,  Dec.  6,  1861,  the  expedition  visited 
the  following  places  enumerated  in  chronological  order: 

Proven       Danish  Greenland       Aug.     6-12, 1860 

Upernivik „      12—16  „ 

Tasiusak  (Tessiussak)  „     21—22  „ 

Cape  York     .     .     .     .  N.  W.  „      25 

Cape  Alexander     .     .  „      30  „ 

Littleton  Island       .     .  Sept.     3  „ 

Port  Foulke  ....  „        4  „ 

After  wintering  there,  the  following  points  were  visited  the  next 
year  (besides  those  only  reached  in  sledging  expeditions  during  the 
winter  time): 

Port  Foulke N.  W.  Grenland  until  July     14        1861 

Littleton  Island „         5 — 7     „ 

14, 9 

»        A*     •      n 

Cairn  Point „  ?  „ 

Cape  Isabella    ......  Ellesmereland  ?  „ 

Gale  Point ?  „ 

Hakluyt  Island N.  W.  Greenland  ?  „ 

Burdin  Bay  (Netlik)      ...  ?  (several  days,  not  July  12) 

Itiplik  (Ittiblu?) ? 

Upernivik Danish  Aug.  14 — ?  1861 

Augpalartok  (Aukpadlartok)  .  „         ?  „ 

Godhavn       Sept.      1  „ 

At  the  beginning  of  September,  the  expedition  was  already  far  to 
the  south,  and  consequently  no  plants  could  then  be  collected  in  N.  W. 
Greenland.  There  must,  therefore,  be  something  wrong  about  the  indi- 
cation "Tessiussak,  Sept.  4th"  but  it  is  probably  not  the  date  only. 
DURAND  says:  Dr.  HAYES'S  collections  have  been  confined  to  the  limits 
of  the  78th  and  82nd  parallels  (Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  p.  93),  but  no  col- 
lections are  made  north  of  lat.  79°  and  HAYES  (Op.  Pol.  Sea,  p.  55) 
speaks  explicitly  of  his  "Pr0ven  and  Upernivik  collections",  which  al- 
ready contained  all  the  plants  he  saw  at  "Tessiussak",  when  he  went 
botanizing  there  (Aug.  1860,  see  above).  Those  collections  from  the  more 
southerly  parts  of  Greenland  have,  in  all  probability,  formed  part  of  the 
material  which  DURAND  has  treated  as  having  been  collected  only  north 
of  Melville  Bay,  and  thus  an  explanation  may  be  found  for  the  fact, 


14  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

that  he  has  recorded  some  species  not  previously  known  from  these 
regions.  Such  are  to  be  found  especially  among  the  plants  from  "Tes- 
siussak" which  I  have  also  quite  excluded  from  my  lists  of  occurrence; 
two  species  of  DURAND'S  list  thus  disappear  entirely,  viz.  Campanula 
rotundifolia  and  Lycopodium  annotinum.  From  Netlik  (which  was  not 
visited  July  12th),  there  are  some  doubtful  statements  also,  especially 
Alchemitta  vulgaris,  which  1  have,  however,  entered  with  hesitation. 
Some  of  the  Netlik  and  Port  Foulke  plants  have  indeed  never  been 
found  again  there  by  other  collectors,  but,  as  they  are  found  in  adja- 
cent regions,  they  may  still  grow  there.  Such  are  "Armeria  vulgaris" 
(Statice  maritima),  Betula  nana,  and  Tofieldia  palustris. 

Cases  in  which  I  have  not  excluded  a  species  doubtless  wrongly 
determined,  but  have  only  altered  the  name  as  I  have  thought  right, 
may  be  seen  in  the  following,  from  the  special  synonymies  under  each 
species. 

Still  there  would  be  a  certain  interest  in  knowing  where  the  plants 
from  "Tessiussak,  Sept.  4",  are  really  collected.  Now  the  newer  maps 
of  the  region,  the  English  Admiralty  Chart  of  1896,  as  well,  as  the  new 
Greenland  map  published  by  Commissionen  for  Ledelsen  av  de  geolo- 
logiske  og  geographiske  Undersogelser  i  Grenland,  1906,  know  no  such 
place  in  the  region  north  of  Melville  Bay;  but  in  the  map  accompa- 
nying HAYES,  Arct.  boat  journ.,  there  is  a  place  so  named  at  the  north 
side  of  Wolstenholme  Sound  or  in  Granville  Bay  (the  map  is  very 
inaccurate).  This  place  might  have  been  visited  during  the  journey  north- 
ward in  1860,  even  if  no  visit  there  is  mentioned  by  HAYES,  but  cer- 
tainly not  in  1861.  At  all  events,  such  plants  as  the  above-mentioned 
do  not  appear  there.  It  is  more  probable  indeed,  that  the  species  in 
question  and  some  more,  may  have  been  collected  at  the  Danish  out- 
post (Udliggersted)  of  Tasiusak  in  lat.  73°  21',  when  HAYES  visited  it 
in  1860. 

Opposed  to  this  supposition,  on  the  other  hand,  is  the  fact  mentio- 
ned by  DURAND,  1.  c.,  p.  93,  that  some  plants,  among  them  Lycopodium 
annotinum,  only  recorded  from  the  dubious  "Tessiussak",  were  brought 
home  in  a  living  state.  These  cannot  have  been  taken  so  early  as  the 
first  year.  Most  probably  they  were  collected  at  some  of  the  last  points 
that  were  visited  —  Upernivik,  with  its  environs,  and  Godhavn.  MALM- 
GREN,  1.  c.,  p.  174,  thinks  the  latter  place  the  most  likely  to  be  the  one, 
from  which  HAYES  tried  to  bring  home  a  living  collection  of  arctic 
plants,  and  I  can  only  agree  with  him.  The  name  "Netlik"  also  is  ab- 
sent from  the  new  maps;  but  in  the  same  place  where  it  occurs  in  the 


1898-1902.   No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W-  GREENLAND.      15 

map  of  HAYES  (Arct.  boat  journ.),  there  lies  an  Eskimo  village  named 
Natsilik,  which  is  doubtless  the  same  place.  HAYES  may  have  mis- 
understood the  name,  or  it  may  have  been  altered  since,  which  is  often 
the  case  with  Eskimo  names. 

Another  discrepancy,  which  ought  to  be  mentioned,  exists  between 
DURAND'S  list  and  that  of  HAYES  himself  (Op.  Pol.  Sea,  p.  398 — 99), 
where  some  corrections  are  made;  these  are,  however,  of  different  value, 
being  only  partly  based  upon  more  reliable  determination. 

During  the  next  american  expedition,  that  of  HALL,  1871,  evidently 
very  little  was  done  towards  the  botanical  exploration  of  the  new  land 
visited.  BESSELS,  however,  the  leader  of  the  expedition  after  the  death 
of  HALL,  has  given  a  list  of  twenty-one  or  twenty-two  species  found  in 
.HALL  land,  probably  in  the  vicinity  of  Polaris  Bay  (Amer.  Nordpol 
Exp.,  p.  304).  One  species  is  here  added  to  the  preliminary  list  of  BESSELS 
(Exp.  Pol.  Amer.,  p.  297)  and  the  identifications  of  the  species  are  said 
to  have  been  verified  by  ASA  GRAY.  Notwithstanding,  I  think  that  some 
of  the  records  must  be  based  on  a  mistake;  such,  for  instance,  as  Erio- 
phorum  vaginatum  and  most  probably  also  Carex  dioica.  This  list 
is,  however,  still  of  considerable  interest  as  being  the  first  contribution 
to  the  flora  of  the  northern  parts,  with  the  exception  of  the  few  plants 
mentioned  by  KANE  from  MORTON'S  spring  journey  along  Kennedy  Channel. 

The  NARES  expedition  in  1875—76  visited  Cape  York  and  Fouike 
Fjord  in  the  southern  part  of  our  area,  and,  to  the  north,  the  region  at 
the  mouth  of  Bessels  Bay  as  well  as  at  Polaris  Bay;  and  besides  that, 
one  single  note  is  given  about  the  vegetation  at  BEAUMONT'S  farthest. 
As  the  expedition  had  scientific  investigations  for  its  purpose  more  di- 
rectly than  the  previous  ones,  and  as  it  also  possessed  a  member  spe- 
cially acting  as  its  botanist,  its  botanical  harvest  was  far  greater  than 
that  of  its  predecessors.  Mr.  H.  C.  HART,  the  botanist  of  the  expedition,  and 
several  other  members — Captain,  now  Colonel  H.  W.  FEILDEN,  Doctors 
Moss  and  COPPINGER,  besides  others,  brought  together  a  rather  extensive 
collection  which  is  still  of  great  value  for  the  study  of  the  flora.  It  is, 
however,  to  be  regretted  as  I  have  already  set  forth  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm., 
that,  in  many  cases,  the  specimens  are  labelled  with  insufficient  care. 
In  some  cases  also,  it  seems  quite  certain  that  specimens  from  the  places 
in  Danish  Greenland  visited  by  the  expedition  have  got  mixed  with  the 
N.  W.  Greenland  and  Ellesmereland  collections,  thus  causing  some  wrong 
statements.  In  other  cases,  not  a  single  specimen  in  the  London  her- 
barium confirms  a  statement  that  ought  surely  to  be  thus  supported 


16  H.   G.   SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

if  doubts  are  not  to  arise  in  the  mind  of  one  who  has  had  opportunities 
of  forming  a  tolerably  well-based  opinion  about  the  flora  of  those  regions. 
The  first  list  of  the  plants  collected  during  the  expedition,  is  given  in 
NARES,  Narrative,  where  OLIVER  has  enumerated  the  flowering  plants 
from  Ellesmereland,  and  J.  D.  HOOKER  has  given  some  notes  about  the 
relations  and  peculiarities  of  the  flora,  to  which  I  shall  have  to  come 
back  later  on.  Afterwards  HART  himself  gave  a  detailed  record  of  the 
flora,  with  accounts  about  the  distribution  of  each  separate  species 
(Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.).  He  also  gives  some  notes  about  the  vegetation  of 
the  places  visited,  beginning  with  some  Danish  Greenland  ports  and 
further  on  Cape  York  and  Foulke  Fjord  which  latter  is  represented  as 
"this  most  interesting  of  all  our  havens".  I  can  fully  agree  with  him 
in  this  view,  as  also  in  his  conjecture  that  more  remains  to  be  found 
there,  notwilhstanding  the  Foulke  Fjord  list  has  now,  after  my  two  short 
excursions  at  the  place,  become  by  far  the  largest  of  any  N.  W.  Green- 
land district  of  the  same  extent. 

Further  to  the  north  HART  visited  Hannah  Island  and  Bessels  Bay. 
Among  the  plants  from  the  latter  locality  he  especially  mentions  Poa 
alpina,  which  is,  however,  doubtless  due  to  a  wrong  identification  of  a  form  of 
P.  cenisia,  as  no  specimen  of  the  former  exists  in  the  London  collec- 
tions. Polaris  Bay  was  visited  by  HART  in  May,  when  only  few  plants 
were  discernible,  and  by  COPPINGER  in  July  and  August.  This  station 
is  said  to  be  rather  poor  in  plant-life  (for  instance  only  two  Saxifragae 
and  no  Cyperaceae),  and  HART  is  inclined  to  attribute  this  to  the  cir- 
cumstance that  the  climate  is  severer  there  than  on  the  west  side  of  the 
Channel.  That  may  be  so,  but  1  am  more  inclined  to  think  that  it  is 
caused  by  the  geological  nature  of  the  soil,  the  hard  limestone  forming 
a  very  poor  ground.  The  entire  list  of  Polaris  Bay  contains  only 
twenty-two  species,  or  in  fact  only  nineteen  when  those  are  exluded 
which  are  either  wrongly  determined,  or  cannot  be  upheld  as  separate 
(Papaver  alpinum,  Drdba  rupestris,  Dryas  octopetala).  I  am  hardly 
inclined  to  think  that  this  list  is  complete  if  it  is  to  hold  good  for  a 
wider  range;  but  I  have  indeed  seen  small  districts  much  further  south 
in  the  limestone  region  of  Ellesmereland  having  an  equally  poor  vege- 
tation. 

The  GREELY  expedition  did  not  contribute  much  to  our  knowledge  of 
the  Greenland  flora,  as  its  principal  field  of  work  fell  to  the  west;  still 
we  are  indebted  to  LOCKWOOD  and  BRAINARD  for  some  plants  from  the 
northern-most  points  in  the  world  where  collections  have  been  made 
(what  the  collections  from  the  latest  Danish  East  Greenland  expedition 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       17 

contain  I  do  not  yet  know,  but  plants  from  an  even  still  higher  latitude 
may  exist  among  them).  Only  a  few  plants  could,  however,  be  discerned 
at  Lockwood  Island  in  May. 

How  much  may  be  done,  even  in  a  short  excursion,  by  a  trained 
botanist,  especially  one  who  is  well  aquainted  beforehand  with  arctic 
plants,  is  shown  by  the  visit  of  NATHORST  to  Ivsugigsok  near  Cape  York, 
where  he  went  with  the  "Sofia"  in  1883,  while  his  commander,  NORDEN- 
SKIOLD,  was  on  his  inland  ice  trip  from  the  Aulaitsivik  Fjord  in  Danish 
Greenland.  Notwithstanding  that  it  is  an  open  coast  locality,  he  was 
able,  after  an  excursion  of  only  a  few  hours'  duration,  to  make  up  a 
list  of  fifty-eight  species.  In  comparison  it  may  be  mentioned,  that  the 
whole  list  for  the  wide  district  of  Inglefield  Gulf,  contains  only  seventy- 
three  species ;  and  that  none  of  the  different  collectors  has  there  obtained 
a  greater  number  than  46.  It  may,  however,  be  taken  for  granted,  that 
the  flora  at  Inglefield  Gulf,  must  be  richer  than  in  any  other  part  of 
N.  W.  Greenland,  and  will  yield,  in  the  most  favorable  spots,  even  more 
than  the  Foulke  Fjord  list  (see  p.  20). 

Two  lists  of  plants,  collected  during  expeditions  sent  as  relief  parties 
to  PEARY  during  his  work  in  N.  W.  Greenland,  have  been  published. 
The  first  of  these  is  based  upon  specimens  collected  in  1891  by  Dr. 
BURK  at  Cape  York  and  in  M'Cormick  Bay,  Inglefield  Gulf,  and  in  1892 
by  Mr.  MEEHAN  who  has  treated  these  collections  in  a  paper  in  the 
Proceed.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc.  of  Philadelphia,  1893  (Contr.  Greenl.).  MEEHAN 
enumerates  a  good  many  localities  where  he  has  botanized,  but  from 
several  of  them  not  a  single  plant  is  mentioned  in  his  accounts  of  dis- 
tribution which,  moreover,  are  very  imperfect.  Another  weak  point  of 
MEEHAN'S  paper  is,  that  he  has  been  entirely  unable  to  identify  his 
plants  as  is  shown  by  HOLM,  who  has  given  a  long  list  of  corrections 
(Contr.  Fl.  Greenl.).  Mr.  HOLM  has,  however,  only  had  opportunities  of 
controlling  the  determination  of  some  of  the  plants,  represented  in  the 
National  Herbarium  of  Washington  ;  and  several  more  of  MEEHAN'S 
statements  seem  to  be  in  a  great  need  of  corroboration  or  correction. 

Another  list  of  plants  collected  in  the  PEARY  auxiliary  expedition 
of  1894  by  Dr.  WETHERILL  is  made  up  at  Harvard  University.  The 
names  of  those  who  are  answerable  for  the  determinations,  seem  to  imply 
that  they  are  reliable,  in  general  at  least;  and,  as  the  collections  seem 
to  have  been  made  with  care  and  without  any  intermixture  of  plants 
from  different  localities,  this  list  is  of  great  value  and  interest,  the  more 
so  as  it  contains  rather  a  large  number  of  additions  to  the  flora  of  our 
area.  The  flora  of  Cape  York  especially  is  enriched  with  several  in- 


18  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

teresting  species,  whose  occurrence  here  seems  to  point  to  an  im- 
migration over  Melville  Bay  from  Danish  Greenland,  as  they  are  found 
neither  to  the  north,  nor  in  Ellesmereland.  WETHERILL  also  seems  to  be 
the  only  botanist,  who  has  made  collections  in  the  Carey  Islands  (Bjor- 
ling  Island). 

In  1899 — 1901,  the  american  geologist  R.  STEIN  made  some  collect- 
ions of  plants  on  the  west  side  of  Smith  Sound  as  well  as  at  Cape 
York,  Inglefield  Gulf  and  Foulke  Fjord.  The  specimens  have  been  deter- 
mined by  Mr.  HOLM  of  Brookland  D.  C.,  who  has  kindly  sent  me  a  list 
for  publication.  Part  of  it  I  have  already  used  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  the 
rest  is  used  here.  In  some  instances,  I  have  employed  other  names 
than  those  in  Mr.  HOLM'S  list,  and,  in  one  single  case  (Salix  arctica 
for  S.  glauca  and  S.  groenlandica),  I  have  felt  obliged  to  differ  from 
his  opinion.  I  am  sorry  not  to  have  consulted  further  with  him  on  this 
point,  but  I  hope  that  he  will  excuse  me,  as  I  have  not  had  time  to  do 
so  at  present. 

In  1903,  the  late  Mr.  L.  MYLIUS  ERICHSEN  made  a  small  collection 
at  Granville  Bay,  and,  in  1905,  the  Rev.  KNUD  BALLE  brought  home  a 
somewhat  larger  collection  from  Wolstenholme  Sound.  Both  collections 
are  determined  by  Dr.  C.  H.  OSTENFELD  of  Copenhagen  (Fl.  pi.  Cape 
York). 

Lastly,  I  must  mention  my  own  material  from  Foulke  Fjord,  con- 
taining 130  numbers  of  flowering  plants  and  ferns,  and  representing  76 
species.  The  whole  collection  was  made  during  our  two  short  visits  to 
Foulke  Fjord,  in  the  course  of  three  excursions  which  together  were 
of  hardly  30  hours'  duration.  The  lower  land  between  Reindeer  Point 
and  Etah  was,  on  both  occasions,  my  field  of  excursion,  that  is  to  say, 
I  had  only  an  opportunity  of  walking  over  a  strip  of  ground  about  half 
a  mile  in  breath  and  four  miles  in  length.  It  is  much  to  be  regretted, 
that  I  could  not  reach  the  interior  part  of  the  fjord  nor  the  higher  slopes 
and  plateaus  inland;  as  I  cannot  but  think  that  they  would  have  yielded 
important  additions  to  my  list  —  especially  in  the  matter  of  bog-  and 
water-plants,  which  are  almost  entirely  lacking  in  my  collection.  I  could 
also  have  wished  very  much  for  a  trip  over  to  Port  Foulke,  where  I 
should  perhaps  have  been  able  to  verify  some  of  the  doubtful  statements 
from  HAYES'S  time.  The  leader  of  the  expedition,  however,  was  too  anx- 
ious to  shorten  our  stay  in  Foulke  Fjord,  to  allow  time  for  a  closer 
exploration  which  might  have  given  valuable  results.  It  was  impossible 
even  to  obtain  a  landing  at  Cape  Alexander,  which  was  very  desirable, 
and  could  easily  have  been  effected,  as  we  steamed  past  it  so  close  as 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      19 

to  have  the  rich,  green  slopes  in  full  view;  but  it  was  deemed  more 
profitable  to  spend  the  time  in  walrus-hunting. 

The  table  below,  which  I  have  compiled  in  order  to  show  the  grad- 
ual widening  of  our  knowledge  about  the  flora  of  the  region,  I  have 
thought  to  be  of  some  interest;  the  more  so,  as  it  also  gives  some  hints 
concerning  the  results  to  be  expected  from  future  exploration  and  about 
the  different  degrees  of  accuracy  in  the  observations  of  different  travellers. 
It  must,  however,  be  kept  in  mind,  that  some  places  are  visited  only 
during  times  when  very  little  can  be  found;  such,  for  instance,  are  Gran- 
ville  and  Lafayette  Bays,  and  Lockwood  Island;  but,  on  the  other  hand 
also  many  places  have  certainly  been  very  imperfectly  explored.  Judging 
from  the  brilliant  verdure  of  the  slopes  of  Gape  Alexander,  I  cannot 
doubt  that  I  should  have  been  more  than  repaid,  for  a  few  hours'  visit 
there,  by  a  list  of  at  least  30 — 40  species,  and  a  corresponding  collection. 

The  table  does  not  give  the  numbers  of  species  for  each  locality  in 
such  a  way  as  they  are  to  be  taken  directly  from  the  different  lists,  but 
I  have  tried  to  make  use  of  as  many  statements  as  possible,  and  have 
entered  all  records  that  are  tolerably  reliable,  and  not  too  vague  as  to 
the  locality.  If  the  somewhat  indistinct  statements  of  the  older  authors 
had  been  used  in  a  larger  degree,  of  course  the  numbers,  for  instance, 
for  Ross,  KANE,  etc.  would  have  been  larger  at  the  expense  of  the  later 
collectors,  who  have  given  exact  records  about  their  specimens.  Such 
indications  as  ,,Smith  Sound  stations",  nlnglefield  Gulf",  etc.,  are  of 
course  left  out  of  consideration  here,  even  if  sometimes  I  have  mentioned 
them  in  the  following  statements  about  the  occurrence  of  each  separate 
species. 

If  the  14  species,  admitted  in  the  special  treatment  as  doubtfull,  are 
added  to  the  number  in  the  table,  we  get  a  total  of  122  species.  When 
NATHORST  (N.  VV.  Gronl.)  treated  the  flora  in  1884,  he  gave  a  list  of  88 
species  to  which,  in  his  Nachtr.,  4  more  are  added.  Notwithstanding 
the  fact  that  I  have  excluded  19  (besides  some  for  which  I  use  other 
names),  tbe  flora  now  reckons  16  species  more  or,  in  other  words,  35 
species  have  been  added  since  then.  Some  of  these,  however,  had  al- 
ready been  found  before  NATHORST  wrote  his  compilation,  but  they  were 
either  wrongly  determined,  or  were  excluded  by  him  as  too  doubtful  to 
insert  in  the  list.  Thus  the  new  species  are,  in  fact,  only  29,  found  by 
MEEHAN,  WETHERILL,  STEIN,  and  myself. 

As  I  shall  have  to  use  the  numbers  of  species  for  the  whole  area 
and  its  different  parts  in  the  following  discussion  about  the  affinity  of 
the  flora,  I  am  sorry  that  I  have  not  been  able  to  make  sure,  at  least 


20                                                              H.  G.  SIMMONS.                      [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Table  I. 

00 

2 

tn 

M 

O 

^ 

Sutherland  1850 

1 

22 

0) 
SS 
H 

tc 

= 

18 

i 

« 

3 
u: 

•— 
:c 
i 

:f. 
V 

>, 

a 

Z 

©* 

r~ 

55 

30 

T—  i 

B3 

i 

!f. 

<D 

s: 

x 

7 

o 
to 

i- 

td 

35 

|  Lockwood  1882 

Nathorst  1883 

*M 

5 

a 

~ 
-. 

^ 

Wetherill  1894- 

Simmons  1898-99 

| 

T 

_c 

'a! 

-7: 

|  MyliusErichsen  1903 

m 

^H 

C 

"3 

22 

Total  number  of  spe- 
cies known  at  present 

3 

9 

13 
11 

3 

2 
1 
1C, 
23 
8 
8 

15 

2 

IS 

21 

12 

:U 

1-2 
18 

4 

58 

1 
11 

1 

- 

27 

5 
5 

10 

id 
21 
22 

7(i 

11 

:» 
4 

23 

G 

23 

10 
39 
58 
34 

6 
5 
73 
39 
29 
10 
24 
22 
7 
11 
4 
81 
16 
23 
8 
8 
12 
25 
4 

Sannders  Island  (Agpa)      

Inglefield  Gulf  

Burdin  Bay  (Netiulumi,  Netlik)  .     .     . 

Cape  Alexander  &  Sutherland  Island    . 

Fog  Inlet  &  Bedevilled  Reach  .... 
Rensselaer  Bay      

Bessels  Bay  &  Hannah  Island  .... 

3 
J 

i) 

/ 

21 

12 

37 
21 

33 

7 

21 
1 

42 

( 

4 

58 

13 

19 
2 

(52 
17 

71! 
9 

45 
1 

G 

23 

108 

Additions  to  the  N.  W.  Greenland  flora 

of  the  value  of  all  the  existing  indications;  especially  as  there  is  another 
weak  point  always  to  be  calculated  with,  viz.,  the  imperfect  exploration 
of  most  parts.  In  the  hope  of  inducing  some  competent  botanist  to  make 
a  revision  of  the  american  collections,  which  may  supply  some  future 
worker  on  the  N.  W.  Greenland  flora  with  material  less  studded  with  "?", 
I  will  point  out  where  those  collections  seem  to  be  kept. 

The  specimens  of  KANE,  HAYES,  BESSELS,  BURK  and  MEEHAN  are 
probably  all  included  in  the  collections  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sci- 
ences of  Philadelphia;  at  least  it  is  especially  mentioned,  that  some  of 
them  belong  to  that  herbarium.  The  collections  of  WETHERILL  were 
determined  at  Harvard  University,  which  probably  possesses  them.  As 
to  where  the  "private  collection"  of  GREELY  is  kept,  I  am  entirely  ignor- 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       21 

ant.  A  thorough  revision— especially  of  the  KANE  and  HAYES  plants — 
would  be  of  the  greatest  value;  not  only  for  an  exact  knowledge  of  the 
N.  W.  Greenland  flora,  but  also  for  the  settling  of  several  questions 
concerning  the  flora  of  Danish  Greenland,  for  which  a  considerable 
number  of  plants  is  recorded  by  DURAND  alone,  most  probably  because 
he  has  arrived  at  wrong  determinations. 

A  striking  feature  in  the  above  table,  is  the  very  different  number 
of  species  for  the  stations  explored.  The  small  area  of  Foulke  Fjord  has 
yielded  81  plants — a  number  greater  than  that  from  any  other  single 
locality ;  and  even  the  list  arrived  at  in  my  short  stay  there,  is  larger 
than  that  of  the  entire  area  of  the  widely-branching  district  of  Inglefield 
Gulf,  which,  running  far  inland  into  a  country  of  similar  geological 
nature,  doubtless  affords  still  better  conditions  than  those  of  Foulke 
Fjord.  During  my  short  stay  at  the  latter  place,  I  found  again  all  the 
species  previously  recorded  for  it  with  the  exception  only  of  5  (among 
which  2  at  least  are  somewhat  doubtful),  and  I  added  a  considerable 
number,  including  9  species  new  to  the  whole  of  N.  W.  Greenland. 
I  think  that  several  more  species  might  still  be  found,  were  a  trained 
botanist  to  get  an  opportunity  of  surveying  more  than  the  small  patch 
of  ground  which  I  was  able  to  reach  to  investigate. 

Next  to  Foulke  Fjord  stands  Ivsugigsok  with  a  list  of  58  species. 
A  few  indeed  have  been  excluded  from  the  list  of  NATHORST  (Dryas 
octopetala,  Luzula  spicata,  Glyceria  angustata,  Taraxacum  officinale) 
but  they  have  been  replaced  by  others  through  the  revision  of  his  mate- 
rial so  as  to  give  the  original  numbers  unaltered.  It  is  due  principally 
to  the  keen  eye  of  NATHORST,  trained  in  the  excellent  school  of  former 
Swedish  arctic  expeditions,  but  partly  also  to  WETHERILL,  that  the  Cape 
York  region  now  shows  a  list  of  75  species.  Its  relatively  close  neigh- 
bourhood to  Danish  Greenland  may,  to  a  certain  degree,  have  facilitated 
an  immigration  and  perhaps  affords  an  explanation  of  this  abundance; 
but  I  think  most  of  those  plants  will  be  found  further  north  also,  and 
will  not  be  confined  to  the  open  coast  localities  of  Cape  York. 

That  the  figures  for  Wolstenholme  Sound,  34,  far  from  represent 
the  true  number  of  its  flora  can  hardly  be  doubted,  especially  as  many 
common  species  are  absent  from  it.  Here  much  is  left  for  future  explo- 
ration. In  Inglefield  Gulf,  one  locality  only — Northumberland  Island- 
has  reached  as  yet  a  number  of  39  species.  Of  these  STEIN'S  list  con- 
tains 38.  None  of  the  branch  fjords,  each  equalling  Foulke  Fjord  in 
size  and  probably  surpassing  it  in  conditions  of  plant-life,  has  as  yet 
yielded  as  much  as  30  species;  and  the  total  number  of  recorded  plants 


H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


is  not  more  than  73.  As  some  of  these  are  rare  species,  not  found  in 
other  N.  W.  Greenland  places,  it  appears  that  a  great  many  common  spe- 
cies must  have  been  entirely  overlooked  here. 

From  the  Carey  Islands  5  plants  only  are  noted  (Potentilla  Vahliana, 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  Cerastium  alpinum,  Salix  ardica,  Catabrosa 
algida).  In  all  probability,  some  more  may  be  found  there ;  but  judging 
from  my  own  experience  in  some  small  islets  in  Jones  Sound,  about  which 
I  shall  elsewhere  give  an  account,  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  number 
of  species  which  have  found  their  way  to  these  small  isolated  islands, 
surrounded  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year  by  open  water,  may  be  very 
small.  Among  species  which  I  think  are  most  likely  to  be  found  there, 
I  may  mention  Cochlaria  officinalis  and  Glyceria  distans}  growing 
generally  around  the  gulls'  nests  in  the  rookeries.  It  is,  however,  to  be 
regretted  that  WETHERILL,  who  alone  has  contributed  to  the  botanical 
knowledge  about  these  islands,  has  not  published  any  notes  about  their 
vegetation. 

The  numbers  of  species  for  the  localities  of  KANE  are  small  enough 
indeed,  even  Rensselaer  Harbor  only  reaching  23.  This  may  be  due 
partly  to  the  loss  of  some  parts  of  the  collections,  partly  perhaps  to  the 
hard  climate  of  the  nearly  always  ice-bound  shore  of  Kane  Basin.  The 
existence  of  such  species  as  Lesquerella  arctica,  Hesperis  Pallasii, 
Ranunculus  Sabinei,  Pedicularis  ardica,  some  of  which  are  only 
found  here,  rather  induces  one  to  think  that  the  broad  stretch  of  ice-free 
land  here  may  have  allowed  the  development  of  a  flora,  which  will  at 
some  future  time  yield  many  more  species. 

Concerning  the  whole  region  north  of  the  Humboldt  Glacier,  there 
is  hardly  anything  more  to  be  said,  than  that  it  is  far  too  imperfectly 
explored  as  yet  for  any  inferences  to  be  drawn  about  the  real  bulk  of 
its  flora.  Only  27  species  are  at  present  known  with  certainty  from  these 
parts;  whereas  the  number  for  Grinnell  Land,  which  lies  in  the  same 
latitude  and  is  only  separated  from  N.  W.  Greenland  by  the  narrow 
Kennedy  and  Robson  Channels,  has  supplied  a  list  of  at  least  72  vas- 
cular plants. 

As  an  appendix  to  this  historical  review  of  the  botanical  exploration 
of  N.  W.  Greenland,  and  in  order  to  facilitate  the  identification  of  the 
different  localities  mentioned,  I  have  compiled  the  following  list  of  loca- 
lities with  their  approximate  place  so  far  as  it  appears  from  the  maps 
to  which  I  have  access  in  the  reports  and  journals  of  the  different  expe- 
ditions, as  well  as  from  the  English  sea-chart  of  Smith  Sound,  the  new 
Danish  map  mentioned  above,  or  from  lists  of  determinations  of  places. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      23 

The  rough  sketch-map  accompanying  the  list,   will  further  facilitate  the 
use  of  it. 


List  of  N.  W.  Greenland  localities,  with  their  approximate 
geographical  position: 

Lat.  N.          Long.  W. 
Cape  York  region: 

Bushnan  Island    .     .     .     .     .     .  75°  59'  65° 

Cape  York 75°  55'  65V2° 

Ivsugigsok 76°    7'  66° 

Cape  Dudley  Digges     ....  76°    1'  69° 

Cape  Atholl 76°  23'  69V2° 

Wolstenholme  Sound: 

Wolstenholme  Island    ....  76°  24'  70° 

Dalrymple  Rock 76°  28'  70° 

Saunders  Island  (Agpa)     .     .     .  76°  35'  70V2° 

Umanak       76°  30'  69° 

Granville  Bay  (Iterdlagsuak)      .  76°  45'  69—70° 

Carey  Islands: 

Bjorling  Island     .......  76°  49'  72° 

Inglefield  Gulf: 

Burdin  Bay 77°  71° 

Natsilik  (Netlik) 77° 

Netiulumi .  77°  10' 

Whale  Sound 77°  15' 

Northumberland  Island  (Kujata)  77°  22'  71Va° 

Hakluyt  Island  (Agpasuak)  .     .  77°  24'  72° 

Cape  Acland ? 

Fan  Glacier ? 

Bowdoin  Bay 77°  36'  69° 

Redcliffe  House    ......  77°  35'  70° 

M'Cormick  Bay 77°  38'  69V2° 

Robertson  Bay 77°  48'  70V2° 

Verhoef  Nunatak 77°  50'  70° 

Cape  Robertson 77°  50'  71° 

Glacier  Valley 

Foulke  Fjord  region : 

Sutherland  Island      .....  78°    9'  73° 

Cape  Alexander 78°  10'  73° 


24 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Lat.  N.  Long.  W. 

Foulke  Fjord 78°  18'  72° 

Port  Foulke 

Point  Jensen 

Reindeer  Point 

Etah     ........ 

Littleton  Island  (Pikira)     .     .     78°  23'  72Va° 

Shore  of  Kane  Basin: 

Fog  Inlet 

Bedevilled  Reach 

Renselaer  Bay  (Harbour)  .     .    78°  37'  71° 

Butler  Island 78°  37'  71° 

Bancroft  Bay 78°  47'  69° 

Mary  Minturn  River     ...    78°  25—47'  68-69' 

Washington  Land: 

Lafayette  Bay 80°  30'  68° 

Besseis  Bay 80°  45-81°  10'  63° 

Cape  Bryan 81°    9'  64° 

Hannah  Island 81°  10'  64° 

Cape  Morton 81°  11'  63° 

Hall  Land: 

Polaris  Bay 81°  35'  62° 

Peary  Land: 

Wood  Point 82°  25' 

Lockwood  Island  .  83°  24'  40° 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      25 


26 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Short  Notes  about  the  affinities  of  the  Flora. 


As  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  ascertain,  the  flora  of  N.  W.  Green- 
land includes  a  number  of  108  flowering  plants  and  ferns,  or  7  less  than 
that  of  Ellesmereland.  There  besides  are  14  more  recorded,  which,  how- 
ever, almost  certainly  are  not  really  members  of  the  flora  of  our  area. 


Table  II. 


13 

5 

c 

3 

c 

1 

| 

"5 

1 

"3 

"c 

at 

O 

V 

• 

2i 

1 

£ 
O 

£ 
0 

| 

B 

0 

£ 

C 

s 

. 

Q 

. 

n 

^ 

w 

in 

— 

^ 

H 

W 

85* 

85* 

& 

85* 

55 

Compositae    .    .    . 

7 

6 

6 

Cruciferae.    .    .    . 

13 

12 

12 

Campanulaceae 

1 

1 

2 

Papaveraceae    .    . 

1 

1 

1 

Scrophulariaceae  . 

4 

6 

3 

Ranunculaceae  .    . 

6 

6 

6 

Borraginaceae 

1 

Caryophyllaceae    . 

10 

10 

12 

Polemoniaceae  .    . 

1 

Portulacaceae    .    . 

1 

Gentianaceae     .    . 

1 

Polygonaceae     .    . 

2 

2 

3 

Plumbaginaceae    .         1 

1 

1 

Betulaceae     .    .    . 

1 

1 

Primulaceae      .    . 

Salicaceae      .    .    . 

1 

2 

2 

Diapensiaceae  .    . 

1 

1 

1 

Liliaceae   .... 

1 

1 

Ericaceae  .... 

2 

4 

3 

Juncaceae  .... 

3 

3 

5 

Pyrolaceae     .    .    . 

1 

1 

1 

Cyperaceae     .    .    . 

15 

9 

17 

Onagraceae   ...  I      1 

1 

1 

Gramineae    .    .    . 

20 

17 

21 

Empetraceae  ...         1 

1 

1 

Lycopodiaceae  .    . 

1 

1 

1 

Rosaceae    ....         5 

6 

7 

Equisetaceae  .    .    . 

2 

1 

2 

Saxifragaceae  .    .       12 

9 

11 

Folypodiaceae    .    . 

4 

3 

4 

Crassulaceae  .    .    . 

1 

Species  . 

115 

108 

128 

Families 

24 

27 

28 

1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      27 

The  108  species  belong  to  the  families  included  in  the  above 
table,  of  which  each  is  represented  by  the  number  of  species  mentioned 
in  the  column  for  N.  W.  Greenland.  The  corresponding  figures  for  N.  E. 
Greenland  and  Ellesmereland  are  added  to  facilitate  comparisons. 

Already  from  the  above  table  it  appears  that  there  is  a  consider- 
able conformity  between  the  floras  of  the  three  districts  here  compared. 
The  genera  with  the  greatest  number  of  species,  are  also  nearly  the 
same  in  N.  W.  Greenland  as  in  Ellesmereland;  viz.  Saxifraga  (11)  9, 
Car  ex  (11)  and  Ranunculus  (6)  6,  Pedicularis  (4),  Draba  (5)  and  Poten- 
litla  (4)  5,  Glyceria  (4)  4.  The  figures  in  ()  represent  the  number  of 
species  in  Ellesmereland,  where  also  Poa  has  5  species  (only  3  in 
N.  W.  Greenland).  Carex  indeed  appears  to  be  far  less  represented  in 
the  flora  of  N.  W.  Greenland,  than  in  that  of  Ellesmereland  or  of 
N.  E.  Greenland,  where  it  reckons  13  species;  but  that  most  probably 
is  accounted  for  by  the  less  accurate  exploration  of  the  first-mentioned 
region,  rather  than,  as  HART  thinks,  by  a  more  arctic  climate  (Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  p.  9). 

Before,  however,  I  go  into  further  detail,  I  think  it  will  be  best  to 
facilitate  the  survey  of  the  floras  of  N.  W.  Greenland  and  the  neigh- 
bouring lands  by  the  following  tabulated  statements  of  the  distribution 
of  the  species  (Table  III).  All  the  species  found  with  certainty,  either 
in  N.  W.  Greenland,  N.  E.  Greenland,  or  Ellesmereland,  are  inserted 
here;  and  further,  their  appearance  in  Danish  West  Greenland,  in  the 
Arctic  American  Archipelago,  or  in  the  arctic  parts  of  the  American 
Continent  indicated.  In  the  first  column,  that  of  Danish  West  Green- 
land, a  " — "  before  the  figur  of  the  approximative  degree  of  limit,  signifies 
that  the  species  is  spread  so  far  south;  after  the  figure,  it  signifies  the 
northern  limit  of  the  plant  so  far  as  known;  the  sign  " — "  by  itself,  signifies 
that  it  is  spread  along  the  whole  coast.  In  the  N.  E.  Greenland 
column,  the  signs  are  used  in  the  same  manner.  The  distribution,  how- 
ever, south  of  Scoresby  Sound  is  left  entirely  out  of  consideration  as 
being  of  no  interest  here.  An  "S"  signifies  that  the  species  is  not  found 
north  of  Scoresby  Sound.  As  previously  mentioned,  I  have  only  taken 
up  in  the  list,  such  E.  Greenland  species  as  are  found  from  Gape  Hold 
with  Hope  (Broer  Ruys)  northward  if  they  are  not  already  entered  as 
N.  W.  Greenland  or  Ellesmereland  plants. 

In  the  column  for  N.  W.  Greenland,  "S"  signifies  occurrence  south 
of  the  Hurnboldt  Glacier,  "N"  northward  from  there.  A  "+"  is  used 
for  species  found  only  in  a  single  place.  In  the  Ellesmereland  column, 
"S"  is  used  as  the  sign  for  occurrence  in  the  southern,  "N"  in  the 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


northern  part  of  the  land,  "H"  for  the  Hayes  Sound  region,  "+"  for  a 
single  locality. 

In  the  columns  for  the  Arctic  American  Archipelago,  and  for  the 
arctic  part  of  the  Continent,  I  have  not  been  able  to  give  such  detailed 
indications  about  the  distribution  as  desirable;  but  have  been  reduced 
to  designating  occurrence  in  some  parts  of  the  area  in  question  only  by 
a  "  +  ".  In  a  few  cases,  I  have  had  access  to  records  which  have  made 
it  possible  to  give  a  hint  about  the  probable  way  of  immigration  by 
indicating  different  districts  from  where  alone  the  species  is  known : 
Baffinsland  with  "B",  the  southern  islands  with  "S",  the  western  with 
"W",  and  the  eastern  part  with  "E". 

The  last  column  contains  references  to  the  place  of  each  species  in 
table  VI. 


Table  III. 


a 

C 

£ 

_eS 

-    T3 
.fill 

cn     - 

c 
•f  1 

0) 

S   o 

*i  ^ 

cn  u 
"E'C  -g 

S  a  « 

rCB 

°e    £ 

2  "5 

1  *c 

hi 

0) 

J  ». 

H*H  H    2 

^ 

§  O 

~     * 

.    « 

~       4J 

S 

^  ^ 

.«  ^  -g 

C 

Q  jj 
• 

-fJ      U 

"  " 

• 

.si 

"^^o 

a, 

B 

>2; 

^ 

3 

"H  ^ 

IM 

3 
0 

|^ 

^^ 

O 

ft 

O 

Taraxacum  arcticum  .... 

-70 

E 

hyparcticum      .    . 

S4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

A 

phymatocarpum    . 

-70 

-70 

S 

S4 

G-A-D 

pumilum  .... 

SN 

4- 

A—  D 

arctogenum  .    .    . 

-68 

S 

G 

Arnica  alpina     

-64 



S 

SN 

4. 

4- 

U—  A 

Antennaria  alpina      .... 

72- 

Sf 

H  + 

4- 

4- 

U 

Erigeron  uniflorus  

-64 

— 

N 

4- 

-+• 

U 

—       compositus     .... 

-70 

— 

s 

N 

4- 

+ 

A 

Campanula  uniflora   .... 

— 

— 

s 

SH 

4 

4- 

U 

rolundifolia      .    . 

70- 

— 

B 

4 

S 

Pedicularis  capitata    .... 

S4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

A 

hirsuta      .... 

-64 

— 

SN 

— 

4- 

4- 

U-A 

lanata  

-67 

S4- 

SN 

+ 

4- 

A-D 

flammea   .... 

— 

— 

S  + 

+ 

D 

arctica  

s+ 

H 

W 

W 

A 

1898-1902.  No.  16  ]     FLO  W .  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       29 


Danish 
West  Greenland 

North-eastern 
Greenland 

North-western 
Greenland 

Ellesmereland 

Arctic  American 
Archipelago 

Arctic  parts 
of  the  American 
Continent 

> 

jj 
"2 

£ 

_G 

OH 

2 

o 

68- 

S  + 

s 

Mertensia  maritima    .... 
Polemonium  humile     .... 
Gentiana  tenella      
Statice  maritima     
Androsace  septentrionalis   .    . 
Diapensia  lapponica  .... 
Myrtillus  uliginosa  
Vaccinium  Vitis  idaea    .    .    . 
Cassiope  tetragona  

-68 

-64 
-64 

-74 

S 
S 

s+ 

s 

s+ 
•  s 

S4- 

s 

s+ 

N4- 

N+ 
SH 

+ 

B 

+ 

+ 

-4- 

4 

4 

W 
E 

4 
4- 
4 

s 

E 
E 

U 
A 
D 
U 

S 

u 

Rhododendron  lapponicum.    . 
Pyrola  rotundifolia     .... 
Chamaenerium  latifolium   .    . 
Empetrum  nigrum  ..... 
Dryas  integrifolia   
—     octopetala  

73- 

73  Va- 

s+ 
s 
s 
s 

SN 

H  + 
H 

+ 
+ 
4- 
+ 
+ 

4- 
4- 
4- 
+ 

+ 

A-D 
U 
U-A 

U 
A 
E 

Potentilla  pulchella  
rubricaulis  .... 
nivea  

-69 

9 

-64 

-74 

s 
s 
s 

- 

+ 
+ 

s 

4- 
4- 
4- 

U-A 
A 

u 

Vahliana     .... 
emarginata     .     .    . 
maculata     .... 
Chrysosplenium  alternifolium  . 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia   .    .    . 
flagellaris  .... 
aisoid&s  

-69 
-67 
70- 

-7a 

73V2- 

s 

SN 

9 

SN 
SN 
S+ 

SN 

9 

s+ 
s+ 

+ 

4- 

+ 

4- 

+ 

4. 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 
+ 
4- 

A 
U-A 
S 
A 
U 
A-D 

u 

Hirculus     .... 
tricuspidata   .    .    . 
Tiieraciifolia  .    .    . 
nivalis    

-64 

-72 
70- 

73V2- 

S 

s 

s 

+ 
+ 
4- 
4. 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 

A-E 
A 
E 

u 

stellaris  

s 

4. 

4 

u 

groenlandica  .    .    . 
*exaratoides   .    .     . 

9 

— 

SN 

s 

s+ 

4- 

4- 
+ 

U 
A-D 

u 

rivularis     .... 
Rhodiola  rosea    

- 

- 

s 

- 

4- 
4. 

+ 
+ 

U 

s 

Hesperis  Pallasii     

SN 

4- 

-f 

A 

Braya  purpurascens  .... 
Arabis  Hookeri    

70 
—64 

- 

SN 

S4- 

SN 

4- 

+ 
+ 

U-A 
A 

—       arenicola      

70 

70 

HN 

+ 

A 

Draba  crassifolia    

70—64 

73V9 

s 

69 

SN 

4_ 

u 

—      fladnisensis  

64 

s 

4. 

u 

—      subcapitata  

9 

9 

9 

SH 

_i_ 

A 

—      nivalis  

s 

_|_ 

u 

—      hirta     

SN 

4. 

_(_ 

u 

—      incana 

70- 

S  + 

9 

W 

S 

30 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Danish 
West  Greenland 

North-eastern 
Greenland 

North-western 
Greenland 

Ellesmereland 

Arctic  American 
Archipelago 

Arctic  parts 
of  the  American 
Continent 

> 

v 
"2 

£ 

_c 

A 

I 

c 

Lesquerella  arctica  
Cardamine  pratensis  .... 
bellidifolia    .    .    . 
Eutrema  Edwardsii    .... 
Cochlearia  officinalis  .... 
Papaver  radicatum     .... 
Ranunculus  glacialis  .... 
affinis   

-69 

70- 

70 
67 

72- 
72 

SN 
S 

s+ 

SN 
SN 

S  + 

HN 

SN 

S  + 

+ 
B 

4- 
+ 
+ 
+ 

+ 

4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

A 
U 
U 
U—  A 
U 
U 
E 
U-A 

sulphureus     .    .    . 
niualis  
Sabinei  
pygmaeus  .... 
hyperboreus   .    .    . 
Arenaria  ciliata      
Horikenya  peploides     .... 
Alsine  Rossii  

-70 

-68 

-69 

— 

S 

SN 
S 
S 
S  + 

s+ 
s 

SN 
H 
SH 

S+ 

SN 

+ 

+ 
+ 

-f 

B 

+ 

4- 
4- 
+ 
4 
4- 
9 

+ 

4- 

U 
U 

A 
U 
U 
U 
U 
A 

verna    

-64 

s 

+ 

4- 

U 

Sagina  intermedia      .... 
nivalis    

-63 
-64 

73Vo- 

H4- 

4- 

U 
D-S 

Cerastium  alpinunt     .... 
Stellaria  humifusa      .... 
longipes    
Melandrium  affine      .... 
triflorum    .    .    . 
apetalum    .    .    . 
Silene  acaulis      .... 

-65 
-65 
-69 

SN 
S 

s 

SN 
S 
SN 
S 

SH 

9 

+ 
+ 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

U 

U 
U 
U 
G 
U-A 
U 

Montia  lamprosperma     .    .    . 
Polygonum  viviparutn     .    .    . 
Oxyria  digyna    

— 

- 

S  + 

SN 
SN 

- 

4- 
+ 

9 

4- 
+ 

S 
U 
U 

Koenigia  islandica      .... 
Setula  nana    ...        .    . 

-63 

73  Va- 

S 

9 

s 
s 

Salix  arctica  

SN 

+ 

4- 

U-A 

herbacea    

s 

4- 

4- 

U 

Tofieldia  palustris  
Juncus  castaneus     
—      biylumis  

64-70 

731/2- 

s 

SN 

4- 
B 

4- 

4- 
? 
+ 

A-D 

S 
U 

—      triglumis      
Lusula  arcuata  

70- 

- 

SN 

4- 
+ 

4- 
4- 

s 

U 

—      nivalis    

-64 

S 

4- 

4- 

U-A 

Carex  tnembranopacta    ,    .    . 
capillaris  

73V-'- 

SH 

S 

4- 
B 

4- 
4- 

A 
U 

ustulata  

70-73 

71 

4- 

U 

—     misandra      
—     rigida  

-67 

721/9- 

S 

s 

- 

+ 

B 

— 

U 
U 

salina  

70- 

S 

pedata  

S 

SH 

U 

—     runestris    . 

-67 

U 

1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      31 


Danish 
West  Greenland 

North-eastern 
Greenland 

North-western 
Greenland 

Ellesmoreland 

Arctic  American 
Archipelago 

Arrtic  parts 
of  the  American 
Continent 

04 

C 

£ 

0 

4- 

A 

S 

S  + 

H4- 

B 

u 

—      ursina  

-69 

SH 

4- 

u 

incurva         

S4- 

4- 

4- 

u 

SN 

B 

U-A 

scirpoidea     
Kobresia  bipartita  
Eliina  Sellardi    

-64 

72- 

731/2- 

S+ 

s 

S 

B 

4- 
-f- 

A-D 
U 
U 

Eriphorunt  Scheuchseri   .    .    . 
polystachium     .    . 
Agropyrum  violaceum     .    .    . 
Festuca  ovina      

70- 

- 

SN 
S 

SN 

N4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

U 
U 
D 
U 

••  —       rubra     « 

71- 

9 

4- 

s 

Glyceria  Valiliana  

71-70 

s 

9 

SH 

4- 

u 

tenella   

69- 

73? 

S  + 

D 

anciustata  

-67 

s 

s 

SN 

4- 

9 

u 

—        distans  

73- 

s 

4- 

4- 

U 

maritima  
Dupontia  Fisheri     
Poa  glauca  

-69 

s 

N+ 

s 

SH 

S4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

U 
U-A 
U 

-    abbreviata    

-70 

s 

4- 

U-A 

—    evagans    .         

S4- 

D 

—    alpina  .         

9 

9 

B 

4- 

S 

cenisia      

SN 

4- 

U 

-   pratensis  

72- 

9 

SH 

4- 

w 

u 

Pleuropogon  Sabinei    .... 
Catabrosa  algida     
Trisetum  spicatum  
Aira  caespitosa   

- 

70-72 
-731/9 

s+ 
s 
s 
s+ 

S 

SN 

SN 

4- 

4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

A—  D 
U 
U 
U 

69- 

s+ 

H  + 

D-S 

Calamagrostis  arundinacea    . 
Arctagrostis  latifolia    .... 
Alopecurus  alpinus  
Hierochloa  alpina   
Lycopodium  Selago     .... 
Equisetum  arvense  
variegatum     .    .    . 
Aspidiunt  fragrans     .... 
Cystopteris  fragilis  
Woodsia  ilvensis     
glabella     

71- 

-70 
-62 

-67 
-67 

S 

s 

SN 
S 

s 
s 

S4- 

s 

S4- 

SH 

N4- 
H4- 

H 
SH 

4- 
4- 

4- 
-I- 
4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 
4- 
4- 
4 
4- 
4- 
4- 

S 

u 

u 
u 

u 
u 
u 

U-A 

U 

u 

u 

The  records  of  distribution  condensed  in  the  above  table,  may,  of 
course  be  used  in  several  ways  for  proving  the  affinity  between  the 
floras  of  the  regions  here  in  question,  N.  W.  Greenland  and  Ellesmere- 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


land;  and  also  for  drawing  conclusions  about  the  causes  of  the  simili- 
tudes and  differences  between  them,  when  compared  with  one  another 
or  with  the  floras  of  adjacent  lands.  Before  I  enter  into  any  further 
discussion,  I  think  it  best  to  insert  one  more  table,  which  may  also  be 
of  use  in  the  following  pages.  It  gives  some  particulars  concerning  the 
distribution  of  species  within  N.  W.  Greenland. 

Each  of  the  districts  principally  investigated,  has  here  got  its  column, 
marked  as  follows: 

Y  =  Cape  York  (including  Bushnan  Island,  Ivsugigsok,  and  Cape  Dudley 

Digges). 
W=  Wolstenholme  Sound  (including  Wolstenholme,  Dalrymple  and  Saun- 

ders  Islands,  and  Granville  Bay). 
C  =  Carey  Islands. 
I    =  Inglefield  Gulf  (Burdin  Bay,  Whale  Sound,   Northumberland  and 

Hakluyt  Island,  and  coast  to  Cape  Robertson). 
F  =  Foulke  Fjord. 
R  =  Renselear  Bay. 

B  =  Bessels  Bay  and  other  localities  in  Washington  Land. 
P  =  Polaris  Bay  (Hall  Land). 
N  =  the  northernmost  parts. 

In   this    table   I  have  also  inserted  the  doubtful  species  which  are, 
however,  not  taken  into  consideration  in  the  following. 


Table  IV. 


Y. 

w. 

C. 

I. 

F. 

R. 

B. 

P. 

N. 

Taraxacum  hyparcticum  . 

+ 

phymatocarpum 

+ 

+ 

arctogenum    .    , 

4- 

4 

Arnica  alpina  ..... 

+ 

4- 

4- 

Antennaria  alpina  .    .    . 

4- 

Erigeron  compositus     .    . 

4- 

4- 

Campanula  uniflora    .    . 

+ 

4- 

Pedicularis  capitata    .    . 

4- 

hirsuta  .    .    . 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

4- 

? 

lanata  .    .    . 

4- 

flammea    .    . 

4- 

arctica  .    ,    , 

-1- 

lapponica  .    . 

9 

Bartsia  alpina     .... 

4- 

Mertensia  maritima     .    . 

4- 

Statice  maritima  .... 

+ 

4- 

Diapensia  lapponica   .    . 

4- 

1898-1902.  No.  16.      FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND. 


33 


Y. 

w. 

c. 

I. 

F. 

R. 

B. 

P. 

N. 

Myrtillus  uliginosa  .    .     . 

+ 

4- 

4- 

Vaccinium  Vitis  idaea  .    . 

4- 

Cassiope  tetragona  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Loiseleuria  procumbens    . 

9 

Rhododendron      lapponi- 

Pyrola  rotundifolia.    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Chamaenerium  latifolium 

4- 

•4- 

4- 

Empetrum  nigrum   .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

Dry  as  integrifolia    .    .    . 

4- 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Alchemilla  vulgaris  .    .    . 

? 

Potentilla  pulchella  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

rubricaulis   .    . 

4- 

-4- 

4- 

9 

anserina  .    .    . 

9 

nivea    .... 

4- 

4 

Vahliana.    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

emarginata  .     . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4- 

—        tridentata     .    . 

? 

Saxifraga  oppositifolia    . 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

flagellaris   .     . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

aisoides  .    .    . 

4- 

tricuspidata    . 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

nivalis    .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

stellaris  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

groenlandica  . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

cernua     .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

rivularis     .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Uesperis  Pallasii     .    .    . 

p 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Braya  purpurascens    .    . 

4- 

4- 

Arabis  Hookeri     .... 

4- 

Draba  alpina  

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

•4- 

4- 

4- 

fladnisensis  .    .    . 

4. 

+ 

4- 

subcapitata   .    .    . 

9 

nivalis  

4 

4- 

4- 

-   .    hirta      

4- 

4. 

4- 

• 

incana  

4- 

Lesquerella  arctica  .     .     . 

4- 

+ 

4- 

Cardamine  bellidifolia 

4- 

4- 

Eutrema  Edwardsii     .    . 

4- 

Cochlearia  officinalis  .    . 

4- 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Papaver  radicatum.    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Ranunculus  affinis  .    .     . 

4- 

sulphureus   . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

nivalis     .    . 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Sabinei    .    . 

4- 

4- 

pygmaeus     . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

hyperboreus  _ 

4- 

Arenaria  ciliata  .... 

4- 

Honkenya  peploides.    .    . 

4- 

4- 

Alsine  groenlandica     .    . 

9 

verna     

+ 

4- 

4- 

+ 

Cerastium  alpinum  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

•f 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

3 

34 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  AKCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Y. 

w. 

c. 

I. 

F. 

R. 

B. 

P. 

N. 

Stellaria  humifusa  .    .    . 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4 

longipes  .... 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

Melandrium  affine  .    .    . 

•»• 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

triflorum  .    . 

4- 

4- 

4 

apetalum  .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Silene  acaulis  

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 

Montia  lamprospernta  .    . 

4- 

Polygonum  viviparwn.    . 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4 

4 

Oxyria  digyna     .... 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

4 

Betula  nana     

4- 

4 

Salix  arctica    

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

glauca    

? 

herbacea  

-f 

+ 

4 

Tofieldia  palustris    .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

Juncus  biglutnis   .... 

4- 

4- 

4 

4 

Lusula  arcuata    .... 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

nivalis  

4- 

4- 

4- 

spicata     .... 

? 

Carex  misandra  .... 

4- 

4- 

4- 

? 

rigida    

4- 

+ 

glareosa     .    .    .    . 

4 

incurva     .    .    .  .  fc 

4 

—      nardina    .... 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

scirpoidea  .... 

4- 

dioica    ..... 

•> 

Elyna  Bellardi     .... 

4- 

4 

Eriophorum  Scheuchseri  . 

4- 

4- 

4 

4- 

4 

polystachium 

4- 

4 

4- 

4 

Festuca  ovina  

+ 

4- 

4- 

4 

4 

4 

Glyceria  Vahliana  .    .    . 

9 

tenella    .... 

4 

angustata  .    .    . 

4- 

+ 

—        distans  .... 

+ 

+ 

4 

maritima  .    .    . 

4- 

4 

Dupontia  Fisheri     .    .    . 

4 

Poo,  glciucci  

+ 

4- 

4- 

—    abbreviata     .... 

4 

4 

9 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4 

pratensis  .... 

9 

Pleuropogon  Sabinei    .    . 

4- 

y 

Catabrosa  algida     .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4 

Trisetum  spicatum   .    .    . 

4 

4 

4 

Aira  caespitosa    .... 

4 

flexuosa  

•f 

Ayrostis  canina   .... 

? 

Arctagrostis  latifolia    . 

4- 

4 

4 

Alopecurus  alpinus  .    .    . 

4- 

+ 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Hierochloa  alpina    .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

4 

Lycopodium  Selago  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

1898- 1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.        35 


y 

W. 

c. 

I. 

F. 

R. 

B, 

P. 

N. 

Equisetum  arvense   .    .    . 

+ 

4- 

+ 

Aspidiuwi  fragrans.    .    . 

4- 

Cystopteris  fragilis  .    .    . 

4- 

4- 

+ 

Woodsia  glabella.    .    .    . 

+ 

Table  III  contains  152  species  which  are  members  of  one  or  more 
of  the  floras  of  the  three  districts  here  specially  in  question ;  viz.,  N.  E. 
and  N.  W.  Greenland  and  Ellesmereland.  As  for  their  appearance  in 
those  and  the  neighbouring  districts,  they  may  be  grouped  as  I  have 
done  in  Table  V,  where  existence  within  a  district  is  marked  with  a 
"  +  ",  absence  of  it  with  a  "— ".  It  is,  however,  always  to  be  kept  in 
mind  that  some  of  the  districts  are  very  unsatisfactorily  explored;  and 
that  even  in  the  relatively  well  examined  tracts,  additions  will  yet  be 
made  that  will  very  considerably  alter  the  numbers,  total  as  well  as 
relative.  I  think,  therefore,  that  it  will  be  better  to  discuss  the 
dubious  species  separately,  and  afterwards  try  to  get  as  natural  groups 
as  possible.  However,  I  shall  try  to  point  out  also,  what  results  mayr 
in  my  opinion,  be  arrived  at  by  using  the  rough  statistics  here  put 
together. 

Table  V. 


Group 

04 

O 
M 

en  H- 

*! 

s 

0)  ns 

•8  g 

a3  JS 

H    C 

Western 
nland 

T3 

£ 
Tj 

E 
<u 

American 
ipelago 

parts  of 
•.  Continent 

i 

a 

en 

o 

en 

c 

* 

o 

e 

o 

C 

5 

H3 

D 

-5      V 

en    oi 

I.® 

Q 

a 
j3    a> 

lo 
2 

9 

5   2 
SO 
fc 

§ 
in 

M 
U 

.•a 

1< 

•5 

H 

o    ^ 

frM       ^J 
^J 

9 

•9  S 
|'3 
25 

3 

0 
EH 

% 

1. 

4 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

70 

2. 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

— 

2 

I. 

3. 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

- 

4- 

4 

4. 

4- 

4- 

— 

4- 

— 

4- 

4 

5. 

4- 

4- 

_ 

4- 

4- 

-i- 

7 

6. 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

- 

- 

3 

90 

f 

1. 



4- 









5 

2. 



4- 





4- 

4- 

1 

TT 

II. 

3. 

4- 

4- 

4- 

_ 

— 

4 

I 

4. 

4- 

- 

4- 

- 

- 

— 

2 

12 

1. 

_ 

_ 

_ 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4 

2. 

— 

— 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4- 

5 

3. 

4- 

_ 

-t- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

2 

4. 

_ 

_ 

_ 

4- 

— 

4- 

1 

5. 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

3 

15 

36 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


•M 

a 

c 

• 

Group 

ndergroup 

anish  West 
Greenland 

orth  Eastern 
Greenland 

orth  Western 
Greenland 

llesmereland 

rctic  America] 
Archipelago 

««      4» 
0   .0 

£  "S 

I.     O 

'^ 

0      « 

'J2    S 

£< 

V 

at 

en 

IM 

0 

E 

_£    en 
S  .2 

s    « 

o, 

s 

2 
0 

o 
"3 

Q 

a 

Q 

5 

*< 

W 

"2 

EH 

I 

1. 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

r» 

IV. 

2. 

+ 

4- 

— 

- 

- 

+ 

i 

1 

3. 

+ 

— 

— 

+ 

+ 

+ 

i 

7 

,-V       v.             { 

1. 

2. 

— 

- 

— 

4- 

+ 

— 

2 
1 

3 

1. 

+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

+ 

+ 

7 

2. 

4- 

4 

— 

— 

— 

— 

7 

3. 

-f 

-f 

4- 

— 

— 

4- 

1 

4. 

4- 

— 

4- 



— 

4- 

4 

VI. 

5. 

+ 

4- 

— 

4- 

— 

— 

3 

6. 

4- 

— 

4- 

-f 

— 

— 

1 

7. 

+ 

— 

— 

4- 

— 

— 

1 

8. 

— 

4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

+ 

1 

25 

In  Table  V.,  Group  I.  contains  such  species  as  have  a  rather 
ubiquitous  distribution  in  the  Arctic  Regions,  or  at  least  in  the  parts 
here  in  question.  Most  of  the  plants,  especially  those  of  Gr.  I,  1,  are  so 
widely  distributed,  that  they  can  hardly  be  used  in  comparing  the  di- 
stricts, or  for  forming  any  conclusion  about  the  origin  of  the  flora.  Some 
may,  however,  be  of  interest,  as  will  be  shown  in  the  following  pages. 

The  following  50  species  from  Group  I,  are  hardly  of  any  interest 
for  this  discussion: 


Antennaria  alpina* 
Campanula  uniflora 
Statice  maritima* 
Myrtillus  uliginosa* 
Cassiope  tetragona 
Pyrola  rotundifolia* 
Empetrum  nigrum 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia 
aizoides 
nivalis 
stellaris 
groenlandica 
cernua 
rivularis 
Drdba  alpina 

fladnizensis 
—      hirta 


Cardamine  bellidifolia 

Cochlearia  officinalis 

Papaver  radicatmn 

Ranunculus  sulphureus 
nivalis 
hyperboreus 

Alsine  verna 

Cerastium  alpinum 

Stellaria  humifusa 
longipes 

Silene  acaulis 

Polygonum  viviparum 

Oxyrla  digyna 

Juncus  biglumis 

Luzula  arcuata 

Carex  misandra 
—     incurva 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      37 

Eriophorum  Scheuchzeri  Aira  caespitosa 

polystachium  Arctagrostis  latifolia 

Festuca  ovina  Alopecurus  alpinus 

Glyceria  distans*  Hierochloa  alpina 

Poa  glauca  Lycopodium  Selago 

—    cenisia  Equisetum  arvense 

Catabrosa  algida  Cystopteris  fragilis 

Trisetum  spicatum  Woodsia  glabella. 

All  these  are  circumpolar  species,  even  though  some  of  them,  those 
marked  with  a  "*"  are  absent  from  Spitsbergen. 

The  Group  I,  2,  Carex  glareosa  and  Glyceria  angustata,  not  known 
with  certainty  from  the  arctic  coast  of  America,  may  yet  be  found  there 
and  belong  to  the  circumpolar,  more  'or  less  ubiquitous  plants;  as  is 
also  the  case  with  Group  I,  3:  Draba  nivalis,  Ranunculus  pygmaeus, 
Melandrium  affine,  Elyna  Bellardi*,  which  are  not  yet  collected  in 
the  Arctic  Archipelago  but  which  will  certainly  be  found  there.  Group 
I,  4  contains  4  species,  of  which  3,  Sagina  intermedia,  Carex  ursina 
and  Glyceria  Vahliana,  as  far  as  may  be  concluded  from  our  present 
knowledge  of  their  distribution,  will  certainly  yet  be  found  in  N.  W. 
Greenland  and  the  Archipelago.  Of  the  species  as  yet  lacking  in  the 
list  of  N.  W.  Greenland  (Group  I,  5),  Erigeron  uniflorus,  Cardamine 
pratensis,  Carex  capillaris*,  Poa  pratensis,  Equisetum  variegatum, 
and  Woodsia  ilvensis*,  will  certainly  be  found  there;  the  last  species, 
Carex  ustulata,  is,  as  far  as  our  present  knowledge  goes,  very  spora- 
dically distributed  on  the  American  side  and  especially  in  Greenland,  but 
is  also  circumpolar. 

Lastly  we  get  from  Group  I,  6,  two  species,  Arenaria  ciliata  and 
Glyceria  maritima,  not  yet  reported  from  any  arctic  part  of  America 
besides  Ellesmereland,  which  must  also  go  here  as  having  been  pro- 
bably overlooked  in  the  Archipelago  and  Arctic  Coast  as  well  as  in 
Asia.  Thus  we  get  from  Group  I,  68  species  which  are  circumpolar 
and  mostly  rather  ubiquitous.  In  the  following  these  will  be  designed 
as  Group  U. 

We  have  still,  however,  22  species  of  Group  I  left.  Among  these 
the  following  4  species  from  Gr.  I,  1,  decidedly  have  their  home  in 
America:  Erigeron  compositus,  Dry  as  integrifolia,  Saxifraga  tri- 
cuspidata,  Lesquerella  arctica.  To  these  may  be  added  Arabis  areni- 
cola  from  Gr.  I,  4.  Alone  of  them,  Dryas,  goes  over  to  the  north- 
eastern extremity  of  Asia.  These  species  and  some  more  mentioned 
below,  may  form  Group  A. 


38  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

There  is,  however,  also  a  number  of  species  so  distributed  as  to 
make  it  rather  difficult  to  form  a  definitive  opinion  as  to  whether  they 
are  to  be  referred  to  the  american  or  to  the  ubiquitous  plants. 

Such  are  from  Group  I,  1 : 

1.  Arnica  alpina,  as  it  seems  most  widely    spread  on    the  Ame- 
rican side  and  absent  from  Southern  Greenland.     In  Ellesmereland  it  is 
not  found  in  the  Hayes  Sound  region. 

2.  Pedicularis   hirsuta,    circumpolar    but   absent   from    Southern 
Greenland. 

3.  Chamaenerium   latifolium,    lacking  in  Western  Siberia,  Scan- 
dinavia and  Spitsbergen,  but  appearing  in  Iceland.    If  this  plant   is   to 
be   counted  as  american  in  Greenland,  it   should  have  reached  Iceland 
from  the  west.     Here,  however,  as  in  some  other  cases  also,  two  diffe- 
rent ways  of  immigration  may  be  possible. 

4.  Potentilla  pulchella,  only  south  to  the  Disco  region,  and  absent 
from  Western  Siberia  and  the  European  Continent. 

5.  P.  emarginata,  similarly  distributed  as  the  last. 

6.  Braya  purpurascens,    circumpolar,    but  only  found  about  70° 
in  Danish  West  Greenland. 

7.  Eutrema  Edwardsii,   circumpolar,  but  very  sporadic  in  Green- 
land. 

8.  Ranunculus  affinis,  circumpolar,  but  only  in  a  single  place  in 
Danish  West  Greenland. 

9.  Melandrium  apelalum,  circumpolar,  but  only  spread  southward 
to  the  Disco  region. 

10.  Salix    arctica,    absent    from    Spitsbergen    and    the    European 
Continent,  and  represented  in  Greenland  mostly  by  the  var.  Brownii,  which 
is  principally  american,  and  the  var.  groenlandica. 

11.  Luzula  nivalis,  absent  from  Southern  Greenland. 

12.  Carex  nardina,   absent  from  Arctic  Asia  and  Novaja  Semlja, 
but  appearing  again  in  Northern  Finland,  Scandinavia  and  Spitsbergen. 

13.  Dupontia  Fisheri,  circumpolar,  but  only  sparingly  represented 
in  Greenland,  where  it  is  lacking  in  the  south. 

14.  Poa  abbreviata,  most  probably  an  american  plant  and  absent 
from  Asia,  but  appearing  again  in  Spitsbergen,  Franz  Joseph  Land,  and 
Novaja  Semlja.     In  Danish  Greenland  its  southern  limit  is  at  the  Disco 
region,  and  in  East  Greenland  at  Scoresby  Sound. 

15.  Aspidium  fragrans,  entirely  absent  from  Europe,  and  with  a 
northerly  distribution  in  W.  Greenland,  absent  from  E.  Greenland  except 
for  Scoresby  Sound. 


1898- 1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      39 

All  these  plants  are  tolerably  common  and  widely-spread  in  the 
northern  parts  of  America;  in  Greenland,  they  are  in  general  princi- 
pally distributed  in  the  northernmost  parts,  that  is  to  say,  where  the  di- 
stance to  the  american  area  of  the  species  is  shortest.  All  of  them, 
moreover,  have  a  more  or  less  discontinuous  distribution,  the  inter- 
vening gap  beginning  either  east  of  Greenland,  or  east  of  Spitsbergen— 
Novaja  Semlja.  If  we  are  to  -reckon  these  plants  among  the  american 
immigrants,  we  must  presume  that  those  which  inhabit,  for  instance, 
Spitsbergen  also,  have  reached  there  in  the  same  way  as  the  species  of 
Group  II,  1  have  come  to  N.  E.  Greenland,  most  probably  along  a  for- 
mer land-bridge.  I  will  not  now,  however,  give  them  any  definite  place, 
but  will  reckon  them  alternatively  to  Group  U,  or  Group  A. 

Now  we  have  only  2  species  from  Gr.  I,  1,  left  to  discuss.  Tarax- 
acum phymatocarpum  is  only  known  from  the  northern  parts  of  both 
Greenland  coasts  and  from  a  single  locality  in  Ellesmereland.  It  may 
be  a  Greenland  plant  and  have  reached  Ellesmereland  from  there;  but, 
as  its  Ellesmereland  locality  is  in  a  region  where  the  american  feature 
is  rather  pronounced,  it  will  more  probably  be  found  to  have  a  wider 
distribution  in  Arctic  America.  It  can  be  counted  either  in  Group  A, 
or  in  a  Group  G,  containing  Greenland  plants,  or  also  in  the  Group  D, 
species  of  dubious  distribution.  Diapensia  lapponica  has  so  curiously 
interrupted  a  distribution,  that  one  can  hardly  place  it  anywhere  but  in 
Group  D,  even  if  it  has  probably  reached  N.  W.  Greenland,  and  per- 
haps Ellesmereland,  from  Danish  Greenland  where  it  is  common. 

The  5  species  forming  Group  II,  1,  are  doubtless  all  immigrants 
from  the  east,  as  they  are  all  found  in  Spitsbergen,  mostly  showing 
also  a  wider  distribution  in  Europe  and  Asia.  In  Greenland,  they  are 
restricted  to  the  northern  parts  of  the  east  coast.  Among  them,  Tar- 
axacum arcticum,  Gentiana  tenella,  and  Ranunculus  glacialis  are 
entirely  missing  in  America,  whereas  Polemonium  humile  and  Dryas 
octopetala  are  found  there,  even  though  there  is  so  wide  an  expanse 
between  their  Ameircan  and  Greenland  areas,  as  to  make  it  impossible 
to  think  of  any  connection  between  them.  Those  5  species  may  form  a 
separate  group  E,  to  which  also  Saxifraga  Meraciifolia  (Gr.  II,  2)  may 
be  counted,  as  it  shows  a  similar  distribution,  even  if  it  is  found  in  the 
Arctic  Archipelago  also. 

The  4  species  of  Group  II,  3,  show  rather  a  curious  distribution. 
Melandrium  triflorum  is  one  of  the  few  endemic  species  of  Greenland, 
and  must  of  course  go  to  Group  G,  where  I  have  alternatively  placed 
Taraxacum  phymatocarpum.  It  is,  however,  reported  also  for  Grin- 


40  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

nell  Land.  Bartsia  alpina  is  found  in  America  only  in  Labrador,  but 
it  is  rather  a  common  plant  in  Southern  Greenland.  It  must  doubtless 
have  come  to  N.  W.  Greenland  from  the  south,  and  is  to  be  placed  in 
Group  S.  Betula  nana  is  distributed  in  West  Greenland  from  63° 
northwards,  and,  in  the  east  coast,  from  the  Angmagsalik  district  north- 
wards to  131I2°.  To  the  south  it  is  replaced  by  B.  glandulosa,  but  it 
appears  again  in  N.  E.  America,  not,  however,  in  the  arctic  parts.  It 
must  also  go  to  Group  S,  species  spread  in  Danish  Greenland,  where 
they  are  probably  immigrants  from  Labrador  and  wandering  northwards 
from  there.  How  it  has  reached  Eastern  Greenland  is  another  question; 
it  may  have  come  from  Iceland,  or  its  area  may  once  have  been  conti- 
nuous in  the  south.  Glyceria  tenella  has  so  discontinuous  a  distri- 
bution that  it  can  only  be  placed  in  Group  D. 

Taraxacum  arctogenum,  in  Group  II,  4,  is  an  endemic  Greenland 
species  (Gr.  G).  Montia  lamprosperma  belongs  to  Group  S,  it  is  spread 
to  the  south  in  Danish  Greenland  but  seems  to  be  lacking  in  Arctic 
America.  It  may  have  reached  Greenland  from  Ihe  east,  as  it  is  com- 
mon in  Iceland  and  the  Faeroes:  or  from  Labrador,  where  it  seems  to 
grow,  if  the  indications  of  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111,  Fl.,  II,  p.  4,  about 
"Montia  fontana"  are  to  be  trusted  and  thus  interpreted. 

Group  III,  1,  contains  4  species  of  which  one,  Carex  membrano- 
pacta,  is  entirely  american;  two,  Chrysosplenium  alternifolium  and 
Alsine  Rossii,  are  lacking  in  Greenland  but  reach  from  Asia  as  far 
west  as  Spitsbergen  or  (the  former)  still  further  in  the  south.  The  fourth, 
Draba  subcapitata,  is  somewhat  doubtful,  but  its  distribution  in  Elles- 
mereland  and  further  to  the  south-west,  shows  that  it  is  an  american 
species  within  the  western  parts  of  our  special  area  at  least.  It  is  not 
yet  known  with  certainty  from  Greenland,  but  has  a  circumpolar  distri- 
bution reaching,  on  the  Atlantic  side,  to  Jan  Mayen.  These  4  species 
are  to  be  placed  in  Group  A.  Here  belong  also  the  species  of  Group 
III,  2,  which  have  reached  N.  W.  Greenland.  Taraxacum  hyparcticum 
and  Ranunculus  Sabinei  are  entirely  american,  Pedicularis  capitata 
and  P.  arctica  are  spread  from  Eastern  Siberia  throughout  Arctic  Ame- 
rica. Hesperis  Pallasii  reaches  as  far  west  as  Novaja  Semlja.  They 
have  doubtless  come  to  Greenland  over  Smith  Sound,  as  is  also  the 
case  with  Potentilla  Vahliana  from  Group  III,  3.  Pedicularis  lanala 
also  seems  to  be  an  american  immigrant  in  Western  Greenland,  where 
it  is  common  in  the  northern  colonial  districts.  It  is,  however,  a  cir- 
cumpolar plant,  and  appears  also  in  a  small  area  in  S.  E.  Greenland. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      41 

How  it  has  got  there  is  a  somewhat  more  difficult  question  to  solve. 
I  refer  it  alternatively  to  Group  A,  or  Group  D. 

Androsace  septentrionalis,  forming  Group  III,  4,  as  absent  from 
Greenland  goes  to  Group  A.  Group  III,  5,  contains  3  species,  of  which 
one  seems  to  be  decidedly  american,  viz.  Potentilla  rubricaulis;  the 
two  others  are  more  dubious,  and  so  give  rise  to  a  question  as  to 
whether  they  should  be  placed  in  Group  A,  or  in  Group  D.  Saxifraga 
flagellaris  is  spread  round  the  Arctic  Regions  lo  Spitsbergen,  but  its  uni- 
versal appearance  throughout  Arctic  America  and  the  islands,  its  manner 
of  distribution  in  Ellesmereland  and  in  N.  W.  Greenland,  make  it  most 
probable  that  it  is  an  american  immigrant  in  Greenland.  Pleuropogon 
Sabinei  is  spread  from  Siberia  to  Novaja  Semlja  and  Franz  Joseph 
Land;  but  its  absence  from  Spitsbergen,  and  its  range  over  the  Arctic 
Islands  to  Ellesmereland,  make  it  probable  that  it  has  reached  even 
N.  E.  Greenland  that  way. 

The  5  species  in  Group  IV,  1,  Campanula  rotundifolia,  Rhodiola 
rdsea,  Juncus  castaneus,  J.  triglumis,  Poa  alpina,  must  be  reckoned 
to  Group  S.  In  N.  E.  Greenland  alone  they  are  spread  into  the  area  here 
in  question,  and  none  of  them  seems  to  reach  its  northernmost  part.  Even 
those  of  them  which  have  an  uninterrupted  distribution  in  the  south, 
may,  perhaps,  have  immigrated  from  both  sides,  as  they  are  spread  both 
in  Europe,  including  Iceland,  and  in  America.  The  same  is  the  case 
with  Festuca  rubra,  which  forms  Group  IV,  2.  Carex  aquatilis,  Group 
IV,  3,  is  absent  from  N.  E.  Greenland,  and  its  distribution  in  the  north- 
ern part  of  Danish  Greenland,  points  to  an  american  origin.  I  there- 
fore place  it  in  Group  A,  notwithstanding  that  it  is  not  found  as  yet  in 
N.  W.  Greenland. 

In  Group  V,  1,  we  have  the  two  new  Ellesmereland  species,  the 
distribution  of  which  is  as  yet  unknown;  it  is  possible  that  Saxifraga 
*exaratoides  may  count  as  american,  Poa  evagans  must,  however,  be 
left  out  of  consideration  at  present.  Taraxacum  pumilum  (Gr.  V,  2) 
most  probably  may  be  reckoned  as  american. 

Group  VI,  1,  contains  7  species,  all  absent  from  Ellesmereland  but 
found  in  the  five  neighbouring  districts  entered  in  the  table.  Among 
them,  Potentilla  nivea,  Horikenya  peploides,  and  Carex  rigida,  are 
rather  ubiquitous  species  that  may  yet  be  found  in  Ellesmereland. 
I  refer  them  to  Group  U,  together  with  Salix  herbacea,  absent  from 
Spitsbergen  (but  found  in  Beeren  Island  and  Jan  Mayen)  and  perhaps 
from  the  Bering  Sea  region.  Tofieldia  palustris  and  Carex  scirpoidea 
are  absent  from  Western  Siberia;  Rhododendron  lapponicum  also  from 


42  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Spitsbergen ;  but  their  appearance  in  Europe  makes  it  doubtful  how  they 
should  be  reckoned  in  Greenland,  especially  as  they  are  not  found  in 
Ellesmereland,  nor  in  the  far  north  of  Greenland.  The  safest  way  will 
be  to  reckon  them  alternatively  to  Group  A,  and  Group  D. 

Five  of  the  species  in  Group  VI,  2:  Potentilla  tnaculata,  Koenigia 
islandica,  Carex  salina,  C.  lagopina,  and  Calamagrostis  arundina- 
cea,  entering  our  special  area  only  in  N.  E.  Greenland,  may  doubtless 
be  put  in  Group  S,  as  may  also  Draba  crassifolia,  which  just  reaches 
Gape  Hold  with  Hope;  perhaps  also  Sagina  nivalis,  which,  however, 
is  a  plant  easily  overlocked  or  confounded  whith  others,  and  may,  there- 
fore, probably  be  of  wider  range  than  is  as  yet  known.  Pedicularis 
flammea  (Gr.  VI,  3)  I  think  best  to  leave  in  Group  D.  It  might  also 
be  put  in  Group  A,  as  being  most  spread  in  America;  but  it  is  not 
known  from  any  part  of  the  Archipelago,  and  has  certainly  come  to 
N.  W.  Greenland  from  the  south  of  Melville  Bay.  On  the  other  hand, 
it  is  known  from  Iceland  and  the  northernmost  parts  of  Europe,  and  I 
think  it  may  still  be  discovered  in  Siberia  also. 

The  species  of-  Group  VI,  4,  have  doubtless  reached  N.  W.  Green- 
land by  way  of  Danish  Greenland.  One  of  them  Arabis  Hookeri,  is 
found  on  the  arctic  shore  of  America  and  consequently  goes  into  Group  A; 
the  three  others,  Mertensia  maritima,  Vaccinium  Vitis  idaea,  and  Draba 
incana,  are  more  or  less  circumpolar  and  ubiquitous  species,  which  may 
go  to  Group  S.  The  3  species  in  Group  VI,  5,  Carex  pedata,  C.  rupe- 
stris,  and  Kobresia  bipartita,  by  their  appearance  in  the  most  ameri- 
can  part  of  Ellesmereland,  make  it  impossible  to  doubt  that  they  exist 
also  in  other  parts  of  Arctic  America,  where  they  may  have  been 
overlooked.  If  we  presume  their  existence  there,  they  may  be  put  in 
Group  U. 

Aira  flexuosa  (Gr.  VI,  6)  is  decidedly  a  southern  plant;  its  single 
locality  in  N.  W.  Greenland  is  doubtless  an  outpost  from  its  Danish 
Greenland  area,  but  how  it  has  reached  Ellesmereland  is  doubtful.  I 
think  it  best  to  place  it  in  Group  D.  Still  more  difficult  is  it  to  form 
an  opinion  as  to  the  way  by  which  Agropyrum  violaceum  (Gr.  VI,  7) 
has  reached  Grinnell  Land,  as  it  is  not  known  from  any  locality  in  Arctic 
America,  either  in  the  continent  or  in  the  islands;  and  there  is  an  enter- 
vening,  space  of  more  than  10°  down  to  its  northern  limit  in  Greenland. 
I  place  it  in  Group  D. 

Lastly  we  have  Saxifraga  Hirculus  (Gr.  VI,  8),  which  in  Elles- 
mereland is  doubtless  an  american  plant,  but  has,  perhaps,  reached 
N.  E.  Greenland  in  the  same  way  as  have  the  species  of  Group  E. 


1893-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      43 

As,  however,  this  discussion  is  not  easy  to  retain,  I  have,  after 
stating  my  reasons  for  the  division  of  the  floras,  put  together  the  fol- 
lowing table  VI.  Here  the  numbers  of  the  plants  of  each  group  are 
enumerated  for  each  district  separately,  and  for  all  three  together;  and, 
besides  them,  accounts  of  the  percentage  in  each  group,  reckoned  in 
relation  to  the  number  in  the  district,  and  to  the  total  152  species  of  the 
three  districts.  As  so  many  species  have  not  been  definitively  placed, 
two  different  series  of  figures  must  necessarily  be  put  up  alongside. 
The  last  four  columns  are  made  up  to  show  how  nearly  the  figures 
derived  from  the  rough  statistics  of  table  V  agree  with  those  from  the 
more  closely  sifted  material,  at  least,  as  to  the  relations  to  each  other 
of  the  percentages  in  the  different  districts. 


Table  VI. 


9 

13 

"3 

i 

13 

"3 

JA 

a> 

13 

13 

en1 

"o 

V 

OH 
CO 

"3 

c 

a> 

3 

OH 

cn 

'o 

Oi 

o 

I1* 

S  £ 

o 

CD      f. 

2r  cn 

OH  '- 

C  cn 

O 

^H      C? 

"o 

SH£ 

C    cn 

cn  ^ 

bD  0) 

cn    OJ 

bo  « 

es*3 

tn  cu 

be  I 

d) 

-_  -i 

<^-Q 

CD 

Q 

O   cn 

-j 

•_  42 

.a  cn 

0  £ 

O    £ 

-C  cn 

o  E 

*®  § 

—'-3 

-Q  cn 

O    g 

"sis 

S.2 

.    3 

£.2 

^  3 

o  -2 

£.2 

.    3 

.   3 

3  « 

O    ^ 

o 

3   u 

o  B 

O    "• 

M  cn 

13      ^ 

~o  ^ 

"o   ^ 

S5 

OH 

£ 

25 

OH 

OH 

O 

^ 

(X 

CU 

North-Eas  tern 

Gr  e  enland 

Ubiquitous  Group  U  .  .  . 

75 

58 

49 

90 

70 

59 

I 

90 

70 

59 

Eastern             —       E  .  .  . 

6 

5 

4 

7 

5 

4 

Greenlandic     —      G  .  .  . 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

II 

10 

8 

7 

American         —      A  ... 

28 

22 

19 

6 

5 

4 

III 

3 

2 

2 

Dubious            —      D  .  .  . 

3 

2 

2 

9 

7 

6 

IV 

6 

5 

4 

Southern          —       S  .  .  . 

14 

12 

9 

15 

12 

10 

VI 

19 

15 

12 

Absent(of  total  152  species) 

(24) 

— 

16 

(24)|     - 

16 

(24) 

- 

16 

128 

100 

100 

128 

100 

100 

128 

100 

100 

North-  Weste  rn 

Gr  eenlan  d 

Ubiquitous  Group  U  .  .  . 

62 

57 

41 

77 

71 

50 

I 

79 

73 

52 

Greenlandic     —      G  .  .  . 

2 

2 

1 

3 

3 

2 

II 

6 

6 

4 

American         —      A  ... 

34 

31 

22 

12 

11 

8 

III 

10 

9 

7 

Dubious            —      D  .  .  . 

4 

4 

3 

10 

9 

7 

IV 

— 

— 

— 

Southern          —       S  .  .  . 

6 

6 

4 

6 

6 

4 

VI 

13 

12 

8 

Absent  (of  total  152  species) 

(44) 

— 

29 

(44) 

— 

29 

(44) 

—  ' 

29 

108 

100 

100 

108 

100 

100 

108 

100 

100 

44 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


i 

3 

1 

i 

T3 

-3 

i 

[3 

1 

03 

S 

93 

V 

9 

- 

P 

0) 

v 

S 

o 

ft  2 

o>  2 

'— 
O 

0.  I/I 

<o  2 

U.H 

o 

ft  tn 

S    9! 

U 

V 

60  Ja 

•Z  Ji 

"".a 

<="S 

05  S 

bOj, 

-O    93 

-  S 

'o  a 

-Q    93 

o  a 

'o  a 

S-'-s 

.Q     T. 

'o'a 

'o  a 

SQ} 
•ft 

.  3 

.   3 

S-2 

.   3 

.   3 

3  _rt 

S.2 

.   3 

-j  2 

3   u 

"w 

~o  ^" 

3   ° 

U 

U 

2  "^ 

—    O 

W 

"w 

^ 

(X 

ex 

as 

a, 

0- 

O 

J5 

IX 

IX 

Ellesmereland 

Ubiquitous  Group  U  .  .  . 

71 

62 

47 

86 

75 

57 

I 

90 

78 

59 

Greenlandic     —      G  .  .  • 

— 

— 

— 

1 

1 

1 

— 

— 

— 

American         —      A  ... 

40 

35 

26 

19 

16 

12 

III,  V 

18 

16 

12 

Dubious           —      D  .  .  . 

4 

3 

3 

8 

7 

5 

IV 

1 

1 

1 

Southern          —       S  .  .  . 

— 

— 

— 

1 

1 

1 

VI 

6 

5 

4 

Absent  (of  total  152  species) 

(37) 

— 

24 

(37) 

— 

24 

(37) 

— 

24 

115 

100 

100 

115 

100 

100 

115 

100 

100 

The  three  districts 

together 

Ubiquitous  Group  U  .  .  . 

75 

- 

49 

90 

- 

59 

I 

90 

- 

59 

Eastern            —       E  .  .  . 

6 

— 

4 

6 

— 

4 

— 

— 

— 

Greenlandic     —      G  .  .  . 

2 

— 

1 

3 

— 

2 

II 

12 

— 

8 

American         —      A  .  .  • 

44 

— 

29 

19 

— 

12 

III,  V 

18 

— 

12 

Dubious           —      D  .  .  . 

6 

— 

4 

16 

— 

11 

IV 

7 

— 

5 

Southern          —       S  .  .  . 

19 

— 

13 

18 

— 

12 

VI 

25 

— 

16 

152 

— 

100 

152 

- 

100 

152 

- 

100 

When  we  give  the  group  of  more  or  less  ubiquitous  species  the 
largest  possible  range,  so  as  to  contain  90  species  out  of  the  152,  we 
find  73  of  them  in  all  the  three  districts  here  specially  in  question;  4  are 
absent  from  Ellesmereland,  13  from  N.  W.  Greenland.  The  last  number 
will,  however,  be  considerably  reduced  by  further  research.  If,  on  the 
other  hand,  we  take  the  group  of  american  species  in  its  widest  com- 
prehension, embracing  44  species,  we  get  them  thus  grouped:  in  all  three 
regions  23;  in  Ellesmereland  and  N.  W.  Greenland  7;  in  Ellesmereland 
and  N.  E.  Greenland  2;  in  Ellesmereland  alone  8;  moreover  4  species 
not  yet  found  in  Ellesmereland  but  in  N.  W.  Greenland  (1)  and  as  well 
in  N.  E.  Greenland  (3). 

These  figures  show  clearly  a  gradual  decrease  of  the  number  of 
american  species  to  the  east  such  as,  a  priori,  we  had  to  look  out  for; 
and  the  same  is  the  case  with  the  number  of  plants  of  decidedly  ame- 
rican origin.  Of  these,  Androsace  septentrionalis,  Chrysosplenium  al- 
ternifolium,  Alsine  Rossii,  and  Carex  membranopacta  have  only  reached 
eastward  to  Ellesmereland.  To  these  may  be  added  Saxifraga  Hir- 
culus,  which  may  have  reached  N.  E.  Greenland  from  the  east;  Draba 
subcapitata,  not  yet  known  with  certainty  in  Greenland ;  and  Carex 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      45 

aquatillis  var.  stans,  which  will  probably  be  found  in  N.  W.  Greenland 
as  its  distribution  in  Danish  Greenland  points  to  an  immigration  from 
the  north. 

N.  W.  Greenland  is  reached  by  the  following  american  species,  all 
spread  in  Ellesmereland :  Taraxacum  hyparcticum,  Pedicularis  capi- 
tata,  P.  arc.tica,  Potentilla  Vahliana,  Hesperis  Pallasii,  Ranunculus 
Sabinei  and  further  by  Arabis  Hookeri  which  is  not  found  in  Ellesmere- 
land. Erigeron  compositus,  Potentilla  rubricaulis,  Saxifraga  tricus- 
pidata,  Lesquerella  arctica  reach  to  North-eastern  Greenland,  as  also 
Arabis  arenosa  which  is  found  in  Ellesmereland  but  not  yet  in  N.  W. 
Greenland.  Dryas  integrifolia  shows,  so  far  as  present  researches  have 
gone,  rather  a  curious  distribution  in  East  Greenland,  one  small  area 
north  of  latitude  65°  and  another  larger  one  from  about  70°  to  13l/2°, 
but  it  is  not  reported  from  the  most  northern  known  part  of  the  coast. 
As  it  is  found  so  far  north  on  the  west  coast  as  Lockwood  Island, 
there  seems  to  be  every  possibility  of  its  occurrence  in  the  far  north  of 
the  east  coast  also,  so  as  to  account  for  its  appearance  in  the  south. 
It  may,  perhaps,  still  be  found  to  have  a  continuous  area  along  the 
east  coast. 

The  most  difficult  question,  however,  is  that  connected  with  another 
group  of  plants  in  N.  E.  Greenland,  the  eastern  species:  Taraxacum 
arcticum,  Polemonium  humile,  Gentiana  tenella,  Dryas  octopetala, 
Saxifraga  hieraciifolia,  and  Ranunculus  glacialis,  to  which  Saxifraga 
Hirculus  must  most  probably  be  added  (as  far  as  this  territory  is  con- 
cerned). They  are  all  Spitsbergen  plants,  even  though  some  of  them 
are  very  rare  in  that  country.  Moreover  they  are  found  in  Northern 
Europe,  and  some  at  least,  are  widely  distributed  in  Northern  Asia  also. 
Four  are  also  Iceland  plants.  It  cannot  of  course  be  doubted  that  this 
group  of  species  has  reached  Greenland  from  the  east;  but  the  great 
question  is  —  how  has  such  a  migration  been  effected?  For  those  in- 
vestigators, who  are  inclined  to  credit  the  winds  and  marine  currents 
with  the  capacity  of  transporting  living  seeds  over  almost  unlimited  di- 
stances, and  of  putting  them  safely  in  a  convenient  spot  for  germinating, 
the  question  is  easily  enough  put  aside,  as  we  have  the  great  polar  current 
which  flows  in  against  the  east  coast  of  Greenland.  In  my  opinion, 
however,  there  are  some  further  problems  to  be  solved. 

Even  if  we  take  for  granted,  that  the  seeds  of  these  plants  possess 
the  required  resistance  to  the  influence  of  salt  water,  and  that  they  can 
stand  an  ice-journey  of  several  years,  and  afterwards  find  their  way  to 
convenient  grovvingplaces  in  a  new  land,  why  are  they  entirely  restric- 


46  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

ted  to  the  northern  coast  part?  Why  have  they  not  spread  southwards 
along  the  coast  when  the  same  mode  of  conveyance  might  carry  them 
thither?  And,  moreover,  why  have  they  not  gone  over  to  the  west 
coast  when  the  american  species  have  reached  the  eastern  shore  ?  If  we 
assume,  that  there  has  been,  in  post-glacial  time,  a  land-communication 
along  which  they  have  wandered,  we  get  at  least  a  somewhat  better  so- 
lution of  the  problem,  even  though  every  point  may  not  be  settled. 
As  the  way  along  the  Arctic  American  Archipelago  was  never  glaciated 
to  any  considerable  extent,  it  lay  open  even  in  early  post-glacial  (or  late 
glacial)  time,  and  thus  the  american  species  got  under  way  northwards 
very  long  ago.  Some  may  even  have  lived  in  the  islands  during  the 
maximum  of  glaciation.  The  eastern  species  had  a  long  way  over 
which  to  spread,  and  few  only  reached  so  far  as  Greenland  before  the 
road  of  migration  was  made  impracticable  by  the  sinking  of  the  land. 
Changes  of  climate  may  also  have  played  their  part  in  restricting  these 
pioneers  to  their  present  small  area,  as  well  as  in  breaking  up  that  of 
some  of  the  western  species  in  isolated  parts.  Such  a  view  also  agrees 
very  well  with  some  peculiarities  in  the  distribution  of  marine  algae, 
especially  the  Laminariaceae,  which  I  have  pointed  out  elsewhere 
(SIMMONS,  Relations  of  Floras,  p.  166—167). 

Now  the  appearance  of  these  eastern  species  is,  indeed,  the  princi- 
pal difference  between  the  floras  of  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  Greenland,  but  it 
must  not  be  overvalued;  the  number  of  species  common  to  both,  is  still 
more  prominent.  Even  if  we  set  aside  the  doubtful  and  ubiquitous  spe- 
cies, we  have  left  at  least  as  many  american  as  eastern  species  in  the 
flora  of  N.  E.  Greenland;  and  if  we  reckon  all  that  have  more  or  less 
probably  arrived  from  the  american  side,  we  get  from  four  to  five  times 
as  many  western  as  eastern  plants.  Among  the  three  areas  here  com- 
pared, that  in  N.  E.  Greenland  shows  the  largest  number  of  species. 
It  must,  however,  be  kept  in  mind,  that  it  begins  about  three  degrees 
of  latitude  south  of  the  two  others,  and  the  limit  of  the  known  part  of 
the  N.  E.  coast  coincides  with  the  southern  part  of  the  western  districts. 
This  may  account  for  the  presence  here  of  so  many  (14—15)  southern 
species. 

North- Western  Greenland  shows  the  smallest  number  of  species. 
I  think,  however,  that  this  is  in  great  part  due  to  its  very  imperfect 
exploration;  15  species,  found  both  in  Ellesmereland  and  in  N.  E.  Green- 
land, are  absent  from  the  N.  W.  Greenland  list,  but  probably  not  in  fact 
from  its  flora.  That  this  about  holds  the  middle  position  between  those 
of  the  districts  on  each  side,  appears  from  the  different  tables  above; 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.     47 

but  it  comes  a  little  nearer  to  that  of  Ellesmereland  than  to  that  of 
N.  E.  Greenland.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  also  connected  with  that  of 
Danish  West  Greenland,  and  if  a  border-line  between  a  Greenland  and 
an  american  flora  is  to  be  drawn,  we  must  let  it  follow  Smith  Sound 
and  its  northern  continuation  and  not  make  such  a  deflection  as  to 
include  Ellesmereland,  as  HOOKER  (App.  Nares)  has  done.  The  almost 
entire  absence,  in  the  Ellesmereland  flora,  of  species  that  might  have 
come  from  Greenland,  entirely  prohibits  its  consideration  as  greenlandic. 
The  only  species  which  may  be  of  eastern  origin  are  Taraxacum 
phymatocarpum,  Aira  flexuosa,  and  further  Melandrium  triflorum, 
if  that  plant  is  not  erroneously  reported  from  Grinnell  Land,  as  I  think 
it  is,  and  perhaps  also  Agropyrum  violaceum.  All  these,  however,  are 
of  a  far  too  sporadic  appearance  to  give  any  greenlandic  character  to 
the  flora;  whereas,  on  the  other  hand,  the  similarity  to  the  flora  of  the 
other  American  Islands  is  strongly  marked. 

I  think  it  best  with  this  to  finish  the  sketch  of  the  connections  of 
the  North-Western  Greenland  flora  at  present.  I  am  fully  aware  that 
it  is  very  incomplete;  and  I  would  accentuate  the  fact  that  it  is  by  no 
means  to  be  considered  as  a  definite  treatment,  but  only  as  a  preliminary 
notice  to  an  examination  into  the  relations  and  history  of  the  whole  arctic 
american  flora,  which  I  hope  some  time  to  have  an  opportunity  of 
finishing.  I  have  also  abstained  from  quoting  here  the  different  works 
in  which  the  history  of  the  Greenland  flora  is  discussed.  Perhaps  in 
the  mean  time  also  the  revision  of  the  american  collections  may  be 
made,  which,  as  I  have  above  pointed  out,  is  highly  desirable.  For 
my  own  part,  I  must  undertake  a  thorough  revision  of  all  the  material 
from  Arctic  America  in  the  London  collections,  so  as  to  be  able  to 
make  up  lists  of  distribution  for  each  species,  and  flora  lists  for  each 
island  or  group  islands  in  the  Archipelago  as  well  as  for  different  parts 
of  the  arctic  shore,  before  I  feel  myself  justified  in  approaching  nearer 
to  the  phyto-geographical  questions,  the  solution  of  which  I  look  upon 
as  the  principal  object  of  my  contributions  to  the  knowledge  of  the 
arctic  american  and  Greenland  flora  and  vegetation. 

Lund,  Sweden,  November  1908. 


48  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


The  Species  of  Vascular  Plants  in  the  Flora  of 
North- Western  Greenland. 


In  Ihe  following  treatment  of  the  different  species  I  have  followed 
the  same  plan  as  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.;  and,  as  by  far  the  larger  part  of 
the  plants  is  common  to  both  districts,  I  have  not  thought  it  necessary 
to  repeat  such  items  as  may  easily  be  found  there.  Therefore  I  have 
not  here  given  a  complete  synonymic  for  species  included  in  the  Ellesmere- 
land  flora,  but  have  only  referred  to  the  synonymic  given  in  my  previous 
work.  For  species  not  treated  there,  I  have  given  a  synonymic  on  the 
same  plan  as  in  Fl.  Ellesm.  It  is,  however,  impossible  in  many  cases 
to  give  an  exact  synonymic,  for  I  have  not  seen  all  the  specimens  upon 
which  the  identifications  in  the  different  papers  concerning  North- Western 
Greenland  are  based,  and  therefore  I  have  thought  it  best  to  insert,  as 
a  "special  synonymic"  in  [square  brackets]  the  names  used  in  these 
treatises  which  I  have,  with  more  or  less  certainty,  in  some  cases  by 
guess  only,  referred  to  the  species  in  question. 

The  list  of  literature  at  the  end  of  the  book,  is  only  intended  to  be 
an  appendix  to  that  of  the  Fl.  Ellesm.  where  most  of  the  works  that 
have  reference  to  the  vascular  plants  of  Arctic  America  and  Greenland 
are  enumerated.  The  abbreviations  of  the  titles  used  in  the  text  are 
also  to  be  found  there,  as  I  have  not  deemed  it  necessary  to  repeat  the 
whole  bibliography  and  as  the  two  floras  will  always  have  to  be  used 
together. 

The  statements  about  occurrence  and  distribution  are  made  up  in 
the  same  manner  as  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  and  when  no  account  of  the 
latter  is  inserted  here,  it  is  to  be  found  in  that  treatise.  In  the  records 
of  occurrence  I  have  used  a  "S"  to  signify  the  southern  part  (76° — 79°) 
and  a  "N"  for  the  upper  part  of  N.  W.  Greenland  (from  80°  northwards). 


1898-1902.  No.  16. j     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       49 

Compositae. 
Taraxacum  hyparcticuni,  DAHLST. 

T.  hyparcMcum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  T.  phymatocarpum,  HANDEL- 
MAZETTI,  Mon.  Tarax.,  ex  p. 

Already  during  the  expedition,  I  was  in  no  doubt  about  the  fact  that 
all  the  statements  in  literature  about  the  Taraxacum-forms  of  N.  W. 
Greenland  and  the  adjacent  countries,  must  be  based  entirely  upon  wrong 
determinations  ;  the  plants  may  he  called  T.  officinale,  T.  palustre,  T. 
Dens  Leonis,  or  any  other  name.  The  little  I  have  seen  of  the  collec- 
tions made  by  others  from  the  area  here  in  question,  has  further  con- 
firmed my  opinion,  and  I  can  only  regret  the  impossibility  of  examining 
the  collections  from  most  of  the  american  expeditions.  When  Dr.  DAHL- 
STEDT  began  his  researches  in  arctic  Taraxaca,  now  published  in  his 
treatises  Stud.  arkt.  Tarax.,  and  Tarax.  ceratoph.,  he  also  found  that 
the  above  names  were  generally  used  for  plants  representing  new  and 
hitherto  undescribed  species.  But  it  has  been  impossible  for  him  also 
to  control  the  american  authors ;  and  it  must  still  be  left  an  open 
question  what  they  meant,  except  in  a  few  cases  where  specimens  have 
been  accessible,  or  where  at  least  a  guess  is  possible. 

The  species  here  in  question  has  been  examined  by  DAHLSTEDT  in 
my  collection;  but  about  its  occurrence  in  other  parts  of  the  area  than 
that  where  I  found  it,  only  conjectures  are  possible. 

Occurrence.  This  species  is  as  yet  only  known  with  certainty  in  a 
few  individuals  from  a  single  locality  in  N.  W.  Greenland,  Etah  in  Foulke 
Fjord  (4268,  4269).  DAHLSTEDT  found  them  mixed  in  my  Taraxacum 
collection  from  that  point  which,  for  the  most  part,  represented  T.  arcto- 
genum  DAHLST.  It  is,  however,  rather  probable  that  the  T.  palustre 
which  HART  (Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.)  speaks  of  as  a  form  of  T.  Dens  Leonis, 
occurring  in  Foulke  Fjord,  is  the  same.  T.  palustre  is  also  mentioned 
by  DURAND  (Enum.  PI.  Smith  S.)  as  collected  at  Netlik  by  HAYES  and 
by  KANE  at  Bedevilled  Reach  (Enum.  PI.);  but  without  seeing  the  spe- 
cimens it  is  impossible  to  form  any  opinion  about  the  plant  that  is  meant. 

Taraxacum  phymatocarpum,  J.  VAHL. 

T.  phymatocarpum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  HANDEL- MAZETTI,  Mon. 
Tarax.,  ex  p.  [T.  officinale,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  ex  p.;  T.  off. 
var.  lividum,  FERNALD  in  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 


50  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

This  species,  principally  greenlanciic,  has  curiously  enough,  never 
been  mentioned  from  N.  W.  Greenland  before  I  used  the  name  in  my 
Prel.  Rep.,  although  in  a  wrong  sense,  as  I  had  not  then  subjected  my 
Taraxaca  to  a  closer  study.  In  fact,  the  real  T.  phymatocarpum  is 
not  present  in  my  collection  from  Foulke  Fjord,  but  DAHLSTEDT  has 
found  it  hiding  under  olher  names  in  collections  from  our  area. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Whale  Sound,  Netiulumi 
(  WETHERILL).  HOLM,  in  his  list  of  the  STEIN  collection,  has  used  for  a  plant 
from  Northumberland  Island  the  same  name  (T.  off.  var.  lividum)  as 
FERNALD  in  WETHERILL.  List  1894;  perhaps  this  statement  also  may  be 
referable  to  the  species  here  in  question. 


Taraxacum  arctogenum,  DAHLST. 

T.  arctogenum,  DAHLSTEDT,  Tarax.  ceratoph.,  1906;  T.  officinale, 
NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  ex  p.;  T.  phymatocarpum,  SIMMONS,  Prel. 
Rep.  et  Bot.  Arb.,  ex  p. 

Fig.  DAHLSTEDT,  1.  c.,  T.  16. 

When  I  published  my  first  reports  of  the  botany  of  the  expedition, 
I  confounded  this  species  with  the  common  Ellesmereland  plant,  i.  e.  T. 
hyparcticum;  but  later  on  I  found  that  it  came  near  to  T.  ceratophorumf 
which  was  already  stated  as  a  Greenland  plant,  although  not  mentioned 
from  the  north-western  parts.  Dr.  DAHLSTEDT,  however,  has  founded  a 
new  species  on  my  material. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST) ;  Foulke  Fjord,  abundant  in 
the  gravelly  and  clayish  slopes  beneath  Etah  (198,  1473).  Perhaps  also 
the  T.  phymatocarpum  from  Etah  in  HOLM'S  list  of  the  STEIN  collec- 
tion may  be  referred  here.  Mr.  HOLM  hat  determined  those  plants  be- 
fore DAHLSTEDT'S  treatises  were  published. 

Distribution.  Danish  West  Greenland  (known  from  a  single  lo- 
cality at  68°  35'). 

Arnica  alpina,  (L.)  OLIN. 

A.  alpina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [A.  alpina,  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.; 
WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

This  species  was  first  brought  home  from  "near  Smith's  Sound, 
78°"  by  KANE,  but  as  it  was  not  found  by  subsequent  expeditions, 
NATHORST  enters  it  in  his  list  (N.  W.  Gronl.)  as  doubtful.  Later  expedi- 
tions have,  however,  found  it  in  several  places. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.1     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      51 


In  Foulke  Fjord,  probably  the  same  locality  where  KANE  had 
collected  it,  it  grew  in  the  sward  of  the  slopes  benealh  the  rookeries  of 
the  little  auk. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (STEIN);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Verhoeff 
Nunatak  (MEEHAN),  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord,  inside  Etah 
(225,  1502). 

Antennaria  alpina,  (L.)  GAERTN. 

A.  alpina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [A.  alpina,  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.]. 

The  specimens  from  the  only  locality  in  N.  W.  Greenland  that  I 
have  seen  in  the  Stockholm  herbarium,  belong  to  a  form  whose  leaves 
are  rather  densely  woolly-haired  on  the  upper  surface  also. 

Occurrence.     S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST). 


Erigeron  compositus,  PURSH. 

E.  compositus,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [E.  compositus,  HART,  Bot. 
Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  MEEHAN,  Gontr.  Greenl.]. 

Curiously  enough,  this  handsome  plant  has  been  totally  overlooked 
by  most  of  the  previous  visitors  to  Foulke  Fjord,  where,  however,  it  is 
rather  abundant  in  the  gravelly  slopes,  forming  large  tufts  with  numerous 
heads  of  flowers.  Many  were  still  in  flower  when  I  first  visited  the 
place,  Aug.  16,  1898. 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf  (MEEHAN) ;  Foulke  Fjord  (FEILDEN), 
at  Etah  (215,  1475). 


Campanulaceae. 

Campanula,  unifiora,  L. 

C.  uniflora,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [C.  unifiora,  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.]. 

This  plant  has  entirely  escaped  the  american  collectors  unless  the 
C.  rotundifolia  var.  linifolia  of  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  should  be 
referred  to  this  species.  But  that  plant  is  recorded  from  the  dubious 
locality  "Tessiussak"  and  therefore  must  be  left  out  of  consideration. 
It  might,  with  better  reason  perhaps,  be  presumed  that  the  "gentian"  of 
which  KANE,  I  Grinnell  Exp.,  p.  142,  speaks  as  being  seen  somewhere 
between  Cape  York  and  Cape  Dudley  Digges,  is  the  present  species. 


52  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

DURAND,  Enum.  PI.,  mentions  no  Gentiana1,  and  it  seems  very  impro- 
bable that  any  species  of  that  genus  should  have  reached  so  far,  as  no 
Gentiana  is  found  elsewhere  north  of  69°  in  Western  Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Foulke  Fjord,  above  Etah 
(1505). 

Scrophulariaceae. 
Pedicularis  capitata,  ADAMS. 

P.  capitata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [P.  capitata,  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.]. 

This  species,  first  discovered  by  HART  to  be  a  native  of  Greenland, 
is  still  »found  only  in  the  same  locality,  where  it  grew  rather  sparingly 
among  the  grass  along  small  rivulets. 

Occurrence.  S.  Foulke  Fjord,  Port  Foulke  (HART),  Point  Jensen 
(GOPPINGER),  plateau  above  Etah  (213). 

Pedicularis  hirsuta,  L. 

P.  hirsuta,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[P.  hirsuta,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  PI.  Smith  S. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  ex  p.  ?;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl. ; 
WETHERILL,  List  1894;  P.  Kanei,  HAYES,  Op.  Pol.  Sea]. 

This  species  is  doubtless  equally  common  in  our  area  as  it  is  in 
Ellesmereland  and  in  Northern  Danish  Greenland.  I  have  explained  in 
Fl.  Ellesm.  how  difficult  it  is  to  ascertain  what  some  authors  have 
understood  by  their  names  for  the  species  of  Pedicularis,  and  therefore 
I  only  refer  to  what  is  said  there.  In  the  following,  the  localities  are 
named  that  can  without  any  doubt  be  referred  to  the  present  plant. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Wolstenholme  Sound  (!NGLEFIELD) ;  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Is- 
land (STEIN);  M'Cormick  Bay  (MEEHAN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke 
(HAYES)  and  many  other  places  (226);  Fog  Inlet  (KANE);  Rensselaer  Bay 
(KANE).  N.  Bessels  Bay  (HART).  This  locality  is  not  certain,  as  HART 
has  also  used  the  name  for  P.  lanata. 

Pedicularis  Janata,  CHAM.  &  SCHLECHTEND. 

P.  lanata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [P.  Kanei,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.;  P. 
Langsdorffii  var.  lanata,  WETHERILL,  List  1894J. 

1  Indeed  in  PJ.  Kan.  he  makes  the  supposition  that  Saxifraga  oppositifolia  might 
be  the  "gentian"  of  KANE.  NATHORST  (Nachtr.)  has  already  made  the  same  con- 
jecture about  Campanula  uniflora. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       53 

As  I  have  previously  (1.  c.,  p.  29)  mentioned,  the  P.  Kanei  of 
DuRAND1  belongs  to  the  present  species,  while  his  P.  lanata  is  really 
P.  hirsuta.  Of  the  later  collectors,  only  WETHERILL  records  a  P. 
Langsdorffii  var.  lanata,  which  may  probably  be  rightly  determined. 
As  f  did  not  find  it  in  Foulke  Fjord,  nor  did  NATHORST  at  Ivsugigsok, 
it  is  probably  a  rare  plant  in  this  part  of  Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  "Smith  Sound  Stati- 
ons" (KANE). 

Pedicularis  flammea,  L. 

P.  flammea,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Greenl.; 
KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer. ; 
BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  Fl. ;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  HARTMAN,  Skancl. 
FL;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. 

Fig.  LINNAEUS,  Fl.  Lapp.,  T.  4,  f.  2;  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  1878. 

I  have  seen  no  specimens  of  this  plant  from  any  locality  within  the 
area,  but  as  it  is  mentioned  by  FERNALD,  whose  identifications  are 
generally  reliable  and  who  has  evidently  been  able  to  discern  the  other 
species,  I  do  not  hesitate  to  enter  it  for  the  area. 

Occurrence.  S.  "Quite  abundant  in  low  ground  at  Gape  York" 
(WETHERILL). 

Distribution.  East  Greenland,  West  Greenland,  Arctic  America, 
Labrador,  Rocky  Mountains,  Alaska,  Arctic  Russia,  Northern  Scandi- 
navia, Iceland. 

Pedicularis  arctica,  R.  BR. 

P.  arctica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.    [P.  arctica,  DURAND,  PL  Kan.]. 

I  have  not  myself  seen  specimens  of  this  plant  from  our  area,  but, 
as  previously  stated  (1.  c.,  p.  32),  there  cannot  be  the  slightest  doubt  that 
the  P.  arctica  of  DURAND,  PL  Kan.,  is  the  real  one. 

Occurrence.     S.  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE). 

Pedicularis  lapponica,  L. 

As  I  have  previously  (Fl.  Ellesm.,  p.  34)  shown,  HART  (Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  p.  35)  must  somehow  have  confounded  either  his  specimens 
of  Pedicularis  from  different  stations,  or  the  characters  of  the  species; 


1  In  Enum.  pi.  Smith  Sound,  the  author  does  not  mention  his  new  species  as 
having  been  found  by  HAYES,  but  in  Op.  Pol.  Sea,  the  name  P.  Kanei  is  substi- 
tuted for  P.  hirsuta,  probably  by  mistake. 


54  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

for  he  mentions  this  plant  from  places  where  it  certainly  does  not  grow. 
This  view  is  confirmed  by  the  absence  of  specimens  from  the  NARES 
expedition  in  the  London  collections.  The  statement  about  its  occurrence 
in  Foulke  Fjord  must  be  left  out  of  consideration. 

Bartsia  alpina,  L. 

B.  alpina,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LANGE,  Gonsp.  Fl.  Groenl. ; 
KRUUSE,  ListE.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.; 
BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  Fl.;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  HARTMAN,  Skand.  Fl.; 
GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. 

Fig.  Sv.  Bot,  T.  573;  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  43. 

There  exists  an  old  statement  that  this  plant  is  found  in  North- 
Western  Greenland,  but  it  is  one  of  the  doubtful  ones  from  "Tessiussak, 
Sept.  4"  in  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  and,  as  previously  explained, 
cannot  be  taken  into  consideration.  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  therefore 
rightly  excludes  it,  but  it  has  since  been  found  by  WETHERILL  and 
consequently  belongs  notwithstanding  to  the  flora  of  this  region. 

Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution.  East  and  West  Greenland,  Labrador,  Arctic  Russia, 
Scandinavia,  the  Alps  and  Pyrenees,  Great  Britain,  Faeroes,  Iceland. 

Borraginaceae. 
Mertensia  maritima,  (L.)  S.  F.  GRAY. 

Pulmonaria  maritima,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  Steenhammera 
maritima,  REICHENBACH,  Fl.  Germ.  exc. ;  Mertensia  maritima,  GRAY, 
Nat.  Arr.  Br.  PI.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  Sten- 
harnmaria  maritima,  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.;  KJELLMAN,  in  Vega- 
exp.;  HARTMAN,  Skand.  Fl.;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  FL;  Lithospermum  mari- 
timum,  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.;  Pneumaria  maritima,  BRITTON  & 
BROWN,  III.  Fl. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  25. 

I  have  not  seen  this  species  which  is  not  found  elsewhere  further 
northward  than  about  72°,  but  I  enter  it  on  the  authority  of  WETHERILL. 

Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution.  West  Greenland,  Arctic  America,  Labrador,  down  to 
Newfoundland  and  Massachusetts,  from  Oregon  to  Alaska,  islands  of  the 
Bering  Sea,  Land  of  the  Chukches,  down  to  Kamshatka  and  the  Amur 
Territory,  Arctic  Russia,  Scandinavia,  Denmark,  Great  Britain,  Faeroes, 
Iceland. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      55 

Plumbaginaceae. 
Statice  maritime,  MILL.  var.  sibirica,  (Turcz.)  SIMM. 

St.  maritima  var.  sibirica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Armeria  vulga- 
ris,  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  A.  vulg.  var.  labradorica,  DURAND,  Enum. 
pi.  Smith  S.]. 

This  plant  was  excluded  from  the  flora  of  North- Western  Green- 
land by  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  because  he  thought  it  rather  improb- 
able that  it  should  grow  so  far  north,  and  as  there  was  only  the 
doubtful  statement  of  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  to  prove  that  it  had 
been  found  there.  But  since  that  time  it  has  been  collected  by  WETH- 
ERILL in  several  places,  and  moreover  I  have  myself  found  it  in  Elles- 
mereland.  Consequently  there  seems  no  cause  for  the  exclusion  of  the 
locality  of  DURAND,  "Netlik",  which  lies  very  near  one  of  the  localities 
of  WETHERILL. 

I  have  not  seen  the  latter's  specimens,  but  I  think  it  must  be  taken 
for  granted  that  the  plant  of  North- Western  Greenland  is  the  same  as 
that  in  Ellesmereland,  North-Eastern  Greenland  and  the  Northern  Danish 
colonial  districts.  Consequently  I  have  set  the  name  used  by  WETHER- 
ILL as  a  synonym,  as  well  as  that  of  DURAND,  which  in  HAYES'S  own 
list,  Op.  Pol.  Sea,  p.  399,  is  altered  to  A.  labradorica.  But,  as  I  have 
discussed  it  in  Fl.  Ellesm.,  the  real  A.  labradorica  is  not  found  in 
Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Whale  Sound;  Burdin 
Bay  (STEIN),  Netiulumi  (WETHERILL),  Netlik  (HAYES);  Cape  Acland  and 
Fan  Glacier  in  Inglefield  Gulf  (WETHERILL). 


Dmpensiaceae. 
Diapensia,  lapponica,  L. 

D.  lapponica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894. 

Here,  as  in  some  other  cases  in  the  first  part  of  my  Fl.  Ellesm., 
the  localities  recorded  by  WETHERILL  have  been  overlooked  and  his 
paper  not  quoted  in  the  synonymic  as  it  should  have  been.  The  north- 
ern limit  of  this  species  will  thus  be  altered  from  74°  18'  to  about  76°. 
It  is  for  this  also  that  I  have  given  a  reference  to  his  work  in  I  he 
synonymic  which  as  to  the  rest  is  to  be  found  in  Fl.  Ellesm. 

Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL). 


56  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Ericaceae. 
Myrtillus   uliginosa,   (L.)  DREJ.     var.  microphylla,   (LANGE)  SIMM. 

M.ulig.  var.  microphylla,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Vaccinium  uligi- 
nosum,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol. 
Exp. ;  V.  ulig.  var.  microphyllum,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  V.  ulig. 
v.  mucronatum,  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

This  plant  seems  to  be  rather  common  within  the  area,  as  it  is 
present  in  most  collections.  FERNALD  (in  WETHERILL,  1.  c.)  uses  the 
name  "var.  mucronatum,  HERDER"  for  it.  I  have  not  been  able  to  find 
out  where  that  variety  is  established  or  how  it  is  characterized;  but 
probably  the  name  cannot  apply  to  our  plant.  Moreover  V.  mucrona- 
turn  of  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  is  shown  to  be  a  plant  belonging  to  the 
Aquifoliaceae,  Nemopanthes  fascicularis,  RAFIN. 

Here,  as  in  Ellesmereland,  the  size  of  the  leaves  is  very  variable, 
and  as  WETHERILL  mentions,  specimens  may  be  found  that  have  quite 
as  large  leaves  as  those  of  the  type. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  between  Gape  York  and 
Gape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Netlik  (HAYES),  Gape  Ac- 
land  and  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  especially  in 
the  grassy  slopes  above  Etah  (245). 

Vaccinium  Vitis  idaea,  L. 

V.  Vitis  idaea,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.; 
SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.; 
BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  Fl. ;  KJELLMAN,  in  Vegaexp.;  FEILDEN,  Fl.  PI.  Nov. 
Zeml.;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  40;  Sv.  Bot.,  T.  116. 

I  have  entered  this  species  in  the  list  on  the  authority  of  SUTHER- 
LAND, who  has  it  in  his  list,  notwithstanding  that  I  have  seen  no  speci- 
men in  the  London  collections.  It  is,  however,  not  improbable  that  it 
occurs  at  the  northern  coast  of  Melville  Bay,  as  it  is  found  up  to  the 
northernmost  parts  of  Danish  Greenland. 

Occurrence.     S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND). 

Distribution.  West  Greenland,  Arctic  America,  Labrador,  down 
to  the  Northern  United  States,  British  Columbia,  Alaska,  islands  of  the 
Bering  Sea,  Northern  and  Middle  Asia,  Europe,  Novaja  Semlja,  Great 
Britain,  Iceland. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       57 

Cassiope  tetragona,  (L.)  D.  DON. 

C.  tetragona,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
\C.  tetragona,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETH- 
ERILL,  List  1894;  OSTENFELD,  Fl,  pi.  Gape  York;  Andromeda  tetragona, 
DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.]. 

This  plant  seems  to  lake  as  prominent  a  place  in  the  vegetation  on 
the  Greenland  side  as  it  does  on  the  western  side  of  Smith  Sound. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Cape  York  (HART, 
WETHERILL);  between  there  and  Cape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Ivsugigsok 
(NATHORST);  Umanak  and  Agpa  in  Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE)  ;  Gran- 
ville  Bay  (MvLius  ERICHSEN);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island 
(STEIN),  Cape  Acland,  Bowdoin  Bay  and  Robertson  Bay  (WETHERILL); 
Port  Foulke  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  abundant  at  Reindeer  Point 
and  Etah  (STEIN,  252) ;  Fog  Inlet,  Bedevilled  Reach  and  Rensselaer  Bay 
(KANE). 

Loiseleuria  procumbens,  (L.)  DESV. 

This  plant  has  been  recorded  by  KANE,  I  Grinnell  Exp.,  p.  143, 
from  a  place  between  Cape  York  and  Cape  Dudley  Digges  and  later  was 
entered  in  NATHORST,  Nachtr.  Now  as  the  plant  is  found  north  of  74° 
in  Danish  Greenland  it  would  seem  very  probable  that  it  also  grew  here, 
but  it  is  not  mentioned  in  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  and  KANE  himself  men- 
tions it  in  such  a  way,  as  to  make  it  very  doubtful  whether  he,  who 
was  not  much  of  a  botanist,  had  not  perhaps  quite  another  plant  in 
front  of  him.  The  lines  in  question  run  thus: —  ".  .  .  .  the  wild  honey- 
suckle (Azalea  procumbens)  of  our  Pennsylvania  woods— I  could  stick 
the  entire  plant  in  my  button-hole".  Now  the  name  "honeysuckle"  is 
used  not  only  for  the  species  of  Lonicera  of  which  several  grow  in  the 
woods  of  Pennsylvania,  but  also  for  Azalea,  but  hardly  1  think  for  A. 
(Loiseleuria)  procumbens,  a  plant  moreover  which  is  not  found  further 
south  in  the  Eastern  States  than  on  the  summits  of  the  White  Moun- 
tains of  New  Hampshire  and  of  course  not  as  a  common  plant  in  woods. 
Were  I  to  venture  a  guess  at  the  plant  KANE  has  seen,  I  should 
be  most  inclined  to  think  of  Rhododendron  lapponicum,  which  has 
since  that  time  been  found  in  the  same  neighbourhood;  but  at  all  events 
the  statement  of  KANE  must  be  left  entirely  out  of  consideration. 

Rhododendron  lapponicum,  (L.)  WAHLENB. 
Azalea  lapponica,   LINNAEUS,   Sp.  Plant.,    1753;   Rh.  lapponicum, 
WAHLENBERG,   Fl.  Lapp.;    LANGE,   Consp.   Fl.  Groenl. ;    KRUUSE,  List  E. 


58  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Greenl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer. ;  BRITTON  & 
BROWN,  III.  FL;  KJELLMAN,  Fan.  Vestesk.  land;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross. 

Fig.  LINNAEUS,  Fl.  Lapp.,  T.  6,  f.  1 ;  Sv.  Bot.,  T.  481 ;  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  966. 

Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution.  East  and  West  Greenland,  Arctic  American  Archi- 
pelago, Arctic  America,  Labrador,  mountains  of  the  northern  United 
States,  Rocky  Mountains,  Alaska,  Northern  Russia,  Northern  Scandinavia. 


Pyrolaceae. 
Pyrola  rotundifolia,  L.  var.  grandiflora,  (RAD.)  DC. 

P.  rotund,  var.  grandiflora,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [P.  rotundifolia 
var.  grandiflora,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  P.  rot.  var.  pumila, 
WETHERILL,  List  1894;  P.  chlorantha,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.]. 

This  plant  was  first  mentioned  by  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  as  P.  chlo- 
rantha, but  he  afterwards  corrected  the  name  in  Enum.  PI.  Smith  S. 
NATHORST,  however,  has  it  as  doubtful.  No  specimens  were  available 
and  it  is  only  recorded  for  "Smith  Sound  Stations"  by  DURAND;  more- 
over, the  specimens  of  HAYES,  who  also  has  it  in  his  list  under  the 
same  name,  are  from  the  problematical  "Tessiussak".  This  induced 
NATHORST  to  put  a  "?"  for  it  in  his  table  (N.  W.  Gr6nl.).  But  since 
the  appearance  of  the  last  mentioned  paper,  the  plant  has  been  found 
in  several  places. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  between  that  point  and 
Cape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE,  I  Grinnell  Exp.,  p.  143);  Umanak  and 
Saunders  Island  (Agpa)  in  Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE);  Bowdoin  Bay 
in  Inglefield  Gulf  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord,  near  Etah  (216). 

Onagraceae. 
Chamaenerium  latifolium,  (L.)  SWEET. 

Ch.  latifolium,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Epilobium  latifolium,  HART, 
Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

To  judge  from  the  few  points  within  our  area  from  which  this  spe- 
cies is  known  as  yet,  one  would  think  it  to  be  rather  rare  there;  but 
probably  it  will  in  general  flower  scarcely,  as  is  also  the  case  in  Elles- 
mereland,  and,  in  its  sterile  state,  it  may  easily  be  overlooked  by  col- 
ectors  who  are  not  trained  botanists.  In  Foulke  Fjord  I  saw  only  one 
single  flower. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      59 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Sound:  Saunders  Island  (Agpa)  and 
Umanak  (BALLE);  Cape  Acland  and  Fan  Glacier  in  Inglefield  Gulf  (WETH- 
ERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  in  gravelly  places  near  Etah  (242). 

Empetraceae. 
Empetrum  nigrum,  L. 

E.  nigrum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [E.  nigrum,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.; 
HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

As  I  have  previously  (1.  c.,  p.  42)  gone  into  details  abouth  the  North- 
West  Greenland  Empetrum-form,  it  is  not  necessary  to  reiterate  that 
discussion.  My  specimens  from  Foulke  Fjord  decidedly  belong  to  the 
variety  purpureum,  (RAFIN.)  DC.,  as  doubtless  also  do  those  of  HAYES, 
which  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  has  called  E.  rubrum.  The  plant 
of  HAYES'S  collection  is  reported  by  DURAND,  1.  c.,  p.  95,  from  the  prob- 
lematical "Tessiussak".  The  fact  that  the  red-fruited  form  is  nowhere 
found  in  Danish  Greenland,  seems  to  tell  against  the  supposition  of 
MALMGREN,  Grinnell  Fl.,  which  as  I  have  discussed  (p.  14),  is  for  the  rest 
supported  by  several  circumstances.  The  Empetrum  specimens  may, 
in  fact,  belong  to  another  collection.  In  Foulke  Fjord  the  plant  grew 
under  similar  conditions  as  in  Ellesmereland.  Ripe  fruit  was  found 
August  11,  1899. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  "Smith  Sound"  (KANE); 
Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  near  Etah  (1500). 

Rosaceae. 
Dryas  integrifolia,  VAHL. 

D,  integrifolia,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [D.  integrifolia,  DURAND,  PI. 
Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  OSTENFELD,  Fl. 
pi.  Cape  York;  D.  octopetala  (et  var.  integrifolia),  DURAND,  1.  c.;  HART, 
Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol  Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.]. 

As  I  have  previously  stated  (I.  c.,  p.  43 — 45)  all  reports  about  Dryas 
forms  from  the  area  here  in  question,  are  as  far  as  they  have  been 
controlled  by  examination  of  specimens  to  be  referred  to  this  species. 
No  D.  octopetala  is  found  there  as  far  as  I  know,  and  I  feel  quite 
justified  in  transferring  to  this  place  the  statements  about  D.  octopetala 
made  by  DURAND  in  his  treatments  of  the  collections  of  KANE  and  of 
HAYES. 


60  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Some  specimens  indeed  belong  to  the  var.  intermedia,  NATH.  I  have 
it  in  my  Foulke  Fjord  collection,  OSTENFELD  reports  it  as  having  been 
brought  home  by  MYLIUS  ERICHSEN,  and  it  has  also  been  seen  and 
collected  before  NATHORST  (N.  W.  Gronl.)  distinguished  it  from  the  typ- 
ical form  of  the  species.  To  this  the  reports  about  D.  octopetala  also 
may  in  general  be  referred.  It  is,  however,  only  a  local  form  produced 
by  certain  conditions.  Besides  I  have  also  found  the  var.  canescens, 
SIMM.,  in  Foulke  Fjord  (1883). 

D.  integrifolia  equally  as  in  Ellesrnereland  seems  also  to  be  a 
very  common  and  widely  distributed  plant  in  the  adjacent  parts  of 
Greenland  where  it  reaches  even  to  the  most  northern  part  of  the 
country.  Still  I  think  it  is  best  to  give  a  list  of  the  places  where  it  is 
noted  from. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (HART,  WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NAT- 
HORST); Umanak  and  Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  in  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(BALLE);  Granville  Bay  (Iterdlagssuak)  (Mvuus  ERICHSEN);  Inglefield  Gulf: 
Northumberland  Island  (STEIN);  Netlik  (HAYES),  Fan  Glacier  and  Cape 
Acland  (WETHERILL),  Verhoef  Nunatak  (MEEHAN),  Robertsons  Bay  (WETH- 
ERILL); Foulke  Fjord  (HART,  STEIN,  199,  1497,  1521,  1883);  Bedevilled 
Reach,  Rensselaer  Bay  and  Mary  Minturn  River  (KANE).  N.  Bessels  Bay 
and  Hannah  Island  (HART);  Polaris  Bay  (HART);  Lock  wood  Island 

(LoCKWOOD). 

Alchemilla  vulgaris,  L. 

Not  having  seen  any  specimens  I  can,  of  course,  form  no  opinion 
about  the  plant,  that  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  records  under  this 
name  from  Netlik.  No  Alchemilla  is  found  north  of  Melville  Bay  by 
any  other  collector,  which  makes  it  also  doubtful  if  the  plant  in  question 
really  was  found  there  and  not  in  Danish  Greenland.  Consequently  the 
safest  way  is  to  leave  it  out  of  consideration  until  more  reliable  inform- 
ation about  it  can  be  produced. 

Potentilla,  pulchella,  R.  BR. 

P.  pulchella,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

As  is  already  in  some  measure  shown  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  there  is 
much  difficulty  about  using  the  statements  of  the  older  authors  about 
the  arctic  Potentillae.  As  for  P.  pulchella,  this  name  is  to  be  found 
in  the  lists  of  different  authors,  but  it  is  rather  difficult  to  form  any 
opinion  about  the  plants  that  they  have  had  in  view.  As  none  of  them 
has  been  able  to  discern  P.  rubricaulis,  LEHM.,  it  is  always  possible  or 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      61 

even  probable,  that  the  latter  plant  may  hide  under  some  of  the  state- 
ments about  P.  pulchella  and  P.  nivea.  At  all  events  P.  pulchella 
seems  to  be  rather  a  rare  plant  in  N.  W.  Greenland.  Besides  my  own 
specimens  which  represent  a  form  from  rather  dry  localities  and  which 
somewhat  resemble  the  corresponding  form  of  P.  rubricaulis,  I  have 
only  seen  specimens  collected  by  NATHORST  (also  nearly  approaching 
P.  rubricaulis)  and  by  HART.  The  P.  pulchella  of  DURAND,  Enum.  pi., 
according  to  the  description  must  be  P.  rubricaulis,  and  the  same  per- 
haps is  the  case  with  the  Port  Foulke  plant  of  HAYES. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Port  Foulke  (HAYES,?); 
Foulke  Fjord,  on  a  sandy  beach  near  Reindeer  Point  (1529). 

Potentilla  rubricaulis ',  LEHM. 

P.  rubricaulis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  WOLF,  Mon.  Gatt.  Potent. 
[P.  rubricaulis,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  P.  nivea  var.,  NATHORST, 
N.  W.  Gronl.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  ex  p.  ?;  P.  pulchella,  DURAND, 
PI.  Kan.  ?]. 

This  species  is  probably  more  common  in  our  area  than  is  the 
preceding  one,  but  as  already  mentioned,  it  has  always  been  overlooked 
and  confounded  with  others.  At  Etah  it  was  not  rare  in  the  grassy 
and  gravelly  slopes.  I  am  very  much  inclined  to  think  that  the  P.  pul- 
chella of  DURAND  is  really  the  present  species.  His  description  clearly 
shows  that  he  has  not  had  the  real  P.  pulchella  in  front  of  him  for 
he  says:  "Flower  rather  large,  of  a  deep  yellow  colour;  petals  obcord- 
ate,  longer  than  the  calyx". 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Umanak  and  Agpa  in 
Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE);  Etah  in  Foulke  Fjord  (221,  1461,  1882); 
Rensselaer  Bay  and  Mary  Minturn  River  ?  (KANE). 

Potentate  anserina,  L. 

As  previously  mentioned  (SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.,  p.  54),  there  are  no 
specimens  to  confirm  HART'S  statement  (Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  p.  29)  about 
the  occurrence  of  this  species  at  Foulke  Fjord,  and  as  it  has  not  been 
found  so  far  north  by  other  collectors,  it  must  be  excluded  from  the 
flora  of  our  area. 

Potentate  nivea,  L. 

P.  nivea,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LEHMANN,  Revis.  Potent.;  RYD- 
BERG,  Mon.  Amer.  Potent. ;  WOLF,  Mon.  Gatt.  Potent. ;  LANGE,  Gonsp.  Fl. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Groenl.;  KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.  and  List  Angmags. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  ex  p.?;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  ex  p.?;  WETHERILL,  List 
1894,  ex  p.;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer. ;  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  Fl.;  LEDE- 
BOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  FEILDEN,  Fl.  PI.  Nov.  Zeml.;  ANDERSSON  &  HESSEL- 
MAN,  Spetsb.  Karlv. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  1035. 

As  this  species  is  rather  common,  or  at  least  widely  spread  in  the 
northern  parts  of  Danish  Greenland,  it  would  seem  probable  that  it 
should  also  grow  in  the  region  to  the  north-west.  Indeed  it  is  recorded 
by  almost  every  traveller  who  has  visited  our  area,  yet  notwithstanding, 
I  have  no  doubt  about  my  right  to  cancel  most  of  their  statements. 
As  I  have  discussed  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.  and  above,  most  of  them  are 
quite  useless  on  account  of  the  confusion  of  different  species.  HART 
(1.  c.),  for  instance,  notes  it  as  "common  everywhere",  but  all  his  speci- 
mens in  the  London  collections  belong  to  other  species,  DURAND  has 
certainly  used  the  name  in  a  wrong  sense  both  in  PI.  Kan.  and  in  Enum. 
pi.  Smith  S.,  and  as  far  as  I  can  see,  there  is  only  the  record  of  WETH- 
ERILL from  Whale  Sound  which  is  most  probably  right,  which  may  be 
used.  For  my  part  I  have  only  found  it  within  a  small  area  in  Foulke 
Fjord.  P.  nivea  also  after  the  removal  of  the  falsely  included  species, 
such  as  P.  Vahliana,  P.  rubricaulis,  and  others,  is  yet  a  rather  vari- 
able plant.  Even  at  the  Foulke  Fjord  locality  three  forms  of  it  can  be 
distinguished.  The  rarest  of  them  is  the  form  with  rather  broad,  rounded 
leaflets,  having  short  teeth  (205,  4270),  as  the  plant  generally  appears 
in  Europe.  Somewhat  less  sparingly  found  was  the  form  that  is  the 
most  common  in  the  arctic  regions,  especially  in  Greenland,  which  has 
longer  and  narrower  leaflets  that  are  more  deeply  incised  (1460).  This 
form  corresponds  to  the  variety  d  pinnatifida  of  LEHMANN,  whose  t 
pentaphylla  again  includes  the  most  luxuriant  forms  with  5-digitate 
leaves  occurring  in  greater  abundance.  However,  none  of  my  specimens 
can  be  referred  to  the  latter.  But  in  another  respect  they  are  somewhat 
different.  Some  of  them  show  the  typical  dense  white  woolly  clothing 
of  the  lower  surface  of  the  leaflets,  but  others  are  almost  entirely  quite 
green  (or  reddish).  They  do  not,  however,  quite  agree  with  the  e  sub- 
viridis  of  LEHMANN,  nor  are  they  referable  to  var.  pallidior,  SWARTZ, 
Sum.  Veg.  Scand.  The  plant  in  this  state  indeed  shows  a  rather  close 
resemblance  to  the  P.  Hookeriana,  LEHM.,  such  as  it  is  figured  in  Rev. 
Potent.,  T.  55,  but  that  species  of  which  specimens  are  entirely  lacking 
in  all  collections  to  which  I  have  had  access,  is  said  to  have  the  leaves 
white-tomentose  on  both  sides.  Such  specimens  are  distributed  under 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       63 

No.  4271,  but  I  have  deemed  it  best  not  to  give  them  any  separate 
name. 

Occurrence.  S.  Whale  Sound:  Netiulumi  (WETHERILL);  Foulke 
Fjord:  grassy  slopes  and  ledges  near  Etah  (205,  1460,  4270,  4271).  All 
older  statements  must  be  excluded  even  though  it  may  be  probable  that 
the  plant  has  a  wider  range  within  the  area  here  in  question. 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  southern  islands  of  the 
Arctic  American  Archipelago,  Arctic  America,  Labrador,  Canada,  New- 
foundland, Rocky  Mountains  down  to  Utah  and  Colorado,  British  Co- 
lumbia, Eastern  Siberia,  down  to  the  Himalayas  and  the  Caucasus,  Arc- 
tic Russia,  Northern  and  Alpine  Scandinavia,  the  Alps,  Novaja  Semlja, 
Spitsbergen. 

Potentate  Vahliana,  LEHM. 

P.  Vahliana,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  WOLF,  Mon.  Gatt.  Potent. 
[P.  Vahliana,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTEN- 
FELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  P.  nivea,  DURAND,  PL  Kan.]. 

Owing  to  the  confusion  with  other  species,  especially  P.  nivea,  in 
the  statements  of  most  authors,  it  is  difficult  to  form  any  distinct  opin- 
ion about  the  range  of  this  plant,  as  I  have  already  shown  (1.  c.,  p.  55). 
I  will,  however,  try  to  give  a  list  of  the  places  where  it  is  found  as  far 
as  can  be  judged  from  the  statements  in  literature  or  from  specimens 
seen  in  the  collections. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Umanak  and  Agpa  in  Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE);  Carey  Islands: 
Bjorling  Island  (WETHERILL);  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord:  gravel  and 
clay  plains  near  Etah  (210,  1498);  Rensselaer  Bay  (KANE).  Probably  also 
further  northward,  as  it  is  found  in  Grinnell  Land. 

Potentate  emarginata,  PURSH. 

P.  emarginata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plautes  N.  E. 
Gronl.  [P.  emarginaia,  MEEHAN,  Contr.  GreenL;  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  P.  fragiformis,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.; 
P.  frigida,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  WETHERILL,  I.e.;  DURAND,  PL 
Kan.;  P.  nivea  /?  concolor,  DURAND,  1.  c.]. 

Probably  this  species  is  common  throughout  the  area,  as  most 
collectors  have  brought  it  home.  Most  authors  seem  also  to  have  been 
able  to  distinguish  it  from  others;  but  still  it  seems  fairly  probable  that 
the  P.  nivea  p  concolor  of  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  p.  190,  belongs  to  it,  as 
doubtless  does  his  P.  nana. 


64  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Occurrence.  S.  Gape  York  (STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wol- 
stenholme  Sound:  Umanak  and  Agpa  (BALLE);  Wolstenholme  Island 
(MEEHAN);  Granville  Bay  (Iterdlagsuak)  (Mvnus  ERIGHSEN);  Inglefield 
Gulf:  nunatak  in  Verhoeff  Glacier  (MEEHAN);  Fan  Glacier  and  Bowdoin 
Bay  (WETHERILL)  ;  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN)  ;  Foulke  Fjord  (HART), 
slopes  and  ledges  at  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (STEIN,  4216,  4217);  Fog 
Inlet  (KANE);  Rensselaer  Harbour?  (KANE).  N.  Polaris  Bay  (COPPINGER). 


Potentilla,  tridentata,  SOL. 

This  species  is  recorded  by  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  p.  191,  from  Rens- 
selaer Harbour,  but  as  it  is  hardly  found  north  of  the  Disco  region,  there 
has  doubtless  been  some  confusion  of  specimens  and  consequently  it  is 
not  to  be  reckoned  as  a  member  of  the  flora  of  this  region  any  more 
than  is  P.  maculata,  POURR.,  which  NATHORST  has  through  some  mis- 
take entered  in  his  table  (N.  W.  Gronl.,  p.  31)  for  Rensselaer  Harbour. 
DURAND,  however,  does  not  record  any  such  plant  for  that  locality 
either  in  PI.  Kan.,  or  in  Enum.  pi.  Indeed  he  speaks  of  a  "P.  nivea 
/?  concolor",  which  LANGE,  Gonsp.  Fl.  Groenl.,  p.  6,  has  thought  to  be 
P,  maculata,  but  I  cannot  see  any  sufficient  reason  for  his  conjecture. 
DURAND,  indeed,  speaks  of  "two  flowerless  specimens",  but  besides  this 
he  also  describes  the  flower  and  gives  three  localities  for  it  which  shows 
that  he  has  had  more  specimens  before  him  than  the  sterile  ones.  Most 
probably  the  plant  from  Rensselaer  Bay  has  been  P.  emarginata. 

Saxifragaceae. 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  L. 

S.  oppositifolia,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E. 
Gronl.  [S.  oppositifolia,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.; 
HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  GREELY,  Rep.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.; 
MEEHAN,  Gontr.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi. 
Cape  York]. 

This  plant,  presumably  the  most  common  of  all  arctic  species,  seems 
to  be  equally  abundant  in  N.  W.  Greenland  as  in  Ellesmereland  in 
nearly  every  kind  of  vegetation.  Still  I  will  give  a  list  of  the  places 
from  whence  it  is  noted. 

Occurrence.  S.  Gape  York  (HART,  WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NAT- 
HORST); Granville  Bay  (Iterdlagsuak)  (MYLIUS  ERICHSEN);  Umanak  and 
Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  in  Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE);  Carey  Islands: 


i898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      65 

Bjorling  Island  (WETHERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Redcliffe  House  (MEEHAN), 
Robertson  Bay,  Gape  Acland  and  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL),  North- 
umberland Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  everywhere  (HART,  HAYES,  STEIN, 
201).  N.  Lafayette  Bay  (KANE);  Bessels  Bay  and  Polaris  Bay  (HART); 
Lockwood  Island  (LOOCKWOOD). 

Saxifraga  Magellan's,  WILLD. 

S.  ftagellaris,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesrn.  [S.  flagellaris,  DURAND,  PI. 
Kan.;  HAYES,  Op.  Pol.  Sea;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  MEEHAN,  Contr. 
Greenl.;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Gape  York]. 

This  species  is  one  of  the  decidedly  northern  immigrants  in  Green- 
land, where  it  seem  to  be  most  abundant  in  the  northernmost  parts. 
In  the  western  coast,  it  does  not  even  reach  as  far  down  as  Melville 
Bay  (if  the  certainly  mistaken  statement  of  KANE  for  Disco  is  excluded). 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Sound:  Umanak  and  Agpa  (BALLE); 
Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  M'Gormick  Bay  (MEEHAN); 
Gape  Alexander  (HAYES,  Op.  Pol.  Sea,  p.  80) ;  Foulke  Fjord :  Point  Jen- 
sen (GOPPINGER),  Reindeer  Point  (197),  Etah  (STEIN),  at  the  bottom  of  the 
Fjord  at  an  altitude  of  1200—1500  ft.  (HART);  Fog  Inlet  and  Rensselaer 
Harbour  (KANE).  N.  Lafayette  Bay  (KANE). 

Saxifraga  aizoides,  L. 

S.  aizoides,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [S.  aizoides,  MEEHAN,  Contr. 
Greenl.]. 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Island  in  Wolstenholme  Sound, 
and  M'Connick  Bay  in  Inglefield  Gulf  (MEEHAN). 

Saxifraga  tricuspidata,  ROTTB. 

S.  tricuspidata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [S.  tricuspidata,  DICKIE,  Not. 
fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi. 
SmithS.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN, 
Contr.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.pl.  Cape  York]. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Wolstenholme  Sound:  Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  and  Umanak  (BALLE); 
Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin  Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  "Common  everywhere,  on  the 
Verhoeff  Nunatak"  (MEEHAN),  Bowdoin  Bay  and  Northumberland  Island 
(WETHERILL,  STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke  (HAYES),  Etah,  Reindeer 
Point,  and  other  localities  (HART,  STEIN,  227);  Fog  Inlet  and  Rensselaer 
Harbour  (KANE). 


66  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Saxifraga  nivalis,  L. 

S.  nivalis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[S.  nivalis,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith 
S. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl. ;  OSTENFELD,  Fl. 
pi.  Gape  York]. 

Only  the  main  form  seems  to  have  been  found  in  N.  W.  Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Ivsugigsok  (NAT- 
HORST); Umanak  and  Agpa  in  Wolstenholme  Sound  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf: 
Northumberland  Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke  (HAYES),  and 
different  places  near  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (HART,  STEIN,  207,  1482): 
Fog  Inlet,  Bedevilled  Reach,  and  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE). 

Saxifraga  stellaris,  L. 

S.  stellaris,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [S.  stellaris,  NATHORST,  N.  \V. 
Gronl. ;  S.  foliolosa,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.]. 

As  I  have  previously  mentioned,  this  plant  usually  appears  in  the 
state  representing  the  var.  comosa,  RETZ.  ;  only  some  of  the  specimens 
from  the  southernmost  locality  —  Ivsugigsok — have  the  terminal  flower 
developed. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Northumberland  Island 
(STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  moist  mossy  places  near  Reindeer  Point  (244, 
1493);  Fog  Inlet  (KANE). 

Saxifraga  groenlandica,  L. 

S.  groenlandica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  S.  caespitosa,  OSTENFELD, 
Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl.  [S.  caespitosa,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894:  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York]. 

All  the  specimens  from  our  area  seem  to  belong  to  the  variety 
uniflora,  (R.  Br.)  SIMM.,  such  as  I  have  described  it  (1.  c.,  p.  71 — 72). 

Occurrence.  S.  Gape  York  (HART,  WETHERILL);  Wolstenholme 
Sound:  Umanak  and  Agpa  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf :  Northumberland  Island 
(STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  at  Etah  (STEIN)  and  other  places  (HART,  251,  1506); 
Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE).  N.  Bessels  Bay  and  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 
Probably  everywhere. 

Saxifraga  cernua,  L. 

S.  cernua,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[S.  cermia,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND, 
PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  NATHORST, 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       67 

N.  W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTEN- 
FELD,  Fl.  pi.  Gape  York]. 

Very  common,  but  abundant  only  in  manured  places  such  as  rook- 
eries and  old  places  of  habitation.  Some  individuals  may  be  branched, 
but  more  than  a  single  flower  is  rarely  developed. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wol- 
stenholme  Sound  (INGLEFIELD);  Umanak  and  Agpa  (BALLE),  Inglefield 
Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN,  WETHERILL),  Cape  Acland  (WETH- 
ERILL), Verhoeff  Nunatak  (MEEHAN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Reindeer  Point,  Etah, 
etc.  (202,  STEIN,  HART),  Port  Foulke  (HAYES);  up  to  80°  (KANE)  and 
doubtless  also  to  the  north. 

Saxifraga  rivularis,  L. 

S.  rivularis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[S.  rivularis,  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ; 
NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

Besides  the  common,  taller,  and  often  branched  form,  I  also  found 
the  same  small  form  that  I  have  mentioned  from  Ellesmereland  (1.  c., 
p.  76),  and  according  to  Mr.  HOLM  the  var.  purpurascens,  LANGE,  is 
collected  by  STEIN. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (HART,  STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke 
Fjord  (HART),  in  several  places  near  Reindeer  Point  (238,  248,  1488). 

Cruciferae. 
Hesperis  Pallasii,  (PURSH.)  TORR.  &  GRAY. 

H.  Pallasii,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [H.  Pallasii,  DURAND,  Enum.  pi. 
Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.]. 

This  plant  also  belongs  to  the  little  group  of  decidedly  american 
immigrants  in  N.  W.  Greenland.  It  seems  to  be  somewhat  more  spread 
there  than  was  known  when  NATHORST  made  his  revision  of  the  flora 
of  that  area  (N.  W.  Gronl.).  At  Etah  it  grew  fairly  abundantly  in  the 
gravel  ledges,  and  the  plants  were  for  the  most  part  luxuriant,  having 
several  stems.  They  had  ripe  pods  in  abundance  when  collected  about 
the  midle  of  August. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  or  M'Cormick  Bay  in  Inglefield  Gulf? 
(BuRK  according  to  MEEHAN);  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord,  at  Etah 
(HART,  240,  1474);  at  Mary  Minturn  River  (KANE).  N.  Lafayette  Bay 
in  Washington  Land  (MORTON  according  to  KANE). 


68  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Braya  purpurascens,  (B.  BR.)  BUNGE. 

B.  purpurascem,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesni.  \B.  alpina,  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp. ;  B.  glabella,  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.]. 

As  already  shown  by  GELERT  (Not.  Arct.  PI.)  the  Braya  of  N.  W. 
Greenland  is  not  J5.  alpina,  STERNB.  &  HOPPE,  as  little  as  is  the  Grinnell 
Land  plant,  which  HART  (Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.)  also  has  ranged  under  the 
same  name.  I  have  myself  seen  the  specimens  upon  which  HART  based 
his  determination,  in  the  London  collections.  For  my  part  I  did  not  find 
it,  nor  has  any  other  collector  seen  it  in  Foulke  Fjord. 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf,  M'Gormick  Bay  (MEEHAN).  N. 
Polaris  Bay  (COPPINGER). 

Arab  is  Hooker i,  LANGE. 

A.  Hookeri,  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.,  1880;  SIMMONS,  Prel.  Rep. 
et  Bot.  Arb.;  Turritis  mollis,  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.  1840;  non  Ara- 
bis  mollis,  STEVEN. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.  T.  2296. 

Curiously  enough,  this  plant,  although  occurring  in  abundance  on 
the  rich  clay  plain  at  the  old  Eskimo  settlement  Etah,  has  not  been 
found,  or  at  least  is  not  mentioned,  by  any  previous  collector  in  these 
regions.  Neither  do  specimens  from  our  area  exist  in  the  collections; 
but  still  there  might  be  a  possibility  that  HART  brought  home  frag- 
ments of  it,  which  LANGE  may  have  seen,  for  the  latter  -author  states 
(1.  c.,  p.  48)  that  HART  has  found  A.  alpina,  L.,  at  Foulke  Fjord.  HART 
himself,  however,  mentions  A.  alpina  only  from  the  well-known  local- 
ities at  Disco,  and  Turritis  mollis  only  from  Proven  (Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp., 
p.  24).  At  all  events  A.  Hookeri  is  an  addition  to  the  flora  of  N.  W. 
Greenland. 

The  species,  however,  does  not  appear  here  in  its  typical  form,  with 
only  one  or  a  few  (2—3)  erect  stems  from  the  rosule.  As  the  Foulke 
Fjord  plant  differs  also  in  some  other  respects,  I  think  it  best  to  describe 
it  as  a  new  variety: 

var.  multicaulis,  n.  var. 

Perennis,  multiceps,  ramis  floriferis  nurnerosis  (saepe  10  vel  plur- 
ibus)  decumbentibus,  brevibus  (10  cm.).  Folia  numerosa,  dense  rosulato- 
congesta,  pro  maxima  parte  per  fructificationem  persistentia.  Racemi 
densi,  pedicelli  patuli,  0.5  cm.  longi.  Siliquae  quam  in  forma  typica 
majores,  2—4  cm.  longae,  leviter  curvatae.  Semina  flavo-brunnescentia. 


1898-1902.  No  16.  j     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      69 

As  appears  from  this  diagnosis,  the  variety  differs  from  the  type  in 
the  mode  of  growth,  the  taproot  carrying  a  number  of  branches,  with 
dense  rosules  of  leaves,  and  several  flowering  branches  again  springing 
from  each  rosule,  the  number  of  inflorescences  thus  often  amounting  to 
a  dozen  or  more.  The  branches  are  much  shorter  than  the  erect  stems 
of  the  type,  and  lie  postrate  on  the  ground,  radiating  out  on  all  sides. 
The  seeds  are  yellow  or  somewhat  brownish,  not  dark  brown  as  LANGE 
describes  those  of  the  type.  They  are  for  the  most  part  placed  in  two  rows. 
A  few  half-withered  white  flowers  were  still  to  be  seen  in  some  plants 
when  I  collected  the  specimens,  August  11,  1899;  most  of  the  plants  had 
the  greater  part  of  the  pods  already  quite  ripe.  In  1898,  when  I  visited 
the  same  places  a  few  days  later,  I  saw  only  rosules  of  leaves,  no  flow- 
ering or  fruiting  specimens  were  then  found. 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord :  at  Elah  (1466)  and  in  the  rookeries. 

Distribution  (of  the  main  species):  Northern  Danish  West 
Greenland,  Arctic  America  (shore  of  the  Polar  Sea). 

Draba  alpina,  L. 

D.  alpina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[D.  alpina,  DICKIE,  Not  fl.  pi.  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND, 
PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  NATHORST, 
N.  W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTEN- 
FELD, Fl.  pi.  Gape  York;  D.  glacialis,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  DICKIE,  1.  c. ; 
DURAND,  PI.  Kan.]. 

I  collected  only  a  few  individuals  at  Foulke  Fjord,  where  the  spe- 
cies seems  to  be  less  common  than  in  Ellesmereland.  One  of  them  repre- 
sents the  var.  glacialis,  (ADAMS)  KJELLM.,  which  is  recorded  by  previous 
authors  for  several  localities,  of  which  I  do  not,  however,  think  it  nes- 
sessary  to  give  any  specification,  as  there  may  be  a  question  as  to 
what  the  different  authors  have  understood  by  the  name.  Specimens, 
.belonging  probably  to  var.  gracilescens,  SIMM.,  I  have  seen  in  NATHORST'S 
collections  from  Ivsugigsok. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD),  Umanak  and  Agpa  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin  Bay 
(INGLEFIELD),  Fan  Glacier,  Cape  Acland  (WETHERILL),  M'Gormick  Bay 
(MEEHAN),  Glacier  Valley  near  Cape  Robertson  (WETHERILL),  Northumb- 
erland Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke  (HAYES),  Etah  (1504); 
Bedevilled  Reach  (KANE);  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE).  N.  Lafayette  Bay 
(KANE);  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 


70  H.   G-  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Draba  fladnizensis,  WULF. 

D.  fladnizensis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E. 
Gronl.  [D.  fladnizensis,  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  D.  Wahlenbergii,  NAT- 
HORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  D.  rupestris,  DURAND  et  HART,  ex  p.?]. 

Not  one  single  earlier  author  has  mentioned  this  species,  although 
it  is  very  probable  that  some  of  the  localities  recorded  for  D.  rupestris 
may  really  belong  to  it.  This,  however  cannot  to  be  decided  and  conse- 
quently I  can  give  only  a  few  in  the  southern  part  of  our  area. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  North- 
umberland Island  (STEIN),  Fan  Glacier,  Gape  Acland,  and  Glacier  Valley 
at  Cape  Robertson  (WETHERILL)  ;  Foulke  Fjord,  in  several  places  (STEIN, 
206,  218,  1484,  4181). 

Draba  subcapitata,  SIMM. 

As  I  did  not  myself  find  this  species  at  Foulke  Fjord,  and  as  I 
have  seen  no  indisputable  specimens  of  it  from  the  area,  I  can  not  assert 
that  it  is  to  be  found  there;  but  I  think  that  some  badly  preserved 
specimens  which  I  have  seen  belong  to  it,  and,  further,  some  statements 
in  literature  seem  to  indicate  that  it  has  been  found  by  other  collectors. 
I  should  be  inclined  to  refer  to  it  the  D.  Wahlenbergii  van  brachycarpa 
of  NATHORST,  found  at  Ivsugigsok,  but  the  specimen  I  have  seen  in  the 
Stockholm  collection  is  not  enough  to  justify  any  decided  opinion.  The 
description  of  the  varieties  corymbosa  and  micropetala,  which  DURAND 
(PI.  Kan.,  p.  187)  gives  under  D.  alpina,  of  plants  collected  by  KANE 
at  Bedevilled  Reach  and  Rensselaer  Harbour  also  seem  to  indicate  that 
hardly  any  other  species  can  be  meant.  Most  authors,  however,  have 
treated  their  Drabae  in  such  a  manner,  that  it  is  impossible,  without 
having  the  material  at  my  disposal  for  inspection,  to  form  any  opinion 
about  the  plants  that  hide  under  the  different  names.  There  is  especi- 
ally the  name  D.  corymbosa,  which  is  used  to  cover  the  most  diverse 
things  which  the  authors  have  not  been  able  to  classify.  Several  state- 
ments I  have  necessarily  been  obliged  to  leave  entirely  out  of  consi- 
deration. 

Draba  nivalis,  LILJEBL. 

D.  nivalis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [D.  nivalis,  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.]. 

This  species  seems  to  be  rather  rare  within  the  area  as  it  is  only 
recorded  by  one  of  the  later  authors;  it  may  of  course,  however. 


1898-1902.  No.l6.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       71 

have  been  previously  overlooked  or  confounded  with  other  species.    For 
my  own  part,  I  found  very  little  of  it. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  North- 
umberland Island  in  Inglefield  Gulf  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  (4199). 

Draba  hirta,  L. 

D.  hirta,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [D.  hirta,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in 
INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search ;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl. ;  D.  rupestris,  DUR- 
AND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  D.  arc- 
tica,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

This  species  also  is  so  confounded  with  others  by  the  authors,  that 
it  is  very  difficult  to  give  any  detailed  statements  about  its  occurrence 
within  the  area.  It  may,  however,  be  taken  to  be  fairly  common.  My 
specimens  and  those  of  NATHORST  belong  to  the  variety  arctica,  (J. 
VAHL)  WATS. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin 
Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  Nunatak  in  Verhoeff  Glacier  (MEEHAN),  Netlik  (HAYES); 
Foulke  Fjord,  Etah  (MEEHAN,  220,  1496);  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE). 
N.  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Draba  incana,  L. 

D.  incana,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  GELERT,  Not.  Arct.  PI.; 
LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl. ;  KRUUSE,  List  Angmags. ;  WETHERILL,  List 
1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer. ;  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  III.  FL;  LEDEBOUR, 
Fl.  Ross. ;  D.  confusa,  EHRHART,  Beitr.  Naturk. ;  HOOKER,  1.  c. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.  T.  130. 

Although  this  plant  is  not  spread  north  of  70°  in  Danish  Greenland, 
there  is  still  not  sufficient  cause  for  any  doubt  of  the  statement  of  WETH- 
ERILL, and  therefore  I  enter  it  on  his  authority.  *J 

Occurrence.     S.  Netiulumi  in  Inglefield  Gulf  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution:  East  Greenland  up  to  61°,  West  Greenland  up  to 
70°,  Labrador,  Canada,  Western  Arctic  and  Temperate  America,  Rocky 
Mountains,  Unalaschka,  Kamshatka,  East  Siberia,  Altai,  Himalayas,  Cau- 
casus, Ural,  Northern  Russia,  Scandinavia,  mountains  of  Central  Europe, 
Great  Britain,  Faeroes,  Iceland. 


1  When  I  wrote  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  I  was  not  aware  that  WETHERILL  had  recorded 
D.  incana  from  N.  W.  Greenland.  Taken  together  with  this  statement,  the  re- 
cord of  D.  borealis  from  Grinnell  Land  becomes  a  little  more  probable  as  the 
latter  name  signifies  one  of  the  forms  of  D.  incana.  It  may,  however,  be  that 
both  records  ought  to  be  in  fact  transferred  to  D.  hirta. 


72  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Lesquerella,  arctica,  (WORMSKJ.)  WATS. 

L.  arctica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [L.  arctica,  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
Vesicaria  arctica,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  HART, 
Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.]. 

This  plant  is  not  common  within  the  area,  probably  most  spread  to 
the  north.  I  have  not  seen  it  there,  and  it  has  not  previously  been 
found  in  Foulke  Fjord.  . 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf  (MEEHAN),  Nellik  (HAYES),  Burdin 
Bay  (STEIN),  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Mary  Minturn  River  (KANE).1 
N.  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Cardamine  bellidifolia,  L. 

C.  bellidifolia,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[C.  bellidifolia,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

Not  observed  by  any  other  collectors  but  HART,  NATHORST,  and 
myself;  but  probably  overlooked  by  others  because  of  its  small  growth. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Foulke  Fjord:  Reindeer 
Point  (1483,  1530),  at  the  front  of  the  glacier  (HART). 

Eutrema,  Edwardsii,  R.  BR. 

E.  Edwardsii,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

A  very  rare  plant  in  Greenland,  where  it  is  previously  found  only 
in  two  localities,  Umanak  in  Danish  Greenland,  and  Mackenzie  Bay  on 
the  east  coast.  I  found  only  a  few  individuals  in  the  dry  bed  of  a  little 
rivulet  on  the  ledge  above  Etah. 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord,  Etah  (1508). 

Cochlearia  officinalis,  L.  var.  groenlandica,  (L.)  GELERT. 

C.  officinalis  var.  groenlandica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [C.  officina- 
lis, HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  C.  groenlandica,  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
C.  fenestrata,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  C.  oblongi- 
folia,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search]. 


1  When  DURAND.  PI.  Kan.,  p.  186,  gives  the  locality  where  KANE'S  specimens  are 
found  as  "junction  of  Humboldt  and  Washington  Lands,  81st  N.  latitude",  and  says 
that  they  were  collected  in  August,  he  must  be  mistaken  in  several  respects- 
Lat.  81°  would  be  about  Gape  Bryan  at  the  mouth  of  Bessels  Bay,  where  no 
collections  were  made;  and  these  regions  were  never  visited  in  August  but  only 
in  the  spring  by  MORTON.  KANE  himself  (Arct.  Expl.  I,  p.  99  and  note  24)  speaks 
of  the  plant  in  question  as  found  at  the  mouth  of  Mary  Minturn  River. 


1898-1902.   No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      73 

The  scurvy  grass  was  rather  common  in  Foulke  Fjord  and  somewhat 
variable  in  size  and  manner  of  growth,  according  to  the  different  kinds 
of  localities  where  it  was  found,  as  was  also  the  case  in  Ellesmereland; 
but  all  specimens  were  referable  to  the  above-mentioned  variety.  As  the 
case  has  been  the  same  with  all  specimens  that  I  have  seen  from  North- 
ern Greenland  and  the  northern  islands  of  the  American  Archipelago, 
I  do  not  hesitate  to  refer  to  it  all  records  of  Cochlearia  from  our  area, 
even  when  the  author  has  used  another  specific  or  variety  name. 

Occurrence.  Gape  York  (WETERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
between  Gape  Atholl  and  Cape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD)  ;  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (HAYES,  A  ret.  boat 
journ.,  p.  93,  STEIN);  Burdin  Bay  (INGLEFIELD);  Sutherland  Island  at  Gape 
Alexander  (KANE);  Foulke  Fjord:  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (HART,  STEIN, 
217,  249);  Pikira  (Littleton  Island),  Rensselaer  Harbour,  Mary  Minturn 
River  (KANE).  N.  Polaris  Bay  (GOPPINGER). 


Papaveraceae. 
Papaver  radicatum,  ROTTB. 

P.  radicatum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
\P.  radicatum,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  P.  nudicaule,  SUTHER- 
LAND, Voyage;  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DUR- 
AND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  NAT- 
HORST, N.  W.  Gronl.;  BESSELS.  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.; 
MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894 ;  GREELY,  Rep. ;  P.  alpi- 
num,  HART  1.  c.]. 

At  Foulke  Fjord  the  poppy  was  extremely  abundant,  especially  around 
the  old  settlements  and  in  the  rookeries.  In  such  places  it  would  form 
large  tufts  having  twenty,  thirty,  or  more  flowering  or  fruiting  stems. 
In  other  situations  the  plants  would  be  smaller,  but  I  did  not  there  see 
any  that  might  by  right  be  referred  to  the  var.  Hartianum,  SIMM.  Prob- 
ably, however,  this  is  the  variety  of  which  MEEHAN  speaks  as  being 
found  on  Wolstenholme  Island  and  at  M'Cormick  Bay.  Perhaps  also 
the  white-flowered  form  from  the  tableland  at  Ivsugigsok,  which  NAT- 
HORST mentions,  may  belong  to  this  variety.  The  colour  of  the  petals 
varied  in  the  usual  manner,  the  sulphureous  being  the  most  common, 
but  saffron  and  almost  pure  whithe  flowers  were  also  to  be  found.  Forms 
with  more  or  less  lacerated  petals  were  also  met  with. 


74  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

The  poppy  seems  to  be  a  very  common  plant  throughout  the  area, 
and  is  found  up  to  the  farthest  point  where  any  plants  have  been 
collected. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (Ross,  SUTHERLAND);  Cape  York 
(HART,  STEIN,  WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD),  Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  and  Umanak  (BALLE),  Wolsten- 
holme Island  (MEEHAN),  Granville  Bay  (MvLius  ERICHSEN);  Inglefield  Gulf: 
Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Burdin  Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  Cape  Acland, 
Fan  Glacier,  Bowdoin  Bay,  Glacier  Valley  at  Cape  Robertson  (WETHER- 
ILL),  M'Cormick  Bay  (MEEHAN);  Cape  Alexander  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord 
(HART,  200,  1885);  Rensselaer  Harbour  and  Mary  Minturn  River  (KANE). 
N.  Lafayette  Bay  (KANE);  Bessels  Bay  and  Hannah  Island  (HART);  Hall 
Land  (BESSELS);  Polaris  Bay  (HART);  Lockwood  Island  (LOCKWOOD). 


Ranunculaceae. 
Ranunculus  affinis,  R.  BR. 

R.  affinis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

This  species  was  never  found  in  North-Western  Greenland  before 
my  second  visit  to  Foulke  Fjord ;  but  as  it  was  known  from  the  north- 
eastern coast  and  also  from  one  single  locality1  on  the  west -side  (Ar- 
salik  at  N.  Isortok  Fjord,  collected  by  KORNERUP),  there  was  good  reason 
for  keeping  a  lockout  for  it.  The  specimens,  of  which  I  got  only  a  few, 
are  somewhat  smaller  than  those  from  Ellesmereland,  but  agree  with  them. 
They  were,  for  the  most  part,  in  fruit  when  collected,  August  11,  1899. 

Occurrence.  S.  Foulke  Fjord,  grassy  slopes  above  Etah  (1501), 
also  in  the  STEIN  collection. 

Ranunculus  sulphureus,  SOLAND. 

R.  sulphureus,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [R.  sulphureus.  NATHORST, 
N.  W.  Gronl.,  R.  nivalis,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  ex  p.;  DURAND,  PI. 
Kan.,  ex  p.;  R.  frigidus,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer 
Search]. 

In  all  probability,  this  species  is  a  common  plant  throughout  our 
area,  where  it  is  found  by  most  collectors  since  the  time  of  SUTHERLAND 
and  INGLEFIELD.  Sometimes,  however,  it  may  have  been  overlooked  or 


1   I  have  previously  pointed   out  (Fl.  Ellesm.,   p.  107)   that  HART   has   made   a   mis- 
take when  he  stated  this  species  for  Disco. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      75 

confounded  with  R.  nivalis,  for  instance  by  HAYES  who  has  only  the 
latter  in  his  list.  In  Foulke  Fjord  it  grew  fairly  abundantly  both  in 
grassy  slopes  and  in  moister  places. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD);  Smith  Sound  localities  (KANE);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at 
Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (204,  1503). 


Ranunculus  nivalis,  L. 

R.  nivalis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [R.  nivalis,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi., 
in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  ex  p.;  HART,  Pot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  ex  p.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  R. 
niv.  var.  Freiligrathi,  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.]. 

This  species  is  stated  for  many  more  places  than  the  preceding. 
Notwithstanding  that  I  did  not  myself  find  it  at  Foulke  Fjord,  and  that 
I  am  rather  inclined  to  think  that  several  of  the  records  should  by 
rights  be  transferred  to  R.  sulphureus  or  should  even  include  both,  I 
think  it  best  to  enumerate  the  localities  as  they  are  given  in  the  differ- 
ent lists,  as  it  is  impossible  to  make  sure  of  the  identifications  of  the 
specimens  of  the  american  collectors. 

BESSELS,  in  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.,  gives  a  list  of  the  vascular  plants  found 
during  the  expedition  of  HALL  in  the  district  afterwards  called  Hall  Land. 
In  this  list,  stands  as  the  first  "Ranunculus  nivalis  (L.)  var.  Freili- 
grathi (BESSELS)".  No  description,  however,  of  the  variety  is  given,  and 
when  in  his  later  work  (Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.)  BESSELS  gives  a  new  list 
of  the  plants  (p.  304),  which  had  meanwhile  been  examined  by  ASA  GRAY, 
he  there  speaks  only  of  "R.  nivalis  var."  The  name  Freiligrathi,  as 
far  as  I  know,  has  never  been  validly  published  and  consequently  must 
be  left  out  of  consideration. 

Occurrence.  S.  Gape  York  (HART);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wol- 
stenholme Sound  (INGLEFIELD);  Northumberland  Island  (WETHERILL,  STEIN); 
Smith  Sound  stations1  (KANE);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  (at  Etah  (MEE- 
HAN)?)2.  N.  Lafayette  Bay  (KANE);  Bessels  Bay  and  Hannah  Island 
(HART);  Hall  Land  (BESSELS). 


1  When  KANE  speaks  of  "Ranunculus"  without  further  specification,  he  may 
mean  either  R.  nivalis  or  R.  sulphureus.  Such  vague  statements  he  has  for 
Mary  Minium  River,  Rensselaer  Bay,  between  Capes  Atholl  and  Dudley  Digges. 

-  Most  probably  MEEHAN  has  here  confounded  R.  nivalis  and  R.  sulphureus,  the 
latter  being  common  and  abundant  at  Etah. 


76  H.  G.   SIMMONS.  [SEC.ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

Ranunculus  Sabinei,  R.  BR. 

R.  Sobinei,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [R.  Sobinei  af finis,  DURAND,  PI. 
Kan. ;  KANE,  Arct.  Expl.]. 

As  I  have  previously  discussed  (1.  c.  p.  Ill)  the  description  of  the 
plant  in  KANE'S  collection,  which  DURAND  has,  with  some  doubt,  refer- 
red to  this  species,  is  quite  enough  to  make  it  certain  that  his  identi- 
fication was  right.  It  seems,  however,  to  be  a  rare  plant  in  North-West- 
ern  Greenland,  as  it  is  not  found  again  in  the  southern  parts  which 
have  been  more  closely  investigated  in  later  years.  It  may,  however, 
have  been  confounded  with  R.  nivalis  or  R.  pygmaeus.  The  locality 
mentioned  by  DURAND  seems  also  to  correspond  with  those  of  the  species 
in  Ellesmereland,  but  not  the  statement  of  KANE  himself  for  one  of  his 
localities,  where  it  is  said  to  be  found  among  Sphagnum. 

Occurrence.     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:   Northumberland  and  Hakluyt 
Islands  (KANE);  Bedevilled  Reach  (KANE). 

Ranunculus  pygmaeus,  WAHLENB. 

R.  pygmaeus,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [R.  pygmaeus,  NATHORST,  N. 
W.  Gronl.J. 

This  species,  which  seems  to  have  been  totally  overlooked  by  the 
earlier  collectors,  was  first  found  by  NATHORST.  In  Foulke  Fjord  it  grew 
abundantly  and  luxuriantly  in  a  mossy  depression  among  the  rocks  tog- 
ether with  Catabrosa  algida,  Saxifraga  rivularis.  and  others. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Ingle- 
field  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  (1469). 

Ranunculus  hyperboreus,  ROTTB. 

R.  hyperboreus,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

Occurrence.     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:     Northumberland   Island  (STEIN). 


Caryophyllaceae. 
Arenaria   ciliata,    L. 

A.  ciliata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.     [A.  ciliata,  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 
Occurrence.     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:    at  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL). 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FEHNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      77 

Honkenya,  peploides,  (L.)  EHRH. 

Arenaria  peploides,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  WETHERILL,  List 
1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.;  MACOUN,  PI.  Pribilof;  Honkenya  pe- 
ploides, EHRHART,  Beitr.  Naturk.  2;  KRUUSE,  List  Angmags. ;  LEDE- 
BOUR,  Fl.  Ross. ;  Ammadenia  peploides,  RUPRECHT,  Fl.  Samojed.  cisural. ; 
BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  FL;  Halianthus  peploides,  FRIES,  Fl.  Hall.; 
LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.;  KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.;  KJELLMAN,  in  Vega- 
exp.;  ANDERSSON  &  HESSELMAN,  Spetsb.  karlv.;  KRUUSE,  Jan  May.; 
HARTMAN,  Skand.  FL;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. 

Fig.     J.  G.  GMELIN,  FL  Sibir.  IV,  Tab.  64;  FL  Dan.,  Tab.  624. 

My  specimens,  which  were  collected  on  a  sandy  beach,  where  the 
plant  formed  a  fairly  dense  vegetation,  approach  the  var.  diffusa, 
(HORNEM.)  KRUUSE,  in  certain  respects  but  differ  from  it  in  others. 
HORNEMANN,  Dansk  Gee.  Plantel.  I,  Ed.  3,  p.  501,  describes  his  Arenaria 
peploides  diffusa  as  having  the  stems  creeping  and  more  spreading, 
than  in  the  main  form;  with  thinner  narrower  leaves  and  longer  inter- 
nodes.  My  specimens,  indeed,  have  thin,  rather  narrow  leaves,  but  the 
plants  are  somewhat  tufted  and  the  stems  are  short. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord,  outside 
Reindeer  Point  (1525). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Baffin  Land,  Arctic 
America,  Northern  Atlantic  and  Pacific  shores  of  America,  Islands  of 
the  Bering  Sea,  Kamshatka,  Eastern  and  Arctic  shores  of  Siberia,  North- 
ern and  Western  Europe,  Novaja  Semlja,  Spitsbergen,  Jan  Mayen,  Fae- 
roes, Iceland. 

Alsine  groenlandiai,  (RETZ.)  FENZL. 

MEEHAN  (Contr.  Greenl.,  p.  209)  records  a  species  from  M'Gormick 
Bay  in  Inglefield  Gulf,  which  he  calls  "Arenaria  groenlandica,  SPRENG." 
TH.  HOLM  (Contr.  FL  Greenl.),  indeed,  who  has  corrected  a  great  many 
errors  in  MEEHAN'S  paper,  and  especially  in  his  identifications  of  the 
species,  has  not  mentioned  anything  about  the  plant  here  in  question ; 
but  this  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  he  has  not  seen  the 
whole  collection  of  MEEHAN,  and  so  has  been  unable  to  control  him  in 
every  case.  At  all  events,  I  do  not  feel  justified  in  entering  Alsine 
groenlandica  in  the  list  of  the  North-Western  Greenland  flora  without 
better  authority,  as  the  species  so  far  as  known,  is  not  at  all  high-arc- 
tic. Its  principal  area  of  distribution  is  in  the  Eastern  States  of  America, 
from  the  higher  parts  of  the  Alleghanies  in  North  Carolina  and  Virginia, 


78  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

northwards  to  Labrador.  Further,  it  is  found  in  a  number  of  places  in 
Greenland,  on  the  east  coast  only  at  Ikerasarsuk  in  the  far  south,  and 
on  the  west  coast  principally  in  the  southern  districts  as  far  as  to  about 
64V2°  N.  (Baals  Revier,  leg.  VAHL).  Further  north  it  is  recorded  from 
three  stations,  Sukkertoppen  (about  651 2°,  leg.  KANE),  Egedesminde  (about 
GSVs".  leg.  SORENSEN)  and  Upernivik  (about  73°,  leg.  KANE). 

The  statements  of  DURAND  about  KANE'S  plant  are,  as  previously 
pointed  out  by  several  authors,  and  as  I  myself  have  had  an  opport- 
unity of  showing,  not  to  be  trusted  overmuch;  and  so  we  get,  even 
reckoning  from  Egedesminde,  an  extension  of  about  9°  northward  of  the 
area  of  the  species.  In  the  Arctic  Archipelago  A.  groenlandica  is  not 
found;  HART'S  statement  of  it  for  Northern  Ellesmereland  is  a  mistake, 
as  I  have  ascertained  at  Kew  (SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.,  p.  117),  and  the 
same  is  almost  certainly  the  case  with  GREELY'S  plant  under  the  same 
name  (Rep.  II,  p.  13). 

It  is  rather  difficult  to  form  any  opinion,  as  to  what  MEEHAN'S  plant 
really  is,  perhaps  Alsine  verna,  (L.)  WAHLENB.,  as  this  common  species 
is  lacking  in  his  list. 

Alsine  verna,  (L.)  WAHLENB. 

A.  verna,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  [A.  verna,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape 
York;  A.  rubella,  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.;  Arenaria  verna,  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  A.  rubella,  HART,  Bot. 
Br.  Pol.  Exp.]. 

This  is  doubtless  a  common  species,  even  though  not  collected  in 
all  the  places  visited  by  the  different  expeditions  or  by  all  collectors. 
Generally  my  specimens  represent  the  variety  rubella  (WAHLENB.),  as  is 
the  case  also  in  Ellesmereland.  The  Arenaria  arctica  in  the  list  of 
HAYES  (Op.  Pol.  Sea),  doubtless  belongs  here,  as  DURAND  has  instead  of 
it  the  name  A.  rubella  var.  hirta,  VAHL. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound: 
Umanak  and  Saunders  Island  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Netlik  (HAYES), 
Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL):  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Reindeer  Point  (243, 
1495). 

Cerastium  alpinum,  L. 

C.  alpinum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[G.  alpinum,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD, 
Summer  Search;  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.  (incl.  var.); 
HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  BESSELS,  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.;  NATHORST,  N. 


1898— 1902.  No.  16. J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       79 

W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  GREELY, 
Rep.;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  C.  vulgatum,  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol. 
Amer.] 

This  common  arctic  plant  has  been  brought  home  from,  or  at  least 
observed  at,  almost  every  place  visited.  My  specimens,  collected  in  the 
rich  soil  of  the  old  Eskimo  village  of  Etah,  represent  a  big,  rather 
hairy  form,  probably  the  same  as  the  var.  Fischerianum  in  DURAND, 
Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Gape  York  (HART, 
WETHERILL,  STEIN);  between  that  point  and  Gape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE); 
Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST),  between  Cape  Dudley  Digges  and  Cape  Atholl 
(KANE);  Wolstenholme  Sound  (MEEHAN),  at  Umanak  and  Saunders  Is- 
land (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin  Bay  (!NGLEFIELD),  Netiulumi  (WETH- 
ERILL), Glacier  Valley,  Cape  Acland,  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Carey 
Islands  (WETHERILL);  Port  Foulke  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at 
Etah  (STEIN,  250,  1462);  Rensselaer  Bay  (KANE);  Mary  Minturn  River 
(KANE).  N.  Lafayette  Bay  (KANE);  Bessels  Bay,  Hannah  Island,  .Cape 
Morton  (HART);  Hall  Land  (BESSELS);  Polaris  Bay  (HART);  Lockwood 
Island  (LOCKWOOD). 


Stellaria  humifusa,  ROTTB. 

S.  humifusa,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [S.  humifusa,  DURAND,  Enum. 
pi.  Smith  S.;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETH- 
ERILL, List  1894]. 

Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  HART  records  this  species  from  Foulke 
Fjord,  I  did  not  find  it  there.  I  should  think  it  very  probable,  how- 
ever, that  it  grows  in  the  innermost  part  of  the  fjord,  in  front  of  the 
Brother  John's  Glacier,  which  I  could  not  reach  during  our  short  stay.  Ac- 
cording to  TH.  HOLM  (Contr.  Fl.  Greenl.)  the  S.  longipes  var.  Edwardsii  of 
MEEHAN  (Contr.  Greenl.),  should  be  the  present  species.  I  dare  not, 
however,  refer  the  locality  Verhoeff  Nunatak  here,  as  it  would  be  quite 
contrary  to  the  nature  of  S.  humifusa  to  grow  in  such  a  locality. 
MEEHAN  has  probably  confounded  the  two  species,  and  the  specimen 
seen  by  HOLM,  has  been  collected  in  a  place  not  recorded  in  MEEHAN'S 
list  —  perhaps  in  Danish  Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound: 
Dalrymple  Island  (WETHERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island 
(STEIN),  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART). 


80  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Stellaria,  longipes,  GOLDIE. 

S.  longipes,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[S.  longipes,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND, 
PI.  Kan.  (inch  varr.);  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  HART,  Bok.  Br.Pol.Exp.; 
WETHERILL,  List  1894;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  S.  stricta,  DUR- 
AND, Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.]. 

In  Foulke  Fjord,  where  the  plant  was  very  common,  I  found  the 
var.  humilis,  FENZL,  the  same  in  which  it  generally  appears  in  Elles- 
mereland,  as  well  as  another,  less  condensed,  and  glaucous  form,  which 
comes  nearest  to  var.  peduncularis,  (BUNGE)  FENZL  (St.  peduncularis, 
BUNGE,  in  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Alt.).  The  first-mentioned  form  grew  in  open 
soil,  gravelly  places,  etc.,  the  latter  among  grass  along  brooks  in  the 
slope  above  Etah  (1499). 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD);  Granville  Bay  (MYLIUS  ERICHSEN);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin 
Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  Northumberland  Island  (WETHERILL,  STEIN),  Netiulumi, 
Fan  Glacier,  (WETHERILL),  Verhoeff  Nunatak  (MEEHAN,  compare  above 
under  S.  humifusa),  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Reindeer 
Point  and  Etah  (STEIN,  211,  1499);  Bedevilled  Reach  and  Rensselaer 
Bay  (KANE). 

Melandrium  a  f fine,  J.  VAHL. 

M.  af fine,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  M.  invohicratmn  ft  affine,  OSTEN- 
FELD, Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl.  [M.  affine,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Gape  York; 
Lychnis  affinis,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  Wahlbergella  affinis,  NAT- 
HORST, N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

In  Foulke  Fjord  I  found  only  one  single  individual  of  this  species, 
the  following,  which  was  not  found  in  Ellesmereland,  being  here  the 
most  abundant.  KANE  did  not  bring  home  either  of  them,  only  M. 
apetalum;  but  some  of  his  notes  about  "Lychnis',  for  instance,  at  the 
mouth  of  Mary  Minturn  River  in  Bancroft  Bay,  and  from  the  shore  of 
Kennedy  Channel,  belong  most  probably  here.  The  "Lychnis  pauci- 
flora"  of  HAYES1  of  which  I  can  form  no  distinct  opinion  as  the  speci- 


1  Indeed  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.,  records  a  "Lychnis pauciflora,  FISCH."  from 
Netlik,  but  as  he  has  also  besides  L.  apetala,  he  does  not  use  the  name  in  the  same 
sense  as  FISCHER  himself  (L.  pauciflora,  FISCH.  in  litt.  is  a  synonym  of  L.  ape- 
tala, according  to  DECANDOLLE,  Prodr.  I,  p.  386).  According  to  ROHRBACH,  Syn. 
Lychn.,  the  author  of  L.  pauciflora  is  LEDEBOUR,  even  though  the  specimens  in 
the  herbarium  of  FISCHER  are  referred  to  under  Melandrium  apetalum.  LEDE- 
BOUR himself,  in  his  Fl.  Ross.,  has  his  L.  pauciflora  as  a  synonym  of  the  latter 


1898-1902.  No.  16. 1     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      81 

mens  are  not  accessible,  belongs  more  probably  to  M.  triflorum,  but 
later  collectors  also  have  found  M.  affine.  It  seems,  however,  to  be 
much  rarer  here  than  to  the  west. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound: 
Umanak  and  Saunders  Island  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland 
Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART,  4272).  N.  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 


Melandrium  trifiorum,  (R.  BR.)  VAHL. 

Lychnis  triflora,  ROB.  BROWN,  List  of  pi.,  1819  (nomen  solum); 
WETHERILL,  List  1894;  L.  affinis  var.  triflora,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.~ 
Wahlbergella  triflora,  FRIES,  Sum.  Veg.  Scand. ;  SIMMONS,  Prel.  Rep.  et 
Bot.  Arb.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  Melandrium  triflorum,  VAHL,  in 
LIEBMANN,  Fl.  Dan.;  ROHRBACH,  Syn.  Lychn.;  LANGE,  Gonsp.  FJ.  Groenl.; 
HARTZ,  Fan.  o.  Karkr. ;  KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl. 
,  Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  2356. 

This  species  seems  to  be  at  least  as  common  as  the  former,  and 
occurs  in  greater  abundance  at  the  points  where  it  is  found,  at  all  events 
by  NATHORST  and  myself.  In  the  rich  soil  of  the  old  village  of  Etah, 
as  well  as  in  the  slopes  where  the  little  auks  had  their  nests,  luxuriant 
specimens  were  found  in  abundance. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Netiu- 
umi  (WETHERILL),  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Bowdoin  Bay  (WETH- 
ERILL); Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Etah  (STEIN,  214,  1470).  Not  yet  rec- 
orded from  the  region  north  of  the  Humboldt  Glacier,  where  it  must, 
however,  most  probably  grow,  to  judge  from  the  distribution. 

Distribution:  Northern  East  and  West  Greenland.  This  is  one 
of  the  very  few  endemic  species  of  Greenland.  It  is  indeed  recorded 
also  for  Northern  Ellesmereland,  but  almost  certainly  by  mistake  as  I 
have  previously  pointed  out  (Fl.  Ellesm.,  p.  126). 

Melandrium  apetalum,  (L.)  FENZL. 

M.  apetalum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Lychnis  apetala,  DICKIE,  Not. 
fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search;  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.; 


species.  DURAND,  who  has  both  in  his  list  of  HAYES'  plants,  must  have  made 
some  mistake,  and  has  probably  used  the  name  "pauciflora"  either  for  M.  affine 
or  M.  triflorum.  In  his  PI.  Kan.  also,  DURAND,  has  both  L.  apetala  and  L. 
pauciflora,  the  latter  recorded  for  "Bedevilled  Reach  and  other  stations  of 
Smith  Sound". 

6 


82  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol- 
Exp.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Sound  (!NGLEFIELD);  Inglefield  Gulf:1 
Burdin  Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  Netlik  (HAYES),  Fan  Glacier  and  Cape  Acland 
(WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Reindeer  Point  (1494,  1524,  1583).2 
N.  Hall  Land  (BESSELS). 

Silene  acaulis,  L. 

S.  acaulis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [S.  acaulis,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan., 
et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

Notwithstanding  that  this  species  is  not  at  all  rare  at  Foulke  Fjord, 
it  has  been  entirely  overlooked  there  by  the  previous  collectors.  I  found 
it  in  several  places — in  grassy  slopes  as  well  as  in  gravel  plains.  NAT- 
HORST, N.  W.  Gronl.,  records  it  only  for  Ivsugigsok ;  but  although  it  is 
not  noted  by  DURAND  from  any  of  KANE'S  North-West  Greenland  local- 
ities, it  is  mentioned  by  KANE  himself  (Arct.  Explor.  I,  p.  266),  and  it 
is  also  entered  in  the  list  of  HAYES'S  collections. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Glacier  Valley,  Cape 
Acland,  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL),  Netlik  (HAYES);  Foulke  Fjord,  Rein- 
deer Point  (223,  1520);  Rensselaer  Bay  (KANE). 


Portulacaceae. 
Montia  lamprosperma,  CHAM. 

M.  lamprosperma,  CHAMISSO,  PI.  Romanzoff.,  1831;  M.  fontana, 
LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  Ed.  I,  ex  p.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  BRITTON  & 
BROWN,  III.  Fl.;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.,  ex  p.;  BLYTT,  M.  N.,  Norg.  Fl., 
ex  p.;  M.  fontana  *lamprosperma,  LINDBERG,  Finl.  Montiaf.;  M.  rivu- 
laris,  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl. ;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. ;  OSTENFELD,  Phan. 
Faer.;  M.riv.  *lamprosperma,  NEUMAN  &  AHLFVENGREN,  Sv.  Fl.;  M.riv. 
f.  lamprosperma,  BLYTT,  A.,  Norg.  Fl. 

Fig.  CHAMISSO,  1.  c.,  T.  7,  fig.  2. 


1  MEEHAN,  who  mentions  it  from  Inglefield  Gulf  (Contr.  Greenl.,  p.  209),    seems  to 
have    been    unable    to    separate    the    species   in  question  as  pointed  out  by  TH. 
HOLM,  Contr.  Fl.  Greenl. 

2  The  statement  of  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  "at  almost  every  station  of  both   voyages", 
must  of  course  be  left  out  of  consideration. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      83 

Here,  as  in  a  good  many  other  cases,  the  descriptions  of  species 
given  by  GHAMISSO  and  SCHLECHTENDAL  have  been  overlooked  or  un- 
justly put  aside;  and  it  is  only  recently  that  they  have  again  been  taken 
into  consideration.  This  is  done  for  Montia  by  H.  LINDBERG,  1.  c.,  who 
has  pointed  out  that  the  M.  fontana  of  LINNAEUS  is  not  uniform:  even 
though  the  differences  between  its  constituents  are  not  greater  than  to 
allow  of  their  being  placed  as  subspecies  under  it.  The  two  species  of 
GMELIN,  Fl.  Bad.,  M.  minor  and  M.  rivularis  are,  however,  too  nearly 
connected  to  be  held  apart.  Both  are  of  southerly  distribution,  and 
LINDBERG  places  them  together  as  subsp.  minor  under  M.  fontana,  with 
a  variety  rivularis  comprising  the  form  from  running  water.  From 
M.  fontana  *minor,  with  its  strongly  tuberculate  seeds,  the  other  subsp. 
lamprosperma,  (CHAM.)  LINDB.  fil.,  is  well  distinguished  by  its  smooth, 
glossy  seeds.  A  similar  division  is  already  made  by  FENZL  in  LEDEBOUR, 
Fl.  Ross.  II,  p.  152,  even  if  the  two  plants  are  here  designed  as  a  chon- 
drosperma  and  /?  lamprosperma.  FENZL  also  says  there  that  both 
show  the  same  variations  in  mode  of  growth  and  in  the  shape  of  the 
leaves;  but  besides  this  he  speaks  of  forms  intermediate  between  the 
varieties.  Already  CHAMISSO  speaks  of  his  new  species  as  especially 
arctic  and  alpine;  its  distribution  is,  however,  not  easy  to  give  without 
an  inspection  of  a  considerable  quantity  of  material,  as  most  of  the  flo- 
ras use  collective  names.  The  Western  Greenland  plant,  however,  is 
always  M.  lamprosperma,  which  alone  seems  to  enter  the  arctic  region, 
and  therefore  may  as  well  keep  the  rank  its  author  has  given  it.  I  must 
take  it  for  granted,  that  WETHERILL'S  plant  is  identical  with  that  of  the 
southern  coast. 

Occurrence.     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:   Gape  Acland  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution:  Danish  West  Greenland,  Arctic  America  (?,  compare 
BRITTON  &  BROWN,  1.  c.),  Alaska,  Unalaschka,  California  (?),  Andes  of 
South  America,  Eastern  Siberia  (?),  Northern  Europe,  Faeroes,  Iceland. 
M.  minor  is  distributed  in  Europe  from  the  southernmost  part  of  Scan- 
dinavia southwards,  and  it  probably  has  a  corresponding  distribution  in 
Asia  and  perhaps  in  America. 


Polygonaceae. 
Polygonum  viviparum,  L. 

P.  viviparum,   SIMMONS,    Fl.  Ellesm.;    OSTENFELD,    Plantes   N.  E. 
Gronl.     [P.  viviparum,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search; 


84  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et 
Amer.  NordpoI-Exp. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York]. 

Certainly  common  all  over  the  area,  even  though  it  is  noted  only 
by  BESSELS  from  the  northern  part.  KANE  and  HAYES,  according  to 
DURAND,  have  found  it  "in  every  station"  and,  for  my  own  part,  I  found 
it  abundantly  in  Foulke  Fjord,  in  all  grassy  ledges,  slopes  and  plateaus, 
etc.  I  will,  however,  enumerate  the  special  localities  reported  in  lite- 
rature. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound 
(INGLEFIELD),  Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  and  Umanak  (BALLE);  Inglefield 
Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Cape  Acland  (WETHERILL);  Foulke 
Fjord  at  Reindeer  Point  and  Elah  (STEIN,  1463,  1519).  N.  Hall  Land 
(BESSELS). 

Oxyria  digyna,  (L.)  HILL. 

0.  digyna,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[0.  digyna,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S. ;  BESSELS,  Exp. 
Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL, 
List  1894;  0.  reniformis,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.]. 

Occurrence.  S.  Between  Cape  York  (HART)  and  Cape  Dudley 
Digges  (KANE)  ;  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf :  Netiulumi  (WETH- 
ERILL), Burdin  Bay  (INGLEFIELD),  Northumberland  Island  (HAYES,  *  WETH- 
ERILL, KANE,  STEIN),  Netlik  (HAYES),  Glacier  Valley,  Cape  Acland,  Fan 
Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HAYES,  HART),  at  Etah  (STEIN,  224, 
1523);  Rensselaer  Bay  and  Mary  Minlurn  River  (KANE).  N.  Lafayette  Bay 
(KANE);  Bessels  Bay  Hannah  Island,  Cape  Morton  (HART);  Hall  Land 
(BESSELS),  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Betulaceae. 
Betula  nana,  L. 

B.  nana,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.; 
KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.  et  List  Angmags.;  HAYES,  Op.  Pol.  Sea;  DUR- 
AND, Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  NATHORST,  Nachtr. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894; 
HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.,  ex  p.;  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  III.  Fl.;  HOLM,  Nov. 
Zeml.  Veg. ;  ANDERSSON  &  HESSELMAN,  Spetsb.  karlv.;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross., 
ex  p.;  HARTMAN,  Skand.  Fl.;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl. 


1   Arct.  boat  journ.,  p.  93. 


1898-1902.  No.  16,]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       85 

Fig.  Sv.  Bot.,  T.  379;  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  91. 

NATHORST  (N.  W.  Gronl.),  at  first  excluded  this  species  from  the  list, 
notwithstanding  the  statements  about  it  in  the  works  of  HAYES  and  DUR- 
AND;  but  afterwards  he  inserted  it,  as  he  found  'birches"  mentioned, 
also  by  KANE  (I  Grinnell  Exp.,  p.  143).  Now  indeed  both  these  evid- 
ences are  of  somewhat  doubtful  value,  but  later  on  it  has  been  recorded 
from  our  district  by  WETHERILL  also,  and  is  consequently  to  be  recko- 
ned as  a  citizen  of  the  area. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  between  that  point  and 
Cape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Port  Foulke  (HAYES). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Labrador,  Hudson  Bay 
region,1  Novaja  Semlja,  Spitsbergen,  Russia,  Scandinavia,  Prussia,  moun- 
tains of  Middle  Europe,  Scotland,  Iceland. 


Salicaceae. 
Salix  arctica,  PALL. 

S.  arctica,  SIMMONS,   Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 

Under  this  name  I  feel  myself  fully  justified  in  uniting  all  the 
Salices,  reported  from  Greenland  north  of  Melville  Bay,  with  the  sole 
exception  of  S.  herbacea.  INGLEFIELD,  SUTHERLAND,  KANE,  HAYES,  DUR- 
AND,  BESSELS,  HART,  and  NATHORST  have  used  the  name  ''arctica"  with 
either  BROWN  or  PALLAS  as  author.  "S.  Brownii"  is  mentioned  by 
WETHERILL,  "S.  glauca"  by  KANE  and  WETHERILL,  "S.  lanata"  by 
KANE,  "S.  uva  ursi"  by  KANE.  Even  without  having  seen  the  speci- 
mens th'us  determined,  I  cannot  doubt  that  they  all  belong  to  the  multi- 
form ,S.  arctica.  For  particulars  about  the  different  forms  and  their 
synonymic,  I  must  refer  to  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  p.  130—132,  and  to  the  lite- 
rature quoted  there,  especially  LUNDSTROM,  Weid.  Nov.  Semi.;  here,  it 
may  be  enough  to  point  out  that  S.  uva  ursi,  PURSH,  is  a  species  of 
far  a  more  southerly  distribution,  found  nowhere  in  Greenland.  The  same 
is  the  case  with  «S.  lanata,  L.  (with  the  exception  of  some  indetermin- 
able, sterile  specimens  in  the  Copenhagen  herbarium,  conf.  LANGE,  Consp. 


1  Several  authors,  indeed,  for  instance  HOOKER  (1.  c.)  and  J.  D.  HOOKER,  Outl.  of 
Distrib.,  have  given  it  a  far  wider  range  in  America;  but,  in  the  northwest  at 
least,  B.  glandulosa,  MICHX.,  has  certainly  been  taken  for  it  by  the  earlier 
botanists,  who  have  reported  B.  nana,  which  has  also  been  the  case  in  several 
parts  of  Asia.  Therefore  even  the  statements  about  its  distribution  in  LEDEBOUR, 
1.  c.,  are  not  to  be  indiscriminately  used,  even  though  it  is  not  improbable,  that 
the  present  species  is  spread  also  in  Asia. 


86  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Fl.  Groenl.,  p.  111).  Even  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  discards  the  latter  name 
as  well  as  £  glauca.  S.  Brownii,  LUNDSTR.  (and  BEBB?),  is  only  a  var- 
iety of  S.  arctica — in  fact  the  most  common  in  these  regions  (S.  arc- 
tica,  R.  BROWN).  The  more  hairy  lanata-  and  glauca-\ike  forms  belong 
presumably  to  the  var.  groenlandica,  ANDERSS.,  which  is  reported  by 
OSTENFELD,  Flow.  pi.  Cape  York.  This  seems  to  be  far  more  rare  here 
than  to  the  south. 

It  may  indeed  seem  rather  rash  to  criticize  the  identifications  of  the 
different  collectors  and  authors  without  examining  their  specimens,  but 
still  I  think  it  is  best  to  arrange  all  the  statements  under  S.  arctica, 
the  more  so,  as  none  of  the  authors,  who  possess  a  more  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  arctic,  and  especially  of  the  Greenland  flora — viz. 
LANGE,  NATHORST,  and  OSTENFELD — have  been  able  to  discern  any  other 
species  in  the  North-West  Greenland  material  which  they  have  examined. 
There  are,  however,  two  statements  in  Mr.  HOLM'S  list  of  the  STEIN 
plants,  which  have  given  me  some  trouble.  He  has  identified  one  speci- 
men from  Etah  with  £.  groenlandica,  (ANDERSS.)  LUNDSTR.,  and  another 
from  Northumberland  Island  with  S.  glauca.  Now  Mr.  HOLM  has  had 
good  opportunities  of  studying  the  Salices  in  question,  both  in  Green- 
land and  in  Novaja  Semlja,  but  I  think  that  he  has  formed  a  different 
opinion  about  them  from  that  at  which  I  have  arrived,  for  he  probably 
uses  the  name  "S.  arctica"  only  for  the  original  plant  of  PALLAS  such 
as  he  knows  it  from  Novaja  Semlja.  He  has,  therefore,  not  used  it  at 
all  for  any  specimen  in  the  STEIN  collection.  As  he  has  not  identified 
any  as  the  most  common  form,  var.  Brownii,  I  must—even  if  I  cannot 
do  so  without  hesitation — conclude  that  his  S.  groenlandica  is  what 
I  identify  with  var.  Brownii  and  his  S.  glauca  belongs  to  the  most 
glauca-Yike  variety,  viz.  var.  groenlandica.  For  my  part,  I  have  seen 
no  groenlandica  at  Etah,  although  I  can  assert  that  I  have  looked  pretty 
thoroughly  over  the  neighbourhood  of  the  old  village  during  my  two 
excursions  there.  At  Foulke  Fjord  S.  arctica  was  equally  common 
a  plant  in  different  localities,  as  it  was  in  Ellesmereland,  and  the  state- 
ments in  literature  seem  to  indicate  that  the  same  holds  true  all  over 
North- West  Greenland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND)  ;  Cape  York  (HART, 
WETHERILL);  between  there  and  Cape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Ivsu- 
gigsok  (NATHORST);1  Wolstenholme  Sound  (!NGLEFIELD),  Agpa  (Saun- 


Probably,  at  least  partly,  var.  groenlandica. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       87 

ders  Island)  and  Umanak  (BALLE);1  Carey  Islands:  Bjorling  Island  (WETH- 
ERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin  Bay  (!NGLEFIELD) ;  Netlik  (HAYES);  Netiu- 
lumi  (WETHERILL),  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Fan  Glacier,2  Gape 
Acland,  Glacier  Valley,  Bowdoin  Bay  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HAYES, 
HART,  STEIN,  209,  1507);  Rensselaer  Bay,  Butler  Island  (KANE).  N.  Along 
the  coast  of  the  Kennedy  Channel  (MORTON  according  to  KANE);  Bes- 
sels  Bay,  Cape  Morton,  Hannah  Island  (HART);  Hall  Land  (BESSELS), 
Polaris  Bay  (HART);  Wood  Point  (BEAUMONT  according  to  HART). 

Salix  glauca,  L. 

This  species  was  first  reported  by  KANE,  but  DURAND  has  excluded 
it  from  the  list  in  PL  Kan.  It  has  been  recorded  later  by  WETHERILL, 
whose  statements  I  have,  however,  thought  best  to  refer  to  5".  arctica, 
as  may  be  seen  above;  and  lastly  there  is  the  statement  from  North- 
umberland Island  in  Mr.  HOLM'S  list  of  the  STEIN  plants.  Of  course  it 
cannot  be  denied,  that  S.  glauca,  a  common  plant  throughout  Danish 
Greenland,  might  very  well  have  found  its  way  to  the  north-western 
parts  of  the  country;  but  still,  I  think  it  safer  not  to  give  it  a  place  in 
the  list  as  an  indisputable  citizen  of  the  region  as  long  as  I  have  not 
myself  seen  specimens,  especially  as  I  have,  as  already  stated,  good 
reason  to  think  that  Mr.  HOLM'S  opinion  about  the  different  members  of 
the  form-series  of  S.  arctica  is  not  the  same  as  mine. 

Salix  herbacea,  L. 

S.  herbacea,  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant.,  1753;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  GroenL; 
KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.  et  List  Angmags. ;  NATHORST,  "N.  W.  GronL; 
DURAND,  PL  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.;  BRIT- 
TON  &  BROWN,  111.  FL;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  HARTMAN,  Skand.  FL;  OSTEN- 
FELD,  Phan.  Faer. ;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  FL;  KRUUSE,  Jan  May. 

Fig.  LINNAEUS,  Fl.  Lapp.,  T.  7,  f.  3,  4;  Sv.  Bot.,  T.  367;  FL  Dan., 
T.  117. 

KANE  was  the  first  to  report  this  species  from  North- Western  Green- 
land (I  Grinnell  Exp.  I,  p.  143),  but  as  he  seams  not  to  have  collected 
it  from  the  single  locality  whence  he  mentions  it,  it  did  not  come  into 
DURAND'S  list  in  PL  Kan.;  or  he  may  have  mistaken  small  individuals 
of  S.  arctica  for  it,  as  may  easily  be  done  (cf.  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm., 


1  F.  typica  and  var.  Brownii. 

2  Var.  groenlandica. 


88  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

p.  131).  The  species  does,  however,  grow  there,  as  is  shown  by  the 
specimens  brought  home  by  NATHORST  and  others,  and  therefore  I  deem 
it  best  to  enumerate  the  localities  from  whence  it  is  reported,  even  though 
I  must  take  exception  against  eventual  mistakes. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  between  Gape  York  and 
Gape  Dudley  Digges  (KANE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island 
(STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke  (HAYES). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Arctic  American  Archi- 
pelago, Arctic  America,  Labrador,  Canada,  down  to  the  mountains  of 
Maine  and  New  Hampshire,  (Western  America?),  (Arctic  Siberia?),1 
Altai  and  other  mountains,  Arctic  Russia,  Northern  Scandinavia,  the 
Alps  and  other  European  mountains,  mountains  of  Great  Britain. 
Faeroes,  Iceland,  Jan  Mayen. 


Li'h'aceae. 

Tofieldia,  palustris,  HUDS. 

T.  pdlustris,  HUDSON,  Fl.  Angl.,  Ed.  II,  1778;  KRUUSE,  List  E. 
Greenl.;  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  HOOKER, 
Fl.  Bor.  Amer. ;  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111.  FL;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  AN- 
DERSSON  &  HESSELMAN,  Spetsb.  karlv. ;  T.  borealis,  WAHLENBERG,  Fl. 
Lapp.;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl. ;  KRUUSE,  List  Angmags.;  HARTMAN, 
Skand.  Fl.;  GRONLUND,  Isl.  Fl.;  Anthericum  calyculatum,  LINNAEUS,  Sp. 
Plant,  ex  p.,  et  A.  calyc.  /?,  Fl.  Suec.,  Ed.  II. 

Fig.  LINNAEUS,  Fl.  Lapp.,  T.  10,  fig.  3;  Sv.  Bot,  T.  482,  fig.  1 ; 
Fl.  Dan.,  T.  36. 

DURAND,  1.  c.,  p.  95,  reports  this  plant  for  Port  Foulke,  but  it  is 
omitted  in  HAYES'S  own  list  (Op.  Pol.  Sea)  of  his  collection;  NATHORST 
consequently  had  a  good  reason  for  excluding  it  from  his  list  in  N.  W. 
Gronl.,  where  he  says,  however,  that  it  might  presumably  be  thought 
that  it  grew  there.  As  it  is  found  later  in  Inglefield  Gulf,  it  belongs 
at  all  events  to  the  flora  of  our  area,  and  there  is  hardly  any  reason 
for  excluding  the  locality  of  DURAND,  if  the  statements — always  doubt- 
ful— from  the  first  american  expeditions  are  to  be  used  at  all.  More- 
over, T.  palustris  is  not  only  a  common  plant  in  Danish  West  Green- 
land, but  is  also  spread  far  northwards  on  the  eastern  coast. 


1   Some  of  the  older  records  are   doubtful  and   ought   probably  to   be   transferred 
to  S.  polaris,  WAHLENB. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       89 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf:  Cape  Acland  (WETHERILL) ;  Port 
Foulke  (HAYES  according  to  DURAND). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Arctic  American  Archi- 
pelago, Arctic  America,  Labrador,  Canada,  Rocky  Mountains,  Alaska, 
Ural,  Arctic  Russia,  Spitsbergen,  Northern  Scandinavia,  Bavaria,  Scot- 
land, Iceland. 

Juncaceae. 
Juncus  biglumis,  L. 

J.  biglumis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [J.  biglumis,  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol. 
Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.J. 

Curiously  enough,  this  plant  has  escaped  most  collectors,  although 
it  can  hardly  be  rare.  Only  BESSELS,  besides  NATHORST  and  myself, 
has  it  in  his  list.  In  Foulke  Fjord  I  saw  it  in  several  places;  in  swamps, 
along  brooks,  etc.  as  in  Ellesmereland. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin 
Bay  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord,  at  Etah  and  elsewhere  (1480,  1517).  N.  Hall 
Land  (BESSELS). 

Luzula  arcuata,  (WAHLENB.)  Sw.  var.  confusa,  (LINDEB.)  KJELLM. 

L.  arcuata  var.  confusa,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes 
N.  E.  Gronl. 

In  the  case  of  the  Luzulae  it  is  more  than  usually  difficult  to  make 
any  arrangement  of  the  statements  of  the  different  authors,  who  have 
more  or  less  confounded  two  or  more  species.  As  shown  by  my  previ- 
ous revision  (1.  c.,  p.  133 — 136),  first  there  is  the  L.  hyperborea  of  ROB. 
BROWN,  including  two  different  and  well-defined  species;  further  the 
question  about  the  range  of  L.  arcuata,  and  so  on.  Moreover,  several 
authors  have  believed  that  they  had  L.  campestris,  (L.)  DC.,  also  in 
their  material.  For  my  own  part,  I  cannot  doubt,  that  most  of  the  records 
are  referable  to  L.  arcuata  var.  confusa,  which  is  certainly  the  most 
common  form  here  as  in  Ellesmereland;  L.  nivalis  is  undoubtedly  a 
very  much  rarer  plant.  My  reasons  for  this  opinion  are,  partly  the  com- 
parison of  my  own  observations  at  Foulke  Fjord  with  my  knowledge 
of  the  appearance  of  the  two  species  on  the  other  side  of  Smith  Sound^ 
partly  the  inferences  that  can  be  drawn  from  the  descriptions  and  no- 
tices given  in  some  of  the  papers,  concerning  the  N.  W.  Greenland  flora. 
I  therefore  feel  justified  in  referring  all  records  that  do  not  decidedly 


90  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

point  to  L.  nivalis,  to  the  above-mentioned  species.  It  will,  however, 
be  requisite  to  treat  every  author  separately,  beginning  with  the  first 
report. 

SUTHERLAND,  Voyage,  enumerates  L.  hyperborea.  As  I  have  not 
seen  any  specimen,  I  think  it  best  to  refer  it  to  the  species  here  in 
question,  as  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  has  already  done. 

DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search,  enumerates  L. 
campestris  var.  congesta.  Now  first  of  all,  that  species  is  absent  from 
the  whole  of  Greenland,  and  most  probably  from  the  entire  arctic  region, 
as  is  also  the  variety.  There  does  indeed  exist  a  corresponding  variety 
of  L.  multiflora,  (EHRH.)  LEJ.,  but  that  also,  as  well  as  the  main  species, 
is  lacking  in  our  area.  As  the  name  is  generally  used  for  the  present 
species,  1  refer  his  localities  to  it. 

DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  has  both  L.  hyperborea  and  L.  arcuata  in  his 
list;  his  descriptions  clearly  show  that  he  has  had  the  present  variety 
as  well  as  L.  nivalis  (hyperborea}  before  him.  In  HAYES'S  collection, 
he  has  perhaps  had  only  the  former  represented.  The  plant  which  is 
here  called  L.  campestris  var.  congesta,  must  however,  be  left  out  of  the 
list  as  it  is  noted  for  "Tessiussak,  Sept.  4",  and  was  perhaps  collected 
in  Danish  Greenland. 

HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  has  "L.  campestris  (var.  congesta)",  "L. 
multifloraj'  and  "L.  arcuata  (L.  hyperborea)".  I  have  seen  his  speci- 
mens in  the  London  collections  and  can  therefore  assert,  that  the  former 
name  signifies  the  species  here  in  question  as  I  have  already  stated 
(1.  c.,  p.  133).  The  locality  Polaris  Bay  is  consequently  to  be  referred  to 
L.  arcuata  var.  confusa,  and  the  border-line  of  L.  multiflora  must 
accordingly  be  drawn  a  long  way  south  of  81°  40',  where  LANGE  has 
been  induced  to  draw  it,  by  relying  on  the  statement  of  HART.  Even 
GELERT  (in  OSTENFELD,  FI.  Arct.,  p.  31)  gives  it  the  same  range.  If  his 
"!"  after  the  indication  "West  Greenl.  60°— 81°  40'"  is  to  signify  that  he 
has  seen  HART'S  specimens,  I  cannot  agree  with  him  in  his  identifica- 
tion. The  L.  arcuata  of  HART  includes  also  L.  nivalis,  as  I  have  found 
in  examining  his  specimens,  that  is  to  say  it  is  identical  with  BROWN'S 
L.  hyperborea. 

NATHORST,  1.  c.,  has  L.  arcuata  var.  confusa  from  Ivsugigsok  under 
the  right  name,  but  among  his  specimens  of  Luzula  some  of  L.  nivalis 
are  also  to  be  found.  NATHORST,  1.  c.,  p.  28,  speaks  of  these  as  similar 
to  L.  arctica,  but  has  referred  them  to  the  other  species  on  the  au- 
thority of  KJELLMAN.  In  the  Stockholm  herbarium  the  name  was  altered 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      91 

by  N.  H.  NILSSON-EHLE  to  L.  arctica,  BL.,  and  I  am  entirely  in  accord 
with  him  in  transferring  the  plants  to  the  following  species. 

In  WETHERILL,  List  1894,  several  localities  are  enumerated  for  L. 
arcuata,  which  must  doubtless  go  to  the  present  species. 

Mr.  TH.  HOLM,  in  his  list  of  the  STEIN  .collection,  enumerates  two 
localities  for  L.  multiflora  var.  congesta,  which  I  feel  justified  in  trans- 
ferring to  the  species  here  in  question. 

At  Foulke  Fjord,  L.  arcuata  var.  confusa  is,  according  to  my  own 
observations,  a  common  plant  in  different  localities.  In  my  collection 
I  have  also  the  f.  subspicata,  LANGE. 

It  may  perhaps  seem  as  if  I  had  taken  to  great  liberties  with  the 
statements  of  the  different  authors,  in  referring  so  many  of  the  plants 
to  this  species,  and  especially  by  not  including  L.  multiflora  in  the  list; 
but  I  think  that  I  am  justified  by  the  following  facts:  I  have  seen  no 
other  species  from  the  area  except  L.  arcuata  var.  confusa  and  L.  ni- 
valis,  and  NATHORST  has  made  the  same  arrangement  (for  L.  spicata  see 
below!);  several  of  the  authors  whom  I  have  criticized  have,  in  many 
instances,  shown  that  their  identifications  are  not  to  be  implicitly  relied 
upon;  and  lastly  L.  multiflora  is  nowhere  high-arctic,  since  the  wrong 
statements  of  HART  are  excluded.  Indeed,  LANGE  gives  it  a  range  all 
over  Danish  Greenland,  but  as  he  mentions  no  special  localities,  it  can- 
not be  seen  where  its  limit  really  is;  and  there  are  some  facts  which 
make  a  limit  within  the  borderline  of  Danish  Greenland  rather  probable. 
L.  multiflora  does  not  go  north  of  Scoresby  Sound  (70°)  on  the  east 
coast,  and  the  variety  congesta,  which  alone  is  reported  from  N.  W. 
Greenland  has,  according  to  LANGE,  a  decidedly  southern  distribution 
in  Danish  Greenland,  where  it  is  not  found  north  of  Ritenbenk  about 
70°  in  the  Disco  region.  Perhaps  the  main  form  also  hat  its  limit 
thereabouts. 

There  is  still  a  Luzula-iovm  left  about  which  a  notice  must  be  given. 
NATHORST,  1.  c.,  has  given  a  description  of  a  plant  which  he  calls  L.  spi- 
cata var.  Kjellmani.  He  mentions  that  at  first  he  took  it  for  a  small 
form  of  L.  arcuata  var.  confusa,  but  afterwards  KJELLMAN  induced  him 
to  transfer  it  to  L.  spicata.  In  examining  his  specimens  in  the  Stock- 
holm herbarium,  I  soon  found  that  the  stunted  state  of  the  plant  was 
owing  to  infection  by  a  parasitic  fungus  which  had  infested  every  flower. 
At  my  request,  Mr.  T.  WESTERGREN  of  Stockholm,  the  well-known  my- 
cologist,  kindly  undertook  to  determine  the  parasite,  and  he  has  since 
informed  me  that  it  was  Ustilago  hyperborea,  BLYTT,  a  fungus  known 
previously  only  from  Norway.  Mr.  WESTERGREN  found  it  afterwards 


92.  H.  G.   SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

also  in  the  flowers  of  another  dwarf-form  of  Lusula  arcuata  collected 
in  Torne  Lappmark  by  HAGERSTROM.  Var.  Kjellmani  thus  is  shown 
to  be  merely  a  pathological  deformation  and  the  name  must  be  with- 
drawn. Moreover,  the  plant  in  question  belongs  not  to  L.  spicata  but 
to  L  arcuata.  The  former  species  must,  consequently,  be  excluded  from 
the  flora  of  the  area. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Ivsugigsok  (NAT- 
HORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound  (!NGLEFIELD);  Inglefield  Gulf:  BurdinBay: 
(!NGLEFIELD),  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN);  Glacier  Valley  at  Robertson 
Bay,  Fan  Glacier  (  WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Etah  (STEIN)  and 
other  places  (237,  1481,  4254);  Fog  Inlet  (KANE).  N.  Polaris  Bay  (HART) 

Lnzula  nivalis,  (LAEST.)  BEURL. 

L.  nivalis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;   OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 

As  in  Ellesmereland,  this  species  seems  to  be  a  rather  rare  and 
sporadic  one  in  North-Western  Greenland  from  whence  it  is  only  men- 
tioned by  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  It  may,  however,  have  been  found  in  Foulke 
Fjord  by  HART,  even  though  I  have  seen  no  specimens  to  prove  it,  and 
NATHORST,  as  previously  mentioned,  has  also  brought  it  home. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Foulke  Fjord  (1514,  1895); 
Bedevilled  Reach  (KANE). 

Luzula  spicata,,  (L.)  DC. 

As  mentioned  above,  the  plant  of  NATHORST  referred  to  this  spe- 
cies, really  belongs  to  L.  arcuata,  but  still  I  cannot  unreservedly  deny 
the  possibility  that  L.  spicata  may  grow  in  our  area.  In  the  Kew  her- 
barium I  saw  a  specimen,  collected  at  Whale  Sound,  Aug.  25,  1852, 
which  I  have  noted  as  collected  by  TAYLOR  *  and  belonging  to  L.  spi- 
cata. It  was  called  L.  campestris  congesta,  but  I  have  noted  that  the 
long,  pointed  sepals  and  the  hairiness  at  the  mouth  of  the  leaf-sheaths, 
place  it  under  spicata.  Not  having  the  specimen  at  hand  for  another 
examination,  I  am  now  very  doubtful  about  it.  It  might  be  the  same 
deformed  L.  arcuata  as  the  plant  of  NATHORST,  the  real  nature  of  which 
I  first  found  out  in  1906,  two  years  after  my  visit  to  London ;  or  it  may 
also  be  supposed,  that  TAYLOR,  whose  collections  were  made  in  different 
places — among  them  Danish  Greenland  and  Baffin  Land  where  L.  spi- 


1   I  know  nothing,  however,  about  TAYLOR  having  visited  these  regions,  as  no  plants 
from  there  are  included  in  his  FJ.  pi.  Baffin  B. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      93 

cata  grows — has  perhaps  confounded  some  of  them.  At  all  events,  I 
dare  not,  without  other  evidence  than  this  single  specimen,  give  the 
species  a  place  in  the  list  of  the  North- Western  Greenland  flora. 


Cyperaceae. 
Carex  misandra,  R.  BR. 

C.  misandra,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [C.  misandra,  NATHORST,  N. 
W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  C.  atrata,  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl., 
ex  HOLM,  Contr.  Fl.  Greenl.]. 

Curiously  enough,  this  species  has  probably  not  been  found  within 
our  area  before  NATHORST'S  visit  to  Ivsugigsok;  it  has  been  overlooked 
even  in  Foulke  Fjord  by  HAYES  and  HART.  It  is,  however,  very  com- 
mon and  abundant  there,  and  in  a  great  measure  forms  the  sward  of 
many  sloopes  and  rockledges,  or  appears  in  large,  dense  tufts  on  the 
plains  of  gravel  or  clay. 

It  is  not  reported  from  the  regions  north  of  the  Humboldt  Glacier 
by  those  collectors  who  have  brought  home  plants  from  there,  but  as, 
according  to  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  p.  38,  it  is  very  abundant  on  the 
western  side  of  the  Channels,  even  as  far  north  as  at  Lady  Franklin 
Bay  and  in  the  interior  of  Grinnell  Land,  and  likewise  in  N.  E.  Green- 
land (KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.,  p.  194),  it  can  hardly  be  absent  from  the 
upper  part  of  N.  W.  Greenland.  There  also  exists  a  statement  which 
points  to  its  appearance  there.  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.,  p.  214,  speaks 
of  specimens  of  "Carex  atrata,  BOOTT"  in  the  herbarium  of  the  Aca- 
demy of  Natural  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  collected  by  Dr.  BESSELS  at 
lat.  81 — 82°.  Now  MEEHAN,  as  usual,  has  arrived  at  a  wrong  determi- 
nation of  his  own  specimens,  which  belong,  according  to  HOLM,  Contr. 
Fl.  Greenl.,  p.  544,  to  C.  misandra,  and  thus  it  seems  probable  that 
BESSELS'  plant  is  the  same.  But  there  is  yet  another  difficulty.  BESSELS, 
in  his  list  (Exp.  Pol.  Amer.,  p.  297,  and  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.,  p.  304) 
has  no  other  Carex  but  C.  dioica.  Now  a  confusion  of  two  species  so 
widely  different  seems  quite  out  of  the  question,  yet  how  is  the  state- 
ment of  MEEHAN  then  to  be  understood?  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  Arct,  p.  90, 
gives  the  West  Greenland  range  of  C.  misandra  as  lat.  67°— 82°,  but 
quotes  only  WETHERILL  for  the  distribution  in  N.  W.  Greenland.  I  think 
the  occurrence  there  must,  for  the  present,  be  left  as  doubtful. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  M'Cor- 
mick  Bay  (MEEHAN),  Cape  Acland  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  at  Rein- 
deer Point  and  Etah  (STEIN,  229,  1516,  1535).  (N.  Hall  Land  (BESSELS)?). 


94  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  ISEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Carex  rigida,  GOOD. 

C.  rigida,  GOODENOUGH,  Obs.  Br.  Carex,  1794;  OSTENFELD,  Fl. 
Arct. ;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl. ;  KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.  et  List  Ang- 
mags.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer: ;  KJELLMAN,  in 
Vegaexp. ;  HOLM,  Nov.  Zeml.  Veg.;  FEILDEN,  Fl.  Kolguev;  ANDERSSON 
&  HESSELMAN,  Spetsb.  karlv. ;  HARTMAN,  Skand.  Fl. ;  C.  saxatilis,  WAH- 
LENBERG,  Fl.  Lapp.;  LEDEBOUR,  Fl.  Ross.;  non  LINNAEUS,  Sp.  Plant. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  159,  2479,  2480;  ANDERSSON,  Gyp.  Scand.,  T.  5, 
fig.  46;  OSTENFELD,  1.  c.,  fig.  52. 

As  C.  rigida  shows  a  very  considerable  resemblance  to  C.  aqua- 
tilis  var.  stans,  which  is  a  very  common  plant  in  Ellesmereland,  and 
not  at  all  rare  in  the  northern  part  of  Danish  Greenland,  I  was  for  a 
time  disposed  to  look  upon  all  the  statements  about  C.  rigida  from  N. 
W.  Greenland  as  by  right  referable  to  C.  aquatilis  var.  stans.  I  have, 
however,  found  that  NATHORST'S  specimens  from  Ivsugigsok  cannot  be 
transferred  to  it,  and  consequently  the  other  indications  may  also  belong 
to  the  species  here  in  question,  and  must  be  discussed  in  detail. 

DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  p.  199,  says  about  C.  rigida,  "frequent  at  al- 
most every  station".  I  think,  however,  that  no  heed  is  to  be  paid  to 
his  statement,  as  he  has  reported  no  other  Carex  from  N.  W.  Green- 
land, and  as  KANE  cannot  have  found  this  species  so  commonly  distri- 
buted and  have  overlooked  other  common  species  such  for  instance  as 
C.  misandra.  Furthermore,  DURAND  has  not  generally  shown  himself 
very  reliable  in  his  identifications. 

When  the  statement  of  the  plant  as  common  in  our  area  is  put 
aside,  we  come  to  the  same  author's  report  of  it  from  Netlik  in  Enum. 
PI.  Smith  S.,  p.  95.  What  is  meant  here  I  am  of  course  not  able  to 
ascertain,  not  having  the  specimens  at  my  disposal. 

Further,  there  is  HART'S  report  of  it  from  Foulke  Fjord  (Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp.,  p.  39).  As  far  as  my  notes  from  my  studies  in  the  Lon- 
don collections  afford  evidence,  there  are  no  specimens  from  that  locality 
either  in  the  Natural  History  Museum  or  at  Kew.  All  HART'S  speci- 
mens from  Ellesmereland  belong  to  C.  aquatilis  var.  stans.  This  indeed 
might  be  an  inducement  to  refer  the  Foulke  Fjord  plant  (if  it  is  collected 
there  at  all  and  only  noted)  to  the  same,  but  that  again  is  unknown  in 
N.  W.  Grenland. 

Besides  NATHORST'S  Ivsugigsok  plant,  which  I  have  examined  in  the 
Stockholm  Museum,  we  have  WETHERILL'S  reports  in  List  1894  left,  which 
I  think  we  must  accept  as  based  on  right  determination. 


1898-1002.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.       95 

As  HART,  1.  c.,  reports  the  species  only  from  Foulke  Fjord,  I  cannot 
understand  why  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  p.  33,  and  LANGE,  Gonsp.  Fl. 
Groenl.  II,  p.  291,  record  it  also  for  Polaris  Bay,1  and  OSTENFELD,  1.  c., 
p.  78,  gives  its  West  Greenland  range  as  60—81°. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST)  ;  Inglefield  Gulf:  (Netlik 
(HAYES)?);  Cape  Acland,  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Arctic  American  Archi- 
pelago (S.  E.  part  at  least),  Arctic  America,  Labrador,  Canada,  Rocky 
Mountains,  Andes  of  Chile,  Land  of  the  Chukches,  Arctic  Siberia,  New 
Siberian  Islands,  Central  Asia,  Himalaya,  Ural,  Arctic  Russia,  Novaja 
Semlja,  Kolguev,  Spitsbergen,  Northern  and  Central  Europe,  Great  Bri- 
tain, Faeroes,  Iceland. 

Carex  glareosa,  WAHLENB. 

C.  glareosa,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

This  is  one  of  the  species  that  I  have  mentioned  in  my  Prel.'Rep. 
as  new  additions  to  the  flora  of  N.  W.  Greenland.  It  grew  rather  abund- 
antly within  a  small  area  among  the  rocks  of  Reindeer  Point,  and  had 
ripe  fruit  when  collected,  Aug.  16,  1898. 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord,  Reindeer  Point  (253). 

Carex  incurva,  LIGHTF. 

C.  incurva,  SIMMONS,  V\.  Ellesm. 

This  sedge  also  is  new  for  N.  W.  Greenland.  I  found  the  low  form 
with  arched  culms  in  a  gravelly  beach,  together  with  Honkenya  pe- 
ploides;  and,  in  another  somewhat  swampy  locality,  I  found  also  a  form 
approaching  var.  erecta,  LANG,  (1512). 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord,  Reindeer  Point  (228,  1512). 

Carex  nardina,  FRIES. 

C.  nardina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [C.  nardina,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol. 
Exp.;  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

In  Foulke  Fjord  this  species  was  rather  common  in  rock-ledges  and 
dry,  gravelly  plains,  as  I  am  inclined  to  think  it  is  all  over  the  area. 
Its  abundant  appearance  in  Ellesmereland,  even  in  the  northernmost 


1  HART,    1.  c.,  p.  9,    says    about   this    locality    "Cyperaceae   appear    to   be  entirely 
absent". 


96  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

parts,  makes  this  most  probable.     There  are,  however,  only  a  few  state- 
ments about  it  in  the  papers  of  the  earlier  authors. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Glacier 
Valley  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART,  239,  1490).  N.  Hannah  Is- 
land (HART). 

Carex  scirpoidea,  MICHX. 

C.  scirpoidea,  MICHAUX,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.,  1803 ;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  Arct. ; 
LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl. ;  KRUUSE,  List  E.  Greenl.  et  List  Angmags.; 
WETHERILL,  List  1894;  HOOKER,  Fl.  Bor.  Amer.;  BRITTON  &  BROWN,  111. 
Fl. ;  KJELLMAN,  Fan.  Vestesk.  land  et  As.  Beringss.  Fan.;  HARTMAN, 
Skand.  Fl.;  C.  Wormskjoldiana,  HORNEMANN,  Fl.  Dan.,  9,  1818,  et  Dansk 
Oec.  Plantel.  I,  Ed.  3. 

Fig.  Fl.  Dan.,  T.  1528;  OSTENFELD,  1.  c.,  fig.  58. 

I  insert  this  species  in  the  list  entirely  on  the  authority  of  WETH- 
ERILL, as  I  have  not  seen  any  specimens  from  North-Western  Green- 
land. As  the  species  is  spread  generally  all  over  Danish  Greenland  and 
also  in  East  Greenland,  it  seems  a  priori  probable  that  it  should  grow 
also  within  our  area. 

Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL). 

Distribution:  East  and  West  Greenland,  Baffin  Land,  Arctic 
America,  Canada,  Mountains  of  New  England,  Rocky  Mountains  down 
to  Utah  and  California,  Alaska,  Chukches  Land,  Northern  Norway 
(Saltdalen). 

Carex  dioica,  L. 

This  species  is  reported  only  by  BESSELS  from  Hall  Land.  Now  if 
there  was  only  his  own  identification  of  it,  I  should  not  in  the  least 
hesitate  to  exclude  it  from  the  flora,  as  it  is  highly  improbable  that  it 
would  grow  so  far  north  as  81—82°  N.  and  be  lacking  to  the  south; 
but  we  have  not  got  only  BESSELS'  own  word  for  it  (Exp.  Pol.  Amer., 
p.  297),  it  is  also  maintained  in  his  second  list  (Amer.  Nordpol-Exp., 
p.  304)  where  the  determinations  are  said  to  have  been  verified  by  ASA 
GRAY.  NATHORST,  who  in  N.  W.  Gronl.  had  excluded  it  as  highly  doubt- 
ful, has  given  it,  in  Nachtr.,  a  place  in  the  list  on  the  authority  of  ASA 
GRAY.  Indeed  GRAY'S  evidence  would  seem  to  be  satisfactory,  but  as 
there  is  yet  another  doubtlessly  wrong  identification  in  the  list  (Erio- 
phorum  vaginatum),  I  think  one  may  be  allowed  still  to  doubt  the 
existence  there  of  Carex  dioica.  The  material  may  perhaps  have  been 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      97 

very  imperfect,  or  GRAY  may  not  have  had  any  opportunity  of  verifying 
all  the  identifications.  Moreover  there  is  the  statement  of  MEEHAN  quoted 
above  under  C.  misandra,  that  specimens  of  C.  atrata  were  brought 
home  by  BESSELS.  As  the  collector  himself  has  only  one  species  of 
Carex  in  his  list,  it  is  hardly  possible  to  reconcile  two  such  different 
statements,  and  hardly  possible  that  even  MEEHAN  could  have  made  such 
a  mistake. 

The  safest  way,  I  think,  will  be  to  leave  the  plant  in  question  out 
of  the  list,  until  better  evidence  is  forthcoming.  Under  such  circum- 
stances it  may  seem  unprofitable  to  speculate  further  upon  the  real  na- 
ture of  the  plant  in  question;  but  if  it  really  does  belong  to  the  form- 
series  of  C.  dioica,  it  is  evidently  not  the  main  form,  but  either  C.  gy- 
nocrates,WoRMSKJ.,  which  is  found  in  Danish  Greenland  up  to  lat.  69°  16', 
or  C.  dioica  var.  parallela,  LAEST.  (which  should  be  regarded  as  a 
separate  species),  which  is  found  in  Scoresby  Sound  on  the  east  coast. 
OSTENFELD,  Fl.  Arct,  p.  61,  has  referred  it  to  the  former. 

Elyna,  Bellardi,  (ALL.)  KOCH. 

E.  Bellardi,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Kobresia  scirpina,  MEEHAN, 
Gontr.  Greenl.]. 

The  great,  habitual  similarity  of  this  plant  to  Carex  nardina,  in 
whose  company  it  grows  on  dry  rock-ledges,  in  gravelly  plains,  etc., 
probably  accounts  for  its  absence  from  all  lists  of  N.  W.  Greenland 
plants  except  that  of  MEEHAN. 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf:  M'Cormick  Bay  (MEEHAN);  Foulke 
Fjord:  Reindeer  Point  (231,  1489). 

EriophoTum  Scheuchzeri,  HOPPE. 

E.  Scheuchzeri,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [E.  Scheuchzeri,  NATHORST, 
N.  W.  Gronl. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  E.  capitatum,  DUR AND,  PI.  Kan.; 
HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  E.  vaginatum,  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et 
Arner.  Nordpol-Exp. ;  HART,  1.  c.]. 

As  appears  from  the  special  synonymic  here  given,  the  plant  in 
question  figures  not  only  under  the  two  names  of  E.  Scheuchzeri  and 
E.  capitatum,  which  are  in  fact  synonymous,  but  also  under  the  false 
name  of  E.  vaginatum.  I  have  previously  explained  (1.  c.,  p.  149 — 150)  the 
probable  cause  for  this  mistake.  Indeed  HART  (1.  c.,  p.  39)  has  both  in 
his  list,  but  I  have  sought  in  vain  for  specimens  of  E.  vaginatum  in  the 

7 


98  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

London  collections.  None  were  there  from  N.  W.  Greenland  under  that 
name,  all  HART'S  specimens  being  referred  to  E.  Scheuchzeri.  As  more- 
over E.  vaginatum  is  found  nowhere  in  the  better  known  parts  of  Green- 
land (when  doubtful  or  decidedly  wrong  statements  are  left  out  of  con- 
sideration—cf.  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.,  p.  129,  and  SIMMONS,  Dan. 
Greenl.  pi.,  p.  473),  I  feel  justified  in  not  hesitating  to  refer  all  such  state- 
ments to  E.  Scheuchzeri,  even  when  that  species  is  recorded  alongside 
of  E.  vaginatum. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (HART);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Ingleh'eld  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  Gape  Acland  and  Fan 
Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah 
(241,  1511);  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE).  N.  Hall  Land  (BESSELS). 

Eriophorum  polystachium,  L. 

E.  polyslachium,  SIMMONS,  FJ.  Ellesm.  [E.  polystachium,  DURAND, 
PI.  Kan.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  E.  angustifolium,  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.;  SIMMONS,  Prel.  Rep.]. 

Notwithstanding  that  this  species  is  probably  quite  as  common  as 
the  last  in  all  wet  localities,  it  seems  to  have  escaped  most  collectors, 
as  appears  from  the  small  list  of  localities. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Cape 
Acland  and  Fan  Glacier  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord,  at  Reindeer  Point 
and  Etah  (208,  1492,  1518);  Rensselaer  Harbour  (KANE). 


Gramineae. 
Festuca  ovina,  L. 

F.  ovina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[F.  ovina,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.;  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Cape  York;  F.  ov.  var. 
violacea,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  F.  ov.  var.  brevifolia,  HART,  Bot. 
Br.  Pol.  Exp.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894J. 

Most  of  the  specimens  1  saw  at  Foulke  Fjord,  where  this  grass  was 
very  common  and  abundant,  especially  in  drier  localities,  belonged  to 
the  var.  brevifolia,  (R.  BR.)  HART,  which,  in  my  opinion,  cannot  be 
maintained  as  a  species  but  is  continually  connected  with  the  common 
form  from  southern  localities.  This,  however,  may  also  be  found  in 
the  arctic  regions,  and  I  have  specimens  of  it  even  from  Foulke  Fjord 
(1486).  Certainly,  however,  var.  brevifolia  is  most  common  wherever 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.      99 

F.  ovina  enters  the  arctic  regions,  as  it  is  also  in  N.  W.  Greenland. 
The  specimens  from  Ivsugiksok,  which  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  p.  27, 
names  as  var.  violacea,  cannot  be  referred  to  the  real  F.  violacea, 
GAUD.,  hut  helong  to  var.  brevifolia. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound: 
Agpa  (Saunders  Island)  and  Umanak  (BALLE);  Inglefield  Gulf:  North- 
umberland Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Etah  (STEIN)  and 
Reindeer  Point  (230,  1485,  1486);  Rensselaer  Harbour  and  Mary  Minturn 
River  (KANE).  N.  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Glyceria  Vahliana,  (LIEBM.)  TH.  FRIES. 

I  cannot  of  course  decide  what  plant  it  may  be  which  DURAND, 
Enum.  PI.  Smith  S.,  p.  95,  has  designed  as  "Poa  Vahliana,  Bot.  Dan.? 
(too  young)",  but  it  may  perhaps  be  the  real  G.  Vahliana,  which  occurs 
sporadically  in  different  arctic  lands.  The  locality  is  noted  as  ''Port 
Foulke  etc.,  July  15". 

Glyceria  tenella,  LANGE. 

G.  tenella,  LANGE,  in  KJELLMAN  &  LTJNDSTROM,  Fan.  Nov.  Semi., 
1882;  GELERT,  in  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  Arct. ;  G.  Langeana,  BERLIN,  Karlv. 
sv.  exp.  Gronl.;  LANGE,  Consp.  Fl.  Groenl.  II;  ROSENVINGE,  2  Till,  et 
Nye  Bidr. 

Fig.  KJELLMAN  &  LUNDSTROM,  1.  c.,  T.  6;  OSTENFELD,  1.  c.,  fig.  95. 

The  specific  rank  of  this  plant,  which  seems  restricted  to  Greenland 
and  Novaja  Semlja,  is  perhaps  somewhat  doubtful,  as  is  also  that  of  the 
following.  I  think  it  best,  however,  for  the  present  to  follow  GELERT, 
1.  c.,  in  keeping  them  both  distinct  from  G.  distans.  I  had  not  yet  sub- 
jected my  Glyceriae  to  a  closer  examination  when  I  published  my  Pre- 
liminary Report.  G.  tenella  was  found  sparingly  on  clay  plains  together 
with  other  grasses. 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord  at  Etah  (1478). 

Distribution:  West  Greenland  (sporadic),  East  Greenland  (speci- 
mens of  a  Glyceria  collected  in  Kjerulf  Fjord,  Aug.  11  and  13,  1899, 
by  A.  G.  NATHORST  and  P.  DUSEN,  which  KRUUSE  refers  to  the  following 
species,  seem  rather  to  belong  to  the  present),  Waigats  and  Novaja 
Semlja. 

Glyceria  angustata,  (R.  BR.)  TH.  FRIES. 
G.  angustata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 


100  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

This  seems  to  be  a  rare  species  in  N.  W.  Greenland,  as  it  is  only 
collected  by  BALLE  (OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi.  Gape  York)  and  myself  (for  the 
G.  angustata  of  NATHORST  from  Ivsugigsok  see  SIMMONS,  1.  c.,  p.  157, 
and  under  the  next  species).  It  grew  on  the  gravelly  beach  near  Rein- 
deer Point,  rather  sparingly. 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Sound:  Agpa  (Saunders  Island) 
and  Umanak  (BALLE);  Foulke  Fjord  near  Reindeer  Point  (1527). 

Glyceria  distans,  (L.)  WAHLENB. 

G.  distans,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [G.  distans,  OSTENFELD,  Fl.  pi. 
Gape  York ;  G.  angustata,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

Probably  this  species  is  quite  as  common  as  in  Ellesmereland,  but 
most  collectors  have  left  the  grasses  unnoticed  and  consequently  only  a 
few  statements  about  them  exist  in  the  literature  about  N.  W.  Green- 
land. At  Foulke  Fjord  it  grew  abundantly  in  the  rich  soil  of  the  old 
Eskimo  village  of  Etah.  The  form  I  found  there  was  var.  arctica,  (HooK.) 
GELERT,  which  is  already  reported  from  another  point  in  that  neighbour- 
hood by  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.  I  have  ascertained  in  the  arctic 
herbarium  of  the  Stockholm  museum  that  the  G.  angustata  of  NAT- 
HORST, 1.  c.,  is  the  other  variety  vaginata,  (L.ANGE)  GELERT. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound: 
Agpa  and  Umanak  (BALLE);  Foulke  Fjord:  Port  Foulke  (HAYES)  and 
Etah  (236). 

Glyceria  maritima,  (Huos.)  WAHLB. 
var.  reptans,  (HARTM.)  SIMM. 

G.  marit.  var.  reptans,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [G.  vilfoidea,  NAT- 
HORST, N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

As  I  have  previously  mentioned  (1.  c.,  p.  160)  my  Foulke  Fjord 
specimens  of  this  plant  are  somewhat  different  from  those  of  Ellesmere- 
land. They  are  considerably  stouter,  have  longer  leaves,  and  not  such 
long-creeping  and  densely  radicant  stolons.  This  may  be  accounted  for 
by  the  habitat,  which  was  rather  different  from  the  usual,  somewhat 
loamy,  beach  localities  of  the  plant.  Here  it  grew  in  fissures  and  de- 
pressions of  the  rocks,  near  the  beach  on  Reindeer  Point,  that  is  to  say 
in  more  sheltered  places  than  on  the  open  shore.  That  may  also,  I  think, 
account  for  the  fact  that  the  plant  had  here  produced  a  few  inflores- 
cences, while  it  was  always  found  sterile  in  Ellesmereland.  These  pan- 
icles, which  on  account  probably  of  the  dry  situation,  were  already 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.     101 

withered  when  the  specimens  were  collected,  Aug.  11,  1899,  were  small 
and  contracted,  with  few  spikelets  on  short  branches.  The  number  of 
flowers  in  each  spikelet  does  not  exceed  two,  sometimes  only  one  flower 
is  developed.  Here  consequently  we  find  the  typical  features  of  "G. 
vilfoidea",  but  the  vegetative  parts  call  to  mind  rather  the  description 
of  the  var.  arenaria,  FRIES  (Mantissa,  2,  p.  9).  The  specimens  of  NAT- 
HORST,  which  I  saw  in  the  Stockholm  herbarium,  represent  the  common 
arctic  form  of  var.  reptans. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Foulke  Fjord,  Reindeer 
Point  (1479). 

Dnpontia,  Fisheri,  R.  BR. 

D.  Fisheri,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  D.  psilosantha,  RUPRECHT,  Fl. 
Samojed.  cisural.  [D.  psilosantha,  BESSELS,  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp. ;  NAT- 
HORST, Nachtr.]. 

This  grass  has  been  identified  by  ASA  GRAY  in  Dr.  BESSELS'  col- 
lection, and  thus  another  locality  added  to  its  sporadic  distribution  in 
the  arctic  regions,  I  am,  however,  inclined  to  think,  that  it  may  often 
be  sterile  and  therefore  may  easily  be  overlooked. 

Occurrence.     N.  Hall  Land  (BESSELS). 

Distribution.  To  the  statements  included  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm., 
p.  161,  must  be  added  North-Eastern  Greenland. 

Poa  glauca,  VAHL. 

P.  glauca,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [P.  glauca,  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl. ;  P.  caesia,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search]. 

I  do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  this  grass  to  be  one  of  the  most 
common  plants  of  N.  W.  Greenland,  notwithstanding  that  it  is  absent 
from  the  list  of  most  collectors.  This  must,  however,  be  because  they 
have  confounded  it  with  others,  or  have  totally  overlooked  it.  Neither 
HART  nor  HAYES,  for  instance,  have  noted  it  for  Foulke  Fjord,  where 
it  is  extremely  common  and  appears  both  in  the  typical  form  and  in  the 
varieties  elatior,  (ANDERSS.)  LANGE,  and  tenuior,  SIMM.  Of  the  latter  I 
found  a  few  individuals  only,  in  fissures  of  the  rock  at  Reindeer  Point 
(1467);  the  former  I  found  in  abundance  in  large  luxuriant  tufts  on  the 
manured  soil  of  Etah  (235);  the  main  form  I  found  in  various  local- 
ities such  as  slopes,  rookeries,  etc. 


102  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin 
Bay  (INGLEFIELD,  STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  at  Etah,  Reindeer  Point,  etc. 
(STEIN,  232,  235,  1467,  1468,  1522). 


Poa  abbreviate,  R.  BR. 

P.  abbreviata,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. ;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[P.  abbreviata,  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

Seems  to  be  a  rare  species  on  this  side  of  Smith  Sound,  notwith- 
standing its  general  appearance  on  the  american  side.  I  only  saw  a 
few  individuals  of  it  in  Foulke  Fjord  in  a  dry  slope. 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf:  Netiulumi  (WETHERILL);  Foulke 
Fjord,  near  Etah  (1487). 

Poa  alpina,  L. 

Although  the  species  is  recorded  again  and  again  from  different 
localities  in  N.  W.  Greenland  (by  DICKIE,  DURAND,  and  HART),  as  also 
from  Ellesmereland,  I  feel  justified  in  excluding  it  here  as  I  have  done 
in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  because  there  is  not  a  single  specimen  in  the  Lon- 
don collections  to  support  those  records.  As  for  the  american  collec- 
tions, I  have  of  course  not  seen  them,  but  DURAND'S  identifications  are 
always  subject  to  doubt  and  cannot  be  used  when  improbable.  It  is 
not  easy  to  say  what  plant  those  authors  may  have  had  in  view:  it 
may  have  been  both  P.  glauca  and  P.  cenisia.  It  seems,  however, 
most  probable  that  they  have  identified  with  P.  alpina  the  same  form 
of  P.  cenisia  which  puzzled  me  at  Harbour  Fjord  in  Ellesmereland  and 
which  is  very  similar  to  P.  alpina  because  of  the  short  internodes  of 
the  rhizome,  that  give  it  an  almost  tufted  mode  of  growth.  From  speci- 
mens in  the  Stockholm  herbarium  it  appears  that  NATHORST  has  col- 
lected such  a  form  at  Ivsugigsok,  but  he  has  not  allowed  himself  to  be 
led  astray  by  its  unusual  habit.  He  speaks  also,  N.  W.  Gronl.,  p.  27, 
of  P.  flexuosa,  WAHLENB.,  forming  dense  mats  below  the  rookeries. 

I  think  I  may  refer  all  the  localities  mentioned  for  P.  alpina  to 
P.  cenisia  without  any  fear  of  making  a  wrong  statement,  as  the  latter 
common  plant  is  certainly  not  lacking  in  any  of  them. 

P.  cenisia,  ALL. 

P.  cenisia,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  JN.  E.  Gronl. 
[P.  cenisia,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  WETHERILL.  List  1894;  P.  arc- 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.     103 

tica,  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  BESSELS,  Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer. 
Nordpol-Exp. ;  P.  flexuosa,  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  NATHORST,  N.  W. 
Gronl.;  P.  pratensis,  MEGHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.,  ex  HOLM,  Contr.  Fl.  Greenl.; 
P.  alpina,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.;  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD,  Sum- 
mer Search;  HART,  1.  c.]. 

As  may  be  seen  in  the  above  special  synonymic,  this  species  is 
entered  in  the  different  lists  under  quite  a  series  of  more  or  less  appro- 
priate names.  I  have  already  spoken  about  the  P.  alpina  of  several 
authors. 

Doubtless  P.  cenisia  is  quite  as  common  in  different  kinds  of  lo- 
calities within  our  present  area  as  in  Ellesmereland,  at  least  such  was 
the  case  at  Foulke  Fjord. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Cape  York  (HART); 
Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Wolstenholme  Sound  (!NGLEFIELD) ;  Inglefield 
Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN),  M'Gormick  Bay  (MEEHAN),  Cape 
Acland  ( WETHERILL)  ;  Foulke  Fjord  (HART),  at  Port  Foulke  (HAYES),  Etah 
(STEIN,  1477)  and  Reindeer  Point  (233,  1528);  Rensselaer  Bay  (KANE). 
N.  Bessels  Bay,  Hannah  Island,  Cape  Morton  (HART);  Hall  Land  (BES- 
SELS); Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Pou  pratensis,  L, 

HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp.,  p.  40,  records  this  species  also  from  Foulke 
Fjord.  Now  indeed,  as  it  grows  in  Ellesmereland  even  in  the  Hayes 
Sound  district,  it  is  not  at  all  impossible  that  it  may  be  found  also  in 
the  neighbouring  parts  of  Greenland;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  I  have 
not,  so  far  as  my  notes  show,  seen  any  specimens  from  those  regions 
in  the  London  collections,  and  this,  together  with  its  great  likeness  to 
P.  venisia,  makes  it  more  probable  that  HART  had  the  latter  in  view. 
The  more  so,  as  no  other  collector  has  found  it  in  that  comparatively 
well-explored  place.  I  therefore  think  it  better  not  to  give  it  any  place 
as  a  member  of  the  N.  W.  Greenland  flora  until  more  reliable  evidence 
is  procured. 

Pie urop ogon  Sabinei,  R.  BR. 

P.  Sabinei,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

Ivsugigsok,  where  NATHORST  found  it  in  1883  (N.  W.  Gronl.),  still 
stands  as  the  only  locality  in  N.  W.  Greenland  of  this  beautiful  and 
interesting  grass.  It  is  not,  however,  improbable  that  it  was  seen  in 
Foulke  Fjord  during  our  second  visit  there.  Mr.  BAY,  the  zoologist  of 


104  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

the  expedition,  told  me  lhat  when  he  visited  some  lakelets  in  a  valley 
beyond  the  range  above  Etah,  which  I  could  not  reach  during  our  short 
stay,  he  had  seen  a  grass  there  with  long  floating  leaves.  Now  of  course 
that  may  have  been  the  water-form  of  Alopecurus  alpinus,  but  it  is  at 
least  equally  probable  that  it  was  Pleuropogon.  It  is  very  much  to  be 
regretted,  that  he  did  not  bring  a  specimen  with  him ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  this  note  may  perhaps  induce  some  botanist  who  may  visit  the 
fjord  in  the  future,  to  examine  that  part  of  its  surroundings  where,  in 
all  probality,  other  additions  to  the  flora  might  also  be  made,  as  water- 
plants  are  very  scantily  represented  in  the  present  list. 
Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST). 

Catabrosa  algida,  (SOLAND.)  FR. 

C.  algida,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[C.  algida,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  Phippsia  algida,  HART,  Bot.  Br. 
Pol.  Exp. ;  WETHERILL,  List  1894;  Ph.  monandra,  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi., 
in  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search]. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (HART,  STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST); 
Carey  Islands:  Bjorling  Island  (WETHERILL);  Wolstenholme  Sound  (ING- 
LEFIELD); Inglefield  Gulf:  Burdin  Bay  (!NGLEFIELD),  Northumberland 
Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord,  Reindeer  Point' (1472). 

Trisetum  spicatum,  (L.)  RIGHT. 

T.  spicatum,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [T.  subspicatum,  DURAND,  PI. 
Kan.;  T.  sesquiftorum,  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl.,  ex  HOLM,  Contr.  Fl. 
Greenl.]. 

It  is  probable  that  this  species  is  not  common,  as  it  is  missing 
also  from  the  lists  of  those  collectors  who  have  worked  systematically 
and  thoroughly,  such  for  instance  as  NATHORST,  WETHERILL.  It  is,  how- 
ever, not  rare  at  Foulke  Fjord,  where  I  found  it  both  on  the  sandy 
beach  outside  Reindeer  Point,  and  also  in  the  rook-crannies  of  that  point 
and  in  the  gravel  slope  at  Etah. 

Occurrence.  S.  Inglefield  Gulf:  M'Cormick  Bay  (MEEHAN);  Foulke 
Fjord:  at  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (212,  1476,  1526);  Bedevilled  Reach 
(KANE). 

Aira  caespitosa,  L.  var.  arctica,  (TRIN.)  SIMM. 

A.  caespitosa  var.  arctica,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [Deschampsia 
brevifolia,  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.    105 

It  must  be  taken  for  granted,  I  think,  that  the  plant  from  Ingle- 
field  Gulf  in  WETHERILL'S  list  is  really  the  same  as  that  found  in  the 
northern,  western  and  southern  parts  of  Ellesmereland  as  well  as  in 
other  parts  of  the  Arctic  American  Archipelago.  It  is  indeed  curious, 
that  it  should  be  absent  from  just  that  part  of  Ellesmereland  which  lies 
nearest  to  the  Smith  Sound  region  of  N.  W.  Greenland.  However,  even 
if  it  does  not  grow  in  the  Hayes  Sound  district  it  may  perhaps  exist  in 
the  little-known  region  down  to  Clarence  Head;  and  at  all  events,  there 
are  other  species  lacking,  or  rare,  in  the  Hayes  Sound  region,  which  are 
common  to  the  south  coast  of  Ellesmereland  and  the  southern  part  of 
N.  W.  Greenland.  Moreover,  the  plant  here  in  question  is  also  found 
in  North-Eastern  Greenland.  I  therefore  think  it  best  to  give  it  a  place 
in  the  list  on  the  authority  of  WETHERILL,  although  I  wish  very  much 
that  I  could  first  have  made  an  examination  of  it,  the  more  so  as  it  is 
not  only  in  itself  critical  but  there  is  also  the  following  still  somewhat 
doubtful  species,  to  which  it  might  be  referred. 

Occurrence.     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:    Gape  Acland  (WETHERILL). 

Aira  flexuosa,,  L. 

A.  flexuosa,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm. 

The  Alra,  which  NATHORST  collected  at  Ivsugigsok  in  1883  and  in 
N.  W.  Gronl.,  p.  27,  refers  to  the  same  plant  that  ROB.  BROWN  had 
described  in  Chlor  Melv.  as  Deschampsia  brevifolia,  has  given  me  a 
good  deal  of  trouble,  as  has  also  my  own  plant  from  Fram  Harbour  in 
Eastern  Ellesmereland.  They  are  very  like  each  other,  the  principal 
difference  being  that  my  plant  has  all  the  leaves  flat,  NATHORST'S  has 
them  generally  convolute.  Both  differ  from  the  common  A.  flexuosa 
in  possessing  a  short  awn,  which  is  not,  or  at  least  very  little,  excerted 
beyond  the  glume.  But  in  other  respects  they  agree  with  that  species 
far  more  than  with  A.  caespitosa,  and  they  call  to  mind  especially  the 
form  which  BERLIN,  Karlv.  sv.  exp.  Gronl.,  p.  77,  has  called  A.  flexuosa 
var.  montana  f.  pallida,  which  has  the  same  short,  straight,  included 
awn.  For  the  present,  until  a  better  material  can  be  procured  by  some 
future  collector,  I  must,  even  if  I  cannot  do  so  without  some  hesitation, 
let  it  stand  where  I  placed  it  in  my  Ellesmereland  flora. 

NATHORST,  however,  in  the  same  paper,  speaks  also  about  another 
Aira,  which  he  found  on  Hare  Island  in  Danish  Greenland  and  referred 
to  the  same  variety,  although  he  speaks  of  differences  between  them. 
As  I  have  previously  mentioned  (Dan.  Greenl.  PI.,  p.  473),  this  is  in  fact 


106  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

quite  another  plant,  which  should  be  called  A.  caespitosa  var.  brevifolia, 
(MARSCH.  v.  BIEB.)  HARTM.,  of  which  it  represents  a  small  and  stunted 
form. 

Occurrence.     S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST). 

Agrostis  canina,,  L. 

The  A.  canina  /?  melaleuca,  BONG.,  of  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.,  which  is 
said  to  have  been  collected  at  Smith  Sound  as  well  as  at  Sukkertoppen, 
is  decidedly  a  very  doubtful  plant.  No  other  collector  has  found  the 
variety  in  Greenland,  and  the  species  is  restricted  to  the  southernmost 
part  of  Danish  Greenland  between  lat.  60°  and  61°.  I  feel,  therefore, 
fully  justified  in  excluding  it  from  the  list. 

Arctagrostis  latifolia,  (R.  BR.)  GRISEB. 

A.  latifolia,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [A  latifolia,  WETHERILL,  List 
1894;  Colpodium  latifolium,  NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.]. 

Often  sterile  and  thus  easily  overlooked,  as  I  too  did  during  my 
first  visit  to  Foulke  Fjord.  When  I  went  there  again  in  1899  and 
turned  my  attention  to  finding  it,  I  saw  it  in  many  places  along  brooks, 
in  moist  depressions,  etc.  I  therefore  think  that  it  is  far  more  common 
throughout  the  area  than  appears  from  the  few  records  of  it. 

Occurrence.  S.  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Gape  Ac- 
land  (WETHERILL)  ;  Foulke  Fjord  at  Reindeer  Point  and  Etah  (1464,  1513). 

Alopecurus  alpinus,  SM. 

A.  alpinus,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.;  OSTENFELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 
[A.  alpinus,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage;  DICKIE,  Not.  fl.  pi.,  in  INGLEFIELD, 
Summer  Search;  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.  et  Enum.  pi.  Smith  S.;  BESSELS, 
Exp.  Pol.  Amer.  et  Amer.  Nordpol-Exp. ;  HART,  Bot.  Br.  Pol.  Exp. ;  NAT- 
HORST, N.  W.  Gronl.;  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

Common  everywhere  in  the  most  different  situations,  immediately 
catching  the  eye  and  so  easily  identified,  that  it  has  got  a  place  in  the 
list  of  every  collector,  always  under  its  right  name.  I  may,  however, 
give  a  list  of  the  places  from  whence  it  is  mentioned  in  literature. 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Cape  York  (HART, 
WETHERILL,  STEIN);  Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST) ;  Wolstenholme  Sound:  Dal- 
rymple  Rock  (WETHERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Whale  Sound,  Burdin  Bay 
(INGLEFIELD),  Netiulumi  (WETHERILL),  Hakluyt  Island  (KANE),  Norhum- 


1898  -1902.  No.  16.J     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.     107 

berland  Island  (KANE,  STEIN);  Cape  Alexander  (KANE);  Foulke  Fjord, 
everywhere  (HAYES,  HART,  STEIN,  234);  Bedevilled  Reach  (KANE).  N. 
Along  the  Kennedy  Channel  (KANE);  Bessels  Bay,  Cape  Morton.  Hannah 
Island  (HART);  Hall  Land  (BESSELS);  Polaris  Bay  (HART). 

Hferochloa,  alpina,  (LILJEBL.)  ROEM  &  SCHULT. 

H.  alpina,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [H.  alpina,  SUTHERLAND,  Voyage; 
NATHORST,  N.  W.  Gronl.;  MEEHAN,  Contr.  Greenl;  WETHERILL,  List  1 894] . 

From  the  doubtful  "Tessiussak,  Sept.  4",  DURAND,  Enum.  pi.  Smith 
S.,  reports  H.  borealis,  which  in  HAYES'S  own  list  in  Op.  Pol.  Sea,  is  cor- 
rected to  H.  alpina.  Besides  this  worthless  record  there  are  several 
others,  which  seem  to  imply  that  the  plant  in  question  is  not  rare  in 
the  southern  part  of  N.  W.  Greenland, 

Occurrence.  S.  Bushnan  Island  (SUTHERLAND);  Cape  York  (STEIN); 
Ivsugigsok  (NATHORST);  Inglefield  Gulf:  Northumberland  Island  (STEIN), 
M'Cormick  Bay  (MEEHAN),  Bowdoin  Bay  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord  at 
Etah  (STEIN,  203). 

Lycopodiaceae. 
Lycopodium  Selago,  L. 

L.  Selago,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.     [L.  Selago,  WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 
Occurrence.     S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:   North- 
umberland Island  (STEIN). 

Equisetaceae. 
Equisetum  arvense,  L. 

E.  arvense,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [E.  arvense,  WETHERILL,  List 
1894]. 

My  specimens,  which  were  found  in  a  small,  moist  depression  of 
the  rock,  growing  among  moss,  are  of  the  same  small  form  as  those  I 
found  in  Ellesmereland,  and  may  best  be  referred  to  var.  riparium, 
(FR.)  MILDE.  They  are  all  sterile. 

Occurrence.  S.  Cape  York  (WETHERILL);  Inglefield  Gulf:  North- 
umberland Island  (STEIN);  Foulke  Fjord  at  Reindeer  Point  (1515). 


108  H.G.SIMMONS.  [SEC.ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Polypodiaceae. 
Aspidium  fragrans,  (L.)  Svv. 

A.  fragrans,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.     [^4.  fragrans,  WETHERILL,  List 
1894]. 

Occurrence     S.  Inglefield  Gulf:  Bowdoin  Bay  ( 


Cystopteris  fragilis,  (L.)  BERNH. 

C.  fragilis,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  [C.  fragilis,  DURAND,  PI.  Kan.: 
WETHERILL,  List  1894]. 

Besides  the  localities,  mentioned  below,  where  the  species  is  found, 
there  is  one  more  in  DURAND'S  list  of  KANE'S  plants  (PI.  Kan.,  p.  201) 
which  may  perhaps  belong  to  it,  even  though  it  seems  at  least  equally 
probable  that  the  following  one  is  meant.  DURAND  says  under  Cysto- 
pteris: "Another  state  (very  young)  of  propably  the  same  fern  was  col- 
lected at  Rensselaer  Harbour.  It  is  scarcely  more  than  4  inches  long, 
narrower  and  less  divided,  without  fruit  dots." 

In  Foulke  Fjord  it  grew  here  and  there  in  crevisses  of  the  rocks. 

Occurrence.  S.  Wolstenholme  Sound  (KANE);  Inglefield  Gulf: 
Bowdoin  Bay  (WETHERILL);  Foulke  Fjord:  Reindeer  Point  (222,  1465). 

Woodsia  glabella,  R.  BR. 

W.  glabella,  SIMMONS,  Fl.  Ellesm.  ;  W.  ilvensis  var.  glabella,  OSTEN- 
FELD,  Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl. 

Only  found  in  Foulke  Fjord,  where  it  grew  sparingly  in  the  fissures 
of  rock  above  Reindeer  Point.  Perhaps,  however,  the  above  mentioned 
statement  of  DURAND  may  have  reference  to  this  species. 

Occurrence.     S.  Foulke  Fjord  (1491). 


1  GELERT  in  OSTENFELD.  Fl.  Arct,  p.  5,  gives  the  northern  limit  in  Greenland  of  this 
fern  as  78°  30',  which  must  be  a  mistake  as  he  only  quotes  WETHERILL  and  his 
locality  lies  about  one  degree  to  the  south. 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.    109 


List  of  literature  not  quoted  in  "The  Vascular  Plants  in  the 

Flora  of  Ellesmereland",  and  forming  an  Appendix 

to  the  bibliography  given  there. 


BESSELS,  E.,  L'expedition  polaire  americaine,  sous  les  ordres  du  Capitaine  HALL. 

Bull,  de  la  Soc.  de  Geographic.     Ser.  6,  T.  9.     Paris  1875.      (Exp.  Pol.  Amer.) 

Die  amerikanische  Nordpol-Expedition.    Leipzig  1879.         (Amer.  Nordpol-Exp.) 
DAHLSTEDT,  H.,  Arktiska  och  alpina  arter  inom  formgruppen  Taraxacum  cerato- 

phorum  (Led.)  DC.    Arkiv  f.  Bot.  5.    Stockholm  1906.  (Tarax.  ceratoph.) 

DAWSON,  G.  M.,  Notes  to  accompany  a  geological  map  of  the  Northern  portion 

of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.     Geol.  a.  Nat. 

Hist.  Survey  of  Canada,  Part  R.  Ann.  Rep.  1886.     Montreal  1887.      (Geol  Map) 
DICKIE,  G.,  Notes  on  Flowering  Plants  and  Algae,  collected  during  the  Voyage 

of  the  "Isabel".     In  INGLEFIELD,  Summer  Search.  (Not.  ft.  pi.) 

FRIES,  E.,  Flora  Hallandica.     Lund  1817-18.  (Fl.  Hall.) 

GMELIN,  C.  C.,    Flora  badensis,    alsatica    et    confinium    regionum.       Karlsruhe 

1805- 1826.  (Fl.  Bad.) 

GMELIN,  J.  G.,  Flora  Sibirica.     Petersburg  1747-1769.  (Fl.  Sibir.) 

GEIKIE,  J.,  The  Great  Ice  Age  and  its  relation  to  the  antiquity  of  Man.     Ed.  3 

London  1894.  (Great  Ice  Age) 

GOODENOUGH,  S.,  Observations  on  the  British  Species  of  Carex.    Transact.  Lin. 

Soc.  II.     London  1794.  (06s.  Br.  Carex) 

HANDEL-MAZETTI,  H.  v.,  Monographic  der  Gattung  Taraxacum.    Leipzig  &  Wicn 

1907.  (Mew.  Gatt.  Tarax.) 

HAYES,  J.  J.,    An   Arctic   boat-journey  in  the  autumn  of  1854.     London  1860. 

(Arct.  boat-journ.) 

—     Communication  to  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  Philadelphia.    Pro- 
ceed. Amer.  Philos.   Soc.,.  8.     Philadelphia  1861  (?),  pp.  383-393. 

( Communication) 

HUDSON,  W.,  Flora  Anglica.     Ed.  II.     London  1778.  (Fl.  Angl.) 

INGLEFIELD,  E.  A.,   A  Summer   Search  for  Sir  John  Franklin;  with  a  peep  into 

the  Polar  Basin.     London  1853.  (Summer  Search) 

KANE,  E.  K.,   The  U.  S.  Grinnell  Expedition   in   Search  of  Sir  John   Franklin. 

New  York  1854.  (7  Grinnell  Exp.) 

Arctic  Explorations:    The    Second  Grinnell  Expedition   in  Search  of  Sir 

John  Franklin,  1853,  54,  55.     Philadelphia  &  London  1856.  (Arct.  Explor.) 

KRUUSE,  C.,  List  of  Phanerogams  and  Vascular  Cryptogams  found  in  the  Ang- 

magsalik  District  on  the  East    coast  of  Greenland  between  65°  30'  and 

66°  20'  lat.  N.     Medd.  om  Gronl.  30.     K0benhavn  1906.  (List  Angmags.) 

LINDBERG,  H.,   Om   de   i   Finland  forekommande    Montiaformerna.     Medd.  Soc. 

Fauna  et  Flora  fenn.,  27.     Helsingfors  1901.  (Finl.  Montiaf.) 

MARKHAM,  A.  H.,  A  whaling  cruise  to  Baffin's  Bay  and    the    Gulf  of  Boothia. 

London  1874.  (What.  Cruise) 

MICHAUX,  A.,  Flora  Boreali-Americana.     Paris  1820.  (Fl.  Bor.  Amer.) 


110  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

NATHORST,  A.  G.,  Nachtrage  zu  den  "NoHzen  tiber  die  Phanerogamen-flora  GrOn- 
lands  im  Norden  von  Melville  Bay  (76°-82°)".  Englers  Jahrb.,  Bd.  7. 
Leipzig  1886.  (Nachtr.) 

OSTENFELD,  C.  H.,  Plantes  recoltees  a  la  cote  Nord-Est  du  GrSnland.  Due  d'On- 
LEANS,  Croisiere  Oceanographique  accomplie  a  bord  de  la  Belgica  dans  la 
mer  du  GrSnland  1905.  Bruxelles  1907.  (Plantes  N.  E.  Gronl.) 

REICHENBACH,  H.  G.  L.,  Flora  germanica  excursoria.    Leipzig  1830—33.    (Fl.  germ,  exc.) 

RUPRECHT,  F.  J.,  Flores  Samojedorum  cisuralensium.  Beitr.  zu  Pflanzenkunde 
d.  Russ.  Reiches,  herausg.  v.  d.  Kais.  Acad.  d.  Wissensch.,  II.  Peters- 
burg 1845.  (Fl.  Samojed.  cisural.) 

SIMMONS,  H.  G.,  Remarks  about  the  relations  of  the  floras  of  the  Northern 
Atlantic,  the  Polar  Sea,  and  the  Northern  Pacific.  Beih.  z.  Botan.  Cen- 
tralbl.  Bd.  19,  Abt.  2.  Leipzig  1905.  (Relations  of  floras) 

—     The  Vascular  Plants  in   the   Flora   of  Ellesmereland.     Rep.  Sec.  Norw. 

Arct.  Exp.,  No.  2.    Kristiania  1906.  (Fl.  Ellesm.) 

SUTHERLAND,  P.  C.,  Journal  of  a  Voyage  in  Baffin's  Bay  and  Barrow  Straits, 

in  the  years  1850—51.     London  1852.  (Voyage) 

TORREY,  J.,  A  Flora  of  the  Northern  and  Middle  sections  of  the  United  States,  I. 

New  York  1824.  (Fl.  Unit.  States) 

WOLF,  T.,  Monographic  der  Gattung  Potentilla.     Bibl.  Botan.    Stuttgart    1908. 

(Mon.  Gatt  Potent.) 


Printed  24.  april  1909. 

C 


1898-1902.  No.  16.]     FLOW.  PLANTS  AND  FERNS  OF  N.-W.  GREENLAND.     Ill 


Errata. 


P.  10,  line  17  stands  "avay"  for  "away", 

•  13,     „        1       —       "Journal"  „     "journal", 

•  16,     „     29  "exluded"  „     "excluded", 

•  18,     „     29  "breath"  „     "breadth", 

•  22,     „     30  "the  number  for"  to  be  excluded, 

•  24,     „      10  stands  "Renselaer"  for  "Rensselaer", 

•  32,    „     17      - 

•  39,     „     32       —       "Ameircan"  „     "American", 

•  45,     „       1       —       "aquatillis"  „     "aquatilis", 

•  45,    „     10      —      "arenosa"  „    "arenicola", 

•  72,  note  "Expl."  „     "Explor.", 

•  76,  line    3       —  „ 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  17. 


HANS  KLER: 


ON  THE  BOTTOM  DEPOSITS 


FROM 


THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION  IN  THE  "FRAM" 


AT   THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF   SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS  SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.W.BR0GGER 

1909 


Introduction. 

An  order  to  give  an  account  of  the  occurrence  of  Foraminifera  in 
the  waters  explored  by  the  2nd  Fram  Expedition,  I  have  investigated 
some  bottom  samples  and  zoological  material  collected  during  this  Ex- 
pedition at  a  number  of  places,  more  especially  in  the  northern  part  of 
Jones  Sound,  along  Kong  Oscars  Land,  and  partly  also  near  North 
Devon. 

The  bottom  samples  are  from  the  following  stations: 

1)  The  Winter  harbour,   Havne  Fjord.     Depth  45  fathoms.     July 
24th,  1900. 

2)  The  west  side  of  the  mouth  of  Stor  Valley.     Depth  10  fathoms. 
July  26th,  1900. 

3)  Sjopolse  Neess.     Depth  15—25  fathoms.     August  4th,  1900. 

4)  North    of   North    Devon.     West  of  Kent.      Lat.  76°  41.5'   N., 
Long.  92°  W.     Depth  55  fathoms.     August  20th,  1900. 

5)  Forvisnings  Valley.    Depth  2-20  fathoms.   September  19th,  1900. 

6)  The  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord.     Depth  15  fathoms.    September 
20th,  1900. 

7)  The  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord.      Depth  3 — 20  fathoms.     Sept- 
ember 20th,  1900. 

8)  The  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord.     Depth  1 — 2  fathoms.     August 
2nd,  1901. 

9)  Gaase  Fjord.     Depth  7  fathoms.     August  16th,  1901. 

10)  Gaase  Fjord.    August  30th,  1901. 

Only  six  of  the  bottom  samples  contained  mud,  namely  Nos.  2,  4, 
5,  6,  7  and  8;  and  of  these  Nos.  5  and  6  were  very  small.  Only  four 
of  the  bottom  samples  were  large  enough  to  be  treated  by  Dr.  MADSEN'S 
method1.  The  mud  contained  sand,  pebbles  and  various  animals. 


1  V.  MADSEN.    Istidens  Foraminiferer  i  Danmark  og  Holsten.     Copenhagen,  1895. 


HANS  KLER.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


The  remaining  samples  from  the  bottom  contained  stones  and  vari- 
ous specimens  of  animals,  especially  Bryozoa  and  Crustacea. 

Dr.  V.  MADSEN  has  assisted  me  in  the  examination  of  some  of 
the  Foraminifera,  for  which  ready  assistance  I  would  here  express  my 
thanks. 

The  depths  from  which  the  bottom  samples  have  been  taken  are 
generally  small,  seldom  exceeding  25  fathoms,  only  2  being  taken  from 
somewhat  greater  depths,  namely  45  and  55  fathoms. 

The  fact  that  the  bottom  samples,  even  in  shallow  water  from  1  or 
2  fathoms  down  to  25  fathoms  and  more,  consisted  of  fine  mud,  seems 
to  indicate  that  the  waters  were  land-locked,  and  with  slack  currents. 


The  Bottom  Deposits. 

July  24th,  1900.  The  Winter  harbour,  Havne  Fjord.  Depth  45  fa- 
thoms. Small  stones  with  adherent  specimens  of  Foraminifera: 

Truncatulina  lobatula  (cc)1 
akneriana  (cc) 
orbignyana  (r). 

July  26th,  1900.  The  west  side  of  the  mouth  of  Stor  Valley.  Depth 
10  fathoms.  Grey  mud  with  Ophiura  sp.  and  Mollusca:  Area  glad- 
alls  (r),  Saxicava  ardica  (r),  Modiolaria  corrugata  (r),  Astarte  sp.  (r). 
Numerous  specimens  of  Forminifera: 

Haplophragmium  canariense  (r) 
glomeratum  (r) 
nanum  (r) 

Verneuilina  pygmaea  (r) 
Valvulina  fusca  (r) 
Spiroplecta  biformis  (r) 
Textularia  williamsoni  (r) 
Nodulina  arctica  (r) 

gracilis  (r)2 
Uvigerina  pygmaea  (r) 
Cassidulina  crassa  (r) 
Bolivina  punctata  (r) 


1  cc  indicates  a  great  number  of  specimens,  c  numerous,  r  a  few  or  a  single  one. 

2  See  Synopsis   of  the   Norwegian  Marine  Thalamophora.     Report  on  Norwegian 
Fishery  and  Marine  Investigations,  Vol.  1,  No.  7.    Kristiania,  1900. 


1898-1902.  No.  17.]  ON  THE  BOTTOM  DEPOSITS. 


Virgulina  schreibersiana  (c) 
Nodosaria,  young  sp.  (r) 
Cornuspira  foliacea  (c) 
Quinqueloculina  subrotunda  (r) 
Truncatulina  akneriana  (c) 
Nonionina  scapha  (c) 

stelligera  (c) 

Polystomella  striatopunctata  (r) 
Pulvinulina  karsteni  (r) 
Polymorphina  compressa  (r). 

August  4th,  1900.  Sj0polse  Naess.  Depth  15—25  fathoms.  Small 
stones.  Foraminifera : 

Truncatulina  lobatula  (c) 

akneriana  (c) 
Discorbina  globularis  (c) 
Haplophragmium  canariense  (c) 

August  20th,  1900.  Lat.  76°  41.5'  N.,  Long.  93°  W.  North  of  North 
Devon.  West  of  North  Kent.  -  Depth  55  fathoms.  Grey  mud  with  few 
Foraminifera : 

Spiroplecta  biformis  (cc) 
Haplophragmium  glomeratum  (r) 

nanum  (r) 

Astrorhiza  arenaria  (r) 
Rhabdammina  sp.  (r) 
Reophax  difflugiiformis  (r) 
Quinqueloculina  seminulum  (r) 

September  19th,  1900.  Forvisnings  Valley.  Depth  2—20  fathoms. 
Clay  and  pebbles.  Foraminifera: 

Haplophragmium  canariense  (c) 
Discorbina  araucana  (c) 
Polystomella  arctica  (c)1 

striatopunctata  var.  incerta  (c) 
Nonionina  stelligera  (c). 


1    See  Om  Kvartaertidens  marine  avleiringer  ved  Tromso.     Troms0  Museums  aars 
hefter,  25,  1908.     Tromso.     p.  44.     English  summary. 


HANS  KIJER.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


September  20th,  1900.  The  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord.  Depth  15 
fathoms.  Soft,  brown  clay,  with  numerous  animals  and  plants,  as  also 
pebbles. 

Mollusca:  Nucula  tenuis,  Modiolaria,  Astarte,  Saxicava,  Leda, 
Margarita. 

Ophiura  sp.,  Spirorbis  sp.  Isopoda.  Ostracoda.  Diatomacea.  Green 
algae  with  adherent  Bryozoa  and  Foraminifera : 

Hyperammina  nodulosa  (c) 
Haplophragmium  canariense  (c) 
cassis  (r) 
glomeratum  (c) 
nanum  (r) 

Saccammina  socialis  (r) 
Verneuilina  pygmaea  (c) 
Spiroplecta  biformis  (cc) 
Textularia  Williamsonii  (cc) 
Nodulina  arctica  (r) 
gracilis  (r) 

Ammodiscus  gordialis  (r) 
Virgulina  schreibersiana  (r) 
Polymorphina  lactea  (r) 
acuta  (r) 
Cassidulina  crassa  (c) 

laevigata  (r) 

Nodosaria  calomorpha  (r) 
Lag&na  striata  (r) 
Pullenia  bulloides  (c) 
Quinqueloculina  seminulum  (c) 
subrotunda  (r) 
arenacea  (r) 
Patellina  corrugata  (c) 
Truncatulina  lobatula  (c) 

akneriana  (c) 
Pulvinulina  punctulata  (cc) 

karstenii  (r) 
Polystomella  arctica  (c) 

striatopunctata  var.  incerta  (c). 


1898-1902.  No.  17.]  ON  THE  BOTTOM  DEPOSITS. 


September  20th.  1900.  Depth  3—20  fathoms.  Clay,  pebbles  and 
shells  of  Mollusca.  Foraminilera: 

Tholosina  vescicularis  (c) 

Nodulina  scorpiura  (r) 

Truncatulina  akneriana  (r) 

Discorbina  araucana  (r) 

Polystomella  striatopunctata  var.  incerta  (cc). 

August  2nd,  1901.  The  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord.  Depth  1—2  fa- 
thoms. Soft,  brown  clay,  with  pebbles,  sand  and  Mollusca: 

Portlandia  arctica  (r),  Nucula  tennis  (r),  some  small  Mollusca. 

Annellida.  Copepoda.  Fishes'  eggs.  Ostracoda.  A  great  number  of 
worms,  especially  Nernatoda,  and  also  numerous  fibres  of  plants.  Fora- 
minifera: 

Haplophragmium  canariense  (r) 
Spiroplecta  biformis  (r) 
Nodulina  gracilis  (r) 
Virgulina  schreibersiana  (c) 
Cassidulina  laevigata  (r) 

crassa  (c) 

Polymorphina  lactea  (c) 
Quinqueloculina  seminulum  (r) 
Pulvinulina  punctulata  (r) 
Nonionina  depressula  (r) 
Polystomella  striatopunctata  var.  incerta  (cc) 

August  16th,  1901.     Gaase  Fjord.     Depth  7  fathoms.   Foraminifera: 

Truncatulina  lobatula  (c) 

akneriana  (c) 
Discorbina  araucana  (c) 

August  30th,  1901.  Gaase  Fjord,  Ascidiee  and  brown  algee  with 
adherent  specimens  of  Foraminifera: 

Polystomella  striatopunctata  var.  incerta  (cc) 
Truncatulina  akneriana  (r) 
Patellina  corrugata  (r) 
Quinqueloculina  subrotunda  (r). 


8  HANS  KLER.    ON  THE  BOTTOM  DEPOSITS.       [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Remarks  on  some  of  the  Species  of  Foraminifera. 

On  looking  at  the  list  of  the  Foraminifera  from  the  stations,  it  will 
be  seen  that  very  few  of  the  species  appear  in  any  quantity.  Among 
the  characteristic  species  of  more  general  occurrence  may  be  mentioned 
the  large  and  beautiful  forms,  Hyperammina  nodulosa  and  Haplo- 
phragmium  canariense,  of  which  vigorous  and  well  developed  speci- 
mens appear  in  Gaase  Fjord.  Spiroplecta  biformis,  Nodulina  arctica 
and  Textularia  Williamsonii  are  also  species  that  are  found  in  the 
same  localities  in  comparatively  large  numbers.  Among  the  adherent 
forms  occurring  are  the  cosmopolitan  Truncatulina  sp.  and  the  Poly- 
stomella  striatopunctata  var.  incerta. 

The  arctic  nature  of  the  fauna  is  shown  by  the  occurrence  of  large 
and  sometimes  well-developed  specimens  of  Polystomella  arctica,  and 
further  by  the  small,  but  characteristic  forms,  Cassidulina  crassa  and 
Pulvinulina  karsteni.  Spiroplecta  biformis  and  Nodulina  arctica  are 
also  of  arctic  origin. 

The  rare  occurrence  of  the  Lagena  forms  is  to  be  noted.  I  found, 
in  fact,  only  a  single  specimen  of  Lagena  (L.  striata)  in  these  bottom 
samples,  this  being  in  mud  from  the  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord,  from  a 
depth  of  15  fathoms.  The  Lagena  species  are  usually  well  represented 
in  the  arctic  and  boreal  bottom  deposits. 


Printed   18.  May  1909. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  18. 


G.  O.  SARS: 


CRUSTACEA 


(WITH  12  AUTOGR.  PLATES) 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


-ooo- 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1909 


Introduction. 

JLhe  collections  of  Crustacea  brought  home  from  the  2nd  Fram 
Expedition  are  rather  extensive,  having  been  made  in  many  different 
places  and  at  different  times.  As  a  rule,  only  the  larger  and  more 
conspicuous  forms  were  collected,  and  all  these  have  turned  out  to 
belong  to  well-known  arctic  and  circumpolar  species;  but  by  a  careful 
examination  of  the  bottom-residue  of  the  large  collecting  bottles,  I  have 
been  enabled  also  to  acquire  some  information  concerning  the  smaller 
forms  of  Isopoda,  Amphipoda  and  Cumacea,  as  also  the  Ostracoda 
and  Copepoda.  Of  the  last-named  order  there  are  some  apparently 
new  species,  which  will  be  described  and  figured  in  the  present  Report, 
together  with  a  few  previously  recorded,  but  still  less  perfectly  known 
species.  I  give  below  a  list  of  the  several  places  (with  dates)  in  which 
Crustacea  were  collected. 

1898. 

April  30.  Godthaab  (fresh  water). 

July  10. 

„  29.  Egedes  Minde. 

„  31.  Disco. 

Aug.  4  &  5.  Upernivik,  4—13  fath. 

Aug.  16.  Faulke  Fjord  (fresh  water). 

„  18.  Rice  Strait.    2—5  fath. 

„  19.  Cape  Sabine,  Camp  Clay. 

„  —  Bay  at  Rice  Strait. 

„  22.  Fresh  water. 

„  24.  Rice  Strait. 

a          26. 

„       29.     Cape  Rutherford  (fresh  water). 
Oct.     11.     Haven  in  Rice  Strait. 


G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


1899. 

June    17.  Winter  haven  (brackish). 

„      30.  Rice  Strait. 

July     21.  Winter  haven. 

„      24.  Southern  end  of  Penn  Island,  6  —  10  fath. 

July  29  &  30.  Winter  haven,  6  fath. 

Sept.     3.  The  haven. 

„        5.  The  Bay  (pelagic). 

1900. 

March  7.  Bay  south  of  Sjepolse  Ness,  15—20  fath. 

June   22.  The  skerry,  5  fath. 

„      23.  Pelagic  haul,  55  fath. 

July    12.  Bay  at  Last  End. 

„      22.  Winter  haven,  6—30  fath. 

„      23.          do.,  6—20  fath. 

„      24.         do.,  45  fath. 

„       26.  Western  side  of  the  mouth  of  Stordalen,  6-10  f.,  clay. 

„      28.  Outside  0dedalen,  20  fath. 

„      30. 

Aug.      1.  Outside  the  mouth  of  Stordalen,  10  fath. 

„        3.         do.,  2—20  fath. 

„        7.  0stcap,  10—25  fath. 

„        7.  Sj0p0lsc  Ness,  15  —  25  fath. 

„        8.  Winter  haven,  15  fath. 

Sept.  19.  Outside  the  Forvisnings  Valley,  2—20  fath. 

„      20.  Upper  part   of  Gaase  Fjord,  3—20  fath,   clay   and 
gravels. 

1901. 

June   28.  Mouth  of  Hvalros  Fjord. 

„       29.  Off  the  camping-ground. 

July      5.  The  sound. 

„        8.  Ren  Bay,  Ellesmere  Land. 

„        9. 

„       18.  Mouth  of  Gaase  Fjord,  60  m. 

Aug.     2.  Upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord. 

„       16.  About  7  fath. 

„       30.  8  m.,  clay  and  gravel,  with  algae. 


181)8-1902.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA. 


1902. 

July   5.  Outside  Havhest  Fjord. 

„     11.        do.,          3-7  fath. 

„     17.  East  of  the  great  glacier,  North  Devon,  ca.  3  fath. 

„     19.  North  Devon,  off  the  camping-ground,  3-7  fath. 

Aug.  4.  Gaase  Fjord,   north  of  the  peninsula,   10—15  fath. 

As  all  these  localities  lie  within  the  same  restricted  area,  I  do  not 
consider  it  necessary,  as  a  rule,  to  enumerate  all  the  places  where  each 
species  was  actually  found. 

In  addition  to  the  above-mentioned  collections,  a  series  of  plankton- 
samples  were  taken  by  the  aid  of  a  fine-meshed  tow-net  during  the 
voyage  up  Baffin's  Bay.  In  some  of  these  samples  a  number  of  pelagic 
Crustacea  were  found,  and  these  will  be  mentioned  together  with  the 
other  species  enumerated  below. 


G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


Systematic  List  of  Species. 


Order  JDecapoda. 

Suborder  CaricLa. 

Fam.  Crangom'dse. 

1.  Sclerocrangon  boreas  (Pmpps). 

Numerous  specimens  of  this  well-known  arctic  form,  the  greater 
number  of  them  immature,  are  in  the  collection,  having  been  taken  in 
many  different  localites  within  the  area  investigated. 

2.  Sabinea  septemcarinata  (SAB.). 

Of  this  form  only  2  specimens  were  secured,  both  taken  on  Sept. 
20,- 1900,  in  the  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord,  at  a  depth  of  3 — 25  fathoms. 

Fam.  Hippolytidse. 

3.  Spirontocaris  gro'nlandica  (FABR.). 

Several  specimens  of  this  large  and  distinct  arctic  species  were 
taken  in  10  different  places. 

4.  Spirontocaris  polar  if  (SAB.). 

This  form  was  found  in  great  abundance  in  most  of  the  localilies 
investigated.  Though  undoubtedly,  like  the  preceding  species,  of  arctic 
origin,  it  extends  along  the  whole  Norwegian  coast,  as  far  south  as  the 
Christiania  Fjord.  On  the  other  hand,  it  has  not  yet  been  found  off 
the  British  Isles. 

5.  Spirontocaris  Gaimardi  (Enw.). 

Some  specimens  of  this  well-known  form  were  taken  in  7  different 
places.  Like  the  preceding  species,  it  is  distributed  along  the  whole 
Norwegian  coast,  as  far  south  as  Egersund. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA. 


6.  Spirontocaris  spinus  (Sows.). 

Of  this  form  only  3  specimens  were  secured,  2  of  them  having 
been  taken  on  July  22,  1900,  in  the  Winter  haven,  6—20  fath.,  and  the 
third  on  June  28,  1901,  at  the  mouth  of  Hvalros  Fjord. 

7.  Spirontocaris  turgid 'a  (KROYER). 

Numerous  specimens  of  this  form  were  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the 
bay  at  Last  End.  It  was  also  found  occasionally  in  8  other  places.  Off 
the  Norwegian  coast  this  form  is  wholly  restricted  to  the  arctic  region. 


Order  Schizopoda. 

Suborder  Mysidacea. 

• 

Fam.  Mysidse. 
8.    Mysis  oculata  (FABR.) 

This  arctic  form  was  taken  in  9  different  places,  both  at  the  bottom 
and  near  the  surface.  In  the  latter  case  the  specimens  were  chiefly 
immature. 


Order  Cumacea. 
Fam.  Leuconidse. 

9.  Eudorella  truncatula  (Sp.  BATE). 

A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  form,  not  yet  recorded  from 
the  arctic  region,  was  found  in  the  bottom-residue  of  one  of  the  bottles 
containing  collections  taken  on  July  12,  1909,  from  the  bay  at  Last  End. 

Fam.  Diaatylidse. 

10.  Diastylis  scorpioides  (LEPECHIN). 

Two  specimens  of  this  genuine  arctic  form  were  taken,  one  on 
Aug.  26,  1898,  in  Rice  Strait,  the  other  on  July  26,  1900,  off  the  mouth 
of  Stordalen. 


G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


Fam.  Campylaspidse. 
11.     Campylaspis  carinata,  HANSEN. 

A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  peculiar  form,  described  by  Dr. 
HANSEN  from  Disco  Island,  was  found  on  Sept.  19,  1900,  outside  the 
Forvisnings  Valley. 


Order  Isopoda. 
Suborder  Chelifera. 

Fam.  Tanaidse. 

12.  Heterotanais  h'micola  (HARGER). 

Some  specimens  of  this  form,  also  recorded  by  Dr.  HANSEN  from 
the  coast  of  Greenland,  were  picked  up  from  the  bottom-residue  of  3 
of  the  bottles. 

13.  Leptognathia  longiremis  (LILLJEB.). 

A  single  specimen,  apparently  belonging  to  this  species,  occurred 
in  a  bottle  with  collections  taken  on  July  18,  1901,  from  the  mouth 
of  Gaase  Fjord. 

14.  Cryptocope  arctica,  HANSEN. 

Three  specimens  of  this  distinct  species,  first  described  by  Dr. 
HANSEN  from  Novaja  Sembla,  were  found  in  the  same  bottle  as  the 
preceding  species. 


Suborder  Valvifera. 

Fam.  Arcturidse. 
15.     Arcturus  baffini,  SAB. 

This  characteristic  arctic  form  was  taken  in  no  less  than  12  dif- 
ferent places.  Among  the  specimens  there  are  some  in  which  the 
dorsal  spines  are  much  reduced  in  size,  thus  apparently  forming  a 
transition  to  the  form  recorded  by  the  present  author  under  the  name 
of  A.  tuber  osus. 


1898-1902.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA. 


Fam.  IdotheiddB. 

16.    Mesidotea  Sabini  (KROYER). 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  form  was  taken  on  Aug.  4,  1902,  in  Gaase 
Fjord,  north  of  the  peninsula,  from  a  depth  of  10 — 15  fathoms.  Accord- 
ing to  Miss  H.  RICHARDSON,  the  2  arctic  species  Idothea  Sabini  and 
/.  entomon  cannot  be  referred  either  to  the  genus  Chiridotea  or  to 
Glyptonotus,  for  which  reason  the  new  genus  Mesidotea  has  been 
established  by  that  distinguished  naturalist. 


Suborder  Asellota. 

Fam.  Janiridse. 
17.     Janira  tricornis  ( 


Some  few,  more  or  less  mutilated  specimens  of  this  arctic  species 
were  picked  up  from  the  bottom-residue  of  3  or  4  bottles. 

Fam.  Munnidse. 

18.  Munna  Fabricif,  KROYER. 

Several  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in  the  bottom-residue  of 
5  of  the  bottles. 

19.  Munna  Kroyeri,  GOODSIR. 
Found  together  with  the  preceding  species. 

Fam.  Munnopsidse. 

20.  Munnopsis  typica,  M.  SARS. 

A  single  specimen  of  this  characteristic  form  was  taken  on  Aug.  2, 
1901,  in  the  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord. 

21.  Eurycope  mutica,  G.  0.  Sars. 

A  few  specimens  of  a  small  Eurycope,  apparently  referable  to  this 
species,  were  picked  up  from  the  bottom-residue  of  a  bottle  containing 
collections  taken  on  July  30,  1900. 


10  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Suborder  Epicarida. 

Fam.  Dajidse. 

22.  Da,  jus  mysidis,  KROYER. 

Found,   as   usual,    attached   to   the  interior  of  the  marsupial  pouch 
of  My  sis  oculata  (FABR.). 

Order  Ampliipoda. 

Fam.  Hyperiidse. 

23.  Hyperia  galba  (MONT.). 

Several    specimens  of  this  form,    young  and  adult,   were   collected 
on  Aug.  18,  1898,  off  Cape  Sabine. 

24.  Enthemisto  Hbellula  (MANDT.). 

Only  immature  specimens   of   this   common   arctic  form  are  in  the 
collection,  these  having  been  taken,  as  usual,  near  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

Fam.  Lysianassidse. 

25.  Socarnes  bidentatus  (Sp.  BATE). 

Solitary   specimens    of   this  magnificent  form   were   taken  in  4  dif- 
ferent places. 

26.  Anonyx  nugax  (Pnipps). 
Taken  in  6  different  places. 

27.  Hoplonyx  cicada  (FABR.). 

One  specimen   only   of   this  common   form   was  taken  on  June  29, 
1901,  outside  the  camping-ground. 

28.  Tryphosa  compressa,  G.  0.  SARS. 

A  solitary    specimen    of  this   form    was  taken   on  July  8,  1901,  in 
Ren  Bay,  Ellesmere  Land. 


29.     Onesimus  Edwardsi  ( 
This  form  was  found  occasionally  in  4  different  places. 


1898-  1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  11 


30.  Pseudalibrotus  Httoralis  ( 

Several  specimens  of  this  common  arctic  form  are  in  the  collection, 
these  having  been  taken  both  at  the  bottom  and  near  the  surface  of 
the  sea. 

Fam.  Pontoporeiidse. 

31.  Pontoporeia  femorata,  KROYER. 

Some  specimens  of  this  form  were  taken  on  two  different  occasions 
in  the  bay  in  Rice  Strait. 

Fam.  Ampeliscidse. 

32.  Byblis  Gaimardi  (KR0YER). 
Taken  occasionally  in  4  different  places. 

33.  Haploops  tubicola  (LILLJEB.). 

Several  specimens  of  this  form  are  in  the  collection,  these  having 
been  taken  in  5  different  places.  In  one  of  these  localities,  the  haven 
in  Rice  Strait,  it  occurred  in  great  abundance. 

Fam.  Stegocephalidse. 

34.  Stegocephalus  infiatus  (KROYER). 

This  form  occurred  in  no  less  than  11  different  places,  and  in  one 
of  them,  the  bay  at  Land's  End,  it  was  found  in  considerable  abundance. 

Fam.  Stenothoidse. 

35.  Metopa  Bruzelii  (Goes). 

Found  in  great  abundance  on  Hydroida  from  Rice  Strait,  and  also 
found  in  the  bottom-residue  of  another  bottle. 

36.  Metopa  borealis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  form  was  found  in  the  bottom-residue 
of  a  bottle  with  collections  taken  on  July  18,  1801,  at  the  mouth  of 
Gaase  Fjord,  depth  about  60  m. 

37.  Metopa  Boecki,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Several  specimens  of  this  form,  not  yet  known  from  the  arctic 
region,  were  found  in  the  same  bottle  as  the  preceding  species. 


12  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

38.  Metopa  carinuta,  HANSEN. 

Of  this  peculiar  form,  first  described  by  Dr.  HANSEN  from  the  west 
coast  of  Greenland,  some  few  specimens  were  collected  on  July  27, 
1898,  at  Egedes  Minde.  Another  specimen  was  found  in  a  bottle  of 
specimens  taken  on  July  9,  1902,  in  Ren  Bay,  Ellesmere  Land. 

Fam.  Amphilochidse. 

39.  Amphilochus  manudens,  Sp.  BATE. 

A  solitary,  somewhat  defective  specimen  of  this  form  occurred  in 
a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  30,  1900. 

Fam.  Oediceridse. 

40.  Paroedicerus  lynceus  (M.  SARS). 

Two  specimens  of  this  form  are  in  the  collection,  one  taken  on 
July  30,  1900,  the  other  on  July  17,  1902,  east  of  the  great  glacier, 
North  Devon. 

41.  Acanthostepheia  Malmgreni  (Goes). 

This  large  and  conspicuous  arctic  form  was  found  in  5  different 
places,  in  some  of  them  rather  abundantly. 

Fam.  Paramphithoidse. 

42.  Paramphithoe  bicuspis  (KROYER). 

Three  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  on  Hydroida  taken 
on  Aug.  24,  1898,  in  Rice  Strait. 

Fam.  Epimeridse. 

43.  Acanthozone  cuspidata  (LEPECHIN). 

An  immature  specimen  of  this  characteristic  form  was  taken 
on  July  30,  1900. 

Fam.  Iphimediidse. 

44.  Odius  carinatus  (Sp.  BATE). 

Solitary  specimens  of  this  small,  but  easily  recognisable  form  were 
picked  up  from  the  bottom-residue  of  2  of  the  bottles. 


1898-19(12.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA. 


Fam.  Eusiridse. 

45.  Eusirus  cuspidatus,  KROYER. 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  arctic  form  was  taken  on  July  12,  1900, 
in  the  bay  at  Last  End. 

46.  Rhachotropis  aculeata  (LEPECHIN). 

Some    specimens   of  this  characteristic  arctic  form  are  in  the  col- 
lection, these  having  been  taken  in  3  different  places. 


Fam. 

47.  Calliopius  Rathkei  (ZADDAGH). 

Several  specimens  collected  on  July  31,  1899,  off  Disco  Island. 

48.  Pontogeneia  inermis,  KROYER. 
Found  occasionally  in  2  different  places. 

49.  Amphithopsis  glacialis,  HANSEN. 

Some  more  or  less  mutilated  specimens  of  this  genuine  arctic  form 
are  in  the  collection,  these  having  been  taken  in  5  different  places,  in 
some  cases  near  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

Fam.  Atylidse. 

50.  Atylus  carinatus  (FABR.). 

This  characteristic  arctic  form  was  taken  in  no  less  than  16  diffe- 
rent places,  in  some  of  them  rather  abundantly. 

Fam.  Gammaridse. 

51.  Gammarus  locust  a  LIN. 

Collected  in  7  different  places,  in  one  of  them  very  abundantly. 

52.  Amathilla  homari  (FABR.). 

Several  specimens  of  this  form  were  secured,  having  been  found 
in  5  different  places. 


14  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

53.  Amathilla  pingvis  (KROYER). 

This  genuine  arctic  form  was  also  taken  in  several  places. 

54.  Gammaracanthus  loricatus  (SAB.). 

Magnificent  specimens  of  this  characteristic  form  were  taken  from 
5  different  places. 

Fam.  Photidse.    • 

55.  Protomedeia  fasciata,  KROYER. 

Only  a  single  specimen  of  this  form  was  found  in  a  bottle  of 
specimens  taken  on  Aug.  2,  1901,  in  the  upper  part  of  Gaase  Fjord. 

Fam.  Podoceridse. 

56.  Ischyrocerus  angvipes  (KROYER). 

Four  specimens  of  this  common  arctic  form  were  taken  on  July  17, 
1902,  east  of  the  large  glacier,  North  Devon,  from  a  depth  of  about 
3  fathoms. 

57.  Ischyrocerus  minutus  (LILLJEB.). 

Very  common  on  Hydroida  taken  on  Aug.  24,  1898,  in  Rice  Strait 
from  a  depth  of  4 — 20  fathoms;  also  found  occasionally  in  2  other  places. 

Fam.  Corophiidee. 

58.  Neohela  monstrosa,  BOECK. 

A  solitary,  somewhat  mutilated  specimen  of  this  peculiar  form  was 
taken  on  Aug.  2,  1901. 

Fam.  Caprelh'dee. 

59.  JtEgina  spinosissima  (STIMPS). 
Taken  occasionally  in  5  different  places. 

60.  Caprella  septentrionalis,  KROYER. 

Several  specimens  of  this  common  arctic  species  were  taken  on 
Aug.  4,  1898,  at  Upernivik. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  15 

Order  Branchiopoda. 

Suborder  F*liyllopoda. 

Fam.  Apodidse. 

61.  Lepidurus  arcticus  (PALLAS). 

This  arctic  form  was  collected  on  Aug.  16,  1898,  from  fresh- water 
swamps  on  Faulke  Fjord. 

62.  Lepidurus  apus  (Lin.). 

Two  specimens  of  this  species,  which  has  not  yet  been  recorded 
from  the  arctic  region,  were  taken  on  Aug.  29,  1898,  from  a  fresh- 
water swamp  at  Gape  Rutherford. 

Fam.  Branchipodidse. 

63.  Branchinecta  paludosa  (MULLER). 
Found  in  several  places,  both  in  fresh  and  brackish  water. 


Suborder  Cladocera. 

Fam.  Daphnidse, 
64.      Daphnia  pulex  (Ds  GEER). 

Numerous  dark-coloured  specimens  of  this  form,  most  of  them  with 
ephippia,  occurred  in  a  sample  taken  on  Aug.  22,  1898,  from  a  fresh- 
water pond  (the  exact  locality  not  indicated). 


Fam.  Polyphemidse. 
65.     Evadne  Nordmani,  LOVEN. 

Abundant  in   a   plankton-sample  taken    on    June  29,    1898,    in  lat. 
57°3l'N.,  long.  1°  29'  E. 


16  G.   0.   SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Order  Copepoda. 

Suborder  Calanoida. 
Fam.  Calanidse. 

66.  Calanus  finmarchicus  (GUNNER.). 

This  common  species  occurred  abundantly  in  plankton-samples  from 
many  different  places. 

67.  Calanus  hyperboreus,  KROYER. 
Found  occasionally  together  with  the  preceding  species. 

Fam.  Euchsetidse. 

68.  Euchseta  norvegica,  BOECK. 

Some  immature  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  one  of  the 
plankton-samples  taken  on  July  10,  1898. 

Fam.  Stephidse. 

69.  Stephos  arcticus,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(PI.  I.) 

Specific  Characters.  --  Female.  Body  somewhat  more  slender 
than  in  the  other  known  species,  with  the  anterior  division  oblong  oval 
in  form,  greatest  width  not  attaining  half  Ihe  length.  Last  pedigerous 
segment  not  wholly  confluent  with  the  preceding  one,  a  slight  notch  on 
each  side  indicating  the  limit  between  the  two;  lateral  lobes  rounded 
off  and  slightly  unequal,  the  right  one  somewhat  more  prominent  than 
the  left.  Urosome  slender  and  narrow,  attaining  almost  half  the  length 
of  the  anterior  division,  genital  segment  slightly  asymmetrical,  bulging 
somewhat  on  left  side.  Caudal  rami  about  the  length  of  the  last  seg- 
ment, apical  setae  rather  slender,  the  innermost  but  one  much  the 
longest,  and  attaining  about  half  the  length  of  the  body.  Anterior  an- 
tennas shorter  than  the  anterior  division  of  the  body,  and,  as  in  the 
other  species,  composed  of  24  articulations.  Posterior  antennae,  oral 
parts  and  natatory  legs  of  the  structure  characteristic  of  the  genus. 
Last  pair  of  legs  extremely  small,  with  the  distal  joint  conical  in  form 
and  scarcely  denticulated. 

Male  somewhat  smaller  than  female  and  of  more  slender  form, 
with  the  urosome  narrower  and  5-articulate,  2nd  segment  the  largest 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  17 

and  produced  below  to  a  conical  recurved  projection.  Anterior  antennae 
of  exactly  the  same  structure  as  in  female.  Last  pair  of  legs,  however, 
very  different  and  greatly  developed,  being  built  on  the  type  character- 
istic of  the  genus;  right  leg  more  slender  than  left,  and  consisting  of 
4  joints,  the  penultimate  one  long  and  slender,  sublinear  in  form,  and 
produced  at  the  end  outside  to  a  conical  projection,  terminal  joint 
divided  into  3  unequal  lappets,  the  middle  one  the  largest  and  some- 
what spoon-shaped;  left,  leg  angularly  bent  in  front  of  the  middle,  and 
distinctly  5-articulate,  penultimate  joint  large  and  tumid,  oval  in  form, 
and  provided  at  the  base  inside  with  a  slender  spiniform  appendage, 
outside  which  another  much  smaller  projection  occurs,  lower  face  pro- 
vided, in  front  of  the  middle,  with  a  rounded  projecting  tubercle,  ter- 
minal joint  somewhat  club-shaped,  and  provided  at  the  end  outside  with 
about  6  lanceolate,  leaf-like  appendages,  tip  rounded  off  and  fringed 
with  a  comb-like  series  of  delicate,  somewhat  compressed  spinules. 

Length  of  adult  female  1.20  mm.,  of  male  1.05  mm. 

Remarks.  —  In  its  external  appearance  this  form  somewhat 
resembles  61.  Scotti,  G.  0.  SARS,  but  is  of  larger  size  and  more  slender 
shape.  It  also  differs  conspicuously  both  from  this  and  the  other  known 
species  in  the  structure  of  the  last  pair  of  legs  in  both  sexes. 

Occurrence.  —  One  female  and  2  male  specimens  of  this  form 
were  found  in  a  bottle  containing  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in. 
the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Fam.  Centropagidae. 

70.  Centropages  hamatns  (LILLJEB.). 

Found  rather  abundantly  in  a  plankton-sample  taken  on  June  29, 
1898,  in  lat.  57°  31'  N.,  long.  1°  29'  E. 

Fam.   Temoridse. 

71.  Temora  longicornis  (MuLL.). 

Found  in  the  same  sample  in  which  the  preceding  species  occurred. 

Fam.  Pontellidse. 

72.  Anomalocera,  Paters oni  (TEMPLT.). 

Several  specimens  of  this  characteristic  Atlantic  form  occurred  in 
the  same  sample  as  the  2  preceding  species. 


18  G.  0.   SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Fam.  Acartiidse. 

73.  Acartia  Clausi,  GIESBRECHT. 
Together  with  the  3  preceding  species. 

Suborder  Harpacticoida. 
Fam.  Misophriidse. 

74.  Misophria  pallida,  BOECK. 

Several  specimens  of  this  peculiar,  form  were  picked  up  from  the 
bottom-residue  of  4  different  bottles.  It  has  also  been  recorded  by  Dr. 
TH.  SCOTT  from  Franz  Josef  Land. 

Fam.  Ectinosomidse. 

75.  Ectinosoma  neglectum,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Not  unfrequent  in  the  bottom-residue  of  several  bottles. 

76.  Ectinosoma  melaniceps,  BOECK. 
Together  with  the  preceding  species,  rather  common. 

77.  Bradya  typica,  BOECK. 

Some  few   specimens  of  this   form  were  found  in  2  of  the  bottles. 

78.  Microsetella  norvegica  (BOECK). 

This  form  occurred  in  great  abundance  in  a  plankton-sample  taken 
on  July  10,  1898.  2  specimens  were  also  found  in  a  bottle  with 
collections  taken  on  June  26,  1899,  in  the  Winter  haven. 

Fam.  Harpacticidse. 

79.  Harpacticus  chelifcr  (MULLER). 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  species  was  taken  on  July  27,  1898, 
in  the  haven  of  Egedes  Minde. 

80.  Harpacticus  uniremis,  KROYER. 
Found  rather  frequently  in  5  different  bottles. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  19 

81.  Zaus  spinatus,  GOODSIK. 

This  form  also  occurred  in  i  different  bottles.  The  specimens 
agreed,  perfectly,  both  in  size  and  in  their  structural  details  with  the 
form  occurring  off  the  Norwegian  coast. 

82.  Zaus  Aurelii,  POPPE. 

(Pi.  II,  figs.  1-6). 

Zaus  Aurelii,  POPPE,  Ueber  die  von  Herrn  Dr.  ARTHUR  and  AUREL  KRAUSE 
im  nordlichen  stillen  Ocean  and  Behringsmeer  gesammelten  Copepoden. 
Arch.  f.  Naturgesch.  50.  Jahrg.  1.  Vol.  p.  286,  PI.  XX,  figs.  7-9,  PI.  XXI, 
figs.  5-15. 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  somewhat  less  ex- 
panded than  in  the  type  species,  the  anterior  division  being  oblong 
oval  in  form,  with  the  cephalic  segment  evenly  rounded  in  front. 
Rostral  projection  semicircular,  deflexed.  Urosome,  as  in  the  type 
species,  much  narrower  than  the  anterior  division,  lateral  expansions 
of  the  segments  not  much  produced.  Anterior  antennae  comparatively 
shorter  than  in  Z.  spinalus,  otherwise  of  a  very  similar  structure. 
Posterior  antennas  and  oral  parts  as  in  that  species.  1st  pair  of  legs 
with  the  rami.  comparatively  less  robust,  and  the  apical  claws  less 
thickly  clothed  with  cilia.  Natatory  legs  likewise  somewhat  more 
slender  in  shape.  Last  pair  of  legs  with  the  distal  joint  oblong  in 
form,  more  than  twice  as  long  as  it  is  broad,  and  somewhat  tapered 
at  the  end,  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  triangularly  produced. 
Ovisac  oblong  oval  in  form,  with  only  a  limited  number  of  ova. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.72  mm. 

.Remarks.  -  This  form  is  closely  related  to  Z.  spinatus  GOODSIR, 
but  is  of  considerably  larger  size,  and  has  the  anterior  division  of  the 
body  somewhat  less  expanded.  The  several  appendages  are  on  the 
whole  very  similar  to  those  in  the  type  species,  though  on  a  closer 
comparison,  some  slight  differences  may  be  found  to  occur.  The  last 
pair  of  legs  especially  differ  conspicuously  in  the  narrower  shape  of 
the  distal  joint  and  the  more  produced  inner  expansion  of  the  proxi- 
mal joint. 

Occurrence.  —  Some  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  together 
with  the  preceding  species  in  3  of  the  bottles. 

Distribution.  --  The  Pacific  in  lat.  55°  56'  N,  long.  154°  7'  W, 
on  Laminaria  and  Macrocystis  floating  at  the  surface  (POPPE);  Novaja 
Semlja  (SCOTT). 


20  G.  O.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

83.  Zaus  abbreviates,  G.  0.  SARS. 

This  form,  as  yet  only  known  from  the  Norwegian  coast,  was 
found  occasionally  together  with  the  preceding  species. 

84.  Zaus  Goodsiri,  BRADY. 

Two   specimens  only    of  this  large  and  distinct  species  were  found. 

Fam.  Porcellidiidse. 

85.  Porcellidium  fimbriatum,  GLAUS. 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  easily  recognisable  form  was  found  in 
a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  9,  1901. 

Fam.  Idyidae. 

86.  Psamathe  Arthur!  (POPPE). 

(PI.  II,  figs.  7-11). 

Stutellidium  Arthuri,   POPPE,   1.  c.   p.  291,    PI.  XXI,   figs.  1-4,    PI.  XXII. 
figs.  1-12. 

Specific  Characters.  -  Female.  Anterior  division  of  body 
broad  and  depressed,  with  the  lateral  parts  of  the  segments  lamellarly 
expanded  and  angular  behind.  Cephalic  segment  about  the  length  of 
the  4  succeeding  segments  combined,  rostral  projection  broad  and 
lamellar,  obtusely  truncated  at  the  end.  Penultimate  segment  of  meta- 
some  scarcely  narrower  than  the  preceding  ones,  and  having  the  hind 
edge  almost  straight.  Last  pedigerous  segment,  as  in  the  type  species, 
very  small  and  firmly  connected  with  the  1st  caudal  segment.  Uro- 
some  comparatively  shorter  than  in  the  type  species,  being  scarcely 
more  than  J/a  as  l°ng  as  the  anterior  division,  genital  segment  some- 
what dilated  and  much  larger  than  the  others.  Caudal  setae  slender 
and  elongated,  the  innermost  but  one  almost  as  long  as  the  whole  body. 
Anterior  antennae  resembling  in  structure  those  in  P.  longicauda,  the 
terminal  part  tapering  abruptly,  with  the  last  2  joints  narrow  linear 
in  form.  Posterior  antennae  and  oral  parts  exhibiting  the  structure 
characteristic  of  the  genus.  1st  pair  of  legs  almost  exactly  as  in  the 
type  species.  Natatory  legs  likewise  very  similar.  Last  pair  of  legs, 
however,  differing  more  conspicuously,  the  distal  joint  being  compara- 
tively shorter  and  less  densely  setous  on  the  edge,  tip  obliquely 
truncated. 

Length  of  adult  female  1.32  mm. 


1898-1902.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  21 

Remarks.  -  This  form  is  very  nearly  related  to  P.  longicauda 
PHILIPPI  (==  Scutellidium  thisboides  Glaus),  but  is  of  rather  larger  size 
and  differs  slightly  in  the  general  shape  of  the  body,  as  also  in  the 
structure  of  the  last  pair  of  legs.  The  form  recorded  by  TH.  SCOTT 
from  Franz  Josef  Land  as  Scutelldium  thisboides  GLS.  is  in  all  pro- 
bability the  present  species  and  not  that  of  GLAUS. 

Occurrence.  -  -  A  single  fully  adult  female  specimen  and  some 
immature  ones  of  this  form  were  found  in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken 
on  July  12,  1908,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Distribution.  —  Northern  part  of  the  Pacific  together  with  Zaus 
Aurelii  (POPPE);  Franz  Josef  Land  (SCOTT). 

87.  Machairopus  minutus,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Some  specimens  of  this  form,  described  by  the  present  author  from 
the  Norwegian  coast,  were  found  in  3  of  the  bottles. 

88.  Idysea  *  furcata  (BAIRD). 

Found  rather  abundantly  in  several  of  the  bottles. 

89.  Idysea  ensifera  (FISCHER). 

Several  specimens  of  this  form  were  also  found  in  the  bottles. 

90.  Idysea  gracilis,  SCOTT. 

Only  a  few  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in  one  of  the  bottles 
containing  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

91.  Idysea  finmarchica,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Of  this  species,  described  by  the  present  author  from  the  Finmark 
coast,  a  solitary  female  specimen  was  found  in  the  same  bottle  as 
the  preceding  species. 

92.  Idysea  infiata,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(Pi.  III). 

Specific  Characters.  Female.  Body  comparatively  short 
and  stout,  sub-pyriform  in  outline,  with  the  anterior  division  greatly  in- 
flated in  its  anterior  part.  Cephalic  segment  large  and  broad,  obtusely 
rounded  in  front,  with  the  rostral  projection  very  slight.  Epimeral  parts 


1  By  this  slight  change  (the  interposition  of  an  oe)  I  think  that  the  Philippian 
genus  may  be  retained.  The  name  Idya  had  been  previously  given  by 
BLAINVILLE  to  a  genus  of  Acalephre. 


G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


of  the  3  succeeding  segments  rounded  and  sub-contiguous;  penultimate 
segment  deeply  emarginated  behind.  Last  pedigerous  segment  very 
small.  Urosome  much  narrower  than  the  anterior  division  and  scarcely 
attaining  half  its  length,  genital  segment,  as  usual,  much  the  largest; 
last  segment  very  short.  Caudal  rami  likewise  short,  broader  than  they 
are  long,  and  transversely  truncated  at  the  end;  apical  seta3  unusually 
short  and  less  unequal  than  in  the  other  species,  the  inner  medial  seta 
but  little  longer  than  the  outer,  and  scarcely  exceeding  the  urosome  in 
length,  being  remarkably  dilated  for  the  greater  part  of  its  length;  inner- 
most seta  longer  than  the  outermost,  both  very  thin.  Anterior  antennae 
comparatively  short,  with  the  2nd  joint  much  the  largest,  the  2  suc- 
ceeding joints  gradually  smaller,  terminal  part  about  twice  the  length  of 
the  preceding  joint.  Posterior  antennae  rather  small,  but  otherwise  of 
normal  structure.  Mandibular  palp  with  the  inner  ramus  shorter  and 
stouter  than  the  outer.  Anterior  maxillipeds  with  the  terminal  claw 
very  strong  and  abruptly  bent  at  the  tip,  appendicular  lobe  extremely 
small  with  only  a  single  minute  bristle  at  the  tip.  Posterior  maxillipeds 
comparatively  more  powerful  than  in  the  other  species.  1st  pair  of 
legs  exhibiting  the  structure  characteristic  of  the  genus,  outer  ramus 
exceeding  half  the  length  of  the  inner,  and  having  the  penicillate  spines 
comparatively  thin,  inner  ramus  with  the  1st  joint  rather  dilated,  2nd 
joint  not  much  narrowed  and  scarcely  longer  than  the  1st,  last  joint 
very  small,  with  2  unequal  claws  at  the  tip,  the  inner  one  much  the 
larger  and  distinctly  penicillate.  Natatory  legs  very  fully  developed, 
with  the  rami,  especially  those  of  the  anterior  pairs,  rather  broad  and 
subequal  in  length ;  those  of  4th  pair,  however,  rather  more  slender.  Last 
pair  of  legs  not  much  produced,  distal  joint  lamellar,  oblong  oval  in 
form,  and  provided  at  the  end  with  4  comparatively  short  setae,  inner 
expansion  of  proximal  joint  short,  triangular,  and  tipped  with  2  unequal 
setae.  Ovisac  oblong  in  form,  and  extending  considerably  beyond  the 
tip  of  the  caudal  rami. 

Male,  as  usual,  much  smaller  and  more  slender  than  female,  and 
having  the  anterior  antennas  slightly  transformed,  subprehensile.  Last 
pair  of  legs  very  small,  with  the  inner  expansion  of  the  proximal  joint 
quite  obsolete.  Genital  lobes  each  with  a  strong  spine  and  two  small 
hair-like  bristles. 

Length  of  adult  female  about  1  mm. 

Remarks.  -  This  is  a  very  distinct  and  easily  recognisable  species, 
being  especially  distinguished  by  the  greatly  inflated  anterior  division  of 
the  body  and  the  unusually  short  caudal  setae. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  23 

Occurrence.  Several  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in 
the  bottom-residue  of  4  different  bottles.  In  one  of  them,  containing 
specimens  taken  on  July  30,  1900,  it  occurred  rather  plentifully. 

93.    Idyanthe  l  dilatata,  G.  0.  SARS. 

One  or  two  specimens  of  this  peculiar  form  occurred  in  a  bottle 
of  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 


Fam.  Thalestridse. 

94.  Thalestris  gibba  (KROYER). 

This  form  occurred  occasionally  in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken 
on  July  17,  1902,  east  of  the  great  glacier,  North  Devon,  from  a  depth 
of  about  3  fathoms. 

95.  Phyllothalestris  frigida  (SCOTT). 

(Pi.  IV). 

Thalestris  frigida,  TH.  SCOTT,  Marine  and  fresh  water  Crustacea  from 
Franz  Josef  Land.  Linn.  Soc.  Journ.  Zoology.  Vol.  XXVII,  p.  108,  PI.  7, 
figs.  17-23,  PI.  8,  figs.  1,  2. 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  comparatively  strongly 
built,  with  the  integuments  highly  chitinized.  Cephalic  segment  large 
and  deep,  somewhat  narrowed  in  its  anterior  part,  and  produced  in 
front  to  a  strong  falciform  deflexed  rostrum  terminating  in  a  very  acute 
point.  Epimeral  parts  of  the  3  succeeding  segments  less  deep  than  in 
the  type  species,  but  terminating  behind  in  a  sharp  angle.  Last  pedige- 
rous  segment  short,  but  rather  broad,  with  the  lateral  parts  somewhat 
produced.  Urosome  not  much  narrower  than  the  anterior  division  and 
somewhat  exceeding  half  its  length,  genital  segment  broader  than  it  is 
long,  and  somewhat  depressed,  exhibiting  on  each  side,  like  the  2 
succeeding  segments,  an  obliquely  transverse  row  of  small  denticles. 
Last  segment  well  developed,  though  a  little  shorter  than  the  preceding 
one.  Caudal  rami  short,  being  scarcely  longer  than  they  are  broad, 
and  somewhat  obliquely  truncated  at  the  tip,  middle  apical  seta?  rather 
slender,  the  inner  one  being,  as  usual,  the  longer.  Anterior  antennae 


1  The   name    Idyopsis   having    been    previously    given    by    Prof.  A.  AGASSIZ   to   a 
genus  of  Acalephse,  I  propose  the  above  change  of  the  generic  name. 


24  G.  O.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

scarcely  exceeding  half  the  length  of  the  cephalic  segment  and  rather 
densely  setiferous,  1st  joint  much  the  largest,  2nd  joint  nearly  as  long 
as  the  2  succeeding  joints  combined,  terminal  part  rather  narrow  and 
about  half  the  length  of  the  proximal  one.  Posterior  antennae  and 
oral  parts  of  the  structure  characteristic  of  the  genus.  Posterior  maxilli- 
peds,  as  in  the  type  species  much  less  robust  than  in  the  genus  Tha- 
lestris,  the  hand  being  narrow  fusiform  in  shape,  with  the  palmar 
edge  nearly  straight.  1st  pair  of  legs  with  both  rami  rather  slender 
and  distinctly  prehensile,  the  outer  one  a  little  longer  than  the  inner, 
and  having  the  2nd  joint  long  and  slender,  last  joint  small  and  armed 
with  2  strong  subequal  claws  accompanied  by  a  slender  seta,  outer 
edge  of  the  joint  moreover  carrying  2  comparatively  small  spines;  inner 
ramus  with  the  outer  2  joints  very  short,  the  last  one  armed  with  a 
long  slightly  curved  claw,  outside  which  is  a  much  thinner  setiform 
spine.  Natatory  legs  of  normal  structure.  Last  pair  of  legs  very  largely 
developed,  though  scarcely  to  such  an  extent  as  in  the  type  species, 
extending  about  to  the  end  of  the  2nd  caudal  segment,  both  joints  pro- 
nouncedly foliaceous,  the  distal  one  oblong  oval  in  form  and  provided 
with  4  thickish,  coarsely  ciliated  setae,  3  of  which  are  attached  to  the 
outer  edge,  the  4th  to  the  inner  edge  near  the  end,  the  tip  itself  carry- 
ing 2  unequal  very  thin,  hair-like  bristles;  inner  expansion  of  proximal 
joint  extending  as  far  as  the  distal  joint  and  broadly  rounded  at  the 
end,  marginal  setae  5  in  number,  the  innermost  not  far  remote  from 
the  others. 

Male  considerably  smaller  than  female  and  exhibiting  the  usual 
sexual  differences.  1st  pair  of  legs  with  the  spine  _attached  to  the  inner 
corner  of  the  2nd  basal  joint  falciform,  incurved.  Inner  ramus  of  2nd 
pair  of  legs  transformed  in  a  similar  manner  to  that  in  the  type 
species.  Last  pair  of  legs  much  smaller  than  in  female,  with  the  inner 
expansion  of  proximal  joint  quite  short,  and  provided  with  only  3  setae. 

Length  of  adult  female  1.30  mm. 

Remarks.  This  form  has  been  described  and  figured,    though 

somewhat  imperfectly,  by  TH.  SCOTT  in  the  above-quoted  paper  as  a 
species  of  the  genus  Thalestris.  According  to  the  general  form  of  the 
body,  the  shape  of  the  rostrum,  the  structure  of  the  posterior  maxilli- 
peds  and  the  great  development  of  the  last  pair  of  legs,  it  is  undoubt- 
edly referable  to  the  genus  Phyllothalestris,  as  defined  by  the  present 
author  in  his  account  of  the  Norwegian  Harpacticoida.  It  is  distinguished 
from  the  type  species,  P.  mysis  GLAUS,  by  a  number  of  well-marked 
characters  pointed  out  in  the  above  diagnosis. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  25 

Occurrence.  -  -  One  female  and  2  male  specimens  of  this  pretty 
form  were  found  in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  10,  1901,  at  the 
mouth  of  Gaase  Fjord  from  a  depth  of  about  60  m. 

Distribution.  --  Franz  Josef  Land  (Scorr). 

96.  Rhynchothalestris  helgolandica,  (GLAUS). 
Found  occasionally  in  2  of  the  bottles. 

97.  Microthalestris  forficula  (GLAUS). 

This  form  occurred  not  unfrequently '  in  7  different  bottles. 

•  98.    Dactylopusia  vulgaris,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Not  uncommon  in  several  places. 

99.    Dactylopusia  glacialis,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 
(PI.  V). 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  moderately  slender 
and  slightly  tapering  behind,  with  the  anterior  division  oval  in  form  and 
not  much  dilated  anteriorly.  Cephalic  segment  exceeding  in  length  the 
4  succeeding  segments  combined;  rostral  projection  slightly  prominent 
and  obtuse  at  the  tip.  Urosome  about  2/3  as  long  as  the  anterior 
division,  and  having  the  segments  rather  sharply  defined.  Caudal  rami 
very  short,  being  twice  as  broad  as  they  are  long,  and  transversely 
truncated  at  the  end;  middle  apical  setae  rather  slender.  Anterior  an- 
tennae comparatively  short,  though  distinctly  9-articulate,  terminal  part 
about  the  length  of  the  3  preceding  joints  combined.  Posterior  antennae 
and  oral  parts  of  normal  structure.  1st  pair  of  legs  rather  strongly 
built,  with  both  rami  distinctly  prehensile,  the  outer  one  nearly  as  long 
as  the  1st  joint  of  the  inner,  last  joint  short,  spatulate  in  form,  with 
all  4  claws  well-developed  and  gradually  increasing  in  length  distally, 
inner  ramus  with  the  2  outer  joints,  as  usual,  very  short  and  abruptly 
incurved,  the  last  one  armed  with  2  very  strong  claws  of  unequal 
length,  seta  of  1st  joint  attached  about  in  the  middle.  Natatory  legs 
of  the  usual  structure.  Last  pair  of  legs  comparatively  large  and  pro- 
nouncedly foliaceous,  distal  joint  very  broad,  rounded  in  shape,  and 
scarcely  exserted  at  the  tip;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  almost 
extending  as  far  as  the  distal  joint,  2  of  the  setae  on  each  joint  very 
slender  and  elongated. 

Male,  as  usual,  smaller  than  female,  and  having  the  anterior  an- 
tennae distinctly  hinged.  Inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  with  the 


26  G.  O.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

distal  joint  considerably  narrowed  in  its  outer  part,  spine  of  outer  edge 
unusually  short  and  attached  beyond  the  middle,  tip  provided  with  a 
small  spine  and  a  long  flexuous  seta.  Last  pair  of  legs  with  the  distal 
joint  rather  small,  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  well  developed, 
but  provided  with  only  3  short  setae. 

Length  of  adult  female  about  1  mm. 

Remarks.  -  This  form  is  nearly  allied  to  D.  vulgaris,  but  is  of 
considerably  larger  size,  in  which  respect  it  about  equals  D.  thisboides 
GLAUS.  From  both  these  species  it  is  distinguished  by  the  very  broad 
rounded  form  of  the  distal  joint  of  the  last  pair  of  legs  in  the  female, 
as  also  by  the  more  strongly  built  1st  pair  of  legs.  From  D.  thisboides 
it  moreover  differs  by  the  distinctly  9-articulate  anterior  antennae.  The 
structure  of  the  inner  ramus  of  the  2nd  pair  of  legs  in  the  male  differs 
also  conspicuously  from  that  in  the  2  species  mentioned. 

Occurrence.  This  form  was  found  rather  abundantly  in  a 
bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  30,  1900  (the  exact  locality  not  indi- 
cated). It  also  occurred  occasionally  in  some  of  the  other  bottles. 

100.  Dactylopusia,  brevicornis,  GLS. 

Some  specimens  of  this  distinct  species  occurred  in  a  bottle  of 
specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

101.  Idomene  coronata  (SCOTT). 

(Pi.  VI). 

Dactylopus  coronatus,  TH.  SCOTT,  Additions  to  the  Fauna  of  the  Firth  of 
Forth.  12th.  Ann.  Rep.  of  Fish.  Board  for  Scotland,  Part  III,  p.  255, 
PI.  IX,  figs.  12-20. 

Specific  Characters.  -  -  Female.  Body  short  and  stout,  pro- 
nouncedly depressed,  with  the  anterior  division  broad  and  expanded, 
oval  in  outline.  Cephalic  segment  large  and  evenly  rounded  in  front, 
rostral  projection  somewhat  deflexed,  lamellar,  obtusely  rounded  at  the 
tip.  Epimeral  plates  of  the  3  succeeding  segments  sub-imbricate  and 
acutely  produced  at  the  hind  corner.  Last  pedigerous  segment  much 
narrower  than  the  preceding  ones,  and  without  distinct  epimeral  plates. 
Urosome  short,  scarcely  more  than  */3  as  l°ng  as  the  anterior  division, 
and  much  narrower,  genital  segment,  as  usual,  the  largest  and,  like 
the  2  succeeding  segments,  finely  spinulose  at  the  hind  edge  laterally. 
Caudal  rami  scarcely  longer  than  they  are  broad,  and  spinulose  at 
the  inner  corner,  innermost  apical  seta  not  spiniform  and  shorter  than 
the  outermost,  the  2  middle  setae  slender  and  elongated.  Anterior 
antennae  short  and  stout,  7-articulate,  and  densely  clothed  with  setae, 


1898-1902.   No.  18.J  CRUSTACEA.  27 

some  of  which  are  rather  coarse  and  spinulose  at  the  edges,  terminal 
part  3-articulate  and  scarcely  longer  than  the  2  preceding  joints  com- 
bined. Posterior  antennae  of  a  similar  structure  to  that  in  the  type  species. 
Mandibular  palp,  however,  less  fully  developed,  with  the  rami  shorter, 
none  of  the  seta3  of  the  outer  ram  us  spiniform.  Posterior  maxillipeds 
rather  strong,  with  an  oblique  series  of  small  spinules  crossing  the  base 
of  the  hand.  1st  pair  of  legs  built  on  the  same  type  as  in  /.  forficata 
PHILIPPI,  though  having  the  1st  joint  of  the  inner  ramus  less  dilated 
and  the  outer  2  joints  more  produced,  exceeding,  when  combined,  half 
the  length  of  the  1st.  Natatory  legs  scarcely  different  in  structure  from 
those  in  the  type  species.  Last  pair  of  legs,  however,  rather  unlike, 
distal  joint  confluent  at  the  base  with  the  proximal  one  and  broadly 
rounded  at  the  end,  marginal  setae  5  in  number,  the  2  outermost  re- 
markably strong  and  curved,  spiniform,  and  edged  outside  with  coarse 
cilia,  the  other  3  setae  long  and  slender;  inner  expansion  of  proximal 
joint  extending  as  far  as  the  distal  joint  and  obtusely  truncated  at  the 
end,  carrying  5  rather  unequal  setae,  the  outermost  but  one  very  long 
and  slender,  the  innermost  but  one  quite  short.  Ovisac  comparatively 
large,  extending  far  beyond  the  tip  of  the  caudal  rami,  and  oval  in  form. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.66  mm. 

Remarks.  -  This  is  certainly  not  a  Dactylopusia,  as  believed  by 
TH.  SCOTT,  but  seems  to  me  more  properly  to  be  referable  to  the  genus 
Idomene  of  PHILIPPI,  though  differing  from  the  type  species,  /.  forficata 
rather  conspicuously  in  some  points,  especially  as  regards  the  structure 
of  the  mandibular  palp,  the  last  pair  of  legs  and  the  caudal  setae. 

Occurrence.  A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  form  was 

found  in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  18,  1901,  at  the  month 
of  Gaase  Fjord  from  a  depth  of  about  60  m. 

Distribution.  --  Scottish  coast  (SCOTT). 

102.  Amenophia  peltata,  BOECK. 

Some  few  specimens  of  this  easily  recognizable  form  occurred  in  3 
of  the  bottles  examined. 

103.  Westwoodia  assimilis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

A  solitary  specimen  of  a  moderately  large  Westwoodia,  which 
according  to  the  distinctly  bi-articulate  outer  ramus  of  the  1st  pair  of 
legs,  must  be  referred  to  the  above  species  described  by  the  present 
author  from  the  Norwegian  coast,  was  found  in  a  bottle  of  specimens 
taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 


28  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Fam.  Diosaccidse. 

104.  Amphiascus  nasutus,  BOECK. 

This  form  occurred  rather  abundantly  in  several  of  the  bottles. 

105.  Amphiascus  latifolius,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(PI.  VII). 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  moderately  slender 
and  slightly  tapering  behind,  with  the  anterior  division  oblong  oval  in 
form.  Cephalic  segment,  excluding  the  rostrum,  about  the  length  of 
the  3  succeeding  segments  combined ;  rostrum  well  developed,  lanceolate. 
Urosome  somewhat  shorter  than  the  anterior  division,  last  segment 
comparatively  short,  scarcely  half  as  long  as  the  preceding  one.  Caudal 
rami  broader  than  they  are  long,  and  transversely  truncated  at  the  tip, 
inner  medial  seta  conspicuously  dilated  for  some  part  of  its  length, 
and  about  as  long  as  the  urosome.  Anterior  antennae  of  moderate 
length  and  consisting  of  9  well-defined  articulations,  the  first  four  gra- 
dually diminishing  in  size,  terminal  part  about  half  the  length  of  the 
proximal  one.  Posterior  antenna?  and  oral  parts  of  the  usual  structure. 
1st  pair  of  legs  with  both  rami  pronouncedly  prehensile  and  rather 
slender,  the  outer  one  fully  as  long  as  the  1st  joint  of  the  inner,  last 
joint  very  short,  spatulate  in  form,  and  armed  with  3  strong  claws  gra- 
dually increasing  in  length  distally  and  accompanied  outside  by  a  thin 
bristle,  inside  by  a  slender  geniculate  seta;  inner  ramus  with  the  1st 
joint  linear  in  form  and  having  inside,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  end, 
a  comparatively  short  seta,  outer  2  joints  very  short  and  subequal  in 
size,  the  last  one  armed  with  2  slender  claws  of  unequal  length.  Nata- 
tory legs  well  developed,  with  the  full  number  of  setae.  Last  pair  of 
legs  comparatively  large  and  pronouncedly  foliaceous,  distal  joint  of 
unusual  size,  rounded  quadrangular  in  form,  and  provided  with  6  rather 
slender  setae,  one  of  them,  issuing  from  the  tip,  very  thin,  hair-like; 
inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  triangular  and  extending  about  to  the 
middle  of  the  distal  joint,  marginal  setae  5  in  number,  the  2  outermost 
closely  juxtaposed.  Ovisacs  of  moderate  size  and  oblong  oval  in  form. 

Male  with  the  anterior  antennae  hinged  in  the  usual  manner. 
Inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  conspicuously  transformed,  but  rather 
unlike  that  in  the  other  known  species,  middle  joint  faintly  defined  from 
the  last,  and  without  any  spiniform  appendage  outside,  last  joint  pro- 
vided at  the  tip  with  a  short  spine  and  a  slender  seta,  having  more- 
over inside  an  ordinary  seta,  and  outsi'de  near  the  end  a  short,  peculiarly 


1908-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  29 

formed  spine  originating  with  a  broad  lamellar  base.  Last  pair  of  legs, 
as  usual,  much  smaller  than  in  female,  distal  joint  oval  in  form  and 
somewhat  narrowed  towards  the  end;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint 
rounded  off  at  the  end,  and  provided  with  only  2  unequal  setaa. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.92  mm. 

Remarks.  —  This  species  belongs  to  the  section  of  the  genus  in 
which  both  rami  of  the  1st  pair  of  legs  are  distinctly  prehensile  and 
built  upon  a  type  somewhat  similar  to  that  in  the  genus  Dadylopusia. 
It  is,  however,  quite  distinct  from  any  of  the  known  species.  In  only 
one  of  these,  A.  nasutus,  BOECK,  are  the  anterior  antennae  composed, 
as  in  the  present  species,  of  9  articulations;  but  from  this  species 
it  differs  conspicuously  both  in  the  greater  length  of  the  outer  ramus 
of  the  1st  pair  of  legs,  and  in  the  shape  of  the  distal  joint  of  the  last 
pair  of  legs  in  the  female. 

Occurrence.  This  well-marked  species  was  found  not  unfre- 
quently  in  3  of  the  bottles  examined. 

106.  Amphiascus  minutus  (GLAUS). 

Some  few  specimens  of  a  small  Amphiascus,  apparently  belonging 
to  this  species,  were  found  together  with  the  preceding  one. 

107.  Amphiascus  congener,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(PI.  VIII,  figs.  1-4). 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  rather  slender,  almost 
cylindrical  in  form,  or  only  very  slightly  attenuated  behind.  Rostrum  of 
moderate  size  and  somewhat  obtusely  pointed  at  the  tip.  Urosome 
nearly  attaining  the  length  of  the  anterior  division,  last  segment  a  little 
shorter  than  the  preceding  one.  Caudal  rami  of  a  similar  form  to  that 
in  A.  latifolius,  inner  medial  seta  somewhat  obliquely  dilated  at  the 
base  and  scarcely  longer  than  the  urosome.  Anterior  antennae  of  mode- 
rate length  and,  as  usual,  composed  of  8  articulations,  4th  joint  longer 
than  3rd,  terminal  part  not  attaining  half  the  length  of  the  proximal 
one.  1st  pair  of  legs  with  the  rami  less  pronouncedly  prehensile  than 
in  A.  latifolius  and  very  unequal,  the  outer  one  being  scarcely  more 
than  half  as  long  as  the  inner,  last  joint  nearly  as  long  as  the  middle 
one  and  armed  with  3  claw-like  spines,  and  inside  these  with  2  genicu- 
lated  setae;  inner  ramus  with  the  1st  joint  long  and  slender,  carrying 
inside  near  the  end  a  short  seta,  the  2  outer  joints  somewhat  unequal 
in  size,  the  last  one  being  about  twice  as  long  as  the  preceding  one  and 


30  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

armed  at  the  tip  with  a  slender  claw  and  a  still  longer  seta  accom- 
panied by  a  small  bristle.  Natatory  legs  normal.  Last  pair  of  legs  of 
moderate  size,  distal  joint  obovate  in  form,  with  6  not  very  long  mar- 
ginal setae;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  triangular,  and  scarcely 
extending  to  the  middle  of  the  distal  joint,  marginal  setae  5  in  number. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.87  mrn. 

Remarks.  —  In  its  general  form  this  species  somewhat  resembles 
A.  similis  (GLAUS).  It  is,  however,  of  smaller  size  and  moreover  differs 
conspicuously  in  the  structure  of  the  first  and  last  pairs  of  legs. 

Occurrence.  —  Some  few  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  a 
bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  30, 1900  (the  exact  locality  not  indicated). 

108.     Amphiascus  polaris,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 
(PI.  VIII,  figs.  5-10). 

Specific    Characters.  Female.      Body   less    slender    than 

in  the  preceding  species  and  of  nearly  uniform  width  throughout. 
Rostrum  considerably  prominent  and  exserted  to  a  very  acute  point. 
Urosome  not  attaining  the  length  of  the  anterior  division,  last  segment 
scarcely  shorter  than  the  preceding  one,  and  deeply  incised  behind. 
Caudal  rami  short  and  rather  distant,  inner  medial  seta  slightly  dilated 
at  the  base  and  nearly  twice  as  long  as  the  urosome.  Anterior  an- 
tennae rather  slender,  8-articulate,  with  the  4th  joint  much  longer  than 
3rd,  terminal  part  about  equalling  in  length  those  joints  combined. 
1st  pair  of  legs  with  the  rami  very  unequal,  the  outer  one  scarcely 
exceeding  half  the  length  of  the  inner,  and  having  all  3  joints  of  about 
equal  size,  the  last  one,  as  in  A.  congener,  armed  with  3  spines  and 
2  geniculated  setae;  inner  ramus  with  the  1st  joint  very  slender  and 
slightly  curved,  seta  attached  inside  its  end  unusually  long,  outer  2 
joints  very  unequal,  the  last  one  being  almost  3  times  as  long  as  the 
other  and  linear  in  form,  carrying  on  the  tip  a  slender,  evenly  curved 
claw  and  a  still  longer  seta  accompanied  by  a  small  bristle.  Natatory 
legs  with  the  rami  more  slender  than  in  the  preceding  species,  other- 
wise of  normal  structure.  Last  pair  of  legs  somewhat  resembling  those 
in  A.  congener,  distal  joint,  however,  less  dilated,  and  oblong  in  form; 
inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  extending  to  about  the  middle  of  the 
distal  joint,  and  having  the  2  innermost  setae  comparatively  short  and 
spiniform.  Ovisacs  oblong  oval  in  form,  and  containing  only  a  limited 
number  of  ova. 

Male  with  the  inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  transformed  in  the 
usual  manner,  the  2  outer  joints,  being  wholly  coalesced,  outer  edge 


1898-1902.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA. 


carrying  at  some  distance  from  the  tip  a  strong  deflexed  spiniform 
appendage  accompanied  by  another  much  thinner  appendage.  Last  pair 
of  legs  very  small,  distal  joint  quite  short,  with  only  5  setae,  2  of  them 
attached  to  the  inner  edge;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  tipped 
with  2  unequal  setae. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.77  mm. 

Remarks.  The  present  form  is  easily  distinguishable  from 
the  preceding  species  and  also  different  from  any  other  species  known 
to  me.  In  the  shape  of  the  rostrum  and  the  1st  pair  of  legs  it  some- 
what resembles  A.  imus  (BRADY);  but  the  body  is  far  less  slender,  and 
the  structure  of  the  last  pair  of  legs  is  also  very  different. 

Occurrence.  —  Several  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  a 
bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

109.     Amphiascus  brevis,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 
(PI.  VIII,  figs.  11-15). 

Specific  Characters.  Female.  Body  unusually  short  and 
stout,  with  the  anterior  division  slightly  dilated  in  the  middle  and  some- 
what narrowed  both  in  front  and  behind.  Rostrum  of  moderate  size 
and  obtusely  pointed  at  the  tip.  Urosome  considerably  shorter  than 
the  anterior  division,  with  the  last  segment  about  the  length  of  the  pre- 
ceding one.  Caudal  rami  broader  than  they  are  long,  inner  medial 
seta  conspicuously  dilated  at  the  base  and  not  quite  twice  as  long  as 
the  urosome.  Anterior  antennae  rather  slender,  8-articuIate,  with  the 
4th  joint  longer  than  the  3rd,  terminal  part  about  half  the  length  of  the 
proximal  one.  1st  pair  of  legs  with  the  outer  ramus  exceeding  half 
the  length  of  the  inner,  and  having  the  last  joint  about  as  long  as  the 
middle  one,  its  armature  as  in  the  2  preceding  species;  inner  ramus 
with  the  1st  joint  long  and  slender,  seta  of  inner  edge  comparatively 
short,  outer  2  joints  less  unequal  than  in  A.  polarls,  the  last  one  being 
only  slightly  longer  than  the  other,  and  armed  at  the  tip  with  a  mode- 
rately slender,  almost  straight  claw  and  a  long  seta  accompanied  by  a 
small  bristle.  Natatory  legs  normal.  Last  pair  of  legs  comparatively 
smaller  than  in  the  preceding  species,  distal  joint  narrow  oval  in  form 
and  somewhat  exserted  at  the  end,  marginal  setae  7  in  number,  2  of 
them  being  attached  to  the  inner  edge;  inner  expansion  of  proximal 
joint  extending  to  about  the  middle  of  the  distal  joint  and  carrying 
5  setae.  Ovisacs  about  as  in  A.  polaris. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.52  mm. 


G.   0.   SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 


Remarks.  -  This  form  is  chiefly  distinguished  by  its  unusually 
short  and  stout  body,  as  also  by  the  increased  number  of  setae  on  the 
distal  joint  of  the  last  pair  of  legs.  It  belongs  to  the  smaller  species 
of  the  present  genus. 

Occurrence.  Some  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in 
bottles  from  3  different  places. 

110.  Amphiascus  hispidus  (NORMAN). 
Found  occasionally  in  2  of  the  bottles  examined. 

111.  Amphiascus  a f finis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

This  form  occurred,  though  only  sparingly,  in  no  less  than  4  diffe- 
rent places. 

112.  Amphiascus  intermedius  (Scorr). 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  form,  easily  recognizable  by  the  un- 
usually short  and  thick  caudal  setae,  was  found  in  a  bottle  of  speci- 
mens taken  on  July  9,  1901,  in  Ren  Bay,  Ellesmere  Land. 

113.  Amphiascus  typhlops,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Of  this  peculiar  form,  also  only  a  single  specimen  was  found.  It 
occurred  in  the  same  bottle  as  the  preceding  species. 

114.  Stenhelia  gibba,  BOECK. 
Found  occasionally  in  2  of  the  bottles. 

115.  Stenhelia  palustris  (BRADY). 

A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  form  occurred  in  a  bottle  of 
specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Fam.  Canthocamptidse. 

116.  Cantocamptus  Nordenskjoldi,  LILLJEB. 

(Pi.  IX). 

Canthocamptus  Nordenskjoldi,  LILLJEBORG,  Three  species  novse  generis 
Canthocampti:  Appendix  to  K.  Svenska  Vetensk.  Akad.  Handl.  Vol.  28, 
No.  9,  p.  8,  PJ.  I,  fig.  7,  PI.  II,  figs.  1-7. 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  rather  slender,  sub- 
cylindrical  in  form,  with  the  anterior  division  only  slightly  wider  than 
the  posterior.  Cephalic  segment  about  the  length  of  the  3  succeeding 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  33 

ones  combined  and  evenly  rounded  in  front,  rostral  projection  very 
slight,  almost  obsolete.  Urosome  nearly  as  long  as  the  anterior 
division,  segments  finely  spinulose  at  the  hind  edge  ventrally  and  late- 
rally, last  segment  almost  as  long  as  the  preceding  one,  but  somewhat 
narrower,  anal  opercle  perfectly  smooth.  Caudal  rami  comparatively 
short  and  obliquely  oval  in  form,  with  the  outer  edge  very  convex, 
almost  angular  in  the  middle,  the  inner  nearly  straight,  tip  obtusely 
rounded,  dorsal  face  with  a  slight  carina  running  along  the  proximal 
part  as  far  as  the  small  dorsal  seta,  and  followed  by  a  row  of  4  rather 
strong  denticles  extending  to  the  inner  corner;  outermost  apical  seta 
attached  at  some  distance  from  the  other  three,  apparently  to  the 
outer  edge,  seta  of  this  edge  attached  considerably  in  front  of  the 
middle;  outer  medial  seta  somewhat  bent  outwards  at  the  base,  and 
about  half  as  long  as  the  inner,  which  about  equals  in  length  the  uro- 
some  and  last  pedigerous  segment  combined.  Anterior  antennae  rather 
slender,  though  not  attaining  the  length  of  the  cephalic  segment,  8-arti- 
culate,  and  only  sparingly  setiferous,  terminal  part  about  the  length  of 
the  proximal  one.  Posterior  antennae  and  oral  parts  exhibiting  the 
structure  characteristic  of  the  genus.  1st  pair  of  legs  moderately  slender, 
outer  ramus  a  little  longer  than  the  1st  joint  of  the  inner,  its  last  joint 
exceeding  in  length  the  middle  one,  and  carrying  on  the  tip  2  slender 
spines  and  2  geniculate  setae;  inner  ramus  with  the  1st  joint  a  little 
longer  than  the  outer  2  combined,  and  having  inside,  at  a  short  distance 
from  the  end,  a  comparatively  short  seta,  last  joint  more  than  twice  as 
long  as  the  preceding  one,  sub-linear  in  form,  and  carrying  on  the  tip 
a  slender  claw  and  a  long  seta.  Natatory  legs  with  the  rami  less 
slender  than  in  the  type  species,  but  otherwise  of  a  very  similar  struc- 
ture. Last  pair  of  legs  with  the  distal  joint  comparatively  small,  oval 
in  form,  and  armed  with  5  marginal  setae,  one  of  which,  issuing  from 
the  tip,  is  very  thin,  hair-like,  the  others  rather  coarse  and  spinulose  at 
the  edges;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  rather  large,  lamellar,  ex- 
tending almost  as  far  as  the  distal  joint,  and  broadly  rounded  at  the  end, 
which  carries  6  coarse  spinulose  setae  of  somewhat  unequal  length. 

Male  with  the  anterior  antennae  hinged  in  the  usual  manner.  Inner 
ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  with  the  2  outer  joints  wholly  coalesced;  that 
of  3rd  pair  very  conspicuously  transformed,  3-articulate,  1st  joint  short, 
projecting  outside  in  an  acute  corner  and  carrying  inside  a  small  bristle; 
2nd  joint  likewise  short,  but  produced  inside  to  a  long  deflexed  process 
terminating  in  a  thin  setiform  point;  last  joint  oblong  fusiform  in  shape, 
and  carrying  on  the  tip  2  slender  setae  of  unequal  length.  Last  pair  of 


34  G.  O.'SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

legs  smaller  than  in  female,  with  the  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint 
much  shorter  and  provided  with  only  3  spiniform  setae. 

Length  of  adult  female  1.08  mm. 

Remarks.  —  The  above-described  form  is  unquestionably  iden- 
tical with  the  species  recorded  by  Prof.  LILLJEBORG  under  the  above 
name  from  Siberia.  It  is  about  the  same  size  as  the  type  species, 
C.  staphylinus  (JURINE),  which  it  also  resembles  in  the  general  form  of 
the  body,  though  at  once  distinguished  from  it  by  the  very  different  shape 
of  the  caudal  rami  and  by  the  perfectly  smooth  anal  opercle.  Like  all 
true  Canthocampti,  it  is  a  genuine  fresh-water  form. 

Occurrence.  —  Some  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  a 
sample  taken  on  June  26,  1899,  from  some  fresh-water  pools  (the  exact 
locality  not  indicated). 

Distribution.  —  Northern  part  of  Siberia,  at  Sopotschaja  Korga 
near  the  mouth  of  the  Jenisei,  and  on  the  peninsula  Jalmal  (LILLJEBORG). 

117.  Ameira  longipes,  BOECK. 
Found  rather  abundantly  in  6  different  bottles. 

118.  Ameira  tau  (GIESBRECHT). 

Some  few  specimen  of  this  small  species  occurred  together  with  the 
preceding  form  in  one  of  the  bottles. 

119.  Parameira  elongata,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(PI.  X). 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  very  slender  and 
elongated,  sub-cylindric  in  form,  with  the  anterior  division  scarcely 
broader  than  the  posterior.  Cephalic  segment  about  the  length  of  the 
3  succeeding  segments  combined;  rostral  projection  almost  obsolete. 
Urosome  fully  as  long  as  the  anterior  division,  and  having  the  segments 
apparently  perfectly  smooth;  last  segment  larger  than  the  preceding  one, 
and  deeply  incised  behind.  Caudal  rami  rather  far  apart  and  somewhat 
produced,  being  almost  twice  as  long  as  they  are  broad;  middle  apical 
setae  rather  slender  and  elongated.  Anterior  antennae  of  moderate  lenglh 
and  densely  clothed  with  slender  setae,  8-articulate,  terminal  part  exceed- 
ing half  the  length  of  the  proximal  one,  and  having  the  penultimate 
joint  imperfectly  divided  in  the  middle.  Posterior  antennae  and  oral 
parts  exhibiting  the  structure  characteristic  of  the  genus.  1st  pair  of 
legs  with  the  rami  very  unequal,  the  outer  one  extending  to  about  the 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  35 

end  of  the  1st  joint  of  the  inner,  its  last  joint  somewhat  longer  and 
narrower  than  the  other  2,  and  armed  with  3  spines  and  2  geniculate 
setae;  inner  ramus  rather  slender,  with  each  of  the  joints  carrying  inside, 
near  the  end,  a  slender  curved  seta,  1st  joint  considerably  longer  than 
the  other  2  combined,  last  joint  armed  at  the  tip  with  a  slender  claw 
and  a  curved  seta.  Natatory  legs  rather  fully  developed  and  resembling 
in  structure  those  in  the  other  species  of  the  genus.  Last  pair  of  legs 
with  the  distal  joint  very  narrow,  sub-linear  in  form  and  finely  ciliated 
on  both  edges,  marginal  setae  5  in  number  and  all  issuing  from  the 
outermost  part  of  the  joint,  one  of  them  very  thin,  hair-like,  innermost 
one  the  longest;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  broadly  triangular 
in  form  and  scarcely  extending  to  the  middle  of  the  distal  joint,  mar- 
ginal setae  5  in  number,  2  of  them  attached  to  the  inner  edge. 

Length  of  adult  female  1.05  mm. 

Remarks.  --  According  to  the  structure  of  the  posterior  antennae, 
the  oral  parts,  and  the  anterior  pairs  of  legs,  this  form  should  evidently  be 
referred  to  the  genus  Parameira,  as  defined  by  the  present  author  in 
his  account  of  the  Norwegian  Harpacticoida.  It  differs  conspicuously 
from  the  other  known  species  of  this  genus,  however,  in  the  very 
slender  form  of  the  body,  the  greater  length  of  the  inner  ramus  of  the 
1st  pair  of  legs,  and  finally  in  the  shape  of  the  last  pair  of  legs,  which 
more  resembles  that  in  the  genus  Ameiropsis,  G.  0.  SARS.  Also  in 
size  this  form  considerably  exceeds  any  known  species  of  the  present 
genus. 

Occurrence.  -  Two  female  specimens  of  this  form  were  found 
in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  7,  1900,  off  Sjopolse  Ness  from  a 
depth  of  15—25  fathoms. 

120.    Mesochra,  pygmsea,  BOECK. 

This  dwarf  form  occurred  occasionally  in  2  of  the  bottles  exa- 
mined. 


Fam.  Laophontidse. 
121.     Laophonte  depressa,  SCOTT. 

Some  few  specimens  of  this  species,  exactly  agreeing  with  the  form 
described  by  the  present  author  from  the  Norwegian  coast,  were  found 
in  2  of  the  bottles.  Dr.  TH.  SCOTT  records  this  species  also  from  Franz 
Josef  Land. 


36  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

122.    Laophonte  applanata,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 
(PI.  XI). 

Specific  Characters.  —  Female.  Body  very  broad  and  flat- 
tened, with  all  the  segments,  except  the  last,  lamellarly  expanded  late- 
rally. Cephalic  segment  large  and  broad,  exhibiting  on  each  side,  at 
about  the  middle,  a  distinct  notch,  edge  of  the  segment  finely  ciliated; 
rostral  projection  horizontally  produced,  and  of  a  rather  peculiar  appea- 
rance, being  spatulate  in  form  and  terminating  in  2  broadly  rounded 
lobes  densely  clothed  with  fine  hairs.  Epimeral  parts  of  the  3  suc- 
ceeding segments  rounded  off  and  fringed  with  a  dense  row  of  spinules. 
Last  pedigerous  segment  somewhat  less  broad  than  the  3  preceding 
segments.  Urosome  much  shorter  than  the  anterior  division,  lateral 
expansions  of  the  anterior  segments  linguiform  and  slightly  recurved, 
being,  like  those  of  the  anterior  division,  densely  fringed  with  spinules; 
last  segment  sub-quadrangular  in  shape,  with  the  anal  opercle  smooth. 
Caudal  rami  somewhat  far  apart  and  scarcely  twice  as  long  as  they  are 
broad,  both  edges  minutely  spinulose,  tip  transversely  truncated,  with 
the  inner  medial  seta  rather  slender  and  elongated,  outer  comparatively 
short.  Anterior  antennae  of  moderate  length  and  composed  of  7  articu- 
lations, 2nd  joint  without  any  projection  behind  and  much  shorter  than 
the  3rd,  4th  joint  still  shorter,  terminal  part  about  the  length  of  the  3rd 
joint.  Posterior  antennae  rather  strongly  built,  with  the  spines  of  the 
distal  joint  very  coarse,  claw-like,  outer  ramus  uniarticulate,  with  4  rather 
thick  setae.  Oral  parts  exhibiting  the  structure  characteristic  of  the 
genus.  Posterior  maxillipeds  large  and  powerful.  1st  pair  of  legs  like- 
wise greatly  developed,  with  the  inner  ramus  very  strong,  biarticulate, 
last  joint  tipped  with  a  powerful  claw;  outer  ramus,  as  usual,  very 
narrow,  triarticulate,  and  extending  somewhat  beyond  the  middle  of  the 
proximal  joint  of  the  inner.  Natatory  legs  with  the  rami  slender  and 
built  upon  the  type  characteristic  of  the  genus.  Last  pair  of  legs  resem- 
bling in  structure  those  in  L.  depressa,  the  distal  joint  being  conside- 
rably produced,  and  tapering  to  a  conical  point  carrying  a  very  slender 
hair-like  bristle,  marginal  setae  5  in  number,  one  of  them  issuing 
from  the  inner  edge  near  the  tip;  inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint 
very  small  and  narrow,  with  only  3  setae.  Ovisac  of  moderate  size, 
rounded  oval  in  form. 

Male,  as  usual,  smaller  than  female,  and  having  the  anterior  an- 
tennae strongly  hinged,  sub-cheliform.  Inner  ramus  of  3rd  pair  of  legs 
transformed  in  the  usual  manner,  being  distinctly  triarticulate,  with  the 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  37 

middle  joint  produced  at  the  end  to  a  slender  sigmoid  spine.  Last  pair 
of  legs  with  the  distal  joint  oblong  quadrangular  in  form,  and  provided 
with  5  spiniform  setae,  3  of  them  issuing  from  the  end;  inner  expansion 
of  proximal  joint  still  smaller  than  in  female,  and  tipped  with  2 
slender  setae. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.80  mm. 

Remarks.  —  The  present  form  is  easily  distinguishable  from  any 
of  the  other  known  species  of  this  genus  by  its  broad  and  flattened 
body  and  the  peculiar  form  of  the  rostral  projection.  In  its  structural 
details,  however,  it  exhibits  a  close  relationship  to  L.  depressa  SCOTT. 

Occurrence.  —  Some  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in  4  of 
the  bottles  examined. 

123.  Laophonte  horrida,  NORMAN. 

This  characteristic  form  occurred  occasionally  in  5  of  the  bottles. 

124.  Laophonte  macera.  G.  0.  SARS. 
Found  in  no  less  than  9  of  the  bottles. 

125.  Laophonte  perplexa,  SCOTT. 

Some  few  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  one  of  the  bottles 
containing  specimens  taken  on  July  30,  1900. 

126.  Laophonte  hyperborea,  G.  0.  SARS,  n.  sp. 

(PI.  XII). 

Specific  Characters.  Female.  Body  rather  slender  and 
tapering  gradually  behind,  with  the  segments  sharply  marked  off  from 
each  other  and  somewhat  raised  dorsally.  Integuments  coarse  and 
exhibiting  a  pitted  sculpture.  Cephalic  segment  large  and  tumid,  seen 
dorsally  almost  quadrangular  in  form ;  rostral  projection  broadly  trian- 
gular, with  the  tip  minutely  bilobular.  Epimeral  parts  of  the  3  suc- 
ceeding segments  not  expanded  laterally.  Last  pedigerous  segment 
slightly  produced  on  each  side.  Urosome  about  the  length  of  the  an- 
terior division,  and  having  the  lateral  parts  of  the  anterior  segments 
slightly  produced  at  the  hind  corners.  Last  segment  fully  as  long  as 
the  preceding  one,  but  rather  narrower,  anal  opercle  smooth.  Caudal 
rami  considerably  produced,  exceeding  in  length  the  anal  segment,  and 
tapering  gradually  distally,  tip  narrowly  truncated,  with  the  inner  medial 
seta  about  as  long  as  the  urosome.  Anterior  antennaa  comparatively 


38  G.   0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

short,  7-articulate,  2nd  joint  the  largest  and  without  any  projection 
behind ;  terminal  part  about  the  length  of  the  2  preceding  joints  com- 
bined. Posterior  antenna  and  oral  parts  of  the  usual  structure.  1st 
pair  of  legs  less  robust  than  in  L.  applanata,  outer  ramus  very  small, 
not  even  attaining  half  the  length  of  the  proximal  joint  of  the  inner, 
and  composed  of  only  2  joints,  the  distal  one  much  the  longer;  inner 
ramus  rather  slender,  with  the  apical  claw  long  and  only  slightly  curved. 
Natatory  legs  of  a  structure  similar  to  that  in  L.  perplexa  SCOTT.  Last 
pair  of  legs  likewise  rather  similar,  though  differing  somewhat  in  the 
shape  of  the  distal  joint,  which  is  not,  as  in  the  latter  species,  trun- 
cated at  the  end,  but  is  obliquely  produced. 

Male  with  the  anterior  antennae  very  strongly  hinged,  the  last  joint 
of  the  proximal  part  being  almost  globularly  dilated.  2nd  pair  of  legs 
scarcely  larger  than  in  female,  but  with  one  of  the  setae  of  the  inner 
ramus,  as  in  L.  brevirostris  GLAUS,  peculiarly  transformed.  Inner 
ramus  of  3rd  pair  of  legs  transformed  in  quite  a  normal  manner,  being 
3-articulate,  with  the  middle  joint  produced  outside  to  a  comparatively 
short  spiniform  projection,  outer  ramus,  on  the  other  hand,  scarcely 
different  from  that  in  female.  4th  pair  of  legs  with  the  outer  ramus 
somewhat  stronger  than  in  female,  and  having  all  the  spines  of  the 
outer  edge  coarsely  denticulate.  Last  pair  of  legs  very  small,  with  the 
inner  expansion  of  proximal  joint  quite  obsolete. 

Length  of  adult  female  0.95  mm. 

Remarks.  -  This  form  is  closely  allied  to  L.  perplexa,  SCOTT, 
but  is  of  considerably  larger  size,  and  moreover  differs  conspicuously 
in  the  more  produced  caudal  rami,  the  comparatively  shorter  anterior 
antenna,  and  the  shape  of  the  distal  joint  of  the  last  pair  of  legs. 
Finally,  the  male  exhibits  in  its  sexual  characters  several  well-marked 
differences,  as  pointed  out  in  the  above  diagnosis. 

Occurrence.  —  Several  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  in  2  of 
the  bottles  examined. 

Fam.  Cletodidse. 

127.  Cletodes  similis,  SCOTT. 

A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  form  was  found  in  a  bottle 
containing  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Fam.  Tachidiidse. 

128.  Danielssenia,  typica,  BOECK. 

This  form  occurred  occasionally  in  3  of  the  bottles  examined. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  39 

Suborder  Cyclopoida. 

Gnathostoma. 
Fam.  Oithonidse. 

129.  Oithona  similis,  GLAUS. 

From  plankton  taken  on  June  29,  1898,  in  lat.  57°  31'  N.,  long.  1°  29'  E. 

Fam.   Cyclopidse. 

130.  Cyclops  agilis,  KOCH. 

Rather  abundant  in  a  sample  taken  on  Aug.  22,  1898,  from  a  fresh- 
water pond  (the  exact  locality  not  indicated). 

131.  Euryte  longicauda,  PHILTPPI. 
Found  in  4  of  the  bottles  examined. 

132.  Cyclopina  gracilis,  GLAUS. 

A  solitary  female  specimen  of  this  form  occurred  in  a  bottle  of 
specimens  taken  on  July  5,  1901,  in  the  Sound  at  Hell  Gate. 

133.  Cyclopina  littoralis,  BRADY. 

2  females  of  this  form  were  found  in  a  bottle  containing  specimens 
taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Siphonostom  a. 

Fam.  Asterocheridze. 

134.  Dermatowyzon  nigripes  (BRADY). 
Found  occasionally  in  3  of  the  bottles  examined. 

Fam.  Artotrogidse. 

135.  Bradypontius  magniceps  (BRADY). 

An  adult  female  and  2  immature  specimens  of  this  form  occurred 
in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  Sept.  19,  1900,  outside  Forvisnings 
Valley,  from  a  depth  of  2—20  fathoms. 


40  G.  O.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Suborder  Califfoida. 
Fam.  Caligidte. 

136.  Lepeophtheirus  sp. 

Three  specimens  of  a  Caligoid  in  the  metanauplius  stage,  appa- 
rently belonging  to  a  species  of  the  above  genus,  were  found  in  a 
bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Order  Ostracoda. 

Suborder  Myodocopa. 

Fam.  Cypiidinidsa. 

137.  Philomedes  brenda  (BAIRD). 

Female  specimens  of  this  form  occurred  not  unfrequently  in  3  of 
the  bottles  examined. 

Suborder  Cladocopa. 
Fam.  Polycopidse. 

138.  Polycope  orbicularis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

A  solitary  specimen  of  this  peculiar  form  was  found  in  a  bottle 
of  specimens  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the  bay  at  Land's  End. 

Suborder  JPodocopa. 

r 

Fam.  Cytheridse. 

139.  Cythereis  conc/nna,  BRADY. 
Found  not  unfrequently  in  4  of  the  bottles  examined. 

140.  Cythereis  emarginata,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Together  with  the  preceding  species,  but  less  frequent. 

141.  Cythereis  angulata,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Only  2  specimens  found. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  41 

142.  Cytherura  atra,  G.  0.  SARS. 

A  male  specimen,  apparently  of  this  species,  occurred  in  a  bottle 
of  specimens  taken  on  July  18,  1901,  at  the  mouth  of  Gaase  Fjord 
from  a  depth  of  about  60  m. 

143.  Xestoleberis  depressa,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Found  not  unfrequently  in  3  of  the  bottles  examined. 

144.  Sclerochilus  contortus  (NORMAN). 

Several  specimens  of  this  form  were  found  in  4  different  bottles. 

145.  Cytheropteron  subcircinatum,  G.  0.  SARS. 
Only  2  specimens  found. 

146.  Paradoxostoma  variabile  (Baird). 
Rather  abundant  in  some  of  the  bottles. 

147.  Paradoxostoma  obliqvum,  G.  0.  Sars. 

Two  specimens  of  this  distinct  species,  which,  in  the  shape  of  the 
shell,  somewhat  resembles  a  barnacle-larva  in  the  pupa  stage,  were 
found  in  a  bottle  of  specimens  taken  on  July  13,  1900,  in  the  bay  at 
Land's  End. 

Order  Cirripedia. 

Suborder  Thoracica. 

Fam.  Balanidse. 

148.  Balanus  balanoides,  LIN. 

On  small  stones  on  the  beach,  from  2  different  places. 

149.  Balanus  porcatus,  COSTA. 

Large  clusters  of  this  characteristic  form  were  taken  up  in  the 
dredge  from  moderate  depths  in  many  different  places. 

150.  Verruca  Stromi  (MULL.). 

On  old  shells  taken  on  July  26,  1900,  off  the  western  shore,  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Stordal. 


42  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

Subclass 

F*ycnog-onidea. 

Fam.  Pallenidse. 

151.  Pseudopallene  circularis  (Gooosra). 

A  single  specimen  of  this  form  was  taken  on  July  12,  1900,  in  the 
bay  at  Land's  End. 

Fam.  Nymphonidse. 

152.  Nymphon  grossipes,  KROYER. 

Two  adult  and  a  young  specimen  of  this  form  were  taken  on  Aug. 
16,  1901,  from  about  7  fathoms. 

153.  Chsetonymphon  hirtipes  (BELL). 

Two   specimens    of  this  common   arctic  form  are  in  the  collection, 
the  one  from  Gaase  Fjord,  the  other  from  Ren  Bay,  Ellesmere  Land. 

Fam.  Eurycydidse. 

154.  Eurycyde  hispida,  (KROYER). 
One  specimen  taken  on  Aug.  7,  1900,  at  Ostkap. 


1898-1902.   No.  18.1  CRUSTACEA.  43 


Explanation  of  the  Plates. 


PI.  I. 

Stephos  arcticus,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  80  diameters. 

„  2.  A  male  specimen,  viewed  from  left  side ;  same  amplification. 

„  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Masticatory  part  of  mandible. 

„  5.  Mandibular  palp. 

„  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  9.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  11.  Leg  of  last  pair  in  female. 

„  12.  Last  pair  of  legs  in  male,  viewed  from  the  posterior  face. 

„  13.  Terminal  joint  of  left  leg  of  same,    more   highly   magnified  and 
viewed  from  the  outer  side. 


PI.   II. 

Zaus  Aurelii,  POPPE. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  ovigerous  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  104  diameters. 

„      2.  Rostral  plate,  with  right  anterior  antenna. 

„      3.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„      4.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„      5.  Leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„      6.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

Psamathe  Arthuri  (POPPE). 

Fig.  7.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  68  diameters. 

„      8.  Anterior  antenna. 

„      9.  Mandible  with  palp. 

„    10.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

,.    11.  Leg  of  last  pair. 


44  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

PL  III. 
Idycea  inflata,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  ovigerous  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  104  diameters. 

„  2.  Anterior  antenna. 

.,  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Mandible  with  palp. 

..  5.  Maxilla. 

„  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

..  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  9.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  4th  pair. 

..  11.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  12.  Left  caudal   ramus  with   adjoining  part  of  urosome,    exhibiting 

the  peculiar  structure  of  the  caudal  setae. 

„  13.  Anterior  antenna  of  male. 

„  14.  Leg  of  last  pair  in  same. 

„  15.  Genital  lobe  of  same. 

PI.  IV. 
Phyllothalestris  frigida  (Sccir). 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  86  diameters. 

„  2.  Same  viewed  from  left  side. 

..  3.  Anterior  antenna. 

r  4.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  5.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

..  6.  Leg  of  1st  pair  in  male. 

„  7.  Inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  in  same. 

4,  8.  Leg  of  last  pair  in  female. 

..  9.  Same  leg  in  male. 


PI.  V. 
Dactylopusia  glacialis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  104  diameters. 

„      2.  Rostral  projection. 

„      3.  Anterior  antenna. 

„      4.  Posterior  antenna. 

„      5.  Mandible  with  palp. 

„      6.  Maxilla. 

„      7.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„      8.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„      9.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„    10.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„    11.  Left  caudal  ramus. 

„    12.  Leg  of  2nd  pair  in  male. 

„    13.  Leg  of  last  pair  in  male. 


1898-1902.  No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  45 

PI.   VI. 
Idomene  coronata  (Scorr). 

Fig.  1.  Adult   ovigerous   female,  dorsal   view,   magnified  104-  diameters. 

„  2.  Rostral  plate  with  left  anterior  antenna. 

„  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Mandible  with  palp. 

„  5.  Maxilla. 

„  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  9.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  4th  pair. 

„  11.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

PI.  VII. 
Amphiascus  latifolius,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult   ovigerous  female,   dorsal  view,    magnified   124  diameters. 

„  2.  Rostrum  with  left  anterior  antenna. 

„  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Mandible  with  palp. 

..  5.  Maxilla. 

„  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  9.  Leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  11.  Left  caudal  ramus,  with  adjoining  part  of  urosome. 

„  12.  Inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  in  male. 

PI.  VIII. 

Amphiascus  congener,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  124  diameters. 

„      2.  Rostrum  with  right  anterior  antenna. 

„      3.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„      4.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

Amphiascus  polaris,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  5.  Adult   ovigerous   female,   dorsal  view,    magnified  124  diameters. 

„      6.  Rostrum  with  left  anterior  antenna. 

„      7.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„      8.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„      9.  Inner  ramus  of  2nd  pair  of  legs  in  male. 

„    10.  Leg  of  last  pair  of  same. 

Amphiascus  brevis,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  11.  Adult  ovigerous  female,    dorsal  view,  magnified  124  diameters. 

„      12.  Rostrum. 

„      13.  Anterior  antenna. 

„      14.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„      15.  Leg  of  last  pair. 


46  G.  0.  SARS.  [SEC.  ARC.  EXP.  FRAM 

PI.   IX. 

Canthocamptus  Nordenskjoldi,  LILLJEB. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  104-  diameters. 

„  2.  Anterior  antenna. 

„  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

.,  4.  Mandible  with  palp. 

..  5.  Maxilla. 

..  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

'  „  9.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  11.  Leg  of  4th  pair. 

„  12.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  13.  Left  caudal  ramus. 

..  14.  Inner  ramus  of  3rd  pair  of  legs  in  mule. 

„  15.  Leg  of  last  pair  of  same. 

PL  X. 
Parameira  elongata,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  104  diameters. 

.,  2.  Anterior  antenna. 

„  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

.,  4.  Mandible  with  palp. 

..  5.  Maxilla. 

.,  6.  Anterior  maxilliped. 

„  7.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  8.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

..  9.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  10.  Leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  11.  Leg  of  4th  pair. 

„  12.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  13.  Left  caudal  ramus  with  adjoining  part  of  the  anal  segment. 

PI.  XL 
Laophonte  applanata,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  ovigerous  female,   dorsal    view,    magnified    124  diameters. 

„  2.  Rostral  projection  with  right  anterior  antenna. 

..  3.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  5.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  6.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  7.  Inner  ramus  of  a  leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  8.  Inner  ramus  of  a  leg  of  4th  pair. 

„  9.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  10.  Left  caudal  ramus. 

„  11.  Inner  ramus  of  a  leg  of  3rd  pair  in  male. 

„  12.  Leg  of  last  pair  in  same. 


1898-1902.   No.  18.]  CRUSTACEA.  47 

PI.  XII. 
Laophonte  hyperborea,  G.  0.  SARS. 

Fig.  1.  Adult  female,  dorsal  view,  magnified  124  diameters. 

„  2.  Same  viewed  from  left  side. 

„  3.  Rostral  projection  with  left  anterior  antenna. 

„  4.  Posterior  antenna. 

„  5.  Posterior  maxilliped. 

„  6.  Leg  of  1st  pair. 

„  7.  Leg  of  2nd  pair. 

„  8.  Leg  of  last  pair. 

„  9.  Inner  ramus  of  a  leg  of  2nd  pair  in  male. 

„  10.  Male,  inner  ramus  of  a  leg  of  3rd  pair. 

„  11.  Same,  leg  of  4th  pair. 

„  12.  Same,  leg  of  last  pair. 


Printed  1st  June,  1909. 


n.i. 


Rep.of  the2  ^  Norweg.Arct.Expedin  the  Fram  1898-1902   N°18 


'.Sars 


.autogn  StephOS 


G.O.Sars.    Norsl<  L<th9r0ffic'n 


Rep.of  the2^  Norweg.ArcLExped.in  the  Fram  1898-1902   N° 


pi.n. 

18. 


G.O.Sars.autogr 


1~6  ZaUS 
7—11 


Norsk  LithgrOfficin 


PLffl. 


Rep.oFthe2^  Norweg.Anct.Exped.inthe  Fram  1898-1902    N?18, 


j. 


inflata,  G.O.Sars. 


c  Li 


PUT: 

Rep.oF  the2  If  Norweg.Arct.Exped.in  the  Fram  1898-1902   N?18. 


nd 


Phyj|othalestris  frigidafScott.) 


JTl.  V. 


Rep.ofthe2™  Norweg.Arct.Exped.in  the  Fram  1898~1902   N°18 


>.Sars,autogr  DactybpUSia   glaclalls,  G.O.SarS.     Norsk  LithgrO 


LVL 


Rep.ofthe2_  Norweg.Arct.Exped.inthe  Fram  '1898-1902   N°18 


P5, 


rLVIL 


Rep.ofthe2™  Norweg.Ard.Exped.in  the  Fram  1898-1902    N?18 


/ 


j. 


Amphiascus  lat'ifelius,  G.O.Sars 


Norsk  LithgrOfficin 


Rep.of  the2"J  Norweg.Arct.Exped.m the  Fram  1898-1902    N?18. 


G.o.sars.autogr  -|_^  Amphiascus  congener,  G.O.Sars  .Norsk  Lith9r:0 
5~10         "  polaris   ,  G.O.Sars. 


PI  IX 
Rep.ofthe21  Norweg.Arct  Exped.in  the  Fram  1898-1902   N?18, 


G.O.Sars 


°9r  Canthocamptus  Nordenskjoldi  Lillj'eb. 


Norsk 


P1.X. 

Rep.of -the2™  Norweq.ArctExped.inthe  Fram  1898-1902   N?18. 


nd 


). 


elongata,  G.O.Sars. 


Norsk  LithgrOfficin 


PLXL 

Rep.of  the2^  Norweg.Arct.Exped.in  the  Fram  1898~1902    N?18 


nd 


i- 


Laophonte  app!anatarG.O.Sars.   Norsk 


PLXII 
Rep.ofthe21J  Norweq.Arct.Exped.in  the  Fram  1898-1902   N?16 


G.O.Sars,autogr:          Laophonte  hyperborea,G.O.SarS.    Norsk  Lithgr Off. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  19. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS: 

STRAY  CONTRIBUTIONS 

TO  THE 

BOTANY  OF  NORTH  DEVON 

AND  SOME  OTHER  ISLANDS,  VISITED  IN  1900-1902 
WITH  ONE  MAP  IN  THE  TEXT 

AND    AN 

ALPHABETICAL  INDEX 

TO  No.  2,  FLORA  OF  ELLESMERELAND,  No.  16,  PLANTS  OF  N.  VV.  GREENLAND, 

AND  THIS  PAPER 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED   BY   A.W.BR0GGER 

1909 


jc\.s  the  Expedition's  principal  field  of  work  lay  in  Ellesmereland, 
and  as  only  in  a  few  instances  had  I  any  opportunity  of  visiting  other 
parts  of  the  Arctic  American  Archipelago,  the  contributions  to  the  botani- 
cal exploration  of  that  region  which  I  have  been  able  to  make  have,  for 
the  most  part,  reference  to  the  Ellesmereland  flora  and  vegetation.  The 
former  is  treated  in  my  Fl.  Ellesm.,  about  the  latter  I  hope  soon  to  get 
an  opportunity  of  publishing  a  paper.  From  our  three  quarters,  in  the 
south  coast,  however,  some  expeditions  were  made  which  brought  home 
some  small  materials  of  plants  and  observations  from  the  south-west  and 
west  also.  For  my  own  part,  I  visited  in  1900  and  1902  a  few  points  on 
the  coast  of  N.  Devon;  in  1901  and  1902  different  points  in  the  island 
of  N.  Kent;  and  in  1902  the  two  small  islets  Castle  Island  and  Devils 
Isle  off  the  coast  of  N.  Devon.  As  these  short  visits  were  made  in  the 
favorable  season,  I  think  I  can  give  a  tolerably  adequate  idea  of  the 
botanical  features  of  these  places.  Still  worse  is  the  case  with  the  con- 
tributions to  the  botany  of  some  other  places  where  I  have  not  myself 
been  and  which  were  only  visited  in  the  spring  sledging  expeditions  by 
other  members  of  the  expedition.  Mr.  SGHEI  especially  has  thus  contri- 
buted to  the  botanical  exploration;  his  collections  and  notes  were  made 
on  Graham  Island,  in  Heiberg  Land,  and  in  N.  Devon. 

The  places  where  collections  are  made  are  shown  in  the  sketch-map 
on  the  next  page  where  they  are  marked  by  their  names  or  by  numbers 
corresponding  with  those  in  the  text. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.       5 


I.    North  Devon. 

Certain  parts  of  the  large  island  of  North  Devon  were  visited  during 
the  FRANKLIN  Search  expeditions  and  some  plants  brought  home  by 
members  of  them.  These  collections,  however,  are  made  quite  casually 
by  officers  not  specially  entrusted  with  botanical  work,  and  in  most  cases 
only  a  few  specimens  have  been  brought  home  from  each  place.  The 
only  station  for  which  perhaps  a  somewhat  more  comprehensive  list 
might  be  compiled  from  the  specimens  in  the  London  collections,  is 
Beechey  Island— the  first  winter-quarter  of  the  ill-fated  FRANKLIN  Expe- 
dition and  afterwards  the  rendez-vous  for  the  different  parties  engaged 
in  the  search  for  the  missing  expedition.  Further,  some  collections  were 
made  at  other  points  of  the  same  neighbourhood,  and  along  the  shore 
of  the  Wellington  Channel  Dr.  M'CORMICK  and  others  observed  or  col- 
lected a  few  plants.  The  north  coast,  however,  was  in  great  part  not 
even  mapped  out  in  1900,  and,  when  we  first  visited  it,  not  a  single  note 
about  its  flora  existed. 

The  contributions  to  the  botany  of  N.  Devon  were  brought  home 
from  the  following  points:  — 

1.  Boat  Cape  lat.  75°  58'  long.  90°  25' 

2.  Point  in  Viks  Fjord  75°  52'  90°  45' 

3.  Bottom  of  Viks  Fjord  75°  57'  91°  40' 

4.  Low  ness  in  West  Fjord        76°  8'  90°  10' 

5.  Cape  Vera  76°  13'  89°  25' 

6.  Near  large  glacier  76°  17'  89°  40' 

7.  Mount  Belcher  76°  29'  90°  54' 

1.     Boat  Cape. 

This  locality  was  visited  by  a  party  on  July  26,  1901,  and  Mr.  SCHEI 
noted  here  Dryas  integrifolia  in  flower  and  plenty  of  Salix  arctica'. 
He  also  brought  home  a  little  collection  which  contained :  Papaver 


H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


radicatum  (3841),  Alsine  verna  (3837),  Festuca  ovitia  (3839),  Poa  ab- 
breviata  (3840),  Catabrosa  algida  (3838),  and  two  mosses  (3842) :  Camp- 
tothecium  nitens  and  Brachythecium  salebrosum  (cf.  BRYHN1,  Bryo- 
phyta,  p.  245). 

2.  Point  in  Viks  Fjord. 

The  place  was  visited  by  the  same  party  on  July  27,  1901,  and 
Mr.  SCHEI  here  noted  Saxifraga  nivalis,  S.  Hirculus,  Polygonum  mm 
parum,  Dryas  integrifolia,  Cassiope  tetragona,  and  some  grasses. 
Vegetation  scarce. 

3.  Bottom  of  Viks  Fjord. 

Visited  by  the  same  party,  July  29,  1901.  Mr.  SCHEI  noted  about 
the  vegetation  here  that  it  was  very  scanty.  Around  some  lakelets  in 
the  low  land  there  was  a  vegetation  of  grasses  (Carices  or  Eriophora?) 
and  on  the  dry  ledges  a  few  flowering  dicotyledoneous  plants,  the  species 
of  which  were,  however,  not  noted.  Mr.  SCHEI  found  the  cause  of  this 
poverty  in  the  geological  nature  of  the  soil  which  is  formed  only  of  the 
debris  of  the  same  heavy,  brownish  limestone  which  in  Ellesmereland 
also  formed  the  poorest  of  all  soils.  At  the  last  mentioned  locality  this 
limestone  was  interlaid  with  argillaceous  slate  and  marlslate  and  there- 
fore had  made  possible  the  development  of  a  somewhat  richer  vegetation. 

4.  Low  ness  in  the  outer  part  of  West  Fjord. 

After  leaving  our  winter-quarters  in  Harbour  Fjord  we  anchored  at 
this  place,  August  11,  1900.  Our  stay  was,  however,  too  short  to  allow 
me  time  for  more  than  a  very  brief  trip  over  the  nearest  part  of  the 
low  ness,  which  was  formed  solely  of  limestone  of  the  same  poor  quality 
as  that  which  generally  builds  up  both  those  parts  of  N.  Devon  and  the 
outher  parts  of  the  Ellesmereland  coast  opposite.  As  usual,  this  soil  of 
the  limestone  ledges  and  debris  of  the  same  material  proved  utterly  poor, 
and  I  could  not  manage  to  visit  the  cliffs  at  the  point  where  the  rooke- 
ries of  gulls  and  guillemots  doubtless  formed  a  somewhat  richer  field. 

The  area  I  traversed  certainly,  even  had  there  been  better  time  for 
its  inspection,  would  have  yielded  little  more  than  is  shown  by  the 


1  N.  BRYHN,    Bryophyta    in  itinere  polar!  norvagorum  secundo  collecta.      Rep.  sec. 
norw.  arct.  exp.,  II,  No.  11,  Kristiania  1906,  (quoted:  "BRYHN,  Bryophyta"). 


1888—1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.        7 

scanty  list  which  follows  below.  The  densest  vegetation  was  found  along 
some  small  brooks  and  around  some  shallow  ponds  near  the  shore  where, 
however,  mosses  decidedly  formed  the  most  prominent  constituent  of  the 
verdure.  The  flowering  plants  obtained  were:—  Saxifraga  cernua  (2629), 
S.  groenlandica  (2632),  S.  nivalis,  S.  oppositifolia,  Potentilla  pulchella, 
Dry  as  integrifolia,  Draba  alpina  (2630),  D.  subcapitata  (2627),  Cock- 
learia  officinalis  var.  groenlandica  (2628),  Papaver  radicatum  (2626), 
Cerastium  alpinum,  Stellaria  longipes,  Alsine  verna  (2623),  A.  Rossii 
(2631),  Salix  arctica,  Glyceria  Vahliana  (2657),  G.  distans  var.  vagi- 
nata  {2625),  Catabrosa  algida  (2624),  Juncus  biglumis.  Mr.  SCHEI 
found  besides  Saxifraga  stellaris  var.  comosa  and  S.  rivularis.  No 
Carices  or  Eriophora  wore  found  in  the  ponds. 

The  list  of  mosses  (BRYHN.  Bryophyta,  p.  204 — 205)  contains  33  spe- 
cies. The  most  prominent  among  them  were  Tortula  ruralis  and  the  large 
Hypna,  such  as  H.  uncinatutn,  H.  turgescens,  H.  Bambergeri.  The 
lichens  and  algae  are  not  yet  determined,  but  I  may  mention  that  blue- 
green  algae  were  found  in  great  masses  in  the  ponds  and  also  form- 
ing layers  on  moist  stones  and  clay.  Along  the  margin  of  one  of  the 
ponds  lay,  on  a  long  stretch,  a  layer  of  organic  remains,  principally 
blue-green  algae  and  diatoms,  in  a  halfdried  condition  and  from  10  to 
15  cm.  thick.  In  one  of  the  rivulets  I  also  found,  growing  on  stones 
and  lying  loose,  an  Enteromorpha  which  I  have  previously  found  in 
several  places  in  Ellesmereland.  It  belongs,  as  far  as  I  have  as  yet 
had  any  opportunity  of  ascertaining,  to  an  undescribed  species. 


5.     Cape  Vera. 

This  place  was  first  visited  by  Mr.  SCHEI,  July  22,  1901  and  after- 
wards by  myself,  July  14 — 15,  1902.  Cape  Vera  forms  the  end  of  a 
long,  pointed  naze  between  the  West  Fjord  and  the  narrow  western  part 
of  Jones  Sound.  Even  as  we  steamed  past  it  in  August,  1900,  I  had 
observed  a  rather  dense  verdure  in  some  parts  of  the  low  foreland  in 
front  of  the  high  wall  of  limestone  cliffs  which  forms  the  interior  of  the 
ness.  This  mountain,  the  Fulmar  Petrel  Cliff,  reaches  a  height  of  per- 
haps 1500  feet  and  descends  in  a  rather  abrupt  wall  towards  the 
low  land,  intersected  by  numerous  narrow  ravines  and  flanked  by  high 
pyramids  and  obelisks  of  limestone.  On  the  top  of  the  cliffs  there  is  a 
fairly  wide  neve,  feeding  a  good-sized  glacier  which  flows  down  some- 
what further  west  on  the  north  side.  The  cliffs  are  built  up  of  the 
same  hard  limestone  as  those,  to  the  east,  and  would  consequently  be 


H.G.SIMMONS.  [SEG.ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


rather  poor  in  plant  life  were  it  not  that  their  ledges  are  apt  to  be  used 
as  a  rookery  where  millions  of  fulmar  petrels  breed.  Thus  the  slopes 
below  become  abundantly  manured,  and  both  the  slopes  of  limestone 
debris  and  the  inner  parts  of  the  foreland  are  covered  with  a  dense  ver- 
dure formed,  for  the  greater  part,  of  mosses  but  also  of  flowering  plants. 
On  the  southern  side  the  foreland  consists  mostly  of  limestone  debris, 
on  the  northern,  to  a  considerable  extent  of  clay  also.  Here  the  vege- 
tation is,  as  usually  in  the  clay-plains,  rather  open,  and  consists  chiefly 
of  flowering  plants.  In  the  foreland  there  are  also  some  shallow  ponds, 
encircled  by  the  usual  rim  of  mosses  with  a  few  higher  plants  strewn  in. 

On  the  surface  of  the  snowdrifts  lying  in  the  ravines,  and  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  slopes,  "red  snow"  appeared  in  greater  abundance  than 
I  have  seen  anywhere  else;  and  in  the  rivulets,  on  inundated  ground 
and  in  the  ponds  many  algae,  especieally  blue-green  ones,  were  growing 
Dr.  BRYHN  has  given  an  account  of  the  mosses  (Bryophyta.  pp.  245, 
249 — 251),  and  it  may  therefore  be  enough  to  point  out  that  he  has  found 
not  less  than  50  species  in  my  collection  from  this  locality. 

The  flowering  plants  noted  or  collected  at  Cape  Vera  are:—  Dryas 
integrifolia,  Saxifraga  oppositifolia  (3843),  8.  flagellarls,  S.  nivalis 
3830),  5.  cernua,  S.  groenlandica  (3846),  Draba  alpina  (3836,  3841), 
D.  alpina  var.  glacialis  (3826),  D.  subcapitata  (3829),  Cochlearia  offi- 
cinalis  var.  groenlandica  (3841),  Papaver  radicatum  with  f.  Hartia- 
num  (3828),  Ranunculus  sulphureus,  Cerastium  alpinum  (3824),  Stel- 
laria  longipes  (3850),  Alsina  verna  (3837),  Oxyria  digyna,  Salix  arc- 
tica,  Juncus  biglumis,  Festuca  ovina  var.  supina  (3839),  Poa  abbre- 
viata  (3840),  P.  cenisia  (and  f.  prolifera),  Glyceria  distans  (4016). 
Catabrosa  algida  (3838),  Alopecurus  alpinus  (3825).  I  may,  of  course, 
have  overlooked  some  species  or  other,  but  I  was  especially  struck  by 
the  absence  of  such  common  plants  as  f.  inst.  Pedicularis  hirsnta,  and 
I  also  sought  in  vain  for  Eriophora  and  Carices. 

6.     East  of  the  large  glacier  west  of  Cape  Hawes. 

During  our  stay  here,  July  17,  1902,  I  was  chiefly  occupied  in  dred- 
ging, but  I  could  easily  see  that  this  place  would  not  yield  in  any  case 
more  than  a  few  of  the  most  common  species  such  as  Saxifraga  op- 
positifolia, Papaver  radicatum,  Draba  alpina,  Cerastium  alpinum, 
etc.,  which  were  growing  in  an  open  clay-field  below  the  cliffs. 


1898  -1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.        9 

7.     Mount  Belcher. 

I  use  this  name  for  the  mountain  opposite  Devil's  Isle,  were  a  cairn 
was  found  with  a  record  from  the  English  FRANKLIN  Search  expedition 
under  BELCHER,  as  a  sign  how  far  east  his  parties  had  proceeded.  We 
visited  the  place,  July  25,  1902,  in  our  boat  expedition,  and  I  went  over 
the  low  land  below  the  mountain  and  along  a  small  river  some  way 
inland,  ft  was  very  poor  ground,  clay  and  gravel  plains  with  scanty 
vegetation.  The  following  plants  were  noted: —  Dryas  integrifolia, 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  S.  flagellaris,  '  S.  cernua,  S.  groenlandica, 
Draba  alpina,  D.  subcapitata,  Papaver  radicatum,  Cerastium  alp- 
inum,  Stellaria  longipes,  Alsine  verna,  A.  Rossii,  Salix  arctica, 
Juncus  biglumis,  Glyceria  distans,  Catabrosa  algida,  Alopecurus 
alpinus. 

With  this  I  have  to  finish  my  notes  about  the  flora  of  Nort  Devon. 
Even  were  some  one  or  other  of  the  species  found  in  the  south-western 
parts  by  the  earlier  visitors  to  be  added,  the  whole  list  would  not  amount 
to  more  than  about  30  plants.  This,  of  course,  cannot  represent  the  real 
bulk  of  the  flora,  but  must  only  be  regarded  as  the  result  of  some  short 
trips,  made  chiefly  in  places  which  are  not  apt  to  give  rise  to  a  thriving 
vegetation.  Further  west  towards  Arthur  Fjord  there  are,  as  Captain 
BAUMANN  told  me  when  returning  from  a  trip  in  August  1900,  wide 
stretches  of  bogs  and  grass-grown  plains;  and,  in  all  probability,  the  east- 
ern parts  of  the  island  will,  some  time,  turn  out  to  be  still  richer,  as 
they  are  built  up  of  primary  rocks,  and  will  doubtless  present  a  greater 
likeness  to  South-Eastern  Ellesmereland  with  its  richer  flora.  It  would 
be  of  great  interest  to  get  some  knowledge  of  this  region,  as  it  forms 
the  natural  way  of  migration  from  Baffin's  Land  northward  over  primary 
rock  uninterrupted  by  less  favorable  soil.  From  this  point  of  view,  it  is 
also  very  much  to  be  regretted  that  the  leader  of  the  expedition  did  not 
allow  any  time  for  an  exploration  of  Goburg  Island,  which  in  other  re- 
spects also  would  have  been  of  considerable  interest.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  these  fairly  accessible  regions  will  be  examined  in  a  not  too  distant 
future. 


10  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


II.    Castle  Island  and  Devil's  Isle. 

1.     Castle  Island. 

For  the  little  island  lying  off  Cape  Vera  in  about  lat.  76°  10'  and 
long.  89°  20'  I  use  this  name  which,  after  conferring  with  Captain 
SVERDRUP,  I  had  already  used  in  my  Prel.  Rep.1  instead  of  the  name 
"St.  Helena"  which  we  had  jestingly  given  it,  without  any  thought  of 
retaining  it  later.  The  name  used  above  is  rather  appropriate  on  account 
of  the  ruin-like  forms  which  the  withered  limestone  cliffs  of  the  islet 
have  assumed. 

The  island  was  first  visited  by  a  party  in  1901,  and  Mr.  SCHEI 
made  some  collections  and  notes  there,  July  21.  In  1902  I  myself  had 
an  opportunity  of  visiting  it;  and  as  we  were  obliged  to  stay  there  from 
July  9  to  14,  I  had  leisure  for  a  very  thorough  examination  of  its  flora. 

Castle  Island  is  entirely  built  up  of  Silurian  limestone  of  the  same 
hard,  siliciferous  kind  as  that  which  forms  the  adjacent  part  of  N.  Devon 
and  also  the  outer  coast  of  S.  W.  Ellesmereland.  The  highest  part  of 
the  island  rises  about  200  feet,  sloping  to  the  east,  and  surrounded  by 
low  cliffs,  some  of  very  curious  shapes,  showing  that  the  lower  parts  of 
the  island  have  emerged  rather  recently  from  the  sea.  Terraces  of 
limestone  debris,  also  formed  below  the  sea-level,  surround  some  parts 
of  the  rocks ;  in  some  places  there  is  a  talus  of  debris  fallen  down  from 
the  highest  part;  and  lastly  there  are  some  small  patches  of  clay.  Now 
this  is  indeed  a  very  poor  soil,  and  would  allow  the  existence  of  only 
a  very  few  plants  had  not  numerous  birds  chosen  the  little  islet  for 
their  breeding  place.  On  several  of  the  higher  rocks  were  nests  of  the 
large  gulls,  Larus  glaucus  and  L.  argentatus,  the  black  guillemot  nested 
everywhere  in  the  cracks  of  the  rocks,  there  was  a  colony  of  terns  in 
the  low  gravel  plain,  and  lastly  numerous  eiderducks  bred  everywhere 
around  the  base  of  the  cliffs.  The  reason  why  so  many  birds  seek 
refuge  here  is,  as  may  easily  be  discovered,  that  the  strong  current  of 


1   An  explanation  of  the  abridged  titles  is  to  be  found  in  my  Ellesmereland  Flora. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.      11 

western  Jones  Sound  always  keeps  the  ice  in  motion  around  the  island, 
and  thus  produces  open  water  early  in  the  summer,  so  as  to  keep  away 
the  fox  from  the  island  during  de  breeding-season.  This  bird  life  has, 
of  course,  considerably  enriched  the  meagre  soil  of  the  island;  still  the 
central  ridge  and  its  talus  are  almost  void  of  vegetation,  except  for  some 
lichens  and  small  patches  of  moss,  or  some  scanty  tufts  of  grass,  etc. 
around  the  gulls'  nests.  The  terraces  of  limestone  gravel  also  are  very 
poor.  Indeed,  most  of  the  pebbles  are  covered  with  lichens,  among 
which  Xantoria  elegans  as  usual  catches  the  eye ;  but  only  at  wide 
intervals  is  to  be  found  a  little  tuft  of  moss  or  a  small  individual  of 
a  flowering  plant. 

The  mosses,  which  form  the  most  prominent  part  of  the  vegetation, 
apart  from  the  not  yet  determined  lichens,  are  mostly  found  near  the 
base  of  the  cliff  where  some  water  trickles  down,  and  in  some  moist 
depressions  or  patches  of  clay.  The  flowering  plants,  which  are  very 
few  both  in  number  of  species  and  of  individuals,  grow  mostly  among 
moss.  The  following  flowering  plants  were  found:  —  Saxifraga  cernua 
(the  most  common  species),  S.  oppositifolia  (surprisingly  scarce), 
S.  groenlandica,  Draba  hirta  (4017),  D.  subcapitata  (4017),  Cochlearia 
officinalis  var.  groenlandica,  Papaver  radicatum,  Cerastium  alpinum, 
Glyceria  distans  var.  vaginata  (4017),  Catabrosa  algida  (4017,  chiefly 
around  the  gulls'  nests),  Alopecurus  alpinus. 

The  moss  collection  I  brought  home  contained  31  species  (BRYHN, 
Bryophyta,  p.  254—255)  of  which  9  are  not  present  in  the  collection 
from  Cape  Vera,  but  of  these,  two  were  found  again  on  Devil's  Isle. 


2.     Devil's  Isle. 

This  little  rock,  lying  off  the  coast  of  North  Devon  north  of  the 
entrance  to  Norfolk  Inlet  in  lat.  76  °  29',  long.  90  °  40',  was  only  visited 
daring  our  last  boat  journey;  but  as  we  lay  ice-bound  there  from  July 
19  to  30,  1902,  with  the  exception  of  two  days,  when  we  were  able 
to  take  a  trip  over  to  the  vicinity  of  Mount  Belcher  (see  above,  p.  9), 
I  had  more  than  sufficient  time  for  a  very  accurate  examination  of  its 
vegetation.  The  whole  island  is  small  enough  to  be  walked  round  in 
half  an  hour.  It  has  the  shape  of  an  obliquely  cut  cone,  about  200  feet 
high.  The  highest,  point  lies  at  the  eastern  end  and  is  accessible  only 
from  the  west  where  there  is  a  gentle  slope;  all  the  other  sides  are 
almost  vertical,  but  there  is  a  narrow  strip  of  ground  running  round 
below  the  steep  wall.  The  material  of  the  rock  here  also  is  limestone, 


12  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

but  of  a  somewhat  less  hard  kind  than  in  Castle  Island,  with  less  sili- 
cate and  more  clay. 

However  it  would  form  still  a  very  poor  soil  were  it  not  inhabited 
by  rather  many  birds.  There  are  more  gulls  than  in  Castle  Island, 
quite  a  colony  of  terns  and  also  some  eider-ducks.  Some  of  the  gulls' 
nests  are  very  old,  forming  small  hillocks,  built  up  of  a  mixture  of 
pebbles,  bones  of  different  animals,  feathers,  moss,  dung  of  the  birds  etc. 
Some  of  them  are  clothed  with  a  dense  vegetation  of  Cochlearia, 
Catabrosa,  Glyceria  distans,  and  somewhere  also  Saxifraga  groen- 
landica.  In  the  lower  parts  of  the  island  the  rock  is  covered  with  a 
layer  of  pebbles,  or  here  and  there  with  clay.  The  debris,  and  partly 
also  the  rocks,  are  more  or  less  covered  with  lichens  in  places  where 
water  trickles  down  from  some  small  snowdrifts  with  green  and  blue- 
green  algae  also,  as  for  instance  Phormidium  sp.  At  the  western  end 
there  was  a  large  snowdrift  stretching  inland  from  the  ice  foot,  and  as 
a  little  rivulet  that  carried  organic  material  from  the  breeding-places 
flowed  over  it,  there  was  developed  a  vegetation  of  different  algae  on 
the  snow,  which  appeared  partly  red,  partly  green.  I  have  not  yet  had 
time  to  examine  the  algae  collected  here. 

The  number  of  species  contained  in  the  collection  of  mosses  which 
I  brought  together  from  the  rocks,  from  among  the  pebbles,  and  espe- 
cially from  the  moist  depressions  and  irrigated  places  as  well  as  from 
the  gulls'  rookery,  reaches  35  (BRYHN,  Bryophyta,  p.  251 — 253).  Of 
these,  3  are  found  neither  in  Castle  Island  nor  at  Cape  Vera;  2  in  the 
former  locality  but  not  in  the  latter.  The  list  of  flowering  plants 
embraces  the  following  species :  -  Saxifraga  oppositifolia  (somewhat 
moi;e  abundant  than  in  Castle  Island),  S.  cernua,  S.  groenlandica  with 
f.  flavescens  (4010),  Draba  subcapitata,  Cochlearia  offtcinalis  var. 
groenlandica  (the  most  abundant  species),  Pa-paver  radicatmn  (chiefly 
near  the  top),  Glyceria  distans  var.  vaginata  (4011),  G.  angustata 
(4012),  Catabrosa  algida  (4009),  Alopecurus  alpimis. 


I  think  that  the  vegetation  of  the  two  small  islands,  Devil's  Isle 
and  Castle  Island,  may  prove  to  be  of  a  certain  interest.  They  show 
a  great  recemblance  one  to  the  other,  both  being  built  up  of  the  same 
material,  which  also  forms  the  adjacent  coast  of  North  Devon,  and  which 
is  little  fitted  for  the  development  of  vegetation;  both  of  them,  for  the 
greater  part,  have  risen  above  the  surface  of  the  sea  at  a  rather  late 
period;  both  are  inhabited  by  numerous  birds,  as  they  are  separated 


1698  - 1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.      13 

from  the  mainland  by  a  strait  in  which  the  strong  current  keeps  the  water 
open  most  of  the  year,  or  at  least  before  the  beginning  of  the  breeding- 
season.  The  distance  from  the  mainland  of  North  Devon  to  Castle 
Island  is  somewhat  less  than  two  miles,  to  Devil's  Island  less  than  one 
mile.  -  Such  short  distances  can,  of  course,  be  easily  surmounted  by 
plant-migration,  if,  for  the  transporting  of  plant  species,  we  should 
attribute  any  greater  importance  to  those  means  of  conveyance  which 
are  generally  reckoned  with  for  the  stocking  of  islands,  viz.,  wind,  birds 
and  currents  (including  floating  ice). 

We  shall  now  see  what  inferences  may  be  drawn  from  a  comparison 
of  the  plant  life  of  these  islands  with  that  of  some  neighbouring  points 
of  the  larger  islands.  Firstly  it  is  to  be  observed  that  the  number  of 
flowering  plants  is  nearly  the  same  in  both  islands,  viz.,  11  on  Castle 
Island  and  10  on  Devil's  Isle.  Two  are  found  in  the  former  alone 
(Draba  Mrta,  Cerastium  alpinumj,  one  in  the  latter  alone  (Glyceria 
angustata),  nine  are  common.  If  now  the  vegetation  of  the  nearest 
points  in  North  Devon  is  drawn  into  comparison,  we  will  see  that  all 
these  species  are  found  there  except  Glyceria  angustata,  which  may 
easily  have  been  overlooked.  The  flora  of  Mount  Belcher,  as  far  as 
known,  reckons  17  species,  that  of  Cape  Vera  24,  and  that  of  the  dry 
limestone  ness  to  the  south-west  21.  The  nearest  points  in  Ellesmere- 
land  --  Gull  Cove  and  Falcon  Cliff  —  which  have  the  same  geological 
nature,  affording  similar  conditions  of  life  as  being  breeding-places  for 
gulls  and  other  birds,  show  at  least  30  and  40  to  50  species  respectively . 
The  list  of  higher  plants  found  in  North  Kent  reaches  33. 

Thus  it  appears  that  the  two  islands  which  are  isolated  by  open 
water,  show  a  considerably  poorer  flora  than  that  of  the  mainland 
localities  under  similar  conditions,  notwithstanding  the  short  distance 
that  separates  them  from  the  nearest  land  (the  distance  over  to  Gull 
Cove  also  is  small  enough,  about  11  miles).  The  relation  of  the  flora 
of  either  of  these  islands  to  that  of  Falcon  Cliff  will  be  about  1  : 4  or 
5,  to  that  of  Gull  Cove  1:3,  to  that  of  Cape  Vera  2:5  or,  more 
probably,  about  1  : 3,  as  without  doubt  several  species  have  been  over- 
looked during  the  short  visit  to  Cape  Vera;  whereas  the  flora  of  the  islands 
must  be  looked  upon  as  thoroughly  known,  at  least  as  far  as  flowering 
plants  are  concerned.  If  we  take  the  mosses  for  comparison  we  will 
get  similar  figures.  Of  course  it  may  have  happened  that  I  did  not  get 
some  species  or  other  in  my  collections,  notwithstanding  that  I  carefully 
tried  to  make  my  moss  collections  as  complete  as  possible;  but  I  think 
we  may  look  upon  the  numbers  31  for  Castle  Island  and  35  for  Devil'a 


14  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Isle  a  very  nearly  representing  the  true  flora.  Now  we  find  for  Gape 
Vera  50  species,  which  to  probably  not  a  few  might  be  added  by  a 
closer  survey  than  that  which  I  could  make  during  my  short  visit.  For 
Gull  Cove  the  number  is  34  and  for  Falcon  Cliff  62,  both  perhaps  some- 
what too  small.  From  North  Kent  I  have  brought  home  50  species  of 
mosses. 

Now  the  question  is  to  be  approached:  how  have  the  plants  of  the 
two  small  islands  reached  thither  over  the  open  strait?  It  is  especially 
to  be  noted  that  there  are  none  of  them  that  have  fruits  or  seeds  adapted 
for  spreading  by  means  of  wind,  if  we  except  the  grasses.  Even  Dryas 
integrifolia,  which  is  so  commonly  distributed  along  both  coasts  of 
Jones  Sound  (also  at  Cape  Vera)  and  which  has  so  well-developed  a 
flying  apparatus,  is  absent  from  both  islands.  This  does  not  speak  in 
favour  of  attributing  too  great  influence  to  the  wind  in  transporting  seeds. 
The  grasses,  indeed,  especially  Alopecurus  alpinus,  might  have  come 
over  by  aid  of  the  wind,  but  they  may  also  have  used  another  mode 
of  conveyance.  Most  of  the  plants  have  small,  light  seeds  (Saxifraga 
oppositifolia  and  £  groenlandica,  Papaver,  the  Drabae,  Cochlearia, 
Cerastium)  and  may,  perhaps,  be  transported  by  the  wind,  but  for 
Saxifraga  cernua  this  mode  of  conveyance  becomes  less  acceptable, 
as  generally  it  does  not  fruit  but  is  vegetatively  propagated.  The 
bulbillae  of  this  plant  cannot  be  transported  through  the  air.  It  appears 
at  the  first  glance  that  the  flowering  plants  of  the  islands  are  nearly 
all  such  as  commonly  grow  around  the  gulls'  nests  in  the  rookeries  of 
the  mainland. 

The  spores  of  mosses  are,  of  course,  easily  transported  by  wind 
over  even  far  greater  distances  than  those  here  in  question,  and  thus 
we  might  easily  find  an  explanation  of  the  migration  of  those  plants  to 
the  islands,  if  all  mosses  were  commonly  found  in  fruit  in  the  adjacent 
lands.  But  now  the  case  in  fact  is,  that  most  mosses  in  arctic  lands 
are  always,  or  nearly  always,  found  sterile.  BRYHN,  Bryophyta,  p.  1, 
also  mentions  that  relatively  few  mosses  fruit  in  Ellesmereland  and 
elsewhere  in  our  field,  the  acrocarpic  musci  foliosi  principally;  whereas 
capsules  are  found  only  exceptionally  in  the  pleurocarpic  species.  Out 
of  the  45  species  found  in  one  or  both  of  the  two  islands,  23  are  such 
as  are  specially  mentioned  by  BRYHN  as  found  fruiting  in  my  collec- 
tions from  Ellesmereland  or  other  adjacent  regions,  and  concerning  4 
more,  he  gives  no  special  notice  as  to  fruiting  or  sterile  state,  but  as 
they  belong  to  the  acrocarpic  species,  in  part  to  such  as  are  generally 
found  fruiting,  we  may  perhaps  reckon  27.  Among  those  explicitly 


1898- 1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.       15 

mentioned  as  sterile  in  all  my  collections  are  7  acrocarp  ones,  which 
perhaps  fruit  somewhere  in  the  neighbourhood.  At  all  events,  the  per- 
centage of  species  that  are  found  fruiting  in  the  collections  as  a  whole, 
is  unsually  large  among  the  mosses  from  the  islands,  which  decidedly 
speaks  in  favour  of  the  supposition  that  only  spores  can  be  carried  so 
far  by  wind,  not  fragments  of  moss  plants. 

There  are,  however,  also  11  species  of  pleurocarpic  mosses  found 
in  the  islands,  which  are  entirely  sterile  throughout  my  collections  and 
which  are  generally  found  so  in  the  Arctic  Regions.  If  we  would  find 
the  means  of  migration  which  these  have  used  for  reaching  the  small 
islands,  I  think  we  must  look  to  the  birds.  Even  if  we  leave  out  the 
snow-bunting,  which  probably  breeds  on  Castle  Island,  and  certainly 
pays  visits  to  both,  as  well  as  the  ptarmigans  which  may  casually  fly 
over  the  strait,  we  have  the  gulls  left  which  fly  backwards  and  forwards 
between  their  rookeries  and  the  mainland,  especially  to  some  lakes  near 
Mount  Belcher,  the  only  locality  where  we  found  trout.  Now  I  do  not 
think  that  the  birds  often  carry  seeds  or  other  parts  of  plants  with  them 
casually,  even  though  it  cannot  be  denied  that  they  might  do  so,  but  I 
cannot  but  think,  that  they  have  at  some  time,  when  the  islands  were 
smaller  than  they  are  now  and  consisted  of  more  isolated,  bare  rocks, 
carried  nestbuilding  material  thither  from  the  mainland.  And  that 
material,  most  probably,  consisted  of  mosses,  especially  of  the  larger 
kinds,  that  is  to  say  the  pleurocarpic  ones,  for  instance  the  Hypna. 
But  among  the  moss,  might  easily  be  carried  seeds  and  fragments  of 
such  plants  as  are  generally  found  growing  among  moss,  viz.  the  species 
really  growing  here.  Thus  I  think  the  islands  got  their  first  flora,  some 
of  the  mosses  and  the  flowering  plants.  Afterwards,  when  these  first 
immigrants  had  spreed  in  the  island,  the  gulls  had  no  further  occasion 
for  procuring  the  material  for  their  nests  (which,  moreover,  are  used 
year  after  year)  from  afar,  and  now  immigration  by  means  of 
the  wind  only  could  take  place.  But  the  wind  carries  only  very  small 
bodies  such  as  spores,  and  therefore  the  flora,  which  is  still  in  the  act 
of  receiving  new  species  of  fruiting  mosses,  has  become  comparatively 
richer  in  such  species  than  in  other  plants;  and  the  percentage  of  mosses 
in  the  flora  as  a  whole,  is  larger  here  than  in  that  of  the  adjacent  points 
in  the  mainland  which  in  other  respects  offer  the  same  conditions  of  life. 

Of  course  the  immigration  of  these  plants  which  have  used  the  wind 
as  a  means  of  conveyance,  fruiting  mosses,  freshwater  algae,  and  lichens, 
also  dates  from  far  back,  the  last-mentioned  having  probably  been  the 
very  first  colonists.  One  mode  of  conveyance  I  have  entirely  left  out 


16  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

of  this  discussion,  viz.,  marine  currents  and  floating  ice.  The  cause  for 
excluding  this  as  a  factor  in  the  stocking  of  the  islands  here  in  question, 
lies  partly  in  the  existence  of  a  high  ice-foot  round  most  parts  of  their 
shores.  Castle  Island  was  entirely  encircled  by  an  icefoot  which  appeared 
never  to  disappear,  and,  even  had  some  part  of  the  ice-foot  along  the 
shore  of  Devil's  Isle  been  washed  away  at  the  time  of  our  visit,  I 
think  that  no  single  species  has  reached  thither  with  the  help  of  the 
water.  The  influence  of  marine  currents  in  the  dispersal  of  plants  has 
certainly  been  often  much  over-valued,  and  I  can  only  agree  with  ERNST  1 
who  writes:  rlt  has  long  been  known  that  only  a  comparatively  small 
proportion  of  plants  are  capable  of  extending  the  area  of  their  distri- 
bution by  this  means.  A  comparison  of  island  floras  has  shown  that  it 
is  exclusively  strand  plants which  have  seeds  and  fruits  posses- 
sing the  necessary  adaptations  for  this  method  of  dispersal  by  ocean- 
currents,  that  is  which  are  capable  of  floating  for  weeks  or  months  on 
sea- water,  without  losing  the  power  of  germination"  (1.  ci(  p.  5). 

But  here  we  have  not  a  single  strand  plant,  and,  as  a  rule,  the 
arctic  lands  are  rather  poor  in  halophytic  plants  which  might  stand  a 
journey  in  salt  water.  The  floating  ice,  of  course,  may  sometimes  carry 
seeds  and  fragments  of  plants  —  I  have  occasionally  seen  blocks  of  ice 
from  the  tidal  crack,  laden  with  masses  of  vegetable  matter  -  -  but  this 
does  not  prove  that  plants  can  in  fact  immigrate  by  that  means  of 
conveyance;  for  a  short  drift  within  a  fjord  or  over  a  strait,  it  may 
perhaps  sometimes  be  of  use,  if  the  ice-block  takes  the  shore  again 
before  the  plant  fragments  are  blown  into  the  w^ter  or  wetted  through; 
but  as  a  transport  over  wide  distances  it  is  certainly  not  serviceable,  as 
the  vegetable  matter  will  be  imbedded  in  the  ice  and  will  be  unable  to 
come  farther  inland  before  being  immersed  in  salt  water. 

It  may  also  be  mentioned  that  both  islands  were  formerly  visited 
by  man.  I  am  not,  indeed,  inclined  to  attribute  any  influence  for  the 
transporting  of  plants  to  these  visits,  but  where  people  have  been,  one 
has  always  the  possibility  of  human  influence  to  reckon  with.  The 
indication  of  human  visitors  to  these  islands  consisted  especially  in  a 
sort  of  shelters,  built  for  the  eider-ducks  to  place  their  nests  in.  Now 
such  shelters  are  built  in  countries  where  the  eider-duck  is  protected 
for  the  collecting  of  down;  but  it  is  not  known  that  the  Eskimo  have 
done  any  such  thing  anywhere  else,  and  this  region  has  certainly  never 
had  any  other  human  inhabitants.  Perhaps  the  shelters  may  be  attri- 


ERNST,  A.,  The  New  Flora  of  the  Volcanic  Island  of  Krakatau.     Cambridge  1908. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.DEVON.       17 

buted  to  whalers  who  may  have  been  here  during  the  time  of  the  whale- 
fishery  in  Baffin  Bay.  It  seems  strange,  however,  that  they  should 
have  undertaken  any  such  work. 

The  book  of  ERNST,  quoted  above,  contains  moreover  several  other 
points  of  interest  in  connection  with  the  problem  of  immigration  here 
in  question.  It  gives  accounts  of  the  three  botanical  investigations  under- 
taken in  the  island  of  Krakatau  after  the  great  catastrophe  which  annihi- 
lated the  old  vegetation  of  the  island,  August  26—27,  1883.  The  flora 
of  the  island  consisted,  at  the  first  visit,  three  years  after  the  eruption, 
principally  of  plants  carried  by  wind:  6  species  of  blue-green  algae, 
2  mosses,  and  11  ferns1.  TREUB  found,  besides,  seedlings  of  9  species 
of  phanerogams  and  seeds  of  some  more  plants  on  the  shore.  During 
the  following  years,  members  of  every  division  of  the  plant  kingdom 
have  immigrated,  and  ERNST,  1.  c.,  p.  38 — 45,  gives  a  list  of  137  species. 
Of  these,  45  are  cryptogamous  plants  which  almost  certainly  have  immi- 
grated by  aid  of  the  wind.  Among  the  92  phanerogams,  67  (73  %) 
are  halophytes  which  ERNST  thinks  have  been  carried  to  the  shore  by 
sea  currents;  9  species  (10  %)  he  reckons  as  certainly  imported  by  birds; 
15  species  (16  %)  as  having  been  carried  by  the  winds.  He  also  gives 
alternately  the  latter  figures  as  18  and  28,  when  more  doubtful  species 
are  included. 

Now,  indeed,  it  may  seem  that  I  have  chosen  for  comparison,  a 
district  of  to  dissimilar  a  nature;  but  I  think  it  may  be  of  some  interest 
to  put  together  these  two  instances  of  plant  migration.  Krakatau  lies 
twenty-two  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  mainland,  and  twelve 
from  the  nearest  island  which,  however,  suffered  so  greatly  from  the 
catastrophe  that,  for  a  long  time,  it  was  not  able  to  supply  much.  Still, 
we  have  here  got  137  immigrated  species  in  less  than  twenty-five  years. 
But  this  has  taken  place  in  a  tropical  region  containing  thousands  of 
species  in  the  flora  of  the  mainlands.  If  now  we  exclude  all  those 
species  which  are  halophytes  and  which  have  most  probably  been  con- 
veyed by  the  aid  of  sea-water,  we  shall  have  only  15  (28)  species  of 
phanerogams  carried  by  the  winds,  and  9  (18)  transported  by  birds. 
Only  these  and  the  cryptogams  are  of  interest  here  as,  for  various 
reasons,  transport  by  sea  currents  is  excluded  in  the  Jones  Sound  islands. 
We  thus  see  that,  even  in  the  tropics,  migration  by  aid  of  the  wind  is 
restricted  to  spores  of  cryptogams  and  to  a  very  small  number  of  seeds 


a)    TREUB,  M.,  Notice  sur  la  nouvelle  flore  de  Krakatau.    Ann.    du   Jard.  botan.  de 
Buitenzorg,  Vol.  VII,  1888. 

2 


18  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

of  higher  plants.  Neither  does  immigration  by  means  of  birds  play  any 
prominent  part,  and  I  think  it  is  only  to  the  circumstance  that  Castle 
and  Devil's  Islands  serve  as  rookeries,  that  they  owe  their  comparatively 
large  stock  of  plants  which  have  been  brought  over  as  nest-building 
material. 

Had  they  been  encircled  by  a  less  strong  current,  so  that  the  sea 
might  have  been  icebound  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year  the  flora 
would  probably  have  been  somewhat  different.  There  would  have  been  no 
rookeries,  the  birds  would  not  have  contributed  much  to  the  immigration 
of  plants,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  there  would  have  been  another  means 
of  migration  —  the  wind-transport  over  the  snow-covered  ice  in  winter. 
I  have  more  than  once  seen  that  plant  fragments  are  whirled  away  for 
long  distances  over  the  hard-blown  snow,  and  I  do  not  doubt  that  this 
means  of  transport  plays  a  prominent  part  in  the  migration  of  arctic 
plants,  many  of  which  are  wwinter-standersu.  1  also  think  that  the 
island  of  North  Kent  in  part  has  to  thank  the  fast-bound  ice  at  its 
northern  parts,  for  the  relatively  rich  flora  it  possesses.  The  ice  here 
forms  a  bridge  which  may  facilitate  immigration  both  from  Ellesrnere- 
land,  N.  Devon,  and  other  islands  to  the  west.  However,  the  geological 
nature  of  the  northern  parts  of  the  island  also  is  different  and  more 
favorable  than  that  in  Castle  and  Devil's  Islands. 


III.    North  Kent. 

Separated  from  Ellesmereland  by  the  Hell  Gate,  and  from  North 
Devon  by  Cardigan  Strait,  the  island  of  North  Kent  extends  between  lat. 
76°  27'  and  51°,  and  long.  89°  45'  and  90°  35'.  The  northern  part  of 
it  has  been  known  since  the  time  of  BELCHER'S  expedition.  It  was 
visited  by  Mr.  SCHEI  in  1900,  but  he  brought  home  neither  notes  nor 
collections.  In  1901  I  visited  the  northern  part  (July  13),  and  in  1902 
some  points  on  the  south  coast. 

The  southern  part  of  the  island  is  built  up  of  Silurian  limestone  of 
the  better,  less  siliciferous  kind;  further  north,  comes  the  same  series  of 
limestones  and  sandstones  as  in  Goose  Fjord.  Loose  deposits  are  present 
to  a  large  extent,  forming  a  far  better  soil  than  that  in  the  last-mentioned 
small  islands.  The  coast  of  N.  Kent  is,  for  the  greater  part,  formed  of 
high,  more  or  less  abrupt  cliffs  rising  to  a  height  of  perhaps  1000  feet. 
In  some  places,  there  is  a  narrow,  low  beach  below  and  a  few  valleys 
trending  inland,  but  rising  rather  precipitously  towards  the  undulating, 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.DEVON.      19 

higher  land  of  the  interior  which,  in  the  more  elevated  southern  portion, 
is  covered  with  a  large  snow  field  and  sends  out  a  glacier  down  to  Cardigan 
Strait  and  some  small  hanging-glaciers  into  some  of  the  ravines. 

During  my  first  visit  to  North  Kent,  when  I  had  not  yet  seen  Castle 
Island,  I  thought  it  very  poor  land,  and  I  have  specially  noted  that  it 
was  far  poorer  than  the  neighbouring  part  of  Ellesmereland  which  shows 
the  same  geological  character.  The  fact  that  it  is  more  difficult  for 
plants  to  reacli  the  convenient  growing-places  here  than  on  the  mainland, 
seems  to  account  for  the  relative  scarcity  of  species  of  higher  plants. 
The  vegetation  was,  however,  dense  enough  in  favorable  spots. 

The  place  (1.)  which  I  visited,  July  13,  1901,  lies  about  halfway 
between  De  Lacy  Head  and  the  easternmost  point  of  the  island.  From 
the  narrow  strip  of  foreland,  a  small  valley  or  broad  ravine  trended 
steeply  upwards  to  the  interior  plateau.  The  loose  strata,  for  the  greater 
part,  consisted  of  gravel  with  numerous  stones  of  all  sizes,  with,  in  some 
places,  also  a  considerable  admixture  of  clayish  material,  and  locally 
pure  clay,  especially  along  the  broad  shallow  brooks  which  flowed  down 
from  the  interior.  In  the  high  land  of  the  interior  also,  there  was  the 
same  gradual  transition  from  shingle  fields  to  clay  plains  strewn  with 
stones,  or  wet  clay  plains  with  open  an  vegetation.  In  some  places,  the 
rock  was  uncovered  or  only  overlaid  with  heaps  of  stones  of  different 
sizes,  somewhat  resembling  the  talus  below  the  sleeper  cliffs. 

Among  the  plants  of  the  lower  land,  Saxifraga  oppositifolia  was 
absolutely  predominant,  and  it  was  abundant  even  in  the  interior,  appe- 
aring with  flowers  of  very  different  size,  shape,  and  colour  in  different 
individuals.  Another  species,  very  common  in  all  moist  localities,  was 
Saxifraga  flagellaris,  and  the  genus  was  further  represented  by  4  more 
species,  S.  nivalis,  S.  stellaris  var.  comosa,  S.  groenlandica,  and  £ 
cernua.  Other  plants  found  here  were:  —  Dryas  integrifolia,  Poten- 
tilla  pulchella,  P.  emarginata,  Draba  alpina  with  its  var.  gracilescens, 
D.  subcapitata,  Cochlearia  officinalis  var.  groenlandica,  Papaver  radi- 
catum,  Ranunculus  nivalis,  R.  Sabinei,  Cerastium  alpinum,  Stellaria 
longipes,  Alsine  verna,  Oxyria  digyna,  Salix  arclica,  Luzula  arcuata 
var.  confusa,  L.  nivalis,  Festuca  ovina,  Poa  abbreviata,  Glyceria 
distans,  Catabrosa  algida,  Aira  caespitosa  var.  arctica,  Alopecurus 
alpinus.  Cerastium  alpinum  showed  the  same  transition,  from  large, 
hairy  forms  to  the  extreme  f.  pulvinatum,  as  found  in  some  loca- 
lities in  Ellesmereland.  Most  of  the  28  species  enumerated  above  are 
included  in  a  little  collection  in  alcohol,  which  was  all  I  could  bring 
home  of  flowering  plants  (2832). 


20  H.G.SIMMONS.  [SEC.ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

In  general,  the  flowering  plants  appeared  in  single  tufts  or  indi- 
viduals in  the  open,  bare  ground;  only  Alopecurus  formed  a  denser 
vegetation  in  some  small,  boggy  depressions,  and  Catabrosa  along  the 
brooklets  which  were  also  bordered  with  mosses  interspersed  with  some 
flowering  plants  such  as  Ranunculus  nivalis,  Draba  alpina  var.  gra- 
cilescens,  Luzula  nivalis.  In  some  parts  of  the  interior  plateau  the 
mosses  were  unusually  predominant.  BRYHN,  Bryophyta,  p.  21 1 — 213, 
has  found  not  less  than  50  species  in  my  collection  which  was  made 
during  one  single  short  excursion.  Some  of  them  occurred  in  great  ab- 
undance, as  for  instance  Hypna,  Brya,  and  others  along  the  brooks  and 
in  boggy  places,  Tortula  ruralis  in  moist  places  among  stones,  and 
especially  Rhacomitrium  canescens,  which  formed  widespread  mats  over 
the  stone  heaps  of  some  of  the  slopes.  Lichens  also  occurred  in  great 
abundance,  both  those  that  form  crusts  on  the  stones,  and  the  large 
earth-lichens  of  bushlike  genera,  such  as  Cladonia,  Cornicularia,  Ce- 
traria  and  others,  besides  Peltigera,  Gyrophora-species,  etc.  As  the 
lichens  are  not  yet  treated  of,  I  cannot  enter  further  either  upon  them 
or  upon  the  fresh  water  algae. 

In  1902,  on  returning  from  Devils  Isle,  we  visited  the  south-west 
point  of  North  Kent  (2.),  where  I  noted  the  following  species  of  flowering 
plants,  forming  a  sparse  vegetation  in  a  clayish  strip  of  foreland :  - 
Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  S.  cernua,  Draba  alpina,  Papaver  radica- 
tum,  Stellaria  longipes,  Catabrosa  algida.  Later  in  the  same  day 
(July  30),  we  camped  in  the  large  bight  on  the  south  coast  of  North 
Kent  (3.),  where  the  foreland  is  formed  of  clay  with  a  great  many  sub- 
fossil  shells,  such  as  Saxicava  rugosa,  Mya  truncata,  and  others,  and 
Lilhothamnia  in  abundance.  The  flora,  however,  was  very  poor,  consi- 
sting of  a  few  tufts  of  Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  Papaver  radicatum, 
and  Oxyria  digyna.  But  here  we  were  in  a  limestone  district. 

Further  towards  the  Hell  Gate,  however,  there  was  a  richer  vege- 
tation, as  the  high  headland  which  forms  the  south-eastern  extremity  of 
North  Kent  (4.)  is  inhabited  by  numerous  birds,  such  for  instance  as  gulls 
and  falcons.  At  this  place,  Falcon  Point,  I  noted  July  31,  1902,  Pedi- 
cularis  hirsuta,  Dryas  integrifolia,  Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  S.  niva- 
lis, S.  groenlandica,  S.  cernua,  Cardamine  bellidifolia,  Draba  alpina, 
D.  subcapitata,  Cerastium  alpinum,  Stellaria  longipes,  Alsine  verna, 
Polygonum  viviparum,  Salix  arctica,  Poa  abbreviata,  P.  glauca  f. 
prolifera  (4015),  Glyceria  distans  (4013),  G.  angustata  (4014). 

As,  however,  our  stay  at  this  point  lasted  only  for  a  very  short 
time,  while  waiting  for  the  ice  to  clear  a  passage  over  to  Ellesmereland, 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.DEVON.      21 

the  plants  were  noted  without  any  thought  of  getting  a  complete  list 
which  would  doubtless  have  been  at  least  twice  as  great  as  the  above. 
The  entire  list  of  the  North  Kent  flora  now  contains  33  species  of  phan- 
erogams and  50  mosses,  but  doubtless,  considerably  more  could  be  found 
of  these  groups  by  a  closer  inspection,  to  say  nothing  of  the  not  yet 
determined  lichens  and  algae. 


IV.    Graham  and  Buckingham  Islands. 

Mr.  SCHEI  brought  home  two  small  collections  from  his  spring  jour- 
ney in  1900  when  he  visited  these  islands.  It  is,  of  course,  impossible 
to  form  from  these  collections,  which  were  made  during  an  unfavorable 
seas'on,  any  opinion  about  the  flora  of  the  islands;  but  they  have, 
according  to  Mr.  SCHEI,  a  well  developed  vegetation.  As  the  geolog- 
ical map  of  Mr.  SCHEI  (in  SVERDRUP,  Neues  Land)  shows,  the  islands 
are  built  up  of  Mesozoic  rocks,  which  may  have  afforded  a  soil  favor- 
able enough  for  the  development  of  a  dense  vegetation,  even  if  the 
species  are  probably  few. 

1.  Graham  Island. 

This  small  island,  lying  in  about  lat.  77°  10'— 20',  long.  91°,  north 
of  Cardigan  Strait,  was  first  discovered  during  BELCHER'S  expedition. 
From  a  valley,  where  reindeer  were  found,  Mr.  SCHEI  brought  home  a 
little  sample  of  the  vegetation  containing: —  Dryas  integrifolia  (1910), 
Potentilla  emarginata  (1909),  Stellaria  longipes  (1911),  Salix  arctica 
(1912),  Luzula  arcuata  var.  confusa  (1916),  L.  nivalis  (1908),  and  one 
moss,  Rhacomitrium  lanuginosum. 

2.  Buckingham  Island. 

From  this  small  island,  lying  immediately  west  of  Graham  Island, 
Mr.  SCHEI  brought  home  only  two  plants :  —  Potentilla  emarginata  and 
Luzula  nivalis. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.  FRAM 


V.    Heiberg  Land. 

Regarding  this  large  island,  which  extends  between  lat.  78°  10',  and 
81°  20',  and  from  long.  86°  to  95°,  only  very  little  is  as  yet  known  so 
far  as  the  botanical  features  are  concerned.  Several  sledging  expedi- 
tions, however,  have  made  their  way  along  its  coasts,  and  have  taken 
trips  into  some  of  the  numerous  fjords  that  intersect  its  high,  rocky 
coast.  As  Mr.  SCHEI  visited  this  region  three  times,  we  know  that  the 
south  coast  is  built  up  of  mesozoic  strata,  as  is  also  the  eastern  shore 
except  in  the  most  northern  part,  where  carboniferous  rocks  appear. 
I  am  indebted  to  Mr.  SCHEI  for  most  of  the  botanical  material  which 
was,  however,  collected  in  an  unfavorable  season  and  so  gives  only  a 
vague  suggestion  of  the  flora  of  this  island  which  is  of  great  interest, 
as  it  probably  forms  an  important  way  of  migration  to  the  adjacent 
west  coast  of  Ellesmereland,  and  from  thence  further  east  and  over  to 
Greenland. 

The  places  in  Heiberg  Land  from  which  I  have  got  collections  and 
notes  are :  - 

1.  Hyperite  Point  about  lat.  78°  10'  long.  89° 

2.  Whit  Sunday  Bay  78°  58'             87° 

3.  Skrftling  Point  80°  15'             87°30' 

4.  Black  Wall  81°  10'             92° 

5.  Rens  Fjord  -     80°  58'             93°  30' 

The  first  place  lies  on  the  south  coast,  the  last  on  the  west,  the 
three  others  on  the  east. 

1.     Hyperite  Point. 

This  place  was  first  visited  by  Mr.  SCHEI  in  1900,  and  he  then 
brought  home  a  little  collection  in  which  I  found  Potentilla  Vahliana 
(1918),  P.  rubricaulis  (1922),  Saxifraga  oppositifolia  (1922),  S.  tricus- 
pidata  (1917),  Silene  acaulis  (1919),  Cerastium  alpinum  (1920),  Lu- 
zula  arcuata  var.  confusa  (1922),  Carex  misandra  (1922),  besides  a 
few  lichens. 

In  1901,  he  again  had  an  opportunity  of  visiting  the  same  place, 
and  as  it  was  so  late  as  June  7  and  he  had  more  time,  he  was  able 
to  make  a  collection  which  gives  a  better  idea  about  the  vegetation  there. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.DEVON.       23 

It  contains  the  following  flowering  plants  (2756):  Pedicularis  hirsuta, 
P.  capitata,  Cassiope  tetragona,  Dryas  integrifolia,  Potentilla  emar- 
ginata,  Saxifraga  flagellaris,  S.  Hirculus,  S.  tricuspidata,  S.  groen- 
landica,  Draba  alpina,  D.  subcapitata,  Papaver  radicatum,  Alsine 
verna,  Stellaria  longipes,  Cerastium  alpinum  (with  forms  approaching 
f.  pulvinatum),  Silene  acaulis,  Polygonum  viviparum,  Luzula  arcu- 
ata  var.  confusa,  L.  nivalis,  Carex  aquatilis  var.  stans,  Festuca  ovina, 
Poa  cenisia,  Trisetum  spicatum,  Arctagrostis  latifolia. 

Of  mosses,  the  collection  contained  12  species  (BRYHN,  Bryophyta, 
p.  205,  No.  2757—2761).  Dr.  BRYHN  has,  however,  not  observed  that 
Hyperite  Point  lies  in  Heiberg  Land,  but  thought  it  was  a  place  in  King 
Oscar  Land,  i.  e.  the  west  coast  of  Ellesmereland 1 . 

The  number  of  species  known  from  Hyperite  Point  thus  reaches  40, 
28  phanerogams  and  12  mosses,  but  this  most  certainly  does  not  give 
the  true  number  of  plants,  even  if  it  must  be  admitted  that  Mr.  SCHEI 


1  I  think  it  may  be  of  service  to  point  out  the  errors  in  the  list  of  species  included 
under  each  number  in  the  moss-collection  which  Dr.  BRYHN  gives  (Bryophyta, 
p.  137—255).  The  mistakes  perhaps  are  in  some  part  due  to  myself,  as,  in  the 
extract  from  my  catalogue  of  collections  which  I  sent  him,  I  may  not  have  made 
a  sufficiently  clear  specification  of  the  localities  whence  the  collections  have  come. 

The  following  corrections  are  to  be  made:  — 
No.  394  comes  from  Bedford  Pirn  Island 

516 — 521     come    from  Beitstad  Fjord  in  Hayes  Sound 

525  comes  from  Fram  Harbour 

526  comes  from  the  mouth  of  Flagler  Fjord 
528—564     come    from  Fort  Juliane  —  Mt.  Kolapoulsen 
668—671     come  from  Beitstad  Fjord 

718—725,    the  locality  is  Braskertid  Plain,  the   name   Isachsen  Fjord  I  only 
used  in  my  journal 

963—965    from  Twin  Glacier  Valley  are  missing 

971-982     from  Lastraea  Valley 
1162  should  be  no  moss-collection 

1836  from  Fram  Harbour  is  missing 

1905  comes  from  Rens  Fjord  in  Heiberg  Land 

2043  should  be  a  lichen 

2108-2109  are  from  Nordstrand  .(leg.  FOSHEIM,  13.6.  1900). 

2223  from  Harbour  Fjord 

2224  from  Harbour  Fjord  is  missing 

2417  comes  from  Spade  Point  in  Harbour  Fjord 

2476  should  be  no  moss-collection 

2480—2503  and  2532—2534  come  from  the  western  entrance  to  Harbour  Fjord 

2535  from  the  western  entrance  to  Harbour  Fjord  is  missing 

2551  comes  from  Spade  Point 

2757  —  2761  come  from  Hyperite  Point  in  Heiberg  Land 

3665  from  Yellow  Hill  in  Goose  Fjord  is  missing 

3842  from  Boat  Cape  in  N.  Devon  (leg.  SCHEI,  26.  7.  1901) 

4123  from  Lands  Lock  in  Grinnell  Land  (leg.  SCHEI,  8.  5.  1902). 


24  H.  G.  SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

must  have  looked  out  well  to  have  been  able  to  find  so  many  species 
early  in  the  year  before  the  snow  had  gone  away.  Besides,  he  thought 
he  had  seen  some  more,  especially  Empetrum  nigrum  which,  however, 
was  not  present  in  the  collection. 

2.  Whit  Sunday  Bay. 

Mr.  SCHEI  camped  here,  May  26,  1901,  and  made  a  collection  of 
flowering  plants  containing: —  Potentilla  pulchella,  Saxifraga  cernua, 
Chamaenerium  latifolium,  Hesperis  Pallasii,  Melandrium  affine, 
Stellaria  longipes,  Alsine  verna,  Salix  arctica,  Festuca  ovina  (all  in 
2755). 

3.  Skraling  (Eskimo)  Point. 

The  collection  of  Mr.  SCHEI  from  this  point  was  made  May  17,  1901, 
and  contains: —  Potentilla  pulchella,  Melandrium  affine,  Stellaria 
longipes,  Alsine  verna,  Luzula  arcuata  var.  confusa,  Poa  cenisia 
(all  in  2753). 

4.  Vicinity  of  Black  Wall. 

Visited  by  Mr.  SCHEI,  May  11,  1902.  His  collection  consists  only 
of  Luzula  nivalis  (4121)  and  some  lichens. 

5.  Rens  Fjord. 

Mr.  FOSHEIM  who  together  with  Captain  SVERDRUP  turned  back  from 
here,  May  5,  1900,  made  a  little  collection  which  was  found  to  embrace 
three  flowering  plants,  Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  Papaver  radicatum, 
and  Festuca  ovina,  besides  some  lichens  and,  according  to  BRYHN,  Bryo- 
phyta,  p.  187,  the  following  mosses:  —  Dicranum  congestum,  Ditrichum 
flexicaule,  Rhacomitrium  lanuginosum,  Timinia  austriaca,  Polytri- 
chum  alpinum,  P.  piliferum  (all  in  1905). 

With  this,  1  have  to  finish  my  small  contribution  to  the  knowledge 
of  the  botanical  features  of  Heiberg  Land.  At  present,  its  flora  is  known 
to  consist  of  34  flowering  plants  and  15  mosses,  besides  some  unexamined 
lichens.  A  certain  interest  attaches  to  one  of  the  phanerogams,  viz.,  He- 
speris Pallasii,  which  is  not  found  in  the  south  coast  of  Ellesmereland. 
Its  occurrence  at  Whit  Sunday  Bay 1  seems  to  imply  that  it  has  reached 
middle  and  northern  Ellesmereland  by  way  of  Heiberg  Land.  The  east 

1  By  mistake   I  have,   in   my  Fl.  Ellesm.,   p.  78,  mentioned  it  for  Hyperite  Point 
instead. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.      25 

coast  of  this  large  island,  if  visited  in  summer,  would  doubtless  yield  a 
rich  botanical  harvest.  Mr.  SCHEI  spoke  of  wide,  grass-grown  plains, 
probably  rich  in  grasses  and  Cyperaceae,  which  he  had  observed  at 
different  points,  and  the  occurrence  of  such  species  as  Melandrium 
affine,  Chamaenerium  latifolium,  Potenlilla  pulchella,  P.  rubricaulis, 
Pedicularis  capitata,  Cassiope  tetragona,  and  others,  decidedly  points 
to  the  existence  of  a  well-developed  vegetation.  As  these  regions  are 
also  of  interest  from  other  scientific  points  of  view,  it  is  to  be  hoped, 
that  an  expedition  with  some  other  program  than  that  of  mere  map- 
making  will,  in  the  not  too  distant  future,  take  its  field  of  work  there. 


VI.    Schei  Island  and  Big  Island. 

As  the  map  shows,  there  are  two  rather  considerable  islands  lying 
in  the  channel  east  of  Heiberg  Land.  Both  were  visited  by  Mr.  SCHEI 
in  the  spring  journey  of  1901,  Schei  Island,  May  6,  and  Big  Island,  May  25. 

1.  Schei  Island. 

Concerning  this  island,  lying  in  lat.  80°  15'— 30',  long.  88°— 89°,  and 
separated  from  Heiberg  Land  only  by  a  narrow  strait,  Mr.  SCHEI  reported 
only  that  grass-grown  plains  extended  inland  between  naked  slopes  and 
terraces.  It  probably  bears  a  close  resemblance  to  the  adjacent  Skral- 
ing  Point. 

2.  Big  Island. 

This  island,  lying  in  the  Heureka  Sound  at  the  mouth  of  Bay  Fjord 
in  lat.  78°  45'— 79°  5',  long.  85°  40'— 87°,  was  found  by  Mr.  SCHEI  to 
have  a  rather  scarce  vegetation  on  the  terraces  along  the  beach.  Species 
noted  were :  —  Dryas  integrifolia,  Potentilla  emarginata  (2754),  Saxi- 
fraga  oppositifolia,  S.  tricuspidata,  S.  groenlandica,  Papaver  radi- 
catum,  Cerastium  alpinum  (2754),  Alsine  verna  (2754),  Draba  sp., 
Salix  arctica,  Festuca  ovina  (2754). 


VII.    Ringnes  Lands. 

The  two  large  islands  which  form  the  westernmost  part  of  the  field 
of  work  of  the  expedition,  were  visited  by  Captain  ISACHSEN  in  1900  and 
1901.  Both,  according  to  his  description,  consist  principally  of  wide 


26  H.G.SIMMONS.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

gravel  plains,  so  low  and  flat,  that  he  could  sometimes  drive  from  the 
sea-ice  inland,  without  noticing  it  until  the  sledge  scraped  in  the  sand. 
As  far  as  he  could  see,  there  was  very  little  vegetation,  and  no  game 
was  observed.  Still  I  think  that  if  the  land  were  explored  during  sum- 
mer time,  a  number  of  plants  might  be  found.  Captain  ISACHSEN  only 
brought  home  a  single  collection  (2743),  made  May  17,  1901,  in  the  north- 
western extremity  of  Ellef  Ringnes  Land,  somewhere  about  lat.  79°  20', 
and  long.  106°.  It  contained  the  following  flowering  plants: —  Poten- 
tilla  emarginata,  Saxifraga  oppositifolia,  Papaver  radicatum,  Draba 
alpina,  Cerastium  alpinum,  Poa  glauca.  As  all  of  these  are  ubiquit- 
ous plants,  there  is  no  special  interest  attached  to  this  small  list.  It  is 
to  be  regretted,  that  a  dense  cowering  of  snow  almost  over  the  whole 
land  prevented  Captain  ISACHSEN  from  seeing  more  of  the  vegetation, 
and  from  bringing  back  a  larger  collection. 


With  this  paper  I  finish  my  contributions  to  the  knowledge  of  the 
flora  of  the  Arctic  American  Archipelago,  as  far  as  the  higher  plants 
are  concerned.  I  am  fully  aware  that  these  notes  are  of  far  less  value 
than  is  the  treatment  of  the  Ellesmereland  flora ;  and  I  much  regret  that 
I  got  no  opportunity  of  visiting  the  lands  to  the  west  myself,  as  Hei- 
berg  Land  at  least  would  well  have  deserved  a  closer  botanical  survey. 
But  such  long  journeys  can  hardly  be  made  in  summer,  when  the  road  — 
the  sea-ice  —  may  break  up  at  any  moment.  I  must  therefore,  neces- 
sarily leave  further  exploration  to  future  expeditions.  For  my  own  part, 
I  have  still  much  material  left  for  further  work,  and  I  hope  that  I  shall 
soon  be  able  to  finish  a  paper  about  the  vegetation  of  Ellesmereland, 
so  as  to  get  time  to  pass  on  to  the  examination  of  the  collections  of 
algae. 

The  Index  in  the  following  pages  I  have  put  together  as  I  am  fully 
aware  that  treatises,  such  as  my  Ellesmereland  and  N.  W.  Greenland 
floras  are  not  easily  used  without.  Certain  circumstances  made  it  im- 
possible for  me,  at  the  time  when  the  former  was  published,  to  compile 
an  Index  to  it.  As,  however,  the  three  Papers  about  the  floras  of  higher 
plants  in  the  regions  visited  by  the  expedition  will  always  have  to  be 
used  together,  I  think  that  an  Index  common  to  all  three,  may  answer 
the  need  equally  well. 

Lund,  Sweden,  February  1909. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT. TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.DEVON.      27 


Index. 


N.B.     The  following  abbreviations  and  designations  are  used  below: 
I.    signifies  No.  2  of  the  Report:     The  Vascular  Plants  in   the    Flora  of  Ellesmere- 

land, 
II.    signifies  No.  16:     A  Revised  List   of  the  Flowering  Plants  and  Ferns  of  N.  W. 

Greenland, 
III.    signifies  No.  19:     Stray  Contributions  to  the  Botany  of  N.  Devon,  etc. 

All  species  of  higher  plants  mentioned  in  those  treatise  are  entered,  and  the 
names  upheld  for  species  belonging  to  the  floras  of  Ellesmereland  or  N.  W.  Green- 
land signified  by  fat  types,  synonyms  by  common  type,  and  other  species  mentioned 
in  the  text  by  italics.  The  pages,  where  the  special  treatment  of  each  species  is  to 
be  found,  are  marked  with  fat  figures. 


Acrostichum  alpinum.  Bolt.   I:  183. 

hyperboreum,  Liljebl.    1:  18-3. 
Agropyrum  dasystachium,  (Hook.)  Vasey 

var.  violaceum,  Greely  I:   153. 
violaceum,  (Hornem.)   Lange  I:    12, 

153.    II :   31,  42,  47. 
repens,  (L.)  Pal.  de  Beauv.   I:  153. 
Agrostis  algida,  Soland.     I:  170. 
canina,  L.    II:   34-,  106. 

var.  melaleuca,  Bong.    II:  106. 
Aira  alpina,  Liljebl.     I:   179. 
arctica,  Trin.     1:   179. 
brevifolia,  (R.  Br.)  Lange  I:  173. 
brevifolia,  Pursh  I:  173. 
caespitosa,  L.  I:  174.  II:  31,34,37,105. 
f.  alpina,  Kruuse  I:   173. 
var.  arctica,  (Trin.)  Simm.  I:  13,173 

—175,  197.  II:  104-105.  Ill:   19. 
var.  borealis,  Trautv.  I:  173,  174. 
var.  brevifolia,  (R.  Br.)  Gelert  I:  173. 
var.  brevifolia,  Nath.  I:  175. 
var.  brevifolia,  Hartm.     I:   173,  174. 

II:  106. 

*brevifolia,  M.  v.  Bieb.  I:  173,  174. 
flexuosa,  L.  I:  13,  175-176.  II:  31, 

34.  42,  47,  105-106. 
vur.  montana,  (L.)   Trin.  f.  pallida, 

Berl.  1:  175.    II:  105. 
indica,  L.    T:  172. 
setacea,  Huds.    I:  175. 
spicata,  L.  I:  171,  172. 
subspicata,  L.  I:  171,  172. 


Alchemilla/Vteroensi's^LangeJBuserl:  121. 

milgaris,  L.  II:  14,  33,  60. 
Alopecurus  alpinus,  Smith  I:  177-178. 
11:31,34,37,104,106-107.    Ill: 
8,  9,  12,  14,  19,  20. 
ovatus,  Hornem.  I:  177. 
Alsine  groenlandica,  (Retz.)  Fenzl  II:  33, 

77-78. 

hirta,  Hartm.  I:  117. 
humifusa,  Britton  &  Brown  I:  124. 
longipes,  Britton  &  Brown  1 :  124. 
Rossi,    (R.  Br.)    Fenzl    I:    10,   13,   14, 
61,  116-117,  122,  196.   11:  30,  40, 
44.    Ill:  7,  9. 

rubella,  Wahlenb.     I:  117.     II:  78. 
verna  (L.)  Wahlenb.  I:   117-118.    II: 
30,  33,  36,  78.    Ill:   6,  7,  8,  9,  19, 

20,  23,  24,  25. 
var.  hirta,  (Wormskj.)  Lange  I:  117, 

118. 
var.  propinqua,  (Wormskj.)  Lange 

I:  117. 
var.  rubella,   (Wahlenb.)   Lange    I: 

117,  118.     II:  78. 
Alsinella  hirta,  Hartm.  I:  117. 
Alyssum  arcticum,  Wormskj.  1:  95. 
Ammadenia  peploides,  Rupr.  II:  77. 
Andromeda  tetragona,  L.  I:  39.   II:  57. 
Androsace  Chamaejasine,  Host  I:  36. 
septentrionalis,  L.  I:  13,  14,  36— 
37.    II:  29,  41,  44. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Antennaria  alpina.  (L.)  Gaertn.  I:  23— 

24.   II:  28,  32,  36,  51. 
Anthericum  calyculatum,  L.  II:  88. 
Arabis  alpina,  L.  II:  68. 
arenicola,  (Richards.)   Gelert  I:   13, 

80.    II:  29,  37,  45. 
var.    pubescens,     (Wats.)     Gelert 

I:  80. 
Hookeri,  Lange,  II:   29,   33,   42,    45, 

68—69. 

var.multicaulis,  Simm.  II:  68 — 69. 
humifusa,  Wats.  I:  80. 
lyrata,  L.  I:  80. 
mollis,  Steven  II:  68. 
Arctagrostis   latifolia,    (R.  Br.)  Griseb. 
I:  176—177.     II:  31,  34,  37,  106. 
Ill:  23. 
var.  arundinacea,  (Trin.)  Griseb. 

I:  177. 

Arenaria  arctica,  Hayes  II:  78. 
ciliata,  L.  I:  12,  14,  115-116.   11:30, 

33,  37,  76. 
f.    humifusa,     (Wahlenb.)     Hartm. 

I:  115. 

groenlandica,  Fenzl  I:  116. 
groenlandica,  auct.  I:  116,  117.    II:  77. 
hirta,  Wormskj.     I:  117. 
peploides,  L.  II:  77. 

diffusa,  Hornem.  II :  77. 
propinqua,  Richards.  I:  117. 
quadrivalvis,  R.  Br.  I:  117. 
Rossii,  R.  Br.  I:  116. 
rubella,  Hook.  I:  117.    II:  78. 

var.  hirta,  Vahl  II:  78. 
verna,  L.  I:  117.     II:  78. 

var.  hirta,  Greely  I:  117. 
Armeria  arctica,  Wallr.  I:  36. 
labradorica,  Wallr.  I:  35.  II:  55. 
sibirica,  Turcz.  I:  34. 
vulgaris,  Willd.  II:   14. 

var.  labradorica,  Durand  II:  55. 
var.  sibirica,  auct.  I:  31. 
vulgaris,  auct.  II:  55. 
Arnica  alpina,  (L.)  Olin  I:  22-23.  II: 

28,  32,  38,  50-51. 
angustifolia,  Vahl  I:  22,  23. 
montana,  L.  var.  alpina,  L.  I:  22. 

var.  angustifolia.  Hook.  I:  22. 
montana,  auct.  1 :  22. 
Aspidium  fragrans,   (L.)  Sw.  I:  13,  14, 

182.      II:  31,  35,  38,  108. 
Atropis  angustata,  Ledeb.  I:  156. 
distans,  Ledeb.  1:  158. 
maritima,  Griseb.  1 :  160. 
Avena  airoides,  Koel.  I:  171,  172. 


Avena  subspicata,  Clairv.  I:  171. 
Azalea  lapponica,  L.  II :  57. 
procumbens,  L.  II:  57. 

Bartsia  alpina,  L.  II:  29,  32,  40,  54. 
Betula  glandulosa,  Michx.  II:  40,  85. 
nana,  L.  II:  14,  30,  34,  40,  84-85. 
Braya  alpina,  Sternb.  &  Hoppe  I:  78,  79. 

II:  68. 

var.  glabella,  Greely  I:  78. 
alpina,  auct.  I:  78.  II:  68. 
glabella,  Richards.  I:  78,  79.    II:  68. 
purpurascens,(R.  Br.)  Bunge  I:  13, 
14,  78-79.  II:  29,33,38,  68. 

Calamagrostis    arundinacea.   (L.)    Roth 

II:  31,  42. 

Campanula  Gieseckiana,  Vest  I:  25. 
rotundifolia,  L.  I:  25.  II:  14,  28,41. 

var.   I iui folia.  Durand  II:  51. 
uniflora,    L.  I:    12.  25-26.    II:  28, 

32,  36,  51-52. 
Cardamine  bellidifolia,   L.  I:  96-97. 

II:  30,  33,  36,  72.    Ill:  20. 
pratensis,  L.  I:  96.   II:  30,  37. 
var.  angustifolia,  Hook.  I:  96. 
Carex  alpina,  Hart  I:  143. 
aquatilis,  Wahlenb.  II:  31,  41. 
f.  sphagnophila,  Fr.  I:  144. 
var.  epigejos,  Kjellm.  1 :  144. 
var.  stans,  (Drej.)  Boott  I:  96,  138, 

144—145.  II:  45,  94.  Ill:  23. 
atrata,  L.  I:  140,  141. 
atrata,  auct.  II:  93,  97. 
atrofusca,  Schkuhr  I:  139,  140. 
Bellardi,  All.  I:  147,  148. 
bipartita,  All.  I:  148. 
capillaris,  L.  I:  139,  143.  II:  30,37. 
compacta,  R.  Br.  I:  136. 
compacta,  Krock.  I:  136,  137. 
digitata,  L.  I:  142,  143. 
dioica,  L.  II:  15,  34,  93,  96—97. 

var.  paralella,  Laest.  II:  97. 
frigida,  All.  I:  141. 
frigida,  Ledeb.  I:  140,  141. 
fuliginosa,  Schkuhr  I:  140,  141. 
fuliginosa,  Sternb.  &  Hoppe  I:  141,  142. 

var.  misandra,  Lang  I:  141. 
fuliginosa,  auct.  I:  141. 
glareosa,  Wahlenb.  I:  12, 145.  11.31, 

34,  37,  95. 

ursina,  Britton  &  Brown  1 :  145. 
globularis,  L.  1 :  142,  143. 
yynocrates,    (Wormskj.)    Drej.    I:    147. 

II:  97. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.      29 


Curex  Hepburnii,  Boott  I:  147. 
holostotna,  Drej.  1 :  144. 
hyperborea,  Drej.  I:  144. 
incurva,  Lightf.  I:  146—147.  11:31, 

34,  36,  95. 

var.  erecta,  Lang  I:   146.  II:    95. 
var.  inflata,  Simm.  I:    146,  147. 
lagopina,  Wahlenb.  II:  31,  42. 
membranacea,  Hook.  I:  136,  137. 
m&mbranacea,  Hoppe,  I:  136,  137. 
mem branopacta,  Bail.  I:  10,13,14, 

136—139,  197.   II:  30,  40,  44. 
misandra,  R.  Br.  1:   139,   140,  141— 
142.   II:  30,   34,   36,  93,  94,  97. 
Ill:  22. 
nardina,   Fr.    I:    12,   147—148,    149. 

II:  31,  34,  38,  95-96,  97. 
nardina,  Hart  I:  146. 
ornithopoda,  Willd.  I:  142,  143. 
pedata,  All.  I:.  143. 
pedata,  L.  I:  142. 
pedata,   Wahlenb.   I:   12,    142-143. 

II:  30,  42. 

pulla,  Good.  I:  136,  137,  138. 
pulla,  auct.  I:  136. 

rigid  a,  Good.  II.  30,  34,  41,  94-95. 
rigida,  auct.  I:  144.  II:  94. 
rotundata,  Ostenf.  I:  136. 
rotundata,  Wahlenb.  I:   136,  137,  138. 
rupestris,    All.    I:     143-144,     145. 

II:  30,  42. 

salina,  Wahlenb.  II:  30,  42. 
saxatilis,  L .  II:  94. 

var.  compacta,  Dewey  I:  136. 
saxatilis,  auct.  I:  136.    II:  94. 
scirpoidea,  Michx.  11:31,34,41,96. 
stans,  Drej.  I:  144. 
ursina,   Dewey   I:   12,  14,  145—146. 

II:  31,  37. 
ustulata,  Wahlenb.  I:   12,    14,   139- 

141.    II:  30,  37. 

Wormskjoldiana,  Hornem.  II:  96. 
vulgaris,  Fr.  var.    hyperborea,    Greely 

I:  144. 
Cassiope  tetragona,  (L.)  D.  Don  1 :  39. 

II:  29,  33,  36,  57.  Ill:  6,  23,  25. 
Catabrosa  algida,  (Soland.)  Fr.  I:  170- 
171.  II:  22,  31,  34,  37,  76,  104. 
Ill:  6,  7,  8.  9,  11,  12,  19,  20. 
concinna,  Th.  Fr.  I:  171. 
vilfoidea,  Anderss.  I:  159,  160. 
Cerastium  alpinum,  L.  I:  61,  120-123. 
II:  22,  30,  33,  36,  78—79.  Ill:  7, 
8,  9,  11,   13,   14,   19,  20,  22,  23, 
25,  26. 


Cerastium  alpinum,  L.  f.  pulvinatum, 

Simm.  1 :  121,  122, 123.  Ill :  19, 23. 
var.  caespitosum,  Malmgr.  I:  120,  121, 

122,  123. 

var.  Fischerianum,  Ser.  I:  120. 
var.    Fischerianum,    Durand    I:    120. 

11:  79. 

var.  glabratum,  Retz.  I:  122. 
var.  lanatum,  Lindbl.  I:  121. 
var.  legitimum,  Lindbl.  I:  121. 
arcticum,  Lange,  I:  120. 
Edmondstonii,  (Wats.)  Murb.  <fc  Ostenf. 

I:  120,  121,  122,  123. 
var.  caespitosum,  (Malmgr.)  Anderss. 

&  Hesselm.  I:  120,  121,  122. 
latifolium,  Hart  I:  122. 
vulgatum,  Bessels  II :  79. 
Chamaenerium  halimifolium,  Salisb.  I:  41. 
latifolium,    (L.)    Sweet    I:    41-42. 

II:  29,  33,  38,  58-59.  Ill:  24,  25. 
Cheiranthus  Pallasii,  Pursh  1 :  77. 

pygmaeus,  Adams  I:  77. 
Chrysosplenium   alternifolium,  L.  I:   13, 

14,  59.   II:  29,  40,  44. 
var.  tetrandrum,  Lund  I:  59 — 60. 

II:  29. 

tetrandrum,  (Lund)  Th.  Fr.  I:  59. 
Cineraria  Lewisii,  Richards.  1 :  24. 
Cochlearia  fenestrata,  R.  Br.  1 :  98.  II :  72. 
groenlandica,  L.  I:  98.  II:  72. 
oblongifolia,  DC.  II:  72. 
officinalis,   L.   I:  98.   II:  22,  30,  33, 

36,  72. 

var.  arctica,  (Schlecht.)  Gel.  I:  98. 
var.  groenlandica,  (L.)  Gel.  I:  98 
-99.  II:  72-73.  Ill:  7,  8,  11, 
12,  14,  19. 

var.  oblongifolia,  (DC.)  Gel.  I:  98. 
Colpodium  humile,  Lange  I:  161. 
latifolium,  R.  Br.  I:  176.  II:  106. 
pauciflorum,  Hook.  I:  177. 
Cucubalus  acaulis,  L.  I:  127. 
Cystopteris   fragilis,  (L.)  Bernh.  I:  182 
-183.  II:  31,  35,  37,  108. 

Deschampsia  brevifolia,    R.    Br.    I:    173. 

II:  104,  105. 

var.  major,  Hook.  1 :  173. 
caespitosa,  Pal.  de  Beauv.  I:  173. 
flexuosa,  (L.)  Trin.  I:  175. 
Diapensia  lapponica,  L.  I:  37.  II:  29, 

32,  39,  55. 

Draba  alpina,  L.  I:  80-85,  86,  87,88, 
89,90,  91.   II:  29,33,  36,  69,  70. 
Ill:  7,  8,  9,  19,  20,  23,  26. 


30 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Draba    alpina    var.  corymbosa,    Durand 

II:  70. 
var.  glacialis,  (Adams)  Kjellm.  1 :  82, 

84.  II :  69.  Ill :  8. 
var.  gracilescens,    Simm.    I:   83, 

84,  85,  94,  196.  II:  69.  Ill:  19,  20. 
var.  micropetala,  Durand  II:  70. 
var.  oblongata,    (R.    Br.)    Gel.    I: 

81-82,  84. 

altaica,  Bunge  I:  85,  87.  89. 
altaica,  auct.  I:  87,  88. 
androsacea,  Wahlenb.  1 :  83,  85. 
arctica,  J.  Vahl  I:  93,  94.  II:  71. 
borealis,  DC.  I:  95.    II:  71. 
confusa,  Ehrh.  II:  71. 
corymbosa,  auct.  II:  70. 
crassifolia,  Grab.  II:  29,  42. 
fladnizensis,    Wulf    I:  83,  85-86, 
87,  89,  91,  93,  110.  II:  29,33,36, 

70. 

var.  altaica,  Gelert  I:  87. 
gelida,  Turcz.  1 :  84. 
glacialis,  Adams  I:  81,  82.   II:  69. 
hirta,  L.  I:  86,  88,  89,  90,  91,  92,  93- 
95.   II:  29,  33,  36,  71.   Ill:  II,  13. 
f.  canescens,  Simm.  I:  94. 
var.  altaica,   (Ledeb.)    Simm.    1 :   89, 

92,  94. 
var.  arctica,  (J.  Vahl)  Wats.  I:  92, 

93-94.   II:  71. 

incana,  L.   I:  95.   II:   29,  33,  42,  71. 
lacten,  Adams  1 :  85. 
lapponica,  Wahlenb.  1 :  85. 
leptopetala,  Th.  Fr.  I:  82. 
Martinsiana,  Gay  I:  87,  88,  89. 
Marti nsiana,  Th.  Fr.    1 :  87,  88,  89,  90. 
Martinsiana,  Dusen  I:  92. 
micropetala,  Hook.  1 :  87,  88,  89,  90. 
muricella,  Wahlenh.  I:  92. 
nivalis,    Liljebl.   I:  86,   90,   92-93. 

II:  29,  33,  37,  70-71. 
oblongata,  R.  Br.  I:  81,  82. 
ochroleuca,  Bunge  I:  84. 
pauciflora,  R.  Br.  1 :  87. 
primuloides,  Turcz.   I:  84. 
rupestris,  R.  Br.  1:  93,  94.  II:  71. 
var.  altaica,  Ledeb.  I:  87,  88,  93. 
var.  parviflora,    Oliver  I:  91. 
rupestris,  auct.  I:  85,  86.  II:  16,  70. 
subcapitata,  Simm.   I:  11,  13,  87  — 
92,  195.     II:   29,  33,  40,  44,  70. 
Ill:  7,  8,  9,  11,  12,  19,  20,  23. 
Wahlenbergii,  Hartm.  I:  85.  II:  70. 
f.  brachycarpa,    Nath.    I:   84.    II:  70. 


Dryas  integrifolia,  Vahl  I:  13,  14,  43 
-46.     II:  29,  33,  37,  45,  59— 
60.   Ill:  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  14,  19,  20. 
21,  23,  25. 

var.  canescens,  Simm.  I:  46.  II:  60. 
octopetala,  L.  I:  44,  45,  46.   II:  21,  29, 

39,  45,  59,  60. 

f.  intermedia,  Nath.  I:  45.   II:  60. 
var.  argentea,  Blytt  1 :  46. 
var.  hirsuta,  Hartz  I:  46. 
var.  integrifolia,    Cham.   &    Schlecht. 

I:  43.  II:  59. 

*integrifolia,  Kruuse  I:  43. 
octopetala,  auct.  I:  43.  II:  16,  59. 
tenella,  Pursh  I:  43. 
Dryopteris  fragrans,  Schott  I:  182. 
Dupontia  Fisheri,  R.  Br.  I:  13,  14,161. 

II:  31,  34,  38,  101. 
psilosantha,  Rupr.  I:  161.  II:  101. 

Elyna  Bellardi,    (All.)   Koch  I:   148- 

149.  II:  31,  34,  37,  97. 
caricina,  Mert.  &  Koch  I:  148. 
spicata,  Schrad.  1 :  148. 
Empetrum  nigrum,  L.  I:  42—43.  11:29, 

33,  36,  59.  Ill:  24. 
var.  Andinum,   (Philib.)    DC.    I:   42. 
var.  purpureum,    (Rafin.)   DC.    I: 

43.  II:  59. 

var.  rwbrum,  (Willd.)  DC.  I:  42. 
purpureum,  Rafin.  I:  43. 
rubrum,  Durand  I:  42.  II:  59. 
Epilobium  latifolium,  L.   I:  41.  II:  58. 
Equisetum   arvense,    L.    I:   180—181. 

II:  31,  35,  37,  107. 
f.  arctica,  Kruuse  I:  180. 
var.  alpestre,  Wahlenb.  I:  180. 
var.  arcticum,  Rupr.  I:  180. 
var.  boreale,  (Bong.)  Milde  I:  180. 
var.  riparium,    (Fr.)    Milde    I:    180. 

II:   107. 

hiemale,  L.  A,  tenellum,  Liljebl.  I:  181. 
riparium,  Fr.  I:  180. 
scirpoides,  Michx.  1:  181. 
tenellum,  Fr.  I:  181. 
variegatum,   Schleich.   1:  181—182. 

II:  31,  37. 
Erigeron  compositus,  Pursh  1 :  13,  14, 

24—25.  II:  28,  32,  37,  45,  51. 
var.  trifidus,  Greely  I:  24. 
eriocephalus,  J.  Vahl  I:  24. 
trifidus,  Hook.  I:  24. 
uniflorus,  L.  I:  24.  II:  28,  37. 
Eriophorum   angustifolium,    Roth    I:  150, 
151,  152.  II:  98. 


1898-1902.  No.  19.]     STRAY  CONTR1BUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OFN.  DEVON.      31 


Eriophorum  capitatum,  Host  1 :  149.  II :  97. 

var.  Scheuchzeri,  Hart  I:  149. 
gracile,  Koch  I:  151,  152. 
latifolium,  Hoppe  1:  151,  152. 
polystachium,  L.   I:  36,  150-153. 

II:  31,  34,  37,  98. 

f.  triste,    (Th.  Fr.)    Ostenf.    I:    153. 
var.  elatior,  Hart  1 :  150. 
Scheuchzeri,  Hoppe    I:  149—150. 

II:  31,  34,  37,  97-98. 
triquetrum,  Hoppe  I:  152. 
vaginatum,  L.  I:  149.  II:  15,  96,  98. 
vaginatum,  auct.  I:   149.  H:  97. 
Eutrema  arenicola,  Richards.  1 :  80. 
Edwardsii,    R.   Br.    I:    13,    14,   97. 
II:  30,  33,  38,  72. 

Festuca  borealis,  Mert.  &  Koch  I:  154. 
brevifolia,  R.  Br.  I:  154. 
ovina,  L.  I:  6,  154-155,  156.  II:  31, 
34,  37,  98-99.  Ill:  6,  19,  23, 
24,  25. 

var.  alpina,  (Suter)  I:  154. 
var.  brevifolia,  (R.  Br.)  Hart  I:  154, 

155,  156.  II:  98,  99. 
var.  supina,  (Schur)  Hackel  I:  155. 

Ill:  8. 

var.  violacea,  auct.  1 :  154.  II :  98. 
*borealis,  Lange  I:  154. 
*brevi folia,  Hackel  1 :  154. 
*euovina,    Hack.    var.    supina,    Hack. 

subvar.  grandiflora,  Hack.  I:  155. 
rtibra,  L.  I:  154,  156.  II:  31,  41. 
supina,  Schur  1 :  155. 
violacea,  Gaud.  I:  154.  II:  99. 

Gastrolychnis  angustiflora,  Rupr.   1 :   125. 

Vahlii,  Rupr.  I:  126. 
Gentiana  tenella,  Rottb.  II:  29,  39,  45. 
Glyceria    angustata,    (R.    Br.)   Th.    Fr. 
I:  13,  156-158.    II:  21,  31,  34, 
37,  99—100.  Ill:  12,  13,  20. 
angustata,  auct.   I:  158;  161.  II:  100. 
arctica,  Hook.  I:  158. 
distans,  (L.)  Wahlenb.   I:  157,  158— 
159.   II:  22,  31,  34,  37,  99,  100. 
HI:  8,  9,  11,  19,  20. 
var.  arctica,   (Hook.)   Gel.    I:    157, 

158.    II:  100. 

var.  reptans,  Hartm.  I:  159. 
var.  vaginata,  (Lange)  Gel.    I:  158. 

II:  100.  Ill:  7,   11,  12. 
fluitans,  R.  Br.  1 :  170,  178. 
Kjellmani,  Lange  I:  156. 
Langeana,  Berlin  II:  99. 


Glyceria  maritima,  (Huds.)  Wahlb.   I: 

159.    II:  31,  34,  37. 
f.  palustris,  Anderss.  I:  159. 
f.  vilfoidea,  Gel.  I:  159. 
var.  arenaria,  Fr.    I:   156,   159,  160. 

II:  101. 

var.  arenaria,  Berlin  I:  156. 
var.  reptans,  (Hartm  )  Simm.  I:  124, 

159—160.   II:  100-101. 
reptans,  Krok  I:  159. 
tenella,LangeI:  157.  11:31,34,40,99. 
vaginata,  Lange  I:  158. 

var.  contracta,  Lange  1 :  156. 
Vahliana,  (Liebm.)  Th.  Fr.  I:  13,  156. 

II:  31,  34,  37,  99.   Ill:  7. 
Vahliana,  Th.  Holm  I:  156. 
vilfoidea,  Th.  Fr.   I:  159.    II:  100,  101. 
Gnaphalium  alpinum,  L.  I:  23. 

Halianthus  peploides,  Fr.  II:   77. 
Hesperis  Hookeri,  Ledeb.  I:  77. 
Pallasii,  (Pursh)   Torr.  &  Gray  I:  13, 
14,  77—78.   II:   22,   29,  33,  40. 
45,  67.   HI:  24. 
pygmaea,  Del.    I:  77. 
pygmaea,  Hook.    I:  77. 
Hierochloa    alpina,    (Liljebl.)    Roem.    & 

Schult.  I:  179.  II:  31,  34,  37, 107. 
borealis,  Durand  II:  107. 
Holcus  alpinus,  Swartz  I:  179. 
Honkenya  peploides,  (L.)  Ehrh.  II:  30, 

33,  41,  77,  95. 

var.  diffusa,  (Hornem.)  Kruuse  II:  77. 
Juncoides  hyperboreum,  Britton  &  Brown 

I:  133. 
nivale,  Britton  &  Brown  1 :  135. 

Juncus  arcuatus,  Wahlenb.  I:  133. 
biglumis,  L.  I:  132-133.  II:  30,34, 

36,  89.    Ill:  7,  8,  9. 
castaneus,  Sm.  11:  30,  41. 
triglumis,  L.  II:  30,  41. 

Kobresiabipartita,(All.)  D.Torre:  I:  13, 
14,  148.    II:  31,  42. 

caricina,  Willd.  I:  148. 

nardina,  Hornem.  1:  147. 

scirpina,  Willd.  I:  148.  II:  97. 
Koenigia  islandica,  L.  II:  30,  42. 

Lastraea  fragrans,  Presl  I:  182. 
Leontodon  palustre,  Hook.  I:  20. 
Lesquerella    arctica,   (Wormskj.)  Wats. 
1:  13,  14,  95.   II:  22,  30,  33,37, 
45,  72. 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Lithospermum  maritimum,  Lehm.    II:  54. 
Loiseleuria  procumbens,  (L.)  Desv.   II:  33, 

57. 

Luzula arctica,  BIytt  I:  134,135.  II:  90,91. 
arcuata,  (Wahlenb.)  Swartz  I:  133,134, 

135.  II :    30,  34,  36,  89, 90, 91, 92. 
var.COnfusa,(Lindeb.)Kjellm.  I:  133 
-135.   II:  89-92.    Ill:  19,  21, 
22,  23,  24. 

f.  subspicata,(Lange)1: 134. 11:91. 
var.  hyperborea,  Anderss.  &  Hesselm. 

I:  133. 

var.  latifolia,  Kjellm.  I:  134,  135. 
campestris,  (L.)  DC.  II:  89. 

var.  congesta,  auct.  I:  133.  II:  90,92. 
var.  nivalis,  Laest  I:  135. 
confusa,  Lindeb.  I:  133,  134. 

var.  latifolia,  (Kjellm.)  Buchen.  I:  135 
hyperborea,    R.  Br.    I:    133,    134,   135. 

II:  89,  90. 
multiflora,  (Ehrh.)  Lej.  II:  90,  91. 

var.  congesta,  Lange  II:  91. 
nivalis,   (Laest.)  Beurl.  I:  134,  135— 
136.    II:   30,  34,  38,  89,  90,  91, 
92.   Ill:  19,  20,  21,  23,24. 
spicata,  (L.)  DC.  I:  134.  II:  21,  34,  91, 

92—93. 

var.  Kjellraani,  Nath.  II:  91,  92. 
Lychnis  affinis,  J.  Vahl  I:  125.   II:  80. 

var.  triflora,  Hart  II:  81. 
apetala,  L.  I:   127.    II:  80,  81. 

var.    involucrata,    Cham.   &  Schecht. 

I:  125,  126. 

pauciflora,  Ledeb.  II:  80. 
pauciflora,  Durand  11:  80,  81. 
triflora,  Fl.  Dan.  I:  125.    II:  81. 
Lycopodium  annotinum,  L.  II:  14. 
Selago,  L.  I:  179—180.    II:   31,  34, 

37,  107. 
var.  adpressa,  Desv.  I:  179. 

Melandriumaffine,  J.Vahl  I:  125-126. 

II:  30,  34,  37,  80-81.  Ill:  24,  25. 
apetalum,  (L.)  Fenzl  I:  125.  126,  127. 

II:  30,  34,  38,  80,  81—82. 
f.  glabrum,  (Regel)  I:  127. 
var.  arcticum,  (Th.  Fr.)  I:  127. 
involucratum,  (Cham.  &Schlecht.)Rohrb. 

var.  affine,  Rohrb.  1:   125.  II:  80. 
triflorum,    R.  Br.)  Vahl  I:  125,  126. 

II :  30,  34,  39,  47,  81. 
Mertensia    niaritiiiia,    (L.)     S.  F.  Gray 

II :  29,  32,  42,  54. 

Molinia  distans,  (L.)  Hartm.  var.  reptans, 
Hartm.  I:  159. 


Montia  fontana,  L.  II:  40,  82,  83. 
var.  chondrosperma,  Fenzl  II:  83. 
var.  lamprosperma,  Fenzl  II:  83. 
*lamprosperma,  Lindb.  fil.  II:  82,  83. 
"minor,  Lindb.  fil.  II:  83. 

var.  rivularis,  Lindb.  fil.  II:  83. 
lamprosperma,   Cham.   II:  30,  34, 

40,  82-83. 
minor,  Gmel.  II:  83. 
rivularis,  Gmel.  II:  82,  83. 
f.  lamprosperma,  Blytt  II:  82. 
'lamprosperma,  Neum.  II :  82. 
Myrtillus  uliginosa,    (L.)   Drej.   II:   29, 

33,  36. 

f.  Kruhsiana,  (Fisch.)  I:  38. 
var.  microphylla,    (Lange)    Simm. 

I:  37-38.    II:  56. 
Nemopanthes  fascicularis,  Rafin.  II :  56. 

Oxyria    digyna,  (L.)    Hill.    I:    40,  129. 

II:  30,  34,  36,  84.    Ill:  8,  19,  20. 
reniformis,  Hook.  I:  129.  II:  84. 

Papaver  alpinum,  L.  I:  99. 

var.  nudicaule,  Ledeb.  I:  99. 
alpinum,  auct.  I:  99,  100.    II:  16,  73. 
nudicaule,  auct.  I:  99,  100.    II:  73. 
radicatum,  Rottb.  1:  99—101.  II:  30, 

33,  36,  73-74.  Ill:  6,  7,  8,  9,  11, 

12,  14,  19,  20,  23,  24,^25,  26. 
f.schizopetala,  Simm.  1:1100,  101. 
var.  Hartianum,  Simm.^I:  100,101. 

II:  73. s  III:  8. 

Parrya  arenicola,  Hook.  1 :  80. 
Pedicularis  acaulis,  Wulf.  I:  27. 

arctica,  R.Br.  I:  13,  14,  29,  30,  31- 

34,  195.   II:  22,28,32,40,45,53. 
capitata,  Adams   I:   13,  14,  26-27. 

II:  28,  32,  40,  45,  52.  Ill:  23,25. 
elata,  Willd.  I:  30. 
flammea,  L.  II:  28,  32,  42,  53. 
flammea,  Hart  I:  27,  28. 
hirsuta,  L.  1:  27-29,  31,32,33,195. 

II :  28,  32,  38,  52, 53.  Ill :  8, 20, 23. 
hirsuta,  auct.  I:  29. 
Kanei,  Durand  I:  29.    II:  52,  53. 
Kanei,  Tayl.  I:  27. 
lanata,  Cham.  &  Schlecht.  1 :  12, 14, 28, 

29—31, 32,  33, 195.    II :  28,  32, 40, 
52—53. 
Langsdorfii,  Stev.  1 :    28,  29,  30,  31,  32 

var.  lanata,  Greely  I:  29.   II:  53. 
lapponica,  L.  I:  34.   II:  32,  53. 
Nelsoni,  R.Br.    I:  26. 
Oederi,  Vahl  I:  28. 


1898- 1902.  No.  19.1     STRAY  CONBR1BUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.       33 


Pedicu]&risSceptrumcarolinum,  L.  1: 26,27. 
striata,  Pall.  1:  30. 
sucletica,  L.  I:  28. 
sudetica,  Hart  I:  27,  28. 
sylvatica,  L.  I:  33. 
Phippsia  algida,  R.  Br.  I:  170.   II:  104. 

monandra,  Hook.  I:  170.    11:  10*. 
Platypetalum  purpurascens,    R.  Br.  1:  78. 
Pleuropogon  Sahinri,   R.  Br.  I:    13,  14, 
169-170,    178.     II:   31,   34,   41, 
103-104. 

f.  aquatica,  Simm.  I:  170,  197. 
i.  terrestris,  Simm.  I:  170,  197. 
Pneumaria  maritima,  (L.)  Hill  II:  54. 
Poa  abbreviata,   R.  Br.   I:  13,  14,  164 
—165.    II:  31,  34,  38,  102.  Ill:  6, 
8,  19,  20. 
alpina,  L.  I:  162,  166-167,  168.  II:  16, 

31,  34,  41,  102. 
alpina,  auct.  II :  103. 
angustata,  R.  Br.  I:  156. 
arctica,  R.  Br.  I:  167.    II:  103. 
'  attenuata,  Trin.  I:  162. 
caesia,  Smith  I:   161.    II:   101. 
cenisia,   All.  I:    164,  167—168,  169. 
II:     16,    31,    34,    37,     102-103. 
Ill:  8,  23,  24. 
colpodea,  Th.  Fr.  I:   168. 
distans,  L.  1:  158. 
evagans,  Simm.  I:  10,  13,165-166, 

196.  197.    II:  31,  41. 
filipes,  Lange  1:  167. 
flexuosa,  Host  1 :  167.    II:  102,  103. 
glauca,  M.  Vahl  I:  157,  161—164,  167, 
168,  197.    II:  31,34,  37,  101—102. 
Ill:  26. 

var.  arenaria,  Hartz  I:  162,  164, 165. 
var.  atroviolacea,  Lange  I:  162,  163. 
,  f.  prolifera,  Simm.  I:  163,  164. 

Ill:  20. 
var.  elatior,  (Anderss.)  Lange  I:  162, 

164.    II:  101. 

var.  pallida,  Lange  I:  162. 
var.  tenuior,  Simm.  1: 162, 164, 197. 

II:  101. 

laxa,  Haenke  I:  167,  168. 
nemoralis,  Hart  I:  161. 
pratensis,   L.  I:   167,  168,  169,  196. 

II:  31,  34,  37,  103. 
var.  alpigena,  Blytt  I:  169. 
pratensis,  Meehan  II:  103. 
stenantha,  Trin.  I:  163. 
stricta,  Lindeb.  I:  163,  168. 
trichopoda,  Lange  I:  167. 
Vahliana,  Liebm.  I:  156.    II:  99. 


Polemonium  humile,  Willd.  II:  29,39,45. 
Polygonum  viviparum,  L.  1:  40,  128- 
129.     II:    30,    34,    36,    83    84. 
Ill:  6,  20,  23. 

f.  alpinum,  Wahlenb.  I:  128. 
Polypodium  fragile,  L.  I:  182. 

fragrans,  L.  I:  182. 
Polysticlmm  fragrans,  Ledeb.  I:  182. 
Potentilla  altaica,  Bnnge  I:  50,  52. 
anserina,  L.  I:  54.    II:  33,  61. 
dasyphylla,  Bunge  1:  48. 
emarginata,    Pm-sh   1:    56-58,  59. 
II:    29.   33,  38,  63-64.    Ill:  19, 
21,  23,  25,  26. 
emarginata,  Desf.  I:  56. 
fragiformis,   (Willd.)  Schlecht.    I:   56, 

57,  58. 

var.  parviflora,  Trautv.  I:  56,  58. 
fragiformis,  auct.  I:  56.    II:  63. 
frigida,  Vill.  I:  56. 
frigida,  auct.  1:  56.    II:  63. 
grandiflora,  L.  var.  parviflora,  Trautv. 

I:  56. 

hirsuta,  Fl.  Dan.   1:  55. 
Hookeriana,  Lehm.  II:   62. 
Jamesoniana,  Grev.  I:  55. 
maculata,  Pourr.  1:56,  59.  II:  29,  42,  64. 
maculata,  auct.  I:  56. 
multifida,  L.  I:  53. 

nana,( Willd.) Schlecht.  I:  56,57,58. 11:63. 
nivea,  L.  I:   47,  50,  51,  52,  53,  54,  55, 

58.  II:  29,  33,  41,  61—63 
var.  altaica,  Rydb.  I:  50,  52. 
var.  concolor,  Durand  II:  63,  64. 
var.  hirsuta,  auct.  1 :  55. 
var.  pallidior,  Swartz  II:  62. 
var.  pentaphylla,  Lehm.  I:  50,52,53. 

II:  62. 

var. pinnatifida, Lehm.  I:  52,53. 11:62. 
var.  pulchella,  Durand  I:  47. 
var.  subquinata,  Lange  I:  50,52,53. 
var.  subquinata,  Greely  I:  50,  54. 
var.  subviridis,  Lelim.  II:  62. 
nivea,  auct.  I:  47,  50,  55.    II:  61,63. 
pulchella,  R.  Br.  I:  12,  47-49,  51, 
52,  54,  55,    II:  29,  33,  38,  60-61. 
Ill:  7,  19,  24,  25. 
f.  elatior,  Dusen  I:  50. 
var.  elatior,  Lange  I:  49. 
pulchella,  auct.  I:  50,  55.    II:  61. 
quinquefolia,  Rydb.  1:  50,  53. 
rubricaulis,  Lehm.  I:  13,  14,  48,  50 
—54,  196.    II:  29,  33,  41,  45,  60, 
61,  62.   Ill:  22,  25. 
var.  arctica,  Simm.  I:  51,  53. 

3 


34 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Potentilla  sericea,  L.  I:  48. 

var.  dasyphylla,  (Bunge)  Ledeb.  I:  48. 
var,  dasyphylla,  Trautv.  I:  47,  48. 
Sommerfeltii,  Lehm.  I:  47,  48,  49. 
subjuga,  Rydb.  I:  53. 
subquinata,  (Lange)  Rydb.  I:  52,  53. 
tridentata,  Soland.  II:  33,  64. 
Vahliana,  Lebm.  I:  13,  14,47,53,54, 
55—56,  195.    II:  22,  29,  33,  40, 
45,  62,  63.   Ill:  22. 
Puccinellia  distans,  (L.)  Parl.  1:  158. 
Pulmonaria  maritima.  L.  II:  54. 
Pyrola  chlorantha,  auct.  I:  40.    II:  58. 
grandiflora,  Rad.  1 :  40. 
groenlandica,  Hornem.  I:  40. 
rotundifolia,  L.  I:  41.  II:  29,33,36. 
var.  grandiflora,  (Rad.)  DC.  I:   40 

-41.    II:  58. 

var.  pumila,    Hornem.    I:    40.    II:  58. 
var.  arenaria,  Koch  I:  40, 

Ranunculus  affinis,  R.  Br.  1 :  13,  14, 101 

-108,  196.   II:  30,  33,  38,  74. 
*Wilanderi,  Nath.  I:  104. 
ultaicus,  Laxm.  I:   108,  109. 
antoenus,  Ledeb,  I:  101,  103,  104. 
arcticus,  Richards.  I:  101,  103,  104,  105, 

106. 
auricomus.  L.  1:  103,  107. 

var.  sibiricus,  Glehn  I:  103. 
auricomus,  auct.  I:  101,  108,  111. 
dahuricus,  Turcz.  1:  103,  104. 
frigidus,  Dickie  II:  74. 
frigidus,  Willd.  I:  109. 
glacialis,  L.  I:  112.    II:  30,  39,  45. 
hyperboreus,   Rottb.  I:  115.  II:  30, 

33,  36,  76. 

nivalis,  L.   I:  103,  107,  108,  109,  110, 
111,  112,  113.   II:  30,  33,  36,75, 
76.    Ill:  19.  20. 

var.  Freiligrathi,  Bessels  II:  75. 
var.  sulphurous,  Ledeb.  I:  108. 
nivalis,  auct.  I:  108,  111,  114.  II:  74. 
ovalis,  Rafin.  I:  104. 
pedatifidus,    Smith   I:    101,    102,    103, 

104,  106,  107. 

pedatifidus,  Hook.  I:  101,  103. 
pedatifidus,  auct.  I:  101. 
pygmaeus,  Wahlenb.  I:  111,  112, 113, 

114.    II:  30,  33,  37,  76. 
var.  Sabinei,  Davis  I:  111,  112. 
rhomboidalis,  Goldie  I:  104. 
rhomboideiis,  Goldie  I:  105. 
Sabinei,  R.  Br.  I:    13,    14,    107,  110, 
111-114,   195.    II:  22,  30,  33,  40, 
45,  76.   Ill:  19. 


Ranunculus  Sabinei  affinis,  Durand  I :  111. 

II:  76. 
sulphureus,  Soland.  1: 108— 109, 110, 

113.    II:  30,  33,36,74—75.   Ill:  8. 
Rheum  digynum,  Wahlenb.  I:  129 
Rhodiola  rosea,  L.  II:  29,  41. 
Rhododendron  lapponicum,  (L.)  Wah- 
lenb. II:  29,  33,  41,  57-58. 
Rumex  digynus,  L.  1 :  129. 

Sagina  caespitosa,  (Vahl)  I  :    119. 
intermedia,  Fenzl  1 :  13, 119.  II:  30, 37. 
nivalis,  (Lindbl.)  Fr.  I:  119.  II:  30,42. 
Salix  altaica,  Ledeb.  I.  130. 
arctica,  Pall.   1:6,40,  130-132,196. 
II:   18,  22,  30,  34,  38,  85-87. 
Ill :  5,  7.  8,  9,  19,  20,  21,  24,  25. 
var.  Brownii,  Anderss.    I:  130,  131, 

132.   II :  38,  86,  87. 
var.  groenlandica,  Anderss.  1 : 131, 

132.    II:  38,  86.  87. 
arctica,  R.  Br.  I:  130.   II:  85,86. 
Brownii  (Anderss.)  Lundstr.  I:  131. 

II:    85,  86. 

Brotvnii,  Bebb  I:  130.  II:  85,  86. 
cordifolia,  Pursh  I:  130. 
ylauca,  L.  I:  131.  II:  18,  34,  85,  86,  87. 

var.  subarctica,  Lundstr.  I:  131. 
groenlandica,  (Anderss.)  Lundstr.  1 :  130. 

II:  18,  86. 
herbacea,  L.  I:  131.    II:   30,  31,  41, 

85,  87-88. 
lanata,  L.  II :  85. 
Pallasii,  Anderss.  1:  130. 
polaris,  Wahlenb    I:  131.    II:  88. 
reticulata,  L.  I:  130,  131. 
uva  ursi,  Pursh  II:  85. 
Savastana  alpina,  (Sw.)  Scribn.  1:  179. 
Saxifraga  aizoides,  L.  I:  12,  64.  11:29, 

33,  36,  65. 
bronchialis,  L.  I:  67. 
caespitosa,  L.  I:  70,  71,  74,  75.    II:  66. 
cernua,  L.  I:  75—76.  II:  29,  33,  36, 
66-67.   Ill:   7,  8,  9,  11,  12,  14, 
19,  20,  24. 

Chamissoi,  Sternb.  1 :  66,  67,  76. 
comosa,  Britton  1 :  69. 
decipiens,  Ehrh.  I:  70,  71,  72. 

var.  caespitosa,  Engl.  I:  70,  71. 
exarata,  Hook.  I:  73. 
exarata,  Vill.  I:  73,  74,  75. 
flagellaris,  Willd.  I:  13,  14,  62-64 

11:29,33,41,65.  Ill:  8,  9,19,23. 
var.  setigera,  Engl.  1 :  62. 
foliolosa,  R.  Br.  I:  69.    II:  66. 


1898- 1902.  No.  19.]      STRAY  CONTRIBUT.  TO  THE  BOTANY  OF  N.  DEVON.      35 


Suxilragu  groenlandica,  L.  1:70—73. 
II:  29,  33,  36,  66.    Ill:   7,  8,  9, 
11,  12,  14,  19,  20,  23,  25. 
f.  flavescens,    Simm.    I:   72,   73. 

Ill:  12. 
var.  uniflora,  (R.  Br.)  Simm.  I:  71  — 

72,  73,  74.  II:  66. 
*exaratoides,    Simm.   I:   13,  73  — 

75,  196.    II:  29,  41. 
hieraciifolia,  Waldst.  &  Kit.  II :  29, 39, 45. 
Hirculus,  L.  1: 12,  14,  64-66.  11:29, 

42,  44,  45.   Ill :  6,  23. 
var.  alpina,  Engl.  I:  64. 
var.  alpina,  Lange  I:  64. 
var.  propinqua,  (R.  Br.)  Simm.  1 : 65. 
var.  uniflora,  Sternb.  1 :  64,  65. 
hyperborea,  R.  Br.  1 :  76. 
Laurentiana,  Ser.  I:  76. 
mixta,  Lap.  1 :  73,  74. 
moschata,  Wulf.  1 :  70. 
nivalis,  L.  I:  67-69,  73.11:    29,33, 

36,  66.   Ill:  6,  7,  8,  19,  20. 
var.  tenuior,  Wablenb.  I:  67. 
var.  tenuis,  Wahlenb.  I:  67. 
var.  ramosa,  Engl.  1:  68. 
nivalis,  auct.  1 :  69. 

oppositifolia,  L.  I:  6,  60-62,  131. 
II:    22,   29,  33,  36,  52,  64-65. 
Ill:  7,  8,  9,  11,  12,  14,  19,  20,  22, 
24,  25,  26. 
f.  pulvinata,    Anderss.  &  Hesselm. 

I:  61,  122. 
f.  reptans,      Anderss.    &    Hesselm. 

I:  61. 

pauciflora,  Sternb.  I:  68. 
petiolaris,  R.  Br.  I:  76. 
propinqua,  R.  Br.  1 :  64,  65. 
rivularis,  L.  I:  76-77.  11:29,33,36, 

67,  76.   Ill:  7. 

var.  hyperborea,  (R  Br.)  Lange  1:76. 
var.  purpurascens,    Lange    1 :  76. 

II:  67. 

setigera,  Pursh  1 :  62. 
stellaris,  L.  I:  69.   II:  29,33,36,66. 
var.Comosa,Retz.  I:  69-70. 11:66. 

Ill:  7,  19. 

var.  prolifera,  Sternb.  I:  69. 
tricuspidata,  Rottb.  I:  13,  14,  66- 
67,  76.    II:  29,  33,  37,  45,  65. 
Ill:  22,  23,  25. 

f.  integrifolia,  Van  Hoff.  I:  67. 
uniflora,  R.  Br.  I:  71. 
vaginata,  Sternb.  1 :  76. 
mrginiensis,  Michx.  1 :  69,  70. 
virginiensis,  Hart  I:  69. 


Sclerocbloa  Borreri,  Bab.  I:  158. 
Silene   acaulis,   L.  I:  127-128.  II:  30, 

34,  36,  82.    Ill:  22,  23. 
Sisymbriurn  humifusum,  Vabl  I:  80. 

pygmaeum,  Trautv.  I:  77. 
Spergula  saginoides,  Hook.  I:  119. 

var.  nivalis,  Lindbl.  I:  119. 
Statice  Armeria,  L.  1:  34,  35. 
labradorica,  (Wallr.)  I:  35. 
maritima,  Mill.  1:  35,  36.    II:    14,  29, 

32,  36. 
var.  sibirica,  (Turcz.)  Simm.  I:   34 

-36.    II:  55. 
sibirica,  Ledeb.  1 :  34,  35. 
Steenhammera  maritima,  Reicbenb.  II:  54. 
Stellaria  Edwardsii,  R.  Br.  1 :  124. 
humifusa,  Rottb.  1:  124.   IL:  30,  34, 

36,  79,  80. 

laeta,  Richards.  I:  124. 
longipes,  Goldie  I:  124-125.  11:30, 
34,  36,   80.    Ill:   7,  8,  9,  19,  20, 
21,  23,  24. 

var.  Edwardsii,  Meeban  II:  79. 
var.  humilis,  Fenzl  1:  124.    II:  80. 
var.  peduneularis,    (Bunge)  Fenzl 

II:  80. 

nitida,  Hook.  I:  124. 
pedunciilaris,Biinge  II  :  80. 
slricta,  Richards.  I:  124.  II:  80. 
Stenhammaria  maritima,  (L.)Hartm.  II:  54. 

Taraxacum    arcticum,   (Trautv.)    Dahlst. 

I:  21.   II:  28,  39,  45. 
arctogenum,  Dahlst.    II:  28,  32,  40, 

49,  50. 

ceratophorum,  (Ledeb.)  DC.  II:  50. 
Dens  leonis,  Hart  I:  20,  21,  22.  IF:  49. 
hyparcticum,  Dahlst.  I:  13,  14,  20- 
21,   22,    195.    II:   28,  32,  40,  45, 
49,  50. 

officinale,  Nath.  I:  21,  49,  50. 
officinale,  Web.  II:  21,  49. 
var.  lividum,  auct.  II :  49,  50. 
var.  pallidum,  Greely  1:  20,  21,  22. 
palustre,  (Ehrh.)  II:  49. 
phymatocarpum,  J.  Vahl  I:  13,  20, 

21.   II:  28,  32,  39,  47,  49-50. 
phymatocnrpum,  auct.  1 :  20.  II :  49,  50. 
pumilum,  Dahlst.  I:  10,  11,  13,  21- 

22,  195.   II:  28,  41. 
Tofieldia  borealis,  Wahlenb.  II:  88. 
palustris,   Huds.   II:    14,  30,  34,  41, 

88-89. 

Trisetum  airoides,  Roem.  &  Sch.  I:  171. 
sesquiflorum,  Meehan  II:  104. 


36 


H.  G.  SIMMONS. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Trisetum  spicatum,  (L.)  Richt.  I:  171- 

172.  II:  31,34,  37,    104.    Ill:  23. 
subspicatiim,  (L.)  Pal.  de  Beauv.  I:  171, 

172.    II:  104. 
var.  molle,  Gray  I:  171. 
Triticum   repens,   L.  var.  nanum.  Hook. 

1:  153. 

var.  purpurascens.  Hook.  I:  153. 
violaceum,  Hornem.  1:  153. 
Turritis  mollis.  Hook.  II:  68. 

Vaccinium  mucronatum,  L.  II:  56. 
pubescens,  Hornem.  I:  37. 
uliginosnni,  L.  I:  37.    II:  56. 

var.  microphyllum,  (Lange)  Nath.  1 :  37. 

II:  56. 

var.  mucronatum,  Weth.  II:  56. 
var.  pubescens,  Lange  I:  37. 
*microphyllum,  Lange  I:  37. 
Vitis  idaea,   L.  II:  29,  33,  42,  56. 


Vesicaria  arctica,  Richards.  I:  95.  II:  72. 

arenosa,  Richards.  I:  95. 
Vilfa  arundinacea,  Trin.  I:  177. 

Wahlbergellaaffinis,  Fr.  I:  125, 126. 11 :  80. 
angustiflora,  Rupr.  1 :  125. 
apetala,  (L.)  Fr.  I:  127. 
triflora,  Fr.  II:  81. 
Vahlii,  Rupr.  I:  126. 
Woodsia  alpina,  S.  F.  Gray  1 :  183. 
glabella,  R.  Br.  I:  183,  184.   11:  31, 

35,  37,  108. 

hyperborea,  R.  Br.  I:  183. 
A  arvonica,  Milde  1 :  183. 
var.  glabella,  Trautv.  1 :  184. 
ilvensis,  (L.)  R.  Br.   I:  183,  184. 

II:  31,  37. 
var.  alpina,  (Bolt.)  Aschers.  &  Graebn. 

I:  183-184. 
var.  glabella,  Gelert  I:  184.  II:    108. 


O 


Printed  June  30,  1909. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  20. 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG: 

BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS 

WITH  A 

SUPPLEMENT  TO  THE  ECHINODERMS 

(WITH  A  TABLE) 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FBIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


-ccc- 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED   BY  A.W.BR0GGER 

1909 


0, 


'f  brachiopods  brought  back  by  the  Second  Fram  Expedition 
from  Jones  Sound  (Gaasefjord)  one  species,  rhynchonella  psittacea.  Of 
molluscs  the  collection  of  the  Fram  Expedition  contained  54  species,  viz.: 

Lamellibranchiata     ...  23 

Amphineiira 2 

Gastropoda 27 

Pteropoda 1 

Cephalopoda 1 

Part  of  the  mollusc  material  was  collected  off  the  west  coast  of 
Greenland  at  Egedesminde,  Godhavn  and  Upernivik  as  well  as  the  winter 
harbour  of  the  Fram  1898—99  in  Smith's  Sound  (78°  45.7'  Lat.  N.  74° 
56.5' Long.  W.  of  Greenwich);  but  the  greater  part  was  obtained  from 
the  north  side  of  Jones  Sound  and  especially  from  Havnefjord  (76°  29.4' 
Lat.  N.  84°  4'  Long.  W )  where  the  Fram  wintered  in  1899—1900,  and 
from  Gaasefjord  (76°  48.9'  Lat.  N.  88°  39.5'  Long.  W.)  where  the  Fram 
lay  frozen  in  during  the  two  winters  1900—01  and  1901 — 02.  In  the 
summer  of  1901  a  lengthy  dredging  excursion  was  undertaken  up  Hell 
Gate  as  far  as  Landsend  (76°  50.9'  Lat.  N.  89°  32'  Long.  W.),  and  in  the 
summer  of  1902  the  north  side  of  North  Devon  was  investigated  between 
St.  Helena  (76°  15.5'  Lat.  N.  89°  16.5'  Long.  W.)  and  the  entrance  to 
Cardigan  Strait  and  Norfolk  Inlet  (76°  21'  Lat.  N.  90°  30'  Long.  W.)  which 
was  the  most  westerly  point  at  which  zoological  dredgings  were  under- 
taken. For  special  names  of  localities  in  this  work  I  would  refer  the 
reader  to  the  maps  in  Ritmester  ISAGHSEN'S  Astronomical  and  geodetical 
observations  (Rep.  II  Norvveg.  Arc.  Exp.  in  the  Fram  1898—1902,  Vol.  2 
No.  5,  1907). 

The  whole  of  the  molluscs  are  shallow-water  forms.  Most  of  them 
are  from  depths  less  than  40  meters,  and  60  meters  is  the  greatest 
depth  from  which  molluscs  have  been  obtained.  None  of  them  are  new 
to  science.  However  the  following  11  species  were  not  formerly  known 

1 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


to  occur  in  the  waters  North  and  West  of  Baffin  Bay :  crenella  faba, 
tellina  torelli,  tellina  moesta,  tellina  loveni,  thracia  truncata,  thracia 
septentrionalis,  pandora  glacialis,  pilidium  radiatum,  beta  harpu- 
laria,  trichotropis  cornea,  dendronotus  frondosus. 

It  is  with  sincere  pleasure  that  I  here  acknowledge  the  obligation 
I  am  under  to  Mr.  HERMAN  FRIELE  for  his  valuable  advice  and  help 
during  the  composition  of  this  work.  Not  least  of  all  am  I  indebted  to 
him  for  the  liberality  with  which  he  has  placed  at  my  disposal  his  rich 
collection  of  arctic  molluscs.  I  am  also  deeply  indebted  to  Dr.  AD.  S. 
JENSEN  for  his  kindness  in  looking  through  the  material  collected  by  the 
expedition  belonging  to  the  genus  tellina. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.J  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS. 


Brachiopoda.     i 

Rhynchonella,  psittacea,  GMELIN. 

Locality: 

Sept.  20.     1900.     The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6-40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
July     17.     1901. 

Very  common,  but  most  of  the  specimens  were  dead. 
Length  up  to  27  mm. 


Aug.   18. 

1898. 

Aug.  26. 

)! 

July    29. 

1899. 

July    31. 

1900. 

Sept.  20. 

H 

Sept.  20. 

« 

Aug.     2. 

1901. 

Aug.     2. 

51 

Aug.   16. 

(I 

JVLollusca. 

Lamellibrancliiata. 

Nucula  tenuis,  MONTAGU. 

Locality: 

Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 

The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord. 

Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnofjord,  20—60  m 

The  head  of  tho  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

,  30  m.     Soft  brown  clay  with  algae. 

,.  about  40  m. 

,  2—4  m.     Soft  brown  clay,  with  small 

,  about  14  m.  [stones  and  sand. 

At   the  head    of    the   Gaasefjord  nucula  tenuis  was  very  common, 
but  it  was  scarcer  at  other  localities. 

Most    of    the    specimens    belong    to    the    variety    expansa    REEVE, 
though  many  of  them  can  be  referred   to   inflata,  HANCOCK  and   others 
again  are  intermediate  forms  between  these  varities.     I  append  measure- 
ments of  some  specimens  from  Rice  Strait  and  Gaasefjord. 
Rice  Strait      Long.  17.2  mm. 
15        „ 
14.5     „ 

14 

» 

Gaasefjord       Long.  13      mm. 
12.5     ,. 

19  c 
12.U        -. 

10.5    ,, 
10.5 


Lat. 

14.2  mm. 

Crass.  9.5  mm. 

12.2     „ 

8       „ 

11.5     „ 

8.5     „ 

11.5     „ 

7.5     „ 

Lat. 

11      mm. 

Crass.  7      mm. 

10.5     „ 

6.7    „ 

10       „ 

6       „ 

9.5     „ 

6.5     ,. 

8.7 

5.5 

JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Leda  pernula,  MULLER. 

Locality: 

Aug.   18.  1898.  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  26.       „ 

July    29.  1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  18  m. 
Sept.    9.        „  ,  16  m. 

July    26.  1900.  West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  about  20  m.  Clay. 

Sept.  19.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Aug.     2.  1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.   16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 

At  Rice  Strait  this  species  was  quite  common,  whereas  in  Havne- 
fjord and  Gaasefjord  it  was  very  scarce. 

The  specimens  belong  to  the  variety  costigera,  BECK.  In  the  speci- 
mens subjected  to  careful  examination  longitudinal  rib  on  the  inner  side 
of  the  shell  is  well-developed,  concentric  striation  is  fine,  shell  is  extre- 
mely thin  and  fragile. 

The  largest  specimens  have  a  length  of  26 — 27.5  mm.,  height 
13— 14  mm.,  and  breadth  7.5— 8.5  mm.  In  the  25  specimens  the. height 
of  the  shell  is  47.27—56.67  °/o  of  the  length  and  the  breadth  (thickness) 
22.86—36.12  °/o  of  the  length.  In  leda  minuta  the  height  of  the 
shell  is  56.25—58.33%  of  the  length,  and  the  breadth  32.14—45.45  of 
the  length. 

Leda  minuta,  MULLER. 

Local i  t  y : 

Aug.  18.     1898.    Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  26.       „ 

July    29.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
Sept.  22.        „  ,16  m. 

March  7.     1900.     Bay  south  of  SjOpOlse  Ness,  30—40  m.    Small  stones  slightly  over- 

grown  with  laminariu. 

July    25.        „        The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 
Sept.  20.        „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6-40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
July      9.     1901.     Renbugten. 

The  species  seems  to  be  extremely  scarce,  since  at  no  locality  were 
more  than  one  or  two  specimens  found.     The  largest  specimen  measure: 
Long.  18    mm.      Lat.  10.5  mm.      Crass.  7.5  mm. 
16.5  9.5  6.5 


Yoldia,  portlandia,  arctica,  GRAY. 

Locality: 

Sept.  19.     1900.     Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 
Sept.  20.        „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  wih  small  stones. 
Aug.     2.     1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.     2.        „  ,  2—4  m.     Soft   brown   clay  with  small 

Aug.   16.        „  ,  about  14  m.  [stones  and  sand. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS. 


Very  common ;  at  the  last-named  dredging  station  nearly  600  speci- 
mens were  obtained. 

The  specimens,  which  have  a  length  of  up  to  23  mm.  belong  partly 
to  the  variety  portlandia,  HITCHCOCK  and  partly  to  the  variety  siliqua, 
REEVE.  The  majority  belong  to  intermediate  forms.  I  append  some 
measurements  of  specimens  which  were  taken  at  the  same  time  at  the 
head  of  the  Gaasefjord : 

Long.  23     mm.        Lat.  13.5  mm.  Grass.  10.2  mm. 

22.5     „                   13       „  9.5     „ 

22.2    „                   12.7    „  '  8.7    „ 

22       „                   13       „  10.5     „ 

21.5    „                   12.2    „  7.7    „ 

21.5     „                   12.5    „  9.5     „ 

21        „                   12.5     „  8       „ 

20.7    „                   12.5    „  9       „ 

20.5    „                   13       „  9       „ 

20       „                   11.5    „  8       ,. 

19.5    „                   12       „  7.5    „ 

19       „                   12.5    „  8.5    „ 

18       „                   12.2    „  8       „ 

17       „                    10.5     „  6.5     „ 
Thus   in   these  specimens  the  height  of  the  shell  is  56.74 — 67.78  °/,, 

of  the  length  and   the  breadth  35.34—47.73  %  of  the  length :    in  some 

other    specimens    I  have  found   moreover  that  the   breadth  of  the  shell 
can  be  as  much  as  49.11  °/0  of  the  length. 


YoJdia,  hyperborea,  LOVEN. 

Locality: 

Aug.   18.     1898.     Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 

Sept.  19.     1900.     Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 
Sept.  20.        „         The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  ra.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Aug.     2.     1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

The  species  seems  to  be  very  scarce,  since  not  more  than  at  most 
3  specimens  have  been  found  at  any  locality. 

The  specimens  quite  accord  with  specimens  from  Spitzbergen  and 
Novaya  Zemlya  in  the  Bergen  Museum.  The  height  of  the  shell  varies 
between  49.3  °/0  and  55.9  %  of  the  length,  while  its  breath  (thickness) 
is  between  25  %  and  31  %  of  its  length.  In  a  specimen  31  mm.  long 
there  were  anteriorly  25  hinge-teeth  and  posteriorly  20  hinge-teeth.  In 
a  specimen  25  mm.  long  the  number  of  hinge-leeth  were  24  and  20 


8  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

respectively.  In  specimens  from  Spitzbergen  I  have  found  the  numbers 
to  be  22—26/16—22.  According  to  TORELL  they  are  29/23.  In  speci- 
mens from  the  Siberian  Polar  Sea  LECHE  found  23/14  teeth.  KRAUSE 
found  21/13  teeth  in  a  specimen  31  mm.  long  from  the  Bering  Sea. 
According  to  POSSELT  moreover  yoldia  hyperborea  may  have  as  many 
as  38/32  teeth. 

The  largest  specimens  measure: 

Rice  Strait  Long.  34.5  mm.      Lat.  17      mm.      Grass.  9.5  mm. 

31.5    „  16  8.5     „ 

Gaasefjord  29       „  15.5     „  9       „ 

26  14.5     „  7.5     „ 

A  right  valve  from  Gaasefjord  had  a  length  of  31  mm.  POSSELT 
gives  the  maximum  size  of  this  species  as  45  mm. 

Yoldia  hyperborea  is  not  mentioned  by  either  POSSELT  or  HAGG,  in 
their  treatises  on  the  distribution  of  this  species,  as  occurring  in  waters 
north  of  America.  But  as  has  been  already  remarked  by  TORELL  it  must 
be  this  species  which  under  the  name  of  nucula  sapotilla  REEVE 
mentions  as  occurring  in  the  Wellington  Channel. 


Mytilus  edulis,  LINNE. 
Locality: 

July    20.     1898.     Egedesminde. 
July    30.        „         Godhavn,  about  6  m. 

The  largest  specimen  has  a  length  of  78  mm. 


Modiolaria  laevfgata,  GRAY. 
Locality: 

Aug.   18.  1898.  Camp  Clay,  Cape  Sabine,  4  —  10  m. 

Aug.  24.        „  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  26.       „ 

July    29.  1899.  The  winter  harbour.  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
Sept.  22.  ,16  m. 

July    25.  1900.  ,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July    26.        „  West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  about  20  in.  Clay. 

July    30.        „  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

July    31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord.  20-60  m. 

Aug.     3.        r  Fosheim  Peak  and  the  valley  on  the  west  side  of  Havnefjord.   4— 40m. 

Sept.  19.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord  4—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

June  28.  1901.  The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord. 

July      8.        ,.  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July      9. 

July    12.        „  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

Aug.     2.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  40  m. 
Aug.   16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS. 


Aug.  30.     1901.     Gaasefjord,  8  m.     Small  stones  and  clay  with  fucaceae. 

July    11.     1902.     St.  Helena,   4  —  14  in.     Large    and   small    stones   over   grown    with 

fucaceae. 

July    15.        „         Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon. 
July    19.        „         Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6—14  m.    Small  stones  and 

algae. 

At  no  locality  was  modiolaria  laevigata  abundant.  At  most  places 
the  variety  substriata  GRAY  (m.  laevis  BECK)  was  met  with  together 
with  the  typical  form,  though  the  latter  was  more  common  than  the 
variety.  I  append  a  few  measurements  of  both  forma  typica  and  of 
substriata,  showing  how  the  species  varies  in  regard  to  form. 
Forma  typica: 


Rice  Strait 


Gaasefjord 


Forma  substriata: 
Gaasefjord 


Havnefjord 


Long. 

34 

mm. 

Lat.  20 

mm. 

Crass  14 

26.5 

5? 

17 

55 

12 

26.5 

55 

17 

55 

11.5 

31 

55 

19 

55 

14 

29 

55 

17 

55 

12.5 

28 

55 

18 

55 

12 

27 

55 

18 

n 

13 

33 
29 
20 
19 


21 
19 
13 
12 


mm. 


nigra,,  GRAY. 

Locality: 

Aug.   18.     1898.    Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  26.        „ 

Sept.  20.     1900.     The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6-40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Aug.     2.     1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.   16.       „ 

The  species  seems  to  be  very  scarce,  since  there  are  not  more  than 
one  or  two  specimens  from  any  locality. 

Rice  Strait      Long.  35      mm.        Lat.  18      mm. 


Gaasefjord 


27 

19 

45 

43.5 

38.5 


16 
11 
24 
23 
20.5 


Crass.  11.5  mm. 

10  „ 

7.5  „ 
15 

12  .„ 
11 


In  specimens   from    Rice  Strait  the   epidermis  is  either  olive-brown 
or  dark-brown,  in  specimens  from  Gaasefjord  it  is  olive-brown  or  black. 


10  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

Crenella  faba,  0.  F.  MULLER. 

(Fig.  1.) 
Locality: 

July  29.  1898.  Egedesminde. 

Aug.  5.        „  Upernivik,  8—26  m. 

Aug.  18.        „  Camp  Clay,  Cape  Sabine,  4  —  10  m. 

July  30.  1900.  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

At  Upernivik  this  characteristic  West  Greenland  species  was  quite 
common,  whereas  from  each  of  the  other  localities  only  one  or  two 
specimens  were  obtained. 

According  to  CLESSIN  crenella  faba  attains  a  size  of  12  mm.,  though 
POSSELT  on  the  other  hand  gives  its  size  as  18  mm.  Three  of  the  Fram 
Expedition's  specimens  measured: 

Upernivik  Long.  8.5  mm.        Lat.  7      mm.        Crass.  4.5  mm. 

Egedesminde  10.2     „  8.5     „  5.5     „ 

Stordalen  13       „  10.2     „  6       „ 

In  quite  young  specimens  the  radiating  ribs  are  seen  also  on  the 
inner  side  of  the  shell,  whereas  in  older  individuels  they  only  appear  as 
a  narrow  band  at  the  edge.  Otherwise  the  inner  side  is  smooth. 
According  to  CLESSIN  the  inner  side  of  the  shell  is  light-brown,  but  in 
the  specimens  which  I  examined  it  was  of  a  lustrous  bluish-white,  and 
only  at  the  edge  of  the  shell  was  there  a  brown  rim. 

Crenella  faba  has  not  previously  been  met  with  in  the  waters 
north  and  west  of  Baffin  Bay.  Formerly  it  was  only  known  to  occur 
on  the  west  coast  of  Greenland,  where  it  is  distributed  from  Ivigtut  to 
Melville  Bay,  0—470  m.,  and  at  Cumberland  Sound,  Baffin  Land  (PFEFFER, 
DALL).  It  is  also  said  to  have  been  found  at  Iceland,  though  accord- 
ing to  POSSELT  this  is  doubtful. 


Pecten  gronlandicus,  SOWERBY. 

Locality: 

Aug.    18.     1898.     Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  26.       „ 

July    22.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  10  m. 
March  7.     1900.     Bay  south    of  Sj0p01se  Ness,    Havnefjord,    30—40  in.     Small  stown 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

July     18.        „         The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord   about  60  rn.     Small  stones  and  day. 
July    21.       „ 


July    22. 
July    25. 


about  60m.  Stones  and  lithothainnia. 
about  60  m.     Small  stones, 
about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 


July    26.        „         West  side    of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,    Havnefjord,   20  m.     Clay. 
July    27.        „         The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.  about  40  m. 

Aug.      1.        „         Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord.    Up  to  20  m.    Small  stones 
with  some  clay. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  11 

Aug.  1.  1900.  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10  — 50  m.    Small  stones. 

Aug.  4.        „  Blieksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20 — 30  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.  4.        „  SjopOlse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.  7.        „  East  Cape,  Havnefjord,  20-50  m. 

Sept.  9.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen.  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  slones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

This  species  was  very  common  off  Stordalen,  East  Cape,  the  head 
of  the  Gaasefjord  and  in  particular  off  Forvisningsdalen.  In  the  other 
localities  it  was  more  scattered  and  scarcer. 

The  largest  specimens  from  Rice  Strait  measure:  Long.  28  mm. 
Lat.  261.5  mm.  In  specimens  from  Jones  Sund  these  measurements  are: 
32.5  mm.  and  30  mm.  respectively.  According  to  KNIPOWITSCH  the 
species  attains  the  same  size  at  Spitzbergen.  On  the  east  coast  of 
Greenland  according  to  JENSEN  it  attains  a  length  of  28.5  mm.  COLLIN 
gives  28  mm.  as  the  size  it  attains  in  the  Kara  Sea. 

In  most  of  the  specimens  the  valves  were  of  equal  size,  though  in 
a  few  instances  the  edge  of  the  left  valve  projected  very  slightly  beyond 
that  of  the  right.  (Cf.  COLLIN  and  JENSEN). 


Astarte  borealis,  CHEMNITZ. 

Locality: 

Aug.    18.  1898.  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.    24.        „ 

Aug.    26.        „  ,  about  40  m. 

July    26.  1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
Sept.  22.        „  ,  14  m. 

March  7.  1900.  Bay  south  of  Sjopolse  Ness,   Havnefjord,   30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

Aug.      1.        „  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10—50  m.    Small  stones. 

Aug.      7.        „  East  Cape,  Havnefjord,  20—50  m. 

Sept.   19.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6  —  40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

July      8.  1901.  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 

July     12.        „  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

Aug.    30.        „  Gaasefjord,  8  m.     Clay  with  small  stones  and  fucaceae. 

July     19.  1902.  Off  the  camping  ground.  North  Devon,  6—14  m.     Small  stones. 

In  Rice  Strait  and  at  the  winter  harhour  Havnefjord  this  species 
was  very  common.  In  Gaasefjord  and  off  the  camping  ground  North 
Devon  it  was  common,  but  in  the  remaining  localities  it  only  occurred 
sparsely. 

The  specimens  may  exhibit  considerable  variations.  Thus  in  25 
specimens  the  height  of  the  shell  varied  between  74.1  °/0  and  93  %  of 
the  length,  while  the  breadth  (thickness)  of  the  shell  varied  between 
31.7  °/o  and  50  °/0  of  the  length.  I  append  measurements  of  some  of 
these  specimens: 


1 2  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Havnefjord        Long. 

41      mm. 

Lat.  33      mm. 

Crass.  14 

mm. 

Forvisningsdalen 

39       „ 

30        „ 

13.5 

V 

— 

38       „ 

30.5     „ 

13.5 

,, 

— 

38       „ 

29       „ 

12.5 

r 

Gaasefjord 

37.5     „ 

32 

17 

11 

— 

36       „ 

30       ,. 

13 

„ 

Rice  Strait 

35       „ 

32 

14 

,. 

— 

34       „ 

30       ,. 

14 

n 

— 

30   "   „ 

28       .. 

15 

» 

— 

30       .. 

25       „ 

9.5 

11 

— 

27       ,. 

20       ,. 

9 

r 

— 

26 

21.5 

8.5 

11 

The  specimens  may  be  referred  to  the  variety  placenta,  MORCH 
and  I  he  kindred  variety  withami  (Woon)  LECHE.  This  latter  however 
is  scarce.  The  cyprinoid  form  (astarte  cyprinoides  DUVAL)  which  occurs 
on  the  northern  coasts  of  Norway,  and  which  is  also  found  on  the 
west  coast  of  Greenland,  was  entirely  absent  from  the  material  of  the 
Fram  Expedition. 

Astarte  banksi,  LEACH. 

Locality: 

Aug.     5.  1898.  Uperuivik,  8-26  m 

Aug.    18.        „  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.   26.       „ 

July    29.  1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
Sept.  22.        „  ,  16  m. 

March  7.  1900.  Bay  south  of  SjOpOlse  Ness,   Havnefjord,    30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

July    22.  „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  40  m. 

July    25.  „  ,  about  20  m.      Rocks    and    stones. 

July    26.  „  West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  about  20  m.  Clay. 

Aug.      1.        „  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  10—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     3.        „  Fosheims    Peak   and   the   valley    on    the    west   side  of  Havnefjord, 

4-40  m. 

Aug.      4.        „  Sj6p6lse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  Blaeksprutgrunden.  Havnefjord.  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 

Sept.   19.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord.  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

June    28.  1901.  The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord. 

July      4.        „  The  sound,  Jammerbugten. 

July      8.        „  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July      9.        „ 

July     12.        „  Bay  near  Landsend.  about  35  m. 

July     19.        „  Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6  —  14m.  Small  stones  and  algae. 

Aug.      2.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  40  in. 
Aug.    16.        „  .  about  14  m. 

July     15.  1902.  Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon.     Stones  and  large  fucaceae. 

Aug.      4.        „  North  of  the  peninsula.  Gaasefjord,  20—30  m. 


1898-1002.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  13 

Common,  though  the  species  occurs  nowhere  in  such  ahundance  as 
astarte  borealis. 

The  majority  of  the  specimens  can  be  referred  to  the  variety 
warhami,  HANCOCK.  However  the  variety  striata  LEACH  is  by  no 
means  scarce,  though  globosa  MOLLER  on  the  other  hand  is  very  rarely 
met  with.  1  append  some  measurements  showing  the  variations  which 
this  species  also  undergoes: 


Forvisningsdalen  Long. 

25.5  mm. 

Lat.  21      mm. 

Crass.  11 

mm. 

Havhestfjeld 

25 

***           n 

22 

13.2 

H 

Forvisningsdalen 

24.5     „ 

20 

11 

n 

The  winter  harbour 

23.5    „ 

19.5 

12.5 

H 

Forvisningsdalen 

22.7    „ 

18 

9 

n 

— 

22       „ 

18 

10 

n 

— 

21        „ 

17 

9.5 

r> 

— 

20.5     „ 

15.5 

8 

n 

—    . 

18       ., 

14.5 

9.5 

n 

— 

17.5 

14.5 

9.2 

51 

The  largest  specimens  have  a  length  of  25  —  26  mm.  On  the  west 
coast  of  Greenland  this  species  attains  a  length  of  22  mm.  (PossELT). 
On  the  east  coast  of  Greenland  it  attains  a  length  of  24  mm.  (JENSEN). 
The  maximal  size  of  the  species  is  27.4  mm.  (KNIPOWITSCH). 

Tellina,  macoma,  calcaria,  CHEMNITZ. 

Fig.  2  and  3. 
Locality: 

July    30.  1898.  Godhavn,  about  6  m. 

Sept.  '22.  1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  16  m. 

March  7.  1900.  Bay  south  of  Sjopolse  Ness,    Havnefjord,   30—40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

July     18.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

July    22.        „  ,  about  40  m. 

July    26.        „  The  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  about  20  m. 

July    31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord,  20-60  m.  [Clay. 

Aug.      1.        ,,  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10  —  50  m.    Small  stones. 

Aug.     3.        „  Fosheims    Peak    and    the    valley    on   the   west  side  of  Havnefjord, 

4-40  m. 

Aug.      4.        „  Bloeksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.      8.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  30  m. 

Sept.    19.        ,,  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4-  40m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Aug.    30.        „  Gaasefjord,  8  m.     Clay  with  small  stones  and  fucaceae. 

In  the  Havnefjord,  especially  off  Stordalen  and  at  Blaeksprutgrunden 
tellina  calcaria  was  very  common.  It  seemed  to  be  less  common  in 
Gaasefjord,  though  even  there  it  could  not  be  said  to  be  scarce. 


Gaaseford          Long. 

41      mm. 

Lat.  27 

mm 

— 

38.5    „ 

26.7 

„ 

Forvisningsdalen 

37.5    „ 

28 

» 

Gaasefjord 

37.2    „ 

24.5 

n 

— 

33.5    „ 

24 

r 

— 

32.5     „ 

25 

f 

Stordalen 

31       „ 

21.5 

„ 

— 

27.2 

20 

14  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

The  largest  specimens  found  by  the  Fram  Expedition  are  up  to 
41  mm.  long.  By  way  of  comparison  it  may  be  stated  that  on  the  west 
coast  of  Greenland  this  species  attains  a  size  of  36  mm.  (POSSELT),  on 
the  east  coast  it  can  be  36.25  mm.  (JENSEN)  at  Spitzbergen  45.5  mm. 
(KNIPOWITSCH)  and  in  the  Bering  Sea  51  mm.  (KRAUSE).  Some  of  the 
largest  specimens  measure: 

Grass.  14.5  mm. 
12.5  „ 
13  „ 
13  „ 
10.5  „ 
10.5  „ 
11.5  „ 
11.2  „ 

Some  of  the  specimens  are  characterised  by  their  narrow  and  elon- 
gated form.  The  posterior  end  of  the  shell  tapers  comparatively  sharply. 
This  form  is  most  frequently  met  with  in  specimens  from  the  head  of 
the  Gaasefjord.  On  the  other  hand  there  are  several  specimens  which 
have  a  remarkably  high  shell.  The  most  characteristic  feature  in  their 
case,  however,  is  that  the  posterior  end  of  the  shell  is  more  obtusely 
rounded,  so  that  the  shell's  form  reminds  one  of  tellina  torelli.  In  the 
illustrations  I  have  shown  the  two  most  pronounced  instances  of  these 
forms;  the  41  mm.  specimen  from  the  head  of  the  Gaasefjord  (Fig.  2), 
and  the  37.5  mm.  specimen  from  Forvisningsdalen  (Fig.  3).  Between 
these  extreme  forms  there  are  scarcely  distinguishable  intermediate  forms. 


Tellina,  macoma,  torelli,  IAP.  STEENSTRUP. 

Locality: 

Sept.  22.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  16  m. 

March  7.     1900.     Bay  south  of  Sjopolse  Ness,  Havnefjord,   30-40  m.     Small  stones 
slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

The  two  largest  specimens  measure: 

Long.  14     mm.        Lat.  10.5  mm.        Crass.  5.7  mm. 

13.7     „  10.5     „  5.5     „ 

These  specimens  are  thus  slightly  larger  than  the  biggest  living 
specimens  which  JENSEN  has  investigated  (13.5  mm.).  Their  form  is 
almost  exactly  similar  to  the  fossil  shells  from  Vendsyssel  which  he 
has  depicted  (tab.  1,  fig.  3  f — i). 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  15 

Tellina  torelli  has  not  previously  been  found  in  the  waters  west 
and  north  of  Baffin  Bay.  According  to  JENSEN  the  species  was  pre- 
viously only  known  to  occur  on  the  west  and  east  coasts  of  Greenland, 
at  Spitzbergen,  and  in  the  Kara  Sea. 

Tellina,  macoma,  moesta,  DESHAYES. 

Locality: 

July    26.     1900.     West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Ha  vnefjord,  about  20m.   Clay. 
Sept.  20.        „         The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6  —  40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Aug.     2.     1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.    16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 

The  species  seems  to  be  very  scarce,  as  with  the  exception  of  a 
pair  of  loose  shells  only  6  whole  specimens  were  obtained,  three  of 
which  were  alive.  These  latter  and  the  largest  of  the  dead  specimens 
measure : 

Long  21.5  mm        Lat.  15.5  mm         Grass.  6.5  mm.  (dead) 
20       „  14.5     „  6       „ 

19.2     „  14.5    „  6.2     „ 

19  14       „  5.5    „ 

The  specimens  are  rather  over  middle  size,  since  tellina  moesta 
according  to  JENSEN  has  a  maximum  size  of  34.5  mm.  They  are  almost 
exactly  similar  to  the  specimen  from  the  east  coast  of  Greenland  which 
he  has  depicted  (tab.  1,  fig.  4,  a,  d). 

Tellina  moesta  was  also  previously  unknown  in  the  waters  west 
and  north  of  Baffin  Bay.  JENSEN  states  that  the  species  was  previously 
known  to  occur  at  Baffin  Land,  on  the  west  and  east  coasts  of  Green- 
land, at  Spitzbergen  and  at  Novaya  Zemlya  as  well  as  in  the  Kara  Sea, 
Siberian  Polar  Sea,  Bering  Sea  and  at  Alaska.  Tellina  moesta  is 
thus  a  high-arctic  circumpolar  species. 

Among  a  number  of  molluscs  taken  by  the  Michael  Sars  in  1901 
at  Green  Harbour,  Spitzbergen,  150  m.,  in  addition  to  several  tellina 
calcaria  4  specimens  of  this  species  were  found  12.5 — 15  mm.  long. 

Tellina,  macoma,  loveni,  IAP.  STEENSTRUP. 

Locality: 

March  7.     1900.     Bay  south  of  Sjopolse  Ness,    Havnefjord.  30—40  m.     Small  stones 
slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

5  specimens  7 — 14  mm.  long,  the  largest  of  which  measure: 

Long.  14      mm.  Lat.  9      mm.  Crass.  5.5  mm. 
12.2     „                    8.5     „  ? 

10.5  7.5  4.7 


16  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.FRAM 

JENSEN  gives  the  maximal  length  of  this  species  as  15.5  mm.  The 
specimens  are  almost  exactly  similar  to  what  JENSEN  describes  and 
depicts  in  the  case  of  tellina  loveni. 

Like  the  two  previously  mentioned  species  tellina  loveni  had  not 
heen  hitherto  found  in  waters  west  and  north  of  Baffin  Bay.  It  had 
only  been  definitely  known  to  occur  near  Baffin  Land,  the  west  and 
east  coasts  of  Greenland  and  at  Spitzbergen  and  in  the  Kara  Sea  (JENSEN). 


Cardium,  serripes,  gronlandicum,  CHEMNITZ. 

Locality: 

July  30.  1898.  Godhavn,  about  6  m. 

Aug.  26.        „  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 

July  26.  1900.  West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  about  20m.  Clay. 

July  30.        ..  The  entrance  to  Stordalen. 

July  31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sound,  Havnefjord.    20—60  m. 

Aug.  3.        „  Fosheims    Peak    and    the    valley   on   the   west  side  of  Havnefjord, 

4-40  in. 

Aug.  4.        „  SjOpSlse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30  —  50  m.     Small  stones. 

Sept.  19.        .,  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.     Clay  witli  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

July  8.  1901.  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 

July  12.        „  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

Aug.  2.        .,  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  40  m. 

Aug.  16.        „                                                          ,     about  14  m. 

Scarce.  The  largest  specimens  from  Jones  Sound  measure:  Long. 
65  mm.,  Lat.  58  mm.,  Crass.  35  mm.  POSSELT  gives  the  size  of  this 
species  as  112  mm.  On  the  east  coast  of  Greenland  (Mobius)  and  at 
Novaya  Zemlya  (LECHE)  it  attains  a  size  of  70  mm.  At  Spitzbergen  it 
can  be  88  mm.  long  (KRAUSE)  and  at  Bering  Strait  100  mm.  (KRAUSE). 
In  the  larger  specimens  a  faint  radial  striation  was  only  observable  on 
the  uppermost  part  of  the  shell,  and  even  in  the  younger  individuals 
the  striation  is  but  sligtly  developed.  In  the  smallest  specimens  the 
epidermis  is  yellowish-white  with  narrow  reddish-brown  zigzag  bands. 
With  age  the  colour  becomes  darker  and  in  the  largest  specimens  it  is 
of  a  uniform  dark  greenish-brown. 


My  a  truncata,  LINNE. 

Locality: 

July    29.     1898.  Egedesminde. 

July    30.        „  Godhavn,  about  6  m. 

September     „  Rice  Strait. 

July    29.     1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
July    22.     1900.  ,  about  40  in. 

July    25.        „  ,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July    30.        „  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 


1898-1902.  No.  20. 


BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS. 


17 


Aug.  4. 

Sept.  20. 

July  8. 

July  9. 

July  19. 

Aug.  130. 

July  19. 


Aug.     3.     1900.     Fosheims   Peak    and    the    valley    on   the   west   side  of  Havnefjord, 

4-40  m. 

„         Blaeksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 
„         The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

1901.  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 

5'  • 

„         The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

„        Gaasefjord,  8  m.     Clay  with  small  stones  and  fucaceae. 

1902.  Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6—14  m.    Small  stones  and 
fucaceae. 

The  specimens  have  a  length  of  up  to  50  mm.  Most  of  the  older 
individuals  belong  to  the  typical  West  Greenland  form,  with  the  posterior 
truncata  portion  of  the  shell  distinctly  short  (Gf.  JENSEN:  Studier  over 
nordiske  Mollusker.  1.  My  a  fig.  8  6).  Only  a  few  shells  are  similar  to 
the  variety  uddevallensis,  HANCOCK.  They  have,  however,  not  so  thick 
valves  as  at  any  rate  the  fossil  shells  of  this  variety,  nor  is  their  trun- 
cate end  so  short.  In  younger  individuals  the  shell  is  ovate,  and  this 
is  especially  the  case  when  they  are  quite  young. 


arctica.  LINNE. 


Locality: 


July    30.  1898.  Godhavn,  about  6  m. 

Aug.   24.        „  Rice  Strait. 

July    27.  1899.  Pirns  Island. 

Sept.  22.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  16  m. 

March  7.  1900.  Bay  south   of  Sjopolse  Ness,   Havnefjord,   30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

July    25.  „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July    26.  .  „  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  20  m.     Clay. 
July    30.        „ 

July    31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sound,  Havnefjord,  20—60  m. 

Aug.      1.        „  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord.  10— 50m.    Small  stones. 

Aug.     3.        „  Fosheims    Peak    and    the    valley    on    the   west  side  of  Havnefjord, 

4—40  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  Sjopolse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  Bla&ksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Sept.  20.        „  ,  30  m.     Soft  brown  clay. 

July    12.  1901.  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

July    17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

Aug.    16.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  14  m. 

Common.  However  the  species  is  not  found  anywhere  in  any  large 
quantity.  The  specimens  belong  partly  to  the  form  arctica  LINNE  and 
partly  to  the  more  elongated  smooth  form  pholadis  LINNE  s.  rugosa 
LINNE.  Most  of  the  specimens  of  both  forms  arctica  and  pholadis  have 
very  thick  valves  and  closely  resemble  in  this  respect  the  valves  of  this 
species  that  are  found  in  our  late-glacial  deposits.  In  the  same  locality 


18  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

both  specimens  with  thick  and  thin  valves  may  occur.  Typical  speci- 
mens of  the  form  arctica  have  a  length  of  25 — 26  mm.,  and  a  height 
of  12.5 — 14  mm.  Some  specimens  which  may  be  referred  to  this  form 
have  moreover  a  length  of  up  to  38  mm.,  and  a  height  of  16.5  mm. 
The  form  pholadis  s.  rugosa  has  a  length  of  46—47  mm.,  and  a  height 
of  24-25  mm. 

Lyonsia  arenas  a,  MOLLER. 

Locality: 

July  25.  1900.  The  winter  harbour,   Havnefjord,    about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July  26.        „  West  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  16—20  m.  Clay. 

Sept.  19.        „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.       „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord.  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Aug.  2.  1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.  16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 

In  Havnefjord  only  a  quite  young  specimen  was  obtained  7.5  mm. 
long.  In  Gaasefjord  10  specimens  in  all  were  collected,  which  were 
15-26  mm.  long.  The  height  of  their  shells  varied  from  54%  to 
64.25  %  of  their  length,  while  the  breadth  (thickness)  varied  between 
37.14  °/o  and  42  %  of  their  length.  For  purposes  of  comparison  we 
may  state  that  JENSEN  found  in  the  case  of  some  specimens  from  the 
east  coast  of  Greenland,  that  the  height  of  the  shell  was  51.6—62.7  °/0 
of  the  length  and  the  breadth  36.9 — 44.7  °/o  of  the  length.  Some  of 
the  specimens  from  Gaasefjord  measure: 

Long.  26     mm.        Lat.  16.7  mm.        Crass.  10.5  mm. 
26       „  15.5    „  10       „ 

25       „  15.5    „  10.5    „ 

25       „  13.5     „  9.5     „ 

23.5    „  14.5     „  9       „ 

18       „  10.5     „  7,5    „ 

14.5    „  10       „  6.5    „ 

15  9.5    „  6       „ 

The  specimens  closely  resemble  the  description  and  illustration  which 
HANCOCK  gives  of  lyonsia  gibbosa  (lyonsia  arenosa  var.  sibirica  LECHE) 
from  Davis  Strait. 

Thracia  truncata,,  TURTON. 

Locality: 
July    29.     1899.     The    winter    harbour,    Havnefjord,    12  m.      A    somewhat    deformed 

specimen  (Long.  18.5  mm.,  Lat.  14.5  mm.,  Crass  9  mm.). 
July    25.     1900.     The   winter  harbour,    Havnefjord,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

One    specimen    (Long.  13  mm.,    Lat.  10  mm.,  Crass  7  mm.)  belongs 

to    the    typical    form,    the    other    on    the    contrary    more    closely 

resembles  the  variety  devexa  G.  0.  SARS. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACH10PODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  19 

Thracia  truncata  has  not  been  previously  found  in  waters  north 
and  west  of  Baffin  Bay;  though  it  should  be  stated  that  thracia  obliqua 
JEFFREYS,  of  which  there  is  but  one  fossil  valve  from  Grinnell  Land,  is 
possibly  merely  a  deformed  form  of  this  species,  as  indeed  I  am  in- 
clined to  believe. 


Thracia  septentrionalis,  JEFFREYS. 

Locality: 

March  7.     1900.     Bay   south  of  Sj6p6lse  Ness,    Havnefjord,  30—40  m.     Small  stones 
slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

Two  specimens  measuring: 

Long.  20.5  mm.        Lat.  14.5  mm.        Crass.  7.5  mm. 

18.5     „  13.5     „  6.5     „ 

The  specimens  are  not  so  thick-valved  and  short  as  those  taken 
by  "Voringen"  near  Jan  Mayen.  They  more  closely  resemble  in  these 
respects  specimens  from  Norskoerne,  Spitzbergen. 

Like  the  last-mentioned,  thracia  septentrionalis  has  not  been  pre- 
viously found  in  the  archipelago  north  af  America. 


Pandora,  kennerleyia,  glacialis  LEACH. 

Locality: 

Sept.   19.     1900.     Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Sept.  20.        „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Aug.     2.     1901.  ,  about  40  m. 

Aug.    16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 

Of  this  species  there  are  only  six  specimens,  so  that  it  seems  to 
be  scarce. 

The  largest  specimen  measures:  Long.  25.7  mm.,  Lat.  15.2  mm., 
Crass.  4.7  mm.  In  the  smallest  specimens  these  measurements  are 
respectively  17.5  mm.,  10.5  mm.,  and  2.5  mm.  The  epidermis  of  the 
right  valve  is  marked  with  radiating  lines,  as  may  also  be  seen  in  the 
drawing  of  LECHE;  though  in  the  specimens  collected  by  the  Fram 
these  are  stronger  and  more  distinct  than  they  are  in  the  drawing. 
When  the  shell  is  closed  the  margin  of  the  left  valve  bends  downwards 
over  the  right  valve,  while  the  margin  of  the  latter  bends  upwards. 
The  same  will  be  found  to  be  the  case  with  several  other  molluscs  such 
as  pecten  gronlandicus.  When  various  authors  assert  that  the  margin 
of  the  left  valve  of  this  species  projects  slightly  over  that  of  the  right 
valve,  this  is  due  in  most  cases  to  a  strong  contraction  of  the  animal, 
resulting  in  the  margin  of  the  valve  becoming  bente. 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


LEACH  found  this  species  in  Baffin  Bay.  On  the  other  hand  pan- 
dora glacilis  has  not  been  previouly  mentioned  as  living  in  waters 
lying  west  and  north  of  Baffin  Bay. 


A.mpliin  e  ura. 

Tonicella  marmorea,  FABRICIUS. 

Locality: 

Aug.     4.  1898.  Upernivik.  20  m. 

April  29.  1900.  N.  E.  of  Frokostpynten,  Havnefjord. 

June    22.        „  The  skerry,  Havnefjord,  about  10  m.     Stones  and  litliothamnia. 

July    22.        „  The  winter  harbour.  Havnefjord,  about  40  m. 
July    22.        „  ,  about  60  ra.     Small  stones. 

July    29.        „  S.  E.  of  Frokostpynten,  Havnefjord,  30  m.     Stones. 

July    30.        „  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

July    31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord,  20—60  m. 

Aug.     4.        „  Bleeksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  SjOpOlse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.      8.        „  The  winter  harbour.  Havnefjord,  30  m. 

July      5.  1901.  The  sound,  Jammerbugten. 

July      9.        „  Renbugten. 

July     17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

July     19.  1902.  Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6—14  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.      4.       „  North  of  the  peninsula,  Gaasefjord,  20—30  m. 

There  is  besides  one  specimen  in  the  collection  whose  locality  is 
not  given.  At  Sjopolse  Ness  7  specimens  were  taken,  from  other  locali- 
ties we  have  1 — 3  specimens,  though  most  frequently  only  one. 

Several  of  the  specimens  are  of  pretty  considerable  dimensions. 
Thus  one  specimen  from  the  winter  harbour  measures:  Long.  31  mm., 
Lath.  13  mm.,  Breadth  of  margin-zone  4  mm.  In  a  specimen  from 
the  entrance  to  Stordalen  these  measurements  are  respectively  39.5  mm., 
22.5  mm.,  and  6.5  mm.;  and  in  one  from  Vestre  Sund  they  are  41  mm., 
17.5  mm.,  and  5  mm.  On  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  according  to 
POSSELT  the  species  can  attain  a  size  of  40  mm.  HAGG  mentions  a 
specimen  from  the  east  coast  24  mm.  long,  and  KNIPOWITSCH  one  from 
Spitzbergen  that  was  28  mm.  long.  On  the  coasts  of  the  White  Sea 
according  to  MIDDENDORFF  it  attains  a  size  of  27  mm.  On  the  northern- 
most coasts  of  Norway  SPARRE  SCHNEIDER  has  found  that  tonicella 
marmorea  is  most  developed  out  off  the  coast;  thus  at  Tromsoe  it  is 
27  mm.  long  and  at  Vardoe  about  30  mm.  However  on  the  Bergen 
coast,  where  the  species  attains  the  same  development  as  on  our  arctic 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  21 

coasts,  we  find  the  largest  and  best  developed  individuals  within  the 
fiords.  Dr.  APPELLOF  for  instance  has  found  a  specimen  in  the  Oster- 
fjord  measuring:  Long.  28  mm.,  and  Lat.  16  mm.,  while  I  have  taken 
a  specimen  at  Vik  in  Sogn  measuring  respectively  32  mm.  and  15  mm. 
whereas  among  the  skerries  and  islands  outside  Bergen  I  have  not 
found  a  single  specimen  with  a  length  over  18  mm. 

The  sculpture,  margin-zone  and  radula  correspond  almost  exactly 
with  what  one  finds  in  specimens  from  the  Norwegian  coast.  The 
colour  varies  even  in  specimens  from  the  same  locality  between  dark- 
red  with  a  few  light  dots  and  lines  and  light-red  with  numerous  light 
dots  and  lines. 


Trachydermon  albus,  LINNE. 

Locality: 
March  7.     1900.     Bay  south  of  Sjopfilse  Ness,    Havnefjord,  30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

July    22.        „         The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 
Aug.     4.        „        Blseksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—40  m.     Small  stones. 
Aug.     4.        „         Sjopolse  Ness,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 
June    29.     1901.     Off  the  camping  ground,  Jammerbugten. 
July    19.     1902.     Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6  —  14  m.     Small  stones. 

At  Sjopolse  Ness  5  specimens  were  obtained;  at  each  of  the  other 
localities  only  one. 

The  largest  specimen  measures:  Long.  15  mm.,  Lat.  8  mm.  The 
breadth  of  the  margin-zone  is  0.75  mm.  This  species  attains  a  size  of 
16.5  mm.  (HlGG)  at  Spitzbergen  and  of  up  to  17  mm.  (SPARRE  SCHNEIDER) 
on  the  Norwegian  coast.  So  far  as  I  have  been  able  to  discover  after 
carefully  examining  two  specimens  the  sculpture,  margin-zone  and  radula 
agree  in  every  way  with  what  we  find  in  Norwegian  specimens. 


Gastropoda. 

Acmaea  testudinalis,  0.  F.  MULLER. 

Locality: 

July   29.     1898.  Egedesminde.     Common. 

July  30.        „  Godhavn,  6  m.     4  specimens. 

Aug.     5.        „  Upernivik,  8—26  m.     3  specimens. 

The  largest  specimen  has  a  basal  diameter  of  25  mm. 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Tectura  rubella,  FABRICIUS. 

Locality: 

June  22.     1900.     The  skerry,  Havnefjord,  about  10  m.     Stones  and  lithothamnia. 
July   22.        „        The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 
July   23.       „  ,  about  40  m.     Small  stones. 

At  none  of  the  localities  was  tectura  rubella  numerous.  The  largest 
specimen  has  a  basal  diameter  of  7.5  mm.  This  species  attains  a  size 
of  7  mm.  (POSSELT)  on  the  west  coast  of  Greenland,  of  6.3  mm.  at  Spitz- 
bergeri  (KNIPOWITSCH)  and  of  6  mm.  on  the  Norwegian  coast. 


Lepeta  coeca,  0.  F.  MULLER. 

Locality: 

July    18.     1900.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 
July    21.        „  ,   about   60  m.      Small    stones    with 

lithothamnia. 

July    22.        „  ,  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 

July    23.        „  ,  about  40  m.     Small  stones. 

July    25.        „  ,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July    30.        „        The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

Aug.      1.        „         Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10—50  m.    Small  stones. 
Aug.     3.        „        Fosheims    Peak    and    the   valley  on  the   west   side  of  Havnefjord, 

4—40  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „        SjopOlse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 
Aug.     8.        „        The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  30  m. 

Sept.  20.        „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
July    17.     1901.     The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 
Aug.   30.       „        The    head    of  the    Gaasefjord,    8  m.     Clay   with  small  stones  and 

fucaceae. 
July    19.     1902.     Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6—14  m.    Small  stones  and 

algae. 

In  Havnefjord,  especially  in  the  winter  harbour  and  off  the  entrance 
to  Stordalen  this  species  was  very  common.  The  specimens  have  a 
basal  diameter  of  up  to  16  mm.  The  species  attains  the  same  size 
at  Spitzbergen  (KRAUSE),  and  can  be  14.3  mm.  on  the  east  coast  of 
Greenland  (HAGG);  whereas  on  the  west  coast  it  is  only  12  mm.  (POSSELT). 
On  the  Norwegian  coast  it  can  be  14  mm. 


Puncturella  noachina,  LINNE. 

Locality: 
July    22.     1900.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 

One  specimen  whose  basal  diameter  is  7  mm.,  height  4  mm. 

The  species  attains  the  same  size  on  the  west  coast  of  Greenland 
(POSSELT),  whereas  on  the  east  coast  it  can  be  as  much  as  11  mm. 
HAGG).  On  the  Norwegian  coast  it  attains  a  size  of  9.5  mm.  (SPARRE 
SCHNEIDER). 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  23 

Margarita  helicina,  PHIPPS. 

Locality: 

Aug.     5.  1898.  Upernivik,  8-26  m. 

Aug.    18.        „  Camp  Clay,  Cape  Sabine,  4—10  m. 

Aug.    24.        „  Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 

July    27.  1899.  Pirns  Island. 

Sept.  22.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  16  in. 

June    28.  1901.  The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord. 

June    29.        „  Off  the  camping  ground,  Jammerbugten. 

July      5.        „  The  Sound,  Jammerbugten. 

July      8.        „  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July      9.       „ 

July    17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

July    11.  1902.  St.  Helena,  4—14  m.     Large  and  small  stones. 

July    15.        „  Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon. 

July    17.        „  East  of  the  large  glacier,  North  Devon. 

July    19.        „  Off  the  camping  ground.  North  Devon,  6— 14  m.    Small 
stones  and  algae. 

On  the  south  side  of  Jones  Sound,  along  the  shore  of  North  Devon 
and  at  St.  Helena  margarita  helicina  was  very  common;  but  on  the 
north  side  of  the  Sound  it  seems  on  the  contrary  to  be  scarce.  At  the 
head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  where  mollusc  fauna  is  otherwise  remarkably 
abundant,  this  species  was  wanting. 

In  a  specimen  from  Renbugten  the  basal  diameter  is  9.2  mm.  and 
the  height  6  mm.  In  another  specimen  from  the  same  locality  these 
measurements  are  8  mm.  and  5.2  mm.  respectively.  Several  specimens 
from  North  Devon  also  are  of  the  same  size.  On  the  west  coast  of 
Greenland  the  species  has  a  basal  diameter  of  6.5  mm.  (POSSELT),  but 
on  the  other  hand  its  basal  diameter  on  the  east  coast  is  8.5  mm.  (HAGG). 
At  Spitzbergen  too  the  species  can  attain  the  same  size  as  these  speci- 
mens from  Jones  Sound;  and  in  the  Bering  Sea  it  can  even  be  as  much 
as  12  mm.  On  the  Norwegian  coast  it  attains  a  size  of  8  mm. 


Margarita  olivacea,  BROWN. 

Locality: 
Aug.      1.     1900.     Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalcn,  Havnefjord,  10  — 50  m.    Small  stones. 

3  specimens  the  largest  of  which  has  a  basal  diameter  of  6.5  mm. 

and  a  height  of  5.5  mm. 
Sept.   19.       „         Off  Forvisningsdalen  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

A  specimen  whose  basal  diameter  is  7.5  mm.  and  height  7  mm. 
July      8.     1901.     Renbugten,  20  m.    A  specimen  whose  basal  diameter  is  5  mm.  and 

height  4.5  mm. 

The    spiral    lines    in    all   the  specimens  are  faintly  developed:    they 
could,  however,  be  clearly  seen  under  the  magnifmg  glass. 


24  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

On  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  this  species  has  a  basal  diameter 
of  4.5  mm.,  whereas  on  the  east  coast  it  is  as  much  as  6.3  mm.  The 
largest  known  specimens  (diam.  11  mm.,  height  10.5  mm.)  are  from  the 
Kara  Sea  (LECHE).  On  the  Norwegian  coast  it  can  be  as  much  as 
6  mm. 

Margarita  umbilicalis,  BRODERJP  &  SOWERBY. 

Locality: 

Aug.   24.  1898.  Rice  Strait. 

July    29.  1899.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
Sept.  22.       „  ,16  m. 

March  7.  1900.  Bay  south  of  SjOpOlse  Ness,    Havnefjord,    30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

April  29.        „  North-east  of  Frokostpynten,  Havnefjord. 

July    18.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  ra.    Clay  with  small  stones. 
July    22.        „  ,  about  40  m. 

July    22.        „  ,  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 

July    25.        „  >  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones. 

July    30.        „  The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

July    31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord,  20-60  m. 

Aug.      1.        „  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10— 50m.    Small  stones. 

Aug.     3.        .,  Fosheims    Peak    and    the    valley    on   the  west  side  of  Havnefjord, 

4—40  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  Blaeksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  SjOpOlse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.      7.        „  East  Cape,  Havnefjord,  20-50  m. 

Aug.     8.        „  The  winter  harbour.  Havnefjord,  30  m. 

Sept.   19.       „  Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaase fjord,  4—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6-40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

June    28.  1901.  The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord. 

June    29.        „  Off  the  camping  ground,  Jammerbugten. 

July      5.        „  The  Sound,  Jammerbugten. 

July      8.        „  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July      9.        „ 

July    12.       „  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

July    17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

Aug.    30.        „  The    head    of  the   Gaasefjord,   about   8  m.     Clay  and  small  stones 

with  fucaceae. 

July    11.  1902.  St.  Helena,    4—14  m.      Large    and    small    stones     overgrown    with 

fucaceae. 

July    15.        „  Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon.     Stones  and  large  fucaceae. 

July    17.        „  East  of  the  large  glacier,  North  Devon. 

July    19.        „  Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6  —  14  m.    Small  stones  and 

Aug.     4.        „  North  of  the  peninsula,  Gaasefjord,  20-30  m.  [algae. 

This  species  is  one  of  the  most  widely  distributed  gastropods  in 
Jones  Sound.  At  Landsend,  Renbugten  and  Havnefjord  it  was  very 
common. 

A  specimen  from  Landsend  measures:  basal-diameter  20.5  mm.  and 
height  15  mm.  In  another  specimen  these  measurements  are  18  mm. 
and  13.5  mm.  respectively.  In  a  specimen  from  Renbugten  they  were 


1898-1902.  No.  20.J  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  25 

19.5  mm.  and  14.2  mm.,  in  one  from  East  Cape  19.2  mm.  and  15.5  mm., 
and  in  one  from  North  Devon  they  were  20  mm.  and  15.5  mm.  At 
Cumberland  Sound  this  form  attains  a  basal  diameter  of  22  m.,  on  the 
east  coast  of  Greenland  it  can  be  21.9  mm.  and  at  Spitzbergen  19.5  mm. 
All  the  specimens  are  quite  smooth  and  belong  to  the  typical 
margarita  umbilicalis  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY. 

Margarita  striata,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY. 

Locality: 

July  7.  1901.  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m.  One  quite  young  specimen,  and 
two  older  ones  measuring:  basal-diameter  15.5  mm.  and  12  mm., 
height  15.2  mm.  and  11.5  mm.  For  comparison  I  append  measure- 
ments of  two  specimens  of  this  form  from  the  west  coast  of  Novaya 
Zenolya,  which  are  in  the  Bergen  Museum:  basal  diameter  16.5  mm. 
and  15.2  mm.,  height  17.5  mm.  nnd  16.5  mm. 

At  Spitzbergen  this  form  attains  a  basal  diameter  of  up  to  22.5  mm. 

The  sculpture  of  shell  and  form  of  whorls  exactly  agrees  with  what 
has  been  described  by  FRIELE  in  the  case  of  specimens  from  Magdalena 
Bay  (Cf.  KRAUSE). 

Pilidium  radiatum,  M.  SARS. 

Locality: 

Aug.     8.     1900.    The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  30  m.     One  specimen. 
Sept.   20.        „         The    head    of  the    Gaasefjord,    6—40  m.     Clay    with  small  stones. 

2  specimens. 

June    28.     1901.     The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord.     One  specimen. 
July      8.        „         Renbugten,  about  20  m.     One  specimen. 

The  largest  specimen  measures: 

Long.  24.5  mm.        Lat.  22  mm.        Alt.  9.5  mm. 

The  specimens  differ  from  those  depicted  by  G.  0.  SARS  in  that 
the  shell  is  more  oblique  and  the  spire  more  bent  over.  The  specimens 
from,  the  winter  harbour  and  from  Renbugten  have  radiating  reddish- 
brown  bands,  which  are  however  faint.  These  bands  of  colour  are 
quite  absent  on  the  other  hand  in  the  specimens  from  Gaasefjord  and 
Hvalrosfjord. 

Pilidium  radiatum  has  not  been  previously  found  in  waters  north 
of  America.  However  it  has  been  met  with  to  the  east  along  the  west 
coast  of  Greenland  and  to  the  west  in  the  Bering  Sea. 

Velutina,  morvillia,  zonata,  GOULD. 

Locality: 
July    27.     1900.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,   about  40  m.     Small  stones.     One 

specimen. 
July     15.     1902.     Off  Havhestfjord,  North   Devon.     Stones   and  large  fucaceae.     One 

specimen. 


26  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Both  specimens  belong  to   the  variety  expansa,  G.  0.  SARS.    The 

spiral   striation    in  both  is   but  slightly   developed.     The  groove  on  the 

columella  in  the  specimen  from  the  winter  harbour  is  deeper,   narrower 

and  shorter  than  in  the  other  specimen.    The  largest  specimen  measures : 

Long.  19  mm.,  Lat.  15.5  mm. 

A  specimen  found  by  the  Nares  Polar  Expedition  in  the  stomach 
of  a  phoca  barbata  near  Franklin  Pierce  Bay,  Grinnell  Land,  had  a 
length  of  21  mm.  At  Spitzbergen  the  species  attains  a  length  of  23  mm. 

Onchidiopsis  groenlandica,  BERGH. 

Locality: 

July  26.  1900.  The  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  20  m.  Clay. 
A  very  contracted  specimen. 

Natica,  lunatia,  groenlandica,  BECK. 

Locality: 

July  8.  1901.  Renbugten.  about  20  m.  An  empty  shell  of  the  typical  form.  Alt. 
26  mm.,  Lat.  25.5  mm. 

Aug.  16.  ..  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  14m.  A  rather  young  specimen 
(AH.  14.5  mm.,  Lat.  12  mm.)  belonging  to  the  form  pallida,  BRODERIP 
&  SOWERBY.  The  shell  is  pale  yellowish  horn-colour,  spiral  sculp- 
ture extremely  fine,  operculum  yellowish-brown  and  without  calca- 
reous partition. 

Natica  clausa,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY. 

Locality: 

July  15.  1902.  Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon.  One  specimen  belonging  to  the 
typical  form  (natica  affinis,  GMELIN). 

Alt.  23.5  mm..  Lat.  21.5  mm.     Spiral  sculpture  wanting. 

Bela  harpularia,  COUTHOUY. 
Locality: 
July  26.     1900.     The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord.     A  rather  worn  empty  shell, 

10.5  mm. 

Both  in  outward  appearance  and  in  sculpture  the  specimen  exactly 
corresponds  with  the  West  Greenland  and  North  American  form  of  bela 
harpularia  of  which  I  have  had  two  specimens  from  Georger  Bank  for 
purposes  of  comparison.  Therefore  although  the  specimen  is  not  in  a 
very  good  state  of  preservation  it  must  undoubtedly  be  referred  to  this 
species.  It  differs  from  the  Greenland  bela  woodiana,  which  it  closely 
resembles,  in  having  a  more  slender  form,  less  prominent  carina,  fewer 
ribs  -  I  counted  17  ribs  on  the  last  whorl,  while  according  to  POSSELT 
bela  woodiana  has  20 — 25  ribs  --  and  a  finer  spiral  sculpture. 


1898—1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  27 

Bela  harpularia  has  not  previously  been  found  in  waters  north  of 
America.  On  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  its  northernmost  limit  is 
Riten  Bank,  Disco  Bay  (POSSELT). 


Trichotropis  conica,  MOLLER. 

Locality: 

July  22.  1900.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.  Small  stones.  A 
specimen  13.5  mm.  high,  which  closely  resembles  the  illustration 
of  this  .species  given  by  G.  0.  SARS. 

Trichotropis  conica  has  not  previously  been  found  in  waters  north 
of  America.  It  was  known,  however,  to  occur  in  the  Barents  Sea,  the 
northern  coasts  of  Norway,  Jan  Mayen,  the  east  and  west  coasts  of 
Greenland  -  -  the  northerly  limit  being  Egedesminde  -  -  and  Cape  Sable, 
Nova  Scotia. 


Trichotropis  borealis,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY. 

Locality: 

Aug.  26.     1898.     Bay  near  Rice  Strait. 
Aug.  28.       „ 

July  22.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  16  m. 

July  22      1900.  ,  about  60  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     1.        „         Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen.  Havnefjord,  10  —  50  m.    Small  stones. 
Aug.  30.     1901.    The    head    of  the    Gaasefjord,    8  m.     Clay    with   small   stones  and 
fncaceae. 

The  specimens,  which  have  a  height  of  13.5 — 19  mm.  most  closely 
resemble  in  form  the  specimen  from  the  Kara  Sea  depicted  by  COLLIN, 
but  have  a  less  slender  tip.  Moreover  they  have  fewer  setiferous  spiral 
carinae,  some  specimens  being  actually  quite  without  setae.  The  number 
of  spiral  carinae  on  the  last  whorl  varies  greatly.  The  lowest  number 
is  five,  of  which  three  are  setiferous.  The  largest  number  of  setiferous 
spiral  carinae  is  four,  whereas  in  COLLIN'S  specimen  there  were  five. 
Those  specimens  which  are  without  setae  have  comparatively  broader, 
more  numereus  and  less  prominent  spiral  carinae.  They  may  be  refer- 
red to  the  variety  inermis,  HINDS  which  was  found  by  Nares  at  Dis- 
covery Bay  and  Dumbell  Harbour,  Grinnell  Land  (SMITH).  The  speci- 
mens from  the  Fram  Expedition  are  rather  larger  than  the  biggest 
specimens  of  this  species  hitherto  known. 

To  the  variety  acuminata,  JEFFREYS  must  be  referred  an  empty 
shell  10.5  mm.  long,  which  differed  from  the  rest  in  having  a  more 
slender  form  and  its  last  whorl  less  ventricose. 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Trichotropis  bicarinata,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY. 

(Figs.  4-8). 
Locality: 

July  22.  1900.  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  ra.  Small  stones.  A 
rather  damaged  specimen  measuring:  total  height  30  mm.,  largest 
diameter  24  mm.,  length  of  aperture  17  mm.,  breadth  of  aperture 
13  mm. 

The  shell  (fig.  4,  a— 6)  is  quite  thin,  translucent,  white  and  covered 
by  a  skin-like  wrinkled  dirty  yellowish-white  epidermis.  Sculpture  con- 
sists of  close,  fine,  oblique,  longitudinal  lines.  Fine  spiral  striae  are 
also  visible  under  the  microscope.  Number  of  whorls  6,  of  which  the 
last  is  decidedly  ventricose.  The  apical  whorls  are  white,  smooth  and 
convex.  The  last  whorl  is  furnished  with  two  sharp  spinal  carinae, 
which  are  densely  covered  with  large  well-develoved  setae.  The  penul- 
timate whorl  has  a  setiferous  spiral  carina.  The  two  remaining  whorls 
seem  also  to  be  furnished  with  spiral  carinae,  but  it  was  impossible  to 
examine  them  closely  owing  to  their  being  covered  by  a  sponge.  Aper- 
ture is  sub-circular  and  somewhat  more  than  half  the  length  of  the  shell. 
Umbilicus  deep  and  partly  covered  by  the  columella,  which  is  excurved 
and  has  a  slight  indication  of  a  canal  at  its  base.  On  the  outer  side 
the  umbilicus  is  bounded  by  a  sharp  carinae,  which  like  the  spiral 
carinae  is  thickly  covered  with  setae.  Operculum  (fig.  4  c)  is  triangular 
(5  X  6.5  mm.)  and  of  the  same  form  and  structure  as  in  trichotropis 
hjorti,  FRIELE.  Radula  also  resembles  that  of  this  species. 

The  specimen  belongs  apparently  to  the  variety  trichotropis  tennis 
from  Grinnell  Land  described  by  SMITH:  though  SMITHS  specimen,  which 
was  of  about  the  same  size  (33  mm.),  appears  to  differ  from  it  in  having 
a  more  slender  and  more  tapering  spire,  and  further  does  not  seem  to 
have  such  well-developed  setiferous  filaments  on  the  spiral  carinae  or 
on  the  umbilical  carina.  This  latter  carina  moreover  in  the  Fram  speci- 
men is  placed  in  a  position  more  resembling  that  of  trichotropis  bicari- 
nata  BROD.  &  Sow.  (Cf.  Tryon :  Manual  of  Conchology,  vol.  9,  tab.  7, 
fig.  42).  The  whole  appearance  of  the  specimen  too  reminds  one  not 
only  of  trichotropis  tennis  but  also  of  trichotropis  bicarinata,  and 
I  am  accordingly  most  inclined  to  accept  the  view  of  JEFFREYS  that 
trichotropis  tennis  is  a  monstrous  variety  of  the  last-named. 

We  must  also  include  trichotropis  hjorti,  FRIELE  as  a  variety  of 
trichotropis  tennis,  a  fact  I  have  already  alluded  to  in  the  report  on 
the  "Belgica"  expedition  of  1905.  This  form  was  first  discovered  in 
1900  by  the  Norse  Fishery  Steamer  "Michael  Sars"  in  the  cold  area 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  29 

east  of  Iceland.  It  has  subsequently  been  described  by  HAGG  under 
the  name  of  trichotropis  tennis  from  the  east  coast  of  Greenland  where 
it  also  was  found  by  the  "Belgica"  in  1905.  To  this  form  too  belongs 
probably  the  specimen  from  Baffin  Bay  which  POSSELT  mentions,  and 
in  which,  out  of  three  carinae,  only  the  central  spiral  carina  was  visible. 
For  it  is  a  peculiarity  of  trichotropis  hjorti  that  the  whorls  are  without 
spiral  carinae  or  else  that  the  carinae  are  only  very  slightly  developed. 

We  have  thus  the  following  series  of  developments:  the  Fram  speci- 
men (fig.  4)  forms  the  intermedian  stage  between  trichotropis  bicarinata 
BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY  (fig.  5)  and  trichotropis  tennis  E.  A.  SMITH  (fig.  6). 
From  this  form  again  POSSELT'S  specimen,  the  Belgica  specimen  (fig.  7) 
and  HAGG'S  two  specimens  lead  us  over  to  trichotropis  hjorti,  FRIELE 
(fig.  8),  which  is  either  without  spiral  carina  or  has  merely  a  faint  indica- 
tion of  such 1.  Of  the  specimens  mentioned  here  I  have  been  able 
personally  to  compare  those  found  by  the  "Fram",  "Belgica",  and 
"Michael  Sars". 

Both  trichotropis  tennis  and  trichotropis  hjorti  are  associated  with 
the  cold  area;  but  whereas  the  former  is  only  found  in  quite  shallow 
water  -  -  Kane  Bassin,  46  m.  (SMITH)  and  Jones  Sound,  60  m.  —  the 
latter  is  meth  with  at  considerable  depths  —  Baffin  Bay,  476  m.  (POSSELT), 
the  east  coast  of  Greenland  150—300  m.  (HAGG),  275  m.  (GRIEG)  and 
east  of  Iceland,  600  m.  (FRIELE).  The  typical  form  trichotropis  bicari- 
nata  is  known  from  Ice  Cape  (SOWERBY),  Bering  Sea  (KRAUSE)  and  the 
Sea  of  Okhotsk  (MIDDENDORFF). 

Neptunea,  siphonorbis,  turrita,  M.  SARS. 

Locality: 

July   29.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m.     One  specimen. 
Sept.  19.     1900.     Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
3  specimens. 

The  specimeus  have  the  following  measurements: 

Height 24.5  mm.  35  mm.  35    mm.  41.5  mm. 

Largest  Diameter 11       „      15    „       15.5  „      18      „ 

Length  of  Aperture  and  Basal  Canal  15       „      19    „       19      „      25      „ 

Apex  is  smooth  and  depressed  as  in  neptnna  (siphonorbis}  turrita 
M.  SARS  s.  tortuosa  G.  0.  SARS.  The  three  larger  specimens  which  have 
a  twisted  basal  must  be  referred  to  forma  typica  (G.  0.  SARS,  tab.  15, 


1  It  has  been  impossible  for  me  to  ascertain  in  what  relation  the  variety  alta,  DALL 
stands  to  these  forms,  as  I  have  not  had  access  to  the  work  in  which  this 
variety  is  described. 


30  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

fig.  4).  They  differ  from  this,  however,  in  having  more  tumid  whorls 
and  a  coarser  sculpture.  In  this  respect  they  more  closely  resemble 
fusus  tortuosus  from  the  Wellington  Channel,  which  has  been  described 
and  depicted  by  REEVE.  However  in  REEVE'S  species  the  aperture  and 
basal  canal  is  only  half  as  long  as  the  shell,  while  the  Fram  specimens 
are  rather  larger,  54.3  and  60.2  %  of  the  shell's  height.  In  the  smallest 
of  the  Fram  specimens  the  aperture  and  basal  canal  is  comparatively 
rather  large,  being  61.2  °/0  of  the  shell's  height.  This  specimen  differs 
from  the  rest  in  having  a  straighter  canal,  and  accordingly  it  should  be 
referred  to  forma  turrita  (G.  0.  SARS,  tab.  25,  fig.  10).  However  it 
differs  also  from  this  form,  if  I  may  judge  from  the  one  I  have  seen 
in  Mr.  FRIELE'S  collection,  in  having  more  tumid  whorls  and  a  coarser 
sculpture.  The  spiral  ribs  in  particular  are  coarser  and  more  prominent. 
The  specimens  mentioned  here  are  from  Jones  Sound,  near  the 
Wellington  Channel,  where  REEVE'S  specimen  was  found,  and  they  re- 
semble his  specimen  moreover  in  form  and  sculpture.  There  is  there- 
fore every  reason  for  believing  that  they  belong  to  the  same  species. 
There  being  some  doubt  however,  as  has  been  more  fully  shown  by 
FRIELE  in  the  General  Report  of  the  Norse  Norwegian  Sea  Expedition 
(Mollusca  I  Buccinidae,  1882,  p.  20),  regarding  the  classification  of 
REEVE'S  species,  I  have  preferred  to  follow  the  nomenclature  proposed 
by  FRIELE. 

Buccinum  undulatum,  MOLLER. 

Locality: 
July    30.     1898.     Godhavn,  about  6  m.     On«>  40.5  mm.  high  typical  specimen. 

Among  the  material  of  the  next  species  there  were  several  which 
are  intermediate  to  buccinum  undulatum.  Perhaps  therefore  this  species 
should  more  properly  be  described  as  a  variety  of  buccinum  gronlan- 
dicum. 

Buccinum  gronlandicum,  CHEMNITZ. 

Locality: 

July    29.     1898.     Egedesminde. 
Aug.     5.        „         Upernivik,  8—26  m. 
Aug.    24.        „         Rice  Strait. 

July    29.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 
March  7.     1900.     Bay   south  of  SjopOlse  N.-ss,    Havnefjord,  30-40  m.     Small  stones 

slightly  overgrown  with  laminaria. 

April  29.        „        North-east  of  Frokostpynten,  Havnefjord. 
July    18.        „        The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m. 
July    22.        „  ,  about  40  m. 

July    22.        „  ,  about  16  m. 

July    25.       „  ,  about  20  m.     Rocks  and  stones 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  31 

July    30.  1900.  The  entrance  to  Stordalen. 

July    31.        „  Round  Vest™  Sund,  Stordalen,  20-60  m. 

Aug.      1.        „  Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  10—50  m.     Small  stones. 
Aug.      1.        „  —         ,  up  to  20  m.     Small  stones  and  some 

clay. 

Aug.     3.        „  Fosheim's    Peak    and   the   valley  on   the   west  side  of  Havnefjord. 

4—40  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.     4.        „  SjOpolse  Ness,  Havnefjord,  30—50  m.     Small  stones. 

Aug.      7.        „  East  Cape,  Havnefjord,  20-50  m. 

Ang.     8.        „  The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord. 

Sept.  20.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 

June    28.  1901.  The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord. 

June    29.       „  Off  the  camping  ground,  Jammerbugten. 

July      5.        „  The  Sound,  Jammerbugten. 

July      8.        „  Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July      9.        „ 

July    12.        „  Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 

July    17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 
July    18.        „ 

Aug.    16.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  14  m. 

Aug.   30.        „  ,8m.      Clay    with    small   stones    and 

fucaceae. 

Jitly     11.  1902.  St.  Helena,  4—14  m.     Large  and  small  stones  and  fucaceue. 

July    15.        „  Off  Havhestfjeld,  North  Devon. 

July     17.        „  East  of  the  large  glacier,  North  Devou. 

July    19.        „  Off  the  camping  ground,  North  Devon,  6— 14m.     Small  stones  and 

Aug.     4.        „  North  of  the  peninsula,  Gaasefjord,  20—30  m.  [algae. 

This  species  is  not  merely  the  most  widely  distributed  of  the  bucci- 
nidae,  but  it  is  also  the  most  abundant.  Most  specimens  can  be  re- 
ferred to  forma  normalis,  though  in  some  localites  the  varieties  tene- 
brosa,  HANCOCK  and  sericata,  HANCOCK  were  also  very  common.  The 
variety  patula,  G.  0.  SARS  seems  on  the  other  hand  to  be  scarce. 

The  largest  specimen  of  the  typical  forms  measures:  Height  64  mm., 
breadth  26.5  mm.,  height  of  aperture  21  mm.,  and  breadth  of  aperture 
15  mm.  Another  very  thick-shelled  specimen  measures  60.5  mm., 
34  mm.,  30  mm.,  and  18.5  mm.  respectively.  The  maximal  height  of 
the  varieties  tenebrosa  and  sericata  is  31  mm.,  and  of  patula  is 
25.5  mm. 

From  the  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m.,  we  have  a  specimen 
which  much  resembles  the  variety  major,  POSSELT,  though  it  seems  to 
have  finer  longitudinal  ribs.  It  measures:  Height  53.5  mm.,  breath 
31  mm.,  height  ef  aperture  27  mm.,  and  breadth  of  aperture  17  mm. 

From  Havnefjord,   Hvalrosfjord  and  Landsend  we   have  buccinidae 

one  in  each  case  which  very  closely  resemble  the  buccinum 
TiancocJci,  MORCH  from  Cumberland  Sound  which  has  been  depicted  and 
described  by  PFEFFEK.  JEFFREYS  considers  buccinum  hancocki  MORCH 
s.  gronlandicum  HANCOCK  as  a  variety  of  buccinum  glaciate  in  which 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


view  he  is  supported  by  TRYON  and  POSSELT.  However  in  "Monographic 
der  Gattung  Buccinum"  KOBELT  seems  most  inclined  to  consider  this 
form  as  a  true  species.  PFEFFER  insists  strongly  upon  this  in  "Mollusken, 
Krebse  und  Echinodermen  von  Cumberland  Sund".  Still  in  spite  of 
these  views  I  am  inclined  to  consider  buccinum  hancocki  to  be  a 
variety  of  buccinum  gronlandicum.  Amongst  the  material  of  the 
Fram  Expedition  there  are  forms  which  imperceptibly  lead  over  from 
the  typical  buccinum  gronlandicum  to  buccinum  hancocki.  In 
FRIELE'S  fine  collection  of  arctic  buccinidae,  which  I  have  been  privi- 
leged to  inspect,  there  are  several  intermediate  forms. 

I  append    measurements  of  some  specimens  of  the  form  hancocki: 


Hvalros- 
fjord 

Havne- 
fjord 

Lands- 
end 

Havne- 
fjord 

Lands- 
end 

Heigth  of  shell     

63     mm. 

58.5  mm. 

51.5  mm. 

46     mm. 

36.5  mm. 

Breadth  of  last  whorl  

34.5    _ 

31 

31.5    „ 

25 

19       „ 

Height  of  aperture  .... 

29 

26 

245   „ 

22 

19 

Breadth  of  aperture 

18 

17.5   „ 

16 

11.5   „ 

10.5   „ 

From  the  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  40  m.,  and  from  the 
head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  8  m.,  there  are  egg-clusters  of  buccinum  gron- 
landicum. 


Buccinum  hydrophanum,  HANCOCK. 

Locality: 

July    29.     1898.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  12  m. 

July    21.     1900.  ,    about   60  m.      Small   stones  and 

lithothamnia. 

July    25.        „  ,  about  20  in.     Rocks    and    stones. 

Aug.      1.     1900.     Off  the    entrance    to    Stordalen,    Havnefjord,    up    to   20  m.     Small 

stones  with  some  clay. 

Aug.      1.        „  —        ,  10— 50m.  Small  stones. 

Aug.     3.        „         Fosheims    Peak    and    the    valley  on    the   west   side  of  Havnefjord, 

4—40  m.     Small  stones. 

Sept.  19.        „         Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4— 40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
Sept.  20.       „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.     Clay  with  small  stones. 
July       8.     1901.     Renbugten,  about  20  m. 
July    12.        „         Bay  near  Landsend,  about  35  m. 
Aug.     2.        „        The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  40  m  • 

Aug.    16.        „  ,  about  14  m. 

Aug.    30.       „  ,  about  8  m. 

July     17.     1902.     East  of  the  large  glacier,  North  Devon. 

At  the  head  of  the  Gaasefjord  this  species  seems  to  have  been 
abundant,  but  at  other  localities  it  would  appear  on  the  other  hand  to 
have  been  scarce. 


1898-1902.   No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  33 

Most  of  the  specimens  may  be  referred  to  the  form  depicted  by 
G.  0.  SARS  in  "Mollusca  regionis  arcticae  Norvegiae"  (tab.  24,  fig.  8). 
Two  specimens  from  the  head  of  the  Gaasefjord  belong  to  the  variety 
elata  FRIELE  and  one  specimen  from  Renbugten  to  the  variety  tumida, 
G.  0.  SARS.  This  last  is  43.5  mm.  high  and  25.5  mm.  broad  and  its 
aperture  is  26  mm.  high  and  15  mm.  broad.  The  largest  specimen  of 
the  variety  elata  is  70.5  mm.  high,  35.5  mm.  broad,  and  its  aperture 
32  mm.  high.  SARS'  form  has  a  height  of  up  to  57  mm.  The  typical 
form  described  by  HANCOCK  and  more  fully  by  PFEFFER  afterwards  has 
a  height  of  up  to  60  mm. 

Buccinum  ciliatum,  FABRICIUS. 

Locality: 

Sept.  19.     1900.     Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  4—40  m.    Clay  with  small 
stones. 

One  specimen  18  mm.  high  belonging  to  the  variety  laevior,  MORCH. 
Littorina  rudis  f.  gronlandica,  MENKE. 

Locality: 
July  29.     1898.     Egedesminde.     Very  common. 

Dendronotus  frondosus,  ASCANIUS. 

Locality: 

Aug.    5.  1898.  Upernivik,  6  m. 

Aug.  24.        „  Rice  Strait. 

July   22.  1900.  Winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.      Small  stones. 

July  31.        „  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord,  20-60  m. 

June  29.  1901.  Off  the  camping  ground,  Jammerbugten. 

July    17.        „  The  entrance  to  Gaasefjord. 

Aug.  30.        „  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  8  m.    Clay  with  small  stones. 

There  are  in  all  9  specimens  of  this  species,  of  which  one  is  from 
Upernivik  and  two  are  from  Rice  Strait.  The  remainder  are  from 
Jones  Sound. 

The  specimens,  which  have  a  length  of  17 — 42  mm.,  are  not  in  a 
good  state  of  preservation.  Judging  from  the  material  preserved  in 
alcohol  the  colour  seems  to  have  varied  from  pure  white  to  a  reddish 
brown.  In  the  largest  specimen  from  Havnefjord  the  radula  consists  of 
41  rows  with  12 — 14  lateral  teeth  on  either  side.  Median  tooth  is  com- 
paratively short  and  broad,  with  a  fine  denticulation  along  the  margin. 
Denticulation  does  not,  however,  quite  extend  to  the  tip  of  the  tooth. 
In  this  respect  the  specimen  closely  resembles  dendronotus  purpureus 

3 


34  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

which  BERGH  has  described  in  his  work:  "On  the  nudi-branchiate  gaste- 
ropod  Mollusca  of  the  North  Pacifik  Ocean,  with  special  reference  to 
those  of  Alaska"  (p.  89,  tab.  1,  fig.  18—20,  tab.  3,  fig.  7—12).  How- 
ever,  as  has  been  already  pointed  out  by  POSSELT  in  "Gronlands  Bra- 
chiopoder  og  Bloddyr"  the  median  tooth  of  dendronotus  frondosus 
varies  greatly  both  in  form  and  denticulation.  It  can  be  short  and 
broad  with  a  slight  denticulation  as  in  this  specimen,  or  the  cutting 
edge  may  even  be  quite  smooth  (the  variety  dalli)  or  again  it  may  be 
high  and  narrow  and  have  numerous  margial  teeth.  The  lateral  teeth 
too  may  vary  in  form  and  denticulation. 

Dendronotus  frondosus  is  to  be  found  as  far  north  as  Upernivik 
on  the  west  coast  of  Greenland.  On  the  east  coast  of  America  it  is 
met  with  from  Cape  God  to  Labrador,  and  it  is  further  known  to  occur 
in  the  Bering  Sea  and  Bering  Strait.  On  the  other  hand  it  has  not 
previously  been  mentioned  as  occurring  in  the  archipelago  north  of 
America.  For  further  particulars  regarding  the  distribution  of  dendro- 
notas  frondosus  I  would  refer  to  ODHNER:  "Opistobranchia  and  Ptero- 
poda",  where  a  very  full  account  is  given  of  the  distribution  of  this 
species. 

Coryphella  salmonacea,  COUTHOUY. 

Locality: 

Aug.  16.     1898.     Reindeer  Point,  Foulke  Fiord,  8  m. 
July     9.     1901.     Renbugten. 

There  are  in  all  six  specimens  of  this  species,  one  being  from 
Foulke  Fiord.  This  and  the  two  specimens  from  Renbugten  were  care- 
fully examined  and  were  found  to  be  typical  coryphella  salmonacea. 
The  specimens  from  Renbugten  have  a  length  of  15 — 20  mm.  The 
one  from  Foulke  Fiord  is  about  25  mm. 

NARES  found  this  species  at  Discovery  Bay,  Grant  Land  (SMITH). 


Fteropoda. 

Limacina  helicina,  PHIPPS. 

Locality: 
Sept.  5.     1899.     The  winter  harbour,  Havncfjord.     Pelagic.     3  specimens. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  35 

Cephalopoda. 

Rossia  palpebrosa,  OWEN. 

(Fig.  9,  a-6). 
Locality: 

Aug.  1.     1900.    Bank  at  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  8  m.    Small  stones. 
One  specimen. 

The  specimen,  a  female,  has  a  total  length  of  30  mm.  from  the 
posterior  end  of  the  body  to  the  base  of  the  arms.  Length  of  1st  pair 
of  arms  26.5  mm.  Umbrella  is  between  1st  pair  of  arms  7  mm.  high: 
its  proportion  to  the  length  of  the  arms  is  thus  1 :  3.8.  Between  4th  pair 
of  arms  there  is  no  web.  Greatest  breadth  of  body  18  mm.  Breadth 
of  head  over  eyes  17  mm.  The  head  is  thus  only  slightly  narrower 
than  the  body.  Length  of  body  on  the  dorsal  side  22  mm.,  on  the 
ventral  side  19  mm.  Maximum  length  of  fins  13  mm.,  length  at  base 
10  mm.,  maximum  breadth  12  mm.  Length  of  fins  is  thus  59  °/0  of 
the  length  of  body. 

Body  is  posteriorly  broadly  rounded.  On  the  dorsal  side  the 
mantle-edge  forms  a  very  obtuse  angle,  on  the  ventral  side  it  is 
slightly  incised.  The  well-developed  siphon  extends  to  the  base  of  the 
4th  pair  of  arms.  Eyes  not  very  prominent.  Dorsal  side  of  head  and 
mantle  are  quite  without  papillae.  Arms  may  be  ranked  in  the  follow- 
ing order  according  to  length:  3,  4,  2,  1.  Arm-suckers  are  arranged 
in  two  rows,  though  towards  the  tip  they  increase  to  apparently  four 
rows.  On  the  tentacular  club  the  suckers  are  apparently  six-rowed. 
Upper-row  suckers  of  the  base  of  the  club  are  of  about  the  same  size 
as  in  the  lower  rows.  Dorsal  surface  of  mantle  sac  smooth  and  without 
papillae.  Colour  of  the  specimen  preserved  in  alcohol  is  light  whitish- 
red  on  the  dorsal  side  with  numerous  dark  chromatophores  or  spots. 
On  the  ventral  side  it  is  whitish  with  a  few  scattered  dark  spots. 

The  specimen  belong  to  the  group  polpebrosa  glaucopis  and  may 
perhaps  most  properly  be  referred  to  rossia  palpebrosa  which  OWEN 
has  described.  For  on  the  dorsal  side  of  the  mantles  sac  we  do  not 
find  the  small  whitish  papillae  that  are  so  characteristic  of  the  typical 
rossia  glaucopis,  LOVEN.  An  additional  reason  for  referring  the  speci- 
men to  rossia  palpebrosa  seems  to  me  to  lie  in  the  fact  that  it  practi- 
cally quite  agrees  with  the  young  female  of  this  species  which  was 
found  west  of  Spitzbergen  by  the  Norse  Norwegian  Sea  Expedition 
(station  363,  80°  03'  N.  Lat.  8°  28'  E.  Long.  475  m.).  Dr.  APPELLOF  states 
no  doubt  in  "Teuthologische  Beitrage"  that  this  specimen  is  furnished 
on  the  back  with  small  whitish  papillae:  still  the  papillae  are  smaller, 


36  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

less    numerous    and    are  more  scattered   than  those  we  find  in  similar- 
sized  specimens  of  rossia  glaucopis. 

OWEN'S   specimen   was   found   by    Ross   in    1832  in  Elwin  Bay  - 
Prince  Regent's  Inlet;   and    rossia  palpebrosa  has  also  been  found  on 
the  west  coast  of  Greenland  and  at  Spitzbergen,  the  Murman  Coast  and 
in  the  Kara  Sea. 

We  have  numerous  eggs  of  a  rossia  from  the  head  of  the 
Gaasefjord,  6 — 40  m.,  clay  with  small  stones,  (Sept.  20,  1900),  which 
probably  belong  to  rossia  palpebrosa.  These  eggs  are  10 — 12  mm.  in 
diameter.  Such  eggs  as  were  subjected  to  careful  examination  did  not 
contain  embryons. 


P.  S. 

Since  this  work  has  gone  to  press,  HANS  KLER  has  issued  his  trea- 
tise: "On  the  Bottom  Deposits"  (Rep.  II  Norweg.  Arct.  Exp.  in  the  Fram 
1898—1902  Vol.  3,  No.  17,  1909)  in  which  he  describes  a  number  of 
molluscs  from  Jones  Sound.  Dr.  KLER  has  been  kind  enough  to  place 
this  mollusc-material  at  my  disposal,  and  on  examination  it  was  found 
to  contain  two  species,  cylichna  alba  and  utriculus  pertenuis,  that  were 
not  represented  in  the  collection  of  molluscs  from  the  Fram  Expedition 
which  I  had  previously  examined.  There  was  also  a  tellina  moesta 
from  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 

From  the  Westside  of  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  16— 
20  m.  clay,  Dr.  KLER  mentions  modiolaria  corrugata  and  area  gla- 
cialis.  These  species  must  however  be  removed  again  from  the  list  of 
fauna  belonging  to  Jones  Sound:  since  it  was  found  by  closer  in- 
vestigations that  the  specimens  did  not  belong  to  those  species,  but  to 
modiolaria  laevigata  var.  substriata,  GRAY,  and  lyonsia  arenosa  M0L- 
LER.  Of  the  last  named  species  only  a  defective  right  valve  was  found. 

Cylichna,  alba,  BROWN. 

Locality: 
Sept.  20.  1900.    The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  about  30  m. 

A  dead  specimen,  10.5  mm.  long,  belonging  to  the  variety 
corticata  (BECH)  MOLLER. 

In  the  archipelago  north  of  America,  cylichna  alba  was 
previously  found  at  Assistance  Bay,  Parry  Islands  and 
Discovery  Bay,  Grinnell  Land. 

Utriculus  pertenuis,  MIGHELS. 

Locality: 
Aug.     8.  1901.     The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  2—4  m, 

A  dead  and  rather  worn  specimen,  2.5  m.  long,  belonging 
to  the  typical  form.  Under  the  designation  of  bulla  semen, 
BELCHER,  mentions  this  species  from  Port  Refuge,  Parry 
Islands. 


1808-  1902.  No.  20.]  BRACH10PODS  AND  MOLLUSCS. 


37 


Tabular  List  of  the  Brachiopods  and  Molluscs 

collected  by  the  2nd  Frnm  Expedition. 


West  coas 
Greenland 


o  22- 
u  o  g 


o 

^s 


§0 


Brachiopda. 

Rhynchonella  psittacea,  GMELIN 

Mollusca. 
Lamellibranchiata. 

Nuculd  tennis,  MONTAGU 

Ledd  pernuld,  MOLLER     .     .     .    .     .     .    .    .    .  ' . 

minutd,  MOLLER 

Yoldid,  portldndid,  arctica,  GRAY 

hyperbored,  LOVEN  ......... 

Mytilus  edulis,  LINNE 

Modioldrid  Icevigatd,  GRAY 

nigra,  GRAY 

Crenelld  fdbd,  0.  F.  MOLLER 

Pecten  gronlandicus,  SOWERBY 

Astarte  borealis,  CHEMNITZ '.•'*. 

banksi.  LEACH .       4- 

Tellina,  macoma,  calcaria,  CHEMNITZ 4- 

,  torelli,  STEENSTRUP  ..... 
,  moestd,  DESHAYES    ..... 

,  loveni,  STEENSPRUP 

Cardium,  serripes,  grorilandicum,  CHF.MNITZ   .     . 

Mya  truncdta,  LINNE 

Sdxicdvd  arctica,  LINNE 

Lyonsia  drenosd,  MOLLER 

Thracia  truncata,  TURTON 

septentrionalis,  JEFFREYS 

Pandora,  Jcennerleyia,  glacialis,  LEACH  .... 

Amphineura. 

Tonicelld  marmorea,  FABRICIUS 

Trdchydermon  dlbus,  LINNE 

Gastropoda. 

Acmcea  testudinalis,  0.  F.  MULLER 

Tecturd  rubella,  FABRICIUS 

Lepetd  coeca,  0.  F.  MULLER 


4- 


4- 


4- 


4- 


4- 


4- 


4-         - 


38 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


o 


Pundurella  noachina,  LINNE + 

Margarita  helicina,  PHIPPS +       -I- 

olivacea,  BROWN .; 

umbilicalis,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBT    .. 

striata,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY  .    .     .•   . 

Pilidium  radiatum,  M.  SARS 

Velutina,  moivillia,  sonata,  GOULD 

Onchidiopsis  gronlandica,  BERGH 

Natica,  lunatia,  gronlandica,  BECK —       —      —      + 

—        clausa,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY 

Bela  harpularia,  COUTHOUY 

Trichotropis  conica,  MSLLER —       —      + 

borealis,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY  ....       —       +      +      -f- 
bicarinata,  BRODERIP  &  SOWERBY  .    . 

Neptunea,  siphonorbis,  turrita,  M.  SARS -       —      -f 

JBuccinum  undulatum,  MOLLER + 

gronlandicum,  CHEMNITZ +       + 

hydrophanum,  HANCOCK + 

riliiifitni.  FABRICIUS 

Littorina  rudis,  MATON 

Cylichna  alba,  BROWN 

Utriculus  pertenuis,  MIGHELS 

Dendronotus  frondosus,  ASCANIUS 

Coryphella  salmonacea,  COUTHOUY •  •       + 

Pteropoda. 

Limadna  helicina,  PHIPPS 

Cephalopoda. 

Rossia  palpebrosa,  OWEN 


1898-1902.  No.  20.1  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  39 


Bibliography. 


APPELLOF:    Teuthologische  Beitrage.     Bergens  Museums  Aarbog  1892,  no.  1. 
AURIVILLIUS-    Arktiska    hafsmollusker.     II.    Placophora    och   Gastropoda.     Vega  Exp. 

Vet.  lakttagelser.    Bd.  4,  1887. 
BECHER:    Mollusken  von  Jan  Mayen.     Internal.  Polarforschung  1882—83.     Die  Osier- 

reich.    Polarstalion    Jan    Mayen.      Beob.      Ergeb.    herausg.    v.   d.   Akad.   d. 

Wissensoh.  Wien.     Bd.  3,  1886. 
BECK:    Verzeichniss    von  Konchylien    aus    Spilzbergen  und  GrOnland.     Amt.  Ber.  24 

Versaml.  deulsch.  Nalurf.  und  Aerzle  in  Kiel  1846  (1847). 

BEECHY:    Voyage  of  discovery  lowards  the   North    Pole   performed  in  H.  M.  S.  Doro- 
thea  and   Trenl   under   Ihe  command  of  capt.  Buchan  1818.     London  1843. 
BERGH:    Bidrag  til  en  monographic  af  marseniaderne.     Kgl.  danske  Vidensk.  Selsk. 

Skr.  Mal.-nat.  Afd.  R.  5,  vol.  3,  1853. 

Analomiske  bidrag  lil  kundskab  om  aeoliderne.    Op.  cit.     R.  5,  vol.  7,  1868. 

On    Ihe    nudibranchiate    gasteropod    Mollusca    of  Ihe   Norlh  Pacifik  Ocean 

wilh    special   referenc   lo    those  of  Alasca.     Proc.   Acad.   Nat.  Sci.    Phila- 
delphia 1879  (1880). 

Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Aeoliaden.    Parl  8.    Verhandl.  d.  k.  k.  zool.  bol. 

Gesellschaft  in  Wien.     1885. 

Malacologische    Untersuchungen.     Semper:    Reisen  im  Archipel  der  Philip- 

pinen,  Bd.  4,  1880-87. 

Die  Nudibranchien  gesammelt  wahrend  der  Fahrten  des  "Willens  Barenls" 

in  das  Nordliche  Eismeer.     Bijdr  lol  de  dierkunde  uilgegebene  door  "Natura 

Artis  Magistra"  Afl.  13,  1886. 
CLESSIN:    Mytilidae.      Martini-Chemnilz:    System.    Gonchylien    Cabinal.      Bd.  8.      Ab- 

Iheil.  3,  1889. 
COLLIN:    Brachiopoder,  Muslinger  og  Snegle  fra  Karahavet.    Dijmphna  Togtels  zoolog. 

bol.  Udbylle.     1887. 
DALL:    Lisl  of  shells  oblained  by  Kumlien,  naluralisl  to  Ihe  Hawgate  Exp.  1877—78 

at  Points  in  Cumberland  Sound.     Bull  U.  S.  Nal.  Museum  no.  15,  1879. 

Mollusca.     Rep.  Internal.  Polar  Expedilion  lo  Poinl  Barrow.     1885. 

Reporl  on  Ihe  molluscs  collecled  by  Turner  at  Ungava  Bay,  North  Labrador. 

Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  vol.  9,  1886  (1887). 
FRIELE  :    Mollusca  1  Buccinidae.    Norske  Nordhavs  Exp.  1876-78,  vol.  8,  1882. 

Mollusca  2.     Norske  Nordhavs  Exp.  1876-78,  vol.  16,  1886. 

Mollusken  der  ersten  Nordmeerfahrt  des  "Michael  Sars".    Bergens  Museums 

Aarbog  1902,  no.  3. 

GOULD:    Report  on  the  Invertebrata  of  Massachusells.     Ed.  2.     1870. 
GREELY:    Reporl  on  Ihe  Proc.  of  Ihe  U.  S.  Ex.  lo  Lady  Franklin  Bay,  Grinnell  Land, 

vol.  2,  1888. 
GRIEG:    Invertebres    du    fond.     Due  d'Orleans:    Croisiere    oceanographique  accomplie 

a  bord  de  la  "Belgica"  dans  la  mer  du  GrOnland  1905  (1909). 
HANCOCK:    List  of  Shells   dredged  on  the  West  Coast  of  Davis's  Strait.     Ann.  Mag. 

Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  18,  1846. 

HINDS:    Mollusca.     Zoology  of  voyage  of  "Sulphur"  under  E.  Belcher,  vol.  2,  1844. 
HITCHCOCK:    Sketch    of  the    geology    of  Portland   and  its  vicinity.     Boston  Journ.  of 

Nat.  Hist.  vol.  1,  1834-37. 
HOLM:    Beretning  om  de  pa  Fyllas  togt  i  1884  foretagne  zoologiske  Undersogelser  i 

Gronland.     Meddel.  om  Gronland.     Hefte  8.     1889. 


40  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

HAGG:    Mollusca    und    Brachiopoda   gesammelt    von    der    schwedischen  zoologischen 

Polarexpedition    nach    Spitzbergen,    dem    nordSstlichen   Gronland    und  Jan 

Mayen    i.  J.  1900.      1.  Brachiopoda    u.    Lamellibranchiata.      Arkiv  for  Zool. 

vol.  2,  no.  2.     1904. 

Mollusca   und    Brachiopoda  etc.    2.  Scaphopoda,    Gastropoda  etc.     Op.  cit. 

vol.  2,  no.  13.     1905. 

JEFFREYS  :    New  and  peculiar  Mollusca  of  the  Patellidae  and  other  Families  of  Gastro- 
poda   procured  in  the   Valorous  Expedition.     Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.     Ser.  4, 

vol.  19.     1877. 

Post-tertiary  Fossils  procured  in  the  late  Arctic  Expedition.    Op.  cit.  ser.  4. 

vol  20,  1877. 

On    some    of  the    Mollusca   procured    during    the    arctic  Expedition  of  the 

"Fox"    in    1858    and    1859.     Sci.    Proc.    R.   Dublin    Soc.    vol.  2   (new    ser.), 

part  2,   1879. 
JENSEN:    Studier  over  nordiske  mollusker.     1.  Mya.     Vidensk.  Meddel.     1900. 

Studier  over  nordiske  mollusker.     3.  Tellina  (Macoma).     Op.  cit.  1905. 

On    the    Mollusca    of  East    Greenland.      Meddel.    om  Grenland.     Hefte  29. 

1905. 

KNIPOWITSCH:    Zool.    Ergeb.  d.  russ.  Exp.  nach  Spitzbergen.     Mollusca   und  Brachio- 
poda.    1.    Uber    die   in   dem  J.  1899  —  1900  im  Gebiete  von  Spitzbergeu  ge- 

sammelten  recenten  Mollusken  und  Brachiopoden.     Ann.    Mus.  Zool.  Acad. 

I.  Sci.     St.  Petersbourg,  vol.  6,  1901. 

Zool.  Ergeb    etc.   2—3   Uber    die    im    J.  1901   im    Gebiete  von  Spitzbergen, 

gcsammelten  recentus  Mollusken  und  Brachiopoden    Op.  cit.  vol.  7,  1902. 

Zool.  Ergeb.  4.     Nachtrag.     Op.  cit.  vol.  8,  1903. 
K  111:1:1,1:    Pyrula  und  Fusus.     Martini  Chemnitz:  System.  Conchylien  Cabinet.    Bd.  3. 

Abtheil.  3bf  1881. 

Buccinum.    Op.  cit.    Bd.  3.    Abtheil.  1  c,  1883. 
KRAUSE:    Beitrag    zur    Kenntniss  der  Mollusken-Fauna  des  Beeringsmeeres.     Arch.  f. 

Naturgesch.  vol.  51,  1885. 

Mollusken  von  Ostspitzbergen.     Zool.  Jahrb.    Abtheil.  Syst.   Geogr.  u.  Biol. 

vol.  6,  1892. 

Mollusken.     Drygalski:    GrOnlands    Exp.   d.    Ges     f.   Erdkunde   zu   Berlin 

1891-93,  vol.  2.    1897. 
LEACH:    Descriptions    of   the    new    species    of  animals  discovered  by  "Isabella"  in  a 

voyage  to  the  arctic  regions.     Ann.  of  Philosophy  vol.  14,  1819. 
LECHE:    Ofversikt   Ofver   de  af  Svenska  Exped.  till  Novaja  Semlja  och  Jenissej   1875 

och    1876   indsamlede    hafsmollusker.     K.  Sv.  Akad.  Handl.  vol.  16,    no.  2. 

1878. 

Ofversikt    Ofver    de    af  Vega   Exp.     indsamlede    arktiska    hafsmolluskerna. 

1.  Lamellibranchiata.     Vega  Exp.  Vetensk.  lakttagelser  vol.  3,  1883. 
LONNBERG:    Ofversigt  Ofver  Sveriges  cephalopoder.    Bihang  K.  Sv.  Vet.  Akad.  Handl. 

Bd.  17.    Afd.  4,  no.  6f  1891. 

On  the  Cephalopoda  collected  during   the  Swedish  Arctic  Exp.  1898  under 

the    direction    of  prof.  A.  G.  Nathorst.     Ofv.  K.  Vet.  Akad.  Forhandl.  vol.  55. 

1898. 
MIDDENDORFF  :    Beitrage    zu    einer   Malacozoologia    Rossia.      1.    Chitone.    Mem.    Sci, 

Natur.  Acad.  I.  Sci.  St.  Petersbourg  vol.  6,  1847. 

Mollusken.      Middendorff:    Reise    in    dem    aussersten    Norden   und   Osten 

Sibiriens     Bd.  2,  Theil  1.     1851. 
MOBIUS:    Mollusken.     Die  zweite  deutsch.  Nordpolarfahrt  1869  u.  1870  unter  Kolde- 

wey,  vol.  2.  Zool.     1874. 

MOLLER:  Index  Mollusc.  Groenlandiae.     Naturhist.  Tidsskrift  Bd.  4.     1842—43. 
MORCH  :    Fortegnelse   over    GrSnlands  bloddyr.      Naturhist.  Bidrag  til  en  Beskrivelse 

af  Gronland  af  J.  Reinhardt  m.  fl.    1857. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  41 

MOHCH:    Catalogue   des  Mollusques   du  Spitzbergen  recueillis  par  H.  KrOyer.     Mem. 

malacolog.  de  Belgique.     Tome  4.     1869. 

ODHNER:    Northern  arctic  Invertebrates  in  the  collections  of  the  Swedish  State  Mu- 
seum.   3.  Opisthobranchia  and  Pteropoda.     K.   Sv.   Vetensk.  Akad.  Handl. 

Bd.  41,  no.  4.    1907. 
OWEN:   John    Ross,    Appendix    to    the    Narrative    of  second    voyage    in   search  of  a 

North  West  Passage  and  of  a  residence  in   the  Arctic  Regions  during  the 

years  1829-1833.     1835. 

PFEFFER:    Mollusken,  Krebse  und  Echinodermen  von  Cumberland  Sund.    Jabrb.  Ham- 
burg. Wiss.  Anstalten.    Jahr.  3,  1885. 

Fische,     Mollusken     und    Echinodermen    von    Spitzbergen    gesammelt    von 

W.  Kukenthal    im   J.  1886.     Zool.  Jahrb.     Abtheil.   System.  Geogr.  u.  Biol. 

Bd.  8,  1895. 

Cephalopoden ;  Nordisches  Plankton.     Lief.  9.     1908. 
PHIPPS:  Natural  history  in  voyage  towards  the  Norh  Pol  1773  (1774). 
POSSELT:    0stgr0nlandske  Mollusker.     Meddel.  om  Gr0nland.     Hefte  19.    1895  (1896). 

Grenlands    Brachiopoder    og    B10ddyr.      Op.  cit.      Hefte  23.      Afd.  1.    1898 

(1899). 

REEVE:    Account  of  Shells.     Belcher:   The  last  of  the  arctic  voyages  vol.  2,  1855. 
Ross:    Appendix    to    the    Narrative   of  a  second  Voyage  in  Search  of  a  North- West 

Passage  etc.     1835. 

SARS,  G.  0. :    Mollusca  Regionis  Arcticae  Norvegise.     1878. 
SMITH:    On    the    Mollusca    collected    during  the  arctic  Exp.  of  1875—76.     Ann.  Mag. 

Nat.  Hist.  ser.  4,  vol.  20.     1877. 

Mollusca.     Nares:   Narrative  of  a  voyage  to  the  Polar  Sea   during  1875—6 

in  H.  M.  S.  Alert  and  Discovery,  vol.  2,   1878. 
SPARRE  SCHNEIDER  :    Undersogelser   af  dyrelivet  i  de  arktiske  fjorde.     1.  Kveenangens 

Molluskfauna.     Tromso"  Museums  Aarshefter,  vol.  4.     1881. 

Unders.    3.    TromsSsundets    molluskfauna.      Op.  cit.  vol.  8  (1885)   og  vol.  9 

(1886). 

Unders.    4.    Mollusca  og  Crustacea  indsamlede  i  Malangenfjord  1887.     Op. 

cit.  vol.  14,  1891. 

Fortsatte  bidrag  til  kundskaben  om  Tromsosundets  molluskfauna.    Op.  cit.  18. 

1895. 
STIMPSON:    Synopsis  of  the  marine  Invertebrata  collected  by  the  late  arctic  expedition 

under  Hayes.    Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia  1863  (1864). 
SUTHERLAND:    Journ    of  a  voyage  in  Baffms  Bay  and  Barrow  Straits  1850—51,  vol.  2 

App.    Zool.     1852. 

TORELL:    Bidrag  till  Spitzbergens  Molluskfauna.     1859. 
TRYON:    Manual  of  Conchology,  vol.  3,  1881  og  vol.  9,  1887. 

VERRILL:    The  Cephalopods  of  the  North-eastern  Coast  of  Amerika.     Transact.    Con- 
necticut Acad.  A.  Sci.  vol.  5.     1882. 

Catalogue  of  marine  Mollusca  added  to  the  Fauna  of  New  England  region 

during  the  past  ten  years.     Op.  cit.  vol.  5.     1882. 
WALKER:    Notes  on  the  Zoology  of  the  last  arctic  Expedition  under  capt.  M'Clintock. 

Journ.  R.  Dublin  Soc.  vol.  3,  1860-61  (1861). 


42  JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Echinodermata. 

(Supplement.) 


When  examining  the  mollusca  collected  by  the  2nd  Fram  Expedition  1  found 
among  them  some  echinodermata  from  localities  not  mentioned  in  the  report  on 
echinodermata  found  during  the  expedition  (Rep.  II  Norweg.  Arctic  Exp.  in  the 
"Fram"  1898—1902  no.  13,  1907).  One  species,  cucumaria  minuta,  is  not  even  re- 
corded  in  the  report,  and  does  not  seem  to  have  been  previously  found  in  the 
waters  about  Jones  Sound  and  Smith  Sound.  As  a  supplement  therefore  to  the 
report  on  the  Echinodermata  of  the  Frara  Expedition  I  append  a  description  of  these 
species.  From  the  archipelago  west  and  north  of  Baffin  Bay  we  are,  it  would  seem, 
now  acquainted  with :  2  crinoids,  6  asteroids,  6  ophiuroids,  1  echinoid  and  4  holo- 
thurians. 

Solaster  papposus,  LINNE. 

Locality: 

Sept.  20.  1900.  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6-40  m.  Clay  with  small  stones. 
A  quite  young  ten-armed  specimen. 

Stichaster  albulus,  STIMPSON. 

Locality: 

Aug.  4-5.  1898.  Upernivik,  8—26  m.  Three  small  specimens,  one  with  three  arms, 
the  two  others  with  six  arms.  However  in  the  case  of  one  of 
these  latter  two  of  the  arms  are  quite  rudimentary.  The  largest 
specimen  measures:  disc-radius  1.7  mm.,  arm-radius  9.5  mm. 

Aug.  4.  1900.  Blaeksprutgrunden,  Havnefjord,  20—30  m.  Small  stones.  One  six- 
armed  specimen  with  three  of  the  arms  fully  developed  and  of 
the  same  size,  while  three  are  quite  small  and  rudimentary.  The- 
specimen  measures:  disc-radius  4  mm.,  arm-radius  21.5  mm. 

Asterias  miilleri  f.  gronlandica,  STEENSTRUP. 

Locality: 

Sept.  20.  1900.  The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord,  6—40  m.  Clay  with  small  stones. 
One  specimen. 

Myriotrochus  rinki,  STEENSTRUP. 

Locality: 
March  7.     1900.     Bay  south  of  Sjfipolse  Ness,    Havnefjord  30—40  m.      Small   stones 

with  laminaria.    3  specimens. 
Sept.  20.        „        The    head  of  the   Gaasefjord,    6—40  m.     Clay  with   small    stones. 

Two  specimens. 

Psolus  fabric/,  DUBEN  &  KOREN. 

Locality: 

July    21.     1900.     The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  about  60  m.     Stones  and  fucaceae. 
July    23.       „  ,  about  40  m.     Small  stones. 

July    30.       „        The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord. 
Aug.      1.       „         Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord,  10—50  m.    Small  stones. 

From  each  of  these  localities  we  have  one  or  two  small  specimens. 
The  largest  has  a  length  of  12  mm. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  43 

Cucumaria  minuta,  FABRICIUS. 

Locality: 

July    11.     1902.    St.  Helena,  4— 14  m.    Large  and  small  stones  overgrown  with  fuca- 
ceae.    One  7  mm.  long  contracted  specimen. 

Papillae  are  arranged  in  single  rows,  the  three  ventral  rows  having 
7 — 9  papillae.  Skin  is  rough.  When  looked  at  under  the  microscope 
it  will  be  found  to  be  thickly  covered  with  larger  and  smaller  irregular 
nearly  round  calcareous  plates  which,  as  LUTKEN  J  says,  remind  one  of 
the  calcareous  plates  of  cucumaria  assimilis2  depicted  by  DUBEN  and 
KOREN.  The  specimen  preserved  in  alcohol  is  of  a  white  colour. 

The  specimen  seems  to  agree  most  closely  with  the  West  Green- 
land cucumaria  (holothuria)  minuta,  FABRICIUS  3  which  is  said  to  have 
three  rows  of  papillae  more  developed  than  the  two  others,  and  its  skin 
abundantly  furnished  with  calcareous  plates.  I  have  accordingly  referred 
it  to  this  species.  It  must  be  stated,  however,  that  it  has  not  been 
possible  to  make  a  complete  examination  of  the  specimen,  as  I  have 
riot  been  able  to  dissect  it. 

Cucumaria  minuta  has  not  been  previously  found  in  the  archi- 
pelago north  of  America.  Besides  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  it  is 
known  to  occur  on  Grand  Manan  (North  America),  at  Spitzbergen  and 
on  the  Murman  Coast.  In  the  western  hemisphere  it  was  previously 
known  to  be  distributed  between  44°  and  69°  N.  Lat.,  whereas  its  nor- 
therly limit  is  now  76°  15.5'  N.  Lat.  In  the  eastern  hemisphere  it  is 
distributed  between  68°  and  80°  N.  Lat.  From  east  to  west  it  was  pre- 
viously known  to  occur  between  41°  E.  Long,  and  67°  W.  Long.,  or 
throughout  108  degrees  of  longitude.  (Cf.  LUDWIG:  Arktische  und  sub- 
arktische  Holothurien  4).  It  is  now  known  to  be  distributed  westwards 
as  far  as  89°  16.5'  W.  Long.,  or  throughout  about  130  degrees  of 
longitude. 

Cucumaria,  f rondos a,  GUNNERUS. 

Locality: 
Winter  harbour,  Havnefjord,  30  m.     One  specimen. 


1  LUTKEN:    Oversigt  over  Gronlands  Echinodermata.     1857,  p.  7. 

2  DUBEN  &  KOREN:    Oversigt  af  Skandinaviens  Echinodermcr.     Kgl.  Vetensk.  Akad. 
Handl.  1844  (1846)  p.  296,  tab.  4,  fig.  2. 

3  FABRICIUS:    Fauna  Gronlandica,  1753,  p.  346. 

4  Fauna  Arctica.    Bd.  1,  Lief.  1,  1900,  p.  144. 

Bergen,  March  1909. 


44 


JAMES  A.  GRIEG.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FKAM 


Tabular  List  of  the  Echinodermata 

collected  by  the  2nd  Fram  Expedition. 


^,    C 

c 

o 

T3 

o'S 

"S'g 

2§ 

1| 

C 
3 
O 

OJ 

C 

_o 

_o 

3* 

O     !« 

«  C 
o 

it 

°    0 

il 

•+J    C 

__- 

a 

V 
B) 

•S  B 

-C  J= 

fll     QJ 

r» 

• 

S  P 

—    — 

h?  2 

"§ 

33 

5.5 

o  o 

^o 

SB 

O 

CAJCD 

^^ 

Crinoidea. 

Antedon  eschrichti  J    MULLER   ........ 

+ 

_,_ 



_ 



Asteroidea. 

_ 

_ 

1 

4 

_ 

4- 

4 

4 

+ 

_ 

J^tcraster  tnilitaris,  0.  F.  MULLER      

4- 

4 

_ 

_' 

Stichaster  albulus    STIMPSON      

-1- 

+ 

4 

+ 

4 

Asterias  mulleri  f.  gronlandica,  STEENSTRUP     .    . 

— 

4 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 





4 

— 

— 



— 

Ophiuroidea. 

+ 

— 

4 

4 

— 

+ 

— 



4 

4- 

4 

4- 

4 

4- 

— 

4- 

4 

4 

4- 

OnJiiucantha  bidentata   RETZIUS    

— 

M- 

4- 

4 

4 

4 

4- 

Gorgonocephalus  eucnemis,  MULLER  &  TROSCHEL     . 

— 

— 

4 

4- 

— 

— 

— 

__ 



4 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Echinoidea, 

Strongylocentrotus  drobachiensis,  0.  F.  MULLER    . 

+ 

+ 

4 

4 

+ 

4 

+ 

Holothnrioidea. 

i 

4 

4- 







4 



_ 

_ 

_ 



_ 

4 

— 

- 

4 

4- 

- 

— 

f 

Rep.  of  the  2nd  Norweg.  Arct.  Exp.  in  the  Fram  1898—1902.  No.  20.  TAB.  I. 


1898-1902.  No.  20.]  BRACHIOPODS  AND  MOLLUSCS.  45 


Explanation  of  the  Plate. 


Fig.  1.     Crenella  faba,   0.  F.  MULLER  from  the   entrance    to   Stordalen,   Havnefjord 

a  left  valve,  b  from  above.     Mag. 
„    2.     Tellina,   macoma,  calcaria,   CHEMNITZ   from  the  head  of  Gaasefjord.    Left 

valve.     Nat.  size. 
„    3.     Tellina,   macoma,  calcaria,   CHEMNITZ    from  Forvisningsdalen,    Gaasefjord 

Left  valve.    Nat.  size. 
„     4.     Trichotropis  bicarinata,  BROD.  &  Sow.  var.  from  Winter  harbour,  Havnefjord. 

a  from  the  ventral  side,  6  from  the  dorsal  side,  c  operculum.    a  and  b  nat. 

size,  c  magn. 
„     5.     Trichotropis  bicarinata,   BROD.  &  Sow.     Typical   specimen.      Reproduction 

after  Tryon. 
„    C.     Trichotropis  tennis,  E.  A.  SMITH   from    Grinnell    Land.     Reproduction   after 

Edgar  A.  Smith. 
„    7.     Trichotropis  tenuis,   E.  A.  SMITH   var.   from   the   east   coast    of  Greenland. 

Reproduction  after  Grieg. 

„     8.     Trichotropis  hjorti,  FRIELE   from   the  cold   area  east  of  Iceland.     Reproduc- 
tion after  Friele. 
„    9.    Kossia  palpebrosa,    OWEN   from   the    bank   at   the   entrance   to   Stordalen, 

Havnefjord.   a  from  the  dorsal  side,  6  from  the  ventral  side.   Some  reduc.  size. 


Fig.  1—8  Henrich  Bucher  del.     Fig.  9  reproduction  after  photos. 


Printed  26.  October  1909. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  21. 


LICHENS 

COLLECTED  DURING  THE  2ND  NORWEGIAN  POLAR  EXPEDITION 
IN  1898-1902,  AND  DETERMINED  BY 

OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE. 


WITH  2  PLATES 


AT   THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS  SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1909 


Introduction. 


JLhe  material  of  Lichens  brought  back  from  Ellesmere-land  and 
King  Oscar-Land  and  collected  mainly  by  H.  G.  SIMMONS  is  very  exten- 
sive. I  think  I  can  safely  state  that  it  is  by  far  the  best  collection  of  this 
kind  ever  brought  back  from  that  part  of  the  world.  The  collection  has 
been  separated  into  1250  paper  bags  and  a  number  of  loose  specimens. 
Some  of  the  bags  contain  several  portions  of  substratum,  and  these  not 
(infrequently  carry  quite  a  lot  of  specimens  and  species.  Every  Licheno- 
logist  knows  how  many  plants  may  be  found  on  a  single  stone.  A 
rough  calculation  would  therefore  place  the  number  of  lichens  in  this 
collection  at  anything  between  7,000  and  10,000.  We  should  therefore 
get  a  very  complete  idea  of  what  the  lichen-flora  of  the  country  visited 
by  the  Norwegian  Expedition  is  like.  I  will  endeavour  to  give  this  be- 
fore I  pass  on  to  the  enumeration  of  the  species  themselves.  I  must 
however  before  doing  so  express  my  thanks  to  the  Council  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Manchester,  which  body  gave  me  leave  to  pay  for  a  substitute 
for  me  during  part  of  the  Session  1906—1907,  and  to  Prof.  WEISS  who 
took  over  part  of  my  work  during  that  year.  I  was  however  not  able 
to  make  the  full  use  of  this  period  which  I  had  hoped.  My  thanks  are 
also  due  to  Miss  N.  SNAPE  for  kindly  rendering  assistance  in  the  cutting 
of  sections. 

Judging  from  the  material  which  has  been  placed  at  my  disposal, 
I  can  state  that  the  fruliculose  lichens  play  a  very  important  part  in  the 
vegetation  of  Ellesmere-  and  King  Oscar-Land.  The  various  species 
of  Cetraria  evidently  occur  in  great  quantities  and  over  large  areas. 
It  is  mentioned  by  TH.  M.  FRIES  that  the  larger  forms  of  lichens  were 
found  in  small  quantities  during  the  English  Expedition  1875 — 1876. 
He  concludes  from  this  that  the  smaller  kinds  preponderate.  But  I  do 
not  think  that  this  is  really  the  case. 


OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


I  think  I  am  correct  in  saying  that  land  which  is  free  of  ice  or 
snow  atleast  for  the  greater  portion  of  the  year  will  produce  lichens. 
It  is  necessary  ofcourse  also  that  the  substratum  should  not  he  a  mov- 
ing one.  Sand  or  shifting  stones  or  earth  would  never  bear  a  lichen- 
vegetation.  But  the  exposed  nunataks  and  earth  will  bolh  ultimately 
be  covered  by  lichens.  These  are  the  two  most  important  substrata  in 
the  district  under  consideration.  Tree-lichens  are  ofcourse  absent. 

I  am  not  able  here  to  say  exactly  why  the  bare  earth  in  some  cases 
is  covered  with  moss  and  in  some  cases  with  lichens.  But  it  is  prob- 
ably a  question  of  water-supply,  or  rather  rapidity  of  evaporation.  At 
any  rate  it  ultimately  depends  on  the  power  of  the  particular  plant  to 
stand  drought.  From  my  own  observations  in  this  country  I  know  that 
on  the  open  hillside  the  lichens  occupy  the  drier  localities.  They  form 
in  fact  the  outskirts  of  vegetation,  though  they  naturally  occur  mixed 
with  mosses  in  many  localities.  Not  only  are  lichens  satisfied  with  less 
water  but  they  can  absorb  the  smallest  quantity  with  the  greatest  avi- 
dity They  can  also  without  apparently  taking  any  harm  dry  up  till  they 
become  quite  brittle.  In  this  condition  they  are  able  to  withstand  the 
greatest  cold  without  being  injured.  We  thus  find  them  in  the  most 
exposed  positions  on  the  bare  faces  of  rocks,  where  no  moss  could  find 
a  firm  hold. 

As  far  as  the  exposed  earth  is  concerned  the  lichens  we  find  will 
depend  largely  on  the  time  which  the  locality  has  been  undisturbed,  for 
lichens  grow  very  slowly. 

Not  a  few  of  the  bigger  species  found  on  the  bare  earth  may  also 
be  found  among  moss  or  even  growing  over  it.  To  this  class  belong 
plants  like  Stereocaulon  alpinum,  paschale  and  Cladonia  pyxidata. 
In  the  same  way  Physcia  pulverulenta  and  muscigena,  which  is  per- 
haps hardly  a  separate  species,  grow  abundantly  in  and  over  moss. 
Dactylina  arctica  and  Thamnolia  vermicularis  both  occur  amongst  moss 
but  the  latter  very  often  passes  beyond  the  moss-area.  It  has  even  been 
found  firmly  attached  to  some  droppings  of  the  musk-ox  (North  Lincoln : 
Framfjord).  Dufourea  muricata  here  and  there  found  among  moss 
generally  occurs  in  pure  formations.  In  this  it  is  followed  by  most  of 
the  species  of  Cetraria.  We  thus  get  quite  extensive  beds  of  Cetraria 
cucullata,  hiascens,  nivalis  and  to  a  smaller  degree  apparently  islan- 
diea.  Alectoria  nigricans  and  ochroleuca  though  often  found  in  pure 
formations  are  more  common,  so  it  would  appear,  in  close  company 
with  mosses.  The  different  species  of  Peltigera  are  well  represented  in 
the  area  under  consideration.  They  are  known  to  favour  moist  places 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS. 


as  a  rule.  Therefore  we  find  them  near  mosses  or  actually  growing 
over  them.  I  would  like  to  state  that  the  fruticulose  lichens  are  not 
represented  by  many  species  in  arctic  regions  but  that  they  cover  a  very 
extensive  area  and  thus  form  a  very  important  feature  in  the  vegetation. 
I  cannot  say  how  important  they  are  to  the  animals  of  those  parts  of 
the  world.  FRIES  mentions,  on  the  authority  of  Capt.  FIELDEN  that  the 
musk-ox  at  any  rate  never  feeds  on  lichens  at  all. 

In  some  places  we  get  the  bare  earth  covered  by  crustaceous  lichens 
and  a  very  common  plant-society  is  represented  by  the  species  Lecanora 
epibryon,  Rinodina  turfacea,  Aspicilia  verrucosa  and  one  or  two 
other  kinds.  Pertusaria  subobducens  is  frequent  on  bare  earth. 

Placodimn  splendens,  one  of  the  new  species,  growing  over  bare 
soil  must  with  its  striking  orange  colour  form  quite  a  conspicuous  ob- 
ject in  the  landscape.  It  shows  at  any  rate  that  lichens  in  the  arctic 
area  are  in  a  healthy  condition  and  that  for  them  the  conditions  are 
not  all  adverse.  Very  noticeable  is  the  absence  from  the  "Fram"-ma- 
terial  of  the  reindeermoss,  but  its  absence  is  also  commented  upon  by 
FRIES  in  his  account  of  the  lichens  of  the  English  Polar  Expedition. 

When  we  turn  to  the  lichens  growing  on  stones  we  again  find  that 
the  cold  of  the  north  has  no  deterrent  effect.  Almost  every  stone  which 
is  exposed  for  atleast  part  of  the  time  has  its  coat  of  lichens.  Species 
of  Gyrophora  are  of  frequent  occurrence  and  they  are  often  found 
together  with  Parmelia  lanata,  one  of  the  commonest  of  arctic  rock- 
liche  s.  We  very  commonly  find  Rliizocarpon  geographicum  and  ge- 
mmatum  associated  with  Sporastntia  testudinea.  The  intervals  between 
the  larger  crustaceous  lichens  being  covered  more  or  less  by  numerous 
other  kinds,  amongst  which  some  of  the  species  of  Aspicilia  are  often 
met  with.  From  what  I  have  seen  of  Placodium  elegans  I  would  say 
that  this  plant  is  a  rapid  grower  comparatively  speaking.  I  say  this 
because  it  is  so  often  found  on  stones  which  are  otherwise  bare.  This 
seems  to  indicate  that  this  particular  plant  has  established  itself  more 
quickly  than  any  other  lichen. 

Among  the  larger  fruticose  lichens  the  occurrence  of  apothecia  is 
very  unusual,  whereas  these  organs  of  reproduction  are  of  common  oc- 
currence with  the  simpler  crustaceous  lichens.  The  soredia  do  not  play 
any  part  in  the  distribution  of  lichens  in  the  arctic  region.  Vegetative 
reproduction  of  the  very  simplest  kind  seems  to  be  the  chief  method  by 
which  the  larger  lichens  increase  in  number. 


6  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FR AM 

Three  habitats  deserve  special  mention,  namely  the  bones  of  ani- 
mals found  in  the  soil  and  projecting  a  little,  drift-wood,  and  droppings 
of  the  musk-ox. 

The  following  few  plants  have  been  observed  on  various  bones: 
Lecanora  varia,  Hageni,  Rinodina  turfacea,  and  Buellia  parasema. 
It  is  important  to  notice  that  these  lichens  growing  on  bones  as  far  as 
I  can  make  out  only  very  slowly  decompose  their  organic  subtratum. 
There  is  no  sign  of  decay. 

Driftwood  I  have  found  to  bear  specimens  of  Caloplaca  cerina, 
citrina  and  jungermanniae,  Lecanora  epibryon  and  Buellia  myrio- 
carpa.  The  wood  I  examined  consisted  of  oak-planks. 

Another  substratum  with  a  characteristic  flora  of  lichens  was  that 
of  the  droppings  of  the  musk-ox.  On  these  I  have  found  Biatorina 
globulosa,  Caloplaca  pi/racea,  Gyalolechia  subsimilis,  Lecanora  epi- 
bryon, Aspicilia  verrucosa,  Rinodina  turfacea  and  even,  firmly  atta- 
ched, Thamuolia  vermicular  is. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS. 


The   following  books   and   papers  are  quoted  or  have  otherwise  been  made  use 
of  in  this  report: 

ALMQUIST,  ERNST,    Die    Lichenenvegetation    der    Kuesten   des  Beringsmeeres.      Vega- 

Expeditionens  Vetenskapliga  Arbeten. 
ALMQUIST,  S.,  Monographia  Arthoniarum  Scandinaviae.  —  Kongl.  Svenska  Vetenskaps- 

Akademiens  Handlingar.     Bandet  17.     No.  6.    Stockholm,  1880. 
BITTER,  GEORG,  Zur  Morphologic  und  Systematik  von  Parmelia,  Untergattung  Hypo- 

gymnia.  —  Hedwigia,  Band  40,  1901. 
BRANTH,  J.  S.  DEICHMANN,  og  GROENLUND  CHR.,  Groenlands  Lichen-Flora.  —  Meddelelser 

om  Greenland.     Tredie  Hefte,  p.  449-513,  p.  753-762.  -  1887-1892. 
BRANTH,  J.  S.  DEICHMANN,    Lichener   fra  Scoresby  Sund  og  Hold  with  Hope.  —  Saer- 

tryck  af  "Meddelelser  om  Greenland".    16. — 1894. 

—  „-     Lichenes  Islandiae.  -  Botanisk  Tidsskrift     25.  Bind.     2.  Hefte.  -  1903. 
CUMMINGS,  CLARA  E.,  The  Lichens. of  Alaska.  —  1906. 

DALLA  TORRE,  K.  W.  von,  und  SARNTHEIM,  LUDWIG  GRAF  von,  Die  Flechten  von  Tirol, 
Vorarlberg  und  Liechtenstein.  —  Innsbruck,  1902.  —  (Arnold  Tirol.). 

DARBISHIRE.  0.  V.,  Die  deutschen  Pertusariaceen  mit  besonderer  Beruecksichtigung 
ihrer  Soredienbildung.  —  Botanische  Jahrbuecher.  Band  22.  p.  593. 

—  „—      Flechten  aus  dem  Umanakdistrict.  —  Bibliotheca  Botanica,  Heft  42,  p.  55.  — 

1897. 

FORSSELL,  K,  B.  J.,  Beitraege  zur  Kenntniss  der  Anatomic  und  Systematik  der  Gloeo- 
lichenen.  —  K.  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenshaften  zu  Upsala.  Stockholm  1885. 

—  „—      Die  anatomischen  Verhaeltnisse  und   die  phylogenetische  Entwicklung   der 

Lecanora  granatina  Sommrf.  —  Botan.  Centralbl.    Bd.  22.    No.  15/16.  —  1885. 
FRIES,  TH.  M.,    Lichens  Arctoi   Europae   Groenlandiaeque  hactenus  cogniti.  —  Upsa- 
liae,  1860. 

—  „—      Lichenes   Spitsbergenses.  —  Kongl.  Svenska  Vetenskaps-Akademiens   Hand- 

lingar.   Bandet  7.    No:  2.  -  1867. 

—  „—      Lichenographia  Scandinavia.  —  Upsaliae     1871  —  1874. 

—  „—      On  the  Lichens  collected  during    the   English    Polar   Expedition    of  1875 — 

1876.  —  Linnean  Society's  Journal.  -  Botany,  vol.  17,  p.  346.-  1879. 

—  „—      Polyblastiae  Scandinaviae.  —  Nova  Acta  Reg.  Soc.  Sc.  Ups.  Ser.  3.     Upsa- 

liae, 1877. 

HUE,  A.,  Addenda  nova  ad  Lichenographiam  Europaeam.  —  Revue  de  Botanique, 
Paris,  1886-1888. 

—  „—      Lichenes  Extra-Europaei  a  pluribus   collectoribus   ad   Museum  Parisiensem 

missi.  —  Parisiis,  1901. 

JATTA,  A.,  Sylloge  Lichenum  italicorum.  —  Trani,  1900. 
LEIGHTON,  W.  A.,    The  British   Species  of  Angiocarpous  Lichens. —  Printed  for  the 

Ray-Society.     London,  1851. 

—  „—      Notes  on  the  Lichens  collected  by  Sir  John  Richardson  in  Arctic  America. 

Linnean  Society's  Journal,  Botany,  Vol.  9,  p.  184.  —  1865. 

LINDSAY,  W.  LAUDER,  The  Lichen-Flora  of  Greenland,  with  Remarks  on  the  lichens 
of  other  Arctic  Regions. —  Botanical  Society  of  Edinburgh,  Vol.  10,  p.32— 65. 
-1869. 

—  „—      Observations  on  the  lichens  collected  by   Dr.  Brown  in  West-Greenland  in 

1867.  —  Transactions  of  the' Linnean  Society  of  London,  vol.  27.,  1869. 


8  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

MACOUN,  JOHN,  Catalogue  of  Canadian  Plants.     Part  7.  —  Lichenes  and  Hepaticae.  — 

Ottawa,  1902. 
NYLANDER,  WILLIAM,  Lichenes  Scandinaviae.     Helsingfors,  1861. 

—  „—      Synopsis  Methodica  Lichenum.  —  Parisiis,  1858—60. 
STIZENBERGER,  E.,  Index  Lichenum  Hyperboreum.  —  Sangallensis,  1876. 

—  „—      Die   Alectorienarten    und    ihre    geographische   Verbreitung.  —  Annalen  des 

K.  K.  Naturhistorischen  Hofmuseums.    Band  7,  Heft  3.    Wien,  1892. 
SYDOW,  P.,  Die  Flechten  Deutschlands.  —  Berlin,  1887. 
TUCKERMANN,  EDWARD,  A  synopsis  of  the  North  American  Lichens.  —  Boston,  and  New 

Bedford,  1882-1888. 
ZAHLBRUCKNER,  A.,    Specieller  Theil    der    "Lichenes  (Flechten)"  in  "Die  Natuerlichen 

Pflanzenfamilien"    von  Engler,   A.,  und  Prantl,  K.,  Teil  1.    Abteilung  1*.  — 

Leipzig,  1907. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS. 


Systematic  list. 

The  following  list  includes  the  lichens  sofar  recorded  from  Arctic 
America,  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland.  It  is  hoped  that  thus  a 
fairly  accurate  picture  may  be  obtained  of  the  lichen-vegetation  of  the 
district  visited  by  the  Second  Norwegian  Polar  Expedition.  It  has  been 
compiled  from  the  material  brought  back  by  the  latter  and  from  the 
papers  of  BITTER,  BRANTH,  DARBISHIRE,  FRIES,  HUE,  LINDSAY,  MACOUN, 
NYLANDER,  STIZENBERGER  and  others.  The  alaskan  lichens,  an  enume- 
ration of  which  we  owe  to  CLARA  E.  CUMMINGS,  have  not  been  added 
to  my  list  as  their  inclusion  would  have  made  a  very  unwieldy  list  with- 
out probably  really  making  it  very  much  more  complete. 

The  specimens  brought  back  by  the  Norwegian  Expedition  vere 
separated  into  about  1250  paper  packets  which  bear  the  number  of  the 
locality  on  the  left  of  the  label  above  the  locality.  On  the  right  in  the 
topcorner  some  of  the  packets  have  numbers  which  refer  to  microscop- 
ical preparations. 

We  can  say  that  about  253  lichens  have  been  recorded  from  the 
area  visited  by  the  "Fram"  during  this  last  voyage.  Of  this  number 
I  have  been  able  to  find  161  species.  I  have  no  doubt  that  more  spe- 
cies might  still  be  found  in  the  same  material,  but  I  would  like  to  say 
that  almost  every  specimen  of  lichen  has  to  be  examined  with  the 
microscope  before  identification  can  be  established.  There  are  8  new 
species. 

Before  going  on  to  the  description  of  the  new  species,  I  would  like  to 
correct  an  error  which  was  kindly  pointed  out  to  me  by  Mr.  BRANTH. 
In  my  paper  on  the  lichens  from  the  Umanak-District,  I  recorded  Du- 
fonrea  madreporiformis  as  a  plant  new  to  Greenland.  The  specimen 
however  turned  out  to  be  a  species  of  Sphaerophoron,  and  I  wish  there- 
fore to  cross  out  the  former  species  as  a  Greenland-plant. 

I  will  now  give  the  chief  features  of  the  new  species: 


10  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Lecidea  purissima.    (Tab.  1,  fig.  1). 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  crassiuscula  indistincte  areolata,  albida  vel  di- 
lutissime  flavescens,  partibus  albidis  discontiguis  sed  hypothallo  nigro 
impositis,  hypothallo  nigro  instructa.  Apothecia  usque  ad  1  mm.  lata, 
primum  immersa  et  thallo  subaequantia,  marginata,  nigra,  deinde  quasi 
elevata,  subsessilia  convexa  et  immarginata;  epithecium  nigrum;  hypo- 
thecium  decolor;  asci  inflato-clavati;  paraphyses  simplices;  sporae  octo- 
nae,  hyalinae,  12.5  mi. — 15  mi.  longae,  5—6  mi.  latae.  Habitat  ad  saxa. 

Notes:  This  species  is  characterised  by  the  smaller  or  larger 
white  portions  of  the  thallus  which  are  not  continuous,  but  which  are 
superimposed  on  an  hypothallus  of  dark  colour.  Externally  it  much 
resembles  a  specimen  of  "Lecidea  alpicola,  WAHL.  Port  Kennedy,  Dr. 
WALKER  25."  in  the  Herbarium  at  Kew.  But  this  is  really  Catocarpon 
chionophilum,  TH.  FR.,  and  its  spores  are  in  fact  two-celled,  black  and 
measure  22 — 36  X  H — 18  mi.  Our  species  differs  from  Lecidea  macro- 
carpa  (DC.)  TH.  FR.  by  its  smaller  spores.  I  think  that  it  is  a  new  spe- 
cies. But  as  I  mention  later  on  the  Lecideas  of  the  world  require  re- 
vising monographically. 

Lecidea  solitaria.    (Tab.  1,  fig.  2). 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  tenuissima,  fere  obsoleta,  albida,  hypothallo 
nullo  distincto;  Apothecia  dispersa,  ad  1  mm.  lata,  nigra,  margine  con- 
colori  cincto,  demum  immarginata,  convexa;  epithecium  nigrum;  hypo- 
thecium  decolor;  paraphyses  non-articulatae;  sporae  octonae,  non-unise- 
riatae,  subglobosae,  5  X  6.4  mi.  magnae.  Habitat  ad  saxa. 

Notes:  From  the  description  this  plant  appears  to  be  not  unlike 
Lecidea  ultima,  TH.  FR.,  but  in  the  latter  the  hypothecium  is  darker, 
the  paraphyses  are  articulate  and  the  spores  uniseriate.  It  also  in  some 
respects  resembles  the  "crusta  fere  nulla"  —  forms  of  Lecidea  auricu- 
lata,  TH.  FR.  but  the  persistent  margin  of  the  latter  is  a  distinguishing 
feature. 

Catillaria  sanguinaria. 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  tenuis,  cinerascens,  minute  rimoso-areolata, 
margine  fusco-nigricanti,  hypothallo  albido,  fere  effigurato,  centro  rimoso- 
diffracta  et  fere  papillosa.  Apothecia  rninuta,  ad  .3  mm.  lata,  papillis 
immersa,  nigra,  margine  albido  cincta,  convexa,  lecideina;  epithecium, 
parathecium  et  hypothecium  nigrum;  sporae  octonae,  halone  nullo,  16  X  6 
mi.  magnae,  bicellulares,  hyalinae.  Habitat  ad  saxa. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  11 

Notes:  This  new  species  is  characterised  by  a  thin  but  distinctly 
areolate  and  greyish  thallus  and  a  very  clearly  marked  hypothallus  of 
a  darkish  colour,  which  ist  almost  effigurate  at  the  margin.  It  thus 
differs  from  Catillaria  subalpina,  TH.  FB.  (Lich.  Scand.  p.  583).  The 
size  of  the  spores  and  the  structure  of  the  apothecium  are  also  typical 
features. 

Catocarpon  depression.    (Tab.  1,  fig.  3). 

Diagnosis:  Grusta  tennis,  vel  crassior,  continua,  partim  albo- 
coerulescens  et  rimoso-areolata,  partim  albida  vel  dilutissime  rubescens 
et  effusa,  hypothallo  nigro.  Apothecia  ad  1.5  mm.  lata,  primum  im- 
mersa,  rhargihe  distincto  cincta  pallido,  demum  erurnpentia  et  elevata, 
immarginafa,  convexa,  nigra;  epithecium,  parathecium  et  hypothecium 
nigrum ;  sporae  octonae,  hyalinae,  bicellulares,  halone  distincto  circum- 
datae,  15 — 16  X  7—8  mi.  magnae  (halone  non  incluso).  Habitat  ad  saxa. 

Notes:  This  is  a  very  distinct  species,  and  it  appears  new.  It 
resembles  Catocarpon  chioneum  (NORM.)  TH.  FR.,  but  it  differs  atleast 
in  having  a  distinct  hypothallus,  in  the  apothecia  not  being  flat,  and 
not  having  a  thickish  margin,  and  in  the  spores  being  bigger  than  is 
the  case  with  C.  chioneum. 

Pertusaria  determinanda.    (Tab.  2,  fig.  1). 

Diagnosis:  Grusta  .5  ad  1.0  mm.  crassa,  rimoso-areolata,  albella 
vel  roseola;  verrucae  fertiles  irregulariter  globosae,  ad  1.5  mm.  latae  et 
ad  1.2  mm.  altae,  apicibus  depressae,  ostiolis  apotheciorum  usque  ad  10, 
punctiformibus,  fuscescentibus  instructae;  sporae  octonae,  elongatae,  26 — 
30  X  8—10  mi.  magnae.  Habitat  ad  saxa. 

Notes:  This  new  Pertusaria  differs  from  Pertusaria  rhodoleuca, 
TH.  FR.  (Lich.  Scand.  p.  306)  and  P.  xanthostoma  by  its  smaller  and 
octone  spores.  It  also  resembles  P.  pocillaria,  CUMMINGS  (Alaskan  Lich- 
ens p.  101,  pi.  9)  but  the  spores  of  the  latter  are  much  larger. 

Placodium  splendens. 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  adpressa,  quasi  foliacea,  dense  squamulosa,  et 
adscendens,  aurantiaca.  K  -f-  intense  purpurascens,  infra  rhizinis  destituta 
et  colore  albida,  utrinque  corticata,  strato  corticali  plectenchymatico  di- 
stincto, supra  et  infra  ad  30  mi.  crasso.  Apothecia  ad  2.5  mm.  lata, 
concoloria,  lecanorina,  primum  margine  cincta  distincto,  demum  sine  mar- 
gine  distincte  viso,  plana;  sporae  octonae,  polari-dyblastae,  apicibus  ro- 


12  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARGT.EXP.FRAM 

tundatis,  hyalinae,  15—20  X  7 — 10  mi.  magnae.     Spermogonia  non  visa. 
Habitat  ad  saxa,  terram  nudam  et  supra  muscos  Americae  Arcticae. 

Notes:  The  new  plant  before  us  is  very  striking  in  appearance, 
and  I  think  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  it  is  nearly  allied  to  Placodium 
elegans,  thus  it  resembles  "Lecanora  elegans  (AcH.)  f.  muscicola.  in 
H.  LOJKA,  Lichenes  Regni  Hungarici  Exsiccati.  Fasciculus  3.  (1882). 
n.  120."  But  the  latter  has  smaller  spores  (up  to  14  mi.  in  length  only) 
and  the  margin  of  the  apothecia  is  more  marked.  Our  new  species 
often  becomes  almost  fruticulose.  Portions  of  the  thallns  stand  up  like 
the  upright  podetia  of  Dactylina  arctica.  But  they  are  much  smaller, 
about  1  cm.  in  height,  and  they  are  always  dorsi ventral  in  structure. 
Apothecia  seem  to  be  rare,  some  specimens  being  quite  devoid  of  such. 
The  complete  absence  of  rhizines  at  once  separates  this  species  from 
any  kind  of  Xanlhoria. 

Aspicilia  lesleyana.    (Tab.  2,  fig.  2). 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  tenuis  vel  crassiuscula,  albo-cinerascens  aut 
dilute  roseola,  rimoso-areolata  vel  rimoso-diffracta,  margine  quasi  effi- 
gurato,  frequenter  non-contigua,  hypothallo  nigro  veil  pallido.  Apothecia 
ad  1  mm.  lata,  primum  immersa,  urceolata,  dein  emersa,  semper  mar- 
gine dislincto  cincta,  atra,  pruinosa;  epithecium  nigrum;  sporae  octonae, 
hyalinae,  15  X  7.5  mi.  magnae.  Habitat  ad  saxa. 

Notes:  The  species  of  Aspicilia  are  common  enough  in  the 
"Fram"-material,  but  they  have  given  me  a  great  deal  of  trouble.  I  consider 
however  this  to  be  a  new  species,  though  not  unlike  Aspicilia  calcarea, 
(L.)  SMRFT.  The  latter  however  has  fewer,  but  larger  spores  in  its  asci. 
The  thallus  of  our  new  species  is  distinctly  areolate  and  near  the  mar- 
gin it  breaks  up  almost  into  long  thin  laciniae,  still  distinctly  areolate. 
The  thallus  often  consists  of  only  one  fertile  wart.  The  hypothallus  is 
as  often  clearly  marked  as  not  present. 

Aspicilia  nikrapensis.    (Tab.  2,  fig.  3). 

Diagnosis:  Crusta  tenuis  aut  crassiuscula,  tartarea,  albo-ciner- 
ascens, contigua,  centra  inter  apothecia  matura  distincte  rimoso-areolata, 
margine  lenui,  quasi  effigurato,  hypothallo  nigro  aut  nullo  distincto. 
Apothecia  primum  immersa,  demum  emersa,  disco  planiusculo,  pruinoso, 
margine  distincto  instructa;  sporae  octonae,  16—20  X  7—8  mi.  magnae. 
Habitat  ad  saxa. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  13 

Notes:  The  thallus  is  distinctly  black  only  when  our  plant  comes 
into  contact  on  the  subtratum  with  another  lichen  of  the  same  species 
or  another.  I  have  however  noticed  it  overgrowing  completely  some  of 
the  smaller  species  of  Polyblastia.  The  margin  exhibits  a  peculiar  and 
very  delicate  ribbing  which  produces  an  effiguration-effect.  This  species 
is  also  closely  allied  to  A.  calcarea,  (L.)  SMRFT.,  but  it  differs  in  having 
a  black  hypothallus  on  occasions  and  in  the  presence  of  8  spores  in 
each  ascus. 

The  following  list  includes  the  species  recorded  up  to  now  from  Arctic 
America,  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland.  Each  name  is  followed  by 
one  reference  only,  where  the  best  available  description  will  be  found. 
I  have  also  mentioned,  relying  on  the  authors  allready  referred  to  for  the 
statements,  as  to  whether  the  species  is  recorded  for  Arctic  America 
(Am.),  Greenland  (Greenl.),  Spitsbergen  (Spits.)  and  Iceland  (Icel.).  The 
localities  of  the  '•Fram"-Expedition  are  given  after  the  letters  E.  P.  S.  N. 
which  stand  for  Expeditio  Polaris  Secunda  Norvegica.  The  numbers  in 
brackets  after  the  locality  refer  to  the  more  detailed  list  of  localities 
which  follows  the  systematic  enumeration.  It  was  first  my  intention  to 
add  here  a  key  to  the  genera  and  species  of  the  Arctic  Regions  which 
I  have  compiled  for  my  own  use  in  the  form  of  a  card-catalogue.  But 
in  the  end  I  considered  this  premature  and  I  have  left  it  for  a  later 
occasion. 


14  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


ConiocarpL 

Calicium  PERS. 

Calicium  pusillum  ACH. —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.249.  —  Am.  — Over  wood. 
Calicium  roscidum  FEK.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  246. —  Am. —  On  small 
dead  pine  twigs. 

Coniocybe  ACH. 

Coniocybe  furfur acea  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  252.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  On  roots  of  dead  trees. 

Acolium  ACH. 

Acolium  tigillare  DE  NOT.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.245  (sub  Cyphelium).  - 
Am.  —  On  wood. 

Sphaerophoron  PERS. 

Sphaerophoron   compressum  ACH.  —  HUE  Lich.    Extra.    N.  38.  - 
Am.  —  Over  earth. 

Sphaerophoron  coralloides  PERS.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  244.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.',  Icel.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.;  Ellesmere  Land:  Gape  Viele  (10); 
King  Oscar  Land :  Goosefjord  (39).  —  Over  earth  and  between  Moss. 

Sphaerophoron  fragile  PERS.  —  TH.FR.  Arct.  p. 244.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  between  Moss. 


Discocarpi. 

Graphideales. 
Lecanactis  ESCHW. 

Lecanactis  abietina  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  NYL.  Lich.Scand.  p. 241. —  Am. 

—  On  wood. 

Lecanactis  Dilleniana  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  TH.FR.  Arct.  p.  238.  —  Greenl. 

—  On  stone. 


1898-1902.  No.  21-]  LICHENS.  15 

Arthonia  ACH. 

Arthonia  fusca  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Spils.  p.  46.  —  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 
Arthonia  excentrica  TH.  FR.  —  ALMQ.  Arth.  Scand.  p.  55.  —  Spitsb. 

-  Over  moss. 

Arthonia  trabinella  TH.  FR.  —  ALMQ.  Arth.  Scand.  p.  30.  —  Greenl. 

-  Corticolous. 

Arthonia  proximella  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  205.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.  - 
Corticolous. 

Arthonia  punctiformis  ACH.  —  ALMQ.  Arlh.  Scand.  p.  42.  —  Icel.  — 
Corticolous. 

Xylographa  FR. 

Xylographa  parallela  ACH.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  242.  —  Greenl.  — 
Old  wood. 

Lecideales. 
Rhexophiale  TH.  FR. 

Rhexophiale  coronata  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  205.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  Over  earth  and  moss. 

Gyalecta  ACH. 

Gyalecta  cupularis  EHRH.  --  TH.  FR.  Arcl.  p.  140.  —  Icel.  —  Over 
rocks  and  moss. 

Racodium  E.  FR. 

Racodium  rupestre  PERS.  —  ZAHLBR.  Flecht.  p.  128.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
—  Over  rocks. 

Secoh'ga  NORM. 

Secoliga  foveolaris  (Acn.)  KBR.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  138.  —  Icel.  - 
Over  moss  and  earth. 

Secoliga  Peziza  (MONT.)  ANZI.  --  TH.  FR.  E.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  367.  —  Am. 

-  Over  turfy  earth. 

Lecidea  ACH. 

Lecidea  aglaea  SMRFT. —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  534.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. :  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39).  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  albocaerulescens(WvLF.)  SCHAER.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  508. 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  alpestris  SMRFT.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  536.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel,  —  Over  earth. 


16  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Lecidea  arctica  SMRFT.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  540.  —  Greenl.  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  Over  mosses,  on  rocks. 

Lecidea  armeniaca  (DC.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  532.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  rocks. 

Lecidea  assimilata  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  521.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.  - 
Over  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. :  Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19). 

Lecidea  atrobrunnea  (RAM.)    SCHAER.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  481.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  auriculala  TH.  FR. —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  499.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland,  Foulkefjord  (2);  King 
Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38—41,  48),  Vendom  Kap  (55);  Cardigan  Straits, 
Devils  Island  (67). 

Lecidea  brachyspora  TH.  FR.  — TH.FR.  Scand.  p.50J.  —  Am.  — On 
stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. :  King  Oscar  Land,  South  Cape  (34);  Goosefjord  (40); 
North  Devon,  Burginsel  (66);  Cardigan  Straits,  Devils  Island  (67). 

Lecidea  conferenda  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  560.  —  Greenl.  —  On 
stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (42). 

Lecidea  confluens  (WEB.)  KBR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  484.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb..  Icel.  —  On  stone. —  E.  P.  S.  N.:  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (38-40,  42,  48). 

Lecidea  crassipes  (Tn.  FR.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  520.  —  Am. 
Greenl.  —  Over  mosses. 

Lecidea  crustulata  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  511.  —  Greenl.  —  On 
stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.:  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38). 

Lecidea  cyanea  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  489.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  despecta  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  362. —  Am. 
—  On  stone. 

Lecidea  elaeochroma  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  542.  --Am., 
Greenl;,  Spitsb,,  Icel.  —  Over  earth,  moss,  wood,  and  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (26),  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (38, 
40,  48),  Lands  End  (58),  Coalharbour  (62). 

Lecidea  elata  SCHAER.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  535.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord 
(28),  Goosefjord  (38,  39,  42,  48). 

Lecidea  fuscoatra  (L.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  525.  — Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goose- 
fjord  (38). 

Lecidea  impavida  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  529.  —  Spitsb.  - 
On  stone. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  17 

Lecidea  lapicida  (Acn.)  ARN.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  493.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  limosa  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  538.  —  Am.,  Greenl.,  Icel. 

-  On  dead  plants  and  earth. 

Lecidea  lithophila  (Acn.)  TH.  Fr.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p. 495.  — Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 

Lecidea  macrocarpa   (D.G.)   TH.  FR.  -  •  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  505.  - 
E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Gnosefjord  (39,  42,  48),  Vendom  Kap  (55),   Landsend  (58);  North  Kent 
(64). —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  neglecta  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  524.  —  Icel.  —  Over  moss 
on  stone. 

Lecidea  pallida  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  539.  —  Greenl.  —  Over 
earth  and  sand,  rarely  rocks. 

Lecidea  pannaeola  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  502.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
—  On  stone. 

Lecidea  pantherina  (Acn.)  TH.FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  491.  —  Am., 
Green.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  parasemella  NYL,  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  552.  -  -  Greenl. 
On  dead  moss. 

Lecidea paupercula  TH.FR.  —  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  482.  —  Am.,  Greenl. 

-  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 

Lecidea  purissima  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford 
Pirn  Island  (19);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  26),  South  Gape 
(34),  Goosefjord  (38—43,  48,  49),  Vendom  Kap  (55),  Kenbugten  (57); 
North  Devon,  Burginsel  (66) ;  Cardigan  Straits  (67).  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  ramulosa  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  521.  —  Spitsb.  — 
Over  damp  earth  and  moss.  —  E,  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbour- 
fjord  (32). 

Lecidea  rhaetica  HEPP.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  514.  —  Spitsb.  —  On 
stone. 

Lecidea  scrobiculata  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  362.  - 
Am.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  sincerula  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  516  (as  Lecidea  DicJcso- 
nii  ACH.).  —  Am,,  Greenl.,  Icel.  --On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar 
Land,  Goosefjord  (38,  39). 

Lecidea  solitaria  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  South 
Gape  (34).  —  On  stone. 

2 


18  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Lecidea  speirea  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand,  p.  485.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.  - 
On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.    King  Oscar   Land,    Harbourfjord    (28),    Goose- 
fjord  (41). 

Lecidea  sulphurella  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spits,  p.  41.  --  Arch  p.  220; 
Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Lecidea  tenebrosa  Fw.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  540.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  On  stone-  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 

Lecidea  tessellata  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  489.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  stone. — E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 

Lecidea  ultima  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  363.  —  Am. 
—  On  stone. 

Lecidea   vorticosa   (¥LK.)   KBR.  -  -  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  515.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 


Catillaria,  ACH. 

Catillaria  sanguinea  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord (24).  —  On  stone. 

Biatorina  MASS. 

Biatorina  fraudans  HELLB.  -    TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  35.  —  Spitsb.  - 
On  moss. 

Biatorina  globulosa(FLK.)  TH.FK.  —  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  575.  —  Spitsb. 

-  On  bark  and  old  plants  and  mosses.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land 
Goosefjord  (39),  over  muskoxdung. 

Biatorina  Jemtlandica   TH.  FR.  et  ALMQ.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  580. 

-  Icel.  —  On  moss. 

Biatorina  lenticularis  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  567.  —  Icel. 

—  On  stone. 

Thalloidima  MASS. 

Thalloidima  candidum  (WEB.)  KBR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  338.  - 
Am.,  Green.,  Spitsb.  —  Over  earth  among  rocks, 

Tlialloidima  conjungens  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  34.  —  Spitsb. 

—  On  rocks. 

Thalloidima  cumulatum  SMRFT.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  341.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  19 

Thalloidima  vesiculare  (HFFM.)  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  337.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  —  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  26,  28), 
Muskoxfjord  (36),  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  46).  —  Over  earth. 


Bilimbia  DE  NOT. 

Bilimbia  hypnophila  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  373.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  mosses. 

Bilimbia  lugubris  (SMRFT.)  TH.FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  387.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  stone. 

Bilimbia  melaena  (NvL.)  ARN.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  383.  —  Greenl. 
—  On  wood. 

Bilimbia  microcarpa  TH.FR.  —  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  376.  —  Spitsb.— 
Over  mosses  (rarely  stone).  —  £.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Beitstadsfjord  (7). 
-  Over  earth. 

Bilimbia  milliaria  (FR.)  KRB.  —  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  381.  —  Icel.  - 
Over  wood,  earth  and  moss  (rarely  rocks). 

Bilimbia  obscurata  (SMRFT.)  TH.  FR.  -    TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  372.  - 
Over  moss  (rarely  rocks). 

Bilimbia  sphaeroides  (DICKS.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  p.  369.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss,  old  bark  and  wood. 

Bilimbia  verecundula  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  387.  —  Am.  - 
Hypophloeodic. 

FR. 


Biatora  aenea  (Dur.)  ANZI.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  457.  —  Am.,  Green. 
—  On  stone. 

Biatora  Berengeriana  MASS.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  433.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth. 

Biatora  cinnabarina  (SMRFT.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  422.  —  Greenl. 
-  Over  bark. 

Biatora  coarctata  (Su.)  NYL.  -    TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  447.  —  Icel.  - 
Over  stone,  rarely  over  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord 
(38,  41,  48).  —  On  stone. 

Biatora  collodea  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  36.  —  Spitsb.  —  Over 
moss  (?). 

Biatora  cuprea  (SMRFT.)  FR.  —  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  426.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Biatora  Diapensiae  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  439.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  Diapensia  lapponica.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Bedford 
Pirn  Island  (19),  over  moss. 


20  OTTO    V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Biatora  epiphaea  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  477.  —  Over  moss  and 
and  dead  grass. 

Biatora   erythrophaea   FLK.  -  -  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  465.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  bark. 

Biatora  fusca  (SCHAER.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  435.  —  Greenl., 
Icel,  —  Over  moss  and  old  wood. 

Biatora  fuscescens  SMRFT.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  461.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
—  Over  bark. 

Biatora  fuscorubens  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  440.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  stone. 

Biatora  granulosa  (EHRH.)  POETZSCH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  442.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Biatora  hilarescens  NYL.  —  NYL.  Flora.  1862  p.  83.  —  Greenl.  - 
Over  old  wood. 

Biatora  immersa  (WEB.)  KRB.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  478.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Vendom  Kap  (55).  —  Endolithic. 

Biatora  leucophaea  (FLK.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  459.  —  Am., 
Green.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Biatora  lucida  (Acn.)  FR.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  432.  —  Am.  —  On 
stone  or  bark. 

Biatora  Nylanderi  ANZI.  -•  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  462.  -  -  Icel.  --  On 
old  bark. 

Biatora  rivulosa  (Acn.)  FR. --  TH.  FR.    Scand.  p.  450.—  Am. - 
On  stone. 

Bialora  rufofusca  (ANZI)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  476.  —  Greenl. 
Over  moss. 

Biatora  rupestris  (Scop.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  423.  —  Am.,  Spitsb. 
-  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.   King  Oscar  Land,   Goosefjord  (39),   Vendom 
Kap  (55). 

Biatora  terricola  (ANZI)  TH.  FR.  —  Scand.  p.  425.  —  Greenl.  —  Over 
earth  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (41). 

Biatora  tornoensis  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  —  Scand.  p.  464.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb..  Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Biatora  turgiduld  (FR.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  469.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  bark. 

Biatora  uliginosa  (SCHRAD.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  455.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  old  wood. 

Biatora  vernalis  (LiNN.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  427.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Old  moss. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  21 

Bacidia  DE  NOT. 

Bacidia   abbreviam   (NYL.)   TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.    Scand.  p.  362.  - 
Icel.  —  On  hark. 

Bacidia  arceutina  (Acn.)  ARN.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  352.  —  Icel.  - 
On  bark. 

Bacidia  atrosanguinea  (SCHAER.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  354. 
-  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Bacidia  Beckhausii  (KRB.)  ARN.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  359.  —  Icel.  — 
On  bark. 

Bacidia  herbarum  (HEPP.)  ARN.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  349.  —  Icel.  — 
Over  moss. 

Bacidia  leucococcoides  NYL.  -  -  Hue  Add.  n.  1088.  —  Icel.  -  -  On 
old  plants. 

Bacidia  rubella  (PERS.)  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  344.  —  Am.,  Icel. 
—  On  bark. 

Bacidia  subfuscula  (NYL.)  TH.FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  35.  —  Greenl. 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  wood. 

Bacidia  umbrina  AGH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  365.  —  Greenl,  Icel.  - 
Over  stone,  old  wood  and  bark. 

Bacidia  venusta  REPP.  —-  TH.  FR.   Spitsb.  p.  35.  —  Spitsb.  —  Over 
moss,  wood  and  bone. 

Bacidia  vermifera  (NYL.)  -    TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  363.  —  Greenl.  - 
Over  bark. 

a  MASS. 


Sporastatia  cinerea  (SCHAER.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  404.  - 
Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Sporastatia   Spitsbergensis   TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.   Spitsb.  p.  43.  - 
Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Sporastatia  tenuirimata  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  42.  —  Spitsb. 

—  On  stone. 

Sporastatia  testudinea  MASS.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  403.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord  (24,  26,  27),  Bjerneborg  (35),  Goosefjord  (38-41,  48-50). 

Sarcogyne  Fw. 

Sarcogyne  Clavus  (D.C.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  409.  —  Greenl. 

—  On  stone. 


OTTO  V.  DARBISH1RE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Sarcogyne  pruinosa  (SM.)  MUDD.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  406.  —  Grenl. 
-  On  stone. 

Sarcogyne  simplex  (DAY.)  NYL.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  407.  —  Am., 
Green!.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord 
(39),  Vendom  Kap  (55). 

Lopadium  KBR. 

Lopadium  fuscoluteum  (Dicxs.)  MUDD.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  388.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth. —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  Elles- 
mereland,  Frams  Harbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land.  Goosefjord  (39,47,50), 
Vendom  Kap  (55). 

Lopadium  pezizoideum  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  389.  —  Greenl,, 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  bark. 

Diplotomma,  Fw. 

Diplotomma  alboatrum  (HFFM.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  607.  - 
Am.,  Icel.  —  On  bark  and  stone. 

Catocarpon  KBR. 

Catocarpon  applanatum  (FR.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  618.  - 
Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Catocarpon  badioatrum  (FLK.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  613.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord  (27). 

Catocarpon  chionophilum  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  612.  — Am. 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Catocarpon  Copelandi  (KBR.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  615.  - 
Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Catocarpon   depressum   DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Vendom  Kap  (55).  —  On  stone. 

Catocarpon   effiguratum  (ANZI)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  613. 

-  Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Catocarpon  expallescens  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  620.  —  Greenl. 

-  On  stone. 

Catocarpon  ignobile  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  —  Scand.  p.  619.  —  Greenl. 
—  On  stone. 

Catocarpon  Rittokense  (HELLB.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  615.  — 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (39). 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  23 

Rhizocarpon  RAM. 

Rhizocarpon  calcareum  (WEIS)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  631.— 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosetjord  (39). 

Rhizocarpon  chioneum  (NORM.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  620.— 
E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  South  Cape  (34).  —  On  stone. 

Rhizocarpon  endamyleum  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  627.  —  On 
stone. 

Rhizocarpon  geminatum  (Fw.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  623.  - 
Am.,    Greenl.,    Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland   (2,  3) ; 
Ellesmereland,  Beitstadsfjord  (7),   Lastraea  Valley  (9),  Framsharbour  (15 
-17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,26—28),    Goosefjord  (38—42 
48—50),  Vendom  Kap  (55);  North  Devon  (66). 

Rhizocarpon  geographicum  (L.)  D.C.  -- TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  622. - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  — E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2);  Elles- 
mereland, Fort  Juliana  (5),  Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Framsharbour  (16);  King 
Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  26-28),  Bjerneborg  (35),  Goosefjord 
(38-42,  48—50),  Vendom  Kap  (55).  Landsend  (58);  North  Devon  (66), 
Cardiganstrait  (67);  Camp  no.  30(68). 

Rhizocarpon  grande  FLK.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  624.  —  Am.  —  On 
stone. 

Rhizocarpon  Oederi  (WEB.)  KRB.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  626.  —  Greenl. 
—  On  stone. 

Rhizocarpon  petraeum  WULF.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  235. —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Catolechia  Fw. 

Catolechia  ladia  (FR.)  KBR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  588.  —  Icel.  - 
On  stone. 

Catolechia  epigaea  (?ERS)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  587.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  earth. 

Catolechia  pulchella  (SCHRB.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  588.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Psora  HFFM. 

Psora  cinereorufa  (SCHAER.)  TH.  FR.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  419.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Psora  decipiens  (£HRH.)  KRB.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  418.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord 
(26,  28),  Goosefjord  (41). 


24  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Psora  demissa  (RUTSTR.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  420.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  old  wood. 

Psora  globifera  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  411.  —  Greenl.  •- 
Over  earth. 

Psora  lurida  (Sw.)  KBR. —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  413.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.— 
Over  earth. 

Psora  rubiformis  (WAHL.)  FR.  —  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  412.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel. 

Umbilicaria  HFFM. 

Umbilicaria  Pennsylvania  (HFFM.)  —  Hue  Lich.  Extra,  n.  373.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  ACH. 

Gyrophora  anthracina  (WuLF.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  165.  — 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Frams- 
harbour   (15),   Bedford  Pim  Island  (19,  20),  Brevort  Island  (22);   North 
Lincoln   (23);   King  Oscar  Land,   Harbourfjord  (27),  Goosefjord  (38—40, 
48—50);  Camp  n.  30  (68). 

Gyrophora  arctica  ACH.  -•  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  161.  —  Am.,  Greenl, 
Spitsb.,  Icel. —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framsharbour(17). 

Gyrophora  corrugata  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  161.  - 
Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  cylindrica  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  157.  —  Am., 
Grenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Frams- 
harbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (27),  Goosefjord  (38). 

Gyrophora  deusta  (L.)  Fw.  — -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  164. —  Greenl.  - 
On  stone. 

Gyrophora  discolor  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  31.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  erosa  (WEB.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  159.  —  Am., 
Greenl..  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Beitstads- 
fjord  (7),  Framsharbour  (17). 

Gyrophora  hirsuta  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  155.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
-  On  stone. --  E.  P.  S.  N.   Greenland   (2);    Ellesmereland,   Bedford  Pim 
Island  (20);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (40,  49). 

Gyrophora  hyperborea  (HFFM.)  MUDD.  —  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  160.— 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb..  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2);  Elles- 
mereland, Framsharbour  (15,  17);   King  Oscar  Land,   Harbourfjord  (27), 
Goosefjord  (38,  48). 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  25 

Gyrophora  Muehlenbergii  ACH.  —  Hue  Lich.  Extr.  n.380.  —  Am.  — 
On  stone. 

Gyrophora  polyphylla  (L.)  Fw.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  163.  —  Greenl. 

-  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  proboscidea  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  162.  —  Am  , 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
hourfjord  (27),  Goosefjord  (38—40,  48-50). 

Gyrophora  rugifera  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  156.  - 
Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  sclerophylla  NYL.  --  BR.  Groenl.  p.  490.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  stone. 

Gyrophora  spodochroa  (EHRH.)  ACH.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  151.  - 
Greenl.  —  On  stone. 

Gyrophora  rellea  (L.)  ACH.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  153.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Toninia  MASS. 

Toninia  fusispora  (HEPP)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  334.  —  Spitsb. 

-  Moss,  earth  and  loose  rocks. 

Toninia  squalida  (SCHLEICH.)ACH.  —  TH.FR.  Scand.  p.  331.  — Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Toninia  syncomista  (FLK.)  TH.  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  335.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth. 

Sphyridium  Fw. 

Sphyridium  byssoides  L.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  328.  —  Icel.  —  Over 
earth. 

,  Sphyridium  placophyllum  (WNBG.)  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  327.  - 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Stereocaulon  SCHREB. 

Stereocaulon  alpinum  LAUR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  48.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel. —  Over  rocks  and  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  Elles- 
mereland,  Alexandra  Harbour  (11),  Cape  Rutherford  (14),  Frams  Harbour 
(16,  17),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (33),  Goosefjord  (39,  40,  50),  Landsend  (58);  North  Kent  (64). 

Stereocaulon  condensatum  HFFM.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  52.  —  Icel.  — 
Over  earth. 

Stereocaulon  coralloides  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  44.  —  Am.,  Greenl. 
-On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19). 


26  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Stereocaulon  denudatum  FLK.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  50.  —  Am., 
Greenl,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Stereocaulon  evolutum  GRAEWE.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  45.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  JSf.  Ellesmere  Land,  Lastraea  Valley  (9). 

Stereocaulon  paschale  (L.)  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  46.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone  and  between  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Elles- 
mere Land,  Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Twinglaciervalley  (8),  Gape  Viele  (11), 
Alexandra  Harbour  (13),  Cape  Rutherford  (14),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19); 
King  Oscar  Land.  Harbourfjord  (24,  27,  28,  31),  Goosefjord  (38—40,  48, 
49);  North  Kent  (64). 

Stereocaulon  tomentosum  (Fr.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  48.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.  —Over  sandy  fields.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (39). 

Icmadophila  EHRH. 

Icmadophila  aeruginosa  (ScEF.)  TREV.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  300.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.  —  Among  mosses,  over  dead  wood,  rarely  earth. 

Cladonia  HFFM. 

Cladonia  alpicola  (Fw.)  WAINIO.  —  WAIN.  II.  p.  58.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  amaurocraea  (FLK.)  SCHAER. —  WAIN.  I.  p.  243.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  mossy  rocks. 

Cladonia  bellidiflora  (Acn.)  SCHAER.  -  -  WAIN.  I.  p.  198.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  cariosa  (Acn.)  SPRENG.  —  WAIN.  II.  p.  43.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  carneola  FR.  --  WAIN.  II.  p.  420.  --  Greenl.  --On  old 
stems. 

Cladonia  cenotea  ACH.  —  WAIN.  I.  p.  471.  —  Greenl.  —  On  old  trunks 
and  over  earth. 

Cladonia  chlorophaea  FLK.--  WAIN.  II.  p.  232. —  Greenl.,  Spitsb. 
—  Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framsharbour  (17);  King 
Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (50,  51). 

Cladonia  coccifera  (L.)  WILLD.  —  WAIN.  I.  p.  149.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  damp  earth  and  mosses. 

Cladonia  cornuta  (L.)  SCHAER.  —  WAIN.  II.  p.  127.  —  Greenl.  - 
Over  earth. 

Cladonia  crispata  (Acn.)  FLK. —  WAIN.  I.  p.  377.  —  Am.,  Greenl. — 
Over  moss  and  old  tree  trunks. 


1898-1902.  No.  81.]  LICHENS.  27 

Cladonia  cyanipes  (SMRFT.)   FR.  —  WAIN.  II.  p.  431.  --  Greenl.  - 
Between  mosses. 

Cladonia  deformis  (L.)  HFFM. — WAIN.  I.  p.  186.  —  Am.,  Green]., 
Spitsb.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  degenerans  (¥LK.)  SPRENG.  —  WAIN.  II.  p  135.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  digitata  (L.)  HFFM.  —  WAIN.  I.  p.  123.  —  Greenl.  —  Over 
old  trunks. 

Cladonia  fimbriaia  (L.)  FR.  -  WAIN.  II.  p.  246. —  Arn.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (33). 

Cladonia  Floerkeana  (FR.)  SMRFT. — WAIN.  I.  p.  72.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
-  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  foliacea  (Huos.)  SCHAER. — WAIN.  II.  p.  384.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  furcata  HUDS. — WAIN.  I.  p.  316.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over 
earth  and  old  trunks. 

Cladonia  gracilis  (L.)  WILLD.  —  WAIN.  II.  p.  81.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  papillaria  (EHRH.)  HFFM.  —  WAIN.  I.  p.  48.  —  Greenl.  — 
Over  sandy  earth. 

Cladonia  pyxidata  (L.)  FR.  —WAIN.  II. p.  209.  —  Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb., 
Icel.—  Over  earth  and  tree  trunks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  Elles- 
mereland,  Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Gape  Viele  (10),  Framsharbour(16, 17),  Cocked 
Hat  Island  (18),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19,21);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King 
Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24-29,  31),  Goosefjord  (38-42,  46,  47,  50), 
Vendom  Kap  (55),  Exkrementbugten  (56),  Renbugten  (57),  Landsend  (58) ; 
North  Kent  (64);  North  Devon  (65,66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Cladonia  rangiferina  (L.)  HFFM.  --  WAIN.  I.  p.  9.  —  Am.,  Greenl, 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth, 

Cladonia  rangiformis  HFFM.  --  WAIN.  I.  p.  357. —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  squamosa  HFFM.  —  WAIN.  I.  411.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  - 
Over  earth  and  rocks. 

Cladonia  subsquamosa  NYL. — WAIN.  I.  p.  445.  —  Spitsb. 

Cladonia  sylvatica  (L.)  HFFM.  —  WAIN.  I.  p.  18.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  turgida  (EHRH.)  HFFM. — WAIN.  I.  p.  494.  —  Am.  —  Over 
moss  and  Lichens. 


OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Cladonia  uncialis  (L.)  FR.  — WAIN.  I.  254.  —  Am.,  Greenl.*  Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Cladonia  verticillata  (HFFM.)  FLK.  — WAIN.  Clad.  II.  p.  176.  —  Greenl. 
—  Over  earth. 

Parmeliales. 
Thelotrema,  ACH. 

Thelotrema  lepadinum  ACH.  --  TUCK.  N.  A.  L.  I.  p.  226.  —  Am.  - 
On  bark. 

Urceolaria  ACH. 

Urceolaria  scruposa  (L.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  141.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  Rocks. 

Ochrolechia  MASS. 

Ochrolechia  pallescens  (L.)  MASS.  —  DARRISH.  Pert.  p.  617.  —  Am., 
Greenl.  —  On  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24), 
Goosefjord  (41). 

Ochrolechia  parella  (L.)  MASS.  —  DABBISH.  Pert.  p.  618.  —  Icel.  - 
On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39,  48). 

Ochrolechia  tartarea  (L.)  MASS.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  616.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spilsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  bark,  rarely  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (26,  29),  Goosefjord  (39,  41);  North 
Kent  (64). 

Ochrolechia  upsaliensis  (Acn.)  NYL.  —  DARBISH.  Perlus.  p.  618.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (26). 

Pionospora  TH.  FR. 

Pionospora  bryontha  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  614.  — 
Am.,  Greenl.  —  Over  moss. 

Pionospora  glomerata  (Acn.)  DARBISH.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  613.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  moss,  wood,  and  earth,  rarely  on  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King 
Oscar   Land,    Harbourfjord    (23,    24),     Goosefjord    (40,  50),    Braskeruds- 
lauen  (63). 

Pionospora  oculata  (DICKS.)  DARBISH.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  612.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth,  rarely  on  stone. 

Megalospora  MASS. 

Megalospora  sanguinaria  (LiNN.)  MASS.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  629.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  bark. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  29 

Pertusuria  D.C. 

Pertusaria  carneopallida  (NYL.)  ANZI.  -      DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  607.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Pertusaria  communis  (L.)  D.G.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  598.  —  Icel.  - 
On  bark  and  wood,  rarely  on  stone. 

Pertusaria  coriacea  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  318.  —  Am.,Spitsb., 
Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth 

Pertusaria  dactylina  (AcH.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  310.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  dead  plants.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3) ;  King 
Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  46). 

Pertusaria  determinanda  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (48).  —  On  stone. 

Pertusaria  panyrga  (Acii.)  TH.  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  308.  — 
Greenl.  -  -  Over  dead  plants  and  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land, 
Frarnsharbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (41). 

Pertusaria  rhodoleuca  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  306.  —  Icel.  — 
On  stone. 

Pertusaria   Sommerfeltii   (¥LK.)  NYL.  --  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  607.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  bark. 

Pertusaria  subobducens  NYL.  —  BRANTH  Groenl.  p.  756.  —  Greenl. 
—  Over  moss,  earth  and  dead  plants.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Cape 
Viele  (10),  Framsharbour  (17),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (20);  North  Lincoln 
(23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (25,  28),  Goosefjord  (38—41,  46,  50, 
52,  53),  Landsend  (58),  Hyperitodden  (60),  Braskerudslauen  (63);  North 
Kent  (64);  North  Devon  (65). 

Pertusaria  xanthostoma  SMRFT.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  306.  —  Icel.  — 
Over  bark  and  moss. 

VariceJlaria,  NYL. 

Varicellaria  rhodocarpa  (KRB.)  TH.  FR.  —  DARBISH.  Pert.  p.  631. — 
Am.  —  Over  earth  and  moss,  rarely  rocks. 

Candelsurici  MASS. 

Candelaria  concolor  (DICKS.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  147.  — 
Am.  —  Over  bark,  earth  and  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Frams- 
harbour (17) ;  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (39). 


30  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Xanthoria  FR. 

Xanthoria  lychnea  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH,  FR.  Scand.  p.  146. —Am., 
Green!.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  rock  and  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2) ; 
Ellesmere  Land,  Fort  Juliana  (5);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24). 

Xanthoria  parietina  (L.)  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  145.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Everywhere.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord (24),  Goosefjord  (38). 

Placodium  D.C. 

Placodium  elegans  (LINK)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  168.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2); 
Ellesmereland,  Fort  Juliana  (5),  Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Twinglacier  Valley  (8); 
North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  27,  28),  South 
Cape  (34),  Bjerneborg  (35),  Goosefjord  (38—42,  44,  48,  49),  Vendom  Kap 
(55),  Graham  Island  (59),  Coalbay  (62);  North  Kent  (64);  North  Devon 
(66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67);  Camp  n.  33  (69). 

Placodium  miniatum  HFFM.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  170.  —  Icel.  —  Over 
rocks  and  wood. 

Placodium  murorum  (HFFM.)  D.C.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  170.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  stones.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar 
Land,  Harbourfjord  (28),  Goosefjord  (38). 

Flacodium  splendens  DARBISH.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Cape 
Rutherford  (14),  Cocked  Hat  Island  (18);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar 
Land,  Braskerudslauen  (63).  —  Over  earth  and  rarely  on  stones. 

Blastema  MAN. 

Blastema  atrocyanescens  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  395.  —  Am. 
—  Over  stone. 

Blastema  diphyes  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  395.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  stone. 

Blastenia   leucoroea  (Acn.)   TH.  FR.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  392.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  old  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (47). 

Blastenia  pleiophora  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  394.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  bark. 

Blastenia  tetraspora  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  392.  - 
Greeni.,    Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  mosses.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (39). 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  31 

Caloplaca  TH.  FR. 

Caloplaca  auranliaca(LiGinFT.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  177.— 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Tcel.  —  Over  bark,  stone  and  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar 
Land,  Goosefjord  (40). 

Caloplaca  celata  TH.  FR.  -    TH.  FR.    Engl.  Pol.  Exped.  p.  356.  - 
Am.  —  Over  old  bones  and  moss. 

Caloplaca  cerina  (EHHR.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  173. —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Almost  everywhere.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar 
Land,  Goosefjord  (54). 

Caloplaca  citrina  (HFFM.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  176.  —  Am., 
Icel.  —  Over  stone  and  earth.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbour- 
fjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (39,  42,  54). 

Caloplaca  ferruginea  (HuDS.)  TH.  FR.  -    TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  182.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Almost  everywhere. 

Caloplaca  jungermanniae  (VAHL)  TH.  FP.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  179.— 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth,  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King 
Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (45,  54). 

Caloplaca  obscurella  (LAHM)    TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  182.  - 
Icel.  —  On  old  tres. 

Caloplaca  pyracea  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  178.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  bark  and  Muskox  dung.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  North 
Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (30),  Goosefjord  (39,  41), 
Vendom  Kap  (55). 

Gyalolechia  MASS. 

Gyalolechia  crenulata  (WNBG.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  187.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  Rocks. 

Gyalolechia  nivalis  (KfiR.)  TH.  FR. — TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  191.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  moss,  on  rocks. 

Gyalolechia  subsimilis  TH.  FT. —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  189.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  Over  rocks  and  mosses.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land, 
Framsharbour  (16),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19);  King  Oscar  Land,  South 
Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  44,  51),  Exkrementbugten  (56);  Cardigan 
Straits  (67). 

Gyalolechia  vitellina  (EHRH.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  188.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  — Almost  everywhere.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Os- 
car Land,  Goosefjord  (38,  41). 


OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Squamaria  D.C. 

Squamaria  albescens  (HFFM.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Seand.  p.  252.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stones  and  walls. 

Squamaria  cartilaginea  (WESTR.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  225.  — 
Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Squamaria  chrysoleuca  (Acn.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  224.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (24). 

Squamaria  circinata  (PERS.)  ANZI.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  231.  - 
E.P.S.N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Coalbay  (62).  —  On  rocks. 

Squamaria  fulgens  (Sw.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  222.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  Over  moss  and  earth.  --  E.P.S.N.  Ellesmere  Land, 
Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Cape  Viele  (10),  Framsharbour  (16);  North  Lincoln  (23); 
North  Devon  (65). 

Squamaria  gelida  (L.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  228.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  rocks. 

Squamaria  geophila  TH.  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  85.  --  Greenl.  - 
Over  moss  and  earth. 

Squamaria  melanaspis  (VAHL)  NYL.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  229.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  rocks. 

Squamaria  saxicola  (POLL.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  226.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  rocks,  rarely  mosses. 

Squamaria  straminea  (WNBG.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  224.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Haematomma  MASS. 

Haematomma  ventosum  (L.)  ACH.— TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  296.  — Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecania  MASS. 

Lecania  aipospila  (WNBG.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  293.  - 
Spitsb.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecania  cyrtella  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  294.  —  Icel.  - 
On  bark. 

Lecania  erysibe  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  21.  —  Spitsb.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecania  syringea  (AcH.)  TH.FR.  — TH.FR.  Scand  p.  290.  —  Icel. - 
On  bark. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  33 

Lecanora  ACH. 

Lecanora  albella  (PERS.)  AGH.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  243.  —  Green!., 
Icel.  —  Over  bark. 

Lecanora  atra  (Huos.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  237.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  trees  and  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38,  41). 

Lecanora  atriseda  (FR.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  267.  —  Icel.  - 
On  rocks. 

Lecanora  atrosulphurea  (WNBG.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  257.  — 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecanora  badia  (PERS.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  266.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecanora  castanea   (HEPP)   TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.     Scand.  p.  272.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth. 

Lecanora  dispersa  (PERS.)  FLK.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  254.  —  Am.  - 
On  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38). 

Lecanora  epanora  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  256.  —  Greenl.  —  On 
rocks. 

Lecanora  epibryon  (WuLF.)  SCHAER.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  239.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Beitstadsfjord  (7),  Gape 
Rutherford  (14),  Framsharbour  (17),  Cocked  Hat  Island  (18),  Bedford  Pirn 
Island  (19,  21);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24 
-26,  28,  29,  33),  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (39—41,  44,  45,  54),  Ven- 
dom  Kap  (55),  Exkrementbugten  (56),  Landsend  (58);  North  Devon  (65, 
66) ;  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Lecanora  frustulosa  (DICKS.)  MASS.— TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  255.— Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Graham  Island  (59). 

Lecanora  granatina  (SMRFT.)  NYL.--  TUCK.  N.  A.  L.  I.  p.  118.— 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  rocks. 

Lecanora  Hageni  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  250.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Bark,  wood,  moss  and  old  plants. 

Lecanora  helicopis  WNBG.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  249.  —  Greenl.  —  On 
rocks. 

Lecanora  poliophaea  (WNBG.)  SCHAER.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  248.— 
Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (40). 

Lecanora  polytropa  (EHRH.)  ACH. — TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  259.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2);  Ellesmere- 
land; Framsharbour  (15, 17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goose- 
fjord  (38,  39,  48—50). 

3 


34  OTTO  V.  DARBISH1RE.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.FRAM 

Lecanora  rliypariza  (NYL.)  ACH.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  271. — Greenl. 
-  Over  earth  and  moss. 

Lecanora  sordida  (PERS.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  246.—  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Lecanora  subfusca  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  238.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Almost  everwhere.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38,  42). 

Lecanora   sytmnicta  ACH.  -     TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  262.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  bark. 

Lecanora  varia  (EHRH.)  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  259.  —  Green]., 
Icel.  —  Over  wood  and  walls.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord 
(38,  40,  41). 

Aspicilia,  MASS. 

Aspicilia  alpina  SMRFT.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  283.  —  Spitsb.  —  On 
rocks. 

Aspicilia  calcarea  (L.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  274.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.— On  rocks.  —  E  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbour- 
fjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (38,  49),  Landsend  (58);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Aspicilia  Candida  ANZI.  —  Jatta  Syll.  n.  445.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King 
Oscar  Land,  Vendom  Kap  (55).  —  On  stone. 

Aspicilia  cinerea  (L.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  280.  -  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38,  39,41,  48). 

Aspicilia  cinereorufescens  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  284.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  flavida  (HEPP)  ARN.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  286.  —  Am., 
Spitsb.  —  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  gibbosa  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  276.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  rocks  and  old  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (24,27),  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  42,  48,  50);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Aspicilia  lacustris  (WITH.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  287.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  laevata  (Acn.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  276.  —  E.  P.  S.N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (42).  —  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  lesleyana  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38,  41,  48,  50).  -  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  mastrucata  WNBG.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  282.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  On  rocks.  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (19). 

Aspicilia  nikrapensis  DARBISH.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38,  39,  49).  -  On  rocks. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  35 

Aspicilia  Prevostii  (FR.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FB.  Scand.  p.  288.  —  Spitsb. 
-  On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  rhodopis  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  136.  —  Spitsb.  - 
On  rocks. 

Aspicilia  verrucosa  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  273.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 

Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  moss  and  earth.  --  E.  P..S.  N.    King   Oscar   Land, 

.  Harbourfjord   (26,   33),  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  45,  49,  50), 

Vendom   Kap  (55),   Exkrementbugten   (56),   Landsend  (58);  North  Devon 

(65,  66). 

Parmelia  ACH. 

Parmelia  alpicola  TH.  FR.  —  BITTER  Hypogymn.  p.  261.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —  E.'P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2);  King  Oscar 
Land,  Goosefjord  (38). 

Parmelia  Kamtschadalis  (Acn.)  ESCHW.  —  HUE  Extra,  n.  222.  - 
Am.  —  On  trees. 

Parmelia  caperata  (L.)  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  127.  —  Am.  - 
On  rocks. 

Parmelia  centrifuga  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.   Scand.  p.  128.  —  Am.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb. —  On  rocks.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.    King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (48). 

Parmelia  conspersa  (£HRH.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  127. —  Am., 
Greenl.  —  On  rocks. 

Parmelia  encausta  (SMITH)  NYL.  -  -  BITTER  Hypogymn.  p.  256.  - 
Am.,  Greenl,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks. 

Parmelia  farinacea  BITTER. —BITTER  Hypogymn.  p.  199. — E.P.S.N. 
Ellesmereland,  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (21).  —  On  bark. 

Parmelia  incurva  (?ERS.)  FR.--  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  129 —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  wood  and  stones. 

Parmelia  lanata  WALLR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  126. —  Am.,  Greenl, 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  stone,  rarely  hard  wood.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland, 
Framsharbour  (15 — 17) ;  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  27),  Goose- 
fjord  (38—40,  48—50). 

Parmelia  obscurata  (Acn.)  BITTER.  —  BITTER  Hypogymn.  p.  214.  — 
Am.  —  On  rocks. 

Parmelia  olivacea  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  121. — Am.,  Greenl. 
Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Parmelia  omphalodes  (L.)  NYL.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  114. —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.— On  stone  and  over  earth. —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland, 
CapeViele(lO),  Cape  Rutherford  (14);  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38— 
41,  48). 


36  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.EXP.  FRAM 

Parmelia  physodes  (L.)  FR.  —  BITTER  Hypogymn.  p.  218.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Almost  everywhere.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Beitstads- 
fjord  (7),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (21);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (26,  32),  Goosefjord  (50). 

Parmelia  saxatilis  (L.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  114.  —  Am,. Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  wood,  stones  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (2, 3); 
Ellesmereland,  Twinglacier  Valley  (8),  Cape  Viele  (10);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (33),  Goosefjord  (48). 

Parmelia  separata  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  353.  —  Am. 
-  Over  mosses. 

Parmelia  sorediata  ACH.  — TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  123.  —  Greenl.  —  Over 
stone. 

Parmelia  stygia  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  124.  --  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord 
(27),  Goosefjord  (39,  48). 

Parmeliopsis  NYL. 

Parmeliopsis  diffusa  (WEB.)  NYL. —  TH  FR.  Scand.  p.  131. —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  dead  wood. 

Parmeliopsis  liyperopta   (Acn.)   NYL. --Tn.  FR.  Scand.  p.  120.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  dead  wood. 

Cetraria  ACH. 

Cetraria  aculeata  (SCHREB.)  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  101.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  moss.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar 
Land,  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (40,  44,  45),  Vendom  Cape  (55),  Bra- 
skerudslauen  (63):  North  Devon  (65,66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Cetraria  commixta  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  109.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  rocks. 

Cetraria  cucullata  (BELL)  ACH.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  101.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  moss.  —  E.P.S.N.  Greenland  (1); 
Ellesmereland,  Twinglacier  Valley  (8),  Cape  Rutherford  (14);  North  Lin- 
coln (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,26,27,32),  Goosefjord  (39); 
North  Kent  (64);  North  Devon  (65);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Cetraria  fahlunensis  (L.)  SCHAER.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  108.— Am,, 
Greenl..  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  rocks,  rarely  earth. 

Cetraria  glauca  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  105. —  On  trees  and 
rocks. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  37 

Cetraria  hiascens  (Fa.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  98. — Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.— Over  earth.—  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland,  Cape  Rutherford  (14), 
Framsharbour  (17).  Bedford  Pim  Island  (21);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbour- 
fjord  (26,  27,  31,  33),  Goosefjord  (38—40),  Vendom  Kap  (55);  North  Kent 
(64);  North  Devon  (66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Cetraria  islandica  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  98.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord 
(33),  Goosefjord  (40,  50),  Landsend  (58).  —  The  narrow  form  of  this  spe- 
cies, crispa  ACH.,  was  met  with  in  Greenland  (1);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (27),  Goosefjord  (38,  40). 

Cetraria  juniperina  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  104. —  Greenl  - 
Over  branches,  moss  and  rocks. —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Exkrement- 
bugten  (56). 

Cetraria  nigricans  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  100. —  Greenl.  —  Over 
earth  and  rocks. 

Cetraria  nivalis  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  102.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb,,  Icel.  —  Over  earth,  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (1),  Beit- 
stadsfjord  (7),  Twinglacier  Valley  (8),  Cape  Viele  (10),  Cape  Rutherford 
(14),  Bedford  Pim  Island  (20);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (24,  26,  32),  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (44,  45,  51),  Bra- 
skerudslauen  (63);  North  Devon  (65);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Cetraria  odontella  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  99.  —  Am.,  Greenl.  - 
On  stone. 

Cetraria  pinastri  (Scop.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  104.  —  Am.,  Greenl. 

-  Over  wood  and  stone. 

Cetraria  Richardsonii  (HooK.)  TUCK.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  306.  —  Am. 

-  Over  earth. 

Cetraria  saepincola  (EHRH.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  106.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  branches. 

Dactylina  NYL. 

Dactylina  arctica  (Hoox.)  NYL.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  286.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  — Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  Ellesmereland,  Cape  Viele 
(10),  Cape  Rutherford  (14),  Bedford  Pim  Island  (19);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (27,  33),  Goosefjord  (39). 

Dufourea,  ACH. 

Dufourea  muricata  LAUR.  —  TUCK.  N.  A.  L.  I.  p.  30  (as  Cetraria  ra- 
mulosa  HOOK.). —  Am.,  Spitsb.  —  Over  earth  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland, 
Cape  Viele  (10),  Framsharbour(15,  17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord 
(26,  33),  Goosefjord  (38—40),  Renbugten  (57);  North  Devon  (65). 


38  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Evernia,  ACH. 

Evernia  furfuracea  (L.)  ACH.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  284.  -  -  Icel.  - 
Over  branches. 

Evernia  prunastri  (L.)  ACH.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  30.  -  -  Am.  - 
Over  bark. 


Neuropogon  NEES  et  Fw. 

Neuropogon  melaxanthumNvL.—  NYL.Syn.  I.  p.  272. — Am.,  GreenL 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (50);  North  Kent  (64). 

Alectoria  ACH. 

Alectoria  nigricans  (Acn.)  NYL.  --  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  121.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  fields  and  between  moss. —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Elles- 
mereland,  Twinglacier  Valley  (8),  Gape  Viele  (10),  Framsharbour  (16), 
Cocked  Hat  Island  (18),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (21) ;  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord  (32),  Goosefjord  (39,40,44,45,48,50);  North  Kent  (64);  North 
Devon  (66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Alectoria  ochroleuca  (Acn.)  NYL.  --  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  122.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  fields  and  between  moss. — E  P.  S.N  Elles- 
mere  Land,  Beitstadfjord  (7),  Cape  Viele  (10),  Cape  Rutherford  (14), 
Framsharbour  (15—17),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (20,21);  North  Lincoln  (23); 
King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  25,  32, 33),  South  Cape  (34),  Goose- 
fjord  (39,44,45,49—51),  Braskerudslauen  (63):  North  Kent  (64);  North 
Devon  (65). 

Alectoria  sarmentosa  (Acn.)  NYL.  —  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  123.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  -  -  On  branches. 

Cornicularia  SCHREB. 

Cornicularia  tristis  (WEB.)  ACH.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  28. —  Am., 
Greenl.  --  Over  stones. 

Bryopogon  LINK. 

Bryopogon  bicolor  (£HRH.)  KBR.  —  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  126.  —  Greenl , 
Icel.  -  -  Over  mosses. 

Bryopogon  chdbybeiforme  L. —  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  129.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  Over  trees  and  branches. 


1898-1902.   No.  21]  LICHENS.  39 

Bryopogon  divergens  ACH.  -  -  STIZB.  Alect.  126.  -  -  Am.,  Greenl, 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Bryopogon  Fremontii   TUCK.  -  -  STJZB.    Alect.  p.  130.  -  -  Am.  - 
Over  trees.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framsharbour  (17);  North  Lin- 
coln (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Braskerudslauen  (63). 

Bryopogon  implexum  (HFFM.)  MASS. —  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  130.  —  Am., 
Greenl.  —  On  trees  and  branches. 

Bryopogon  nitidulun  TH.  FR.  --  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  127.  --  On  Ires 
and  branches. 

Bryopogon  prolixum  (Acn.)  MASS.  —  STIZB.  Alect.  p.  127.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  trees  and  branches.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Alexandra- 
harbour  (13);  King  Oscar  Land,  Renbugten  (57);  North  Devon  (65,  66); 
Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Ramalina  ACH. 

Ramalina  farinacea  (L.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  35.  -  -  Greenl. 

-  On  trees. 

Ramalina  fraxinea  (L.)  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  34.  —  Greenl. 

-  On  trees. 

Ramalina  minuscula  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  35.  -  -  Am.  — 
On  trees. 

Ramalina  polymorpha  ACH.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  40.  -  -  Icel.  - 
On  Rocks. 

Ramalina  scopulorum  (RETZ.)  ACH.  -  -  Th.  FR.  Scand.  p.  39.  — 
Icel.  —  On  Rocks. 

Anaptychia,  KRB. 

Anaptychia  aquila  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  134.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38).  --On  rocks  and  over  earth. 

Anaptychia  ciliaris  (L.)  KRB.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  132.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  --  On  trees. 

Physcia  SCHREB. 

Physcia  caesia  (HFFM.)  NYL.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  140.  --  Am.. 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  IceL  —  On  wood,  bones  and  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Green- 
land (2),  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (44),  Vendom 
Kap  (55);  North  Devon  (66). 

Physcia  hispida  (SCHREB.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  140.  —  Am. 
On  trees  and  wood. 


40  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Physcia  muscigena  (Acn.)  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  36.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Between  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (24,  26),  Muskoxfjord  (37),  Goosefjord  (38,  39,  41,  45,  48,  51), 
Vendom  Kap  (55);  North  Devon  (65);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Physcia  obscura  (£HRH.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  141.  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  On  trees,  rarely  on  stone.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King 
Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (42,  48). 

Physcia  pulverulenta  (SCHREB.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  136.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.  —  Over  earth  and  trees,  rarely  on  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Elles- 
mere  Land,  North  Fjord  (4),  Fort  Juliana  (6),  Twinglacier  Valley  (8), 
Lastraea  Valley  (9),  Gape  Viele  (10),  Alexandraharbour  (11),  Framshar- 
bour(15, 17),  Cocked  Hat  Island  (18),  Brevort  Island  (22);  North  Lincoln 
(23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  26—29,  31),  South  Cape  (34), 
Muskoxfjord  (36),  Goosefjord  (38—42,  44-48,50),  Vendom  Kap  (55), 
Exkrementbugten  (56),  Landsend  (58);  North  Kent  (64);  North  Devon 
65,  66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 

Physcia  stellaris  (L.)  NYL.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  138.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Icel.  --  Over  bark. 

Rinodina,  MASS. 

Rinodina  Bischoffii  (HEPP)  KRB.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  204.  — , 
E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (44).  -  -  On  stone. 

Rinodina  Conradi  KRB.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  198.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
-  Over  moss  and  dead  plants. 

Rinodina  exigua  ACH.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  201.  — Am.,  Greenl. 
Icel.  —  Over  bark,  rarely  on  stone. 

Rinodina   milvina   (WNBG.)    MASS.  -     TH.  FR.    Scand.  p.  199.  - 
Greenl.  -  -  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (42). 

Rinodina  mniaroea  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  194.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  moss  and  bark.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (39). 

Rinodina  sophodes  (Acn.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  199.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  --  On  bark. 

Rinodina  turfacea  (WNBG.)  TH.  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  195.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Over  earth.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland, 
Cape  Rutherford  (14),  Cocked  Hat  Island  (18),  Bedford  Pirn  Island  (21); 
North  Kent  (23);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (25-27,  29),  South 
Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  44,  45,  50,  51),  Vendom  Kap  (55),  Landsend 
(58);  North  Devon  (65,  66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 


1898-1902.   No.  21]  LICHENS.  41 


Dimelaena,  NORM. 

Dimelaena   nimbosa   (FR.)  TH.  FR.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  193. 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  -  -  Over  earth,  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,    Goose- 
fjord  (48). 

Dimelaena  oreina  (Acn.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  192.  —  Greenl. 

-  Over  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24). 

Buellia  DE  NOT. 

Buellia  concinna  TH.  FR.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  600.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  stone. 

Buellia  coniops  WNBG.  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  605.  -  -  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  On  stone.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38). 

Buellia  leptoclinis   (FR.)    KBR.  -  -  TH.  Fr.   Scand.  p.  598.  -  -  Icel. 

-  On  stone. 

Buellia  moriopsis  (MASS.)  TH.  F.  Scand.  p.  606.  -  -  Am..  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  --On  stone. 

Buellia   tnyriocarpa   (D.G.)  MUDD.  -  -  TH.  FR.     Scand.  p.  595.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  bark,  and  wood,  rarely  stone.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N. 
King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (54). 

Buellia  parasema  (Acn.)  KBR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  589.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  -  Over  bark,  moss  and  earth.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere 
Land,  Framsharbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24,  26,  31), 
Goosefjord  (38,  40);  North  Devon  (65). 

Buellia  Payeri  KRB.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  364.  —  Greenl. 

-  On  stone. 

Buellia  Schaereri  (DE  NOT.)    MASS.  -  -  TH.  FR.    Scand.  p.  597.  - 
Spitsb.  -  -  On  bark. 

Buellia  spuria  (SCHAER.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  605.  —  Spitsb. 

-  On  stone. 

Buellia  stellulata  (TAYL  )  BR.  ET  ROSTR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  603.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  --  On  stone. 

Buellia  triphragmoides  ANZI.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  594  —  Greenl. 

-  On  bark. 

Buellia  vilis  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  599.  —  Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel. 
—  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38). 


42  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Thelocarpon  NYL. 

Thelocarpon  epibolum  NYL.  —  Hue  Add.  no.  1635.  --  Greenl.  - 
On  Solorina  crocea. 

Acarospora  MASS. 

Acarospora  badiofusca  NYL.  -  TH.  Fr.  Scand.  p.  211.  Greenl.  — 
On  stone. 

Acarospora  chlorophana  (WNBG.)  MASS.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  208. 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellemereland,  Frams- 
harbour  (16). 

Acarospora  fuscata  (SCHBAD.)  TH.  FR.  -     TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  215.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb. —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (39). 

Acarospora  glaucocarpa  (WNBG.)  KBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  211.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone. 

Acarospora  molybdina  (WNBG.)  MASS.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  209.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  --On  stone. 

Acarospora    Schleicheri  ACH.  -      TUCK.    N.  A.  L.    I.   p.  202.  - 
Greenl.  —  Over  earth. 


Cyan  ophi'Iiales. 
Lichina  AG. 

Lichina  confinis  (Sw.)  Ac.  -     TUCK.  N.  A.  L.    I.  p.  133.  -  -  Icel. 
On  stone. 

Ephebe  FR. 

Ephebe  pubescens  FR.  -  TUCK.  N.  A.  L.  I.  p.  132.  --  Greenl., 
Icel.  -  -  Over  rocks. 

Polychidium  ACH. 

Polychidium  muscicolum  (Sw.)  MASS.  -     TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  284.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel,  --  Over  moss. 

Placynthium  ACH. 

Placynthium  asperellum  WNBG.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  286.  —  Am , 
Spitsb.  --  On  stone. 

Placynthium  nigrum  ACH.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  285.  -  -  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  rocks,  very  rarely  over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 


1898-1902.    No.  21]  LICHENS.  43 

Harbourfjord  (24,  26—28),  Goosefjord  (38,  40-42,  51),  Vendom  Kap  (55); 
North  Devon  (66). 

Pannaria  DEL. 

Pannaria  arctophila  TH.  FR.  -     TH.  FB.  Spitsb.  p.  17.  —  Spitsb. 

Pannaria  brunnea  (Sw.)  MASS  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  77.  -  -  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  moss  and  roots  of  trees. 

Pannaria  elaeina  WNBG.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  73.  —  Icel.  -  -  Over 
stone. 

Pannaria  Hookeri  (Sw.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  73.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Over  dead  moss,  on  stones. 

Pannaria  lanuginosa  ACH.  -     TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  79.  —  Greenl.  - 
On  rocks. 

Pannaria  lepidiota  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  74.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Over  mosses. 

Pannaria  microphylla  (Sw.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  75  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  -  -  On  rocks  and  walls.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord (33). 

Pannaria  rubiginosa   (THUNB.)   D.G.  -     TH.  FR.    Arct.  p.  72.  - 
E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framsharbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Har- 
bourfjord (27),  Goosefjord  (40).  —  Over  rocks  and  trunks. 

Pannaria  triptophylla  (Acn.)  MASS.  -  -  TH.  FR.     Arcct.  p.  76.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  bark. 

Massalongia  KRB. 

Massalongia  carnosa  (Dicxs.)  KRB.  —  TUCK.  N.  A.  L.  I.  p.  122.  - 
Arn.  --  Over  rocks  among  mosses. 

Psoroma  NYL. 

Psoroma  hypnorum  (VAHL.)  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  232  —  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  moss  and  earth.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Os- 
car Land,  Goosefjord  (39,  41,  49). 

Sticta  ACH. 

Sticta  linita  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  12.  -  Spitsb.  -  *  Be- 
tween moss. 

Sticta   pulmonaria   (DORST.)    SCHAER.  --  STIZB.    Stict.   p.  112.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  Over  trees  and  rocks. 


44                                          OTTO  V.  DARBISH1RE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Stictina  NYL. 

Stictina  scrobiculata  (Scop.)  NYL.—  STIZB.  Stict.  p.  126. —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  trees  and  rocks. 


Ricasolia  DE  NOT. 

Ricasolia   glomulifera    (LIGHTFT.)   NYL.  —  STIZB.  p.  110.  -  -  Am. 
Trunks  and  rocks. 

Peltidea  ACH. 

Peltidea  aphthosa  (L.)  HFFM.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  43.  -  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  damp  earth.  --  E.P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3); 
Ellesmere  Land,  Beitstadfjord  (7),  Alexandraharbour  (11, 13),  Cape  Ruth- 
erford (14),  Framsharbour  (17);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (32),  Goosefjord  (38—41,  49,  50),  Renbugten  (57),  Hyperit- 
odden  (60). 

Peltidea  venosa  (L.)  HFFM.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  47.  -  -  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  -  -  Over  earth.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (38). 

Peltigera  HFFM. 

Peltigera  canina  (L.)  SCHAER.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  44.  --  Am., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  earth.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  Greenland  (3);  Elles- 
mere Land,  Framsharbour  (17);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24), 
Goosefjord  (39),  Landsend  (58);  North  Devon  (65). 

Peltigera  horizontalis  (L.)  HFFM.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  47.  —  Greenl. 
-  On  mossy  stone. 

Peltigera  malacea  (Acn.)  FR.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  44.  --  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Iceland.  —  Over  damp  earth.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (24). 

Peltigera  polydactyla   (NECK.)    HFFM.  -     TH.  FR.     Arct.  p.  46.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Between  rnoss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Alex- 
andraharbour (12);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24). 

Peltigera   rufescens   (NECK.)    HOFFM.          TH.  FR.     Arct.  p.  45.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Spitsb.  -  -  Between  moss,  on  earth.  -  -  E.  P.  S.  N.  King 
Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (39,  40,  51),  Vendom  Kap  (55) ; 
North  Kent  (64). 

Peltigera  scabrosa  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  45.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  Over  earth  and  moss.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (41). 


1898-1902.   No.  2lJ  LICHENS.  45 

Solorina,  ACH. 

Solorina  bispora  NYL.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  331.  —  Greenl.,  Icel.  - 
Over  earth. 

Solorina  crocea  (L.)  ACH.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  329.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  earth.  --  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Hyperit- 
odden  (60). 

Solorina  saccata  (L.)  ACH.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  330.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  --  Over  earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmere  Land,  Fort  Juliana 
(6),  Gape  Rutherford  (14);  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord  (26,  31), 
Muskoxfjord  (36),  Goosefjord  (38,  40,  41),  Exkrementbugten  (56);  North 
Devon  (65). 

Nephroma,  HFFM. 

Nephroma  arcticum  (L.)  FR.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  316.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  -  -  Over  moss,  lichens  and  trunks. 

Nephroma  expallidum  NYL. — NYL.  Syii.  I.  p.  318.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  dead  wood. 


Nephromium  NYL. 

Nephromium  helveticum  ACH.  --  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  319.  --  Am.  - 
On  branches. 

Nephromium  laevigatum  ACH.  -  -  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  320.  —  Icel.  - 
Nephromium  papyraceum  HFFM.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  320.  —  Greenl. 

—  On  branches. 

Nephromium  lomentosum  KBR.  -  -  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  319.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  --  Over  branches. 

Arctomia  TH.  FR. 

Arctomia   delicatula  TH.  FR.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  287.  --  Spitsb., 
Icel.  -  -  Over  moss. 

Leciophysma,  TH.  Fr. 

Leciophysma  finmarckicum    TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.      Spitsb.  p.  52. 

—  Spitsb.  -  -  Between  moss. 


Collema,  HFFM. 

Collema  aggregatum  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.    Arct.  p.  280.  — 
E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,    Goosefjord  (40).  —  Over  trees  and  moss. 


46  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Collema  ceranoides  (BoRR.)  MUDD.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  52.  —  Spitsb. 
—  Over  moss  and  earth. 

Collema  crispun  L.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  276.  —  Icel.  —  Over  earth, 
and  moss. 

Collema  flaccidum  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  281.  — Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  stone. 

Collema  melaenum  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p  277.  —  Greenl.,  Spitsb. 

—  Over  rocks. 

Collema  nigrescens  (Huns.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  280.  —  Green!., 
Icel.  —  On  trees. 

Collema  plicatile  ACH.  —  NYL.  Syn.  L  p.  109.—  Greenl.  —  On  rocks. 

Collema  pulposum  (BERNH.)  NYL.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  277.  —  Am. 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Collema  verrucaeforme  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arc.  p.  279.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 
-  Over  moss. 

Leptogium  KBR. 

Leptogium  lacerum  (Sw.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  282.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Between  moss  on  rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbour- 
fjord  (24),  Goosefjord  (34,  39),  Vendom  Kap  (55);  North  Devon  (66). 

Leptogium  saturninum  (DICKS.)  TH.  FR.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  282.  - 
Am.,    Greenl.  --  Over  bark  and   rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land, 
Harbourfjord  (31),  Goosefjord  (38,  39). 

Leptogium  Schraderi  (BERNH.)  NYL.  —  NYL.  Syn.  I.  p.  133.  —  Am. 

—  On  rocks. 

Leptogium  scotinum  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  283.  —  Spitsb.,  Icel.— 
Over  moss  and  stone. 

Leptogium  tenuissimum  ACH.  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  283.  --  Spitsb. 
—  Over  moss. 

Leptogium  tetrasporum  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  367.— 
Am.  —  Over  earth. 

Pyrenopsis  NYL. 

Pyrenopsis  haematops  (SMRFT.)  TH.  FR.  —  FORSS.  Gloeol.  p.  51.  — 
Greenl.  —  Over  rocks. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  47 


Pyren  ocarpi. 
Verrucaria,  PERS. 

Verrucctria  aethiobola  WNBG.  --  NYL.  Scand.  p.  272.  —  Green).  - 
Over  rocks. 

Verrucaria  ceuthocarpa  WNBG.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  269.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  On  rocks. 

Verrucaria  epigaea  ACH.  —  Leight.  Ang.  p.  64.  —  Greenl.  —  Over 
earth.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (45). 

Verrucaria  extrema  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.   Spitsb.    50.  -  -  Spitsb.  - 
On  stone. 

Verrucaria  margacea  WNBG.  -    TH.  FR.    Arct.  p.  269.  —  Spitsb. 
Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Verrucaria  maura  (VAHL)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  268.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Verrucaria  mucosa  WNBG.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  269.  —  Greenl.,  Icel. 

—  On  rocks. 

Verrucaria  nigrescens  PERS.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  267.  —  Icel.  —  On 
rocks.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (42). 

Verrucaria  phaeothelena  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Ex.  p.  366.  — 
Am.  —  On  stone. 

Verrucaria   rejecta    TH.  FR.  -    TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  50.  —  Spitsb.  - 
On  stone. 

Verrucaria   rupestris  SCHRAD.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  271.  —  Grqenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Verrucaria  striatula  WNBG.--  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  267. —  Spitsb.  - 
On  'stone. 

Verrucaria  umbrina   ACH.  —  LEIGHT.  Ang.  p.  52.  —  Greenl.  —  On 
stone. 

Polyblastia  MASS. 

PolyUastia  bryophila  LONNR.  —  TH.  FK.  Poly.  p.  18.  —  Am.,  Spitsb. 

—  Over  moss  and  earth. 

Polyblastia  gelatinosa  (Acn.)   TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.   Poly,  p.  17.  - 
Spitsb.  —  Over  dead  moss. 

PolyUastia  gothica  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  25. — Spitsb. —  Over 
dead  moss. 

PolyUastia  helvetica  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  48.  —  Spitsb.  - 
Over  moss. 


48  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FKAM 

Polyblastia  Hentscheliana  (KRB.)  LONNR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  11.  - 
Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Polyblastia  intercedens  (NYL.)  LONNR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  20.  —  Am ., 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord 
(39,  40). 

Polyblastia  intermedia  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  24.  —  Greenl.  — 
Over  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38,  40). 

Polyblastia pseudomyces  NORM.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  26.  —  Greenl.  — 
Over  stone  and  tree  trunks. 

Polyblastia  Sendtneri  KRPHBR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  19.  — Greenl.  - 
Over  moss. 

Polyblastia  sepulta  MASS.  --  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  21.  —  Spitsb.  — Over 
stone. 

Polyblastia  theleodes  (SMFRT.)  TH.FR.— TH. FR.  Poly.  p.  10.—  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  Over  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (38). 

Thelidium  MASS. 

Thelidium  pyrenophorum  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Spitsb.  p.  49.  — Spitsb.— 
On  stone.— E. P. S.N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 

Ttielidiumpctpulare  (FR.)  NYL.  —  Zahlbr.  in  E.  &  P.  p.  56.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone.  —  E.  P.  S.  N.  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (42). 

Staurothele  NORM. 

Staurothele  clopima  (\VNBG.)  TH.  FR.  -  -  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  263.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  On  stone. 

Microglaena  LONNR. 

Microglanea  sordidula  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Exp.  p.  366.  - 
Am.  —  On  stone. 

Microglaena sphinctrinoides  (NYL.)  TH.  FR.  — TH.FR.  Arct. p. 261.  - 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel. —  On  moss  over  rocks. 

Microthelia  KRB. 

Microthelia  melanostigma  TH.  FR.  — TH.FR.  Engl.  Pol.  Ex.  p.  368.- 
Am.  —  On  stone. 

Microthelia  micula  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  274.  —  Icel.  —  On  birch 
bark. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  49 

Arthopyrenia  MASS. 

Arthopyrenia  analepta   (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.   Arct.  p.  272.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Arthopyrenia  grisea  (SCHLEICH.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  272.  - 
Greenl.,  Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Arthopyrenia  kentrospora  BRANTH.  —  BR.  Groenl.  p.  511.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  On  bark. 

Leptorhaphis  KRB. 

Leptorhaphis  epidermidis  (Acn.)  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  273.  - 
Greenl.  —  On  bark. 


Segestria  FR. 

Segestria  mammillosa  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  262.  — Greenl. — 
On  stone. 

Normandina  NYL. 

Normandina  viridis  (Acn.)  NYL.  --  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  256.  —  Greenl. 
-  Over  earth. 

Dermatocarpon  ESCHW. 

Dermatocarpon  botularium  NYL.  —  BR.  Groenl.  p.  509.  —  Greenl.  — 
On  stone. 

Dermatocarpon  cinereum  (PERS.)  TH.  FR. —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  256.— 
Greenl.,  Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth. 

Dermatocarpon  daedaleum   KRPHLHR.  —  TH.  FR.    Arct.  p.  255.  — 
Greenl.  —  Over  moss. 

Dermatocarpon  hepaticum  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  255.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  moss. 

Dermatocarpon  miniatum  (L.)  SCHAER.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  253.  - 
Am.,  Greenl.,  Icel.,  —  Over  rocks. 

Dermatocarpon  rufescens  ACH.  -    TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  254.  —  Greenl., 
Icel.  —  Over  moss  between  rocks. 


Endocai'pon  HEDW. 

Endocarpon  pulvinatum  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  257.  —  Greenl., 
Spitsb.  —  On  rocks. 


50  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Thamnolia,  ACH. 

Thamnolia  vermicularis  ACH. —  TH.  FR.  Arct.  p.  161.  —  Am.,  Greenl., 
Spitsb.,  Icel.  —  Over  earth  and  between  moss.  — E.  P.  S.  N.  Ellesmereland, 
North  Fjord  (4),  Beitstadsfjord  (7);  North  Lincoln  (23);  King  Oscar  Land, 
Ilarbourfjord  (24—27,  32,  33),  South  Cape  (34),  Goosefjord  (38— 41 ,  44— 
47,  49—51),  Vendom  Kap  (55),  Exkrementbugten  (56),  Renbugten  (57), 
Landsend  (58),  Braskerudslauen  (63);  North  Kent  (64);  North  Devon  (65, 
66);  Cardigan  Straits  (67). 


Appendix  to  systematic  list:    Parasites. 

The  following  parasitic  Fungi  have  been  found  among  the  lichens 
of  the  Norwegian  Expedition  and  I  may  add  that  I  have  not  in  this 
case  included  any  parasites  or  so-called  Pseudo-Lichens  recorded  for  the 
regions  under  consideration  by  other  authors. 

Sphinctrina  turbinata  PERS.,  on  Pertusaria  subobducens  NYL.  - 
King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (50). 

Tichothecium  pygmaeum  KBR.,  on  Lecidea  sp.,  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (38) ;  on  Lecidea  purissima  DARBISH.,  King  Oscar  Land,  Goose- 
fjord  (42),  Vendom  Kap  (55);  on  Lecanora  polytropa,  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (39). 

Tichothecium  gemmifer  TAYL.,  on  Aspicilia  sp.,  King  Oscar  Land, 
Goosefjord  (40);  on  Placodium  elegans,  King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (48). 

Discothecium  stigma  (KRBR.)  ZOPF,  on  Lecidea  purissima  DARBISH., 
King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord  (39). 


l888-1902.No.il.]  LICHENS.  51 


Notes  on  the  systematic  list. 


The  foregoing  list  shows  that  the  district,  which  includes  Arctic 
America,  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland,  has  about  500  lichens  re- 
corded for  it.  I  have  no  doubt  that  more  will  still  be  found.  My  in- 
clusion of  the  lichens  of  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland  in  a  list 
of  those  brought  back  by  the  Second  Norwegian  Expedition  to  Arctic 
America  is,  I  consider  justified.  The  enumeration  of  lichens  given  above 
will  thus  give  us  a  fairly  complete  picture  of  the  lichen-vegetation  of 
Ellesmere  Land  and  King  Oscar  Land. 

To  show  in  what  relation  the  lichen-floras  of  these  four  districts 
stand  to  one  another  I  have  compiled  a  few  statistical  notes,  comparing 
the  lichens  found  in  Arctic  America,  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland. 

This  list  enumerates  a  total  of  495  arctic  lichens.  Of  these  there 
have  been  recorded  for 

Arctic  America 253  or  51.1  °/o 

Greenland 338  or  68.2  - 

Spitsbergen 206  or  41.6  - 

Iceland 254  or  51.3  - 

It  must  be  mentioned  also  that  of  this  total  of  495  lichens  we  have 
recorded  as  occurring  in 

Arctic  America  only  ....  57  or  11.5  °/0  species 

Greenland  only       .     .     ...  77  or  15.5  - 

Spitsbergen  only     .     .     .     .     .  33  or     6.6  - 

Iceland  only 37  or     7.4  - 

Only  84  or  16.9  %  of  the  total  of  495  lichens  are  found  to  be  com- 
mon to  Arctic  America,  Greenland,  Spitsbergen  and  Iceland.  204  or 
41.2°/0  of  the  total  are  confined  to  one  only  of  the  four  districts.  It 
would  have  been  possible  and  very  interesting  to  compare  with  this  the 
lichens  of  Alaska  or  the  temperate  parts  of  America,  but  I  have  rather, 


OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


lower  down,  taken  Germany  and  the  Tirol  as   objects    for    comparison. 
To  this  matter  I  will  refer  directly. 

On  a  former    occasion,   in  discussing  the  lichen-flora  of  Greenland, 
I  pointed  out  the  remarkable  likeness  of  the  flora  of  Greenland  to  that 
of    Germany.     Of  286   lichens  recorded   for  Greenland  up  to  that  date, 
namely  1897.  213  occured  in  Germany.     Of  these 
105  or  49.4  °/0  were  purely  alpine, 
11  or    5.1    -    preferred  alpine  situations, 
97  or  45       -    were  common  to  the  hill  and  the  plain. 

That  is  to  say  of  the  Greenland  species  found  in  Germany  54.5  % 
were  found  to  be  mainly  alpine,  but  all  practically  had  been  recorded 
from  the  hills.  Another  point  of  interest  was  referred  to  in  the  paper 
on  Greenland  lichens.  Of  the  171  crustaceous  lichens  recorded  from 
Greenland  110  or  64.3  %  were  recorded  from  Germany,  of  the  foliace- 
ous  lichens  60  or  85.7  %,  and  of  the  fruticulose  lichens  34  or  94.4  %. 

These  figures  were  explained  by  reference  to  the  advance  and  the 
final  retreat  of  the  ice  after  the  last  ice-age.  During  the  greatest  ex- 
tension of  the  ice  in  the  ice-age  Ihe  lichens  would  be  pushed  well  to  the 
south  and  into  the  plains.  When  the  ice  retreated  however  they  would 
pass  up  to  the  north  and  into  the  hills,  into  the  colder  zones  and 
regions.  The  warmer  strips  of  land  intervening  would  then  separate 
the  alpine  and  the  northern  lichen-floras. 

The  oldest  forms,  the  fruticulose  lichens,  would  go  back  to  the  times 
when  the  alpine  and  northern  floras  were  still  united.  We  find  there- 
fore that  94.4  %  of  the  Greenland  fruticulose  lichens  are  found  in  Ger- 
many, of  which  however  not  a  few  are  found  in  the  plains.  Of  the  less 
highly  differentiated  crustaceous  lichens  which  must  be  considered  to  be 
of  more  recent  development  only  64.3  %  are  common  to  Germany  and 
Greenland.  I  would  like  to  say  that  I  consider  it  not  unlikely  that  a 
number  of  these  crustaceous  species  are  really  species  alike  in  their  ex- 
ternal morphology  only  and  that  they  are  not  really  related  to  one 
another  otherwise.  We  may  call  a  Greenland  plant  by  the  same  name 
as  the  German  one,  and  as  far  as  we  are  able  to  judge  we  may  be 
justified  in  so  doing.  At  the  some  time  the  two  plants  may  have  been 
separately  derived  though  from  some  common  ancestor.  Some  of  the 
higher  fruticulose  species  seem  never  to  vary,  whereas  the  variations 
among  the  simpler  crustaceous  species  are  at  the  best  most  puzzling  and 
of  frequent  occurrence. 

The  following  tables  are  based  on  the  list  of  495  lichens  enumerated 
above.  They  confirm  the  views  already  expressed: 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  53 

Fruticulose  Foliaceous  Crustaceous  Total 

species  species  species 

Arctic  Area.  .  .          61  91  343  495 

Germany  &  Tirol  54  or  88.5%  76  or  83.5%    254  or  74%  384  or  77.6% 

Germany  ....          51  67  213  331  or  66.8  - 

Tirol 52  or  85.2%  71  or  78%    235  or  68.4%  358  or  72.3  - 

(of  which  not  in 

Germany  ...  3  9  41  53) 

We  see  therefore  that  the  fruticulose  lichens  to  the  amount  of  88.5  % 
of  those  recorded  for  the  arctic  area  occur  in  Germany  and  the  Tirol, 
83.5  %  of  the  foliaceous  and  74  %  of  the  crustaceous  lichens.  But  most 
remarkable  to  my  mind  is  the  figure  72.3  which  represents  the  percent- 
age of  Arctic  lichens  found  in  the  Tirol.  With  infinite  care  this  area 
has  recently  been  worked  through  by  ARNOLD  more  completely  prob- 
ably than  any  other  area  in  the  world  as  far  as  lichens  are  concerned.  It 
is  interesting  therefore  and  of  no  little  importance  to  find  that  nearly 
3/4ths  of  the  arctic  lichens  are  recorded  from  the  Tirol.  Of  the  fruticu- 
lose species  85.2  %,  of  the  foliaceous  species  78  %and  of  the  crustaceous 
species  68.4  %  of  the  arctic  lichens  are  found  in  the  Tirol.  ARNOLD  re- 
cords 1137  species  for  the  Tirol. 

There  is  not  as  a  rule  very  much  doubt  as  to  the  naming  of  the 
fruticulose  or  foliose  lichens,  but  before  the  distribution  of  the  crusta- 
ceous lichens  can  be  considered  a  more  settled  matter,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  work  through  some  of  the  genera,  like  Lecidea,  Lecanora, 
Verrucaria,  Aspicilia  and  Polyblastia  monographically.  A  carefull 
monograph — developemental,  anatomical  and  even  histological — of  a 
genus  like  Lecidea  would  be  of  the  greatest  interest  botanically  and 
geographically.  But  it  would  be  essential  that  specimens  from  all  over 
the  world  were  examined. 


54  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


List  of  Localities  of  the  Swedish  Expedition. 

1.   Greenland:    Egedismiude  (116,  117): 

On  earth  in  fairly  pure  formations:  Cetraria  cucullata,  islandica 
(passing  into  f.  crispa),  nivalis. 

•2.   Greenland  (Foulketjord) :  Reindeerpoint  (122,  123,  124): 

On  stones:  Lecidea  auriculata;  Rhizocarpon  gfeminatum,  geo- 
graphicum:  Gyrophora  hirsuta,  hyperborea;  Xanthoria  lychnea:  Pla- 
codium  elegans;  Lecanora  polytropa;  Aspicilia  calcarea;  Parmelia 
alpicola,  saxatilis:  Physcia  caesia. 

3.   Greenland:  Foulkefjord  (435-437;  1407;  1559-1561): 
Over   earth:     Lopadium  fuscoluteum;    Stereocaulon  alpinum; 

Cladonia  pyxidata;  Pertusaria  dactylina:  Parmelia  saxatilis :  Pelti- 

dea  aphthosa. 

Between  moss:    Dactylina  arctica :  Peltigera  canina. 
Overstone:  Rhizocarpon  geminatmn :  Neuropogon  melaxanthum. 

4.  Ellesmere  Land:   Mouth  of  IVordfjord  (527): 

Over  moss  and  earth:  Physcia  pulverulenta :  Thamnolia  ver- 
micularis. 

5.  Ellesmere  Land:   Fort  Juliana  (509—514): 

On  stone:    Rhizocarpon  geographicum ;  Placodium  elegans. 
On  Salix  arctica:   Xanthoria  lychnea. 

6.   Ellesmere  Land:  Between  Fort  Juliana  and  Mt.  Kola  Paalsen 

(565—567): 
Over  moss:    Physcia  pulverulenta;  Solorina  saccata. 

1.   Ellesmere  Land:    Beitstadsfjord  (573;  574;  588— 594;  642;  643): 
Over  earth:    Bilimbia  microcarpa;    Cladonia  pyxidata ;  Squa- 
tnaria  fulgens:  Parmelia  physodes;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  55 

Over  earth  and  between  moss:  Stereocaulon  paschale;  Ce- 
traria  nivalis:  Alectoria  ochroleuca. 

Over  moss:    Lecanora  epibryon. 

Between  Cassiope  tetragona:    Peltidea  aphthosa. 

On  stone:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographicum ;  Oyrophora 
erosa;  Placodium  elegans. 

8.   Ellesmere  Land :  Twin  Glacier  Valley  (955—957) : 
Over  earth:    Stereocaulon  paschale;   Placodium  elegans;    Par- 
Amelia  saxatilis;  Alectoria  nigricans:  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

Over  earth  and  between  moss:     Cetraria  cucullata,   nivalis. 

9.     Ellesmere  Land:  Lastraea  Thai  (938-940;  983). 
Over  and  between  moss:    Physcia  pulverulenta. 
On  stone:   Stereocaulon  evolutum:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum. 

10.   Ellesmere  Land:   Cape  Viele  (904-907;  910;  911;  1430; 

1431;  1838): 

Over  earth:  Sphaerophoron  coralloides;  Cladonia  pyxidata : 
Squamaria  fulgens;  Parmelia  omphalodes,  saxatilis. 

Over  earth  and  moss:  Pertusaria  subobducens ;  Physcia  pul- 
verulenta. 

Over  earth  and  between  moss:    Dufourea  muricata. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  nivalis:  Dactylina  arctica:  Alectoria 
nigricans,  ochroleuca. 

11.   Ellesmere  Land:   Eskimopolis,  between  Eskimo  Ruins 

(1046—1049): 

B'etween  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum,  paschale:  Physcia  pul- 
verulenta; Peltidea  aphthosa. 

12.   Ellesmere  Land:   Alexandra  Harbour  (1010): 
Between  moss,  near  a  brook:    Peltigera  polydactyla. 

13.   Ellesmere    Land:  Alexandra  Harbour,  Eskimo  Island 

(1452-1455): 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  paschale;  Bryopogon  prolixum; 
Peltidea  aphlhosa. 

14.   Ellesmere  Land:    Cape  Rutherford  (296;  460—463;  661-663; 

784;  785;  809;  810;  1145): 

Over  earth:  Placodium  splendens ;  Cetraria  cucullata,  hiascens, 
nivalis. 


56  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Over  moss:  Lecanora  epibryon;  Rinodina  turfacea;  Solorina 
saccata. 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum :  Parmelia  omphalodes ; 
Dactylina  arctica:  Alectoria  ochroleuca;  Peltidea  aphthosa. 

On  stone:    Stereocaulon  paschale:  Placodium  splendens. 

15.   Ellesmere  Land:   Framshavn  (166;  350;  351;  1837): 

Over  earth:    Alectoria  ochroleuca. 

Between  moss:    Dufourea  muricata;  Physcia  pulverulenta. 
On    stone:     Rhizocarpon  geminatum:    Gyrophora   anthracina, 
hyperborea;  Lecanora  polytropa;  Parmelia  lanata. 

16.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framshavn,  South  Side  (637;  639;  1230—1233): 

Over  earth:  Squamaria  fulgens;  Alectoria  nigricans,  ochro- 
leuca. 

Over  earth,  between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum:  Cladonia 
pyxidata. 

On  stone:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographicum ;  Gyalolechia 
subsimilis;  Parmelia  lanata;  Acarospora  chlorophana. 

17.  Ellesmere  Land,  Framshavn,  North  Side  (458;  459;  595;  596; 

757-763;  1111-1113;  1143;  1144): 

Over  earth:  Cladonia  chlorophaea:  Pertusaria panyrga ;  Can- 
delaria  concolor:  Alectoria  ochroleuca;  Phijscia  pulverulenta;  Pelti- 
dea aphthosa. 

Over  moss:  Lopadium  fuscoluteum;  Cladonia  pyxidata :  Pertu- 
saria subobducens;  Lecanora  epibryon;  Buellia  parasema. 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum;  Cetraria  hiascens; 
Dufourea  muricata;  Bryopogon  Fremontii;  Peltigera  canina. 

On  stone:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum;  Gyrophora  arctica,  cylin- 
drica,  erosa,  hyperborea;  Lecanora  polytropa;  Parmelia  lanata: 
Pannaria  rubiginosa. 

18.   Ellesmere  Land,  Cocked  Hat  Island  (1288—1293): 

Over  earth:    Cladonia  pyxidata:  Placodium  splendens;    Leca- 
nora epibryon:  Alectoria  nigricans;  Rinodina  turfacea. 
Between  moss:    Physcia  pulverulenta. 
Over  moss:    Placodium  splendens. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  -",7 

19.   Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island,  Coast  on  Rice  Straits 

(467;  474;  1244;  1245;  1284;  1335-1340;  1360); 

Over  earth:    Cladonia pyxidata. 

Over  moss:  Lecidea  assimilata ;  Biatora  Diapensiae ;  Lecanora 
epibryon. 

Between  moss:    Stereocaulon  alpinum:  Dactylina  arctica. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  macrocarpa,  purissima;  Gyrophora  anthra- 
cina:  Stereocaulon  coralloides,  paschale:  Gyalolechia  subsimilis ; 
Aspicilia  mastrucata. 

20.   Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island,  near  Cape  Sabine 

(163;  365-369): 

Over  earth:    Cetraria  nivalis;  Alectoria  ochroleuca. 
Over  moss:    Pertusaria  subobducens. 
On  stone:    Gyrophora  anthracina,  hirsuta. 

21.   Ellesmere  Land,  Bedford  Pirn  Island,  South  Side 

(1166;  1167;  1178): 

Over  earth:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Parmelia  farinacea,  physo- 
des;  Cetraria  hiascens:  Alectoria  nigricans,  ochroleuca;  Rinodina 
turfacea. 

Over  earth  and  moss:    Lecanora  epibryon. 

22.   Ellesmere  Land,  Brevort  Island  (484-486;  1225): 

Over  earth:    Physcia  pulverulenta. 
On  stone:    Gyrophora  anthracina. 

23.   North  Lincoln,  Framfjord  (1673;  1715—1724;  1763): 

Over  earth:  Cladonia  pyxidata;  Pionospora  glomerata;  Pla- 
codium  splendens;  Squamaria  fulgens ;  Parmelia  physodes;  Rino- 
dina turfacea;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Pertusaria  subobducens;  Lecanora  epibryon;  Phys- 
cia pulverulenta. 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum;  Cetraria  cucullata,  ni- 
valis :  Alectoria  ochroleuca  :  Bryopogon  Fremontii :  Peltidea  aphthosa. 

On  musk  ox  dung:  Caloplaca  pyracea:  Rinodina  turf acea : 
Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone:    Gyrophora  anthracina;  Placodium  elegans. 


58  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

24.   King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  "grimer  Fleck"  (1831—1855; 

1870-1878;  1948;  1949;  1957—1974;  1977;    1986—1988;  1993-2005; 

2022-2026;  2113;  2129): 

Over  dead  plants:  Pionospora  glomerata ;  Pertusaria panyrga. 

Over  earth:  Thalloidima  vesiculare;  Candelaria  concolor :  Ce- 
traria  cucullata,  nivalis  (between  Dry  as  octopelala);  Alectoria  ochro- 
leuca:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Stereocaulon  paschale;  Cladonia  pyxidata;  Ochro- 
lechia  pallescens;  Lecanora  epibryon:  Physcia  pulverulenta ;  Buellia 
parasema. 

Between  moss:  Physcia  muscigena :  Peltigera  canina,  malacea, 
polydactyla,  rufescens;  Leptogium  lacerum. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  confluens,  fuscoatra,  purissima;  Catillaria 
sanguinea:  Sporastatia  testudinea;  Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geo~ 
graphicum;  Gyrophora  hirsuta:  Xanthoria  lychnea,  parietina;  Pla- 
codium  elegans;  Caloplaca  citrina:  Squamaria  chrysoleuca  (v.  me- 
lanophthalma) :  Lecanora  polytropa;  Aspicilia  calcarea,  gibbosa: 
Parmelia  lanata:  Physcia  caesia,  obscura;  Dimelaena  oreina;  Pla- 
cynthium  nigrum. 

25.   King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  Stordalen  (2364;  2057 
(subfossil  shells  with  sterile  lichen);  2088): 

Over  earth:   Rinodina  turfacea;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 
Over  earth  and  dead  plants:    Pertusaria  subobducens. 
Over  earth  and  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata]  Lecanora  epibryon; 
Alectoria  ochroleuca. 

26.   King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  to  east  of  harbour  2006— 
2013;  2031—2033;  2076;  2214;  2215): 

Over  dead  plants:    Buellia  parasema. 

Over  earth:  Thalloidima  vesiculare;  Psora  decipiens :  Ochro- 
lechia  tartarea:  Parmelia  physodes:  Cetraria  cucullata,  hiascens: 
Dufourea  muricata:  Solorina  saccata:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Ochrolechia  upsaliensis:  Le- 
canora epibryon:  Aspicilia  verrucosa:  Physcia  muscigena,  pulveru- 
lenta: Rinodina  turfacea:  Buellia  parasema. 

Between  moss:    Cetraria  nivalis. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  elaeochroma,  purissima:  Sporastatia  testu- 
dinea: Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographiam:  Placynthium  nigrum. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  59 

27.    King  Oscar  Land,  Harbonrfjord,  slope  on  western  sound 

(2346—2350;  2485—2487;  2489;  2504—2507): 

Over  moss:    Cladonia  pyxidata :  Rinodina  turfacea. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  cucullata,  hiascens,  islandica  (f.  cri- 
spa) :  Dactylina  arctica:  Physcia  pulverulenta:  Thamnolia  vermi- 
cularis. 

Over  stone:  Sporastatia  testudinea:  Catocarpon  badioatrum: 
Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographicum ;  Gyrophora  anthracina, 
cylindrica,  hyperborea,  proboscidea:  Stereocaulon  paschale:  Placo- 
dium  elegans:  Aspicilia  gibbosa:  Parmelia  lanata,  stygia:  Placyn- 
thiimi  nigrum:  Pannaria  rubiginosa. 

28.    King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  Spadepoint  (2420— 2423; 

2571;  2602-6206): 

Over  earth:  Thalloidima  vesiculare:  Psora  decipiens :  Gloeo- 
liclien  sp.  —  but  with  no  apothecia. 

Over  moss:  Stereocaulon  paschale:  Cladonia  pyxidata :  Per- 
tusaria  subobducens:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  elata,  speirea :  Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geo- 
graphicum: Placodium  elegans,  murorum:  Placynthium  nigrum. 

29.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  between  Spadepoint  and 

Masberg  (2612,  2613): 

Over  dead  plants:    Rinodina  turfacea. 

Over  earth:    Cladonia  pyxidata:  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Ochrolechia  tartarea:  Leca- 
nora epibryon. 

30.   King  Oscar  Land,  Harbourfjord,  south  of  Spade  point 

(2479): 
Over  Silene  acaulis:    Caloplaca  pyracea. 

31.   King  Oscar  Land.  Harbourfjord,  South  side  of  Harbour 

(1792—1797): 

Over  dead  plants:    Buellia  parasema. 
Over  earth:    Solorina  saccata. 

Over  moss:  Stereocaulon  paschale:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Phys- 
cia pulverulenta. 

Between  moss:    Cetraria  hiascens:  Leptogium  saturninum. 


60  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

32.   King  Oscar  Land,  Harboiirfjord,  Oededalerne  (2471) : 

Over  earth:  Parmelia  physodes:  Cetraria  cucullata,  nivalis: 
Alectorianigricans,  ochrolenca:  Peltidea  aphthosa :  Thamnolia  vermi- 
cularis. 

Over  moss  and  earth:    Lecidea  ramulosa. 

33.  King  Oscar  Land,  Harboiirfjord,  Valley  on  Sir  Inglis  Peak 

(2181;  2182;  2308;  2314,  2315,  2324): 

Over  earth:    Cladonia  fimbriata:  Parmelia  saxatilis. 

Over  earth,  between  moss  and  lichens:  Stereocaulon  alpi- 
num:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Aspicilia  verrucosa:  Cetraria  hiascens, 
islandica:  Dactylina  arctica:  Dufourea  muricata:  Alectoria  ochro- 
leuca:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone:    Pannaria  microphylla. 

34.  King  Oscar  Land,  South  Cape  (1923;  1925;  1926;  1928;  1929; 

2099—2104;  2042-2047): 

Over  earth:    Cetraria  aculeata,  nivalis;  Alectoria  ochroleuca. 

Over  moss:  Gyalolechiasubsimilis:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Aspicilia 
verrucosa;  Cetraria  nivalis:  Physcia  pulverulenta:  Rinodina  tur- 
facea;  Leptogium  lacerum:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  brachyspora,  elaeochroma,  purissima,  soli- 
taria;  Rhizocarpon  chioneum:  Placodium  elegans. 

35.   King  Oscar  Land,  Bjoneborg  (1903,  1906): 
On  stone:   Sporastatia  testudinea;  Rhizocarpon  geographicum 
Placodium  elegans. 

36.   King  Oscar  Land,  Muskoxfjord,  Inner  part  (2294,  2268): 

Over  earth:    Thalloidima  vesiculare;  Solorina  saccata. 
Over  moss:   Physcia  pulverulenta. 

37.    King  Oscar  Land,  Muskoxfjord,  Peninsula  on  eastern  side 

(2216): 
Over  earth:   Physcia  muscigena. 


38.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosef jord,  Western  Side  (2664  - 

3294-3298;  3415-3428;  2701—2715): 

Over  earth:  Stereocaulon  paschale:  Parmelia  omphalodes: 
Cetraria  crispa,  hiascens :  Anaptychia  aquila :  Placynthium  nigrum  : 
Solorina-  saccata:  Leptogium  saturnimum:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 


1898-1902.  No.  21.]  LICHENS.  61 

Over  rnoss:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Pertusaria  subobducens: 
Physcia  muscigena,  pulverulenta :  Buellia  parasema:  Peltidea  aph- 
thosa,  venosa. 

Between  moss:  Dufourea  muricata,  Solorina  saccata;  Tham- 
nolia  vermicular  is. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  auriculata  (f.  diducens  and  evoluta),  con- 
fluens,  crustulata,  elaeochroma  (Lpungens),  elata,  fuscoatra,  purissima, 
sincerula:  Biatora  coarctata;  Sporaslatia  testudima;  Rhizocarpon 
geminatum,  geographicum :  Gyrophora  anthracina,  cylindrica,  hyper- 
borea,  proboscidea;  Xanthoria  parietina:  Placodium  elegans,  muro- 
rum:  GyalolecMa  vitellina;  Lecanora  atra,  dispersa,  polytropa,  sub- 
fusca,  varia:  Aspicilia  calcarea,  cinerea,  lesleyana,  nikrapensis; 
Parmelia  alpicola,  lanata:  Buellia  coniops,  vilis;  Polyblastia  inter- 
media, theleodes. 

On  a  species  of  Lecidea  was  found  Tichothecium  pygmaeum. 

39.    King  Oscar  Laud,    Inner  Goosefjord,  Eastern  Side  (2694— 

2699;  2725-2741;  2745—2749;  2802—2805;  2982;  2983;  3240-3248; 

3289-3293;  3321—3324;  3351—3353;  2360—3360-3363; 

3450-3454;  3546-3555): 

Over  earth:  Thalloidima  vesiculare;  Lopadium  fuscoluteum; 
Cladonia  pyxidata;  Ochrolechia  tartarea;  Pertusaria  dactylina,  sub- 
obducens: Candelaria  concolor;  Caloplaca  citrina:  Aspicilia  verru- 
cosa;  Cetraria  cucullala,  hiascens;  Dactylina  arctica:  Physcia  pul- 
verulenta:  Rinodina  turfacea:  Leptogium  lacerum,  saturninum ; 
Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Candelaria  concolor:  Blastema  tetraspora;  Calo- 
placa pyracea:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Parmelia  omphalodes;  Physcia 
muscigena:  Rinodina  mniaroea,  turfacea;  Psoroma  hypnorum. 

Between  moss:  Sphaerophoron  coralloides :  Stereocaulon  alpi- 
num,  tomentosum;  Cladonia  pyxidata ;  Dufourea  muricata:  Alectoria 
nigricans,  ochroleuca:  Peltidea  aphthosa :  Peltigera  canina,  rufescens. 

Over  dead  plants:    Alectoria  nigricans,  ochroleuca. 

On  muskoxdung:  Biatorina  globulosa :  Caloplaca  pyracea :  Gya- 
lolechia  subsimilis:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Aspicilia  verrucosa:  Rino- 
dina turfacea. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  aglaea,  auriculata,  confluens,  elaeochroma, 
elata,  lithophila,  macrocarpa,  paupercula,  purissima,  sincerula, 
tenebrosa,  tessellata;  Biatora  rupestris :  Sporastatia  testudinea: 
Sarcogyne  simplex;  Catocarpon  Rittokense:  Rhizocarpon  calcareum, 


62  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

geminatum,  geographicum:  Gyrophora  anthracina,  proboscidea: 
Stereocaulon  paschale:  Ochrolechia  parella :  Placodium  elegans :  Calo- 
placa  pyracea :  Gyalolechia  subsimilis ;  Lecanora  polytropa ;  Aspicilia 
cinerea,  gibbosa,  nikrapensis:  Parmelia  lanata,  stygia:  Acarospora 
fuscata:  Polyblastia  intercedens:  Thelidium  pyrenophorum. 

On  Lecidea  purissima:  Discothecium  stigma. 

On  Lecanora  polytropa:    Tichothecium  pygmaeum. 

40.  King  Oscar  Land,  Middle  Goosefjord,  south  of  Yellowhill 

(3507—3512;  3562-3571;  3660—3664;  3720-3723;  3748-3769; 
3875—3879;  3926—3929): 

Over  earth:  Pionospora  glomerata :  Pertusaria  subobducens: 
Parmelia  omphalodes :  Buellia  parasema :  Pannaria  rubiginosa :  Pel- 
tidea  aphthosa;  Peltigera  rufescens:  Solorina  saccata. 

Over  moss:    Lecanora  epibryon:  Collema  aggregatum. 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum,  paschale:  Cladonia 
pyxidata:  Cetraria  aculeata,  hiascens,  islandica  (and  f.  crispa}:  Du- 
fourea  muricata :  Alectoria  nigricans :  Physcia  pulverulenta :  Tham- 
nolia  vermicular  is. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  auricidata,  brachyspora,  confluens,  elaeo- 
ehrona  (f.  pihdaris),  purissima :  Sporastatia  testiidinea :  Rhizocarpon 
geminatum,  geographicum:  Gyrophora  anthracina,  hirsuta,  probos- 
cidea: Placodium  elefjans:  Caloplaca  aurantiaca:  Lecanora  polio- 
phaea,  varia;  Parmelia  lanata:  Placynthium  nigrum;  Polyblastia 
intercedens,  intermedia. 

On  a  species  of  Aspicilia:    Tichothecium  gemmifer. 

41.  King  Oscar  Land,  Middle  r.oosefjord,  Fourth  Winterquarters 

(3791-3807;  3862-3871;  3913;  3936;  3937): 

Over  earth:  Tlialloidima  vesiculare :  Psora  decipiens:  Cladonia 
pyxidata;  Ochrolechia  pallescens:  Pertusaria  dactylina,  panyrga: 
Gyalolechia  subsimilis,  vitellina :  Psoroma  hypnornm :  Peltigera  sca- 
brosa:  Solorina  saccata:  Thamnolia  vermicidaris. 

Over  moss:  Biatora  terricola:  Pertusaria  subobducens:  Calo- 
placa pyracea:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Aspicilia  verrucosa:  Physcia 
muscigena,  pulverulenta:  Einodina  turfacea. 

Between  moss:    Peltidea  aphthosa. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  auriculata.  purissima,  speirea:  Biatora 
coarctata:  Sporastatia  testudinea:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geogra- 
phicum; Ochrolechia  tartarea:  Placodium  elegans:  Lecanora  atra, 
varia:  Aspicilia  cinerea,  gibbosa,  lesleyana:  Parmelia  omphalodes: 
Placynthium  nigrum. 


1808-1902.  No.  21.1  LICHENS.  63 


42.   King  Oscar  Land,  Middle  Goosefjord,  Borgdalen  (3772-3786; 

3813;  3872-3874;  3917;  3932-3934): 

Over  earth:    Cladonia  pyxidata;  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  conferenda,  conflueHs,  elata,  macrocarpa, 
purissima:  Rhizocarpon  geminatuin,  geographicum :  Placodium  ele- 
gans;  Caloplaca  citrina:  Lecanora  subfusca;  Aspicilia  gibbosa,  lae- 
vala\  Physcia  obscura:  Rinodina  milvina:  Placynthium  nigrum: 
Verrucaria  nigrescens:  Thelidium  papulare. 

On  Lecidea  pur  is  sim  a:    Tichothecium  pyg  maeum. 

43.   King  Oscar  Land,  Outer  Goosefjord  (2819): 
On  stone:    Lecidea  purissima. 

44.  King  Oscar  Land,  Outer  Goosefjord,  Gullcove  (2820 ;  3018  -  3025) : 

Over  earth:    Placodium  elegans :  Gyalolechia  subsimilis. 

Over  moss:  Lecanora  epibryon:  Physcia  pulverulenta;  Rino- 
dina turfacea. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  aculeata,  nivalis:  Alectoria  nigri- 
cans,  ochroleuca;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone:  Placodium  elegans :  Physcia  caesia :  Rinodina 
Bischoffii. 

45.   King  Oscar  Land,  Outer  Goosefjord,  Breedingplace  on 

Gullcove  (2976—2980): 

Over  earth:  Aspicilia  verrucosa :  Physcia  pulverulenta :  Rino- 
dina turfacea:  Verrucaria  epigaea;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Caloplaca  jungermanniae :  Lecanora  epibryon ; 
Physcia  muscigena;  Rinodina  turfacea. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  aculeata,  nivalis:  Alectoria  nigri- 
cans,  ochroleuca:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

46    King  Oscar  Land,  Valley  in  Goosefjord  (3257—3259): 

Over  damp  earth:  Thalloidima  vesiculare :  Cladonia  pyxi- 
data: Pertusaria  dactylina,  subobducens :  Physcia  pulverulenta; 
Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

47.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord,  Innereidet  (2107;  2960): 
Over  earth:    Cladonia  pyxidata :  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 
Over  moss:    Lopadium  fuscoluteum:  Blastenia  leucoroea. 
Between  moss:    Physcia  pulverulenta. 


64  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

48.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefiord,  Gallowspoiut  (2683—2693; 
2716-2724;  2750;  2775;  2776;  3255): 

Over  earth:    Stereocaulon  paschale:  Alectoria  nigricans. 

Over  moss:    Physcia  muscigena,  pulverulenta. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  auriculata,  confluens,  elaeochroma,  elata, 
macrocarpa,  purissima:  Biatora  coarctata:  Sporastatia  testudinea; 
Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographicum:  Gyrophora  anthracina, 
hyperborea,  proboscidea:  Ochrolechia  parella:  Pertusaria  determi- 
nanda;  Placodium  elegans:  Lecanora  polytropa:  Aspicilia  cinerea, 
gibbosa,  lesleyana:  Parmelia  centrifuga,  lanata,  omphalodes,  saxa- 
tilis,  stygia:  Physcia  obscura:  Dinielaena  nimbosa. 

On  Placodium  elegans:    Ticholhecium  gemmifer. 

49.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord,  Ripsdalerne  (3249;  3345—3349; 
3355-3359 ;  3384-3386) : 

Over  earth:  Stereocaulon  paschale :  Alectoria  ochroleuca :  Pelti- 
dea  aphthosa:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Between  moss:    Aspicilia  verrucosa:  Psoroma  hypnorum. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  purissima:  Sporastatia  testudinea :  Rhizo- 
carpon  geminatum,  geographicum:  Gtjrophora  anthracina,  hirsuta, 
proboscidea:  Placodium  elegans:  Lecanora  polytropa:  Aspicilia  cal- 
carea,  nikrapensis:  Parmelia  lanata. 

50.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord,  Midday  Knoll  (3456    3462; 

3597—3607;  3649): 

Over  earth:  Lopadium  fuscoluteum :  Cladonia  chlorophaea, 
pyxidata:  Pionospora  glomerata:  Pertusaria  subobducens :  Aspicilia 
verrucosa:  Parmelia  physodes:  Rinodina  turfacea;  Peltidea  aphthosa. 

Over  moss:    Pertusaria  subobducens:  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

Between  m  o  s  s  :  Stereocaulon  alpinum :  Pionospora  glomerata; 
Cetraria  islandica:  Alectoria  nigricans,  ochroleuca:  Thamnolia 
vermicularis 

On  stone:  Sporastatia  testudinea:  Rhizocarpon  geminatum, 
geographicum:  Gyrophora  anthracina,  proboscidea:  Lecanora  poly- 
tropa: Aspicilia  gibbosa,  lesleyana:  Parmelia  lanata:  Neuropogon 
melaxanthum. 

On  Pertusaria  subobducens:   Sphinctrina  turbinata. 


1898-1902.  No.  21]  LICHENS.  65 

51.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjord,  Falconcliff  (3137—3143): 

Over   earth:     Cladonia  chlorophaea:    Gyalolechia  subsimilis; 
Alectoria  ochroleuca:  Rinodina  turfacea;  Peltigera  rufescens. 
Over  moss:   Physcia  muscigena. 

Between  moss:    Cetraria  nivalls :  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 
On  stone:  Placynthium  nigrum. 

52.   King  Oscar  Land,  Goosefjordseidet  (2806) : 

Over  earth:    Pertusaria  subobducens. 

53.    King  Oscar  Land,  western  side  of  Goosefjordseidet  (2110): 
Over  earth:    Pertusaria  subobducens. 

54.   King  Oscar  Land,  Inner  Goosefjord  (2700): 
On    Driftwood:     Caloplaca   cerina,   citrina,  jungermanniae ; 
Lecanord  epibryon;  Buellia  myriocarpa. 

55.   King  Oscar  Land,  Vendom  Kap  (2822—2830;  3165—3179): 

On  moss:  Lopadium  fuscoluteum;  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Calo- 
placa pyracea;  Lecanora  epibryon;  Aspicilia  verrucosa;  Physcia 
muscigena,  pulverulenta;  Rinodina  turfacea:  Peltigera  rufescens. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  aculeata,  hidscens;  Leptogium  la- 
cerum:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone  (epilithic):  Lecidea  auriculata  macrocarpa,  puris- 
sima:  Biatora  rupestris :  Sarcogyne  simplex :  Catocarpon  depressum ; 
Rhizocarpon  geminatum,  geographicum :  Placodium  etegans:  Aspi- 
cilia Candida:  Physcia  caesia :  Placynthium  nigrum. 

On  stone  (e  n  d  o  1  i t h  i c) :    Biatora  immersa. 

On  Lecidea  purissima:    Tichothecium  pygmaeum. 

56.   King  Oscar  Land,  Exkrementbugten  (3208—3211): 
Over  earth:    Gyalolechia  subsimilis :  Solorina  saccata:  Tham- 
nolia vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata ;  Lecanora  epibryon;  Aspicilia 
verrucosa:  Physcia  pulverulenta. 

Between  moss:    Cetraria  juniperina. 

57.   King  Oscar  Land,  Renbugten  (2821 ;  3236—3238) : 
Between    moss:     Cladonia  pyxidata:    Dufourea    muricata: 
Bryopogon  prolixum :  Peltideaa  phthosa :  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 
On  stone:    Lecidea  purissima. 

5 


66  OTTO  V.  DARBISHIRE.  [SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 

58.  King  Oscar  Land,  Bay  near  Landsend  (2845—2848;  3094-3098): 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidatd :  Pertusaria  subobducens :  Le- 
canora  epibryon:  Aspicilia  verrucosa;  Cetraria  islandica:  Physcia 
pulverulenta;  Rinodina  turfdcea;  Peltigera  canina:  Ihamnolia 
vermicularis. 

Between  moss:    Stereocaulon  alpinum. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  elaeochroma,  macrocdrpa:  Rhizocdrpon 
geographicum ;  Aspicilia  calcarea. 

59.   King  Oscar  Land,  Graham  Island  (1914-1915): 
On  stone:    Placodium  elegans :  Lecanora  frustulosa. 

60.  King  Oscar  Land,  Axel  Heiherg  Laud,  Hyperitodden 

(1921 ;  2762) : 

Over  moss:  Pertusaria  subobducens ;  Peltidea  aphthosa ;  Solo- 
rina  crocea. 

61.  King  Oscar  Land,  North  of  Coalharbour  (3859—3861) : 
Imitation-lichens  only;  i.  e.  stones  resembling  lichens. 

62.   King  Oscar  Land,  Coalharbour  (3854—3855) : 

On  stone:  Lecidea  elaeochroma :  Placodium  elegans;  Squamaria 
circinata. 

63.    King  Oscar  Land,  Isachsenfjord,  Braskerudsliiuen 

(711;  712;  714—717): 

Over  earth:  Cetraria  aculeata,  nivalis:  Alectoria  ochroleuca; 
Bryopogon  Fremontii :  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:    Pionospora  glomeratd :  Pertusaria  subobducens. 
Between  moss:    Placodium  splendens. 

64.   North  Kent,  Northern  Part  (3044;  3062—3075): 

Over   earth:     Stereocaulon  paschale:  Pertusaria  subobducens. 

Over  moss:    Ochrolechia  tartar ea. 

Between  moss:  Stereocaulon  alpinum :  Cladonia  pyxidatd ; 
Cetraria  cucullata,  hiascens :  Alectoria  nigricdns,  ochroleuca:  Phys- 
cid  pulvernlenta;  Peltigera  rufescens;  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  mdcrocarpa ;  Placodium  elegans;  Neuropo- 
gon  meldxdnthum. 


1898-1902.  No.  21]  LICHENS.  67 

65.   North  Devon,  including  Havhestberget  (2637—2641;  2647; 

4053-4064) : 

Over  earth:  Squamaria  fulgens :  Cetrarid  dculeata,  cucullata, 
nivalis;  Dufourea  muricata:  Alectoria  ochroleuca:  Bryopogon  pro- 
lixum:  Buellia  parasema :  Solorina  saccata :  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 
Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata;  Pertusaria  subobducens:  Le- 
canora  epibryon;  Aspicilia  verrucosa;  Physcia  muscigena,  pulveru- 
lenta: Rinodina  turfacea;  Peltigera  canina. 

66.   North  Devon,  Burginsel  (3987-3992;  4165-4178): 

Over  earth:  Aspicilia  verrucosa :  Cetraria  aculeata,  hiascens ; 
Alectoria  nigricans:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Placodium  elegans:  Lecanora 
epibryon:  Bryopogon  prolixum;  Physcia  pulverulenta:  Rinodina 
turfaceca;  Leptogium  lacerum. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  brachyspora,  purissima:  Rhizocarpon gemi- 
natum,  geographicum :  Placodium  elegans:  Physcia  caesia:  Placyn- 
thium  nigrum. 

67.   Cardigan  Straits,  Devils  Island  (3982-3985;  4070-4080): 

Over  earth:   Gyalolechia  subsimilis:  Rinodina  turfacea. 

Over  moss:  Cladonia  pyxidata:  Lecanora  epibryon;  Physcia 
muscigena,  pulverulenta:  Thamnolia  vermicularis. 

Between  moss:  Cetraria  aculeata,  cucullata,  hiascens,  nivalis  : 
Alectoria  nigricans:  Bryopogon  prolixum. 

On  stone:  Lecidea  auriculata,  brachyspora, purissima :  Rhizo- 
carpon geographicnm :  Placodium  elegans:  Aspicilia  calcarea,  gibbosa. 

68.   Lager  30  (4124-4126): 
On  stone:  Rhizocarpon  geographicum:  Gyrophora  anthracina. 

69.   Lager  33  (4122) : 
Over  earth:    Placodium  elegans. 


68  OTTO.  V.  DARBISHIRE.    LICHENS.     [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Addition. 


Since  writing  the  above  report  I  have  succeeded  in  obtaining  a  copy 
of  "Lichenes  expeditionis  G.  AMDRUP  (1898—1902).  Enumeravit  EDV.  A. 
WAINIO",  printed  in  the  Meddelelser  om  Grenland  in  1905,  p.  125 — 141. 
As  a  result  the  following  species  must  be  added  to  our  list,  which  is 
thus  brought  up  to  505: 

Lecidea  subcongrua  NYL.  —  HUE  Add.  n.  1159. 
Cladonia  cerasphora  WAIN.  —  WAIN.  Clad.  II.  p.  167. 
Placodium  verruculiferum  WAIN.  —  AMDRUP  p.  131. 
Caloplaca  vitellinula  (NYL).  DARBISH.  —  HUE  Add.  n.  510. 
Squamaria  alphoplaca  (WNBG.)  ACH.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  230. 
Squamaria  bracteata  (HFFM.)  NYL.  —  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  223. 
Buellia  groenlandica  WAIN.  —  AMDRUP  p.  133. 
Acarospora  discreta  (AcH.)  TH.  FR.  --  TH.  FR.  Scand.  p.  217. 
Solorina  octospora  ARN.  —  AMDRUP  p.  134. 
Polyblastia  terrestris  TH.  FR.  —  TH.  FR.  Poly.  p.  15. 


Explanation  of  Plates. 

Tab.  I.  fig.  1.  Lecidea  purissima. 

2.  Lecidea  solitaria. 

3.  Catocarpon  depressmn. 
Tab.  II.  fig.  1.  Pertusaria  determinanda. 

2.  Aspicilia  lesleyana. 

3.  Aspicilia  nikrapensis. 


Printed  19  October  1909. 


Rep.  of  the  2nd  Norweg.  Arct.  Exp.  in  the  Fram  1898—1902.  No.  21.      TAB.  I. 


3. 


\.    Lecidea  purissima. 

2.  Lecidea  solitaria. 

3.  Catocarpon  depressum. 


Rep.  of  the  2nd  Norweg.  Arct.  Exp.  in  the  Fram  1898—1902.  No.  21.     TAB.  II. 


2. 


1.  Pertusaria  determinanda. 

2.  Aspicilia  lesleyana 

3.  hikrapensis 


as 
a 

OH 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  22. 


CARL   BUGGE: 


PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE 

DER  2T-^  FRAM-EXPEDITION 


(MIT  TAFELN  UND  KARTEN) 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I   KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISIIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1910 


'•• 


I, 


.m  Herbst  1898  fiihrte  Kapitan  SVERDRUP  die  Fram  durch  den 
Smiths-Sund  und  erreichte,  nachdem  er  Foulke-Fjord  in  Prudhoes-Land, 
Gronland,  besucht  hatte,  in  der  Ricestrait  sein  erstes  Winterquartier. 

Dadurch  bot  sich  dem  Geologen  P.  SCHEI  Gelegenheit,  die  Umgegend 
von  Buchanan-Bay  zu  studieren.  Mit  mustergiiltiger  Energi  sammelte 
Schei  von  den  Gebieten  bei  Ricestrait,  Alexandra-Fjord,  Hayes-Fjord, 
Flaglers-Fjord  und  Bache  pens.,  sowie  auch  noch  von  einem  Teile  der 
Gegend  von  Princess  Mary-Bay  und  von  dem  innersten  Zipfel  des  Bays- 
fjord  ein  reichhaltiges  Material.  Von  einer  Tour  nach  Foulke-Fjord 
brachte  er  auch  ein  bedeutendes  Material  mit. 

Im  Friihling  1899  steuerte  die  Fram  siidwarts  in  den  Jones-Sund, 
wo  sie  im  Havne-Fjord  im  Winterquartier  blieb. 

Von  der  sudlichen  Kiiste  von  Ellesmere-Land  nahm  Schei  auch  ein 
gutes  Material  mit  sich. 

Im  darauf  folgenden  Friihling  1900  drang  Fram  weiter  nach  Westen 
vor.  Die  grossartigen  Einsammlungen  von  Fossilien,  die  im  Gaase- 
Fjord  und  Eureka-Sund  vorgenommen  wurden,  berilhren  jedoch  vorlauh'g 
diese  Augabe  nicht,  wo  es  sich  darum  handelt,  zunachst  Gesteine  eines 
von  Schei  als  pracambrisch  angenommenen  Eruptivgebietes,  und  darauf 
verschiedene  eruptive  Gesteine,  die  jiinger  als  dieses  Pracambriurn  sind, 
zu  beschreiben. 

Man  muss  die  Energie,  mit  der  Schei  seine  Arbeit  anfasste,  und 
die  Vollkommenheit,  mit  der  er  seine  Aufgabe  loste,  im  hohem  Grade 
bewundern.  Es  ist  schwierig  zu  verstehen,  wie  er  unter  so  eigenartig 
ungiinstigen,  klimatischen  Verhaltnissen  ein  so  grosses  Material  herbei- 
schaffen  konnte,  das,  selbst  wenn  es  unter  milderen  Breitengraden  ge- 
sammelt  worden  ware,  als  recht  bedeutend  angesehen  werden  musste. 

Nur  mit  Hilfe  seiner  Hunde  musste  ja  Schei  seine  schweren  Stein- 
ladungen  meilenweit  bis  auf  die  Frarn  bringen. 

Um  so  mehr  beklagenswert  ist  es,  dass  nicht  SCHEI  selbst  sein 
eigenes  Material  bearbeiten  konnte.  Ein  fruher  Tod  raffle  ihm  in  ein 


CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Alter  von  31  Jahren  kurz  nach  seiner  Heimkehr  dahin  —  ein  Verlust 
fiir  arclische,  und  ein  Verlust  fur  norwegische  Geologic.  SCHEI'S  viele 
Freunde  gedenken  seiner  mil  Wehmut. 

Selbstverstandlich  vennag  ich  die  Resultate  yon  SCHEI'S  Sludien 
und  Sammlungen  von  dem  Eruptions-Gebiete  des  Ellesmere-Landes  nur 
in  den  Hauptziigen  vorzulegen.  Das,  was  ich  mitteilen  kann,  besteht 
nur  aus  einer  kurzgefassten  petrographischen  Beschreibung  der  Gesteine, 
wobei  mir  verscbiedene  von  SCHEI  ausgefiihrte  Analysen  zur  Seite 
standen. 

Gleichzeitig  erlaube  ich  mir  hier,  Herrn  Professor  BRGGGER  fiir  das 
mir  zur  Untersuchung  iiberlassene  Material  und  noch  besonders  fur  sein 
so  liebenswurdiges  Entgegenkommen  wahrend  der  Ausarbeitung  meinen 
ergebenen  Dank  auszusprechen. 


Das  pracambrische l  Eruptionsgebiet  im  Ellesmere- 
Land  und  Prudhoes-Land. 


SCHEI  hat  eine  vorlilufige  Mitteilung  iiber  seine  Beobachtungen  ge- 
liefert,  vvoraus  hervorzugehen  scheint,  dass  das  Ellesmere-Land  ein  Ur- 
gebirgsschollengebiet  bildet,  das  nach  Osten  Teile  von  Prudhoes-Land  in 
Nord-Gronland  umfasst  und  sich  nach  Siiden  iiber  North  Devon  gegen 
die  grossen  canadischen  Urgebirgsschoilen  erstreckt. 

Die  nordliche  Grenze  des  Gebietes  zieht  sich  vom  innersten  Zipfel 
des  Bays-Fjords  langs  der  Nordseite  des  Hayes-Fjords  und  iiber  Cape 
Camperdown  in  Bache  pens,  bis  nach  Reindeer  pt.  im  Prudhoes-Land. 
Die  Westgrenze  lauft  vom  Zipfel  des  Bays-Fjords  langs  der  Ostseite  des 
Havnefjords  tiber  Jones-Sund  nach  North  Devon. 

Dieses  Gebiet  besteht  aus  eruptiven  Gesteinen,  die,  wie  man  sehen 
kann,  aus  einem  kalkreichen  Magma  stammen,  indem  die  von  dort  mit- 
gebrachten  Proben  unter  dem  Mikroskop  erweisen,  dass  sie  bedeutende 
Mengen  Plagioklas  enthalten.  Dass  diese  jedoch  nicht  ganz  gewohnliche 
Gabbrogesteine  sind,  bekommt  man  des  im  Allgemeinen  ziemlich  hohen 
Quarzgehaltes  wegen  auch  makroskopisch  den  Eindruck.  Das,  was  in 
diesern  Gebiete  makroskopisch  am  meisten  in  die  Augen  fallt,  ist,  dass 
es  zusammen  mit  einer  Reihe  verschiedener  dunkler  Ge- 
steine auch  helle  giebt,  die  so  auftreten,  dass  sie  als  von 
demselben  Magma  stammend  betrachtet  werden  miissen. 

1  Cfr.  Pag.  28. 


o 


o 


o 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  5 

Unter  dem  Mikroskop  treten  die  Verhaltnisse  deutlicher  hervor,  in- 
dem  es  sich  zeigt,  dass  die  Gesteine  eine  Serie  von  basischen  Gesteinen 
mil  basischem  Plagioklas  samtmit  monoklinem  und  im  Allgemeinen  auch 
mil  rhombischem  Pyroxen  bis  etwas  sauereren  Gesteinen  mit  sauererem 
Plagioklas,  Quarz,  rhombischem  Pyroxen,  Hornblende  und  weiter  bis  zu 
verhaltnismassig  alkalireicheren  Gesteinen  reprasentieren,  die  eine  Uber- 
gangstufe  zwischen  den  Kalkgesteinen  und  Alkalikalkgesteinen,  namlich 
Banatite  und  Adamellite  bilden;  und  als  jungste  Bildung  treten  endlich 
kalkarme  Granite  auf.  Diese  Gesteine  enthalten  im  Allgemeinen  rhom- 
bischen  Pyroxen  (Bronzit  oder  Hypersthen),  doch  giebt  es  auch  wirkliche 
Gabbroe  rnit  nur  monoklinem  Pyroxen  und  basischem  Plagioklas.  In 
den  meisten  basischen  Gesteinen  sind  die  dunklen  Minerale  nur  mono- 
kliner  Pyroxen,  wahrend  zu  den  sauereren  rhombischer  Pyroxen,  Horn- 
blende, uud  Biotit  hinzutreten. 

Der  Feldspat  ist  in  den  am  meisten  basischen  Gesteine  Labrador, 
teilvveise  ein  basischer,  in  den  sauereren  Andesin  und  Oligoklas,  bisweilen 
zusammen  mit  Labrador.  Ausserdem  treten  in  den  alkalireicheren  Ge- 
steinen Orthoklas  und  Mikrolin  auf;  diese  sind  beinahe  immer  als  Mikro- 
perthit  e'ntvvickelt,  der  ab  und  zu  als  in  Kryptoperthit  iibergehend  beob- 
achtet  werden  kann. 

Quarz  tritt  als  zuletzt  ausgeschiedenes  die  Zvvischenraume  ausfiillen- 

des  Mineral  auf;    in  den  quarzreichesten  Gesteinen  kann  aber  Quarz  in 

Feldspat  eingeschlossen  beobachtet  werden.     Ab  und  zu  werden  in  dem- 

selben  Feldspatindivid   mehrere  runde  Quarzeinschlusse   mit    gememein- 

.  samer  Ausloschung  beobachtet  ^quartz  vermicutt",  siehe  Taf.  I,  Fig.  2. 

Als  accessorische   Minerale    tritt   sehr  verbreitet   Erz   auf,  das  sich 

seiner  Umwandlungsproducte  wegen  manchesmal  als  titanhaltiges  Eisen- 

erz  verrat.    Ausserdem  wird  auch  Apatit  samt  kleinen  Zirkonkrystallen 

•beobachtet. 

Betreffs  der  Krystallisationsfolge  kann  bemerkt  werden,  dass 
Zirkon  als  Einschluss  in  Apatit  und  beide  als  Einschluss  in  Feldspat 
beobachtet  worden  sind. 

Rhombischer  Pyroxen  tritt  gewohnlich  in  unregelmassig  begrenz- 
ten  Individen  auf.  Derselbe  gehort  wahrscheinlich  zu  den  am  friihesten 
auskrystallisierten  Mineralen.  Plagioklas  tritt  in  Mikroperthit  einge- 
schlossen auf,  und  Mikroperthit  ist  als  mit  Plagioklas  perthitisch  ver- 
wachsen  beobachtet  worden.  Wie  erwahnt,  ist  gewohnlich  Quarz  das 
zuletzt  ausgeschiedene  Mineral,  es  kommt  aber  auch  in  einem  friiheren 
Stadium  ausgeschiedener  Quarz  vor,  namlich  als  Einschluss  in  Feldspat. 
Die  Krystallisationsfolge  ist  dann  wahrscheinlich:  Zirkon,  Erz,  Apatit, 


6  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

rhombischer  Pyroxen  und  andere  Magnesia-  und  Kalkmagnesia-Minerale, 
Plagioklas  und  Mikroperthit ;  diese  beiden  letzteren  teilweise  gleichzeitig 
und  zuletzt  der  wesentlichste  Teil  des  Quarzes. 

Zu  dem  Urgebirge  gehorende  krystallinische  Schiefer  hat  SCHEI  in 
dein  von  ihm  bereisten  Gebiete  nicht  vorgefunden.  Es  scheint  jedoch, 
als  ob  Gneise  auftreten,  die  alter  als  die  angefiihrten  Eruptivgesteine 
sind;  denn  sowohl  von  Foulke-Fjord  als  auch  von  Twin  Glacier  Valley 
werden  Gneisbruchstiicke  in  den  Eruptivgesteinen  besprochen.  Gneis  wird 
auch  von  Frams- Fjord  im  Jones-Sund  besprochen,  der  jedoch  wahr- 
scheinlich  als  gedrtlckter  Granit  aufzufassen  ist. 

Das  Eruptionsgebiet  scheint  also  nicht  das  alteste  ar- 
chaische  Urgebirge  zu  bilden. 

Dass  das  Gebiet  pracambrisch  sein  sollte,  scheint,  wie  erwahnt  von 
SCHEI  angenommen  gewesen  zu  sein.  (Siehe  seine  vorlaufige  Mitteilnng.) 
Dasselbe  ist  gleichfalls  von  Captain  H.  W.  FIELDEN  und  von  DE  RANGE1 
von  der  Nares-Expedition  angenommen  worden.  Diese  nahmen  die 
Moglichkeit  an,  dass  die  Gesteine  des  Ellesmere-Landes  dem  Laurentian 
angehorten.  Sie  meinten,  dass  diese  Gesteine  von  silurischen  Forma- 
tionen  uberlagert  werden  (nach  SCHEI'S  Beobachtungen  sicherlich  auch 
von  kambrischen),  und  dass  es  nordlich  davon  langs  des  Kennedy-Kanals 
und  Robeson-Kanals  eine  Formation  giebt,  vvelche  sie  mil  Cape  Rawson- 
Beds  bezeichneten,  die  moglicherweise  dem  Huronian  angehoren  sollten. 
Es  ist  nicht  ganz  denkbar,  dass  sich  SCHEI  irgend  eine  begrtindete  An- 
schauung  von  dieser  zuletzt  erwahnten  Formation  gebildet  hatte,  denn 
er  kam  sicherlich  mil  derselben  nicht  in  BerQhrung. 

I     Das  Foulke-Fjord- Gebiet. 

1.  Reindeer  Point  ist  die  vorspringende  Landzunge  auf  der 
Nordseite  des  Foulke-Fjords.  Das  Gestein  hier  ist  Hypersthenquarzdiorit 
und  enthalt: 

Plagioklas 

etwas  Mikroperlhit 

Quarz 

Bronzit  und  Hypersthen 

dunkelgriine  Hornblende 

wenig  Biotit 

wenig  Apatit  und  Erz. 


Quarterly  Jour,  of  the  Geol.  Soc.  No.  ia5  1878  pag.  556. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM  1898—1902.  No. 


Framl89893 
lmlsle 


Gronitdiorit  und  zwar  haiipt- 
sAchlichQuarzdipritdurchgesetzt 
von  Granitadern.  Im  Havneljord 
Adamellit 


nUnbekannt,  wahrscheinlich  Grn- 
nitdiorit 


Cape  Clarence 
NortR  Lincoln  IkaiteJforthonSlMm 


North  Devon 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE. 


Neugebildeter  Mikropegmatit  deutet  metamorphische  Umwandlung 
an.  Das  Gestein  ist  dunkel  gefarbt,  ziemlich  grobkornig  und  zeigt 
schwache  Kennzeichen  von  Druck.  Die  Structur  ist  eugranitisch  kOrnig. 

Der  PlagioMas  ist  Oligoklas,  gewohnlich  mil  Zwillingsstreifung 
nach  dem  Albit-Gesetz,  jedoch  auch  nach  dem  Periklin-Gesetz ;  es  ist  ab 
und  zu  schwierig,  die  Zwillingsstreifung  zu  sehen.  Der  Plagioklas  ist 
wenig  umgewandelt,  nur  teilweise  von  Epidot  und  Klorit  von  gelbgrun- 
licher  bis  gelbbraunlicher  Farbung  durchsetzt.  Der  Plagioklas  ist  von 
unregelmassiger  Begrenzung.  Er  greift  haufig  in  die  iibrigen  Minerale 
mil  langen  Zungen  ein;  Leistenform  giebt  es  nicht. 

Mikroperthit  scheint  auskrystallisiert  zu  sein,  nachdem  die  Krystal- 
lisation  des  Plagioklases  begonnen  hatte.  In  jedem  Falle  haben  sie  teil- 
weise gleichzeitig  krystallisiert.  Er  tritt  in  ziemlich  grossen  unregelmas- 
sigen  Kornern  auf,  steht  jedoch  dem  Plagioklas  gegeniiber  an  Menge 
sehr  zuruck.  Es  ist  moglich,  dass  es  auch  Orthoklas  ohne  Perthit- 
structur  giebt. 

Quarz  tritt  in  unregelmassigen,  teilweise  riindlichen,  frischen,  die 
Zwischenraume  in  dem  Feldspat  ausfullenden  Kornern  auf.  Ausserdem 
sieht  man  auch  die  fruher  erwahnten,  runden  Quarzkorner  im  Feldspat. 

Bhombischer  Pyroxen  wird  in  kleinen  Kornern  und  Partien  von 
unregelmassiger  Form  vorgefunden.  Dieser  ist  sicherlich  jiinger  als 
Plagioklas,  da  man  denselben  bisweilen  wie  einen  Kranz  um  diesen  liegen 
sieht.  Es  ist  meistens  Bronzit  mit  schwachem  Pleochroismus:  ,,Hell- 
grunlich — schvvach  braunrotlich",  kann  aber  auch  Hypersthen  mit  kraf- 
tigerem  Pleochroismus  sein. 

In  gewissem  Grade  ist  er  umgewandelt.  Die  Umwandlung  hat  an 
der  Peripherie  begonnen  und  sich  in  Rissen,  die  den  Bronzit  wie  ein 
Netz  durchfurchen,  nach  innen  verpflanzt. 

Das  Umwandlungsprodukt  ist  mitunter  grilnblau,  sicherlich  Klorit, 
besteht  aber  auch  oft  aus  gelbgriinlichen  Faden,  die  oft  mit.  der  Spalt- 
barkeit  des  Pyroxens  parallel  laufen  und  manchmal  auch  quer  iiber  die- 
selbe  liegen  oder  auch  den  Pyroxen  wie  ein  Kranz  umgeben.  Die 
Faden  zeigen  bisweilen  Pleochroismus,  namlich  parallel  mit  der  Langs- 
richtung  hellgelbgrilnlich  und  senkrecht  darauf  dunkler  gelbgrilnlich. 
Diese  pleochroitischen,  fadenformigen  Umvvandlungsprodukte  nehmen 
ein  Zwischenstadium  in  einer  Umwandlung  von  Pyroxen  zu  Horn- 
blende ein. 

Lie  Hornblende  ist  sicherlich  aus  Pyroxen  entstanden;  dieselbe  ist 
stark  pleochroitisch :  wHellgelbgriinlich — dunkelgelbgrtinlich  bis  blaulich." 
Sie  ist  oft  von  Erz,  sicherlich  titanhaltiges  Eisenerz,  stark  durchsetzt, 


8  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

was  daraus  hervorzugehen  scheint,  class  in  derselben  kleine  Korner  vor- 
kommen  konnen,  die  wahrscheinlich  Rutil  sind. 

Biotit  scheint  im  Wesentlichen  gleichzeitig  mit  Pyroxen  gebildet  zu 
sein.  Beide  diese  Minerale  vverden  haiifig  in  kleinen  Ansammlungen 
zwischen  den  hellen  Mineralen  angetroffen.  Der  Biotit  zeigt  kraftigen 
Pleochroismus.  Dieser  ist  gern  von  kleinen  Erzkornern  stark  durch- 
setzt,  die  den  Rand  des  Biotits  entlang  liegen,  andeutend,  dass  der 
Biotit  vielleicht  durch  Umvandlung  des  Bronzites  gebildet  ist.  Dieses 
scheint  auch  mitunter  daraus  hervorzugehen,  dass  Biotit  der  Spaltbarkeit 
des  Pyroxens  in  schmalen  Streifen  folgt. 

Es  gieht  uberhaupt  nur  kleine  Mengen  dunkler  Minerale;  Feldspat 
und  Quarz  sind  vollstandig  im  Ubergewicht. 

2.  Bei   Reindeer  Point  tritt  auch  ein  Gestein  auf,  das  zwischen 
Quarzdiorit  und  Banatit  steht.  Wahrscheinlich  steht  dasselbe  dem  Banatit 
sehr  nahe,  indem  dasselbe  Plagioklas,  Mikroperthit,  beide  in  ganz  grosser 
Menge,  Quarz,  Biotit  und   diopsidartigen  Pyroxen  enthalt.      Dasselbe  ist 
etwas  heller  als  der  Quarzdiorit. 

3.  Als   jiingstes    Gestein  treten  hellrotliche  aplitische  Gdnge   auf, 
die  teilweise  aus  mikroperthitischem  Mikroklin,  etwas  mikroperthitischem 
Orthoklas,  Oligoklas,  Quarz  und  ganz  wenig  Biotit  bestehen.    Die  Mine- 
rale  sind  etwas  gedriickt.    Diese  Giinge  durchsetzen  die  oben  angegebenen 
Gesteine  bei  Reindeer  Point.     Sie  haben  ein  ahnliches  Aussehen  wie  die 
entsprechenden  Gange  von  Buchanan-Bay. 

Es  scheint  also,  als  ob  die  Eruptionen  dieser  Gegenden  nach  stei- 
gender  Aciditat  vor  sich  gegangen  sind,  ein  Umstand,  wofiir  wir  auch 
von  Buchanan-Bay  und  Jones-Sund  ein  Beispiel  sehen  werden. 

4.  tlber  die  Terrasse,  Etah. 

Das  Gestein  hier  ist  Gabbro,  der  aus  einer  eugranitisch  kornigen 
Mischung  von  Labrador,  farblosem  bis  schwach  griinlichem,  diopsidarti- 
gem  Pyroxen,  Biotit  und  etwas  Kies  besteht.  Dieser  ist  feinkornig, 
dunkel,  schwer  und  etwas  gedriickt,  sonst  aber  wenig  umgewandelt. 
Die  Minerale  scheinen  einer  Langsrichturig  nach  geordnet  zu  sein.  Leisten- 
formiges  Auftreten  von  Labrador  ist  teilweise  hervortretend. 

In  seinem  Tagebiichern  hat  Schei  notiert,  dass  bei  der  Terrasse  am 
Etah  gestreifter  Gneis  ansteht. 

Es  ist  nicht  ausgeschlossen,  dass  dieser  Gneis  alter  als  die  beschrie- 
benen  Eruptivgesteine  ist,  weil  ein  ahnlicher  Altersunterschied  am  Twin 
Glacier  Valley  im  Alexandra  Fjord  nachgewiesen  ist,  woriiber  auf  Seite 
13  mehr  gesagt  werden  wird. 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE. 


II.    Das  Buchanan-Bay-Gebiet. 

In  diesem  Gebiet  sind  die  Verhaltnisse  mil  denen  von  Foulke-Fjord- 
Gebiet  analog. 

Frarn  lag  iin  Winter  1898—99  im  Framshavn,  namlich  die  Bucht 
am  Framglacier  in  der  Ricestrait  im  Quartier,  vvodurch  SCHEI  die  Ge- 
genden  auf  beiden  Seiten  der  Ricestrait  untersuchen  konnte,  und  Pirn 
Isle  mil  den  verhaltnismiissig  niedrigen  Hohen  bis  zu  500  Meter  scheint 
zu  Studienzwecken  besonders  gut  geeignet  gewesen  zu  sein.  Diese  Insel 
war  sicherlich  fur  geologische  Studien  ganz  aufklarend  und  ihr  Bau  wird 


daher  so  genau,  wie  es  das  Material  und  die  aufbevvahrten  Noticen  zu- 
lassen,  beschrieben  werden. 

Pirn  Isle  ist  ca.  13  km.  lang  und  7  km.  breit  und  liegt  unterhalb 
d.er  Schneegrenze. 

Kjothaugen  am  Nordostpoint,  Pirn  Isle. 

Auf  Kjothaugen  tritt  Hypersthenquarzdiorit  auf,  der  aus  Plagioklas, 
Spuren  von  ungestreiftem  Feldspat,  wahrscheinlicb  Ortboklas,  Quarz, 
Bronzit  und  Hypersthen,  Biotit  und  accessorischem  Apatit,  Erz  und  Zir- 
kon  besteht.  Derselbe  ist  grau  gefarbt,  nicht  ganz  so  dunkel  als  Hyper- 
sthenquarzdiorit von  Reindeer  Point,  jedoch  ist  die  Structur  in  beiden 
Gesteinen  ganz  dieselbe  und  die  auftrelenden  Minerale  haben  denselben 
Character.  Eine  der  mitgebrachten  Proben  ist  etwas  porphyrisch  und 


10  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

giebt  den  Eindruck,  etwas  mehr  basisch  als  das  Haupgestein  selbst 
zu  sein. 

Zusaminen  mit  diesem  Quarzdiorit  tritt  gangformiger  und  schlieren- 
formiger  Granit  auf,  der  aus  einer  eugranitisch  kornigen  Mischung  von 
mikroperthitischem  Orthoklas,  etwas  mikroperthitischem  Mikroklin,  etwas 
Plagioklas,  Quarz,  etwas  Biotit  und  accessorischem  Zirkon  besteht.  Die 
Perthitstructur  ist  bisweilen  so  fein,  dass  man  sie  kaum  sehen  kann. 
Der  Plasfoklas  ist  sauer,  Zwillingsstreifung  ist  nicht  immer  leicht  zu 
sehen.  Eigentiimlich  ist  ein  Umstand,  der  sich  ab  und  zu  zeigt,  namlich 
Einschliisse  im  Plagioklas  von  bruchstiickartigen,  kurzen  Streifen  von 
Mikro-  oder  Krypto-Perthit.  Es  kann  in  einem  Plagioklasindivid  eine 
ganz  grosse  Anzahl  solcher  Einschliisse  auftreten,  welche  meistens  mit 
ihrer  langsten  Ausstreckung  parallel  mit  der  Zwillingsstreifung  und  den 
perthitischen  Streifen  senkrecht  auf  derselben  liegen.  Die  Ausloschung 
ist  im  Allgemeinen  fQr  alle  Einschlusse  innerhalb  desselben  Plagioklas- 
individs  gemeinsam.  Man  bekommt  den  Eindruck,  dass  diese  Ein- 
schliisse als  Ausscheidungen  im  Plagioklas  aufgefasst  werden  miissen, 
nachdem  derselbe  krystallisiert  war,  und  dass  die  Perthitstreifen  in 
einem  noch  spateren  Stadium  ausgeschieden  sind. 

Die  Mineralkiirner  liegen  mit  einer  hochst  unregelmassigen  Begrenz- 
ung  an  einander.  Biotit  giebt  es  in  kleinen  Blattern  in  sparsamer 
Menge  und  bildet  zusammen  mit  etwas  Klorit  und  Erz  die  einzigen 
dunklen  Minerale.  Der  Granit  ist  ziemlich  grobkornig  und  von  rotlicher 
Farbe.  Ausserdem  treten  in  den  sauren  Gangen  Schlieren  von  Plagioklas- 
gesteinen  mit  etwas  Alkalifeldspat  auf,  welche  sich  also  den  Banatiten 
nahern. 

Diese  Gesteine  zeigen  einige  Zeichen  von  Druck,  und  zwar  ist  undu- 
lose  Ausloschung  liaufig  und  beim  Granit  tritt  neugebildeter  Mikro- 
pegmatit  rund  um  die  Feldspatindivide  auf.  Makroskopisch  sind  die 
beiden  Gesleine,  der  helle  Granit  und  der  dunkle  Quarzdiorit,  am  meisten 
in  die  Augen  fallend.  Diese  sind  wahrscheinlich  von  beinahe  demselben 
Alter.  Dieses  seheint  aus  verschiedenen  Griinden  hervorzugehen. 

Ahnliche  Gesteine,  von  SHHEI  als  ,,das  helle"  und  respective  ,,das 
dunkle  Geslein"  genannt,  findet  man  namlich,  wie  wir  spater  sehen 
werden,  iiber  grosse  Strecken  zusammen  auftretend  und  vollstandig  mit 
einander  verflochten,  wieder,  dass  es  oft  schwer  abzumachen  ist,  ob 
das  Helle  oder  das  Dunkle  im  Ubergewicht  ist.  An  einzelnen  Stellen 
kann  beobachtet  werden,  wie  das  Helle,  das  Dunkle  durchsetzt,  an  anderen 
Stellen  ist  jedoch  das  entgegengesetzte  der  Fall.  Das  eine  Gestein 
durchsetzt  das  andere  entvveder  in  feinen  Adern  oder  in  grosseren  Par- 


1898-191)2.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULT  ATE.  11 

tien.  Auf  Kjothaugen  scheint  hervorzugehen,  dass  der  helle  Granit 
el  was  j  linger  als  der  dunkle  Quarzdiorit  ist.  Zuerst  bekornmt  man 
von  den  Photographien  von  dort,  Seite  4  und  10,  den  Eindruck,  dass  der 
Granit  den  Quarzdiorit  durchsetzt.  Ein  an  derselben  Stelle  auftretender  Ker- 
santitgang  scheint  das  Altersverhaltnis  abzumachen.  SCHEI  hat  namlich  in 
seinem  Tagebuch  notiert,  dass  dieser  Kersantitgang  sovvohl  den  Quarz- 
diorit als  auch  einen  Teil  der  eingeflochtenen  Granitadern  durchsetzt; 
ahnliche  Granitadern  durchflechten  aber  auch  den  Kersantitgang  so,  dass 
die  Adern  parallel  mit  der  Langsrichtung  desselben  laufen,  wodurch  der 
Kersantit  an  einzelnen  Stellen  ein  schlierenformiges,  gneisartiges  Aus- 
sehen  erhalt.  Es  scheint  natiirlich  zu  sein  anzunehmen,  dass  die  Erup- 
tion des  Granites  stattfand,  bevor  noch  der  Quarzdiorit  ganz  ersteift  war, 
und  dass  der  Kersantitgang  das  ersteifende  noch  warme  Gestein  unter 
der  letzten  Entwickelungsstufe  der  Eruption  des  Granites  durchsetzte. 

Das  Gestein  des  Kersantitganges  e  nth  alt: 
Basischen  Plagioklas 
etwas  Mikroklin  und  Orthoklas 

Kvarts 
viel  Biotit 
Klorit 
Erz 
Apatit. 

Das  Gestein  ist  sehr  feinkornig  mit  dunkler,  etwas  braunlicher  Farbe. 
Die  Structur  ist  keine  ordinare  Kersantitstructur,  nicht  Rosenbusches 
panidiomorphe,  indem  weder  Glimmer  noch  Feldspat  grossere  Andeutung 
von  idiomorpher  Begrenzung  zeigt,  eher  aber  die  allotriomorphkornige, 
die  characteristisch  fiir  krystallinische  Schiefer  ist;  und  das  Gestein  ist 
fiir  soweit  von  typischen  Kersantiten  wesentlich  abweichend,  stimmt  aber 
in  der  Mineralzusammensetzung  und  in  chemischer  Zusammensetzung 
mit  diesen  iiberein. 

Cape  Sabina,  Pirn  Isle. 

Die  von  dort  mitgebrachten  Proben  von 

1.     Bronzitquarzdiorit  bestehen  aus: 

basischem  Plagioklas 

etwas  Quarz 

Bronzit 

monoklinem  Pyroxen 

dunkelgriiner  Hornblende 

etwas  Biolit. 


12  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

accessorischem  Zirkon 

Erz  und  Apatit 

Dieses  Gestein  ist  mehr  hasisch  als  die  friiher  beschriebenen  Quarz- 
diorite.  Der  Plagioklas  ist  Labrador.  Dessen  Zwillingsstreifung  ist  aus- 
gepragter  und  die  Begrenzung  mehr  idiomorph.  Quarz  ist  zuriickgetreten, 
und  es  tritt  monokliner  Pyroxen  in  kleinen,  ziemlich  frischen  Kornern 
auf.  Die  Hornblende  ist  stark  pleochroitisch  (dunkelgri'm  und  hellgelh- 
griinlich).  Dieses  ist  ein  ziemlich  schweres,  dunkles,  etwas  griinliches 
Gestein.  Die  vorliegenden  Proben  von 

2.     Quarzdiorit  bestehen  aus: 

Plagioklas 

Quarz 

etwas  Biotit 

ausserdem  etwas  Erz,  Apatit  und  Zirkon. 
Der  Feldspat  giebt  dem  Gestein  eine  hellrotliche  Farbe. 
Ahnliche    Gesteine    wie   auf  Pirn  Isle  treten  auf  der  Westseite  von 
Ricestrait  auf  und  auch  dort  einander  durchflechtend. 

Cape  Rutherford. 

Dieses  ist  das  Kap  nordlich  von  Rutherford-Bay.     Auf   der  ausser- 
sten  Landzunge  kommt  ein  ahnliches,  dunkles  Gestein  wie  auf  Pirn  Isle 
vor.     Unter  dem  Mikroskop  zeigt  sich  dasselbe  als  ein  Norit,  der  quarz- 
frei  ist  und  basischen  Plagioklas  enthalt. 
Dasselbe  besteht  aus: 
Labrador 
Bronzit 

monoklinem  Pyroxen 
Biotit 

dunkler  Hornblende 
Erz 
Apatit 
Zirkon. 

Dieses  Gestein  gleicht  dem  Bronzitquarzdiorit  No.  1  vom  Gape  Sabina. 
Dasselbe  ist  jedoch  mehr  basisch  und  enthalt  dunklere  Minerale.  Das- 
selbe ist  von  schlierigen  Adern  durchsetzt,  die  aus  porphyrischem  Plagio- 
klas und  Quarz  in  einer  feinkornigen  Masse  von  Plagioklas,  Quarz, 
Biotit  und  accessorischem  Erz  und  Zirkon  bestehen. 

Auf  Gape  Rutherford  war  nach  SCHEI  der  Norit  oft  von  Granit- 
gangen  durchsetzt,  die  teilweise  als  Pegmatit  und  als  Schriftgranit 
auftraten. 


1898- 1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  13 

Lunger  westeinwiirtz  gegen  den  Alexandra-Fjord  traten  auch  ahn- 
liche,  dunkle  Gesteine  von  Granit  durchsetzt,  der  hier  das  Haupt- 
gestein  war,  auf. 

Twin  Glacier  Valley  zwischen  Cape  Rutherford  und  Alexandra- 
Fjord. 

Auf  dieser  Strecke  landeinwarts  scheint  mil  Bestimmtheit  angenom- 
men  warden  zu  konnen,  dass  die  genannten  Eruplivgesteine  Gneis- 
gesteine  durchbrochen  haben;  denn  dieselben  schliesen  teilweise  machtige 
Gneisschollen  ein,  die  haufig  parallel  mil  dem  Schiefrigkeit  von  Adern 
vollstandig  durchsetzt  sind,  die  teils  aus  dem  dunklen  Norit  und  teils 
aus  dem  hellen  Granit  bestehen. 

Aus  den  mitgebrachten  Proben  scheint  hervorzugehen,  dass  dort  in 
der  Nahe  dieser  Gneisschollen  inleressante  Grenzfaciesbildungen  auftreten. 

Das  Hauptgestein  in  Twin  Glacier  Valley  ist  hornblendehaltiger 
Bronzitquarzdiorit.  Von  den  erwahnten  Faciesbildungen  in  der  Nahe 
der  Gneisschollen  kann  bemerkt  vverden: 

1.  Ein  etwas  schiefriger,  feinkorniger  Quarznorit,   bestehend   aus: 

Basischem  Plagioklas 

Quarz 

Bronzit  und  teilweise  Hypersthen 

Biotit 

Erz. 

2.  Ein  feinkorniger  Gabbro,  bestehend  aus: 

Plagioklas 

eineni  umgewandelten  Pyroxenmineral 

Biotit,  der  voll  von  Rutilinterpositionen  ist 

Erz  und  Apatit. 

In  diesen  Faciesbildungen  treten  teilweise  sehr  dunkle  Minerale  wie 
Biotit,  Hornblende,  rhombischer  Pyroxen,  samt  Erz  und  Zirkon  auf. 
Rutil  tritt  als  Interposition  in  Form  von  Nadeln  auf,  die  einander  mil 
einem  Winkel  von  60°  schneiden. 

Auf  I  nd  ere  en,  Ricestrait,  giebt  es  Hypersthenquarzdiorit.  Von 
dem  Innern  des  Hayes-Fjord  hat  SCHEI  notiert,  dass  dort  ein  dunkles 
Gestein  auftritt.  Noch  weiter  fjordeinwarts  hat  er  notiert,  dass  wieder 
schlierige,  helle  und  dunkle  Gesteine  mil  Gneisbruchstucken,  vollstandig 
den  Gesteinen  von  Pirn  Isle  ahnlich,  vorgefunden  werden. 

An  der  Nordseite  von  Hayes- Fjord  stehen  die  massiven  Gesteine 
tief  unten,  in  den  Hohen  (Ekeberg)  dagegen  jiingere  sedimentaere  For- 
mationen. 


14  CARL   BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

K j  6  d  -  F j  o  rd  (Beitstad-Fjord). 

Auf  der  Nordseite  tritt  dunkler  Bronzitquarzdiorit   auf,  der  innen 
entlang    von   jiingeren    Formationen    iiberlagert   ist.     Die    Eruptive    hier 
schliessen  Schollen  von  Gneisgesteinen  ein. 
Cape  Camperdown. 

Hier  zeigen  sich  vvieder  Eruptivgesteine.  Diese  bestehen  aus  eigen- 
tumlichem,  grobkornigen,  dunkelgefarbten  Hyperstlienquarzkalisyenit. 
Feldspat,  Quarz,  Hornblende  und  Hypersthen  kann  man  makroskopisch 
beobachten.  Unter  dem  Mikroskop  zeigt  sich  derselbe  bestehend  aus: 

mikroperthitischem  Orthoklas 

etvas  mikropertitischem  Mikrolin 

Plagioklas 

Quarz 

dunkelgrauer  Hornblende 

Hypersthen 

Biotit 

accessoriscb  in  grosser  Menge  Apatit,  Zirkon  und  Erz 

sekundarem  Kalkspat  in  Rissen 

etwas  Mikropegmatit 

Der  Mikroperthit  ist  sehr  hiibsch  und  gut  entwickelt.  Derselhe 
kann  sich  an  einzelnen  Schnitten  dem  Kryptoperthit  nahernd  beobachtet 
werden.  Der  vesentlichste  Teil  des  Feldspates  ist  mikroperthitischer 
Orthoklas;  Mikroklin  ist  viel  seltener.  Der  Plagioklas  hat  iiberhaupt 
kleine  Ausldschungswinkel  und  ist  also  ziemlich  sauer.  Derselbe  findet 
sich  in  teilweise  grossen  Kornern  mit  vorziiglich  entwickelter  Zvvillings- 
streifung  nach  dem  Albitgesetz  vor,  seltener  nach  dem  Periklingesetz. 
Teilweise  kann  der  Plagioklas  in  Mikroperthit  eingeschlossen  angetroffen 
werden. 

Quarz  muss  in  einem  verhaltnismitssig  zeitigem  Stadium  ausgeschie- 
den  sein,  denn  man  findet  denselben  sehr  haufig  in  Mikroperthit  ein- 
geschlossen, dagegen  aber  nicht  in  Plagioklas;  kleine  runde  Quarzkorner 
liegen  wie  blinkende  Wassertropfen  im  Feldspat.  Ringsum  diese  Kor- 
ner  hat  der  Feldspat  oft  undulose  Ausloschung.  Oft  haben  mehrere 
Quarzkorner  gemeinschaftliche  Ausloschung.  Siehe  Taf.  I  fig.  2. 

Der  Hypersthen  liegt  meistens  in  langen  unregelmassigen  Streifen 
ringsum  die  Feldspat-  und  Quarz-Korner.  Dieser  ist  verhaltnismtissig 
stark  pleochroitisch,  doch  ist  derselbe  besonders  zu  einem  rotbraunen 
Produkte  sehr  umgewandelt.  Es  ist  wahrscheinlich,  dass  die  Hornblende 
aus  dem  Pyroxen  erstanden  ist,  da  diese  in  ahnlichen,  langen,  gebuch- 
teten  Slreifen  liegt,  und  oft  Reste  von  Pyroxen  umschliesst.  Der  Pyr- 


- 1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  15 

oxen  ist  von  einem  griinblauen  Rand  von  Hornblende  oft  umgeben. 
Ferner  scheint  es,  als  ob  die  genannten  rotbraunlichen  Umwandlungs- 
produkte  von  Pyroxen  teilweise  den  Character  der  Hornblende  haben. 
Sehr  haufig  umschliesst  die  Hornblende  Erz.  Dieselbe  tritt  in  grosseren 
Mengen  als  Pyroxen  auf.  Sie  ist  stark  pleochroitisch  (dunkelgriin, 
schwach  braunlich  -  -  heller  gri'mgelb,  schwach  braunlich)  und  hat  ca. 
7°  Ausloschungsschiefe.  Die  Structur,  die  eugranitisch  kornig  ist,  geht 
aus  Taf.  I  fig.  2,  hervor.  Uber  die  chemische  Zusammensetzung  siehe 
Seite  18. 

Die  Gesteine  am  Buchanan-Bay  und  Foulke-Fjord  sind  verhallnis- 
massig  wenig  gedruckt.  In  den  Diinnschliffen  ist  jedoch  zu  sehen,  dass 
undulose  Ausloschung  allgemein  ist,  irgend  welche  besonders  starke  mit 
Mortelstructurbildung  ist  aber  selten. 

III.    Das  Jones-Sund-Gebiet. 

Fram  passierte  die  ganze  Ostkiiste  des  Ellesmere-Landes  ohne  an- 
zulaufen,  dass  also  SCHEI  zwischen  Bairds-Fjord  und  Glacier-Sund  keine 
Beobachtungen  angestellt  hat.  Doch  scheint  er  die  Anschauung  genahrt 
zu  haben,  dass  diese  ganze  genannte  Strecke  von  ungefahr  derselben 
geologischen  Beschaffenheit  wie  die  oben  beschrieberien  Gegenden  von 
Smiths-Sund  ist.  Die  Wahrscheinlichkeit  hierfiir  scheint  auch  durch 
Untersuchung  der  mitgebrachlen  Proben  von  den  Gegenden  zwischen 
Frams-Fjord  und  Havne-Fjord  bekraftigt  zu  werden,  indem  sie  sich  als 
teilweise  helle,  etwas  rolliche  Granite,  teilweise  als  mehr  basische  Ge- 
steine zeigen.  Die  Granite  haben  dieselbe  Zusammensetzung  wie  die 
von  dem  nordlicheren  Gebiet  bei  Smiths-Sund,  namlich  teilweise  ver- 
haltnismassig  grobkornige  Gesteine  mit  iiberwiegend  mikroperthitischem 
Orthoklas  (Kjothaugen),  teilweise  Aplite  mit  uberwiegendem  Mikroklin 
(Reindeer  Pt.),  wahrend  die  mehr  basischen  Gesteine  nicht  so  basisch 
wie  die  entsprechenden  bei  Smiths-Sund  sind,  indem  sie  rnehr  Alka- 
lien  und  Kieselsaure  und  weniger  Kalk,  Magnesia  und  Eisenoxyde  ent- 
halten. 

Unter  dem  Mikroskop  zeigen  die  erwahnten  mehr  basischen  Ge- 
steine, dass  sie  bedeutende  Mengen  Alkalifeldspat,  namlich  mikroperthi- 
tischen  Orlhoklas  und  Mikroklin  samt  viel  Quarz  und  ziemlich  viel 
Plagioklas,  etwas  Bronzit,  ab  und  zu  etwas  Hornblende  und  Biotit  und 
accessorisches  Erz  und  Zirkon  enthalten.  Die  Structur  ist  wie  bei  den 
Quarzdioriten  am  Reindeer  Pt.  Analyse  No.  V,  Seite  18,  Havne-Fjord 
verglichen  mit  No.  II  vom  Reindeer  Pt.  zeigt  diese  Verhaltnisse. 


16  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Dieser  Bronzit  hat  schwacheren  Pleochroismus  als  der  Bronzit  in 
den  Quarzdioriten  am  Smiths-Sund;  Hypersthen  ist  selten.  Der  Bronzit 
ist  stark  iimgewandelt  und  von  ahnlichen  Fasern  wie  bei  den  Quarz- 
dioriten (Seite  7)  durchsetzt,  doch  sind  die  Fasern  gelblicher  und  zeigen 
Pleochroismus:  ,,Hellgelb —  dunkler  gelhbraunlich."  Es  scheint,  als  ob 
der  Bronzit  wesentlich  in  Biotit  und  teilvveise  in  Klorit  umgewandelt  ist. 
Diese  Umwandlung  ist  das  Resultat  einer  Wechselwirkung  zwischen 
Erz,  Bronzit  und  Feldspat.  Es  ist  ganz  gewohnlich,  einen  Kranz  eines 
dem  Biotit  ahnlichen  Minerales  ringsum  das  Erz,  bisweilen  zusammen 
mit  Titanomorphit  zu  sehen.  Hornblende  scheint  in  diesen  alkalireiche- 
ren  Gesteinen  seltener  zu  sein. 

Der  Plagioklas  in  diesen  mehr  basischen  Gesteinen  am  Jones-Sund 
ist  Oligoklas  mit  Zwillingsslreifung  nach  dem  Albitgesetz,  seltener  auch 
nach  dem  Periklingesetz. 

Die  Perthitstruktur  des  Alkalifeldspates  ist  meistens  sehr  deutlich, 
doch  sind  die  Albitstreifen  ab  und  zu  sehr  diinn,  jedoch  ohne  dass  die 
Structur  kryptoperthitisch  genannt  werden  kann.  Die  Gitterstructur  des 
Mikrolins  ist  oft  so  fein,  dass  eine  starke  Vergrosserung  notwendig  ist, 
um  dieselbe  deullich  zu  sehen. 

Der  Quarz  tritt  in  so  grossen  Mengen  auf,  dass  andere  Verfasser 
dieses  Gestein  wahrscheinlich  als  einen  Granit  bezeichnen  wiirden,  wofiir 
auch  der  hohe  Kieselsiiuregehalt  spricht,  der  in  dem  analysierten  Gestein 
71,85  °/0  betrug.  Es  scheint  jedoch,  als  ob  dies  nicht  so  ganz  berechtigt 
sei,  da  der  Alkaligehalt  bei  Graniten  selten  so  gering  ist  und  der  Kalk- 
gehalt  im  Allgemeinen  nicht  so  hoch.  Es  scheint  mir  mehr  berechtigt 
zu  sein,  dieses  Gestein  Adamellit  zu  nennen.  Gewiss  ist  der  Kalkgehalt 
etwas  niedriger  als  dies  der  Fall  bei  den  Gesteinen  ist,  die  Professor 
BROGGER  nAdamellit"  genannt  hat,  und  das  analysierte  Gestein  liegt  in 
Wirklichkeit  zwischen  Adamellit  und  Granit.  ROSENBUSCH  wurde  diese 
Gesteine  wahrscheinlich  zu  der  Charnockitreihe  zahlen.  Da  die  mikro- 
skopische  Untersuchung  indessen  das  Vorhandensein  von  verhaltnis- 
massig  vielem  Plagioklas  erweist,  und  da  die  chemische  Zusammensetz- 
ung  als  den  Adamelliten  naher  liegend  erachtet  werden  muss  als  den 
Graniten,  will  ich  dieses  Gestein  Adamellit  nennen,  und  des  character- 
istischen  Bronzitgehalles  wegen  Bronzitadamellit.  Einzelne  dieser  mit- 
gebrachten  Proben  enthielten  mehr  Plagioklas  und  miissen  als  mehr 
typische  Adamellite  bezeichnet  werden.  Der  Gehalt  von  dunklen  Mine- 
ralen  war  in  diesen  etwas  grosser. 

Es  fanden  sich  auch  Proben  mit  etwas  weniger  Quarzgehalt  vor, 
welche  den  Adamelliten  nahe  stehen.  Dagegen  fanden  sich  zwischen 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  17 

den  mitgebrachten  Proben  von  dem  Gelande  bei  Jones  Sund  beinahe 
keine  Gesteine,  die  als  Quarzdiorite  oder  Diorite  bezeichnet  werden  kon- 
nen;  dazu  war  die  Alkalifeldspatmenge  zu  gross.  Nur  eine  Probe,  nam- 
lich  die  von  Gone  Island,  muss  als  Quarzdiorit  bezeichnet  werden. 

Doch  darf  icb  dies  hiermit  nicht  fiir  abgemacht  ansehen,  dass  am 
Jones-Sund  nicht  sogar  noch  verhaltnismassig  viel  Quarzdiorit  und 
Diorit  wiirde  gefunden  werden  konnen,  indem  sich  in  SCHEI'S  Tage- 
biichern  keine  vollstandigen  Auskiinfte  dies  beziiglich  vorfinden.  Es  sieht 
nur  aus  ziemlich  sicher  zu  sein,  dass  der  Alkaligehalt  durchschnittlich 
holier  in  der  sudlicheren  als  in  der  nordlicheren  Gegend  ist.  Tektonisch 
scheint  auch  einiger  Unterschied  vorzuliegen,  indem  die  Gesteine  von 
Jones-Sund  ziemlich  stark  gedrilckt  sind.  Einige  haben  ein  gneisahnliches 
Aussehen  vvie  ein  Augengranit  auf  Cone-Island  und  bei  Frams-Fjord. 
Die  Feldspat-  und  Quarzkorner  sind  stark  zerquetscht  Mortelstructur 
ist  sehr  haufig,  indem  einzelne  Mineralkorner  in  einer  durch  Zermalm- 
ung  von  Feldspat  und  Quarz  gebildeten  feinkornigen  Masse  liegen.  Sehr 
haufig  wird  auch  neugebildeter  Mikropegmatit  gesehen,  besonders  in  der 
zerquetschten  Masse  um  grossere  Feldspat-  und  Quarzkorner  herum. 
Undulose  Ausloschung  ist  auch  ein  sehr  allgemeines  Phanomen.  In 
dieser  Verbindung  ist  es  auch  von  Interesse  darauf  aufzupassen,  dass 
Diabasgange  am  Jones-Sund  in  bedeutender  Anzahl  auftreten.  Die  Auf- 
schliisse,  die  von  SCHEI'S  Tagebuchern  ilber  gegenseitiges  Auftreten  und 
Verhaltnis  dieser  Gesteine  eingeholt  werden  konnen,  sind  wenige.  Soviel 
scheint  jedoch  daraus  hervorzugehen,  dass  der  helle  bis  rotliche  Granit 
das  mehr  basische  Gestein,  den  Bronzitadamellit,  durchsetzt. 

An  der  Smidje-Bugt,  Havnen,  Havnefjord,  sollen  namlich  laut 
Notizen  ,,aplitische  Granitgange  das  Urgebirge  durchsetzen". 

Die  Stellen,  von  wo  Proben  von  Bronziladamellit  mitgebracht  sind, 
sind:  Havnen  (Hafen),  Havne-Fjord,  wo  Fram  im  zweiten  Winter- 
quartier  lag;  Skreia,  Vestre-Sund,  Havne-Fjord;  Gone  Island,  von  wo 
auch  Hypersthenquarzdiorit. 


Chemische  Zusammenseizung. 

SCHEI  hat  von  den  oben  besprochenen  Gesteinen  teils  von  den 
Gegenden  auf  beiden  Seiten  des  Smith's-Sundes  teils  von  der  Gegend 
am  Jones-Sund  folgende  Analysen  ausgefiihrt: 


18 


CARL  BUGGE. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

SiO-3    .... 

52,75 

63,22 

65,13 

57,92 

71,85 

70,44 

Ti02   .... 
AI203  .... 
Fe203  .... 
FeO  

'    28,63 

0,74 
17,46 
1,35 
3,40 

1,12 
15.50 
1,77 
4,17 

2,13 
16,71 
4,03 

4,26 

0,58 
15,25 
1,04 
2,56 

0,32 
14,69 
1,45 
1,17 

MnO  .... 

0,18 

Spur 

0,13 

Spur 

MgO   
CaO  

4,80 
7,86 

2,05 
4,91 

0,54 
3,98 

1,70 
3,86 

0,63 
2,46 

0,74 
1,43 

Na20  .  ,  .  .. 
KoO  

4,93 
1,80 

5,12 
1,31 

2,70 
4,53 

3,68 
3,50 

3,18 
3,04 

3,66 
4,61 

HoO  

0,41 

0,60 

0,26 

1,19 

0,17 

1,14 

P-jCK. 

0,09 

0,07 

0,06 

0,16 

Spur 

FeS2    .... 

(1,50) 

0,44 

0,62 

0,64 

100,67 

100,38 

99,% 

100,76 

99,65 

1  ist  Norit,  Gape  Rutherford  Buchanan  Bay. 
II  ist  Hypersthenquarzdiorit,  Reindeer  Point,  Foulke  Fj. 

III  ist  Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit.  Cape  Camperdown  Bache  Pens. 

IV  ist  ein  Kersantitgang,  Kjethaugen,  Pirn  Isle,  Rice  Strait. 
V  ist  Hypersthenadamellit,  Havnen,   Havnefjord  Jones-Sund. 

VI  ist  Granitaplit,  Nordostpoint,  Pirn  Isle  Rice  Strait. 

Die  Analysen  I,  II,  III  und  V  von  den  Tiefgesteinen  in  der  Tabelle 
zeigen,  dass  diese  eine  Serie  von  verhaltnismassig  basi- 
schen  Gesteinen,  Norite,  durch  intermediare  Gesteine,  hier 
als  Bronzit-  (oder  Hy persthen-)Quarzdiori te  und  Banatite 
bezeichnet,  samt  Hy  persthenquarzsyenile,  bis  zu  saueren 
granitischen  Gesteinen,  hier  als  Bronzit-  (oder  Hyper- 
sthen-)Adamellite  bezeichnet,  bilden.  Characteristisch  fiir 
diese  ist  ein  mehr  oder  minder  hervortretender  Gehalt  von  rhomb- 
ischem  Pyroxen  (Bronzit  oder  Hypersthen)  und  bei  den  mittelsauren 
und  sauren  Gliedern  ein  geringerer  oder  grosserer  Gehalt  eines  eigen- 
arligen  Mikroperthites.  In  chemischer  Hinsicht  ist  es  characteristisch, 
dass  der  Tonerdegehalt  innerhalb  der  ganzen  Serie  wenig  variiert 
und  dementsprechend  auch  die  Summe  der  Alkalien  und  des  Kalkes 
bei  den  basischen  Gliedern  nicht  viel  grosser  ist  als  bei  den  sauren; 
der  Natrongehalt  ist  noch  hoher  oder  ebenso  hoch  bei  den  basi- 
schen Gliedern  wie  bei  den  sauren,  der  Kaligehalt  stark  abnehmend 
bei  den  basischen  Gliedern,  wahrend  umgekehrt  der  Kalkgehalt  bei 
diesen  hoher  ist,  jedoch  aber  auch  verhaltnismassig  hoch  bei  den  sauren 


1898- 1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE. 


19 


Gliedern.  Der  Gehalt  an  Eisenoxyden  ist  auch  meistens  bei  den  sauren 
ungefahr  ebenso  hoch  wie  bei  den  basischen  Gliedern. 

Diese  eigenliimliche  Serie  ist  schon  lange  von  Norwegen  bekannt, 
von  wo  dieselbe  namlich  von  J.  H.  L.  VOGT  1  und  spater  ausfohrlich 
von  C.  F.  KoLDEiiup2  von  dessen  grossem,  sudwestlichen  Gebiete  dern 
Ekersund-Soggendals-Feld,  sudostlich  von  Jaderen,  beschrieben 
ist.  Ein  anderes,  grosses  Gebiet  ist  von  TH.  H.  HOLLAND  von  der 
Prasidentschaft  Madras  und  von  T.  L.  WALKER  VON  KALAHANDI  in  Os t 
Indien8  beschrieben.  Ausserdem  sind  hierher  gehorende  Gesteine  von 
Loon  Lake  in  Adirondacks  (von  H.  P.  GUSHING)  und  von  Diana,  New 
York,  von  C.  H.  SMYTH  jr.,  sowie  von  Canada  beschrieben.  Ganz  kurz- 
lich  ist  dieselbe  Serie  noch  weiter  von  der  Elfenbeinkuste  inAfrika 
von  A.  LACROIX  4  beschrieben.  Im  Ekersund — Soggendals-Felde  sowohl 
wie  in  Indien  und  Canada  ist  diese  Gesteinserie,  die  von  ROSENBUSCH 
als  die  ,,Charnockitserie"  bezeichnet  ist,  an  das  Vorkommen  von 
Feldern  von  Labradorstein  (Anortosit)  gekniipft.  ROSENBUSCH  hat  daher 
kurzlich5  angedeutet,  dass  diese  Gesteinreihe  mil  Anortosit-Hypersthen- 
granit  (Charnockit)  als  Endglieder  als  eine  dritte  Hauptreihe  der  Tief- 
gesteine  (Magmen),  beigeordnet  mit  seiner  Alkalireihe  und  seiner  Kalk- 
alkalireihe,  anzusehen  sein  sollten. 

Von  Ellesmere-Land  sind  bisher  Felder  von  Anortosit  ebenso  wenig 
bekannt  wie  von  dem  von  LACROIX  beschriebenen  Gebiete  an  der 
Elfenbeinkuste  in  Afrika.  Die  Endglieder  der  Tiefgesteine  dieser  Serie 
.sind  hier  Norit  und  Charnockit  (Hypersthengranit). 


I 

H 

III 

IV 

SiO->  

52,75 

53,50 

71,85 

71,80 

TiOo  

2,25 

0,58 

0,26 

Alo08.  , 

15.20 

15,25 

14,90 

Fe203    .... 
FeO    

28,63 

5,40 
6,93 

1,04 
2,56 

1,10 
1,08 

MnO  

0,18 

i   Geol.  Foren.  i  Stockholm,  Forhandl.  B.  X11I,  1891,  S.  489-505. 

3  Die  Labradorf'elsen  d.  westlich.  Norwegens,  Bergens  Museum,  Jahrbuch  1896. 

3  Journ.    of  the    Asiatic    Soc.    of  Bengal    LXII,    part    II,    No.  3,  1893,  und  spater 

ausfiihrlicher    im    Mem.    of    the    Geol.    Surv.    of   India    XXVII,  2;    (1900)    samt 

XXXIII,  3;  (1902). 
*   Compt.  rend.  t.  150,  p.  18.  (1910). 
5  Elemente  d.  Gesteinslehre  3te  Ausg.  (1910)  p.  230. 


CARL  BUGGE. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

Transport 
MgO  

4,80 

4,95 

0,63 

039 

CaO    

7,86 

560 

2,46 

2,20 

NaoO  

4,93 

4,35 

3,18 

4.17 

KoO          .  .  . 

1,80 

0,95 

3,04 

4  11 

H->0    

0.41 

0,50 

0,60 

p.^Oo  

0,09 

009 

(FeSa)   

(1,50) 

99.7-2 

100,59 

100,61 

In  obiger  Tabelle  sind  des  Vergleiclies  wegen  von  den  Endglie- 
dern  der  Charnockitserie  auf  Ellesmere-Lnnd  (nach  SCHEI)  und  von  der 
Elfenbeinkflste  (nach  LACROIX)  Analysen  anfgefiihrt.  I  ist  Norit  von 
Buchanan-Bay,  Ellesmere-Land;  II  Norit  von  der  Grotte  auf  Mont  Momy, 
Elfenbeinktiste;  III  ist  Hypersthenadamellit  (Charnockit)  von  Havne- 
Fjord,  Ellesmere-Land;  IV  Hyperslhengranit  (Charnockit)  von  Mont  Zan 
nahe  Zagone",  Elfenbeinkiiste.  Die  Ahnlichkeit  in  der  Zusammensetzung 
ist,  wie  man  sieht,  sehr  gross. 

Was  die  dazwischenliegenden  Typen  betrifft,  so  giebt  es 
Analogien  zu  deren  chemischer  Zusammensetzung  sovvohl  zvvischen  den 
Gesteinen,  die  innerhalb  der  Felder  der  Norit-Charnockitserie  auftreten, 
wie  zwischen  Gesteinen,  die  als  nSyeniteu  oder  Granite,  (Banatite)  u.  s.  \v. 
angefuhrt  werden,  \vie  aus  folgender  Tahelle  ersichtlich  ist : 


I 

U 

III 

IV 

V 

VI 

SiOj    .... 

65,13 

64,35 

6565 

65,87 

64,31 

64,62 

Ti02    .... 

1,12 

- 

— 

0,43 

0,53 

0,84 

A1203  .... 

15.50 

15,46 

16.84 

14,88 

15.72 

16,46 

Fe303  .... 
FeO  

1.77 
4,17 

7,50 

4,01 

1,77 
3,11 

1,62 
2,94 

1,82 
2,14 

MnO    .... 

/ 

/ 

0,12 

0,12 

MgO    

0,54 

0,50 

0,13 

2,93 

2,17 

1,10 

CaO  

3,98 

3,58 

2.47 

4,61 

4,24 

2,39 

Na20  .... 

2,70 

3,28 

5,27 

2,12 

2,76  ' 

4,57 

KoO  

4,53 

3,54 

5,04 

4,22 

4,01- 

5,21 

HoO  

0,26 

0,30 

0,83 

1,01 

0,52 

P205   .... 

wyw 

0,14 

0.21 

FeS2    .... 

0,62 

Ml,  63) 

- 

0,19 

100,32 

99.84 

99,71 

100,77 

99,63 

100,19 

Ti02  +  Zr02 


1898-1902.  No.  22. j     PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  21 

I  ist  SCHEI'S  ,,Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit"  von  C.  Camperdown,  Elles- 

mere-Land. 
II  ist  KOLDERUP'S  „ Hornblendebanatit  von  Dypvik  bei  Farsund. 

III  ist    sogenannter    nHypersthengranitu    von    Diana,  New- York,  von 
C.  H.  SMYTH  jr.  beschrieben. 

IV  ist  ,,Syenit;<  von  Wachberg,    Droschkan,   Schlesien,  von  H.  FRANK 
beschrieben,  (Neu.  Jahrb.  1890,  I,  p.  218). 

V  ist  sogenannter  rButtegranit",  ein  Hornblendebanatit  von  Atlantia 
Mine,  Butte,  Montana,  analysiert  von  H.  N.  STOKES,  (Bull.  No.  168. 
U.  S.  G.  S.  p.  117;  1900). 

VI  ist  sogenannter  ,,Windsoril",  ein  hypidiomorphkorniges  Ganggestein 
in  basischem  ,,Biotit-Augit-Hornblende-Diorit"  in  Ascutney  Moun- 
tain, Vermont,  von  R.  A.  DALY  beschrieben  (Bull,  of  the  U.  S.  G. 
Surv.  No.  209  p.  45  (1903)  *. 

Von  diesen  Gesteinen  sind  No.  I  und  No.  Ill  Hypersthengesteine, 
wahrend  No.  II,  der  in  geologischer  Verbindung  mit  Hypersthengesteinen 
auftritt,  selbst  ein  ,,Hornblendebanatit"  ist;  chemisch  stehen  jedoch  No.  II 
und  No.  Ill  entfernter  von  dem  Hypersthengestein  von  C.  Camperdown, 
als  dies  der  Fall  mit  No.  IV  und  V  ist,  wovon  No.  IV  zu  den  schlesi- 
schen  Syeniten  gehort,  die  z.  B.  von  ROSENBUSCH  zu  den  typischen  Horn- 
blendesyeniten  der  Plauen-Type  (Alkalikalksyenite)  gerechnet  werden, 
welche,  soweit  bekannt  ist,  geologisch  zusammen  mit  Hypersthen- 
Gesteinen  von  der  Norit-Charnockitreihe  auftreten.  No.  VI,  der  ,,Wind- 
sorit"  ist,  wie  zu  ersehen  ist,  in  seiner  Zusammensetzung  dem  Hyper- 
sthengranit  von  Diana,  N.  Y.  ausserordentlich  nahestehend,  enthalt  aber 
doch  keinen  Hypersthen,  aber  hauptsachlich  nur  Biotit  und  Spuren  von 
Pyroxen  und  Hornblende  neben  Feldspate  und  Quarz.  Das  basische 
Gestein,  das  den  Hauptbestand  in  Ascutney-Mountain  bildet  und  womit 
der  Windsorit  genetisch  zusammengehorend  ist,  wird  von  ROSENBUSCH 
(Mikr.  Physiogr.  d.  mass.  Gesteine,  4te  Aufl.,  1907,  II,  1,  p.  399)  als  zu 
der  rEssexitfamilie"  gehorend  bezeichnet,  wenn  auch  irgend  welche  un- 
gewohnlichen  Glieder  derselben  reprasentierend.  Wie  man  sieht,  ist  die 
chemische  Zusammensetzung  des  WTindsorites  indessen  so  gut  als  mit 
der  Zusammensetzung  des  von  ROSENBUSCH  als  ,,Hyperslhengranit"  an- 
gefiihrten  und  als  ein  mittleres  Glied  der  Charnockitserie  aufgefassten 
Gesteines  von  Diana,  New  York,  identisch  (ibid.  p.  70).  Der  Windsorit 
enthalt  indessen  keinen  Hypersthen,  besteht  aber  aus  Plagioklas  mit 
Orthoklas  und  Mikroperthit  samt  Quarz,  und  als  herrschendes,  dunkles 


1   Siehe  aucli  F.  LOVVINSON-LESSING,    Petr.  LJnters.  im    Centr.  Kaukasus,  Verb.  d.  k. 
Russ.  Min.  Ges.  B.  XLII  p.  248  (1905). 


22  CARL  BUGGE.  SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Mineral  aus  Biolit  mil  ganz  untergeordnetem  Diopsid  und  Hornblende. 
Diese  Verhaltnisse  scheinen  zu  zeigen,  dass  die  Gesteine  der  Charnockit- 
reihe  teils  mil  den  Gabbrogesteinen  (und  in  saueren  Gliedern  mil  Alkali- 
kalksyeniten  und  Alkalikalkgraniten)  und  andrerseits  auch  mit  den 
Gesteinen  der  Essexitreihe  nahe  verwandt  sein  miissen  und  daher  auch 
als  Differentiationsprodukte  von  Mag  men  beider  Reihen  auftreten  konnen 
mtissen.  Dieses  scheint  auch  aus  den  Erfahrungen  in  den  nordnorwegi- 
schen  Gebieten  hervorzugehen. 


Hypabyssische  Gesteine  und  Deckengesteine. 

In  dem  von  SCHEI  bereisten  Gebiete  giebt  es  solche  teils  als  Gauge, 
teils  als  lakkolithgeformle  Intrusive  und  teils  als  echte  Laven  auftretend. 
Unten  wird  das  mitgeteilt,  was  ich  iiber  diese  Gesteine  in  SCHEI'S  Tage- 
biichern  gefunden  habe  und  von  Interesse  sein  kann.  Diese  Notizen 
werden  von  besonderer  Bedeulung.  fur  zukiinftige  Geologen  sein,  die 
dazu  kommen  konnen,  dieselben  Gegenden  zu  befahren.  Diese  Notizen 
werden  in  chronologischer  Ordnung  wiedergegeben,  wodurch  Aufschliisse 
iiber  eine  betreffende  Lokalitiit  nicht  immer  in  unmittelbarer  Reihenfolge 
zu  stehen  kommen. 

Auszug  aus  Schei's  Tagebiichern. 

Basalt  (eigentlich  Diabas)  tritt  bei  Cape  Camperdown  auf,  wo  der- 
selbe  nach  SCHEI  eine  gesammte  Machtigkeit  von  ca.  100  Melern  haben 
soil.  Hier  ist  die  Machtigkeit  am  grossten;  bei  Fort  Juliane  im  Hayes- 
Sund  ist  diese  viel  geringer  und  im  Beitstad-Fjord  und  im  Innersten  des 
Flaglers-Fjords  wird  kein  Diabas  vorgefunden.  Beim  Cape  Camperdown 
tritt  der  Diabas  iiber  der  untersten  Sandsteinkonglomeratetage  auf, 
deren  Machtigkeit  kaum  100  Meter  iibersteigt. 

Uber  seine  Excursion  im  Foulke-Fjord  sagt  SCHEI:  ,,Ca.  100  Meter 
iiber  dem  Meere  war  die  Grenze  von  dem  Urgebirge  zu  sehen,  die  von 
dem  granitdioritischen  Urgebirgseruptiv,  unmiltelbar  an  der  Grenze 
stark  griin  gefarbt,  epidotisiert,  kloritisiert,  gebildet  wurde.  Auf  diesem 
Eruptive  liegt  ein  teilweise  schwach  konglomeratischer  Sandstein,  worin 
griingefarbte  Schlieren  wie  auch  diinne  Banke  eines  dichten,  hellroten, 
kalksteinahnlichen  Gesteines  vorkommen.  Hoher  oben  ist  der  Sandstein 
teils  rotbraun,  teils  hell  rotlichweiss.  Uber  diesem  steht  auf  den  Kiim- 
men  Diabas".  Die  Machtigkeit  des  Sandsteines  wird  auf  120—130  Meter 
geschatzt.  Im  Foulke  Fjord  kommt  mehr  Diabas  als  bei  Cape  Camper- 


1898  -  1902.  No.  22.]      PETROGRAPH1SCHE  RESULTATE. 


down  vor.    SCHEI    hat    silurische    und    vvahrscheinlich    auch   kambrische 
Fossilien  von  den  Lagen,  wo  dieser  Diabas  auftritt,  mitgebracht. 

Uber  seine  Reise  liings  der  Sudseite  des  Ellesmere-Landes  sagt 
SCHEI  unter  anderem: 

,,Die  Excursion  langs  der  Westseite  des  Fjords  innerhalb  Cone  Island. 

Urgebirge,  wesentlich  Augengneis  und  Augengranitschiefer  ist  vor- 
herrschendes  Gestein,  in  den  Hohen  aber  steht  die  sedimentare  Formation 
dureli  zahlreiche,  tiefe,  stark  ausgepragte  Dislokationen  aufbewahrt.  Das 
Profil  ist  heller  Sandstein  mil  kleinknolligem  Kalk  und  hierin  wahr- 
scheinlich  auch  dunkle,  rotbraune  Sandsteine  samt  Diabas. 

Uber  dem  Sandstein  folgt  ein  gelbgrauer,  dolomitischer  Kalkstein 
mil  hellem,  feinkornigem  Sandstein;  holier  habe  ich  hier  nicht  kommen 
konnen.  Basalt  fand  ich  nicht  anstehend,  in  losen  Blocken  auf  einenv 
bestimmten  Niveau  aber,  das  ihr  Ausgehendes  unter  dem  Talus,  in 
geringer  Machtigkeit  iibrigens,  zu  bezeichnen  schien. 

Bei  Frams-Fjord  verandert  das  Land  seinen  Charakter. 

Die  Ostseite  des  Frams-Fjords  wird  von  einer  steil  abfallenden 
hohen  Wand  gebildet,  worauf  Kalksteine  und  Sandsteine  wie  eine  Speck- 
lage  auf  der  steilen  Urgebirgsmauer  lagern.  Dieser  schmale  Frams-Fjord 

er  konnte  ebenso  gut  ein  norwegischer  Westlandsfjord  mit  steilen 
Ufern  und  engen  Talern,  die  von  dernselben  aufsteigen,  sein  —  ,  bildet, 
wie  gesagt,  eine  ausgepragte  Grenze  zwischen  zwei  grundverschiedenen 
Teilen  des  Landes.  Das  Land  ostlich  davon  ist  namlich  vollstandig  mit 
Inlandseis  iiberdeckt,  so  dass  ntir  die  aussersten,  steilen  Felsenwande, 
mit  denen  das  hohe  Inlandsplateau  gegen  die  See  abfallt,  aus  dem  Eis- 
mantel  hervorstecken. 

Westlich  davon  haben  wir  Fjord  auf  Fjord  und  Tal  auf  Tal.  Nur 
an  einzelnen  Stelien  sieht  man  Gletscher  sich  nach  der  See  ergiessen. 
Das  Land  ist  auf  der  Seite  des  Fjords  eisfrei  und  vor  dem  Kiistenrande 
ist  meistens  ein  flacher  Strand.  Dieses  Land  spricht  dem  Aussehen  nach 
viel  mehr  zu  und  dies  ist  auch  so  der  Fall  nach  unserer  gegenwartigen 
Bekanntschaft  mit  demselben,  indem  es  sich  vor  dem  unfruchtbaren  Eisr 
land  durch  eine  reiche  Vegetation  und  einen  iiberraschenden  Wildbestand 
an  Hasen,  Auerochsen  und  Schneehuhnern  auszeichnet". 

Elxkursion  nach  0en  (der  Insel).  Das  Tal  zwischen  den 
Landzungen1. 

Hier  tritt  auf  der  inneren  Landzunge  ein  ca.  20  Meter  machtiger 
Gang  im  Urgebirge  auf.  Von  hier  ist  Ganggrenze  (0.75  m.  von  der 
Grenze)  und  Gangmitte  mitgebracht.  Im  Tale  befinden  sich  2  grossere 

1  Hiermit  ist   sicherlich  das  Tal  auf  dem  Festland  nordwestlicli  von  Skreia  genieint. 


24  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Dislokationen  mil  Sprunghohe  von  mehreren  hundert  Metern  und  mil 
Streichen  WSW.— ONO.  senkrecht  auf  das  Fallen  im  Gesteine,  das  auch 
hier  NNW.  ist.  Das  Gestein  ist  tibrigens  Kalkstein  mit  Mergelschiefer. 

Excursion  in  den  Einschnitt  beim  Havnefjord. 

Die  Gesteine  sind  von  Spiegel-  und  Gleitflachen  nahe  den  grossen 
Verwerfungen,  die  den  Silur  gegen  das  Urgebirge  abgrenzen,  durchsetzt. 
In  dem  sandigen,  schlierigen  Sandstein  giebt  es  seltene  und  kleine  Spuren 
von  Fossilien,  Schild-  und  Backenstiicke  von  Trilobiten. 

Im  Urgebirge  kommen  ausser  kleinen,  an  der  Grenze  sehr  dichten, 
dunklen  Gangen  auch  noch  andere  einer  etwas  alteren  Type  vor  und 
auch  diese  mit  Grenzstructur.  Diese  sind  in  der  Regel  ca.  10—20  m. 
machtig  und  streichen  in  alien  Richlungen  1. 

In  der  Richtung  iiber  wden  gronne  Flek"2  binaus  kommt  ein 
grosser,  dunkler  Gang  im  Urgebirge  vor,  Fallen  senkrecht.  Bei  ,,Smedje- 
bugten"2  wurden  dunkle,  kleinkornige  Gauge  oder  vielleicht  nur 
Schlieren  angetroffen,  worin  wieder  feinkornige  und  dichte  Schlieren  auf- 
treten  --  ausserdem  pegrnatische  und  aplitische  Gauge. 

Auf  der  Westseite  von  ,,Vestre-Sund  "  3  kommt  grauer  Gneis  mit 
grosseren  und  kleineren  Diabasgangen  mit  verschiedenem,  doch  meistens 
nord-siidlichem  Streichen  vor.  Von  einern  20m.  machligem  Gange  wurden 
Proben  mitgenommen.  Der  Gneis  fuhrt  Schlieren  von  hellroten,  klein- 
kornigen  Gangen. 

In  Stordalen4  kornmen  auch  Diabasgange  vor,  sovvohl  wie  im 
Sund  und  uberall  der  Gneisgranit. 

nDen  20.  Marz  1901.  Kap  Sydvest  ist  von  einer  Serie  heller. 
reiner  Sandsteine  in  2  Stufen  aufgebaut,  die  mit  einem  Fallen  von  ca. 
25°  gegen  nordwest  liegen.  Zwischendrin  in  den  Sandsteinschichten  sind 
zahlreiche  Intrusive  von  Diabas  eingekeilt.  Im  Kap  Sydvest  kommen 
3  solche  von  einer  respektiven  Machtigkeit  von  ca.  30,  25  und  30  m. 
vor.  Der  Sandstein  ist  kontaktmetamorphosiert. 

Den  23.  April  1901.  Am  dstlichen  Kap  des  Trold -Fjords  lagert 
ein  heller  Sandstein  mit  sudlichem  Fallen,  von  Kalkstein  oder  Sandstein 
mit  einem  etwas  anderem  Fallen  discordant  Qberlagert.  Die  Richtung 
kann  nicht  genau  angegeben  vverden.  Ob  die  Discordanz  ursprunglich 
oder  dynamisch  ist,  kann  auch  nicht  abgemacht  werden.  Etwas  ausser- 
halb  des  Kaps  streicht  ein  senkrecht  stehender  20—30  m.  machtiger 
Gang  von  Hyperitoddens  Gestein  (Diabas). 

1  Einen  solchen  Unterschied  habe  ich  in  dem  Material  nicht  aufweisen  konnen. 
-  Nahe  dem  Winterquartier  im  Havne-Fjord. 

3  Der  Sund  westlich  von  Skreia. 

4  Das  Tal  nordlich  von  Havnefjord. 


1898-1902.  No.  22.1       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  25 


Den  4.  April  1901.  An  der  westlichen  Seite  des  Fjords  lagern 
diuikle  Kalksteine  mil  einem  nordwestlichen  Fallen  von  ca.  30 — 40°. 
Es  1st  eine  Falte  zu  sehen." 

SCHEI  spricht  auch  von  Discordanz  voni  Innern  des  Fjords.  Das 
Fallen  im  Tale  ist  isoklin,  das  Piofil  zeigt  aber,  dass  sich  litngs  der 
Oslseite  eine  nordlich  verlaufende  Faltungsverwerfung  mit  30 — 50  m. 
mftchtiger  Brecciebildung  zieht.  Das  Fallen  ostlich  von  diesem  Kalkstein, 
Kalksandslein  und  weissem  und  rotem  Quarzsandstein  scheint  nicht 
gerade  entgegengesetzt  aber  etwas  ostlicher  zu  sein.  Der  rote  Sandstein 
fiihrt  Fossilreste.  Vom  grauen  Kalkstein  eine  Becherkoralle  und  vom 
weissen  Kalksandstein  ein  Gasteropod  mitgebracht. 

Das  Tal  nach  der  Wasserscheide  hinauf  (Troldfjordeidet)  bot 
zuerst  den  roten  Sandstein  dar,  hoher  katn  wieder  Kalkstein,  wovon 
sich  der  dunkle  von  hellem  Kalkstein  und  Sandstein  iiberlagert  wieder 
in  dem  Canon  zeigte,  der  von  der  Wasserscheide  nach  NO.  oder  NNO. 
hinunterfuhrte.  Das  Fallen  auf  der  ganzen  Strecke  sudostlich.  Tiefer 
im  Tale  nehmen  helle,  leicht  zerbrockelnde  Sandsteine  die  tlachen, 
runden  Oberflachenformen  ein  und  einige  wenige  Kilometer  vom  Fjord 
standen  die  grauen  Quarzsandsteine  mit  schwarzen,  weichen  Schiefer- 
linsen  voll  von  Pflanzenfossilien.  Troldfjordeidet  liegt  259  m.  iiber  dem 
Meere. 

Den  2.  Mai  1901.  Am  westlichen  Lande  (zwischen  Maiodden 
und  Depotodden)  stehen  helle  Sandsteine  mit  Inlrusiven  von  Cha- 
racter und  Auftreten  wie  am  Kap  Sydvest  an.  Das  ostliche  Land  ist 
Sandstein  mit  Diabas-Intrusiven.  (Mit  dem  ostlichen  Lande  ist  sicherlich 
Bluamanden  gemeint.) 

Den  12.  Mai  1901.  Auf  einem  Kap  (sicherlich  Smergrautberget) 
treten  machtige  Intrusive  auf,  die  alle  anderen  Gesteine  verdrangen. 
Es  scheinen  Gange  von  einer  anderen  Zusammensetzung  und  die  Intru- 
sive durchsetzend  aufzutreten. .  Aus  den  Notizen  scheint  hervorzugehen, 
dass  an  der  Westseite  von  Mokka-Fjord  Diabas  auftreten  soil. 

Den  25.  Mai  1901.  Zwischen  den  2  westlichen  Landzungen  auf 
Storoen  stehen  Kalksteine  und  schwarze  Mergelschiefer  in  haufiger 
Wechsellagerung  mit  sudostlichem  Fallen  an.  In  diesem  Profil  giebt  es 
haufig  lentikulare  und  deckenformige  Intrusive  von  verschiedenen  Diabas- 
varietaten.  An  der  siidwestlichen  Landzunge  auf  Stor0en  ist  wesentlich 
Diabas,  nur  oben  tritt  die  Lagenfolge  von  grauem  mergeligem  Schiefer 
und  sandigern  Kalk  in  haufiger  Wechsellagerung  hervor.  Hier  waren 
erratische  Urgebirgsgerolle  und  Muschelf ragmen te  in  einer  Hohe  von 
ca.  25  rn.  iiber  dem  Meere. 


26  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Den  26.  Mai  1901.  Whitsunday-Bay.  Im  Tale  davor  sind 
Diabasintrusive  haufig.  Eigentiimlich  fur  die  Landschaft  ringsum  den 
Fjord  sind  senkrechte  Gange  von  einer  Machtigkeit  von  20,  30,  50  m., 
ungefahr  Nord  — Sild  streichend,  wahrscheinlich  ungefahr  dem  Streichen 
der  Schiefer  nach." 

SCHEI  bespricht  Gebirge  mil  Kammen  von  Diabasgangen.  Keine 
Fossilien,  aber  ein  Stuck  echter  Lignit  von  ca.  IVa"  Machtigkeit. 

wDen  30.  Mai  1901.  Auf  der  Halbinsel  Raanes,  sicherlich  etwas 
nordlich  von  Harenesset,  lagern  machtige  Intrusive  mil  Schollen  von 
stark  kontaktmetamorphosiertem  Sandstein.  Sicberlich  mehrere  iiber- 
einander  liegende  Injektionen  und  keine  gewaltige  Serie. 

Den  3.  Juni-1901.  Im  Innern  des  Sk  aare-Fjords  schienen  die 
Profile  wesenllich  von  Sandslein  und  Scbiefer  und  ganz  wenige  Diabas- 
intrusiven  zusammengesetzt  zu  sein.  Diese  vverden  am  Isten  Gletscher 
haufiger  und  machen  bei  ^Fjordbuglen"  (wahrscheinlich  MAaklungen") 
das  ganze  Profil  in  einer  Machtigkeit  von  2 — 3000  Fuss  aus.  Hier  haben 
sie  absolut  ihr  starkstes  Auftreten. 

Den  4.  Juni  1901.  An  der  siidvvestlichen  Landzunge  auf  der  siid- 
lichen  Ulv0  schiesst  eine  linsenformige  Diabasmasse  schrag  durch  den 
Sandstein  und  die  Schieferreihe,  Bruchstiicke  umgebender  Gesteine  um- 
schliessend,  auf.  Das  Fallen  dieser  Diabasmasse  ist  hier  ungefahr  NNW. 
Nordlich  davon  findet  sich  der  Diabas  massenvveise. 

Im  Gletscher-Fjord  sind  die  Gesteine  vvesentlich  Sandstein  und 
das  Fallen  ist  iiberall  ungestort  flach  NW.  Intrusive  sind  selten  und  klein. 

Den  24.  Juni  1902.  Auf  der  Nordseite  in  der  Bergwand,  die  im 
ostlichen  Fjord  (sicherlich  Slidrefjord)  zu  sehen  ist,  scheinen  Intrusive 
vvieder  etvvas  mehr  hervorzutreten.  Auf  der  Strecke  von  Maiodden 
bis  Depot  Kap  sovvie  auf  der  Ostseite  vom  Kap  Separation1  ist 
das  Fallen  ostlich.  Beim  Kap  Separation  ist  der  Sandstein  ziernlich 
rein  mil  verhaltnismassig  weniger  Inlrusiven  als  nach  Si'iden.  Am  west- 
lichen  und  siidlichen  Teil  von  Isfjeldodden  ist  das  Fallen  im  Sand- 
stein nordwestlich,  am  ostlichen  und  nordlichen  Teil  aber  ostlich.  Intru- 
sive sind  unlergeordnet. 

Den  27.  April  1902.  Blaafjeld  \vird  von  einer  Serie  von  zu 
unterst  liegenden  machtigen  Biinken  von  blaugrauen,  dichten,  gelbgrau 
vervvitternden  Kalkstein  samt  grauem  Tonschiefer  aufgebaut;  daruber 
liegen  feine  Tonschiefer,  worin  derselbe  Lamellibranchiat  wie  auf  dem 
Ammonitberge  massenweise  vorkam. 


1  Das  Kap  bei  Blaamanden. 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]      PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULT  ATE. 

Hierin  giebt  es  Diabasintrusive,  einige  davon  ca.  100  Fuss  miichtig, 
mehrere  kleiner.  Die  obersten  von  diesen  kamen  im  Kalkstein  vor. 

Bei  der  westlichen  Landzunge  des  Ha  re -Fjords  steht  Diabas- 
intrusiv  im  dunklen  Schiefer  an.  Weiter  westlich  wiederholt  sich  das- 
selbe  Profil  mit  Kalkstein,  sandigem  Schiefer  und  mit  Diabasintrusiven 
und  mit  lotrechten  NW.  oder  WNW.  streichenden  Ganger). 

Gegen  Ottas-Fjord  wiederholt  sich  Blaamandens  Profil  mit  starken 
Faltungen.  Diabasintrusive  giebt  es  hier  westlich  ebenfalls  in  der 
Schieferpartie. 

Den  9.  Mai  1902.  An  Land  auf  eine  der  Inseln  bei  Lands-Lokk. 
Die  dunklen  Eruptive  sind  absolut  tiberwiegend. 

Das  westliche  Land  ,,0en"  (Sorte  Veeg l)  bietet  gegen  NO.  eine 
lange,  dunkle,  beinahe  unversehrte  Wand  dar,  nur  Einschnitte  fiihren 
nach  der  Senknng  im  Plateau  hinauf.  Der  siidliche,  kleinere  Teil  ist 
von  sedimentaren  Gesteinen  in  gegen  S. — SO.  flach  fallenden  Schichten 
mit  ungestorter  Schichtung  aufgebaut,  der  grossere,  nordliche  besteht  aber 
deutlich  aus  massiven  Eruptiven;  hier  ist  aber  das  Land  hoher  und  teilvveise 
mehr  kupiert.  Da,  wo  wir  das  Land  erreichten  etwas  siidlich  vor  der 
Schwarzen  Wand  und  nordlich  von  der  Siidostspitze,  stehen  miichtige 
Schichten  von  Flint  an.  Die  unterste  Lage  des  Flintes  ist  braun,  wahrschein- 
lich  weniger  rein,  schlierig,  dariiber  liegt  eine  ganz  rein  weisse  und  wieder 
eine  weniger  reine  Lage.  Im  Flint  waren  Fossilien  der  Bjornekaptype. 
Dariiber  liegt  in  conformer  Lage  eine  mindestens  50  Fuss  machtige 
Decke  von  Labradorporphyritmandelstein.  Das  Einfallen  war  flach  SO. 


Dieses  von  den  obenerwahnten  Profilen  von  SCHEI'S  eingesammeltem 
Material  zeigt,  dass  folgende  Typen  gesondert  werden  konnen:  Diorit- 
porphyritische  Ganggesteine;  Diabase,  die  wesentlich  als  In- 
trusive aber  auch  als  gewohnliche  Diabasgange  auftreten;  Laven, 
namlich  Porphyrite  und  Melaphyre. 

Dioritporphyritgange. 

Diese  Gauge  treten  am  Havne-Fjord,  die  Seite  17  beschriebenen 
Eruptive  durchsetzend,  auf,  die  man  unter  dem  gemeinsamen  Namen 
Granitdiorite  bezeichnen  kann.  Aus  den  Beschreibungen  geht  nicht  mit 
Sicherheit  hervor,  wie  weit  solche  Gauge  auch  jiingere  Formationen 
durchsetzen.  Das  Einzige,  was  ich  hieriiber  habe  finden  konnen,  ist, 
dass  SCHEI  von  mezozoischen  Formationen  auf  dem  Smorgrautberg  im 


1  Schwarze  Wand. 


28  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Heureka-Sund  und  17ten  Mai  Berg  auf  Ringnes  Island  samt  von  Lands 
Lokk  Proben  von  Gangen  mitgebracht  hat,  die  etwas  ahnlichen  Gharakter 
haben.  Am  Smergrautberg  durchsetzen  diese  Gauge  Diabasintrusive, 
bei  Lands  Lokk  durchsetzen  sie  die  dort  vorkommenden  Laven. 

£s  ist  moglich,  dass  die  Dioritporphyritgange  den  Granitdioriten 
genetisch  angehoren,  also  die  Ganggesteine  derselben  reprasentieren. 
Wenn  dem  auch  so  ist  und  wenn  sie  ferner  als  von  demselben  Alter 
wie  die  oben  genannten  Gange,  die  die  mezozoischen  Formationen  durch- 
setzen, angenommen  vverden  miissen,  so  konnen  die  Granitdiorite  nicht 
prakambrisch,  sondern  miissen  jiinger  sein.  Irgend  vvelchen  Bevveis 
dafiir  oder  dagegen  haben  vvir  nicht.  Das  Einzige,  was  wir  wissen,  ist. 
dass  sie  nicht  dem  altesten  Urgebirge  angehoren,  da  sie  Schollen  von 
Gneis  einschliessen.  Irgend  einc  Diskordanz  gegen  die  dariiberliegenden 
kambrisch-silurischen  Formationen  hat  SCHEI  nicht  nachgevviesen.  Bei 
C.  Camperdown  liegt,  wie  gesagt,  iiber  Granitdiorit,  der  dort  als  Syenit 
entwickelt  ist,  eine  Konglomeratsandsteinetage.  Im  Foulke-Fjord  soil 
der  Sandstem,  der  auch  dort  iiber  dem  Granitdiorit  liegt,  griingelarbte 
Schlieren  enthalten  und  der  Granitdiorit  ist  selbst  unmittelbar  an  der 
Grenze  stark  grtin  gefarbt,  was  moglicherweise  als  ein  Grenzfacies- 
plulnomen  aufgefasst  werden  kann. 

Am  Frams-Fjord  sollen  jiingere  Formationen,  niimlich  Sandstein- 
und  Kalksteinlagen  in  diinnen  Schollen  und  durch  zahlreiche  Verwer- 
fungen  aufbewahrt,  auf  dem  Granitdiorit  ruhen.  Vom  Havne-Fjord  werden 
auch  Dislokationeu  lang.s  der  Grenze  gegen  jiingere  Formationen  he- 
sprochen.  Gleichzeitig  werden  Dislokationeu  auf  der  Westseite  des 
granitdioritischen  Eruptivgebietes,  namlich  im  Trold-Fjord,  besprochen. 
Die  grb'ssten  Dislokationen  sollen  jedoch  in  den  Umgebungen  des 
Heureka-Sundes  stattgefunden  haben.  In  SCHEI'S  vorliiufiger  Milteilung,. 
worauf  ich  ausserdem  hinweise,  werden  die  meisten  tektonischen  Ver- 
iinderungen  als  posttriassische  aber  pramiocane  angenommen.  Es  scheint 
also  nicht  unmoglich  sich  zu  denken,  dass  diese  Dislokationen  in  Ver- 
bindung  mit  einer  Eruption  in  mezozoischer  Zeit  von  Granitdiorit  mit 
begleitenden  Ganggesteinen,  namlich  Dioritporphyrite  und  Diabase,  er- 
standen  sein  konneu. 

Eine  solche  Annahme,  die  ich  hier  als  moglich  anbringe,  scheint 
sich  SCHEI  uicht  gedacht  zu  haben.  Er  schreibt  immer  sehr  bestimmt 
iiber  die  Granitdiorite  als  wllrgebirge."  Unter  meiner  Untersuchung  des 
Granitdiorites  sah  ich  denselben  daher  auch  als  wahrscheinlich  prakam- 
brisch an.  Grossere  Zweifel  kamen  mir  erst  bei  der  Untersuchung  der 
Ganggesteine  auf. 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]      PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  29 

Diese  Frage  muss  bis  auf  weileres  hinausgeschoben  werden.  Es 
muss  den  zukiiuftigen  Forscheru  uberlassen  werden,  diese  Sache  in  das 
Reine  zu  bringeu.  Hier  inussen  wir  uns  mil  einer  Beschreibung  der 
Bftitgebrachten  Proben  begnugen: 

Die  Dioritporphyrite 

treten  als  teilweise  miichtige  Gauge  auf,  die  in  der  Mitle  verhaltnis- 
ma'ssig  grobkornig,  au  der  Grenze  feinkorniger,  und  an  der  unmiltel- 
baren  Grenze  porphyritisch  sind  (Taf.  II,  III).  Das  Gestein  ist  nahe  der 
Grenze  beinahe  schvvarz.  Wenig  machlige  Gange  von  einigen  Decimetern 
Machtigkeit  sind  dicht  und  porphyritisch  und  sehr  dunkel.  Diinnschliffe 
von  der  Mitte  machtiger  Gange  zeigen  Plagioklasleisten  mil  deutlicher 
Albit-zwilliugsstreifung,  ab  und  zu  auch  mil  Periklinzwillingsstreifuug.  Die 
Leisten  konnen  sowohl  lang  und  schmal  als  auch  kurz  und  breit  und 
sogar  beinahe  quadratisch  sein.  Die  Form  ist  nicht  immer  ganz  regel- 
ma'ssig,  indem  der  Plagioklas  nicht  immer  idiomorph  gegen  Pyroxen  ist. 
Dbch  hat  der  Plagioklas  die  Krystallisation  vor  dem  Pyroxen  deutlich 
begonnen ;  denn  dieser  fiillt  bisweilen  Zwischenraume  zwischen  den 
Plagioklasleisten  aus.  Dass  die  Krystallisation  dieser  2  Minerale  indessen 
teilweise  auch  zur  selben  Zeit  vor  sich  gegangen  sein  muss,  wird  gleich- 
zeitig  dadurch  angedeutet,  dass  haufig  krystallographisch  gut  begrenzle 
Pyroxenindivide  gesehen  werden.  Der  Plagioklas  ist  oft  zonar  aufgebaut, 
indem  die  mittelsten  Teile  die  kalkreichesten  sind,  was  dadurch  sehr 
deutlich  hervortreten  kann,  dass  sich  die  mittleren  Teile  oft  der  Qm- 
wandlung  wegen  als  matt  zeigen,  wahrend  der  Rand  frisch  und  klar  ist. 
Am  gewohnlichsten  trilt  sicherlich  Labradorfeldspat  auf,  daneben  ver- 
schiedene  sauerere  Grade,  Andesin  und  Oligoklas.  Alkalifeldspat  habe 
ich  nicht  beobachtet.  Die  Plagioklasleisten  liegen  in  alien  moglichen 
Richtungen,  wodurch  Zwischenraume  entstehen,  die  oft  einen  triangu- 
laren  oder  viereckigen  Durchschnitt  haben.  Diese  Zwischenraume  sind 
meistens  mit  Mikropegmatit,  seltener  ausschliesslich  mil  Quarzkornern 
oder  auch  mit  Pyroxen  oder  mit  einem  Umwandlungsprodukt  desselben 
ausgefiillt. 

Quarz  giebt  es  in  reinen  Kornern  und  fast  immer  in  Zwischen- 
raumen;  meistens  aber  kommt  derselbe  in  mikropegmatitischer  Ver- 
wachsung  mit  Plagioklas  vor.  Bisweilen  findet  ein  gleichmassiger  Uber- 
gang,  also  keine  scharfe  Grenze  zwischen  den  Plagioklasindividen  und 
dem  Mikropegmatit  statt,  so  dass  der  Plagioklas  in  dem  Mikropegmatit 
gleichzeitig  als  anstossende  Plagioklasindivide  ausloscht.  Quarz  ist  das 
zuletzt  ausgeschiedene  Mineral. 


30  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Pyroxen  tritt  in  ziemlich  bedeutender  Menge  auf.  Derselbe  ist  im 
Diinnschnitt  farblos  bis  braunlich  mil  graugelben,  seltener  rotlichen 
Interferenzfarben.  Das  Vorkommen  von  Zwillingen  nach  100  ist  nicht 
selten.  Prismatische  Spaltbarkeit  ist  sehr  hervortretend.  Oft  sind  meh- 
rere  Pyroxene  zu  grosseren  Partien  gesammelt.  Die  Begrenzung  ist 
ziemlich  unregelmassig,  doch  ist  dies  verschieden;  gute  krystallogra- 
phische  Begrenzung  ist  nicht  ganz  selten,  und  selbst  wenn  solche  nicht 
vorhanden  ist,  steckt  der  Pyroxen  doch  oft  in  dem  Plagioklas  und  muss 
also,  vvie  gesagt,  gleichzeitig  mit  demselben  teilweise  krystallisiert  sein, 
wenn  derselbe  auch  im  Wesentlichen  jilnger  ist.  Der  Pyroxen  ist  teils 
zu  Hornblende,  teils  zu  Klorit  stark  umgewandelt.  Die  Umwandlung 
hat  im  Allgemeinen  am  Rande  begonnen  und  schreitet  nach  innen,  kann 
aber  auch  mitten  im  Pyroxen  begonnen  haben  und  scheint  besonders 
dessen  Spaltbarkeit  zu  folgen.  Es  sieht  aus,  als  ob  die  Hornblende 
teilweise  aus  Pyroxen  gebildet  ist.  Dieselbe  ist  pleochroitisch :  Parallel 
der  c-Achse  hellgelb,  teilweise  braunlich;  senkrecht  darauf  dunkler  gelb- 
grunlich,  teilweise  braunlich.  Einzelne  DQnnschliffe  zeigten  ziemlich  viel 
Hornblende. 

Der  Klorit  ist  grunlich  bis  blaulich  oder  braunlich  und  scheint  das 
letzte  Stadium  in  der  Umwandlung  zu  sein.  Er  tritt  oft  an  Spalten  im 
Plagioklas  auf.  Brauner,  stark  pleochroitischer  Biotit  tritt  sparsam  auf. 

Erz  trilt  in  grossen  Massen  auf,  teils  in  kleinen  Kornern,  teils  in 
grosseren  Partien,  ab  und  zu  mit  Miinteln  von  Biotit  und  Hornblende. 

Accessorisch  tritt  Apatit  in  grossen  Massen  auf,  in  kleinen  sowie 
in  grossen  Nadeln  alle  die  ubrigen  Minerale  durchsetzend. 

Die  Structur  dieses  Gesteines  ist  nicht  ofitisch  wie  bei  gewohn- 
lichen  Diabasen;  denn  die  Ofitstruktur  verlangt  bekanntlich,  dass  Plagi- 
oklas ausgepragt  idiomorph  gegen  Pyroxen  ist,  was,  wie  gesagt,  hier 
nicht  der  Fall  ist.  Eher  kann  die  Structur  diabasisch  kornig  genannt 
werden,  aber  auch  dies  ist  nicht  ganz  treffend,  da  der  Pyroxen  mitimter 
in  bemerkenswertem  Grade  idiomorph  sein  kann.  Dies  scheint  jedoch 
etwas  verschieden  zu  sein.  Einige  dieser  Gesteine  miissten  diabasisch 
kornig  genannt  werden;  andere  nahern  sich  dagegen  mehr  der  normal 
hypidiomorphkornigen  Structur  dadurch,  dass  die  Plagioklasleisten  so 
breit  werden,  dass  sich  die  kreuzweise  Anordnung  verliert. 

Die  Farbe  ist  meistens  dunkel  wie  bei  den  Gabbroen,  doch  giebt  es 
auch  hellere  Typen.  Eine  Probe  von  Vestre  Sund,  Havne-Fjord  war  rotlich. 

Die  Gange,  die  die  Lav  en  bei  Lands-Lokk  durchsetzen,  waren 
teilweise  sehr  hell  und  enthielten  wenig  dunkle  Minerale,  dagegen  aber 
viel  Feldspat  und  Mikropegmatit. 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  31 

Naher  der  Grenze  wird,  vvie  erwahnt,  das  Gestein  mehr  feinkornig 
und  die  unmittelbare  Grenze  ist  so  dicht,  dass  es  schwierig  ist,  die  ein- 
zelnen  Korner  unter  dem  Mikroskop  deutlich  zu  sehen.  Die  Structur  ist 
porphyritisch,  indem  in  einer  Grundmasse  scharf  hegrenzte  Plagioklas- 
leisten  und  Pyroxenkrystalle,  teilweise  auch  kleine  Qtiarzkrystalle  liegen. 
Die  Grundmasse  besteht  aus  einer  Mischung  kreuzweise  angeordneter, 
kleiner  Plagioklasleisten  und  Pyroxenkorner  zusarnmen  mil  einer  Menge 
Erz,  der  gern  in  Stabchen,  die  senkrecht  aufeinanderstehen,  auftritt. 
Beide,  Pyroxen  und  Erz  sind  gegen  die  Grenze  zunehmend,  Plagioklas 
und  Apatit  dagegen  sind  abnehmend.  Das  Gestein  ist  zum  Teil  kloriti- 
siert  und  epidotisiert,  scheint  aber  sonst  nicht  stark  umgewandelt  zu 
sein.  Von  der  Umwandlung  zu  Hornblende  ist  wenig  zu  sehen. 

Die  Quarzeinsprenglinge  sieht  man  unter  parallelen  Nicols  als 
scharf  begrenzt,  unter  gekreuzten  Nicols  sieht  man  sie  zerteilt,  mog- 
licherweise  in  kleine  Korner  zerquetscht,  die  jedes  fur  sich  und  zu  ver- 
schiedenen  Zeiten  ausloschen,  so  dass  das  ganze  Individ  niemals  ganz 
dunkel  ist.  Der  Einsprenglings-Gharacter  des  Quarzes  verliert  sich  auch 
unter  gekreuzten  Nicols  dadurch,  dass  derselbe  meistens  von  Pyroxen 
und  Klorit  stark  durchsetzt  ist.  Quarz  scheint  auch,  wenn  auch  nur 
sehr  sparsam  in  der  Grundmasse,  besonders  in  der  Nahe  der  Quarz- 
einsprenglinge, vorzukommen,  im  Ganzen  scheint.  aber  die  Quarzmenge 
nahe  der  Grenze  geringer  als  in  der  Mitte  des  Ganges  zu  sein. 

Die  von  SCHEI  besprochenen  dioritporphyritischen  Gange  liegen  bei: 

Innere  Landzunge,  Skreia,  Havne-Fjord. 
Hafen,  gruner  Fleck,  do. 

Die  Kluft,  Hafen,  do. 

Nordseite  von  Stordalen,  do. 

Westseite  von  Vestre  Sund,          do. 
Smorgrautberget. 
17te  Mai  Fjeld,  Ringnes-Land. 
Die  Lands-Lokk-Inseln. 


Diabase. 

Die   Diabase  am  Cape  Camperdown  und  Foulke-Fjord. 

Die  Diabase  von  Cape  Camperdown  und  Foulke-Fjord  sind 
im  Allgemeinen  grobkrystallinisch,  dunkel  und  schwer.  Derselbe  besteht 
aus  Plagioklas,  Pyroxen,  samt  einer  Zwischenklemmungsmasse  oder 
Mesostasis,  Erz  und  etwas  Apalit. 


32  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Die  Structur  ist  ofitisch.  Der  Plagioklas  hat  Leistenform  und  liegt 
kreuz  und  quer. 

Der  Pyroxen  isl  teilvveise  prismatisch  entwickelt,  leilweise  tritt  der- 
selbe  mit  unregelmassiger  Begrenzung  den  Zwischenraumen  zvvischen  den 
Plagioklasleislen  ausfullend  auf.  Diese  Leisten  sind  hauptsachlich  vor 
dem  Pyroxen  kryslallisiert.  Letzlerer  hat  haufig  eine  der  darin  stecken- 
den  Plagioklasleisten  wegen  gebuchtele  und  eingeschniltene  Begrenzung. 
Man  kann  oft  einen  Zwillingsbildung  andeutenden  Saum  der  Langs- 
richlung  nach  sehen.  Der  Pyroxen  ist  im  Diinnschliff  gesehen  in  frischem 
Zustand  farblos,  vielleicht  mit  einem  schvvach  griinen  Schimmer.  Man 
sieht  bisweilen  kleine,  braune  Inlerpositionen,  sicherlich  Rutil.  Die 
Interferenzfarben  sind  lebhaft  rot,  gelb,  blau,  violett,  seltener  graulich. 
Die  prismatische  Spaltbarkeit  ist  deutlich.  Milunter  sieht  man  eine  Spalt- 
barkeit  nach  100. 

Der  Pyroxen  ist  mehr  oder  vveniger  stark  umgevvandelt.  Das  erste 
Stadium  ist  eine  Durchsetzung  von  Fasern,  die  haufig  mit  der  c-Achse 
des  Pyroxens  parallel  liegen  oder  auch  einen  Winkel  mit  derselben 
bildend,  der  meistens  zwischen  77°  und  83°  variiert. 

Die  erste  Faserbildung  hat  einen  gelbgrauen  Ton.  Bei  weiterer  Urn- 
wandlung  tritt  Pleochroismus  hinzu,  namlich  parallel  mit  der  Langs- 
richtung  der  Fasern  gelbgrau  bis  gelbbraun,  senkrecht  darauf  gelbbraun. 
Je  mehr  die  Umwandlung  entwickelt  ist,  desto  starker  ist  die  gelb- 
braune  Farbe. 

Das  lelzte  Stadium  der  Umwandlung  ist  Serpentin  und  Klorit.  Der 
Serpentin  ist  meistens  dicht  und  von  gelblicher  bis  griinlicher  Farbe. 
Der  Klorit  ist  im  Allgemeinen  parallelfasrig  und  oft  pleoehroitisch, 
namlich  parallel  mit  der  Spaltbarkeit  hellgelbbrftunlich,  senkrecht  darauf 
dunkel  gri'mblaulich.  Dieser  ist  ah  und  zu  mit  Erz,  der  den  Klorit  bei 
der  Verwitlerung  braun  fiirbt,  stark  durchsetzt, 

Der  Serpentin  und  Klorit  tritt  haufig  radialstrahlig  auf  und  zeigt 
dann  in  konvergenlem  Lichte  hiibsche  Interferenzkreuze. 

Der  Plagioklas  ist  Labrador  in  Leistenform.  Die  Leisten  sind  ent- 
weder  lang  und  schmal  oder  kurz  und  dick.  Ausser  Zwillingsstreifung 
nach  dem  Albitgesetz  sind  Karlsbader  Zwillinge  haufig.  Periklinzwil- 
lingsstreifung  ist  nicht  selten.  Zwillingsbildung  nach  dem  Bavenogesetz 
kann  man  da  auch  bisweilen  und  dann  als  Vierling  sehen.  Der  Plagioklas 
ist  frisch.  An  Spalten  ist  Kloritmasse  eingedrungen,  der  Plagioklas  selbst 
ist  aber  wenig  urngewandelt. 

Quarz  tritt  in  nicht  geringen  Mengen  auf.  Denselben  findet  man 
in  freien  Quarzkornern.  Hauptsachlich  aber  tritt  derselbe  in  mikropeg- 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  33 

matitischer  Verwachsung  mit  Plagioklas  auf.  Er  tritt  immer  zwischen 
den  Plagioklasleisten  in  Mesostasis  auf  und  ist  also  nach  dem  Plagioklas 
auskrystallisiert. 

Mesostasis. 

Die  Zwischenraume  zwischen  den  Plagioklasleisten  sind  von  einer 
Zwischenklemmungsmasse,  einem  Mesostasis,  ausgefiillt.  Da  die  Plagi- 
oklasleisten kreuz  und  quer  liegen,  sind  diese  Zwichenraume  oft  von 
3  eckigem  Querschnitt.  Mesostasis  besteht  aus  Quarz  und  Feldspat.  Die 
mikropegmatitische  Structur  ist  sehr  in  die  Augen  fallend.  Lange,  diinne 
Nadeln  liegen  oft  kreuz  und  quer  in  einer  Masse,  die  wahrscheinlich 
aus  Quarz  besteht.  Diese  Nadeln  scheinen  unvollstiindig  entwickelte 
Plagioklasleisten  zu  sein.  Sie  sind  oft  zackig  und  schlecht  begrenzt. 
Bei  einzelnen  kann  man  Andeutung  zur  Albitzwillingsstreifung  verspuren. 
Sie  erloschen  oft  gleichzeitig  als  naheliegende  Plagioklasindivide.  Die 
Begrenzung  des  Mesostasis  ist  meistens  scharf;  dieselbe  kann  aber  auch 
als  in  Plagioklasindivide  tibergehend  gesehen  werden.  Mesostasis  ist 
mit  Kornern  und  grosseren  Individen  von  dunklen  Mineralien,  die  immer 
in  Klorit  und  Serpentin  iibergegangen  sind,  vermischt. 

Wie  erwahnt,  ist  Mesostasis  zuletzt  auskrystallisiert,  als  eine  Selten- 
heit  sieht  man  aber  kleine  Einschliisse  von  demselben  Character  wie 
diesen  Mesostasis  im  Plagioklas. 

Mesostasis  ist  voll  von  kleinen  Hohlraumen.  Ferner  treten  lange, 
ganz  diinne  Nadeln  eines  durchsichtigen,  farblosen  bis  schwach  grun- 
lichen  Minerales  mit  ca.  22°  Ausloschungswinkel  auf,  in  dessen  Mitte 
bisweilen  ein  heller  Kern  liegt,  der  entweder  ganz  hell  oder  auch  von 
einem  Pigment  braun  gefarbt  ist. 

Erz  tritt  in  ganz  grosser  Menge  auf,  vielleicht  am  meisten  in  Meso- 
stasis, aber  auch  in  den  iibrigen  Mineralien,  besonders  in  Pyroxen. 

Die  Diabase  am   Heureka-Sund. 

Diese  konnen  in  2  Typen  geteilt  werden,  namlich  Diabase  rnit  etwas 
Quarz  und  Mikropegmatit  als  Zwischenklemmungsmasse,  und  Diabase 
ohne  solche.  Zwischen  den  letzteren  treten  bei  einzelnen,  so  z.  B.  bei 
Hareleiren  Olivin  hinzu.  Ausserdem  scheint  Olivin  nichl  besonders  ver- 
breitet  zu  sein,  doch  ist  dies  der  Umwandlung  wegen  schwierig  abzu- 
machen.  Die  Structur  ist  im  Allgemeinen  ausgepragt  ofitisch,  nur  wo 
verhaltnismassig  viel  Quarz  und  Mikropegmatit  hinzutritt,  wird  diese 
Structur  etwas  weniger  hervortretend,  indem  die  Plagioklasleisten 
breiter  werden,  teilweise  quadratisch,  zonar  aufgebaut  und  nicht  immer 
idiomorph  gegen  Pyroxen.  Gleichzeitig  hiermit  scheint  sich  auch  Periklin- 

3 


34  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

zwillingsstreifung,  wenn  auch  nur  in  geringem  Grade  zu  zeigen,  wie 
auch  der  Plagioklas  etwas  saurer  zu  sein  scheint.  Der  Plagioklas  ist 
besonders  in  den  am  meisten  basischen  Diabasen  ziemlich  stark  umge- 
wandelt,  indem  er  von  Epidotkornern,  Klorit  und  anderem  durchsetzt 
ist,  weshalb  die  Zwillingsstreifung  nicht  immer  besonders  deutlich  ist. 
Der  Pyroxen  ist  meistens  von  schwach  braunlicher  Farbe  mil  graugelben 
und  rotlichen  Interferenzfarben.  Derselbe  tritt  in  den  am  meisten  basi- 
schen Diabasen  immer  als  junger  wie  Plagioklas  auf,  in  den  saureren 
ragt  derselbe  dagegen  in  den  Plagioklas  hinein,  ohne  dass  derselbe 
eigentlich  als  idiomorph  gegen  den  Plagioklas  bezeichnet  werden  kann. 
Der  Pyroxen  ist  teilweise  stark  umgewandelt,  aber  niemals  wie  in  den 
dioritporphyritischen  Gangen  zu  Hornblende,  dagegen  zu  Biotit  und  be- 
sonders zu  Klorit  und  Serpentit.  Der  Biotit  ist  stark  pleochroitisch. 
Wahrscheinlich  ist  Biotit  sekundar;  ausserdem  tritt  er  ziemlich  sparsam 
auf.  Der  Klorit  ist  meistens  strahlig,  teilweise  radial  angeordnet,  der- 
selbe ist  etwas  pleochroitisch,  indem  die  Farben  zwischen  gelb,  braun, 
griin  und  blau  wechseln.  Derselbe  ist  mit  gelbern  bis  braunem  Serpentin 
slark  gemischt. 

Der  Quarz,  der,  wie  angegeben,  immer  in  der  Zwischenklemmungs- 
masse  auftritt,  ist  klar  und  frisch  mit  verhaltnismassig  wenigen  Inter- 
positionen  und  Hohlraumen.  Er  ist  oft  von  kloritgefilllten  Spalten  durch- 
schnitten. 

Die  Structur  des  Mikropegmatites  ist  nicht  immer  leicht  zu  sehen, 
teils  der  Umwandlung  wegen,  teils  weil  dieselbe  meistens  so  fein  ist, 
dass  starke  Vergrosserung  dazu  erf  order  lich  ist. 

Olivin  tritt  gewiss  sparsam  auf,  kann  aber,  wie  gesagt,  in  einzelnen 
Diabasen  in  bedeutenden  Mengen  beobachtet  werden.  Die  Korner  sind 
oft  gross,  doch  sind  sie  oft  stark  umgesetzt,  so  dass  von  der  Olivin- 
substanz  wenig  tibrig  ist.  Ringsum  die  umgewandelten  Korner  liegt  ein 
Kranz  von  Erz,  solches  liegt  oft  auch  in  dem  Olivin  in  kleinen  Krystallen, 
die  in  geraden  Linien  oder  Halbkreisen  angeordnet  sind.  Olivin  ist  immer 
gegen  die  iibrigen  Minerale  idiomorph,  derselbe  ist  oft  stark  korrodiert. 

Das  in  ganz  grossen  Mengen  vorkommende  Erz,  sicherlig  titanhaltig, 
gehort  zu  den  altesten  Ausscheidungen.  Apatit  in  gut  entwickelten 
Nadeln  tritt  ziemlich  sparsam  auf. 

Diese  Diabase  sind  meistens  ziemlich  grobkornig  und  von  dunkler, 
bisweilen  graulicher  Farbe.  Naher  der  Grenze  werden  sie  dunkler, 
beinahe  schwarz  und  feinkornig  und  werden  in  unmittelbarer  Nahe  der 
Grenze  sehr  dicht  und  porphyritisch,  indem  gut  entwickelte  Plagioklas- 
tafeln  in  einer  feinkornigen  Grund masse  von  Plagioklas,  Erz,  Pyroxen, 


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE.  35 

Biotit  und  Klorit  liegen.  Das  Erz  ist  oft  in  senkrecht  aufeinander- 
stehenden  Staben  angeordnet.  Der  Pyroxen  ist  teilweise  schwach  braun- 
lich  pleochroitisch,  was  moglicherweise  durch  titanhaltige  Interpositionen 
verursacht  ist.  Der  Biotit  ist  gewiss  sekundar. 

Die  dunklen  Minerale,  besonders  Erz,  sind  nahe  der  Grenze  stark 
vermehrt.  Einzelne  umgewandelte  Pyroxenkrystalle  kann  man  auch  als 
Einsprengling  sehen,  sicherlich  auch  etwas  Olivin. 

Diabase  sind  von  folgenden  Orten  J  mitgebracht : 

Gape  Camperdown. 

Kap  Sydvest. 

Hyperitodden. 

Der  Ammonitberg,  Bjornekaplandet. 

Ostseite  von  Trold-Fjord. 

Nordlich  von  Harenesset,  Raanes  Halbinsel,  mit  Olivin. 

Depotpoint. 

Blaafjeld. 

Westlich  im  Blaafjeld. 

Westliche  Landzunge  von  Hare-Fjord. 

Hvidtenberg,  Heiberg-Island. 

Kap  Separation  bei  Blaamanden. 

Ulv0  (Ulvingen). 

Gletscher-Fjord. 

Nordseite  von  Slidre-Fjord. 

Skaare-Fjord,  besonders  vom  ausseren  Teil. 

Whitsunday-Bay. 

Zwischen  den  beiden  westlichen  Landzungen,  auf  Stor0en. 

Sm0rgrautberg. 

Die  Laven  bei  Lands-Lokk. 

Von  Lands  Lokk  hat  SCHEI  Proben  von  ziemlich  hellen,  griinlichen 
bis  graulichen,  seltener  schwarzen,  teilweise  porphyritischen  Gesteinen 
mit  Einsprenglingen  von  Feldspat,  Olivin  und  Augit  in  einer  dichten 
Grundmasse  aus  kleinen  Plagioklasleisten  bestehend,  die  kreuz  und  quer 
mit  stark  kloritisierten  Augitkornern  zusammenliegen,  die  oft  die  Form 
der  Zwischenraume  zwischen  den  Plagioklasleisten  haben,  mitgebracht. 
Ausserdem  tritt  Erz  in  grossen  Mengen  in  ganz  kleinen  Kornern  auf. 
Der  Klorit  ist  griln  und  schwach  pleochroitisch.  Spuren  von  Biotit. 


1  Conf.  die   Karte   von  Kapitan  GUNNAR  ISACHSEN  in  Sverdrups  Buch  «Nyt  Land". 
H.  Aschehoug  &  Co.    Kristiania. 


36  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Die  Einsprenglinge  sind  krystallographisch  gut  begrenzte  La  bra- 
dor  taf el n,  die  im  Allgemeinen  frisch  sind,  sich  aher  in  einzelnen 
Proben  stark  von  Klorit,  Kalkspat  und  Epidotkornern  durchsetzt  zeigen 
und  ausserdem  Augit,  der  teilweise  stark  kloritisiert  ist.  Olivin,  der 
immer  vollstandig  umgewandelt  ist,  tritt  in  krystallographisch  gut  ent- 
wickelten  Einsprenglingen  auf.  Denselben  kann  man  moglicherweise 
auch  in  der  Grundmasse  sehen,  das  kann  aber  schwerlich  abgemacht 
werden,  da  die  Umwandlung  so  weit  vorgeschritten  ist. 

Diese  Melaphyre  und  Porphyrite  enthalten  mil  Kalkspat  und  teil- 
weise auch  mil  Klorit  gefullte  Mandeln.  Solche  Porphyritmandelsteine 
und  Melaphyrmandelsteine  fand  SCHEI  bei  nSvarte  Vaeg"  auf  Axel 
Heibergs-Land  zusammen  mit  Tuffen.  SCHEI  sagt  hieruber  in  seiner 
vorlaufigen  Mitteilung: 

,,Hier  (Svarte  Vaeg)  findet  man  tiber  Feuersteinschichten,  die  wahr- 
scheinlich  carbonische  Versteinerungen  enthalten,  Schichten  von  Labra- 
dorporphyritmandelstein  und  Melaphyrmandelstein  und  Tuffen,  die  fur 
carbonisch  gehalten  werden  mtissen,  denn  ilber  ihnen  lagern  Feuerstein- 
schichten, die  den  unter  ihnen  liegenden  gleichen  und  von  denen  man 
daher  auch  annehmen  darf,  dass  sie  dasselbe  Alter  haben.  Diese  letzten 
Lavaarten  scheinen  daher  einer  frilheren  Eruptionsperiode  anzugehoren 
als  wenigstens  einige  der  oben  erwahnten  Einlagerungsmassen". 

Die  mitgebrachten  Proben  von  Mandelsteinen  zeigten  eine  etwas 
ahnliche  Grundmasse  wie  die  Porphyrite  bei  Lands-Lokk.  In  der  Grund- 
masse liegt  eine  Menge  gut  entvvickelter  Kalkspatmandeln  ab  und  zu 
radial  aufgebaut  samt  Einsprenglingen  von  Labradortafeln,  Augit  und 
serpentinisierten  Olivinkrystallen.  Diese  Grundmasse  enthalt  eine  Menge 
Erz  wie  unzahlige,  kleine  Korner  zwischen  den  kleinen  Plagioklasleisten. 
Diese  Zwischenraume  sind  mit  Klorit  gefiillt,  die  grosse  Menge  Erz 
giebt  aber  dem  Ganzen  eine  so  stark  schwarze  bis  braunliche  Farbe, 
dass  die  griingelbe  Kloritfarbe  beinahe  verschwindet.  Bei  mittlerer  Ver- 
grosserung  ist  der  Dunnschliff  beinahe  schwarz.  Nur  bei  starker  Ver- 
grosserung  kann  der  Klorit  gesehen  werden.  Die  Fluidalstruktur  ist 
sehr  hervortretend,  indem  die  kleinen  Plagioklasleisten  in  Stromen  ge- 
sammelt  liegen. 

Die  Porphyrite  und  Melaphyre  bei  Lands-Lokk  durchsetzend  treten 
Gange  von  demselben  Typus  wie  die  vorher  beschriebenen  Quarzdiabase 
auf.  SCHEI  hat  sie  als  nGang-Gestein  der  dioritporphyritischen  Type" 
bezeichnet.  Ahnliche  Gesteine  wurden  auf  Ringnes-Isl.  (17te  Mai  Fjeld) 
gefunden  l. 

i  Conf.  p.  28.  


1898-1902.  No.  22.]       PETROGRAPHISCHE  RESULTATE. 


37 


Leider  vorliegen  nicht  so  viele  Analysen  von  diesen  hypabyssischen 
Gesteinen  und  von  den  Deckengesteinen,  dass  ihre  chemische  Verhalt- 
nisse  ausfuhrlich  diskutiert  werden  konnen.  SCHEI  hat  die  folgenden  2 
Analysen  ausgefiihrt: 

I  ist    Dioritporphyritgang    siidostlich   auf    Skreia,  Havnefjord,  Jones 
Sund.     Er  ist  mehr  basisch  als  die  meisten  Dioritporphyriten  und 
enthalt  viel  dunkle,  aber  wenig  helle  Minerale. 
II  ist  Diabasgang,  Bjorneodde,  Bjornesund,  Heibergs  Isl.  Eureka  Sund. 


I 

II 

SiO*  

44,97 

46,09 

Ti02   

4,87 

(3,45) 

Al903  

1576 

(17,89) 

Fe203  

444- 

35,56 

FeO  

12  13 

MnO   

017 

028 

MgO   . 

415 

504 

CaO  

867 

1030 

Na90  

4,02 

382 

KoO  

032 

1,10 

H20  

039 

026 

PoQo      . 

035 

005 

S    .  .  .  .     '     . 

047 

100,24 

Man  sieht,  dass  die  2  Gesteine  chemisch  einander  nahe  stehen. 
Indessen  ist  es  ziemlich  sicher,  dass  eine  Analysenserie  von  den  Diorit- 
porphyriten mehrere  sauereren  Typen  zeigen  wurde.  Wie  Pag.  30 
erwahnt  ist,  kommen  nahmlich  unter  den  Dioritporphyriten  teils  Typen 
vor,  die  diabasisch  kornige  Struclur  haben,  und  die  wahrscheinlich  die 
Diabasen  nahe  stehen,  teils  Typen  mil  mehr  hypidiomorph  korniger 
Structur,  die  Dioriten  naher  stehen.  Die  obige  Analyse  von  Dio- 
ritporphyrit  reprasentiert  also  nicht  eigentlich  einen  typischen  Dio- 
ritporphyrit,  sondern  ein  basisches  Gleid  derselben  und  deutet  eine 
Verwandtschaft  zwischen  den  Dioritporphyriten  und  den  Diabasen  an. 

Diese  Verhaltnisse  sowie  eine  mogliche  Verwandtschaft  von  diesen 
hypabyssischen  Gesteinen  und  Deckengesteinen  mil  den  friiher  beschrie- 
benen  Tieferuptiven  sind  interessente  Aufgaben,  die  noch  ihre  Losung 
erwarten. 


38  CARL  BUGGE.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FHAM  1898-1902.  No.  22.] 


Erklarung  der  Tafeln. 


Taf.  I. 

Fig.  1.     Quarsdiorit.    Reindeer  Point.     4  Nic. 

Fig.  2.  Hypersthenquarskalisyenit.  Cape  Cainperdown.  Das  Helle  ist  Quarz, 
Mikroperthit  und  Plagioklas,  das  Dunkle  Hornblende,  -f  Nic. 

Taf.  II. 

Fig.  3.  BronsitadamelUt.  Havnen,  Havnefjord.  Oben  rechts  Mikroperthit, 
links  Plagioklas,  in  der  Mitte  Bronzit,  Quarz  in  grosser  Menge.  4-  Nic- 

Fig.  4.  Dioritporphyritgang.  17te  Mai  Fjeld.  Ringnes  Land.  Zonarer  Plagi- 
oklas. Weisse  QuarzkOrner  und  beller  Mikropegmatit,  schwarzes  Erz. 
H  ist  Hornblende,  A  Apatit.  4-  Nic. 

Taf.  III. 

Fig.  5.  Dioritporphyritgang.  Skreia.  Dreieckiger  Zwischenraum  mit  Klorit, 
Pyroxen,  Quarz  und  Apatit  gefttllt.  Kleine,  helle  QuarzkOrner.  Das 
Dunkle  oben  recbts  ist  teilweise  umgesetzter  Pyroxen.  4-  Nic. 

Fig.  6.  Dioritporphyritgang,  0,2  m.  macbtig.  Havnen,  Havnefjord.  Einspreng- 
lingen  von  Plagioklas  und  Pyroxen.  -f  Nic. 

Taf.  IV. 

Fig.  7.  Didbas.  Cape  Camperdown.  Weisse  Leisten  von  Plagioklas.  Die 
graue  Masse  zwischen  diesen  ist  wesentlicb  Mikropegmatit.  Das 
ganz  Schwarze  ist  Erz  und  das  Dunkle  Pyroxen.  4  Nic. 

Fig.  8.     Olivinkrystal  in  Melaphyr.    Lands-Lokk.  4=  Nic. 

Taf.  V. 

Fig.  9.      Ldbradorporphyrit.    Lands-Lokk.     $  Nic. 
Fig.  10.    Derselbe.     -f  Nic. 


Gedruckt  am  18.  October  1910. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM   1898-1902.   No.  22. 


Taf.  I. 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM   1898-  1902.   No.  22. 


Taf.  II. 


Fig.  3. 


sec.  ARCT.  EXP.  PRAM  1808-1902.  No.  22. 


Taf.  III. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  6. 


SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  PRAM  1898-1902.  No.  22. 


Taf.  IV. 


Fig.  7. 


Fig.  8. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM  1898-1902.   No.  22. 


Taf.  V. 


* 


Fig.  9. 


Fig  .10. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  23. 


SPONGES  FROM  THE  COAST 
OF  ELLESMERE  LAND 


BY 

CONRAD  FRISTEDT 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


-ooo- 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.BR0GGER 

1909 


-Lt  was  with  much  pleasure  that  I  received  from  Prof.  N.  WILLE, 
Ghristiania,  a  request  that  I  would  undertake  the  description  of  the 
sponges  that  had  been  obtained  during  the  Second  Norwegian  Arctic 
Expedition  in  the  "Fram",  1898—1902,  the  more  so  as  I  had  already 
described  the  collection  of  arctic  sponges  in  the  State  Museum  in 
Stockholm. 

There  were  only  two  specimens  obtained  during  the  above-mentio- 
ned Norwegian  arctic  expedition,  one  belonging  to  the  Calcispongiae,  the 
other  to  the  Silicispongiae. 

Sycandra  H. 

Sycandra  ciliata,  H. 

Grantia  ciliata  FLEMMING  (Brit.  Animals,  p.  525,  No.  14). 
Grant/a  ciliata  GRAY  (Proc.,  Zool.  Soc.,  1867,  p.  554). 
Sycandra  ciliata  H^GKEL  (Die  Kalkschwamrne,  p.  296,  pi.  51, 
figs.  1  a— 1  t;  pi.  58,  fig.  9). 

This  species  is  represented  in  the  collection  by  only  one  specimen, 
its  length  being  about  10  mm.,  and  its  diameter  about  3  mm.  The 
specimen  forms  a  cylindrical  tube,  and  is  furnished  with  a  short 
ciliary  tube  of  long  acerate  spicules.  The  outer  surface  is  slightly 
roughened,  and  the  central  cloaca  is  nearly  as  long  as  the  sponge. 

The  colour  is  creamy  white  in  the  dried  state.  The  skeleton  consists 
of  triradiate  and  quadriradiate  spicules  with  large  acerate  spicules 
projecting  from  the  dermis  and  peristome. 

The  triradiate  spicules  are  the  most  numerous,  and  most  variable 
in  size  and  form.  The  rays  are  of  different  lengths,  and  in  some  spi- 
cules are  curved,  while  in  others  they  are  straight. 

The  quadriradiate  spicules  are  very  few  in  number,  and  the  propor- 
tion of  the  apical  rays  to  the  others  is  about  as  2  :  1. 


CONRAD  FR1STEDT.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FHAM 


The  acerate  spicules  are  very  long,  and  generally  straight,  though 
occasionally  slightly  curved. 

According  to  Bowerbank  (Brit.  Spongiada?,  Vol.  IV)  the  geographical 
distribution  of  this  sponge  is  Greenland,  Spitsbergen,  Norway,  the  Faroe 
Islands,  Newfoundland,  the  Great  Belt  and  Heligoland  (There  is  no 
calcispongia  from  the  west  coast  of  Greenland  in  the  state  zoological 
museum  in  Stockholm.)  I  was  at  first  inclined  to  believe  that  this 
sponge  might  be  a  new  species,  on  account  of  the  very  small  number 
of  quadriradiate  spicules,  or  possibly  a  variable  form  of  Ascandra 
mirabilis  FRISTEDT  (Sponges  from  the  Atlantic  and  Arctic  Oceans  and 
the  Behring  Sea,  p.  406,  pi.  22,  figs.  3—13,  pi.  26,  figs.  1&2),  but  the 
absence  of  the  smaller  acerate  spicules  (loc.  cit.  figs.  5  &  6),  and  the 
great  resemblance  to  Sycandra  ciliata,  H.  induced  me  to  identify  this 
species  with  the  above-mentioned  S.  ciliata. 


Chalina  Grant. 

Chalina  limbata  Bow. 

Spongia  limbata   MONTAGU   (Vern.    Mem.  II,    111,    pi.  15, 
figs.  2  &  3). 

Chalina  h'mbata  Bowerbank  (Monograph  Brit.  Spongiadae  II, 
p.  373). 

There  are  two  specimens  of  this  species  in  the  collection  from  Elles- 
mere  Land,  probably  two  fragments  of  one  specimen.  The  larger  of  the 
two  pieces  is  about  40  mm.  in  length,  and  22mm.  in  breadth,  the  thick- 
ness being  20  mm.  It  is  furnished  with  only  one  osculum,  the  diameter 
of  which  is  3  mm.  The  smaller  of  the  specimens  has  two  oscula,  both 
of  which  measure  2  mm.  in  diameter.  The  consistency  of  the  sponge 
is  exceedingly  soft.  The  surface  is  slightly  hispid,  owing  to  the  pro- 
jection of  the  dermal  spicules.  The  dermal  membrane  is  very  thin  and 
pellucid.  The  sarcode  is  rather  abundant,  and  of  a  brown  colour.  The 
pores  are  scattered  all  over  the  surface. 

The  colour  of  the  sponge,  both  when  preserved  in  spirit  and  when 
dry,  is  light  brown. 

The  skeleton  consists  of  spiculous  fibres.  The  spicules  of  the  softer 
membranes  and  the  fibres  are  similar;  namely,  acerate,  slightly  curved 
and  short  pointed.  There  are  very  few  acuate  spicules. 

The  above-described  specimens  agree  fairly  well  with  Bowerbank's 
description  of  Chalina  limbata  Bow.,  but  the  fibres  of  the  specimens 


1898-1902.    No.  23]  SPONGES. 


from  Ellesmere  Land  have  often  only  one  or  two  spicules,  while  the 
fibres  described  by  Bowerbank  are  furnished  with  numerous  spicules. 
There  is  also  a  little  difference  in  the  form  of  the  spicules,  those  in  the 
present  specimens  not  being  so  acutely  pointed  as  those  in  Bowerbank's 
specimens  from  Great  Britain,  and  in  specimens  from  the  west  coast  of 
Sweden ;  but  I  suppose  that  the  difference  is  only  owing  to  the  locality. 


It  is  self-evident  that  from  the  specimens  described  above,  no  con- 
clusions can  be  drawn  with  regard  to  the  sponge-fauna  of  the  coast  of 
Ellesmere  Land.  A  few  more  dredgings  would  no  doubt  give  very  inte- 
resting results.  In  "Sponges  from  the  Atlantic  and  Arctic  Oceans  and 
the  Behring  Sea",  I  have  described  not  less  than  15  species  from  the 
west  coast  of  Greenland,  belonging  to  the  genera  Hyalonema  GRAY, 
Amorphina  0.  S.,  Isodictya  Bow.,  Suberites  Nardo,  Tethya  Lmk., 
Desmacella  0.  S.,  Cornulum  GARTEN,  Esperia  Nardo,  Cladorhiza, 
WYV.  THOMS.,  Clathria  0.  S.,  and  Axinella  0.  S. 

I  am  sure  that  many  of  these  are  to  be  found  off  the  coast  of 
Ellesmere  Land ;  and  if  it  could  be  more  perfectly  explored,  we  should 
learn  the  northern  limit  of  some  at  least  of  the  above-mentioned  genera. 

In  the  collection  sent  to  me,  I  found  a  few  very  large  acerate  spi- 
cules of  some  sponge  attached  to  an  ascidia.  They  may  possibly  have 
belonged  to  a  member  of  the  genus  Hyalonema. 


Printed  Oct.  9,  1909. 


7- 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No  24. 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON: 


DIE  TREIBHOLZER 


AUF  DEM 


ELLESMERE-LAND 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I   KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISMANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1910 


Einleitung. 


w, 


ahrend  der  SvERDRur'schen  Polarexpedition  1898 — 1902  wurden 
an  verschiedenen  Orten  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land  etwa  vierzig  Proben 
von  Treibholzern  eingesammelt,  die  der  Verfasser  im  Auftrage  des  Herrn 
Professor  N.  WILLE  untersucht  und  hinsichtlich  ihrer  Art  und  ihres 
Ursprungs  zu  bestimmen  versucht  hat.  Vorliegender  Aufsatz  enthalt 
einen  Bericht  iiber  diese  Untersuchungen. 

Dem  Botaniker  der  SvERDRUp'schen  Expedition,  Herrn  Docenten 
H.  G.  SIMMONS  aus  Lund,  will  ich  hiermit  fur  freundliche  Hilfeleistung 
in  der  Litteratur  und  auch  fur  wertvolle  Auskiinfte  hinsichtlich  der 
Stromungsverhaltnisse  am  Ellesmere-Land  meinen  aufrichtigen  Dank 
sagen. 

Den  hocharktischen  Landern  fehlt  es  bekanntlich  vollstandig  an 
Waldern  und  Baumen;  ihre  Kiisten  werden  aber  oft  genug  von  gros- 
seren  oder  kleineren  Holzflossen  .blockiert,  die  aus  einer  bunten  Mischung 
von  Baumstammen,  Wurzeln,  Asten  und  Rindenstiicken  zusammengesetzt 
sind.  Bisweilen  liegen  diese  Flosse  von  Treibholzern  oberhalb  des  Ufer- 
randes  verankert,  wahrscheinlich  den  Hochwasserstand  angebend  oder  die 
Hohe,  bis  zu  welcher  sie  das  Treibeis  hinaufgeschoben  hat.  Sogar  auf 
einer  Hohe  von  mehreren  Metern  iiber  dem  jetzigen  Ufer  kann  man 
Treibholzer  antreffen,  welche  also  von  einer  Zeit  stammen  miissen,  da 
das  Meer  hoher  als  jetzt  stand.  NATHORST  erzahlt  in  seiner  Arbeit: 
,,Tva  somrar  i  Norra  Ishafvet",  man  hatte  sogar  in  einer  Hohe  von 
39  Metern  iiber  dem  Meere  einen  grossen  Stamm  gesehen,  der  mehrere 
tausend  Jahre  dort  gelegen  haben  muss,  ohne  vermodert  zu  sein,  ein 
eigentiimlicher  Beweis  der  Langsamkeit,  mit  welcher  Holz  in  den  ark- 
tischen  Gegenden  vermodert.  Auf  einer  Kiesterrasse  in  der  Hohe  von 
200 — 300  Fuss  iiber  dem  Meere  an  der  Westkiiste  des  Ellesmere- 
Landes  wurde  von  der  SvERDRUp'schen  Polarexpedition  Treibholz  ange- 
troffen.  Nicht  immer  kommen  doch  die  Treibholzer  in  so  grossen 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Massen  vor,  dass  man  von  denselben  sagen  kann,  sie  bilden  Holz- 
flosse.  Oft  genug  ist  es  nur  eine  geringe  Anzahl  Starnme  oder  Wurzeln, 
die  an  der  Kiiste  gestrandet  sind  oder  im  Wasser  umherschwimmen. 

Heutzutage  sind  diese  Holzflosse,  die  an  den  Kiisten  des  Eismeeres 
hier  und  da  gestrandet,  ihrer  Zusammensetzung  und  ihrem  Ursprunge 
nach  sehr  wohl  gekannt.  Man  weiss  also,  dass  sie  aus  fernen,  waldigen 
Landern  stammen  und  mit  den  Meeresstromen,  speciell  mit  dem  Polar- 
strom,  als  Transportmittel  den  fernen  Verankerungsort  in  einem  der  Busen 
und  Sunde  des  Eismeeres  erreicht  haben.  Die  Walder  Nordsibiriens 
langs  einem  der  treibholzfuhrenden  Fliisse  Jenissei  oder  Lena  haben 
das  Material  zu  den  meisten  derselben  geliefert.  Keiner  hat  phantasie- 
reicher  als  NATHORST  die  abenteuerliche  Fahrt  eines  solchen  Holzflosses 
zwischen  der  Mutterkiiste  und  dem  Havarieplatz  geschildert:  nln  der 
Alien  Welt,  im  Urwalde  Sibiriens,  auf  dem  hohen  Ufer  eines  der  grossen 
Fliisse  ist  der  Baum  aufgewachsen.  Eines  Tages  aber,  als  der  Sturm 
durch  den  Wald  brauste,  ward  er  mit  seinen  Wurzeln  aufgerissen  und 
stiirzte  den  Abhang  hinab.  Vielleicht  gingen  die  Holzhauer  spater  vorbei 
und  priiften  mit  ihren  Axten,  ob  der  Baum  frisch  sei.  Als  aber  die 
Flut  stieg,  wurde  der  Baum  mit  ihr  gegen  das  Eismeer  gefiihrt,  und  da 
fing  eine  neue  wunderbare  Fahrt  an.  Vielleicht  trieb  der  Stamm,  dessen 
Aste  und  Rinde  nach  und  nach  verloren  gegangen,  vom  Eis  umschlossen, 
iiber  den  Pol  selbst  bin,  das  Ziel  der  fruchtlosen  Anstrengungen  so  vieler 
Menschen.  Dann  folgte  er  mit  dem  Polarstrome  siidwarts  lungs  der 
Ostkiiste  Gronlands  und  blieb  vielleicht  endlich  in  der  Neuen  Welt,  an 
der  baumlosen  Kiiste  des  siidwestlichen  Gronlands  liegen,  wo  der  Eskimo 
ihn  beim  Verfertigen  von  Booten,  Schlitten  oder  Jagdgeriiten  benutzte". 

Durch  die  anatomischen  Untersuchungen  arktischen  Treibholzes  von 
AGARDH  l,  WIESNER  2,  NORDLINGER  3,  KRAUS  4,  ORTENBLAD  5,  SCHNEIDER  °, 


1  J.  G.  AGARDH,   Om  den  Spetsbergska  drifvedens  ursprung.     (Ofversikt  av  Kongl. 
Sv.  Vet.  Akad.  Handl.  1870,  No.  2.) 

2  J.  WIESNER,    Untersuchung    einiger    Treibholzer    aus    dem   nordlichen    Eismeere. 
(Sitzungsber.  der  Mathem.-Naturw.  Classe  der   Kaiserl.  Akad.  der  Wissensch.  in 
Wien.     Band  LXV,  Abt.  I,  1872.) 

3  H.  NORDLINGER,  Th.  von  Heuglins  Treibholz-Sammlung  von  Novaja  Semlja.     (Geo- 
graph.  Mitteil.  A.  Petermann,  1873,  Band  19.) 

4  G.  KRAUS,  Untersuchung  von  Treibhftlzern  aus  Novaja  Semlja.  (Botan.  Zeitung  1873) 

Treibhfilzer.  (Die  zvveite  deutsche  Nordpolarfahrt  1869  und  1870,  Band  II.) 
IJber  die  Abstammung  der  auf  der  II.  deutschen  Nordpolarexp.  gesam- 
melten  Treibholzer.  (Botan.  Zeitung  1872.) 

5  V.  TH.  ORTENBLAD,  Om  Sydgronlands  drifved.     (Bihang  till  Kgl.  Sv.  Vet.  Akad. 
Handl.,  Band  6,  No.  10). 

€  J.  SCHNEIDER,  Untersuchungen  einiger  Treibholzer  von  der  Insel  Jan  Mayen 
(Die  internationale  Polarforschung  1882—1883.  Die  Osterreichische  Polarstation 
Jan  Mayen.  Bd.  III.  Wien  1886.) 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TRKIHII<"M,/KH  AtJF  DKM  ELLESMERE-LAND.  5 

LINDMAN  l  und  dem  Verfasser  2  sind  die  Bahnen  der  arktischen  Treib- 
holzstrome  ziernlich  wohl  hekannt  und  fixiert.  Es  giebt  aber  zwei  Haupt- 
strome,  von  welchen  der  eine  viel  miichtiger  als  der  andere  1st.  Jener 
fiillt  mit  dem  Polarstrom,  dieser  aber  mil  der  Verbreitung  des  Golf- 
stronies  in  arktischem  Wasser  zusammen. 

Der  polare  Treibholzerstrom  oder,  vvie  er  auch  genannt  wird, 
der  sibirische  Treibholzerstrom,  entrinnt  in  einem  der  Fliisse  Nord- 
sibiriens,  dem  Jenissei  oder  der  Lena,  tangiert  in  seiner  Fortsetzung 
Novaja  Semlja,  das  Franz- Josephs-Land,  Spitzbergen, 
Beeren  Eiland,  die  Ostkuste  Gron  lands.  Nordvvestlich  von  Island 
verzweigt  sich  der  Strom  in  zwei  StrOmungen :  die  gronliindische 
Stromung,  welche  den  Dan  marks  -Sun  d  passiert  und  siidwarts  langs 
der  Ostkiiste  Gron  lands  bis  an  dessen  sildlichste  Landspitze,  Cape 
Farewell,  fortsetzt,  wo  sie  gegen  Norden  abbiegt,  und  der  stidwest- 
licben  Kiiste  Gronlands  folgt  bis  an  einen  nordlichen  Breitengrad  von 
62°  25',  den  nordlichsten  Punkt,  an  welchem  Treibholzer  eingesammelt 
worden  sind;  und  die  islilndische  Stromung,  welche  zwischen  Jan 
May  en  und  Island  gegen  SO.  bis  zu  den  Farinseln  dringt. 

Die  andere  Hauptstromung  aber,  die,  vvie  oben  gesagt,  mit 
dem  Golfstrom  teilweise  zusammenfallt,  hat  nach  den  Untersuchungen 
LINDMANS  seinen  Ursprung  in  der  Miindung  des  St.  Lawrence-Flusses 
und  seine  Hauptniederlage  an  der  westlichen  Kiiste  Norwegens.  Darauf 
setzt  sie  nord  warts  in  das  Eismeer  fort  und  tangiert  Spitzbergen  und 
Novaja  Semlja.  Im  Eismeere  giebt  es  zahlreiche  Kontaktpunkte 
zwischen  den  beiden  Hauptslromungen.  Von  ihrer  Lage  bekommt  man 
eine  deutliche  Vorstellung  bei  einem  Blick  auf  die  Stromungskarte,  die 
in  der  Abhandlung  PETTERSSON'S  3  ,,0m  drit'isen  i  norra  Ishafvet"  aufge- 
nommen  ist.  In  diesen  Kontaktpunkten  konnen  Treibprodukte  vom  einen 
zum  anderen  Strome  iiberfiihrt  werden.  Dadurch  konnen  also  sibi- 
rische Treibprodukte  auf  Kiisten,  die  vom  Golfstrom  tangiert  sind, 
abgesetzt  werden,  und  Produkte  des  Golfstromes  konnen  nach  Ufern 
gefiihrt  werden,  die  nur  mit  dem  Polarstrorn  in  Kontakt  stehen. 


1  C.  LlNDMAN,    Oni    drifved    och   andra    af   hafsstvommar    uppkastade  naturfOremal 
vid  Norges  kuster.   (Goteborgs  Kongl.  Vetenskaps-  och  Vitterhets-Samhiilles  Handl., 
18de  hiiftet,  Goteborg  1883.) 

2  F.  INGV^RSON,    Om    drifveden    i   Norra  Ishafvet.     (Kongl.    Sv.    Vet.  Akad.  Handl. 
Band  37,  Nc.  1.) 

3  0.  PETTERSSON,  Om  drifisen  i  norra  Ishafvet.  (Ymer,  tidskrift  utgifven  af  Svenska 
Sftllskapet  for  Antropologi  och  Geografi,  20de  Argungen,  2dra  hiiftet,  1900,  S.  177, 
fig.  8.) 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Nach  diesem  orientierenden  Uberblick  der  Treibholzerbahnen  im 
Nordlichen  Eismeere  und  im  Atlantischen  Ocean  wird  hier  unten  ein 
Tableau  l  ilber  die  Zusammensetzung  des  in  denselben  enthaltenen  Treib- 
holzmateriales  geliefert. 


CO 

cu 

S        8 

flj 

>^3 

«     §     'S 

•M 

JM 

0 

-o 

<"      0 

Jenisseis 

lubhfilzer. 

O 
c?     «        .g 

li 

•  ??  •§ 

's     -S     « 

-S        5i, 
^       J       w 

1   J    § 

—     _ 

«      0- 

to 
cu 

• 

1  1  's 

1 

1       "B       § 

c     3    nS 

§*     *      k 

w          r^^           O 

•-    0 

c 

3 

CQ          CQ 

°? 

OH      ^      Co 

.—     N 

C 

CO 

rz  :° 

a 

C 

^          5 

8' 

1 

cfl  -15 

v 

N 

*g                      g 

•8 

3 

-Q 

4) 

13 

»o            o 

> 

-2       8 

0 

GO 

~ 

•8        •§ 

^ 

•"*.            1^ 
CO         ^ 

9 

^ 

|         * 

CO 

s  i 

r  [ 

^« 

^ 

•S 

•E     w 

C$              •«* 

^ 

ftj        GJ 

8 

8 

,8 

'C       8 

rsprungs. 

Laubholzer. 

k 

'e 
8 

8 

"^             ^05 

a.         ^ 
1          1. 

8 

"s    4! 

S       «       8 

S          0         § 

•**       13        S 

CO           °           ? 

4|  j    | 

a-    -2 

.        8        8 
8       a,       8 
8       p^     "S 

§  i  I 

jil 

CO           CO 

S        fO          g 

•        -•»          • 

D 

$         c/5 

&3 

hS        3       t^ 

c 

V 

8 

.2 

•2 

<u 

E 

cu 

e        •« 

•*•• 

N 

p2          <3 

C 

^^ 

o 

r- 

o         i^— 

3 

"33 

§              'c? 

TD 

nr 

CO 

i 

8 

O 

•1      1 

Q- 

(X|           QH 

en 

£ 

| 

o 

£ 

g 

3 

*« 

cu 

•S         § 

~8 

^ 

iM 

w 

M-c 

to' 
bo 
c 

"*2 
3 

1     t 

C 
o 

J          •« 

^"                     M 

•S              is 

0 

D 

cS 

§       1 

1           C5 

Cedrela 

lit 

ttj      '    (^ 

O> 

•C 

« 

«c 

8 

•«» 

c 

cd 

. 

8 

• 

cu 

8 

. 

• 

*n 

N 

.^ 

*? 

"r* 

i 

13 

.£ 

3 

nr 

1            J 

8         'g 

1 

8 
I 

ctf 

CO 

CO 

j^i 

•^*                   S 

= 

^*                      O 

_g 

<•» 

>3          SH 

(^ 

1  Dieses    Tableau    hat    der  Verf.   auf  der  Grundlage  vorher  angeftihrter  Arbeiten 
liber  die  Treibholzer  aufgestellt. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND. 


Diese  sind  die  Gattungen  und  Arten,  welche  unter  den  Treibholzern 
angetroft'en  worden  sind.  Ausserdem  sind  FrQchte  und  Samen,  Fanggerat- 
schaften,  Werkzeuge,  Wrackreste  u.  a.  unter  denselben  gefunden  worden.  - 
Ein  besonderes  Interesse  kniipft  sich  an  diesem  so  zu  sagen  kombinierten 
Samen-  und  Treibholzertransport  an,  welcher  in  diesen  Regionen  bis- 
weilen  stattzufinden  scheint.  In  den  Spalten  der  Treibholzerstiicke  sind 
also  Friichte  und  Samen  verschiedener  Pflanzen  vorgefunden  worden. 
(KJELLMAN  1,  der  Verf. 2). 

Charakteristisch  filr  die  meisten  Nadelholzer,  sei  es,  dass  sie  ameri- 
kanischen  oder  sibirischen  Ursprungs  sind,  ist  der  geringe  Mittelwert  von 
der  Breite  der  Jahrringe. 

LINDMAN  3  hat  demnacb  gefunden,  dass  der  Mittelwert  von  14  Mes- 
sungen  des  Stammholzes  der  Larix  americana  0,9  mm.  ist. 

ORTENBLAD4  --31  Messungen   •       Larix  sibirica,  Picea  obovata 

-  Stamm-  und  Wurzelholz  —  0,9  mm. 

Der  Verf.5  31  Messungen  -  Larix  sibirica,  Picea  obovata 
(wahrscheinlich  auch  Picea  excelsa,  norvvegischen  Ursprungs)  —  Stamm- 
bolz  -  -  1,17  mm. 

In  alien  bisher  untersuchten  Treibholzersammlungen  hat  es  sich  er- 
wiesen,  dass  die  Nadelholzerproben  der  Anzahl  nach  den  Laubholzer- 
proben  weit  iiberlegen  gewesen  sind.  Dieser  Umstand  dilrfte  wohl  ausserst 
davon  abhangen,  dass  die  Treibholzer  aus  waldigen  Gegenden  mit  einer 
uberwiegenden  Anzahl  von  Nadelholzern  stammen,  aber  es  durfte  auch 

-  und  zwar  nicht  zum  geringsten  Teile  --  durch  die   ungleiche  Trans- 
portdienlichkeit  der  beiden  Holzarten  in  Wasser  erklart  werden  konnen. 
Das    Nadelholz    durfte    dank   seiner  Harte,   Starke   und   seinem  grossen 
Reichtum  an  Harz,  welches  alle  befindlichen  Porositaten  impragniert  und 
zustopft,    weit    mehr   zu    einem    langwierigen    Wassertransport   geeignet 
sein,  als  zahlreiche  Laubholzer,  wie  die  Sahlweide,  die  Pappel  u.  a.,  deren 
Holz    bedeulend  mehr    poros   und  harzarm  ist,  und  denen  es  darum  so 
zu    sagen    an   Harzpropfen   fur  alle  die  zahlreichen  und  grossen  Kanale 
mangelt,    die    das  Innere   des  Holzes  durchziehen.     Infolgedessen  durfte 
dieses  Holz  leichter  als  Nadelholz  von  Wasser  durchtrankt  werden  und 
sinken. 


1  F.  R.  KJELLMAN,    Fanerogamfloran  pa  Novaja  Semlja,    och  WAIGATSCH,  Vega- 
expeditionens  vetenskapliga  iakttagelser,  I  bd.,  sid.  351,  Stockholm  1882. 

2  F.  IXGVARSON  I.  c.  p.  82. 

3  LINDMAN,  1.  c.  p.  27. 

4  ORTENBLAD,  1.  c.  p.  7. 

5  INGVARSON,  1.  c.  p.  60. 


8 


FREDR1K  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Einige  Ziffern,  welche  die  Proportion  zwischen  Nadelholzern  und 
Laubholzern  in  verschiedenen  Treibholzersammlungen  beleuchten,  werden 
im  nachstehenden  Schema  angefuhrt. 


GrOsse 

Fundort. 

der 

Nadel- 

Laub- 

Sammlung. 

hOlzer. 

hslzer. 

233 

175 

58 

NordQstliches  GrOnland.     (Vom  Verf. 

untersucht.) 

172 

150 

22 

Spitzbergen  mit  umliegenden  Inseln. 

(Verf.) 

122 

% 

25 

Siidliches  GrOnland.     (ORTENBLAD.) 

39 

31 

8 

Jan  Maycn.     (Verf.) 

25 

22 

3 

Ostliches  Grflnland.     (KRAUS.) 

18 

18 

0 

Spitzbergen.     (AGARDH.) 

Die  Treibholzer  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land. 
Fundortc. 

Diese  sind  in  aller  Kurze  die  bisher  gekannten  Sachverhaltnisse 
betreffend  die  Transportbahnen.  den  Ursprung,  die  Zusammensetzung 
der  arktischen  Treibholzer.  Ein  vveiterer  Beitrag  zu  diesen  Fragen  wird 
von  den  Treibholzern  geliefert,  welche  von  der  SvERDRur'schen  Polar- 
expedition  am  Ellesmere-Land  1898  —  1902  eingesammelt  worden  sind. 
Die  Einsammlung  dieser  Proben  ist  zum  aller  grossten  Teile  von  SIMMONS 
gemacht.  An  8  verschiedenen  Orten  wurden  Treibholzerproben  ange- 
troffen.  Hier  unten  wird  ein  Bericht  der  Namen  und  der  Lage  dieser 
Fundorte  geliefert,  nebst  den  Nummern  der  Treibholzerproben,  welche 
da  eingesammelt  worden  sind. 

No.  2986.     Die  Gansebucht.    (rGaasefjorden".) 


2840. 
2985. 
3239. 
3852. 
2987. 
2763. 
2661. 
2984. 
2014. 
2015. 


do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 


oberhalb  der  Flutlinie. 


oberhalb  der  Flutlinie. 


2117.  Ostlich  von  der  Mundung  der  Bootsbucht  (,,Baads- 
fjorden")  auf  einer  Kiesterrasse  ein  paar  Meter  oberhalb 
der  Flutlinie. 

2115.  do.  do. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TRE1BHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMEKE-LAND.  9 

No.  1247.    Die  Alexandrabucht. 

„     2041.     Die  Siidkapsbucht  ca.  5  Meter  oberhalb  der  Flutlinie. 

„  2839.  Die  aussere  Walrossbucht  (^Hvalrosfjorden")  ober- 
halb der  Flutlinie. 

„     2116.     Die  Moskusbucht. 

„     3966.     N.  Devon,    der   Belcherberg  am  Cardigan-Sund. 

„  689.  Stidlich  von  der  Bays  Bucht,  an  der  Westkuste  vom 
Ellesmere-Land,  auf  einer  Kiesterrasse  in  einer  Hohe 
von  200—300  Fuss  uber  dem  Meere. 

Nur  1  Probe  ist  von  der  Westkuste  des  Ellesmere-Lands  mit- 
genommen  worden,  namlich  die  Probe  No.  689,  vom  Rittmeister  ISACHSEN 
siidlich  von  der  Bays-Bucht  gefunden.  Sie  lag,  wie  oben  erwahnt, 
auf  einer  Kiesterrasse,  deren  Hohe  uber  dem  Meere  man  von  200  bis 
300  Fuss  schatzt,  und  zwar  nicht  isoliert,  sondern  einer  grosseren  Treib- 
holzersammlung angehorend.  Leider  hatte  ISACHSEN  keine  Gelegenheit 
mehr  als  diese  einzige  Probe  mitzunehmen.  Von  der  Ostkuste  des 
Ellesmere-Landes  hat  man  auch  nur  1  Probe  erhalten.  Sie  wurde 
von  SIMMONS  in  der  Alexandrabucht  gefunden.  Eine  Probe  hat  man 
von  N.  Devon,  vom  Belcher-Berge  am  Cardigan-Sund  erhalten. 
Alle  iibrigen  Proben  sind  in  Buchten  im  westlichen  Teile  des  Jones- 
Sundes  genommen. 

Die  zusammengebrachte  Treibholzersammlung  besteht  aus  etwa 
zwanzig  Nummern  mit  ca.  40  verschiedenen  Proben.  Wenn  eine  Num- 
mer  mehrere  verschiedene  Proben  umfasst,  sind  diese  vom  Verf.  mit 
Buchstaben  bezeichnet. 

Ausser  drei  unter  der  Nummer  2116  in  der  Moskus-Bucht  einge- 
sammelten  Proben,  die  an  der  Aussenseite  Spuren  von  menschlicher  Be- 
arbeitung  zeigten,  und  somit  aus  der  Treibholzersammlung  forteliminiert 
werden  mussten,  erwiesen  sich  alle  als  typische  Treibholzerproben. 
Sie  bestanden  teils  aus  kurzeren  Stammstocken,  welche  an  beiden  Enden 
unebene  Bruchflachen  zeigten  und  deren  Aste  nahe  am  Stamme  abgenutzt 
waren,  teils  aus  grosseren  oder  kleineren,  aus  einem  grosseren  Stocke 
tangentiell  abgesprengten  Holzsplittern,  teils  aus  Starnm-  und  Wurzel- 
iisten.  Das  Aussere  des  Holzes  war  glatt,  bisweilen  glanzend  und  von 
graulichem  Farbentone,  welcher  bei  einigen  Proben  in  reines  Silberweiss 
hiniiberging,  ein  Kennzeichen,  welches  darauf  deutet,  dass  die  Treib- 
holzer  lange  im  Wasser  gelegen  haben.  Sarntliche  Proben,  mit 
Ausnahme  von  zwei,  erwiesen  sich  als  Nadelholzer.  Die 
Laubholzerproben  wurden  beide  in  der  Gansebucht  (;,Gaasefjordenu) 
angetroffen. 


10 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Die  Treibhdlzersammlung  von  Ellesmere-Land  scheint  also  bin- 
sichtlich  der  Proportion  zwischen  Nadelholzern  und  Laubholzern  den- 
selben  Gesetzen  wie  die  ilbrigen  Treibholzersammlungen  zu  folgen. 
(Siehe  p.  8.) 

Breite  der  Jahrringe. 

Auch  in  anderen  Beziehungen  als  in  den  oben  erwahnten  herrscht 
Ahnlichkeit  zwischen  dieser  und  anderen  Treibholzersammlungen.  Der 
Mittelwert  der  Jahrringe  im  Stammholz  der  Nadelbaume  ist  also  ausser- 
ordentlich  gering  und  deutet  darauf,  dass  die  Mutterbaume  in  einem 
arktischen  Klima  gewachsen  sind.  Im  beigefugten  Schema  wird  eine 
Totaliibersicht  fiber  die  Mittelbreite  der  Jahrringe  in  Wurzel  und 
Stamm  der  Nadelholzer  geliefert.  Alle  Masse  sind  in  mm.  angegeben. 
Tabelle  ilber  die  Mittelbreite  der  Jahrringe:  Stamm-  u.  Wurzelholz. 


B 
*\ 

|£ 

ll 

u 

1* 

II 

3  1 
** 

H 
9 

*O 
CO 

<B    3 

*i 

3& 

4>    «3 

,-*£ 

3:§'E 

.-S  Sj= 

&£3 

Stammholz. 

Wurzelho1z.il 

Anmerkungen. 

mm. 

mm. 

2640  B 

45 

15 

0,33 

1 

- 

Stammfragment,  centrale  Jahrringe  fehlen. 

1247 

c:a.80 

29 

0,30 

1 

fStammstock  mit  centralen  Jahrringen 

\     (Alexandra  Bucht). 

2640  C 

35 

15 

0,42 

1 

- 

Stammfragment,  centrale  Jahrringe  fehlen. 

2640  E 

26 

12 

0,46 

1 

- 

Ji                                                n 

[Radius  der  50  centralen  Jahrringe  =  20  mm. 

2640  A 

115 

55 

0,47 

1 

{Radius  der  50  folgenden  Jahrringe  =  25  mm. 

'Radius  der  15  Uussersten  Jahrringe  =  10  mm. 

2640  D 

83 

42 

0,51 

1 

- 

Stammfragment,  centrale  Jahrringe  fehlen. 

2840  B 

26 

20 

0,76 

1 

- 

n                                                   n 

2115 

47 

35 

0,74 

1 

- 

n                                                  n 

2763 

36 

29 

0,81 

1 

- 

n                                                  « 

2640  F 

50 

40 

0,8 

1 

- 

Stammfragment  mit  centralen  Jahrringen. 

689  B 

c:a,  25 

35 

M 

1 

_ 

f                „                                     „                  Bays  Bucht. 

\Holz  sehr  vermodert. 

2117 

19 

40 

2,10 

1 

- 

Stammfragm.   mit  wahrsch.   intermediuren  Jahrringen. 

2984 

17 

40 

2,35 

1 

- 

Stammstock  noch  im  Besitze  des  Marks;  Holz  weiss. 

2985  B 

23 

56 

2,43 

1 

- 

n                                               n                                     n 

2&39 

c:a.  75 

40 

0,53 

- 

1 

Der  langste  Radius  40mm.;  der  ktirzeste  Radius  17  mm. 

2840 

41 

34 

0,82 

„ 

1 

(           „                „        34  mm.;         „                   „          10mm. 

(Holz  intensiv  rotgefiirbt. 

2015  A 

c:a.  36 

46 

1,27 

- 

1 

Holz  rOtlich. 

2987  A 

30 

60 

2 

- 

1 

Holz  intensiv  rotgefarbt. 

2985  A 

64 

130 

2,03 

- 

1 

{„                      „           ;  der  liingste  Radius  130  mm. 
Der  kiirzeste  Radius  20  mm. 

1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TRE1BHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         11 

Wie  die  Tabelle  zeigt,  1st  die  Mittelbreite  der  Jahrringe  fiir  die  resp. 
Stammholzproben  im  allgemeinen  sehr  gering.  Die  Grenzwerte  sind 
0,33  mm.  und  2,43  mm.  Die  meisten  Proben  sind  indessen  nur  Frag- 
mente,  entweder  von  den  ausseren  periferen  oder  den  inneren  centralen 
Teilen  des  Stammes,  und  enthalten  nur  eine  geringe  Anzahl  von  den 
Jahrringen  des  Mutterbaumes.  Eine  solche  Probe  kann  also  kaum  den 
korrekten  Wert  fiir  die  Mittelbreite  samtlicher  Jahrringe  des  betreffenden 
Mutterbaumes  geben.  Werden  namlich  nur  die  periferen  und  somit  die 
schmalsten  Jahrringe  eines  Baumes  der  Berechnung  vom  Mittelwert 
der  samtlichen  Jahrringe  des  Mutterbaumes  zu  Grunde  gelegt,  so  wird 
dieser  Wert  wahrscheinlich  zu  gering,  wie  anderseits  ein  Wert  zu  hoch 
wird,  der  nur  auf  dar  Berechnung  von  den  breiteren,  also  den  inter- 
mediaren  Jahrringen  eines  Baumes  basiert  wird.  Man  diirfte  daher 
einem  wirklichen  Normalmittelwert  am  nachsten  komrnen,  indem  man 
das  aritmetische  Medium  von  den  respektiven  Mittelwerten  samtlicher 
Proben  berechnet.  Der  Normalmittelwert  zeigte  sich  dann  0,99  mm.  zu 
sein.  (Nach  14  Proben  berechnet.) 

Denselben  Mittelwert  erhielt  ORTENBLAD  bei  seinen  Messungen  an 
Treibholzern  aus  dem  siidwestlichen  Gronland.  Fiir  das  Stammholz  be- 
rechnet diirfte  doch  dieser  Wert  zu  hoch  sein,  weil  ORTENBLAD  zwischen 
Stamm-  und  Wurzelholz  keinen  Unterschied  gemacht  hat,  was  aller 
Wahrscheinlichkeit  nach  fiir  das  Stammholz  ein  noch  geringeres  Resultat 
gegeben  hatte. 

Nach  der  Tabelle  des  Verf.  1,  welche  sich  auf  die  Treibholzer  aus 
Spitzbergen,  Jan  Mayen  und  dem  nordostlichen  Gronland  (die  NAT- 
HORsx'sche  Treibholzersammlung)  bezieht,  waren  die  Grenzwerte  fiir  Stamm- 
holz 0,45  mm.  und  2,6  mm.,  der  Mittelwert  1,17  mm.  (nach  31  Proben 
berechnet).  Auch  dieser  Wert  diirfte  als  Normalmittelwert  betrachtet 
zu  hoch  sein,  weil  die  Messungen  nur  an  solchen  Proben  gemacht 
worden  sind,  welche  den  starksten  Zuwachs  anzeigten.  Zahlreiche  Proben 
miissen  ausser  Berechnung  gelassen  werden,  weil  die  Jahrringe  so  schmal 
waren,  dass  ihre  Anzahl  nicht  mil  Loupe  geschatzt  werden  konnte. 

Fiir  die  Jahrringe  des  Wurzelholzes  waren  die  Grenzwerte  0,53  mm., 
2,03  mm. ;  der  Mittelwert  1,33  mm.  (nach  5  Proben  berechnet).  In  der 
Tabelle  des  Verf.  tiber  Wurzelholz  in  der  Treibholzersammlung  NAT- 
HORST'S  waren  die  Grenzwerte  0,31  mm.,  5,2  mm.;  der  Mittelwert  1,38mm. 
(nach  17  Proben  berechnet). 

In  beiden  diesen  Treibholzersammlungen  (in  der  SvERDRUp'schen 
und  der  NATHORST'schen)  sowohl  als  in  den  iibrigen,  wo  man  zwischen 

1  INGVARSON  1.  c.  p.  60. 


12  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Wurzelholz  und  Stammholz  einen  Unterschied  gemacht  hat  (LINDMAN, 
KRAUS),  hat  es  sich  erwiesen,  dass  der  Wert  fur  die  Mittelbreite  der 
Jahrringe  grosser  im  Wurzelholz  als  im  Stammholz  ist.  Diese  Berech- 
nungen  beziehen  sich  besonders  auf  die  Larchen. 


Systematische  Bestimmung  der  Treibholzerproben. 


I.    Nadelholzer. 

Mil  Ausnahme  von  zwei  Proben  waren,  wie  oben  erwahnt,  samtliche 
Treibholzerproben  Nadelholzer.  Bei  der  mikroskopischen  Untersuchung 
hat  es  sich  erwiesen,  dass  alle  diese  Nadelholzer  zu  demselben  anato- 
mischen  Typus,  namlich  zum  Larix-Picea-Typus,  gerechnet  vverden 
konnten.  Dieser  Typus  vvird  bekanntlich  von  folgenden  histologischen 
Gharakteren  gekennzeichnet:  Harzkaniile  von  zwei  Arten,  teils  vertikal 
zwischen  den  Holzzellen,  teils  horizontal  innerhalb  der  spulformigen  Mark- 
strahlen.  Markstrahlen  tangentiell,  teils  einreihig,  teils  mehrreihig  (spul- 
formig).  Markstrahl  teils  aus  tracheidalen,  teils  aus  parenchymatischen 
Elementen  bestehend.  Die  parenchymatischen  Elemente  mit  kleinen 
elliptischen  oder  runden  Tiipfeln  versehen,  gewohnlich  4 — 6  auf  der  vier- 
eckigen  Wandflache,  welche  entsteht,  wo  ein  Markstrahl  einen  Tracheid 
kreuzt 

Der  Larix-Picea-Typus  enthalt  bekanntlich  zwei  Gattungen  :  Larix, 
Picea.  Das  Holz  dieser  beiden  Gattungen  durch  eine  vollig  zuverliissige 
histologische  Diagnose  zu  unterscheiden  ist  in  Betracht  des  grossen 
Unterschieds,  welcher  zwischen  diesen  in  morphologischer  Hinsicht 
herrscht,  seit  langer  Zeit  ein  ersehntes  Ziel  gewesen,  auf  dessen  Ver- 
wirklichung  eine  grosse  Arbeit  verwendet  worden  ist.  In  meiner  friiher 
citierten  Arbeit  liegt  ein  ausfiihrlicher  Bericht  iiber  diese  Untersuchungen 
vor.  Die  eigenen  Untersuchungen  des  Verfassers  in  dieser  Sache  be- 
ziehen  sich  auf  die  Struktur  der  Hoftiipfel  in  den  Wassermarkstrahl- 
zellen  des  Stammholzes.  Nur  Stammholz  —  weder  Ast-  noch  Wurzel- 
holz --  wurde  untersucht.  Untersuchte  Arten  waren  Larix  europwa 
DC.,  L.  americana  MICHX.,  L.  sibirica  LEDEB.,  Picea  excelsa  LINK. 
Ich  unterschied  zwei  Tiipfelformen,  namlich  den  Lar&B-Tupfel  und 
den  Ptcea-Tiipfel,  von  welchem  der  erstere  die  Larche,  der  letztere  die 
Fichte  charakterisiert.  Die  Struktur  dieser  Tiipfelformen  habe  ich  an 
Radialschnitten  des  Holzes,  aber  nur  an  typischem  Friihholz,  vvahrge- 


1898-1902.  No.2i.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         13 

nomnien,  und  an  solchen  Durchschnittsbildern,  welche  den  Ti'ipfel  in 
seiner  Mittelachse,  d.  h.  diametral,  durchgeschnitten  zeigten1.  War  der 
Schnitt  nicht  diametral,  sondern  neben  dem  Durchmesser  des  Tupfels 
angebracht,  erschien  die  Tupfelmiindung  kleiner  und  enger. 

Da  ich  in  meiner  friiher  citierten  Arbeit 2  die  Tupfelformen  be- 
schrieben  babe,  will  ich  bier  unten  ihre  Struktur  nur  in  aller  Kiirze 
rekapitulieren : 

Im  Larix-Tuple\  ist  die  Tupfel-Mundung  weit  mit  relativ  dunner 
und  feiner  Tiipfelnaht;  der  Picea-Tiipfel  aber  besitzt  enge  Tupfelmiin- 
dung  mit  relativ  dicker  und  grober  Tupfelnaht.  In  dem  Lcmo?-Tupfel 
babe  ich  gefunden,  dass  die  Mittelproportion  zwischen  den  Durchmessern 
der  Schliesshaut  und  der  Tupfelrnimdung  oder,  mit  andern  Worten,  dass 
die  Mittelproportion  zwischen  den  Durchmessern  des  ausseren  und  des 
inneren  Tiipfelkreises  2,65  :  1  ist,  fur  den  Picea-Tiipfel  aber  8,62  :  1, 
wobei  der  Durchmesser  des  inneren  Tupfelkreises,  das  heisst  der  Tupfel- 
miindung,  als  Einer  gesetzt  worden  ist.  -  -  Mit  diesen  Messungen  habe 
ich  meine  Auffassung  angeben  wollen,  dass  im  Larix-Tupiel  der  Durch- 
messer des  ausseren  Tupfelkreises  im  Verhaltnis  zu  dem  des  inneren 
kleiner  als  im  P^cea-Tiipfel  ist. 

Gegen  die  Aufstellung  von  diesen  Tupfelformen  sind  von  0.  G. 
PETERSEN  3  Einwendungen  gemacht  worden.  Er  hat  zwar  die  eine  so- 
wohl  als  die  andere  Tupfelforrn  wahrnehmen  konnen,  aber  er  hat  sie 
nicht  konstant  gefunden,  sondern  in  einander  ilbergehend.  An  den  Text- 
figuren,  die  seiner  Arbeit  (p.  67)  beigefiigt  sind,  hat  er  also  den  Larix- 
Tiipfel  des  Verfassers  an  den  Bildern  I  a.,  I  b.  konstatiert  (,,Tager  vi 
f.  Eks.  i/cmce-Billederne  a.  och  b.,  vil  den  angivne  karakter  traede  ret 
tydeligt  frem  ved  Sammenligning  med  flere  av  Picea-Billederne")  und 
den  Picea-Tupfel  an  den  Bildern  II  b.,  II  f.  (,,Av  Picea-Billederne  er 
vel  b.  og  f.  de  mest  karakteristiske;  de  0vrige  forekommer  mig  egentlig 
ikke  videre  egnede  til  at  anskueliggjere  den  naevnte  Forskel".) 

Gegen  diese  Ausserung  PETERSEN'S  will  ich  betonen,  dass  ich  diesen 
Formen  selbst  absolute  Konstanz  nicht  zuerkannt  habe,  was  aus  fol- 
gendem  Gitat  aus  meiner  Arbeit  p.  26  hervorgehen  diirfte :  ,,Dessa  por- 
former  aro  tamligen4  konstanta,  atminstone  betraffande  Picea-poren; 


1  In  einem  diametralen  Durchschnittsbild  tritt  der  Torus  deutlich  hervor,  in  einem 
Umfang    grosser    als    der  Durchmesser  der  Tiipfelmundung.     In  Fig.  1,  p.  25  in 
meiner  friiher   citierten  Arbeit    ist  der  Torus  durch  Ubersehen  nicht  gezeichnet. 

2  INGVARSON  1.  c.  pp.  25,  26.  27. 

3  PETERSEN,    Den    diagnostiske   adskillelse  av  rodgranens  og  laerkens  ved.     (Forst- 
botaniske  Undersegelser  1906,  S.  64.) 

4  Das  Wort  ist  erst  in  vorliegender  Arbeit  gesperrt. 


14  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Larix-porens  struktur  ater  synes  i  viss  man  betingas  av  cellvaggarnas 
tjocklek".  Zwar  habe  ich  mit  diesen  Worten  zuerst  hervorheben  wollen, 
dass  der  Gharakter  des  Lanic-Tiipfels,  als  Typus  betrachtet,  in  den 
Wassermarkstrahlzellen  des  Spatholzes,  welche  grobere  Zellwande  als 
die  des  Friihholzes  haben,  ausgewischt  wird,  aber  anderseits  ist  es 
ziemlich  gewiss,  dass  der  Typus  in  der  intermediaren  Zone,  welche  in 
wohl  entwickeltem  Stammholz  zwischen  dem  eigentlichen  Friih-  und 
Spatholz  oft  vorhanden  ist,  wenn  nicht  direkt  ausgewischt,  so  doch 
wenigstens  geschwacht  wird.  Unzweifelhaft  giebt  es,  wie  es  aus 
einigen  der  Bilder  PETERSEN'S  hervorgeht,  auch  im  typischen  Friihholz 
Ubergangsformen  zwischen  den  Tiipfeltypen.  Mit  anderen  Worten,  inter- 
mediare,  fur  die  Gattungsdiagnose  vollstiindig  indifferente  Tiipfelformen 
giebt  es  bei  sowohl  Fichten  a|s  Larchen.  Diese  intermediaren  Tiipfel- 
formen werden  dadurch  gekennzeichnet,  dass  die  Eigenschaften,  welche 
die  Weite  der  Tiipfelmiindung,  die  Dicke  der  Tiipfelnaht  und  die  Pro- 
portion zwischen  den  beiden  Durchmessern  der  Tiipfelkreise  bestimmen, 
nicht  in  derselben  Weise  wie  bei  den  Extrem-Tiipfeln  kombiniert  sind. 

Ein  extremer  Picea-Tiipfel  hat  also  eine  enge  Tiipfelmiindung,  eine 
dicke,  grobe  Tiipfelnaht  und  die  Proportion  zwischen  den  Durchmes- 
sern der  Tttpfelkreise  (5—13,9)  :  1  *. 

Ein  Extrem-Larix-Tupie}  hat  eine  weite  Tiipfelmiindung,  eine  etwas 
zugespitzte  Tiipfelnaht  und  die  Proportion  zwischen  den  Durchmessern 
der  Tiipfelkreise  (1,7—4)  :  1. 

In  term  edi  are  Formen  aber  haben  entweder  1)  enge  Tiipfel- 
miindung (Picea-Charakter)  und  etwas  zugespitzte  Tiipfelnaht  (Larix- 
Charakter)  oder  2)  weite  Tiipfelmiindung  (Lanas-Charakter)  und  dicke, 
grobe  Tiipfelnaht  (Picea-Charakter). 

Ich  will  gern  einraumen,  dass  es  wilnschenswert  gewesen  ware,  wenn 
diese  intermediaren  Tiipfelformen  in  meiner  friiheren  Arbeit  ausdriick- 
licher  hervorgehoben  und  genauer  angegeben  worden  waren.  Dass  dies 
nicht  geschehen  ist,  beruht  darauf,  dass  der  Verf.  diese  Tupfelformen 
bei  der  Gattungsdiagnose  nicht  mit  in  Betracht  genommen,  sondern  diese 
ausschliesslich  auf  den  Extrem-Tiipfeln  basiert  hat. 

Unter  den  Figuren  PETERSEN'S  gibt  es  nur  eine,  welche  nach  der 
Ansicht  des  Verf.  die  Struktur  des  Lemsc-Tiipfels  deutlich  angiebt,  namlich 
Fig.  1  b  (besonders  der  mittlere  Tupfel),  und  unter  den  Picect-Tiipfeln 
ebenfalls  nur  einen  Typus,  namlich  der  mittlere  Tupfel  in  Fig.  II  f.  - 
Fig.  II  b  mochte  wohl  zunachst  einem  Picea-Tiipfel  entsprechen,  ob- 
gleich  sie  uns  das  Bild  eines  typischen  Picea-Tiipfels  nicht  giebt.  Vor 

1  Vgl.  die  Angaben  in  meiner  friiher  angef.  Arbeit,  pp.  26,  27! 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.          K> 

alien  Dingen  ist  die  Tiipfelmiindung  an  der  linken  Seite  der  Figur  etwas 
zu  weit,  ausserdem  ist  die  betreffende  Figur  assynietrisch,  insofern  dass 
die  rechte  Tiipfelhalfte  der  anderen  nicht  ganz  ahnlich  ist. 

Von  alien  den  Figuren,  die  uns  p.  67  in  der  Arbeit  PETERSEN'S 
gegeben  werden,  hiitte  der  Verf.  also  nur  auf  zwei  die  Gattungsdiagnose 
zu  basieren  gewagt,  niimlich  auf  Fig.  I  b  (Larix-Tiiplel)  und  auf  dem 
niittleren  Tiipfel  in  Fig.  II  f.  (Picea-Tiipfel).  Vergleichen  wir  diese  beiden 
Figuren,  von  welchen  ja  nach  der  Ansicbt  des  Verf.  jede  ihr  Extrem 
repr&sentiert,  so  sehen  wir  sogleich,  dass  sie  einander  sehr  unahnlich 
sind,  dass  eine  Verwechselung  zwischen  ihnen  kaum  moglich  ist.  Aus 
dem  Gesichtspunkte  der  Ahnlichkeit  giebt  es  also  wohl  schwerlich  ein 
Hindernis  fiir  die  Verwendung  der  resp.  Extreme  als  ,,Gattungstiipfel".  - 
Eine  andere  und  zwar  sehr  bedenkliche  Sache  ware  es,  wenn  von  den 
beiden  Tiipfelformen  nicht  jede  fiir  ihre  Baumart  typisch  ware,  sondern 
wenn  sie  vollstandig  unregelmassig  durcheinandergemischt  vorkamen. 
Nach  der  Ansicht  des  Verf.  verhalt  es  sich  doch  nicht  so.  Wenigstens 
ist  'der  Larix-Tupiel  Fig.  I  b  fiir  Larix  ganz  besonders  charakteristisch. 
Wie  ich  es  von  der  Figurenkarte  p.  67  verstanden  habe,  ist  PETERSEN 
derselben  Ansicht.  Wenn  wir  namlich  diese  Karte  etwas  genauer  unter- 
suchen,  so  finden  wir  bald,  dass  unter  den  Figuren  der  Gruppe  II  (Picea- 
Tiipfel)  keine  vorkommt,  welche  mit  Fig.  Ib  (=  extremer  Larix-Tuptel) 
verwechselt  werden  kiinnte.  Etwas  bedenklicher  stellt  sich  vielleicht 

die  Sache  hinsichtlich  dem  Picea-Tiipfel.  Dieser  diirfte  vielleicht  in 
seinem  extremen  Typus  oder  wenigstens  in  einer  intermediaren  Form, 
welche  demselben  sehr  ahnelt,  auch  bei  Larix  vorkommen.  Unzweifel- 
haft  ist  doch  der  Picea-Tiipfel  fiir  Picea  charakteristisch,  auch  wenn 
er  bei  Larix  sporadisch  angetroffen  werden  konnte.  Diese  Tiipfelform 
diirfte  uns  indessen  keine  so  vollstandig  sichere  Diagnose  der  Picea 
wie  der  iccmc-Tiipfel  der  Larix  geben  konnen.  Der  Verf.  hat  sich 
bei  der  Gattungsbestimmung  dieser  Methode  bedient:  Wenn  Larix- 
Tiipfel  in  grosserer  Menge  angetroffen  wurden,  dann  wurde  die  Gattung 
als  Larix  festgestellt ;  wenn  Z/ansc-Tiipfel  vollstandig  fehlten,  Picea- 
Tiipfel  aber  in  reichlicher  Menge  vorkamen,  wurde  die  Diagnose  auf 
Picea  festgestellt. 

Durch  meine  Messungen  habe  ich,  wie  oben  erwahnt,  beweisen 
wollen,  dass  im  i/cmcc-Tiipfel  der  Durchmesser  des  ausseren  Tiipfel- 
kreises  im  Verhaltnis  zu  dem  des  inneren  Tiipfelkreises  kleiner  als  im 
P^cea-Tupfel  ist.  (Larix-T\iple\  2,65  :  1 ;  Picea-Tupfel  8,62  :  1,  wobei 
der  Durchmesser  des  inneren  Tiipfelkreises,  das  heisst  der  Tiipfelmiindung, 
als  Einer  gesetzt  worden  ist).  Durch  seine  Messungen  hat  PETERSEN 


16 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


diese  meine  Auffassung  gewissermassen  bestatigt.  So  hat  er  fur  den 
Lana-Tupfel  den  Wert  7,68  :  1,  fur  den  Picea-Tiipfel  aber  8,61  :  1  er- 
halten.  Obwohl  PETERSEN  also  fiir  den  Larix-Tuplel  einen  weit  hoheren 
Wert  als  der  Verf.,  und  also  einen  weit  geringeren  Unterschied  zwischen 
den  beiden  Gattungen  in  diesem  Falle  erhalten  hat,  so  stimmen  doch 
unsere  resp.  Messungen  in  der  Hinsicht  ilberein,  welche  hier  als  das 
vvesentliche  betrachtet  werden  muss,  namlich  darin,  dass  wir  beide  fiir  den 
Durchmesser  des  ausseren  Tiipfelkreises  geringeren  Wert  bei  Larix  als 
bei  Picea  erhalten  haben. 

Wie  man  sieht,  existiert  hinsichtlich  des  Larix-Tuplels  ein  bedeu- 
tender  Unterschied  in  unseren  Angaben.  Moglicherweise  beruht  dies 
darauf,  dass  die  Messungen  PETERSEN'S,  wie  er  selbst  vermutet,  nicht  so 
zahlreich  wie  die  des  Verf.  gewesen  sind:  W!NGVARSONS  Maalinger  er 
ganske  vist  paa  dette  specielle  Punkt  betydeligt  talrigere  end  mine,  men 
det  har  dog  forekommet  mig  at  vaere  nogen  Grund  til  at  naevne  disse" 
(p.  68),  oder  auch  darauf,  dass  PETERSEN  wahrscheinlich  seine  Messungen 
hauptsachlich  auf  die  Mittelformen,  der  Verf.  aber  auf  die  Extreme 
basiert  hat.  Ware  diese  letztere  Annahme  die  richtige,  so  miisste 
natiirlich  der  Picea-Tiipfel  in  oben  ervvahnter  Hinsicht  viel  weniger  als 
der  Lana>Tupfel  variieren.  Wir  batten  namlich  fur  den  Paceci-Tiipfel 
beinahe  denselben  Wert,  fiir  den  Lanaj-Tiipfel  aber  verschiedene  Werte 
erhalten. 

Vorausgesetzt,  dass  wir  unsere  Zellenmessungen  auf  verschiedene 
Tiipfelformen  basiert  haben:  PETERSEN  auf  die  intermediaren,  der  Verf. 
auf  die  extremen  —  was  meiner  Ansicht  nach  hochst  wahrscheinlich 
ist  — ,  so  durfte  wohl  eine  vergleichende  Untersuchung  von  unseren 
resp.  Messungsresultaten  eher  zum  Bestarken  als  zum  Widerlegen 
meiner  Auffassung  hinsichtlich  der  Konstanz  der  Tupfelformen  geeignet 
sein,  wie  diese  in  meiner  friiher  citierten  Arbeit  (p.  26)  formuliert  worden 
ist:  ,,Dessa  performer  iiro  tamligen  konstanta,  atminstone  betraffande 
Picea-poren,  Loricc-porens  struktur  ater  synes  mig  i  viss  man  beting? 
av  cellvaggarnas  tjocklek". 

Es  sind  keine  neuen  Untersuchungen,  welche  der  Antwort  auf  die 
Kritik  PETERSEN'S  zu  Grunde  liegen,  auch  ist  es  keineswegs  ein  Versucr 
den  Wert  derselben  zu  vermindern.  Der  Verf.  hat  mit  diesen  Zeilei 
nur  die  Punkte  seiner  friiheren  Darstellung,  die  undeutlich  waren  oder 
missverstanden  werden  konnten,  verdeutlichen  und  erklaren  wollen,  zum 
Beispiel  die  Fragen  von  der  Konstanz  der  Tupfelformen,  von  den  Tupfel- 
formen, auf  welche  der  Verf.  die  Gattungsdiagnose  basiert  hat. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TRE1BHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         17 

Der  Verf.  hat  die  Frage  zu  erneuerter  Untersuchung  nicht  aufnehmen 
wollen,  weil  ihm  Zeit  und  Gelegenheit  dazu  fehlten  und  vor  allem,  well 
die  erwahnten  Tiipfelformen,  nach  dem  was  schon  in  meiner  frtiheren 
Arbeit  betont  wurde,  sich  nur  auf  Stamrnholz,  moglichervveise  auch  auf 
Wurzelholz,  aber  nicht  auf  Astholz  beziehen.  Die  Tupfelformen  werden 
also  immer  nur  einen  relativen  Wert  haben,  auch  wenn  ihre  Gttltigkeit 
hinsichtlich  des  Stammholzes  noch  so  bestimmt  festgestellt  wurde. 

Wie  die  Sache  jetzt  steht,  diirfte  die  Diagnose  zwischen  Larche  und 
Fichte  nicht  nur  auf  einem  Gharakter  basiert  werden  konnen,  der  fur 
sowohl  Stammholz  und  Wurzelholz  als  Astholz  gilt.  Es  ist  moglich, 
dass  ein  solcher  nie  aufgewiesen  werden  kann.  Es  scheint  mir  eher, 
als  waren  alle  holzanatomischen  Differenzen  zwischen  den  in  morpho- 
logischer  Hinsicht  so  verschiedenen  Holzarten  nur  graduell,  zahlreiche 
Zwischenformen  vermittelnd.  Hiermit  ist  aber  nicht  gesagt,  dass  man 
in  ke'inem  Falle  das  Larchenholz  vom  Fichtenholz  unterscheiden  konnte. 
Abgesehen  von  den  obenerwahnten  extremen  Tupfelformen  giebt  es  in  den 
Dimensions-  und  Formenverhaltnissen  der  Zellen  gewisse  Moglichkeiten, 
die  beiden  Baumarten  zu  unterscheiden.  Das  Holz  von  einem  kraftigen 
und  uppigen  Larchenstamme  kann  in  der  Regel  unter  dem  Mikroskop 
vom  Fichtenholz  ohne  Schwierigkeit  unterschieden  werden,  Dank  den 
kilhnen  und  kraftigen  Dimensionen,  die  seine  histologischen  Elemente 
auszeichnen. 

Von  BURGERSTEIN  1  liegt  eine  monographische  Arbeit  in  dieser  Frage 
vor,  in  vveicher  er  auf  der  Grundlage  von  Zellenmessungen  Larchen  von 
Fichten  zu  unterscheiden  versucht.  Er  ist  bei  seinen  Untersuchungen 
zu  dem  Resullat  gekommen,  dass  eine  histologische  Diagnose  nicht  nur 
auf  ein  einzelnes  Kennzeichen,  wohl  aber  auf  eine  Kombination  von 
mehreren  Kennzeichen  basiert  werden  kann.  Diese  Kennzeichen  be- 
ziehen sich  auf  den  radialen  Querdurchmesser  des  Lumens  der  Friih- 
tracheiden  auf  die  Verteilung  der  Hoftupfel  an  den  Radialwanden  der 
Fruhtracheiden,  auf  die  Mittelhohe  der  parenchymatischen  Markstrahl- 
zellen,  auf  die  Mittelhohe  der  Markstrahlen  (parenchymatische  Elemente 
incl.  Quertracheiden).  Seine  Beobachtungen  hat  er  in  eine  analytische 
Bestimmungstabelle  fur  Fichten  und  Larchen  zusammengefasst.  Diese 
Tabelle  wird  hier  unten  zum  Vergleiche  mit  den  Messungen,  die  der 
Verf.  auf  arktischem  Material  angestellt  hat,  in  extenso  wiedergegeben. 

Mit  Riicksicht  auf  meine  Aufgabe,  den  Wachsort  dieser  Treibholzer 
festzustellen,  .war  es  filr  mich  von  grosster  Bedeutung,  wie  ich  spater 

1  BURGERSTEIN,    Vergleichende     anatomische     Untersuchungen    des     Fichten-    und 
Larchenholzes  (Denkschriften  der  Wiener  Akademie,  60  Bd.,  1893). 

2 


18  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

zeigen  werde,  diese  beiden  Baumarten  unterscheiden  zu  konnen.  Oben- 
erwahnte  Tiipfelformen  (extreme  Larix-,  resp.  Picea-Tupfel)  hat  der  Verf. 
der  Gattungsdiagnose  nicht  zu  Grunde  legen  wollen,  weil  sie,  wie  schon 
gesagt,  nur  fiir  Stammholz  gelten  und  ein  nicht  geringes  Prozent  dieser 
Treibholzerproben  aus  Wurzelholz  und  Astholz  bestehen,  und  auch  weil 
der  Wert  der  Tupfelformen  als  hislologische  Diagnose  bestritten  ist. 
Statt  dessen  hat  der  Verf.  auf  Grundlage  von  Zellenmessungen  nach  der 
analytischen  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  diese  Baumarten  von  einander  zu 
unterscheiden  versucht.  Da  indessen  diese  Tabelle  nur  auf  Material  aus 
siidlicheren  Breitengraden  (Kroatien,  Slavonien  u.  a.  Orten)  *  Beziehung 
hat,  so  musste  natiirlich  ihre  Giiltigkeit  zuerst  an  arktischem  Material 
geprobt  werden,  bevor  sie  dem  Unterscheiden  zwischen  arktischen  Fichten 
und  Larchen  zu  Grunde  gelegt  werden  konnte.  Eine  solche  Priifung 
ist  dadurch  ermoglicht,  dass  eine  Sammlung  Praparate  von  arktischen 
Treibholzern,  die  in  der  Miindung  des  Jenissei's  eingesammelt  sind, 
sich  im  Besitze  des  Verf.  befindet.  Unter  diesen  wurden  solche  zum 
Larix-Picea-Typus  gehorenden  Praparate  gewahlt,  die  nebst  Holz  auch 
Rinde  enthielten.  Da  es  bekanntlich  in  der  Rinde  von  Larchen  und 
Fichten  sichere  Kennzeichen  giebt,  konnte  man  also  durch  die  Struktur 
der  Rinde  entscheiden,  welche  Proben  zur  einen  oder  anderen  Baumart 
gehorten.  An  diesen  so  festgestellten  Larchen-  und  Fichtenholzproben 
hahe  ich  nach  dem  BuRGERSTEm'schen  Schema  Zellenmessungen  bewerk- 
stelligt.  Dabei  hat  es  sich  erwiesen,  dass  samtliche  Proben,  welche  der 
Rinde  nach  als  Fichten  und  Larchen  bestimmt  wurden,  auch  nach  dem 
Schema  Fichten,  resp.  Larchen  waren. 

Dem  Resultat  dieser  Prufung  gemass  glaubte  der  Verf.  diese  Tabelle 
auch  ftir  die  Bestimmung  von  den  zum  Larix- Picea-Ty pus  horenden 
Treibholzern  vom  Elles mere-Land  gebrauchen  zu  konnen.  Messungen 
sind  daher  vom  Verf.  an  diesen  Treibholzern  nach  demselben  Prinzip 
wie  die  obenerwiihnten  Kontrollmessungen  an  den  sibirischen  Treibholzern 
angestellt  worden.  Hier  unten  giebt  der  Verf.  eine  Serie  von  Tabellen. 
Tabelle  A.  Die  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  2  in  extenso. 

„        B.    Kontrollmessungen  an  sibirischen  Treibholzern  mit  Rinde  und 

Einrangierung  der  Proben  in  die  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S. 
„        C.    Messungen    an    den    Treibholzern    von    Ellesmere-Land 
und  Einrangierung  der  Proben  in  die  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S. 

1  Ich    will    erwahnen,  dass    ich    keine    Gelegenheit  hatte,   die  Messimgen  BURGER- 
STEIN'S   an   Fichten    und   Larchen   aus  sudlichen  Breitengraden  fcu  kontrollieren, 
da   ich   aber   seine    Angaben    nicht  bestritten   gesehen,  habe    ich    mich  im  vor- 
liegenden  Falle  derselben  bedient. 

2  BURGEHSTEIN,    1.  C.    p.  432. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         19 

A.    Analytische  Bestimmungstabelle  des  Fichten- 
und  Larchenholzes. 

I.     Zw jllingstiipfel    nicht   vorhanden. 

A.  Fruhtracheiden    0,020—0,040    mm.      Mittlere   Markstrahlhohe  7—11 
Zellen. 

a)  Markstrahlzellhohe   0,017—0,020   mm.;    einreihige,    mehr   als    10 
Zellen    hohe    Markstrahlen    bilden    circa   20  Prozent   aller   Mark- 
strahlen.     Markstrahlen  selten  verharzt. 

Stammholz  Fichte. 

b)  Markstrahlzellhohe  0,020—0,024  mm. 

a)   Querdurchmesser    des     ausseren    Tupfelhofes     meist    0,021 — 
0,026mm.;  maximale  Markstrahlhohe  30  Zellen;  Markstrahlen 
meist  nicht  verharzt. 
Wurzelholz  Fichte. 

fi)   Querdurchmesser    des    ausseren     Tupfelhofes     meist    0,014 — 

0,022  mm.     (Markstrahlen  meist  verharzt.) 
i 

Stammholz  Larche  (innerste  Jahrringe). 

B.  Fruhtracheiden   0,015—0,030  mm.     Mittlere   Markstrahlhohe   4,5—7 
Zellen;  maximale  Markstrahlhohe  20  Zellen. 

a)  Fruhtracheiden  0,015 — 0,020  mm.;   Querdurchmesser   der   Tiipfel 
0,014 — 0,017  mm.,    niemals    iiber  0,018  mm.,   Spattracheiden   ge- 
streift. 

Astholz  Fichte. 

b)  Fruhtracheiden   0,020—0,030  mm.;    Querdurchmesser  der  Tiipfel 
0,016 — 0,024  mm.     Spattracheiden  gestreift  oder  nicht  gestreift. 

Astholz  Larche. 

II.     Z willingstiipfel  vorhanden. 

A.    Fruhtracheiden  0,030—0,040  mm.     (Markstrahlen  selten  verharzt.) 

a)  Markstrahlzellhohe  0,017 — 0,020  mm.    Querdurchmesser  der  Tupfel 
auch    unter  0,019  mm.     Zwillingstiipfel    meist   einzeln    zwischen 
einfachen   Tupfeln    zerstreut,   seltener    in   mehreren    iibereinander 
liegenden  Reihen. 

Stammholz  Fichte. 

b)  Markstrahlzellhohe   0,020—0,026  mm.     Die   Markstrahl-Leitzellen 
oft    Starke    fiihrend.      Querdurchmesser    der    Tupfel    nicht    unter 
0,019  mm.     Doppeltupfel  einzeln   oder    in  mehreren  Reihen  iiber 
einander  oder  die  Fruhtracheiden  ganz  bedeckend.    Spattracheiden 
ausnahmsweise  gestreift. 

Wurzelholz  Fichte. 


20 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


B.    Friihtracheiden    0,040 — 0,060   mm.     Markstrahlen    sehr    haufig    ver- 
harzt. 

a)  Markstrahlzellhohe    0,020-0,023    mm.     Mittlere    Markstrahlhohe 
9 — 13  Zellen;    maximale    Hohe  40 — 50   Zellen.     Die    einreihigen, 
mehr  als   10  Zellen   hohen   Markstrahlen  bilden  circa  38  Prozent 
aller    Markstrahlen.      Querdurchmesser    der    Tiipfel    auch    unter 
0,020  mm. 

Stammholz  Larche. 

b)  Markstrahlzellhohe  0,024-0,030  mm.   Mittlere  Markstrahlhohe  7-9 
Zellen;    maximale    Hohe    30   Zellen.     Spattracheiden    ausnahms- 
weise  gestreift.     Querdurchmesser  der  Tiipfel  nicht  unter  0,020  mm. 

Wurzelholz  Larche. l 

Tabelle  B. 


a. 

b.  \    e. 

<l.             e.                 f.             [,. 

fc. 

/. 

j. 

k. 

2 
& 

« 

w 

CL, 
2  C 

"55  § 

L.     f     « 

|{J 

en  flj  QJ 
B  X  B 

d 

9 

rs 

'33 

13 
BBj 

en 

— 

2  « 

S-C 

4)         ^J 

2          i 
3    N._ 

S.S  „> 

Si  »=  g 

-g      u 
S  «  5 

c=  u 
v  0  e 

fj. 

c  £    . 

bo 

bc*"O 

By,  _M 

04 

E  S  s 

cd  ^i  — 

0 

.h  «  c 

"1    O    o    "3 

<«j=  2 

95  ~^  S 

—  ai 

.5  c 

gS 

J=  .3    w 

Sj   "-^  ^— 

_2 

.§    4j"^ 

"8-S 

•a  s 

^K.^ 

JK'g 

§£=2  | 

o  a  « 

s,^s 

=  c^5 

'fe-g 
N«£ 

N  > 

Jsl 

Q-rH 

"S 
b 

Isl 

JC'W  in 

cole  d 

t—    » 

Ba 

s  * 

«    N 

a-  0- 

s's.s 

ll-^l 

.fug 

QT^CQ 

aJ  u  t-i 
•-  s>  v 
Q.-Bt) 

_ 

+ 

mm 

0,020 

mm. 

0,038 

6,9  Zellen 

18   Zellen 

mm 

0,024 

_ 

II  Ah 

Wurzelholz 

Fichte. 

Fichte 

— 

4- 

0,025 

0,065 

7,8     „ 

30      „ 

0,027       + 

IIBb 

Wurzelholz 

Larche. 

Larche 



+ 

0,024 

0,059 

8,2     „ 

28      „. 

0,025 

-(- 

IIBb 

Wurzelholz 

Larche. 

Larche 

— 

4- 

0,025 

0,063 

7,5     „ 

20      „         0,025 

4. 

II  B  b      Wurzelholz 

Larche. 

Larche 

— 

+ 

0,025 

0,063 

7,4 

30      „ 

0,025 

•4- 

IIBb 

Wurzelholz 

Larche. 

Larche 

In  dieser  Tabelle  sowohl  als  in  der  folgenden  Tabelle  C.  sind  die- 
selben  diagnostischen  Gharaktere  wie  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  auf- 
genommen  worden.  obgleich  sie  auf  eine  andere  Weise  gruppiert  sind. 
Der  Ubersichtlicheit  wegen  sind  namlich  die  resp.  Charaktere  in  Gruppen 
geordnet  und  solche  Gruppen,  die  mit  einander  verwandt  sind,  znsammen- 
gefiihrt  worden.  Also  stehen  alle  Kennzeichen,  die  sich  auf  die  Tiipfel 
beziehen,  in  einer  Reihenfolge,  namlich  in  den  Gruppen  a,  b,  c;  alle 


1  In  der  vorstehenden  Bestiramungstabelle  ist  unter  dem  Ausdruck  nFriihtracheiden" 
der  radiale  Durchmesser  der  Friihlingsholzzellen  verstanden.  Die  Angaben  be- 
treffs  der  Tiipfel  beziehen  sich  auf  die  an  den  Radialwtinden  der  Friihtracheiden 
ausgebildeten  Tiipfel.  Die  Markstrahlzellhohe  bezieht  sich  auf  die  leitenden 
(mit  einfachen  Tiipfeln  versehenen)  Zellen  des  Markstrahles.  Die  MarkstrahlhShe 
umfasst  Leitzellen  und  Quertracheiden. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHftLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         21 

die  Kennzeichen,  die  sich  auf  die  Markstrahlen  beziehen,  in  einer  Folge: 
e,  ft  g,  h.  Gruppe  i  giebt  an,  welchen  Platz  die  Proben  auf  Grundlage 
der  Angaben  in  den  friiheren  Gruppen  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S 
einnehmen ;  Gruppe  j  giebt  die  Diagnose  nach  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S 
an;  Gruppe  k  die  Diagnose  nach  der  Untersuchung  des  Verf.  von  der 
Struktur  der  Rinde. 

Jeder  Zifferwert  ist  eine  Durchschnittszahl  von  20  Messungen,  mit  Aus- 
nahme  von  denen,  die  in  den  Gruppen  e  und  f  enthalten  sind.  Die  Werte 
in  Gruppe  e  (mittlere  Hohe  des  Markstrahles)  sind  Durchschnittszahlen 
von  circa  80  Messungen.  Die  Hohe  der  Markstrahlen  scheint  weit  mehr 
als  die  iibrigen  in  der  Tabelle  angegebenen  Charaktere  zu  variieren, 
weshalb  die  mittlere  Hohe  durch  eine  grossere  Anzahl  von  Messungen 
berechnet  werden  muss.  Die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  ist  nach 
80  Markstrahlen  berechnet.  -  -  Dieselben  Prinzipien  hinsichtlich  der  Auf- 
stellung  und  Berechnung  der  resp.  Durchschnittswerte,  die  der  Tabelle  B 
zu  Grunde  gelegt  worden,  gelten  auch  fur  die  nachstehende  Tabelle  C. 

Was  nun  die  Tabelle  B  betrifft,  so  enthalt  sie,  wie  oben  erwahnt, 
Kontrollmessungen  an  sibirischen,  mit  Rinde  versehenen  Treibholzern. 
Nur  5  Praparate  sind  auf  diese  Weise  untersucht  worden,  weil  sie  die 
einzigen  waren,  welche  Rinde  enthielten.  Aus  Gruppe  k  (Struktur  der 
Rinde)  geht  hervor,  dass  ein  Praparat  Fichtenholz,  die  iibrigen  Larchen- 
holz  waren.  Nach  Gruppe  j  erweist  es  sich,  dass,  wenn  man  die  Ziffer- 
werte  der  resp.  Gruppen  fur  jede  einzelne  Probe  nach  den  Prinzipien  der 
analytischen  Methode  BURGERSTEIN'S  zusammenstellt,  auch  eine  Probe 
Fichtenholz,  die  4  iibrigen  Larchenholz  sind.  Und  wenn  man  schliess- 
lich  die  Resultate  fur  die  resp.  Proben  in  den  Gruppen  j  und  k  ver- 
gleicht,  erweist  es  sich,  dass  sie  einander  entsprechen. 

Leider  sind  nur  Wurzelholzproben  in  der  Tabelle  aufgenommen 
worden,  und  dies  zwar  aus  dem  Grunde,  dass  nur  vorliegende  Wurzel- 
holzpraparate  Rinde  enthielten. 


FREDRIK  INGVARSSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Anm 


Ili 


li 


s 


c° 


-ft.  .  d.     •-= 

:hli  It:  ^fli  ffiPi 

'  '" 


en 


o.       .  P. 
-c  5  «JH  o. 

|5-|ss 


«ja-    — 

si 


•SunjuiraBS 


CQ 


Jap  ui  aqojj 
jap 


PH       <       03       <! 
o       o       o       ^ 


u 

4) 


a 
h 


•S(NI3J.SH39Hng  _=    2 

jap 


•s^NiaxsaaoHng 
ut  aqojj  jap 


•aq<?qu»[|az 


sC. 


sap  aqQH 


"3    fl  v 
•-    a  .*" 


CQ 


CQQQOQCQQQ 


*       03       03  CQ 

OC       —       —I  H 


.  +       4 


o"     o*     o      o"     o" 


o"     o"     o" 


SI 

o 
oo 


sap 


" 


•uapiaqoBJjqnjj 


o" 


i/i^cpiocp          3C      !fl      ffl 
o"     o"     o"     o"     o"         o"     o"     c? 


jassamqDJiiQ 


o-     o-      o-     o"         o"      o"     o" 


•uapuBqjOA 


1         I 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND. 


Anmerku 


- 


i 


ii 


ill 

"offi      c 
•g  U^S  « 


OS  c       *  s 
C4i  1       >- 

- 


5 


2- 


53.213 
-§  CN 


e  cs    _, 

5  «    «  „  >  II  «  •§ 


: 


PC: 


43 
- 

•I 


.C 
S 

h 


jap  ui 
jap 


«^* 


U 
g 

"^ 


W 
o 


M 


N  N 


t[OBU 


<-  «S 
J=n4 

|> 


2 

'-  MS 


9!P 
ui  aqojj  jap 


-Q  -O 


ZJBJJ    qil 


+       + 


+     1 


•aqoqua[(az 


o~      o" 


R  • 


sap 


SI 


sap 


_45 

S] 


•uapiaqoBJjqnjj 


^ti 
o" 


irs 
o" 


CO 


o" 


uajassng  sap 

jassauiqojiiQ 

•uapuBqjoA 


lO 

3  o" 


'^          OS 

o"      o' 


OS 

o" 


OS 

o" 


OS 

o" 


+ 


+     1 


II 


+    + 


24 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Anmerkung 


•SunjuiuiBS 


I 


« 

^ 

N 
H 


jap  u;  aqojj 

jap  .Mummy 


li    i 

11  c 


•s^Niaxsaaoang 


jap 


pin 


•S3[qfljqS3JJBJ^ 

sap  aq«H 


•3|jBj\[  sap 


najassn$  sap 


•uapUBqjoA 


.2     « 

-     M 

* 


, 


B  C    V          h          t.          g 

QOOOQ 


CQ 


N  N  N  JE 


CQ       «<       CQ 

J2      ^      — 

g^    c2    Q', 
S. w    5  «    g  , 

c/5       ^      c/3 


oa 


11 


II 


• 


00         C) 

oo 
c>o 


oo 
o'o' 


o 
o" 


oo 
oo 


B 

"D 
S 


S3 


co 
oo" 


os. 


o" 


o" 


o"      o"     o" 


^^* 

S    " 


^  Z^  *^?  ^5  ^5 

o"      o"      o*      o"      o" 


C*  ^^"  ^^ 

o"     o*      ©~ 


III 


•ua[qaj 


1898- 1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         25 

Wie  sich  aus  Gruppe  j  erweist,  sind  sowohl  Fichte  als  Larche  in 
dieser  Tabelle  identifiziert,  und  unter  den  .betreffenden  Baumarten  Stamm- 
holz  und  Wurzelholz,  moglichervveise  auch  Astholz,  unterschieden  worden. 
Wir  werden  damit  beginnen,  die  Zifferwerte  der  resp.  Gruppe  fiir 
Stammholz  Larche  zu  untersuchen.  Auf  Grund  des  Vorhandenseins  von 
Zwillingstiipfeln  bezieht  sich  dieses  Stammholz  auf  Gruppe  II  B  a  in  der 
Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S. 

Stammholz  Larche. 
(=  Gruppe  II  B  a  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S). 

Betreffs  des  Inhaltes  dieser  Gruppe  siehe  p.  20  dieser  Abhandlung. 
Die  Gruppen  c,  d,  e,  g  in  der  Tabelle  des  Verf.  enthalten  Werte,  welche 
mit  denen,  die  BURGERSTEIN  als  Stammholz  Larche  angiebt,  identisch 
sind.  Gruppe  /  dagegen  (maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles)  ist  ab- 
weichend.  Nach  BURGERSTEIN  wird  diese  Hohe  auf  40—50  Zellen,  nach 
der  Tab.  des  Verf.  aber  nur  auf  30  Zellen  geschatzt.  Diese  Zellenanzahl 
(30  Zellen)  hat  der  Verf.  doch  nur  an  2  Proben  (No.  2640  B,  2115)  vor- 
gefunden;  alle  die  ubrigen  zeigen  geringere  maximale  Hohe). 

SCHNEIDER  \  der  an  Fichten  und  Larchen  bei  arktischem  Treibholz- 
materiale  auch  vergleichende  Zellenmessungen  angestellt  hat,  fand  die 
maximale  Hohe  fur  Larche  24  Zellen,  fiir  Fichte  16  Zellen.  BURGERSTEIN  1 
betrachtet  diese  Werte  als  falsch  und  sagt:  ,,0bvvohl  SCHNEIDER  nur  ein 
kleines  Untersuchungsmaterial  benutzte,  so  sind  dessen  Angaben  trotz- 
dem  nicht  recht  begreiflich,  denn  man  braucht  gerade  von  keinem  be- 
sonderen  Gliicke  begunstigt  zu  sein  um  bei  der  Larche  hohere  als  24- 
zellige  und  bei  der  Fichte  hohere  als  16-zellige  Markstrahlen  zu  finden". 

Der  Verf.  hat  bei  seinem  Untersuchungsmateriale  nur  zvvei  Stamm- 
proben  gefunden,  deren  maximale  Hohe  sich  auf  30  Zellen  belief.  Diese 
Zellenanzahl,  welche  allerdings  etwas  hoher  ist  als  die,  welche  SCHNEIDER 
angiebt,  scheint  dessen  ungeachtet  die  Angabe  SCHNEIDERS  gegen  die  in 
oben  erwahntem  Citate  enthaltene  Kritik  BURGERSTEIN'S  zu  rechtfertigen. 
BURGERSTEIN  hat  zweifellos  ilbersehen,  dass  sie  mit  ungleichem  Mate- 
riale  gearbeitet  haben  und  dass  folglich  die  Angaben  beider  richtig 
sein  konnen.  SCHNEIDER  hat  namlich  arktische  Larche  (vvahrscheinlich 
Larix  sibirica),  BURGERSTEIN  aber  Larix  europcea  als  Untersuchungs- 
material gehabt. 

Betreffs  der  Proben  3239  und  1247  muss  betont  werden,  dass 
auch  Gruppe  e  darin  abweicht,  dass  sie  fur  die  mittlere  Hohe  des  Mark- 


1  BURGERSTEIN,  1.  c.  p.  415. 


26  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

strahls  geringere  Werte  aufweist,  als  die,  welche  BURGERSTEIN  angiebt. 
Die  betreffenden  Proben  sind  dessen  ungeachtet  zu  Gruppe  II  B  a,  also 
zum  Stammholz  Larche  gerechnet  worden;  zufolge  der  rektangularen 
Form  und  der  radialen  Weite  der  Friihzellen,  der  strohgelben  Farbe  der 
Zellenwande,  der  reichlichen  Harzmenge  der  Markstrahlen  sind  die  Proben 
als  Larchen  betrachtet  worden,  wahrend  dagegen  das  Aussere  der  Proben, 
die  centrische  Entwicklung  der  Jahrringe,  die  bedeutende  Dicke  der  Zellen- 
wande im  Spatholz,  die  Markstrahlzellenhohe  Charaktere  sind,  welche 
angeben,  dass  Stammholz  vorliegl. 

Wenn  wir  also  voraussetzen,  dass  oben  erwahnte  Proben  Stamm- 
holzproben  sind,  so  wird  der  geringere  Grenzwert  fiir  die  mittlere  Hohe 
der  Markstrahlen  6,5  Zellen  (Probe  No.  3239).  Aus  unserer  Tabelle  geht 
auch  hervor,  dass  der  obere  Grenzwert  12,6  Zellen  ist  (Probe  No.  2115). 
Die  Grenzwerte  fiir  die  mittlere  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  werden  also  nach 
unserer  Tabelle  12,6—6,5.  Nach  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  dagegen 
{II  B  a)  sind  sie  13—9  Zellen. 

Nach  dem  was  betreffs  der  Werte  in  den  Gruppen  e,  f  in  unserer 
Tabelle  oben  angefiihrt  vvurde,  scheint  es,  als  ob  sowohl  die  mittlere 
als  die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  in  Stammholz  fiir  arktische 
Larche  (Larix  sibirica?)  geringere  Werte  als  fiir  Larix  europcea 
reprasentierte. 

Wurzelholz  Larche. 
(=  Gruppe  II  B  b  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S). 

Die  Angaben  BURGERSTEIN'S  fiir  Larix  europcea  passen,  wie  es 
scheint,  sehr  gut  auf  arktische  Larche.  Doch  weicht  Gruppe  f  in  der 
Tabelle  C  insofern  ab,  dass  sie  bei  alien  Proben  ausser  einer  (Probe 
2840  A)  fiir  die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  geringere  Werte  fest- 
stellt,  als  den,  welchen  BURGERSTEIN  aufgiebt,  namlich  30  Zellen.  Von 
ca.  560  untersuchten  Markstrahlen  hat  nur  einer  die  von  BURGERSTEIN 
angegebene  maximale  Hohe  =  30  Zellen,  aufgewiesen.  Doch  muss 
betont  werden,  dass  man  in  Tabelle  B,  p.  20  (sibirische  Treibholzer) 
Larchenproben  findet,  bei  welchen  die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles 
auch  30  Zellen  ist.  -  -  Da  die  iibrigen  Werte  in  den  resp.  Gruppen  der 
Tabelle  mil  entsprechenden,  von  BURGERSTEIN  angegebenen  Normalmittel- 
werten  iibereinstimmen,  konnte  man  also  ohne  Ungelegenheit  arktisches 
Wurzelholz  (Larche)  nach  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  bestimmen. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.          27 

Stamtnholz  Fichte. 

(=  Gruppe  I  A  a  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S). 

Filr  einen  Tell  der  zu  dieser  Gruppe  gerechneten  Proben  zeigen 
die  Gruppen  e  und  f  abweichende  Werte,  zunachst  denen  entsprechend, 
die  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  in  Gruppe  I  B  b  aufgenommen  sind, 
also  Astholz  Larche.  Trotz  dieser  Abweichung  sind  doch  jene  Proben 
als  Stammholz  Fichte,  nicht  Astholz  Larche,  bestimmt  worden.  Die 
kraftigen  Dimensionen  und  das  ganze  Aussere  der  Proben,  die  centrische 
Entwicklung  der  Jahrringe,  der  Mangel  an  Harz  in  den  Markstrahlen 
rechtfertigen  das  Bestimmen  der  Proben  als  Stammholz  Fichte. 

Wenn  wir  also  annehmen,  dass  samtliche  erwahnten  Proben  zur 
Gruppe  I  A  a  gehoren,  werden  also  die  Gruppen  c,  d,  g  Werte  enthalten, 
die  mit  denen  analog  sind,  welche  BURGERSTEIN  fur  Stammholz  Fichte 
angiebt;  die  Gruppen  e  und  f  dagegen  sind  abweichend.  Betreffend 
Gruppe  e  (mittlere  Hohe  des  Markstrahles)  ist  in  unserer  Tabelle  der  obere 
Grenzwert  8,3  Zellen  (Probe  No.  2984),  der  untere  Grenzwert  6  Zellen 
(Probe  No.  2640  A).  Die  Grenzwerte  fur  die  mittlere  Hohe  des  Markstrahles 
betragen  also  danach  6—8.3  Zellen ;  nach  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S  (I  A  a) 
7—11  Zellen. 

In  Gruppe  f  ist  die  maximale  Hohe  nach  unserer  Tabelle  32  Zellen 
(Probe  No.  3966  B);  nach  der  Angabe  BURGERSTEIN'S  (p.  416)  43  Zellen. 

Nach  SCHNEIDER  ist  der  maximale  Wert  16  Zellen. 

Die  mittlere  und  die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  scheinen  uns 
also  nach  dem  oben  erwahnten  bei  arktischer  Fichte  (Picea  obovata?) 
geringer  als  bei  Picea  excelsa  zu  sein. 

Wurzelholz  Fichte. 

(=  Gruppe  I  A  b  a  nach  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S). 

In  Tabelle  C  giebt  es  nur  eine  Fichtenholzprobe.  Abgesehen  von 
Gruppe  f  (maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles)  zeigt  diese  Probe  in  den 
resp.  Gruppen  Werte,  die  mit  den  von  BURGERSTEIN  erwahnten  analog 
sind.  BURGERSTEIN  giebt  also  die  maximale  Hohe  des  Markstrahles  als 
30  Zellen  an;  nach  Tabelle  G  ist  sie  aber  nur  14  Zellen.  In  Anbetracht 
dessen,  dass  nur  eine  Probe  untersucht  worden  ist,  diirfte  man  nicht 
mit  Gewissheit  entscheiden  konnen,  ob  die  in  diesem  speciellen  Falle 
bewiesene  maximale  Hohe  bei  arktischer  Fichte  allgemein  oder  nicht  sei. 
Betreffs  Wurzelholz  Fichte  habe  ich  also  zwischen  arktischer  Fichte 
(Picea  obovata?)  und  Picea  excelsa  keinen  bestimmten  Unterschied 
herausfinden  konnen. 


28 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Astholz  Larche. 
(=  Gruppe  I  B  b  in  der  Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S). 

Zwei  Proben,  namlich  No.  2987  A,  2987  B,  sind,  obwohl  keinesvvegs 
mit  Bestimmtheit,  zu  dieser  Gruppe  gerechnet  worden.  Sie  zeigen  namlich 
in  den  resp.  Gruppen  Werte,  vvelche  mit  denen  der  Proben  analog  sind, 
die  wir  friiher  als  Stammholz  Fichte  festgestellt  und  zu  Gruppe  I  A  a 
gerechnet  haben.  Dass  sie  dessen  ungeachtet  im  Systeme  einen  anderen 
Platz  bekommen  haben  und  damit  zu  Astholz  Larche  (Gruppe  I  B  b)  ge- 
rechnet worden  sind.  hat  seinen  Grund  teils  in  der  Form  und  dem  Ausseren 
der  Proben,  welche  auf  Astholz  deuten,  teils  auch  in  folgenden  anato- 
mischen  Charakteren :  Zellenwande  strohgelb,  Form  der  Friihzellen  am 
Querschnitt  in  radialer  Richtung  rektangular,  Markstrahlen  mit  rotem 
Harz  gefiillt.  Von  den  Normalwerten,  die  BURGERSTEIN  fur  Astholz  an- 
giebt,  weicht  nur  Gruppe  f,  d.  h.  maximale  Hohe  der  Markstrahlen  ab. 
Wahrend  BURGERSTEIN  sie  auf  20  Zellen  geschatzt,  hat  der  Verf.  nur 
12 — 14  Zellen  finden  konnen,  ein  Umstand,  der  wohl  auf  einem  Zufalle 
beruhen  konnte,  da  die  Werte  fiir  die  mittlere  Hohe  der  Markstrahlen 
iibereinstimmen.  Betreffs  des  Astholzes  habe  ich  also  keine  bestimmte 
Abvveichung  zvvischen  arktischer  Larche  und  Larix  europcea  konsta- 
tieren  konnen. 

Die  Hauptresultate,  zu  welchen  der  Verf.  durch  angestellte  Zellen- 
messungen  und  damit  verkniipfte  histologische  Untersuchungen  an  ark- 
tischem  Treibholzermateriale,  mit  BURGERSTEIN'S  entsprechenden  Zellen- 
messungen  an  Picea  excelsa  und  Larix  europcea  verglichen,  gekommen 
ist,  konnen  in  folgenden  Punkten  pracisiert  werden: 

1.  Die  Zellenmessungen  BURGERSTEIN'S  konnten  hauptsachlich    und  in 
Kombination    mit    oben    erwahnten    makro-    und    mikroskopischen 
Charakteren   einer  Gattungsdiagnose  auch   von  arktischem  Material 
(Larix  sibirica,  Picea  obovata)  zu  Grunde  gelegt  werden. 

2.  Die    vom  Verf.    gefundenen  Werte  fiir  die  mittlere,  resp.  die  maxi- 
male   Hohe    des  Markstrahles  sind   in   Stammholz   bei  arktischen 
Fichten     und     Larchen    geringer    als    die    entsprechenden,     welche 
BURGERSTEIN  fiir  Picea  excelsa  und  Larix  europcea  angegeben  hat. 

3.  Mit    Leitung   der   analytischen    Tabelle  BURGERSTEIN'S    sind  sowohl 
Fichten   als   Larchen   unter  den   Treibholzern    von  Ellesmere- 
Land  unterschieden  worden. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         29 

II.    Laubholzer. 

Unter  den  echten  Treibholzern  sind  nur  zwei  Laubholzerproben 
angetroffen  worden.  Sie  bestanden  aus  cylindrischen  Stammstocken  mil 
sehr  leichtem  und  porosem  Holz.  Schon  a  priori  konnte  man  also  davon 
iiberzeugt  sein,  dass  keine  schwereren  Baumarten,  wie  Sorbus,  Quercus 
u.  a.,  unter  diesen  Treibholzern  waren.  Die  miskroskopische  Untersuchung 
bestatigte  diese  Annahme.  Ich  unterschied  zwei  Gattungen,  namlich 
Salix  und  Populus.  Sie  warden  an  folgenden  anatomischen  Charak- 
teren  identifiziert:  Gefasse  durch  den  ganzen  Jahrring  gleichmassig  ver- 
teilt,  Gefasswande  entbehren  fibrose  Ring-  und  Spiralverdickungen  und 
sind  mil  grossen,  kreisrunden  oder  polygonalen,  gewohnlich  6-seitigen 
Hoftiipfeln  versehen.  Gefassboden  kreisrund  perforiert.  Markstrahlen 
1-reihig. 

Die  genannten  Gattungen  konnen  unter  andern  Dingen  durch  den 
Bau  der  Markstrahlen  unterschieden  werden. 

I.    Markstrahlzellen  unter  einander  gleich  hoch :    Populus  1. 
II.    Markstrahlzellen  nicht  gleich  hoch:  die  oberen  und  unteren  Zellen- 
reihen    des  Markstrahles  bestehen   aus   Zellen,   welche  hoher  als 
die  zwischenliegenden  sind:    Salix. 

In  Folge  oben  angegebener  anatomischen  Gharaktere  ist  die  Probe 
No.  2986  als  Populus,  die  Probe  No.  2015  B  als  Salix  festgestellt 
worden. 


Bestimmung  des  Mutterlands  der  Treibholzer. 

Die  erste  Richtlinie  um  das  Mutterland  der  Treibholzer  zu  bestim- 
men  erhalt  man  durch  den  Mittelwert  der  Jahrringe.  Nach  der  Tabelle 
p.  10  war  dieser  fur  unsere  Treibholzer  0,99  mm. 

MARTIN  und  BRAVAIS  haben  versucht  die  Aufmerksamkeit  darauf 
zu  lenken,  dass  bei  der  Kiefer  die  rnittlere  Breite  der  Jahrringe  succes- 
sive abnimrnt,  je  mehr  sie  sich  der  Vegetationsgrenze  nahert  oder  je 
hoher  der  Breitengrad  ist,  auf  welchem  sie  wachst.  Diesen  Umstand 
haben  sie  dadurch  veranschaulicht,  dass  sie  bei  der  Kiefer  die  mittlere 
Breite  der  Jahrringe  unter  verschiedenen  Latituden  fur  mehrere  Alters- 
perioden  nach  folgendem  Schema  2  berechnet  haben. 


1  PETERSEN,  1.  c.  p.  26.    Populus  nigra  macht  hiervon  eine  Ausnahrae  und  stimmt 
im  Bau  des  Markstrahles  mit  Salix  iiberein. 

2  KKAUS,  Treibholzer,  1.  c.  p.  112. 


30  FREDR1K  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

\ 

a)  Kaafjord     ....  unter  69°  57'  nordl.  Br. 

b)  Pello „      66   48      „ 

c)  Gefle  ......        „     60  40      „ 

d)  Halle „      51    30      „         „ 

e)  Hagenau     ....        „     48   43      „         „ 

Mittlere  resp.  Breite  der  Jahrringe  war  an  Baumen  unter  diesen 
verschiedenen  Breitengraden : 

1-50  50-100  100-150  150-200 

Jahrringe  Jahrringe  Jahrringe  Jahrringe 

a)  ...  1  mm.  0,8  mm.  0,68  mm.          0,5  mm. 

b)  ...  1,4  „  0,8    „  0,6      „  0,5    „ 

c)  .    .    .  2     „  1,5    „  1,0      „  0,8    „ 

d)  ...  2,4  „  1,2    „ 

e)  .     .     .  3,2  „  3,2     „  — 

MIDDENDORF  1  hat  die  Richtigkeit  dieser  Untersuchungen  bestatigt 
und  gefunden,  dass  auch  die  Jahrringe  der  Larche  nach  demselben 
Gesetze  variieren.  Vorausgesetzt,  dass  die  Fichte  in  dieser  Hinsicht 
denselben  Gesetzen  wie  die  Kiefer  und  die  Larche  folgt,  waren  also  die 
Mutterbaume  unserer  Treibholzerproben,  bei  welchen  ja,  wie  oben  er- 
wahnt,  der  Mittelwert  der  Jahrringe  0,99  mm.  war,  unter  einem  Breiten- 
grade  gewachsen,  welcher  etwa  dem  des  Kaafjords,  ca.  70°  n.  Br.r 
entspricht.  In  diesem  Zusammenhange  miissen  wir  doch  darauf  hin- 
weisen,  dass  es  nicht  nur  klimatische  Verhaltnisse  sind,  welche  die  Ent- 
wicklung  der  Jahrringe  beeinflussen.  Wir  citieren  die  Worte  MIDDEN- 
DORFr's:2  ,,Mehr  als  auf  die  Temperatur  kommt  es  darauf  an,  in  welche 
nahrende  Bodenschichten  die  Wurzeln  im  gegebenen  Jahre  eingedrungen 
sind  und  wie  sich  die  iibrigen  Nahrungsverhaltnisse,  wie  z.  B.  Unter- 
driickung  durch  nahestehende  Baume  u.  d.,  sich  gestalteten". 

Man  kann  sich  also  leicht  vorstellen,  dass  nicht  nur  klimatische 
Verhaltnisse  die  schwache  jahrliche  Holzbildung  unserer  Treibholzer- 
proben bedingt  sondern  dass  auch  andere  Faktoren,  wie  die  Beschaffenheit 
des  Erdbodens  u.  d.,  mitgewirkt  haben  und  dass  also  das  Verbreitungs- 
gebiet  der  Mutterbaume  siidlicher  gewesen,  als  was  es  wird,  wenn  man 
nur  klimatische  Verhaltnisse  als  entscheidende  Gesichtspunkte  betrachtet. 

Wenn  man  aber  auch  aus  diesen  Grunden  die  Polarhohe  fiir  den 
Wachsort  der  Mutterbaume  senken  muss,  so  durfte  doch  diese  Senkung 


1  A.  TH.  v.  MIDDENDORFF,    Reise    in    dem    aussersten  Norden  und  Osten  Sibiriens, 
IV,  1,  p.  633.  Anm.  1. 

2  MIDDENDORFF,  1.  c.  p.  636. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.        31 

nicht  recht  bedeutend  vverden.  Denn  wenn  auch  etliche  der  Mutterbaume 
schlecht  geniihrt  gewesen  oder  auf  ungunstigem  Boden  gewachsen  sind,  so 
ist  es  wohl  doch  nicht  sehr  wahrscheinlich,  dass  nur  der  terrestrische  Faktor 
die  Entwicklung  samtlicher  Baume  gehemmt  hatte.  Wahrscheinlicher  ist 
es  dann,  vorausgesetzt,  dass  die  Mutterbaume  denselben  Wachsort  haben, 
dass  ein  hartes  Klima,  allerdings  hier  und  dort  mit  ungiinstigen  terres- 
trischen  Verhaltnissen  kombiniert,  die  Ursache  der  durchgangigen  Ent- 
kraftung  gewesen,  die  mit  einigen  Modifikationen  die  jahrliche  Holz- 
bildung  bei  samtlichen  Mutterbaumen  der  Treibholzer  zn  bezeichnen 
scheint.  Wir  nehmen  also  an,  dass  die  Mutterbaume  in  einem  nord- 
lichen  Klima  aufgewachsen  sind  und  dass  also  das  Mutterland  der  Treib- 
holzer in  Brittisch-Nordamerika  oder  in  Sibirien  gesucht  werden  muss. 
Im  folgenden  werden  wir  die  Plausibilitat  der  erstgenannten  Alternative 
in  Erwagung  ziehen. 

Brittisch-Nordamerika. 

Unter  den  zu  Brittisch-Nordamerika  gehorenden  grosseren 
Flussgebieten,  die  zufolge  ihrer  Stromungsstarke  und  Lange  als  Quellen 
eines  konstanten  Treibholzerstroms  betrachtet  werden  konnen,  sind  fol- 
gende  Flusse,  ihrer  Lange  in  Kilometer  nach  1  geordnet,  zu  nennen: 

Der  Mackenzie  River     .  .  .     .  4426  km. 

„     St.  Lawrence   River  .  .     .  3500     „ 

„     Churchill   River.     .  .  ..  1700     „ 

„     Nelson  River    .     .     .  .  .     .  1450     „ 

„     Great   Fish   River    .  .  .     .      980     „ 

„     Coppermine   River.  .  .     .      600     „ 

Im  folgenden  werden  wir  die  Griinde  untersuchen,  welche  fur  oder 
gegen  die  Aktivitat  dieser  Flusse  am  Treibholzertransport  zum  Elles- 
mere- Land  sprechen  konnen. 

Der  St.  Lawren  ce-Fluss.  Die  Griinde,  welche  fur  die  Aktivitat 
dieses  Flusses  am  betreffenden  Treibholzertransport  sprechen,  sind  folgende : 
dieselben  Gattungen,  welche  unter  unseren  Treibholzern  identifiziert 
wurden,  namlich  Larix,  Picea,  wachsen  im  Uberschwemmungsgebiete 
des  St.  Law  re  nee- Flusses  und  miissen  also  unter  den  Treibholzern 
dieses  Flusses  sein.  Durch  die  Untersuchungen  LINDMAN'S  wissen  wir, 
dass  diese  Treibholzer  grosstenteils  an  der  Westkiiste  Norwegens 


1  Die    Lange    der    Flusse    ist   nach  Andree's    grossem    Handatlas,  3.  Auflage,    an- 
gegeben. 


32  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

landen.  Ein  anderer  Teil  derselben  treibt  aber  nordwarts  mil  dem 
Golfstrom  weiter  und  landet  bei  Spitzbergen,  Novaja  Semlja; 
ein  dritter  und  wahrscheinlich  sehr  kleiner  Teil  wird  in  eineni  der  Kon- 
taktpunkte  zwischen  dem  Golfstrom  und  dem  Polarstrom  aus 
seinem  normalen  Kurse  getrieben  und  gerat  durch  Treiben  in  die  Bahn 
des  Polarstromes.  In  dieser  stossen  diese  von  sildlicheren  Breiten- 
graden  verirrten  Treibholzer  mit  ihren  nordsibirischen  Stammverwandten 
zusammen  und  schliessen  sich  deren  grossem  Treibholzertransport  an. 
Dieser  geht  mit  dem  Polarstrom  als  Transportmittel  in  siidlicher 
Richtung  an  der  Ostkiiste  Gronlands  entlang.  Am  Gape  Farewell 
an  der  Siidspitze  Gronlands  weicht  eine  Verzweigung  des  Stromes 
nordwarts  ab  und  fliesst  dann  langs  der  Westkiiste  Siidgr on  lands. 
Man  konnte  sich  also  vorstellen,  dass  diese  verirrten,  von  der  West- 
kiiste Norwegens,  von  dem  Uberschwemmungsgebiete  des  St.  Law- 
re  nee- Flusses  oder  von  noch  sQdlicheren  Breitengraden  kommenden 
Treibholzer  durch  das  Wechseln  der  Strombahnen  ihren  Weg  weit  hinauf 
nach  der  Westkiiste  Gronlands  finden.  Oder  wie  sollte  man  wohl  sonst 
das  Antreffen  grosser  Balken  von  Mahagony  erkliiren  konnen,  die  an 
der  Disco  ins  el  im  Davis  Sund  angetroffen  worden  sind  und  die  nach 
GUMPRECHT  1  von  an  der  Westktiste  Norwegens  gescheiterten  Handels- 
schiffen  stammen,  oder  das  Antreffen  amerikanischer  Taxus-  und  Juni- 
perws-Treibholzer,  welche  von  der  Polarexpedition  NARE'S  ndrdlich  vom 
Baffins  Bay  im  Smith's  Sund  gefunden  worden  sind?  Die  Miig- 
lichkeit  dafiir,  dass  diese  amerikanischen  Treibholzerproben  aus  einem 
der  Eismeeresflussen  No  rdamerikas  slammen  sollten  und  also  mit 
einem  von  Westen  kommenden  Strome  nordlich  von  Grant's  Land 
in  den  Smith's  Sund  eingetrieben  worden  waren,  ist  wenigstens  be- 
treffs  der  Gattung  Taxus,  zufolge  der  Verbreitungsgebiete  dieser  Gat- 
tung,  welche  das  betreffende  Flussgebiet  gar  nicht  tangieren,  ganz  aus- 
geschlossen.  -  -  Wenn  wir  uns  aber  auch  vorstellen  konnen,  dass  Aus- 
laufer  von  amerikanischen  Treibholzern  aus  dem  Uberschwemmungs- 
gebiet  des  St.  Lawrence-Flusses  an  die  Westkiiste  Gronlands  im 
Baffins  Bay  oder  im  Smith's  Sund  scheitern,  so  ware  doch,  mfolge 
der  in  diesen  Gegenden  herrschenden  Stromungsverhaltnisse,  ein  Trans- 
port zwischen  diesen  und  den  Hafen  im  Jones  Sund,  wo  unsere 
Treibholzer  gefunden  worden  sind,  ganz  unmoglich.  Nach  einer  Angabe 
vom  Docenten  H.  G.  SIMMONS  herrscht  in  diesem  Sunde  eine  Stromung, 
die  jedem  treibenden  Gegenstande  aus  dem  Baffins  Bay  den  Zutritt 

1  GUMPHECHT,    Treibprodukte    der    Stromungen    iin   nordatlantischen    Ocean    (Zeit- 
schrift  filr  allgem.  Erdkunde,  1854,  p.  430). 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         33 

/urn  Sunde  verwehren  muss.  Und  in  der  Tat  sind  in  dem  ostlichen 
Teil  desselben,  d.  h.  in  dem  Teil,  welcher  mil  dem  Baffins  Bay  in 
unmittelbarerem  Kontakt  steht,  keine  Treibholzer  gefunden  worden,  ob- 
gleich  die  seichten  Ufer  oder  die  Busen  der  Kiiste  zum  Verankerungs- 
ort  der  Treibholzer  sehr  wohl  dienen  konnen.  Nur  im  westlichsten  Teil 
des  Sundes,  also  in  einem  Gebiete,  das  durch  die  beiden  Sunde,  den 
Cardigan  Sund  und  den  Helvedesporten,  mil  der  Norwegischen 
Bucht  (Norske  Bugt)  und  dem  Meere  westlich  vom  Ell es mere- 
Land  in  Verbindung  steht,  sind  Treibholzer  gefunden  worden.  Dieser 
Umstand  beweist  zweifellos,  dass  die  im  Jones  Sund  befindlichen  Treib- 
holzer mittels  eines  stidwarts  gehenden  Stromes  und  durch  einen  der 
erwahnten  Sunde  aus  den  Meeren  westlich  vom  Elles mere-Land  ge- 
kommen  sind  und  nicht  vom  Osten  her  iiber  den  Baffins  Bay.  Diese 
Annahme  ist  urn  so  wahrscheinlicher,  als  nach  der  Angabe  des  Docenten 
SIMMONS  eine  ausserordentlich  starke,  siidwarts  gehende  Stromung  in 
diesen  beiden  Sunden  herrscht,  welche  die  Passage  in  nordlicher  Rich- 
tung  in  hohem  Grade  erschwert.  Aus  dem  oben  erwahnten  konnen 
wir  schliesseri  dass  der  St.  Lawrence-Fluss  nicht  zu  den  Flussen, 
welche  Treibholzer  nach  dem  Elles  mere-Land  fiihren,  gerechnet 
werden  darf. 

Dieselbe  Annahme  dilrfte  auch  den  beiden  Fliissen,  dem  Churchill 
River  und  dem  Nelson  River,  gelten,  welche  an  der  westlichen  Kiiste 
vom  Hudson  Bay  miinden.  Auch  wenn  man  annehmen  sollte,  dass 
eine  Treibholzerstromung  von  einem  oder  von  beiden  dieser  zwei  Fliisse 
in  den  Baffins  Bay  miindete,  so  ist  doch  das  Fortsetzen  derselben  in 
den  Jones  Sund  zufolge  bereits  angedeuteter  Stromungsverhaltnisse 
undenkbar. 

Oben  erwahnte  Fliisse:  der  St.  Lawrence-Fluss,  der  Churchill 
River,  der  Nelson  River,  gehoren  bekanntlich  zu  dem  ostlichen 
Kiistengebiet  Nordamerikas.  Hier  unten  werden  wir  unsere  Auf- 
merksamkeit  auf  die  Eismeeresf liisse  Nordamerikas  richten.  Die 
bedeutenderen  unter  diesen  sind  der  Great  Fish  River,  der  Copper- 
mine River,  der  Mackenzie  River. 

Dass  die  beiden  erstgenannten  in  einem  eventuellen  Treibholzer- 
.transport:  Nordamerika  —  Ellesmere-Land  keine  grossere  Rolle 
spielen  konnen,  geht  schon  aus  einern  ganz  fliichtigen  Landkarten- 
studium  hervor.  Ein  Bick  auf  die  Landkarte  zeigt  sofort,  dass  diese 
beiden  Fliisse  nicht  in  offenes  Wasser,  sondern  in  ein  von  grosseren 
und  klejneren  Inseln  zersplittertes  Meeresgebiet  miinden.  Am  wahrschein- 

lichsten  ware  es  daher,  dass  von  diesen  Flussen  kommende  Treibholzer 

3 


34  FREDR1K  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

bald  genug  an  die  seichten  Kusten  der  Inseln  scheitern  wiirden  und 
dass  nur  ein  hochst  unbedeutender  Teil  der  Treibholzer  das  offene  Meer 
erreichen  wiirde. 

Diese  Annahme  a  priori,  die  den  beiden  Fliissen  infolge  rein  topo- 
graphischer  Verhaltnisse  eine  grossere  Aktivitat  am  oben  erwahnten 
Treibholzertransport  abspricht,  wird  weiter  durch  Angaben  in  floristischer 
und  anderen  Hinsichten  bestarkt,  welche  von  wissenschaftlichen  Expedi- 
tionen  geliefert  worden  sind,  die  bei  ihren  Forschungsreisen  Gelegenheit 
gehabt,  die  resp.  Flussgebiete  zn  untersuchen.  Wir  werden  dann  unsere 
Aufmerksamkeit  zuerst  auf  den  Great  Fish  River  oder  Thleew- 
ee-choch,  wie  er  auch  genannt  wird,  richten.  In  den  Jahren  1833,  1834. 
1835  wurde  dieser  FIuss  von  einer  arktischen  Expedition  unter  der 
Leitung  von  Kapitan  BACK  1  nntersucht.  Die  Baumarten,  welche  von 
der  Expedition  angetroffen  wurden,  bestanden  aus  mehr  oder  weniger 
verkiimmerten  Individuen  der  Gattungen  Salix  und  Betula.  Nach  dem 
botanischen  Appendix,  welches  dem  Bericht  von  dieser  Expedition  bei- 
gefiigt  ist,  waren  die  Arten  folgende:  Salix  arctica,  S.  cordifolia? 
S.  herbacea,  Betula  glandulosa.  Coniferen  sind  gar  nicht  erwilhnt 
worden. 

Vor  dem  Ausmiinden  des  Flusses  ins  Meer  wurde  allerdings  ein 
Stuck  Treibholz  von  Pinus  gefunden,  aber  dieses  soil,  nach  der  be- 
stimmten  Ansicht  BACK'S,  nicht  durch  letztgenannten  Fluss  dahingefiihrt 
worden  sein,  sondern  ware  aus  der  Feme,  und  zvvar  aus  der  Mi'm- 
dung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  gekommen.  Uber  dieses  Treibholzstiick 
hat  er  p.  214  folgendes  geaussert:  „ —  and  we  found  that  they  had 
really  picked  up  a  piece  of  drift-wood  nine  foot  long  and  nine  inches 
in  diameter,  together  with  a  few  sticks  of  smaller  drift-wood  and  a  part 
of  a  kieyack.  When  the  large  trunk  was  saved,  I  was  rather  sur- 
prised to  see  it  very  little  sodden  with  water.  -  -  From  the  peculiar 
character  of  the  wood,  which  was  pine,  of  that  kind  which  is  remar- 
kable for  its  freedom  from  knots,  I  had  no  doubt  that  it  had  originally 
grown  somewhere  in  the  upper  part  of  the  country,  about  the  M'Kenzie; 
and  of  this  I  was  the  more  competent  to  judge  from  my  recollection  of 
the  drift-wood  west  of  that  large  river,  which  it  exactly  resembled". 

Infolge  des  oben  angefiihrten  konnen  wir  also  annehmen,  dass  der 
Great  Fish  River  fur  den  Treibholzertransport  ohne  Bedeutung  ist. 


1  Narrative  of  the  arctic  Land  Expedition  to  the  Mouth  of  the  Great  Fish  River 
and  along  the  shores  of  the  arctic  Ocean  in  the  Years  1833,  1831,  1835,  by 
Captain  BACK,  Paris  1836. 


t898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHGLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         35 

Was  in  dieser  Hinsicht  vom  Great  Fish  River  gilt,  diirfte  auch 
dem  Coppermine  River  gelten.  Der  Verf.  sttitzt  diese  seine  Ansicht 
auf  die  Erfahrungen,  welche  von  der  arktischen  Expedition  FRANKLIN'S  1 
gemacht  vvorden  sind.  Die  Expedition  folgte  dem  Fluss  in  nordlicher 
Richtung  und  drang  bis  an  die  Milndung  desselben  hinauf.  Insofern 
ich  den  Reisebericht  richtig  verstanden,  war  die  Baumvegetation  an 
den  Flussufern  sehr  sparlich.  Keine  anderen  Gattungen  als  Zvverg- 
birke,  Salix,  Pinus  sind  erwahnt.  An  der  Flussmundung  angelangt, 
begab  sich  die  Expedition  in  ostlicher  Richtung  langs  der  Eismeeres- 
ktiste  bis  ans  Gape  Turnagain.  Wahrend  dieser  Fahrt  wurden  an 
verschiedenen  Orten  Treibholzer  angetroi'fen.  P.  357  des  Reiseberichts 
liest  man  also  folgendes:  ,,The  shore  is  strewed  with  a  considerable 
quantity  of  drift-timber,  principally  of  the  Populus  balsamifera,  but 
none  of  it  of  great  size".  -  -  Da  diese  Pappel  nicht  zu  der  Strandvege- 
tation  des  Goppermine-Flusses  gerechnet  worden  ist,  steht  man 
etwas  befremdet  vor  der  Angabe  ihrer  Befindlichkeit  unter  den  Treib- 
holzern  dieser  Gegenden.  Die  Erklarung  wird  aber  spater  in  der  Arbeit 
gegeben,  im  Zusammenhange  mit  Angaben  von  anderen  Trelbholzer- 
funden  ahnlicher  Beschaffenheit.  P.  364  werden  somit  diese  Worte  an- 
gefiihrt:  ,,We  were  rejoiced  to  find  the  beach  strewed  with  abundance 
of  small  driftwood,  none  of  it  recent.  It  may  be  remarked  that 
the  Coppermine  River  does  not  bring  down  any  drift-wood; 
nor  does  any  other  known  stream  except  Mackenzie's 
River2;  hence,  from  its  appearance  on  this  part  of  the  coast,  an 
easterly  current  may  be  inferred".  —  Indem  wir  annehmen,  dass  die 
Treibholzer  an  dieser  Uferstrecke  aus  dem  Mackenzie-Flusse  stam- 
men,  haben  wir  auch  die  Erklarung  der  Tatsache  erhalten,  dass  Populus 
balsamifera  in  eben  erwahnter  Treibholzeransammlung  so  reichlich  vor- 
kommt.  Diese  Pappel  ist  namlich,  wie  wir  hier  unten  sehen  werden, 
fur  die  Laubholzervegetation  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  der  typische 
Baum. 

Am  Detention  Harbour,  einer  Bucht  weit  ostlich  von  der  Fluss- 
mimdung,  an  einer  Latitude  67°  53' 45",  wurden  auch  Treibholzer  ange- 
troffen.  Nachstehendes  Citat  mag  die  Art  und  den  Ursprung  dieser 
Treibholzer  beleuchten  (p.  370).  ,,The  drift  timber  on  this  part  of  the 
coast  consists  of  pine  and  taccamahac  (Populus  balsamifera),  most 


1  Narrative  of  a  journey  to  the  shores  of  the  Polar  Sea  1819,  1820,  1821,  1822  by 
JOHN  FRANKLIN,  London  1823. 

2  Vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 


36  FREDRIK  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

probably  from  Mackenzie's  or  some  other  river  to  the  westward  of 
the  Coppermine.  It  all  appears  to  have  lain  long  in  the  water,  the 
bark  being  completely  worn  off,  and  the  ends  of  the  pieces  rubbed  per- 
fectly smooth". 

Aus  dem  oben  erwahnten  geht  es  hervor,  dass  auch  diese  Treib- 
holzer wahrscheinlich  aus  dem  Mackenzie-Flusse  stammen,  und  der 
Kern  des  oben  angefuhrten  Citates  ist  zweifellos  dieser,  dass  man  den 
Copper mine-Fluss  nicht  als  einen  treibholzerfiihrenden  Fluss  von 
Bedeutung  betrachten  darf. 

Dass  also  weder  der  Great  Fish  River  noch  der  Coppermine 
River  am  Treibholzertransport  einen  aktiven  Anteil  nimmt,  haben  wir 
im  bereits  gesagten  zu  beweisen  versucht.  Es  bleibt  uns  also  iibrig  zu 
erforschen,  inwiefern  der  Mackenzie-Fluss  fur  denselben  von  Bedeii- 
tung  ist.  Der  Mackenzie-Fluss  besitzt  alle  Voraussetzungen  dafiir, 
ein  treibholzfiihrender  Fluss  von  Rang  zu  sein.  An  den  Ufern  des- 
selben  wachst  eine  uppige  Baumvegetation.  Er  ist,  wie  oben  erwahnt, 
von  bedeutender  Grosse  und  besitzt  grosse  Stromstarke.  Er  milndet  in 
offenes  Wasser,  keine  Inseln  oder  Inselgruppen  um  die  Miindung  herum 
oder  an  der  Nahe  derselben  bieten  den  Treibholzern  versteckte  Havarie- 
pliitze.  Man  kann  sich  daher  sehr  wohl  vorstellen,  dass  diese  durch  die 
eigene  Stromstarke  des  Flusses  so  weit  ins  Meer  gefiihrt  worden  sind, 
dass  sie  in  eine  Verzweigung  des  Polarstroms  geraten  und  durch  diese 
in  nordostlicher  Richtung  gegen  die  Meere  westlich  vom  E  lies  mere- 
Land  gefiihrt  werden.  Es  liesse  sich  auch  denken,  dass  die  Treibholzer, 
in  diesen  Fahrwassern  angelangt,  endlich  mittels  der  oben  erwahnten, 
dort  herrschenden,  ausserordentlich  starken  Stromung  durch  den  Car- 
digan-Sund  oder  den  Helvedesporten  in  den  westlichen  Teil  des 
Jones-Sunds  hineingezogen  werden. 

A  priori  scheint  diese  Theorie  die  geeignetste  zu  sein,  um  das  Vor- 
kommen  der  Treibholzer  im  westlichen  Teile  des  Jones-Sunds  /u 
erklaren.  Im  folgenden  werden  wir  die  Haltbarkeit  dieser  Theorie  etwas 
genauer  priifen. 

Um  entscheiden  zu  konnen,  ob  die  Mutterbaume  der  Treibholzer 
vom  Ellesmere-Land  an  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  ge- 
wachsen  sind,  miissen  wir  natiirlich  vor  alien  Dingen  die  Baumvegetation 
des  betreffenden  Flusses  kennen  lernen.  Es  ist  dem  Verf.  rnoglich  ge- 
wesen  diese  Vegetation  genauer  zu  specificieren,  dadurch  dass  er  floris- 
tische  Angaben  zusammengestellt  hat,  welche  teils  in  RICHARDSSON'S  1 

1  Arctic  Searching  Expedition:    A  journal  of  a  Boat- Voyage  through  Ruperts  Land 
and  the  arctic  Sea,  by  Sir  JOHN  RICHARDSSON.     Vol.  I.     London  1851. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         37 

Schiiderung  einer  Reise  durch  das  Ruperts-Land,   teils  in  der  friiher 
citierten  Arbeit  FRANKLIN'S  vorliegen. 

Unter  seinem  Laufe  hat  der  Mackenzie-Fluss  bekanntlich  meh- 
rere  verschiedene  Namen:  so  wird  die  Strecke  zvvischen  den  Fluss- 
quellen  in  den  Klippigen  Bergen  bis  an  den  Athabasca-See  der 
Athabasca-Fluss  genannt;  die  Strecke  zwischen  dem  Athabasca- 
See  und  dem  Grossen  Sklaven-See  wird  der  Gross e  Sklaven- 
Fluss  genannt;  die  Strecke  zwischen  dem  Grossen  Sklaven-See  und 
der  Eismeereskiiste  betrachtet  man  gewohnlich  als  mil  dem  Mackenzie- 
Flusse  identisch.  Fur  die  folgenden  Teile  der  Flussstrecke  werden  hier 
unten  floristische  Angaben  geliefert: 

1.  Das  Gebiet  urn  den  Athabasca-See  und  den  Peace-Fluss  1. 

2.  Das    Gebiet   am    Ausflusse    des    Mackenzie-Flusses    aus    dem 
Grossen  Sklaven-See. 

3.  Das  Gebiet  um  den  Great  Bear  Lake  an  der  Baumgrenze. 

4.  Point  Separation  an  der  Deltamiindung. 

Im  folgenden  werden  wir  Citate  anfiihren,  welche  die  Zusammen- 
setzung  der  Baumvegetation  an  den  angegebenen  Orten  beleuchten: 

Das  Gebiet  um  den  Athabasca-See  und  den  Peace-Fluss3. 

,,The  oaks,  the  elms,  the  ashes,  the  Weymouth  pine,  and  pitch  pine, 
which  reach  the  Saskatchevan  basin,-  are  wanting  here,  and  the  bal- 
samfir  is  rare;  but  as  these  trees  form  no  prominent  feature  of  the 
landscape  in  the  former  quarter,  no  marked  change  in  the  woodland  scenery 
takes  place  in  any  part  of  the  Mackenzie  River  district,  until  we 
approach  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Sea3.  The  white  spruce 
continues  to  be  the  predominating  tree  in  dry  soils,  whether  rich  or  poor; 
the  Banksian  pine  occupies  a  few  sandy  spots;  the  black  spruce  skirts 
the  marshes;  and  the  balsam-poplar  and  aspen  fringe  the  streams;  the 
latter  also  springs  up  in  places  where  the  white  spruce  has  been  de- 
stroyed by  fire.  The  canoe-birch  becomes  less  abundant,  is  formed 
chiefly  in  rocky  districts,  and  is  very  scarce  north  of  the  arctic  circle." 

Aus  den  gesperrten  Worten  geht  hervor,  dass  diese  eben  geschil- 
derte  Baumvegetation  die  ganze  Flussstrecke  zwischen  dem  Atha- 
basca-See und  der  Eismeereskiiste  charakterisiert. 


1  Der  Peace-Fluss  ist  ein  Nebenfluss  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  in  der  Nilhe 
vom  Athabasca-See. 

2  RlCHARDSSON,    1.  C.    p.  136. 

3  Vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 


38 


FREDR1K  1NGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Das    Gebiet    am    Ausflusse    des   Mackenzie-Flusses   aus    dem  Grossen 

Sklaven-See  *. 

,,This  spot  may  be  considered  as  the  commencement  of  Mackenzie- 
River.  The  ground  is  very  swampy,  and  nourishes  willows  only;  but 
inland,  at  a  short  distance  from  the  beach,  grow  plenty  of  the  spruce- 
fir,  poplar,  aspen,  and  birch-trees.  — " 

Das  Gebiet  um  den  Great  Bear  Lake2. 

wAs  has  been  already  said,  the  general  aspect  of  the 
forest  does  not  alter  in  the  descent  of  the  Mackenzie3.  The 
white  spruce  continues  to  be  the  chief  tree.  In  this  quarter  it  attains 
a  girth  of  four  or  five  feet,  and  a  height  of  about  sixty  in  a  growth 
of  from  two  to  three  hundred  years,  as  shown  by  the  annual  layers  of 
wood.  One  tree,  cut  down  in  a  sheltered  valley  near  Clark's  Hill, 
measured  the  unusual  length  of  one  hundred  and  twenty-two  feet,  but 
was  comparatively  slender.  Most  of  the  timber  is  twisted,  particularly 
where  the  trees  grow  in  exposed  situations.  The  Banksian  pine  was 
not  traced  to  the  north  of  Great  Bear  Lake  River;  but  the  black  spruce, 
in  a  stunted  form,  is  found  on  the  borders  of  svamps  as  far  as  the 
woods  extend.  The  dog-wood,  silvery  oleaster  (Elceagnus  argentea], 
Shcpherdia,  and  Amelanchier  grow  on  banks  that  in  Europe  would 
be  covered  with  gorse  and  broom,  and  the  southern  Salix  Candida  is 
replaced  by  the  more  luxuriant  and  much  handsomer  Salix  speciosa, 
which  is  the  prince  of  the  willow  family.  — " 

Point  Separation  an  der  Deltamtindung  '. 

rtThe  banks  of  the  River  here,  and  the  numerous  islands,  are  well 
wooded.  The  balsam  poplars  rise  to  the  height  of  twenty  feet,  and  the 
white  spruce  to  forty  or  fifty." 

An    der  Baumgrenze  zwischen    Harrison  Island   und  Reindeer-Hills  •>. 

»The  valleys  and  borders  of  the  river  are  well  wooded,  but  the 
summits  of  the  eminences  present  only  scattered  spruce  firs,  with  stunted 
tops  and  widely  spreading,  depressed  lower  branches.  The  Canoe-birch 


1  FRANKLIN,  Narrative   of  a    Second  Expedition    to  the  shores  of  the  Polar  Sea  in 
the  years  1825,  1826,  1829,  p.  12. 

2  RlCHARDSSON,    1.   C.    p.   199,    Vol.  I. 

3  Vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 

4  RICHARDSSON,  1.  c.  p.  227,  Vol.  I. 

1.  c.  p.  231,  Vol.  I. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND. 


39 


(Betula  papyracea)  is  frequent,  and  the  trees  we  measured  were  about 
five  inches  in  diameter.  The  Populus  balsamifera  and  Alnus  viridis 
grow  to  the  height  of  twenty  feet,  and  the  Salix  speciosa  to  upwards 
of  twelve." 

Endlich  muss  in  diesem  Zusarnmenhange  erwahnt  werden,  dass 
Departement  of  agriculture  Washington  auf  Anfrage  fol- 
gende  Angabe  betreffs  der  Art  der  Nadelbaumtreibholzer,  welche  im 
Mackenzie-Flusse  angehauft  sind,  liefert: 

Picea  sitchensis. 

Picea  mariana  (=  P.  nigra  LINK.). 

Abies  nobilis. 

Thuja  plicata  (=  Thuja  gigantea  NUTT.). 

Im  untenstehenden  Schema  werden  wir  die  oben  angegebenen  Arten 
zusamrnenfiihren  um  dadurch  eine  Ubersicht  ilber  die  Zusammensetzung 
der  Baumvegetation  an  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  zu  er- 
halten.  Um  die  Ubereinstimmung  zwischen  der  englischen  und  der  latei- 
nischen  Nomenklatur  zu  finden,  hat  der  Verf.  die  oben  citierte  Arbeit 
RICHARDSSON'S  Vol.  II  (Appendix:  List  of  Trees  and  Shrubs)  benutzt. 


N  a  d  e  1  h  6  1  z  e  r. 


Laubholzer. 


Abies  (Picea)  alba  =  white  spruce. 

Abies  (Picea)  nigra  =  black  spruce. 

Picea  sitchensis. 

Abies  balsamea  =  balsam  fir. 

Abies  nobilis. 

Pinus  Banksiana  =  banksian  pine. 

Thuja  plicata  (=  Th.  gigantea  NUTT.). 

Spruce-fir? 


Populus  balsamea  =  balsampoplar. 
Populus  tremuloides  =  Aspen. 
Betula  (B.  papyracea}  =  Canoe-birch. 
Salix  =  willow  (S.  Candida,  S.  speciosa). 
Alnus  viridis,  A.  incana. 
Elceagnus  argentea. 
Shepherdia. 
Amelanchier. 


Im  folgenden  wird  sich  das  Interesse  hauptsachlich  an  diese  Frage 
kniipfen:  ist  es  wahrscheinlich,  dass  die  Baumvegetation  des  Mackenzie- 
Flusses,  mit  der  Zusammensetzung,  die  vorstehendes  Schema  auf weist, 
zu  den  Treibholzern  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land  das  Material  geliefert 
hat?  Wir  erinnern  uns,  dass  unsere  Treibholzer  folgende  Zusammen- 
setzung batten :  Larix,  Picea,  Populus,  Salix.  Aus  einer  Vergleichung 
zwischen  dem  Verzeichnis  der  Arten  unserer  Treibholzer  und  voran- 
gehendem  Schema  geht  sofort  hervor,  dass  die  Gattungen  Picea,  Populus, 
Salix  fur  beide  gemeinsam  sind,  die  Gattung  Larix  im  Schema  fehlt, 
im  Verzeichnis  der  Treibholzer  aber  vorhanden  ist.  Letztgenannte  Gat- 
tung muss  uns  also  die  erste  Richtlinie  zur  Losung  der  Frage  geben. 


40 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.          [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Unter  unseren  Treibholzern  sind,  wie  oben  erwahnt,  zahlreiche 
Liirchenproben  identificiert  worden.  Sie  kommen  in  Relation  zu  der 
Anzahl  iibriger  Treibholzerproben  in  so  grosser  Menge  vor,  dass  man 
annehmen  muss,  sie  stammen  aus  einem  waldbildenden  Gebiete.  Nach 
dem  Schema  sollte  Larix  an  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses 
vollstandig  fehlen.  So  verhalt  es  sich  doch  nicht.  In  dem  oben  citierten 
Reisebericht  FRANKLIN'S  hat  der  Verf.  einzelne  Angaben  dariiber  ge- 
sehen,  dass  die  Expedition  wahrend  ihrer  Fahrt  lungs  dem  Flusse  bier 
und  dort  Larchen  vorgefunden,  die  unter  „  white  Spruce"  =  Picea  alba 
eingesprengt  waren.  Diese  Angaben  beziehen  sich  doch  hauptsachlich 
auf  die  Gebiete  um  den  Athabasca-See  und  den  Grossen  Sklaven- 
Fluss  herum,  dagegen  nicht  auf  den  eigentlichen  Mackenzie-Fluss 
oder  mil  anderen  Worten  die  Flussstrecke  nordlich  vom  Grossen 
Sklaven-See.  Soviel  der  Verf.  verstanden  hat,  deuten  die  betref- 
fenden  Angaben  nur  auf  sporadisch  vorkommende  Larchenindividuen. 
Der  typische  Baum  unter  den  Nadelholzern  ist  namlich  nach  RICHARDSSON 
Picea  alba  =  white  spruce.  Er  sagt  (p.  199):  MThe  white  spruce  con- 
tinues to  be  the  chief  tree  — "  1  und  an  einer  anderen  Stelle:  ,,0f  this 
species  we  have  had  frequent  occasion  to  speak  in  the  preceding  pages, 
as  it  is  especially  the  forest  tree  in  Ruperts  land"  2. 

Dass  Larix  auf  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  keine  bedeu- 
tende  Rolle  spielt  und  auch  nicht  auf  den  Gebieten  der  tibrigen  Eis- 
meeresflusse,  geht  aus  alien  dem  Verf.  bekannten  floristischen  Angaben 
deutlich  hervor,  welche  betreffs  dieses  Sachverhaltnisses  vollstandig  iiber- 
einstimmen.  Hier  unten  werden  einige  Angaben  geliefert  der  Ausbreitung 
der  amerikanischen  Larche  in  Nordamerika  betreffs: 

,,The  species  3,  with  the  black  spruce,  occupies  nearly  all  the  swampy 
ground  from  Newfoundland,  Labrador,  and  the  eastern  provinces  to 
the  eastern  base  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  in  the  Peace  River  region 
and  on  the  Athabasca;  on  the  Rocky  Mountain  portage  above  Hudson's 
Hope,  Peace  River,  Lat.  56°  (MACOUN).  From  York  Factory,  Hudson 
Bay  to  Point  Lake,  Lat.  65°,  where  it  only  attains  a  height  of  from  6  to 
8  feet  (RICHARDSSON)  4. 

Nach  RICHARDSSON  5  hat  die  Art  folgende  Verbreitung:  ^Larix 
americana — ranges  northwards  to  the  arctic  circle,  and  from  Newfound- 
land and  Labrador  across  the  continent  to  the  Pacific.  —  It  is  a  tree 


1  RICHARDSSON,  1.  c.  p.  199.    Vol.  I. 

,  1.  c.  p.  136.    Vol.  II. 
3  Larix  americana,  MICHAUX. 

*  Catalogue  of  Canadian  Plants,  Part  III  -  Apetaloe  1886,  p.  475. 
5  RICHARDSSON,  I.e.  p.  318,  vol.  II. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         41 


of  no  great  importance,  and  is  generally  thinly  scattered  through  the 
forest,  and  if  it  is  anywhere  grouped  in  numbers,  it  is  on  the  borders 
of  swamps,  where  it  never  attains  much  height." 

RICHARDSSON  l  hat  in  derselben  Arbeit,  aus  welcher  dieses  Citat 
stammt,  eine  pflanzengeographische  Tabelle,  auf  der  Flora  Boreali- 
americana  HOOKER'S  basiert.  Eine  Partie  dieser  Tabelle  zeigt  uns  die 
geographische  Verbreitung  der  Goniferen  in  Nordamerika.  Er  hat 
Nordarnerika  aus  geographischem  Gesichtspunkte  in  3  Zonen  ein- 
geteilt,  deren  Umfassung  aus  der  Tabelle  hervorgeht. 


First  Zone  between 

Second  Zone. 

Third  or  Polar 

CO 

01 

Lat.  45°  to  55°  on  E. 

From  Arctic  Circle 

Zone. 

0 

S3 

side,  and  Lat.  49J 

northwards  to 

Lying  N.  of 

V 

to  58«  \v.  side. 

72o  N. 

73°  Lat. 

V 

ft 

6 

en 

,• 

^ 

0- 

H 

o 

•r 

en 

"C 

"in 

=y 

Coniferce. 

_c 

S! 

to 

'5 

D 

c 
o 

-o 

o 

2 

ns 

-0 

gj 

en 

.2 

"in 

Ej 

0 

U 

I 

nr 

u 

c/2 

c 
s 

0 

^ 

u 

Is 

EH 

s 
s 

0 

"q 

'3 

£ 

0 

s 

0 

p 

en 

1 

£ 

CO 

<D 
V 

S 

PI 

C 

«a 

Jj 

^ 

o> 

^3 

.£3 

S-« 

& 

bo 

CO 

in 

'3 

^ 

to 

"^ 

c 

to 

-2 

O 

b 

U 

15 

5 

'3 

£ 

s 
K 

to 

03 

.2 

— 
V 
M 

j*1?- 

u  v 

s) 

u 

-= 

— 
tn 

01 

U 

OJ    C 

o  *^J 

Cfl 

O>   C 

c 

C 

^^ 

g 

$ 

6 

c 
O 

C 

OiO 

CON 

O 

«3 

w 

—  o 
CON 

03 
-J 

o 
25 

— 
CO 

Coniferce    . 

20 

20 

9 

6 

14 

7 

1 

4 

6 

- 

. 

- 

. 

Pinus    .  .  . 

5 

5 

2 

1 

4 

1 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Abies  .... 

6 

6 

3 

2 

4 

3 

1 

2 

2 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Larix    .  .  . 

1 

1 

- 

- 

1 

1 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Cupressus  . 

2 

2 

1 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Thuja   .  .  . 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

'     - 

- 

- 

- 

Juniper  us  . 

3 

3 

2 

2 

2 

2 

- 

2 

2 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Taxus  .  .  . 

1 

1 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Aus  der  Tabelle  erweist  es  sich  also,  dass  Larix  innerhalb  der 
dritten  Zone  oder  der  Polarzone  vollstandig  fehlt  und  dass  die  Verbrei- 
tung derselben  als  waldbildender  Baum  innerhalb  sowohl  der  ersten  als 
der  zweiten  Zone  auf  den  6  st  lie  hen  Distrikt,  also  auf  den  Sstlichen  Teil 
Nor  dame  rikas  beschrankt  ist.  Diese  Angaben  RICHARDSSON'S  iiber 
das  Verbreitungsgebiet  der  Art  stimmen  mil  denen  von  LINDMAN  iiberein. 

Letztgenannter  Verf. 2  schreibt  hieriiber:  ^Larix  americana  tillhor 
ostra  Nordamerika  fran  Hudsons  Bay  soderut  till  Pennsylvanien 


1  RICHARDSSON,  1.  c.  p.  337,  vol.  II. 

2  LINDMAN,  1.  c.  p.  22. 


42 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


och  New  Jersey;  den  ar  allman  i  de  stater,  som  ga  upp  til  St.  Law- 
rencefloden,  men  bildar  skogar  blott  norr  om  namnda  flod,  salunda 
i  Canada,  Labrador,  N.  Braunswig,  New-Foundland  och 
N.  Skottland.  —  Enligt  SARGENT  vaxer  denna  art  till  ett  trad  a v  80— 
100  fots  hojd  endast  pa  Labrador  och  Ne w-Foundland.  Enligt 
PARLATORE  ar  dess  nordgriins  50°  n.  br.,  hvilket  SARGENT  utstracker 
til  65°." 

Aus  oben  gelieferten  Angaben  iiber  das  Verbreitungsgebiet  der  Art 
ergiebt  es  sich  also  deutlich,  dass  Larix  americana  nur  in  dem  ost- 
lichen  Teil  N  ordamerikas  ein  waldbildender  Baum  ist,  dass  man 
die  Befindlichkeit  derselben  in  den  Vegetationsgebieten  des  Mackenzie- 
Flusses  oder  der  iibrigen  Eismeeresfliisse  als  nur  zufalliger  Natur 
betrachten  darf. 

Nun  kiinnte  man  sich  allerdings  die  Moglichkeit  denken,  die  Mutter- 
baume  des  Larchenholzes  unter  unseren  Treibholzern  wiiren  eben  diese  in 
obenerwiihntem  Flussgebiet  sporadisch  vorkommenden  Larchenindivi- 
duen.  Dieser  Annahme  widersprechen  folgende  Tatsachen : 

1.  Die  Lftrchenproben  im  TreibhOlzertnaterial  sind  im  Verhaltnis  /n 
der   Anzahl    der    iibrigen   Treibholzerproben  so  zahlreich,  dass  man  an- 
nehrnen    muss,    sie    stammen   aus  einem  von  der  Art  gebildeten  Wald- 
gebiet. 

2.  Unsere  Treibholzerproben  batten,  wie  sich  aus  der  Tabelle  p.  10 
ergiebt,  fur  die  Breite  der  Jahrringe  einen  sehr  geringen  Mittelwert.    Als 
gemeinschaftlichen   Mittelwert,  d.  h.  als   Mittelproportionale  fur  die  resp. 
Mittelwerte  siimtlicher  Proben  erhielt  man  die  Zahl  0,99  mm.    Wenn  wir 
nun    init    Hiilfe    der    an   p.  30  angefiihrten,  von   MARTINS  mid  BRAVAIS 
aufgestellten  Tabelle  die  Polarhohe   fiir  den   Wachsort  der  Mutterbaume 
bestimmen  wollen,  so  konnen  wir  daraus  schliessen,  dass  sich  der  Wachs- 
ort  unter  einem   Breitengrade   befinden  muss,  welcher  dem  Kaafjord, 
d.  h.  69°  57'  n.  Br.  entspricht.  -  -  Die  Larchen,  welche  in  Nordamerika 
an  65°  n.  Br.  vorkommen,  treten  nach  RiGHARDSSON  nicht  in  Baumform 
auf,  sondern  bleiben  niedrige,  verkiimmerte,  6—8  Fuss  hohe  Straucher J. 
Die    Larchenproben    unserer   Treibholzer  sind  indessen  von  so  kr&ftigen 
Dimensionen,    dass    man    sie  nicht  als  Fragmente  der  nordlichsten  Vor- 
posten  dieser  Arten  betrachten  kann. 

Wenn  nun  diese  beiden  Sachverhaltnisse,  die  Anzahl  und  Dimen- 
sionen der  Proben,  mil  obenerwahnten  floristischen  Angaben  fur  das 
Verbreitungsgebiet  der  Art  kombiniert  werden,  diirfte  man  wohl  daraus 


1  P.  40  dieser  Abhandlung,  sielie  das  Citat  von  RICHARDSSON! 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.        43 

schliessen  konnen,  dass  die  Mutterbaume  unserer  Larchenproben  weder 
an  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flu sses  noch  an  denen  der  ubrigen 
Eismeeresflusse  gewachsen  sind. 

Dieser  Auffassung  widerspricht  keineswegs  das  Sachverhaltnis,  dass 
Abies  balsamea,  Pinus  Banksiana,  Abies  nobilis,  Thuja  plicata,  von 
welchen  Arten  die  beiden  letztgenannten  nach  Angabe  der  Landwirt- 
schaftskammer  in  Washington  in  der  Strandvegetation  des  Mackenzie- 
Flusses  vorkamen,  unter  unsern  Treibholzern  nicht  angetroffen  worden 
sind.  Dieser  Umstand  konnte  selbstverstandlich  sehr  wohl  auf  einem 
Zufall  beruhen,  aber  eigentiimlich  scheint  es  jedenfalls,  wenn  die  Treib- 
holxer  des  Mackenzie- Flu  sses  eine  andere  Art  von  Zusammen- 
setzung  als  die  Strandvegetation  desselben  aufweisen  sollten. 

In  der  Art  und  Beschaffenheit  eines  der  beiden  Laubholzer,  die  unter 
unseren  Treibholzern  gefunden  worden  sind,  haben  wir  vielleicht  eine 
andere  Bestatigung  unserer  Auffassung  von  der  Inaktivitat  des  Macken- 
zie-Flu sses  an  dem  Treibholzertransport  nach  dem  Ell  es  mere - 
Land.  Wie  bereits  erwahnt,  ist  eine  Populus-Arl  identifiziert  worden.  Die 
am  haufigsten  vorkommende  Pappelart  auf  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie- 
Flu  sses,  der  typische  Baum  in  der  Laubholzervegetation  ist  Populus 
balsamifera.  Das  Vorkommen  dieser  Art  hierselbst  und  die  Rolle, 
welche  sie  unter  den  Treibholzern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  spielt 
mag  vom  folgenden  Citat  beleuchtet  werden  *:  „  —  On  the  Peace  River  and 
all  streams  which  unite  to  form  the  Mackenzie,  it  occupies  all  the  is- 
lands and  low  alluvial  banks.  During  the  period  of  flood  many  trees 
fall  into  the  rivers  by  the  wearing  away  of  the  banks,  and  a  great 
number  of  them  in  the  course  of  time  reach  the  Arctic  Ocean.  These 
are  eventually  cast  on  the  islands  and  shores,  and  become  the  chief 
source  from  which  is  derived  the  fuel  supply  of  arctic  tra- 
vellers. — "  - 

Eine  andere  Angabe,  welche  das  Vorkommen  der  Art  an  den  Ufern 
des  Mackenzie-Flusses  und  ihre  Bedeutung  als  treibholzerbildender 
Baum  beleuchtet,  ist  diese  (RICHARDSSON)  3 :  nPopulus  balsamifera, 
balsam  poplar  or  tacamahac,  was  found  growing  on  the  banks  of  the 
Mackenzie  up  to  lat.  59°,  where  it  makes  a  very  slender  tree.  In  the 
southern  part  of  the  delta  of  that  river,  it  forms  groups  of  healthy  young 
trees,  I  measured  some  drift  logs  of  this  tree  which  were  floating 


1  Catalogue  of  Canadian  Plants,  p.  456. 

2  Vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 

3  RICHARDSSON,  1.  c.  p.  314.    Vol.  II. 


44 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


down  the  Mackenzie,  and  found  them  to  be  about  15  feet  in  circum- 
ference, with  a  very  moderate  tapering  upwards." 

Endlich  will  ich  aus  dem  Reisebericht  FRANKLIN'S  l  folgendes  Citat 
beifiigen,  welches  dazu  dient,  den  Inhalt  der  beiden  vorhergehenden  zu 
bekraftigen:  nThe  trunk  of  this  tree  attains  a  greater  circumference  than 
that  of  any  other  in  the  northern  parts  of  America.  —  We  traced  it  as 
far  to  the  north  as  Great  Slave  Lake,  and  the  south  branch  of  Macken- 
zie's River  has  been  named  Riviere  and  Liards  from  its  abundance  in 
that  quarter.  It  constituted  the  greatest  part  of  the  drift  tim- 
berthat  we  observed  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Sea".2 

Diese  Angaben  betreffs  der  Bedeutung  der  Balsampappel  als  treib- 
holzerbildender  Baum  an  den  Ufern  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  veran- 
lassie  den  Verf.,  zwischen  dem  Holz  der  betreffenden  Treibholzerprobe 
und  dem  einer  amerikanischen  Balsampappel  einen  anatomischen  Ver- 
gleich  anzustellen.  Dabei  hat  der  Verf.  als  Vergleichungsmaterial  ein 
Stammstilck  von  Populus  balsamifera  LINN,  aus  Canada3  gehabt. 
Aus  der  anatomischen  Uritersuchung  stellte  es  sich  heraus,  dass  die 
beiden  Holzstiicke  nicht  derselben  Art  waren,  sondern  dass  zwischen 
ihnen  bedeutende  und  unverkennbare  Ungleichheiten  vorhanden  waren, 
welche  auf  diese  VVeise  zusammengestellt  werden  konnen: 

Populus  balsamifera  LINN.,  Canada. 

1.  Markstrahlzellen  reichlich  mil  Harz  impragniert. 

2.  Gefasse  am  Querschnitte  in  regelmassigen  Reihen  geordnet. 

3.  Radiale  Weite  der  Gefasse  (am  Querschnitte)  0,22  mm.    (Mittelzahl 
von  20  Messungen). 

Populus-Treibholz  (sehr  kriiftiger,  centrisch  gewachsener 

Stammteil). 

1.  Harz  in  Markstrahlzellen  vollstandig  fehlend. 

2.  Gefasse  am  Querschnitte  unregelmassig  geordnet. 

3.  Radiale  Weite  der  Gefasse  (am  Querschnitte)  0,12  mm.     (Mittelzahl 
von  20  Messungen). 

Aus  der  anatomischen  Vergleichung  geht  also  deutlich  hervor,  dass 
die  beiden  Holzarten  nicht  identisch  sind,  dass  unsere  Treibholzprobe 
also  von  Populus  balsamifera  LINN,  nicht  stammt.  Dagegen  stimmt 


*  FRANKLIN,    Narrative    of   a  journey  etc.  1918,  1820,  1821,  1822,  Appendix,  p.  766. 

2  Vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 

3  Das    betreffende    Holzstiick    befmdet    sich    in    einer    Sammlung    amerikanischer 
Holzarten,  welche  zur  Bot.  Instil.  Lund's  gehort. 


1898-1902.  No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LANI).         45 

die  Treibholzprobe  durch  ihre  anatomische  Struktur  mit  den  Treibholzer- 
proben  iiberein,  welcbe  in  dem  von  NATHORST  eingesammelten  Treib- 
hdlzermaterial  als  Populus  tremula  L.  festgestellt  worden  sind.  Diese 
Art  kommt  bekanntlich  in  Nordamerika  vor  und  gehort,  wie  angegeben 
worden  ist,  zum  Vegetationsgebiet  des  Mackenzie-Flusses.  Nach  fol- 
gender  Angabe  soil  die  betreffende  Art  an  trocknen  Orten  wachsen,  also 
nicht  gem  im  Uberschwemmungsgebiet  eines  Flusses:  --  ,,It  is  found 
on  all  dry  slopes  from  Newfoundland  and  Labrador  throughout  the 
northern  forest  region  to  Alaska.  --  Although  it  is  always  found  on 
the  dry  slopes  in  the  north,  in  Ontario  it  more  frequently  grows  on  wet 
than  on  dry  soil."  1 

Dass  eben  angefiihrte  zeigt  deutlich,  dass  die  Espe,  Populus  tremula, 
im  Vegetationsgebiet  der  Eismeeresfliisse  Nordamerikas  keine  treib- 
holzerbildende  Baumart  von  Bedeutung  ist,  und  diese  Annahme  wird 
nochmals,  wenigstens  betreffs  der  Strandvegetation  des  Mackenzie- 
Flusses,  durch  folgende,  in  einem  anderen  Zusammenhange  (p.  44) 
citierte  Worte  bekraftigt:  — nlt  (P.  balsamifera)  constituted  the  greatest 
part  of  the  drift-timber  that  we  observed  on  the  shores  of  the  Arctic 
Sea."  2 

Wenn  man  von  den  Voraussetzungen  ausgeht,  dass  die  Treibholzer 
der  Tochterkiiste  ihrer  Zusammensetzung  nach  dieselben  typischen  Baume 
wie  die  der  Mutterkilste  aufweisen,  darf  man  wohl  annehmen,  dass  die 
Balsampappel  (Populus  balsamifera)  das  Material  zu  den  Pappeltreib- 
holzern  auf  dem  Ellesme re-Land  geliefert  hat,  vorausgesetzt  nam- 
lich,  dass  sie  aus  der  Miindung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  stammt. 
Zwar  konnte  man  gegen  diese  Annahme  einwenden,  dass  die  Artzusam- 
mensetzung  der  Treibholzer  wahrend  des  Transposes  zwischen  der  Mutter- 
und  der  Tochterkiiste  ihren  Charakter  verandert,  was  wohl  oft  der  Fall 
ist,  indem  wohl  nur  das  wasserdichte  Holz  den  Destinationsort  erreicht 
habe,  alles  andere  dagegen  unterwegs  durchgetrankt  und  gesunken  sei. 
Diese  Einwendung  dilrfte  doch  unsere  Uberzeugung  betreffs  der  Art 
und  Natur  des  Pappeltreibholzes  im  erwiihnten  Treibholzermaterial  keines- 
wegs  storen,  weil  das  Holz  der  Balsampappel  nach  eben  erwahntem 
Erfahrungssatz,  welcher  sagt,  dass  harzreiches  Holz  nicht  so  leicht 
als  harzarmes  durchtrankt  wird  und  sinkt,  hochst  wahrscheinlich  weit 
seefester  als  das  der  Espe  ist.  Dass  das  Holz  der  Balsampappel  einen 
langwierigen  Wassertransport  vertragen  kann,  erweist  sich  auch  daraus, 


1  Catalogue  of  Canadian  Plants  1.  c.  p.  456.     Die  Art  steht  in  der  citierten  Arbeit 
unter  dem  Namen  von  P.  tremuloides  Michx.  =  Aspen. 

2  Siehe  FRANKLIN'S  Reisebericht  p.  766. 


46 


FREDRIK  INGV ARSON.          [SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 


dass  die  obenerwahnten  arktischen  Expeditionen  an  Orten,  die  weit  von 
der  Treibholzerquelle  entfernt  waren,  Treibholzer  dieser  Art  angetroffen 
haben.  Das  Pappelholz,  welches  also  ostlich  von  den  Miindungen  des 
Coppermine-Flusses  und  des  Great  Fish-Flusses  gefunden  wurcle 
und  vvelcbes  nach  einstimmigen  Angaben  aus  dem  Mackenzie-Flusse 
stammte,  trug  oft  Spuren  davon,  im  Wasser  schon  lange  gelegen  zu 
haben.  —  Nichts  von  dem  oben  angefiihrten  scheint  daher  diese  unsere  Auf- 
fassnng  zu  widerlegen,  dass  die  Pappeltreibholzer  auf  dem  Ellesme re- 
Land  aus  dem  Holz  der  Balsampappel  und  nicht  aus  dem  einer  anderen 
Pappelart  bestehen  miissen,  vorausgesetzt  namlich,  dass  die  Treibholzer- 
stromung  voni  Mackenzie-Fluss  gekommen  ist. 

Endlich  mag  noch  ein  anderer  Gesichtspunkt  hervorgehoben  vverden, 
der  fur  die  Bedeutung  der  Zusarnmengehorigkeit  zwischen  den  Treib- 
holzern des  Ellesmere-Landes  und  den  des  Mackenzie-Flusses 
vielleicht  nicht  unwesentlich  ist.  Nach  Angaben  der  FRANKLiN'schen 
und  der  BACK'schen  Expeditionen  ist  die  nordamerikanische  Eismeeres- 
kiiste  mil  Treibholzern  reichlich  versehen.  An  der  Kiistenstrecke  zwischen 
dem  Delta  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  und  der  Mundung  des  Great 
Fish-Flusses  und  ostlich  von  derselben  wurden  hier  und  dort  grossere 
oder  kleinere  Holzansammlungen  gefunden.  Besonders  kompakte  Treib- 
holzeranhaufungen  wurden  an  der  Kustenstrecke  zwischen  obenerwahntem 
Flussdelta  und  dem  Cape  Bathurst  gesehen.  Betreffs  der  Menge 
der  hier  gefundenen  Treibholzer  schreibt  FRANKLIN  ' :  ,,There  is  such  an 
abundance  of  drift-timber  on  almost  every  part  of  the  coast,  that  a 
sufficient  supply  of  fuel  for  a  ship  might  easily  be  collected,  and  wher- 
ever we  landed  on  the  main  shore,  we  found  streams  or  small  lakes  of 
fresh  water.  Should  the  course  of  events  ever  introduce  a  steam-vessel 
into  those  seas,  it  may  be  important  to  know  that  in  coasting  the  shores 
between  Cape  Bathurst  and  the  Mackenzie,  fire-wood  sufficient  for  her 
daily  consumption  may  be  gathered"  etc. 

Aus  dem  oben  angefiihrten  konnen  wir  schliessen,  dass  Massen  von 
Treibholzern  an  der  Eismeereskiiste  Nordamerikas  vorhanden  sein 
miissen.  Da  aber  alle  diese  Treibholzeranhaufungen  nach  einstimmigen 
Angaben  als  Bruchstiicke  von  dem  grossen  Treibholzervorrat  des 
Mackenzie-Flusses  zu  betrachten  sind,  ist  es  ja  selbstverstandlich, 
dass  es  eine  ostliche,  von  der  Flussmundung  ausgehende  Treibholzer- 
stromung  sein  muss,  welche  diese  Treibholzer  vom  Treibholzerbassin  im 
Delta  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  in  ihre  jetzige  Lage  getrieben  hat.  In 


FRANKLIN:    Second  Expedition  1825,  1826,  1827,  I.e.  p.  263. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         47 

Betracht  der  Anzahl,  der  Grosse  und  bisweilen  aueh  des  hohen  Alters 
dieser  Treibholzeransammlungen  geht  letzteres  aus  ihrer  oft  hohen  Lage 
oberhalb  der  jetzigen  Strandiinie  deutlich  genug  hervor,  ist  es  wahr- 
scheinlich,  dass  wir  hier  in  diesen  Fahrwassern  eine  machtige  Treib- 
holzerstromung  von  alien  Ahnen  haben,  welche,  in  ostlicher  Richtung 
liings  der  Kiiste  fahrend,  fiir  das  grosse  Treibholzerbassin  des  Mackenzie- 
Flu  sses  den  Hauptablauf  bildet.  Mit  diesen  Zeilen  will  der  Verf. 
n ur  die  Moglichkeit  dafilr  angedeutet  haben,  dass  die  Treibholzerstro- 
mung  des  Mackenzie-Flu  sses  infolge  ihrer  stark  ostlichen  Richtung 
mit  den  Kustengebieten  des  Ellesmere-Landes  nie  in  Kontakt  kom- 
men  kann. 

Infolge  aller  dieser  oben  erwahnten  Sachverhaltnisse  scheint  es 
uns,  dass  die  Treibholzer  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land  nicht  aus  dem 
Mackenzie-Fluss  stammen.  Hier  unten  giebt  der  Verf.  eine  Uber- 
sicht  der  Gesichtspunkte,  auf  welche  er  die  obenerwahnte  Ansicht 
griindet : 

1.  Die  Larchenproben  unter  unseren  Treibholzern  miissen  aus  einem  von 
der  Art  gebildeten  Waldgebiet   stammen.     Die   Larch e  ist  im  Vege- 
tationsgebiet  des  Mackenzie -Flu  sses  nicht  waldbildend  (p.  40 — 43). 

2.  Unter  unseren  Treibholzern  fehlen  Reprasentanten  fur  die  Mehrzahl 
der  Baurne,  welche  nach  dem  Pflanzenschema  p.  39  zur  Baumvege- 
tation  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  gehoren  (p.  43). 

3.  Das   Fehlen    von   Populus  balsamifera,  das  Vorkommen  aber  von 
anderer  Pappelart  im  Treibholzermateriale  (p.  43 — 46). 

4.  Die    Treibholzerstromung    des    Mackenzie-Flusses    scheint    eine 
ostliche  Richtung  liings    der  nordamerikanischen  Eismeereskuste  zu 
nehmen  (p.  46—47). 

Im  Vorhergehenden  haben  wir  dies  zu  beweisen  versucht,  dass  die 
iibrigen  treibholzerfiihrenden  Fliisse  Nordamerikas  am  Treibholzer- 
transport  nach  dem  Elles  mere-Land  wahrscheinlich  nicht  teil- 
nehmen.  Wenn  nun  auch  der  Mackenzie-Fluss,  der  grosste  und 
bedeutendste  von  den  sumtlichen  aufgezahlten  Flussen,  als  aktiver  Faktor 
im  Treibholzertransport  forteliminiert  wird,  so  ist  damit  auch  gesagt, 
dass  Nordamerika  das  Mutterland  der  Treibholzer  auf  dem  Elles- 
mere-Land  nicht  sein  kamv  Es  bleibt  uns  also  nur  iibrig  dasselbe  in 
Sibirien  zu  suchen. 

In  den  nordsibirischen  Flussen,  dem  Jenissei  und  der  Lena,  ent- 
stehen  machtige  Treibholzerstromungen,  deren  Strombahnen  wir  friiher 
beschrieben.  Aus  einer  dieser  Stromungen  muss  das  Ellesmere-Land 
seine  Treibholzer  bekommen  haben.  Wie  der  Verf.  in  der  Einleitung 


48 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


erwahnt,  hat  er  eine  an  der  Miindung  des  Jenissei's  zusammenge- 
brachte  Treibholzersammlung  untersucht.  Bei  einer  Vergleichung  zwischen 
diesem  Material  und  unseren  Treibholzern  wurden  keine  Erfahrungen 
gemacht,  die  darauf  deuteten,  dass  die  beiden  Sammlungen  der  Art  und 
dem  Ursprunge  nach  verschieden  waren;  im  Gegenteil  deuteten  alle  Be- 
obachtungen  darauf,  dass  sie  von  demselben  Material  gebildet. waren. 
So  war  die  Artzusammensetzuug  ungefahr  dieselbe.  Die  Treibholzer 
des  Jenissei's  bestanden  aus  folgenden  Gattungen:  Larix,  Picea,  Salix, 
Populus,  Alnus;  die  Treibholzer  vom  Ellesmere-Land  aus  Larix, 
Picea,  Populus,  Salix,  also  von  denselben  Gattungen  wie  die  Treib- 
holzer des  Jenissei's,  Alnus  ausgenommen. 

Auch  solche  Gharaktere,  von  denen  wir  annehmen  milssen,  dass  sie 
auf  klimatischen  und  anderen  Vegetationsbedingungen  beruhen,  waren  den 
Bestandteilen  der  beiden  Sammlungen  gemeinsam.  So  kann  ich  Eigen- 
schaften  nennen,  die  sich  auf  die  Entwicklung  der  Jahrringe,  auf  die 
Proportion  zwischen  Spat-  und  Friihholz  in  einem  und  demselben  Jahr- 
ringe, moglicherweise  auch  auf  die  Zellweite  beziehen.  Meine  Zellen- 
messungen  an  den  Treibholzern  des  Jenissei's  gaben  dieselben  Werte 
wie  die  an  den  Treibholzern  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land  bewerk- 
stelligten. 

In  der  Artzusammenselzung  oder  der  Beschaffenheit  unserer  Treib- 
holzer giebt  es  also  nichts,  was  gegen  die  Wahrscheinlichkeit  spricht, 
die  wir  durch  Untersuchungen  von  der  eventuellen  Aktivitiit  der  nord- 
amerikanischen  Fliisse  am  Treibholzertransport  nach  dem  Ellesmere- 
Land  gewannen,  die  Wahrscheinlichkeit  namlich,  dass  unsere  Treib- 
holzer sibirischen  Ursprungs  sind. 

Also  bleibt  es  uns  endlich  tibrig  festzustellen,  welcher  Stromungs- 
bahn  die  sibirischen  Treibholzer  folgen  milssen,  um  die  westliche  Hafen 
im  Jones  Sund  zu  erreichen.  Aus  dem  Landkartenstudium  ergiebt  es 
sich,  dass  drei  solche  Linien  vorhanden  sein  konnten: 

1)  eine  von  Siiden  durch  den  Davis  Sund  — den  Baffins  Bay; 
2)  eine  von  Norden  durch  den  Robesons  Kanal  —  den  Baffins  Bay; 
und  endlich  3)  eine  von  Norden  durch  den  Cardigan  Sund  oder 
Helvedesporten. 

A  priori  konnte  man  sich  wohl  denken,  dass  die  Treibholzerstromung 
von  Suden  gekommen  ware,  den  Davis  Sund  und  den  Baffins  Bay 
passiert  hatte  und  hiervon  gegen  Westen  in  den  Jones  Sund  abgebogen 
ware.  An  der  siidwestlichen  Kuste  Gronlands  giebt  es  namlich  eine 
grossere  Anhaufung  von  Treibholzern,  welche  nach  den  Untersuchungen 
ORTENBLAD'S  sibirischen  Ursprungs  sind  und  wahrscheinlich  aus  dem 


l.s'.is     1202.   No.  24.]     DIE  THEI13HOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMEHE-LAND.         49 

Flusstal  des  Jenissei's  stammen.  Diese  Treibholzeranhaufung  besteht 
aus  derselben  Art  von  Material,  wie  die  Treibholzeranhaufung  im  Jones 
Sund.  Man  konnte  sich  denken,  dass  gevvisse  von  der  gronlftndischen 
Holzniederlage  losgerissene  Treibholzermengen  mil  dem  Golfstrom  ge- 
trieben,  der  ja  eine  Verzweigung  in  den  Baffins  Bay  aufsendet,  und 
von  dort  durch  ostliche  Winde  in  den  Jones  Sund  hineingepresst 
waren. 

Gegen  die  Wahrscheinlichkeit  dieser  Hypotbese  sprechen  dieselben 
Umstande,  vvelche  frtiher  in  einem  anderen  Zusarnmenhange  betont 
worden  sind: 

1.  Die  bestimmten  Angaben  SIMMONS'  betreffend  die  Stromungsverhalt- 
nisse  in   diesen   Gegenden,  nach  welchen  ein  Austausch  von  Treib- 
produkten    zwischen    dem    Baffins   Bay    und   dem    Jones  Sund 
vollstandig  ausgeschlossen  ware. 

2.  Treibholzer  sind  nur  in  den  westlichsten  Hafen  vom  Jones  Sund 
vorhanden. 

Die  zweite  Eventualit&t :  der  Robe  sons  Kanal  —  der  Baffins 
Bay  -  -  der  Jones  Sund  muss  nach  dem  was  gesagt  worden  ist 
selbtverstundlich  auch  ausgeschlossen  sein,  weil  das  Vorhandensein  einer 
Verbindungsiinie  der  Baffins  Bay  --  der  Jones  Sund  infolge  der 
Stromungsverhaltnisse  undenkbar  ist.  Dagegen  scheint  es  dem  Verf. 
wahrscheinlich,  dass  die  Treibholzerprobe,  (Larix),  welche  SIMMONS  in  der 
Alexandra-Bucht  an  der  Ostkuste  des  Ellesmere-Lands  gefunden, 
von  Norden  durch  den  Robesons  Kanal  gekommen  ist. 

Es  bleibt  uns  dann  iibrig  unsere  Aufmerksamkeit  auf  die  dritte 
Eventualitat  zu  rich  ten  oder  auf  die,  vvelche  sich  auf  einen  Eismeeres- 
strom  nordlich  von  Gronland  und  Grants  Land  rnit  Fortsetzung 
siidwarts  durch  den  Cardigansund  oder  Helvedesporten  bezog. 
Dass  eine  nordliche  Slromung  wirklich  existiert,  bevveisen  die  Treibholzer- 
anhaufungen,  vvelche  an  den  nordostlichen  und  nordwestlichen  Kiisten 
vom  Grants  Land,  resp.  von  Gronland,  angetroffen  worden  sind, 
teils  in  der  Verbindungslinie  selbst  zvvischem  dem  Polarmeere  und  dem 
Robesons  Kanal,  teils  an  den  Kiistenstrecken  langs  dem  oben- 
erwahnten  Kanal. 

.  So  hat  die  Expedition  GREELY'S  1  in  verschiedenen  Buchten  auf 
Grants  Land,  an  der  Kiistenstrecke  langs  dem  Robesons  Kanal, 
namlich  im  St.  Patrick's  Bay,  im  Discovery  Harbour,  im 


1  GHEELY,  A.  W.  Report  on  the  Proceedings  of  the  United  States  Expedition  to 
Lady  Franklin  Bay,  Grinnel  Land.  (International  Polarexpedition  1888,  Vol.  I, 
p.  313). 

4 


50  FREDRIK  1NGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Archer  Fjord,  im  Ella  Bay  und  an  anderen  (Men  Treibholzeran- 
haufungen  angetroffen.  Auch  an  der  gronlandischen  Seite,  namlich  in 
der  Nahe  vom  Repulse  Harbour,  wurden  Treibholzer  gefunden. 
Diese  Treibholzer  sind  nicht  mikroskopisch  untersucht  worden.  Nach 
einem  botanischen  Appendix  l,  welcher  dem  vvissenschaftlichen  Bericht 
tiber  die  Arbeiten  der  Expedition  beigefiigt  ist,  sind  allerdings  diese 
drei  Gattungen :  wCedar",  ^Poplar",  nPine"  identificiert  worden,  aber 
die  Angaben  dariiber  schvvanken,  indem  ein  ?  hinter  den  betreffenden 
Gattungsnamen  oft  genug  angebracht  worden  ist.  Dies  witre  wohl  aber 
kauni  geschehen,  vvenn  die  Gattungsdiagnose  auf  eine  mikroskopische 
Untersuchung  gegrundet  worden  ware,  weil  arktisches  Holz  in  der  Regel 
sehr  gut  erhalten  ist  und  diese  drei  Baumarten  auf  mikroskopischem 
Wege  leicht  identificiert  vverden  konnen.  Ein  andeier  Grund,  welcher 
gegen  die  Zuverlassigkeit  dieser  Gattungsbestinimung  spricht,  ist  dieser, 
dass  Pinus  nach  obenerwahntem  botanischen  Appendix  und  der  Treib- 
holzertabelle  p.  313  im  oben  citierten  Werk  die  im  Treibholzermaterial 
am  haufigsten  vorkommende  Gattung  ware.  Aber  in  keiner  auf  mikro- 
skopischem Wege  untersuchten  Treibholzersarnmlung  sind  Holzproben 
dieser  Gattung  in  grosserer  Menge  identificiert  worden,  und  zwar  in  voll- 
standiger  Ubereinstimmung  mit  der  Artzusammensetzung,  welche  in  der 
Vegetation  auf  den  Ufern  der  treibholzerfiihrenden  Flusse  in  Sibirien 
sowohl  als  in  Nordamerika  vorhanden  ist.  Im  Verhaltnis  zu  der 
Liirche  und  der  Fichte  ist  namlich  die  Kiefer  nur  ein  kleiner  Teil  von 
der  Vegetation  der  Nadelholzer. 

Auch  an  der  gronliindischen  Kiistenseite  sind  Treibholzer  angetroffen 
worden.  In  den  Buchten  Polaris  Bay  und  Newman  Bay  hat  die 
HALt'sche  Polarexpedition  grosse  Mengen  von  Treibholzern  gefunden. 
Man  glaubte  unter  diesen  den  Walnussbaum,  die  Esche  und  die  Rot- 
tanne  zu  erkennen.  Auf  diese  vermeintliche  Entdeckung  von  Walnuss- 
biiumen  unter  den  Treibholzern  in  diesen  Gegenden  wurde  die  Hypo- 
these  von  einem  offenen  Polarmeere  zwischen  dem  Stillen  Oceane  und 
dem  Atlantischen  Oceane  basiert.  Nach  der  geographischen  Verbreitung 
der  Walnussbaume  zu  urteilen,  konnen  namlich  die  HALL/schen  Exemplare 
entweder  von  den  Kiisten  des  Atlantischen  Oceanes  oder  auch  von  denen 
des  Stillen  Oceanes,  nicht  aber  von  den  Ufern  der  Nordsibirischen  Flusse 
stammen.  Von  den  beiden  Alternative!],  unter  welchen  man  hier  zu  wahlen 
hat, 'ist  nach  GRISEBACH  2  die  erste  ausgeschlossen,  weil  Treibprodukte 


1  GHEKLY,  1.  c.  534-  (Appendix  No.  120). 

2  PETERMANN,  A.,  Geograph.  Mittheil.,  1874,  p. 


1898- 1H02.  No.  2*.]      DIK  TREIBHOL/KH  AUF  DICM  ELLESMEKE-LAND.         51 

dieser  Art  in  den  treibholzerfiihrenden  Gebieten  im  Smith's  Sund  und 
im  Baffin s  Bay  siidlieh  von  obenerwahnten  Buchten  fehlen  sollten. 
Die  Befindlichkeit  des  Walnussbaurnes  unter  den  Treibholzern  im  New- 
man Bay  und  Polaris  Bay  erkliirt  er  (GRISEBACH)  dalier  durch  die 
Annahme,  dass  eine  Polarverzweigung  des  japanischen  Meeresstromes 
exisliert,  vvelche  wenigstens  periodenweise  Treibholzer  durch  den  Be  hi- 
ring s  Sund  ins  Eismeer  transportiert.  Auf  diese  Weise  sucht  er  die 
Theorie  von  einer  offenen  Eismeeresverbindung  zwischen  den  beiden 
anderen  grossen  Weltmeeren  zu  stiitzen. 

So  lange  keine  mikroskopische  Untersuchung  der  betreffenden  Treib- 
holzerproben  gemacht  worden  ist,  muss  man  doch  die  Angabe  eines 
,,japanischen"  Treibmaterials  auf  diesen  Kiisten  mil  grosser  Vorsicht 
aufnehmen. 

Wie  schon  oben  erwahnt,  hat  man  Treibholzerprodukte  in  der  Ein- 
fahrt  selbst  in  den  Robesons  Kanal,  also  an  der  nordostlichen  Eis- 
meereskiiste  des  Grants  Lands  angetroffen.  An  der  Kiistenstrecke 
zwischen  dem  Cape  Sheridan  und  dem  Gape  Joseph  Henry  war 
es  also,  dass  die  Expedition  NARE'S  ihre  Treibholzerfunde  machte.  Unter 
den  Buchten,  in  welchen  Treibholzer  angetroffen  vvurden,  muss  besonders 
Hilgard  Bay  genannt  werden.  Uber  die  Treibholzer  dort  schreibt  man 
folgerides:  W0n  the  eastern  shore  of  the  inner  part  of  this  bay  there 
were  great  quantities  of  drift-wood,  pieces  of  all  sizes,  varying  from 
fifteen  feet  in  length  to  a  foot,  but  apparently  all  of  the  same  description. 
Most  of  the  pieces  were  lying  on  the  surface,  but  some  were  slightly 
covered  with  soil.  I  found  pieces  forty  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
water.  One  tree,  lying  close  above  the  water's  edge,  was  about  fifteen 
feet  long  and  twelve  inches  in  diameter  at  its  thickest  part  — "  1. 

So  viel  der  Verf.  weiss,  sind  die  Treibholzerfunde  dieser  Expedition 
auch  nicht  mikroskopisch  untersucht  worden.  Da  die  Artzusammen- 
setzuhg  der  Treibholzer  unbekannt  ist,  kann  man  folglich  nicht  mit 
Sicherheit  auf  den  Mutterort  derselben  schliessen.  Auf  eins  konnen  wir 
doch  durch  obenerwahnte  Funde  schliessen,  darauf  namlich,  dass  es 
im  Eisrneere  nordlich  von  Gronland  und  vom  Grants  Land  eine 
Treibholzerstromung  geben  muss.  Moglicherweise  konnen  wir  auch 
betreffend  die  Hauptrichtung  dieser  Strornung  einen  Schluss  ziehen. 
Der  Verf.  mochte  sie  als  nord-sudlich,  dagegen  weder  als  ost- 
westlich  noch  als  west-ostlich  ansehen.  Als  Grund  dieser  Annahme 
diirfte  hervorgehoben  werden,  dass  keine  Treibholzer  an  der  eigentlichen 

1  NARES,  G.  S.    Narrative  of  a  voyage  to  the  Polar  Sea  1875-1876  in  H.  M.  Ships 
nAlert"  and  ,,Discovery".     London  1878.     Vol.  II,  p.  70,  74. 


52  FREDRIK  1NGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT-  EXI)-  FRAM 

Nordseite    vom    Grants    Land,    also    an    der   Strecke    zwischen    dem 
Cape    Joseph    Henry    und    Point    Alert    (=    Farlherst    of    Lieut. 
ALDRICH'S  sledge  party  18th  May  1876),  und  auch  nicht  an  der  eigentlichen 
Nordkiiste  von  Gronland,  d.  h.  an  der  Strecke  zwischen  dem  Repulse 
Harbour  und  dem  Cape  Washington,   angetroffen  vvorden  sind.  - 
Wenigstens    sind    keine  Treibholzerfunde  aus  diesen  Kiistenstrecken  er- 
wahnt  worden  weder  in  der  friiher  citierlen  Arbeit  NARE'S:    ,,Voyage  to 
the  Polar  Sea",   noch   in  GREELY'S  ,,Report  etc.  to  Lady  Franklin  Bay", 
eben  Arbeiten,    welche    liber    die   Expeditionen    in   diesen   Gegenden  ge- 
schrieben  sind.  --  Nur  an  den  Strecken  vom  Grants  Land  und  Gron- 
land, welche   am    Robesons    Kanal    grenzen,   giebt  es  Treibholzer. 
Wenn  wir  nun  annehmen    wollten,   dass   die  genannten  Treibholzer  von 
einer  starken,  ost-  oder  westwarts  gehenden  Stromung  abgelagert  worden 
waren,   so   batten   sich    wohl   auch  Treibholzer  im  ersteren  Falle  an  der 
Nordseite  vom  Grants  Land,  im  lelzteren  Falle  an  der  Nordkiiste  von 
Gronland   ablagern   miissen,  vorausgesetzt   namlich,  dass  die  Terrain- 
verhiiltnisse  dieser  Kiisten   die  Verankerung   der  Treibholzer  nicht  voll- 
stitndig    verhindern,    eine    Annahme.    welche    wohl    doch    kaum    wahr- 
scheinlich  wiire l.     Wenn    es  sich   nun   wirklich  so   verhalt,   dass  Treib- 
holzer nur  an  den  Kustenslrecken  vorgefunden    worden  sind,  welche  die 
Einfahrt  zum  Robesons  Kanal  begrenzen,  dagegen  nicht  an  Gebieten, 
welche    ostlich    oder    westlich    von    demselben    langs    dem    Polarmeere 
gelegen    sind,    so    deutet    wohl    dieses    Sachverhaltnis    darauf,   dass    die 
Treibholzerstromung  eine  nordsiidliche  Hauptrichtung  hat.    Die  Annahme, 
dass   die    Hauptrichtung    der  Stromung   nord-sudlich   ware,   enthalt  drei 
Alternative!!:    1)  streng  nordsudlich,  2)  nordwestlich— siidostlich,  3)  nord- 
ostlich — siidwestlich.   -      Einige  Angaben   in   NARE'S  Reisebericht  betref- 
fend    die    Lage    der  Fundorte  an  der  Strecke  Cape  Sheridan  —  Cape 
Joseph   Henry   (an   der  Nordostkiiste    vom    Grants  Land,    an    der 
Einfahrt   in    den    Robesons    Kanal)    fi'ihrt   uns    zuerst    zu    der   An- 
nahme   von    der    Alternative    2,    also    Stromrichtung    nordwestlich  — 
siidostlich.     Nachstehendes    Citat    mag  das   eben   gesagte  beleuchten: 
WA  considerable  quantity  of  drift-wood  has  been  met  with  on  the  beaches 
of  each   bay  open  I o wards  the  north-west,   as  we  expected  would 
be  the  case"  2. 

Anderswo   (p.  74)    hat  er  diese  Ausserung:    nMany   pieces  of  drift- 


1  Hier    muss    man    doch    beacliten,    dass   die   Exkiirsionen  in  diesen  Gogenden  im 
Winter   gemaclit    worden   sind.    in    einer   Jidireszeit,   die    wold    f'iir    Treibholzer- 
funde  kanm  geeignet  ist. 

2  NARES,  Voyage  to  the  Polar  Sea.    Vol.  II,  p.  70;  vom  Verf.  gesperrt. 


1898-1902.   No. 24.]     DIE  TKKIBHOL/ER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         53 

wood    have    been    met    with,   particularly    in   the  bays   open  towards 
the  north-west". 

Endlich  wird  (p.  74)  erwahnt,  dass  Massen  von  Treibholzern  im 
Hilgard  Bay,  ,,open  to  the  north-west",  gefnnden  worden. 

Aus  alien  diesen  fibereinstimmenden  Angaben  konnen  wir  verstehen, 
dass  Treibholzer  nur  in  den  gegen  Nordwesten  offenen  Buchten  ge- 
funden  worden  sind.  Daraus  folgt  selbstverstandlich,  dass  die  Treibholzer 
an  diesen  Orten  rnit  einer  von  Nordwesten  gekommenen  Stromung 
abgelagert  sein  miissen.  Ob  nun  diese  von  Nordwesten  kommende  Treib- 
holzerstromung ihre  Enlstehung  in  einem  der  treihholzerfuhrenden  Fliisse 
Sibiriens  gehabt  oder  ihren  Ursprung  von  dem  grossen  Treibholzer- 
bassin  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  leitet,  davori  wissen  wir  selbstverstand- 
lich nichts  bestimmtes,  so  lange  die  Artzusammensetzung  des  Materials 
uns  unbekannt  ist.  Der  Verf.  mochte  doch  hier  unten  einige  Thatsachen 
hervorheben,  welche  uns  moglicherweise  eine  Andeutnng  auf  die  Treib- 
holzerquelle  geben  konnten. 

Nach  dem  was  t'ruher  in  dieser  Abhandlung  betont  worden  ist, 
scheint  es,  als  ob  die  Treibholzerstromung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses 
gleich  im  Anfange  ihrer  Bahn  eine  stark  ostliche  Ablenkung  erhielte, 
und  dass  die  Fortsetzung  derselben  langs  der  Eismeereskiiste  Nord- 
amerikas  und  den  in  unmittelbarer  Nahe  davon  nordlich  liegenden 
Inseln  und  Inselgruppen  zu  finden  ware.  Wir  erinnern  uns  ja  der  zahl- 
reichen  Treibholzeranhaufungen,  welche  langs  diesen  Kiisten  gefunden 
worden  sind  und  welche  nach  einstimmigen  Angaben  Derivate  von  den 
Treibholzervorraten  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  waren.  Infolgedessen  ist 
andersvvo  in  dieser  Arbeit  die  Auffassung  dargelegt  worden,  dass  die 
Treibholzerstromung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  rnit  den  Kiisten  des 
E  i  les  me  re-La  n  des  oder  mil  naheliegenden  Gebieten  nie  in  Kontakl 
kornmen  konnte. 

Gegen  diese  Ansicht  konnte  man  allerdings  die  Einwendung  niachen, 
dass  die  Treibholzerstromung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  nicht  not- 
wendigerweise  einheitlich  sein  muss,  sondern  dass  sie  sich  gleich 
im  Anfange  ihrer  Bahn  in  zwei  Verzweigungen  teilt,  von  welchen  die 
eine  den  eben  geschilderten  Verlauf,  die  andere  eine  nordostliche  Rich- 
lung  nehmen  wiirde.  Vorausgeselzt,  dass  es  eine  nordostliche  Verzwei- 
gung  von  dieser  Treibholzerstromung  giibe,  konnten  wir  uns  zwei  Alter- 
nativen  fiir  die  Strombahn  im  Eismeere  denken: 

1.  Grants  Land  liegt  unmittelbar  in  der  Strombahn. 

2.  Grants  Land    liegt   ausserhalb    der    Slrombahn    oder   wenigstens 
nicht  unmittelbar  innerhalb  derselben. 


54  FREDR1K  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Ein  Landkartenstudium  zeigt,  dass,  nach  Alternative  1,  die  nordwest- 
liche  und  die  nordliche  Kiiste  von  Grants  Land  friiher  als  dessen 
nordostliche,  an  RobesonsKanal  grenzende  Gebiet  mil  der  Treibholzer- 
stromung  in  Beriihrung  kommen  vviirde,  und  dass  sicli  also  Treib- 
produkte  in  erster  Hand  an  diese  Kiistenstrecken  hiillen  ablagern 
miissen.  Aber  hier  sind,  wie  fruher  betont,  Treibholzer  nicht  ange- 
troffen  worden  1. 

Nach  Alternative  2  muss  man  sich  die  Richtung  der  Stromung 
bedeutend  nordlicher  als  nach  Alternative  1  denken.  Stellen  vvir  uns 
nun  vor,  dass  die  Treibprodnkte  irn  RobesonsKanal  mit  dieser  gegen 
Nord-nord-osten  (von  der  Mundung  des  Mackenzie-Flusses  gerechnet) 
gehenden  Stromung  abgelagert  worden  sind,  uns  aber  gleichzeitig  erinnern, 
dass  dieselben  nur  in  den  Hafen  auf  dem  Grants  Land  gefunden 
wurden,  welche  wopen  towards  northwest"  waren,  und  dass  sic  also  nur 
mittels  einer  von  Nordwesten  kommenden  Stromung  eingefrachtet  werden 
konnten,  so  folgt  wohl  daraus,  dass  diese  Treibholzerstronumg  des 
Mackenzie-Flusses  nordlich  vom  Grants  Land  eine  so  machtige 
Biegung  siidwarts  machen  muss,  dass  die  nach  Siiden  gehende  Verzwei- 
gung  mit  der  nordwiirts  gehenden  einen  beinahe  rechten  Winkel  bilden 
vviirde,  eine  Annahme,  die  wohl  kaum  wahrscheinlich  ist. 

Schliesslich  muss  als  Beweis  fi'ir  die  Theorie  von  der  Inaktivit.1t  des 
Mackenzie-Flusses  an  diesem  Treibholzertransport  betont  werden, 
dass  wenn  die  Treibholzerstromung  dieses  Flusses  wirklicb  mit  dem 
Grants  Land  in  Kontakt  kiime,  so  wtirde  sie  wohl  auch  auf  solchen 
(iebieten  als  die  Westkiiste  vom  Kllesmere-Land  oder  die  westlichen 
Hiifen  vom  Jones  Sund  Treibholzer  abgelagert  haben,  was  jedoch 
nach  dieser  Untersuchung  nicht  der  Fall  gewesen  ist. 

Mit  dem  oben  gesagten  hat  der  Verf.  hervorheben  wollen,  dass  die 
von  Nordwesten  kommende  Stromung,  welche  ihre  Treibprodukte  auf  die 
Kiisten  um  den  Robesons  Kanal  ablagert,  eine  Stromung  ist,  die  mit 
dem  Mackenzie-Fluss  in  keiner  Kontinuitat  steht. —  Allerdings  Hesse 
es  sich  ja  denken,  dass  die  Treibholzer  des  Mackenzie-Flusses 
irgendwo  im  Polarmeere  mit  dieser  Stromung  in  Kontakt  kamen,  dass 
ihre  Produkte  in  dieselbe  eingezogen  und  durch  dieselbe  in  den  Robe- 
sons  Kanal  gefuhrt  warden.  Dann  diirfte  man  aber  eher  annehmen, 
dass  die  obenerwahnte  Stromung  eigene  Produkte  ablagert,  als  dass  sie 
dieselben  von  einer  anderen  leihen  sollte. 


1  Siehe  doch  p.  52,  An  in  1. 


1898-1902-   No.  24-]     DIE  TREIBHOL/ER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         55 

Wenn  nun  die  Treibholzer  in  den  Gebieten  urn  den  Robesons 
Kanal  nicht  aus  dem  Mackenzie-Flusse  stammen,  ist  es  wohl 
hochst  vvahrscheinlich,  dass  sie  si  bi  rise  hen  Ursprungs  sind.  Dens  el- 
ben  Ursprung  hat  auch  das  S  VERDRUp'sche  Treibholzer- 
material,  nach  dem  was  wir  friiher  zu  beweisen  versucht 
liaben.  Man  darf  wohl  auch  annehmen,  dass  die  oben- 
erwahnten  Trei  bholzeranhauf  ungen  (die  Treibholzer  im  Robe- 
sons  Kanal  und  im  Jones  Sund)  durch  dieselbe  Stromung 
zusammengebracht  sind,  die  in  einem  von  den  treib- 
holzerfiihrenden  Flilssen  Sibiriens  entstanden  ist.  Hier 
milssen  wir  die  Aufmerksamkeit  auf  untenstehende  Fliisse  lenken.  von 
vvelchen  man  wegen  ihrer  Stromstarke  und  ihrer  Grosse  annehmen  kann, 
dass  sie  an  diesern  Treibholzertransport  eine  aktive  Rolle  gespielt  haben, 
namlich  der  Ob,  der  Jenissei,  die  Lena,  die  Yana,  die  Indigirka, 
die  Go lu ma.  Welcher  von  diesen  eben  genannten  Fliissen  die  exakte 
Treibholzerquelle  gewesen  ist,  wagt  der  Verf.  nicht  mil  Sicherheit  zu 
entscheiden ;  da  man  aber  die  im  sibirischen  Meere  herrschenden  Stro- 
mungsverhaltnisse  ziemlich  wolil  kennt,  konnen  wir  ja  doch  wenigstens 
die  wahrscheinliche  Treibholzerquelle  angeben. 

Wahrscheinlich  hat  das  Ob-Jenissei-System  das  betreffende 
Treibholzermaterial  nicht  geliefert.  Die  Treibholzerstromung  desselben 
fliesst  ja  bekanntlich  in  das  Meer  zwischen  der  Ostkuste  Gronlands 
und  Spitz  her  gen  aus  und  kommt  wohl  daher  mil  der  Nordkiiste 
Gronlands  oder  mit  dem  nordamerikanischen  Archipel  nicht  in  Kontakt. 

A  priori  ist  es  wahrscheinlicher,  dass  der  Lena-Fluss  die  Treib- 
holzerquelle gewesen  ist.  Die  Artzusammensetzung  der  Urwaldsvegetation 
an  diesem  Flusse  entspricht  namlich  sehr  wohl  der  Artzusammensetzung 
des  betreffenden  TreibhSlzermaterials:  dieselben  Galtungen,  die  unter 
den  Treibholzern  identificiert  worden,  sind  auch  in  der  Baumvegetation 
des  Lena-Flusses  vorhanden.  Ferner  muss  man  beachten,  dass  die- 
selben Gattungen,  namlich  Larix  und  Picea,  vvelche  den  Treibholzern 
ihren  floristischen  Charakter  geben,  auch  am  Lena-Flusse  die  typischen 
Baume  sind. 

Nach  A.  K.  GAJANDER  x  besteht  die  Baumvegetation  aus  folgenden 
Gattungen  und  Arten,  die  der  Verf.  im  untenstehenden  Schema  zusam- 
mengestellt  hat: 


1  A.   K.  CAJANDER:     Studien    iiber    die    Vegetation    des    Urwaldes    am    Lena-Fluss, 
Helsingfors  1904.    (Acta  Societatis  Scientiarum  Fennicse.    Tom.  XXXII.    No.  3). 


56 


FREDRIK  INGVARSON.  [SEC.  AKCT.  EXP.  FKAM 


Nadelholzer. 


L  a  u  b  h  o  1  z  e  r. 


Larix  dahurica. 
Larix  sibirica. 
Picea  obovata. 
Finns  silvestris. 
Firms  cembra. 


Populus  tremula. 
Salix  caprea. 
Betula  verrucosa. 
Betula  odorata. 
Alnus  incana. 
Sorbus  aucuparia. 


Ein  anderer  Umstand,  der  dafiir  spricht,  dass  der  Lena-Fluss  die 
Quelle  unserer  Treibholzer  sein  konnte,  ist  dieser,  dass  die  Wasser- 
mengeii  des  Lena-  und  Yana-Flusses  zusammen  eine  nordwfuis 
gehende  Fliichenstromung  bilden,  die  westlich  von  den  Neusibirischen 
Inseln  ins  Nord-Polar-Bassin  ausfallt.  Hier  kniipft  sie  sich  an  eine 
nordwestlich  gehende  Polarstromung  an,  und  a  priori  ist  es  zu  ver- 
nuiten,  dass  die  Treibholzer  an  die  Nordkiiste  Gr  on  lands  und  an  die 
nordamerikanischen  Inselgruppen  durch  die  letztgenannte  Strdmung  trans- 
portiert  vverden. 

Es  scheint  doch,  als  ob  eine  Treibholzerstromung  mil  dieser  Route 
dein  Pol  nicht  so  nahe  komrnen  vvurde,  oder,  mil  anderen  Worten,  dass 
sie  eine  so  starke  nordliche  Richtung  nicht  bekommen  konnte,  dass  der 
Endpunkt  ihrer  Balm  die  genannten  Kiislengebiete  treffen  wiirde.  FRAM'S 
Treiben  im  Eise  withrend  der  Polarexpedition  NANSEN'S  l  1893—1800, 
und  das  Treiben  im  Eise  der  zu  der  1881  verungliickten  Jeane tie- 
Expedition  gehorenden  Gegenstande  beweisen  namlich  eben,  dass  treibende 
Gegenstiinde  an  obenerwahnter  Route  Gstlich  von  Gronland,  also  wie 
die  Treibholzer  der  Ob-Jenissei-Fliisse  ins  Meer  zwischen  Gron- 
land und  Spitz  her  gen  gefiihrt  werden  mussten. 

Anderseits  zeigt  die  von  NANSEN  abgesteckte  Routelinie  fiir  tins 
Treiben  im  Eise  der  zu  der  J ea n  e tt  e -Expedition  gehorenden  Gegen- 
stitnde,  dass  je  ostlicher  --  von  der  sibirischen  Seile  gerechnet  --  d.  h. 
je  naher  am  Behrings-Sund  man  sich  den  Ausgangspimkt  des  Treibens 
vorstellt,  desto  naher  am  Pol  vollzieht  sich  auch  das  Treiben.  Die 
Jeane tte- Expedition  verungliickte  namlich  an  einem  Ort,  der  osllich 
von  dem  Punkte  gelegen  ist,  wo  das  Treiben  FRAM'S  anfing.  NANSEN 
glaubt  auch,  dass  die  Treibungsbahn  der  genannten  Gegenstande  nor d- 
lich  von  FRAM'S  Bahn  und  parallel  mit  derselben  liegen  konnte. 


1  NANSEN,  F.    The  Norwegian  North  Polar  Expedition  1893-18%.    Vol.111,  p.  301. 


1898-1902.   No.  24.]     DIE  TREIBHOLZER  AUF  DEM  ELLESMERE-LAND.         57 

Aus  einem  Vergleiche  zwischen  der  respektiven  Lage  der  oben  er- 
wahnten  Bahnen  am  Pol  und  den  Ausgangspunkten  derselben  ergiebt 
es  sich,  dass  je  ostlicher  eine  Treibholzerstromung  an  der  sibirischen 
Kiistenstrecke  entsteht,  desto  nflher  am  Pol  wird  die  Fortsetzung  ihrer 
Bahn  verlaufen,  und  desto  grosser  wird  die  Wahrscheinlichkeit  dafiir, 
dass  die  Nordkiiste  Gronlands  und  der  arktische  Archipel  Nord- 
amerikas  die  Endverankerungsorte  der  Treibholzer  werden. 

Ostlich  von  der  Lena  liegen  die  grossen  Fliisse  Yana,  Indigirka 
und  Columa.  Die  Aktivitat  des  Yana-Flusses  kSnnte  im  Zusam- 
menhange  mit  der  des  Lena-Flusses  forteliminiert  werden,  weil,  wie 
es  scheint,  diese  beiden  Fliisse  ihre  Wassermengen  zu  einem  gemein- 
schaftlichen1,  in  der  Oberflache  des  Wassers  gehenden  Strom  mit 
nordlicher  Richtung  vereinen.  Von  weit  grosserer  Bedeutung  in  dieser 
Hinsicht  diirften  dagegen  die  Flusse  Indigirka  und  Columa  sein. 

Einer  von  diesen  Fliissen  hat  wahrscheinlich  das  Material  zu  den 
Treibholzern  geliefert,  welche  auf  dem  Grants  Land  (im  Robesons 
Kanal)  und  auf  dem  Ellesmere-Land  (im  Jones  Sund)  angetroffen 
worden  sind.  Unter  den  bedeutenderen  Fliissen  Sibiriens  haben  namlich 
die  eben  genannten  die  ostlichste  Lage;  ausserdem  haben  beide  machtige 
Wassermengen  und  fliessen  durch  eine  weite  Waldgegend.  Eine  Treib- 
holzerstromung, die  in  einem  von  diesen  Fliissen  entsteht,  diirfte  auf  ihrem 
Wege  im  Polarmeere  gerade  iiber  dem  Pol  oder  moglicherweise  ostlich 
von  demselben  passieren.  Nach  der  amerikanischen  Seite  zu  teilt  sie 
sich  wahrscheinlich  in  zwei  Verzweigungen,  von  welchen  die  eine  Treib- 
holzer in  den  Robesons  Kanal  hineinpresst,  wahrend  die  andere  Treib- 
holzer in  die  Buchten  und  Sunde  westlich  vom  Ellesmere-Land  fiihrt.- 

Es  muss  die  letztgenannte  Verzweigung  sein,  die  in  vorgeschicht- 
licher  Zeit  alle  die  zahlreichen  Treibholzer  abgesetzt,  welche,  wie  oben 
erwahnt,  die  siidlich  vom  Bays  Fjord,  an  einer  Hohe  von  mehreren 
hundert  Fuss  iiber  dem  Meere  gelegenen  Kiesterrassen  bekleiden.  In 
neuerer  Zeit  muss  diese  Verzweigung  auch  das  Treibholzermaterial  zusam- 
mengebracht  haben,  welches  von  der  SvERDRUp'schen  Expedition  in  den 
westlichen  Hafen  vom  Jones  Sund  angetroffen  worden  ist. 


1  NANSEN,  1.  c.  p.  301. 


Gedruckt  am  8.  Juni  1910. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  25. 


AD.  S.JENSEN: 

FISHES 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FRIDTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I    KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 

1910 


JLhe  collection  of  fishes  is  very  poor,  containing  only  11  species, 
allmost  all  of  which  are  among  the  most  ordinary  of  the  arctic  species. 
They  were  taken  in  shallow  water,  most  of  them  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  Jones  Sound,  a  few  in  Smith  Sound.  With  regard  to  the  special  po- 
sition of  the  localities,  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  maps  in  GUNNAR 
TSACHSEN'S  "Astronomical  and  Geodetic  Observations"  (Rep.  of  the  Sec. 
Norw.  Arct.  Exped.  in  the  "Fram",  1898—1902,  No.  5,  1907). 

The  species  are  as  follows: 

Gymnacanthus  tricuspis  REINH. 
Cottus  scorpius  L. 
Icelus  bicornis  REINH. 
Triglops  pingelii  REINH. 
Cyclopterus  spinosus  MULL. 
Liparis  liparis  L. 
Liparis  fabricii  KR. 
Lycodes  mucosus  RICH. 
Gymnelis  viridis  FABR. 
Gadus  saida  LEP. 
Salmo  sp. 

Besides,  in  an  appendix  is  given  a  list  of  a  few  and  common  fishes 
brought  home  by  the  Expedition  from  Danish  West  Greenland. 


AD.  S.  JENSEN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Gymnacanthus  tricuspis  REINHARDT. 

August  1,  1900.     Off  the  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord.    10  fathoms. 

1  specimen,  cT- 
Regarding  this  specimen  the  following  particulars  may  be  noted: 

Total  length  98     mm. 

Length  of  head  27     mm.,  or  27.6  per  cent  of  total  length 

„         -   pectoral  fin  27.5  mm.,    -   28.1      -       „  „         „ 

„        -  ventral  fin  21     mm.,    -   21.4  „      -      „         „ 

Pores  in  lateral  line  43 

Number  of  rays  in  D1.  11 

„        -    „     -  D«.  15 

„    •:.,  -A.  n 

-          -P.    19 


The  specimen  has  no  scabrous  bony  protuberances  on  the  head ; 
on  the  part  of  the  body  covered  by  the  pectoral  fins  there  are  a  few 
spiny  scales. 

Coitus  scorpius  L. 

August  16,  1898.     Reindeer   Point,  Foulke   Fjord.    10   fathoms     1    spe- 
cimen, young  (total  length  33.5  mm.). 
July  27,        1900.     The  winter  harbour,  Fosheim.    6  specimens. 


fi 

9  . 

Total  1 

.    .    .    271  r 

ength 

nm. 

11 

D3. 

16 

A. 

19 

P. 

18 

o  . 

...    235 

10 

16 

13 

18 

c 

...    229 

10 

16 

13 

17 

d 

Q    . 

...    224 

10 

16 

19 

18 

e. 

C3      t       * 

Q   . 

...    213 
205 

n 

11 

10 

16 
17 

13 
13 

17 

18 

August  3,  1900.     Fosheims    Peak  and   the  valley   on   the   west   side  of 
Havnefjord.     2 — 20    fathoms.     Small   stones.     1    spe- 
cimen. 
Total  length  105  mm.   D1.  9,  D2.  15,  A.  12,  P.  17. 


1898-1902.  No.  25.] 


FISHES. 


By  the  large  number  of  rays  in  the  fins,  these  specimens  show 
that  Lhey  belong  to  the  arctic  form,  var.  grcenlandica  LUTKEN,  as 
might  be  expected. 

With  regard  to  the  Greenland  sea-scorpion  ("Cottus  grcenlandicus 
C.  V.",  or  "0.  porosus  C.  V.")  C.  F.  LUTKEN,  in  his  little  treatise  on 
northern  sea-scorpions1,  has  declared  himself  of  the  same  opinion  as 
MALMGREN2  when  he  says  that  it  cannot  be  kept  specifically  distinct 
from  C,  scorpius,  but  that  on  the  other  hand  there  are  certain  features 
which  characterise  the  Greenland  sea-scorpion,  and  justify  its  being  set 
up  as  peculiar  variety,  var.  grcenlandica,  although  this  must  not  lead 
to  the  belief  that  the  variety  differs  from  the  typical  C.  scorpius  in 
clearly  defined  or  constant  characteristics.  In  another  place  in  the  same 
treatise  (p.  374),  however,  Liitken  makes  a  remark  which  indicates  that 
the  term  var.  grcenlandica  ought  rather  to  be  expanded  to  include  all 
the  high  arctic  sea-scorpions;  for  he  says:  "C.  scorpius  (s.  lat.)  must 
be  regarded  in  its  features  as  a  high  northern  animal  form,  which  attains 
its  greatest  size  and  most  characteristic  development  on  the  high  northern 
and  American  shores;  on  the  shores  of  temperate  Europe  it  is  a  dwarf 
form  in  comparison,  and  has  undergone  some  reduction  in  the  average 
number  of  rays  and  vertebras".  To  show  the  correctness  of  this  view  - 
which  indeed  MALMGREN  has  already  to  some  extent  maintained  -  -  I 
will  here  give,  in  a  tabular  form,  the  result  of  some  countings,  by 
MALMGREN,  LUTKEN  and  the  present  author: 


D». 

D2. 

A. 

P. 

Vertebrae 

East  Greenland 

(9)10 

16—17 

13-14 

(16)  17-18 

37-38 

West  Greenland 

(9)  10(11)1(14-15)  16-17 
(18-19) 

(11-12)  13—14 
(15) 

(15-16)  17 
(18-19) 

(36)  38-39 

Spitzbergen  .  .  . 

9-10(11) 

15—17 

(11)  12-14 

16-17 

Faroe  Isles  .  .  . 

9-10 

14-15 

11-12 

16  (17) 

32-33 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  number  of  rays  averages  a  little 
greater  in  the  arctic  (Greenland  and  Spitzbergen)  sea-scorpion  than  in 
that  of  the  temperate  (Faroe  Islands);  but  the  difference  is  more  distinct 
with  regard  to  the  number  of  vertebrae. 


1  CHB.  LUTKEN:  Korte  Bidrag   til  nordisk  Ichthyographi.    I.    Vidensk.  Meddel.  Na- 
turhist.  Foren.   Kjobenhavn,  1876,  p.  370. 

2  A.  J.  MALMHREN:  Om  Spetsbergens  Fiskfauna.    Ofvers.    K.  Vet.-Akad.  Forbandl., 
1864,  No.  10,  p.  495. 


AD.  S.  JENSEN. 


[SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Subsequently  DRESEL  returned  to  this  matter1.  After  having  exa- 
mined five  sea-scorpions  from  Godhavn  in  Greenland,  and  compared 
them  with  Coitus  scorpius,  he  finds  that  the  "subspecies"  grcenlan- 
dicus  differs  from  the  former,  besides  in  its  superior  size,  in  the  greater 
interobital  width,  and  in  the  greater  height  of  the  spine-rayed  dorsal  fin. 
We  will  now  look  more  closely  at  these  statements. 

According  to  Dresel,  the  interorbital  width  in  the  subspecies  green- 
landicus,  is  contained  1,  1V6,  or  l*/2  times  in  the  longitudinal  diameter 
of  the  eye,  whereas  the  width  in  Cottus  scorpius  seldom  exceeds  5/s  of 
the  longitudinal  diameter  of  the  eye.  I  have  investigated  this  circumstance 
and  found  the  following  proportions: 

Cottus  scorpius  from  Greenland. 


Total  length  Sex 


256  mm. 

252     „ 
240 


Proportion  of  interorbital 

width  to  longitudinal 

diameter  of  the  eye 

1  :  1 


230 
215 
193 

180 


cf 

9 

9 

cT 

9 

cf 

9 

cf 


Cottus  scorpius  from  Europe. 


1 

:  1 

4 

:5 

3 

:4 

1 

:  1 

1 

:  1 

3 

:4 

\ 

:  5 

Total  length 

Locality 

230  mm. 

The  Sound 

230     „ 

Upper  Baltic 

226    „ 

Faroe  Isles 

213    „ 

The  Sound 

212    „ 

North  Sea 

190    „ 

Upper  Baltic 

155    „ 

Faroe  Isles 

155 

North  Sea 

Proportion  of  interorbital 
width  to  longitudinal 
diameter  of  the  eye 


Sex 

9 
9 
9 
cT 
9 
cT 
cf 
cf 

It  will  thus  be   seen   that   on  an  average   the  Greenland  sea-scor- 
pion has  a  comparatively  little  greater  width  of  cranium  between  the  eyes 


4 

5 

5 

6 

5 

7 

7 

12 

9 

10 

3 

4 

•2 

3 

-2 

3 

1  H.  G.  DRESEL:    Notes    on    some    Greenland    Fishes.    Proceed.    U.  S.   Nat.   Mus., 
Vol.  7,  1884,  p.  250. 


1898-1902.  No.  25.] 


FISHES. 


than  the  European  sea-scorpion,  this  width  in  the  former  being  fre- 
quently equal  to  length  of  the  eye,  or  at  any  rate  not  less  than  3/4  of 
it,  whereas  the  width  in  the  latter  is  always  —  that  is  to  say,  in  the 
specimens  examined  —  less  than  the  length  of  the  eye,  at  the  most 
y/10  of  it,  and  may  be  as  little  as  7/i2>  or  not  much  more  than  half. 
There  is  not,  however,  any  distinct  boundary  that  separates  the  two 
forms. 

In  speaking  of  the  dorsal  fin,  Dresel  says  that  in  C.  grcenlandicus 
the  spine-rayed  dorsal  fin  was  comparatively  higher,  the  longest  ray 
being  l/5  or  V6  of  the  total  length  (measured  to  the  base  of  the  caudal 
fin),  while  in  C.  scorpius  it  is  no  more  than  J/7  or  ly/s  of  the  same 
length.  An  error  must  have  found  its  way  in  here;  for  if  we  look  at 
Dresel's  measurements  of  the  Greenland  specimens,  we  find  that  the 
longest  "dorsal  spine"  goes  respectively  6,  8,  6y2,  7,  and  53/4  times  into 
the  total  length  (to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin).  In  order  to  judge  of 
this  myself,  I  have  measured  the  same  specimens  as  before,  and  will 
here  give  the  result.  The  "total  length"  is  to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin. 


Total  length 

Sex 

C.  scorpius,  from  Greenland. 

• 

The  longest  ray 
in  DI 
is  contained  in  the 
"total  length" 

The  longest  ray 
in  D2 
is  contained  in  the 
"total  length" 

256  mm. 

cf 

5.6 

4.9 

252     „ 

9 

6.6 

5.7 

240     „ 

9 

7.6 

5.8 

OQC) 

M4       „ 

cf 

5.7 

5.4 

230     „ 

,    9 

7.2 

5.7 

215     „ 

cf 

5 

5.8 

193     „              9 

6.8 

5.8 

180     „ 

cf 

6.1 

5.1 

C.  scorpius,  from  Europe. 

L  ocality  : 

230  nlm. 

9 

6.5 

6.1 

The  Sound 

230     „ 

9 

7 

6.1 

Upper  Baltic 

226     „ 

9 

7 

5.8 

Faroe  Isles 

213     „ 

cf 

7.3 

6.1 

The  Sound 

212     „              9 

7.2 

5.2 

North  Sea 

190     „              cf 

6.2 

5.1 

Upper  Baltic 

155     „              cf 

7 

6.4 

Faroe  Isles 

155     „ 

cf 

6.3 

5.6 

North  Sea 

8 


AD.  S.  JENSEN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Thus  we  see  that  in  the  Greenland  form,  the  longest  ray  in  the  first 
dorsal  fin  goes  from  5  to  7.6  times  into  the  total  length  (to  the  base  of 
the  caudal  fin),  and  in  the  European  form  from  6.2  to  7.3  times ;  conse- 
quently no  variety,  and  still  less  a  species,  can  be  based  upon  this  pro- 
portion. Nor  does  the  height  of  the  second  dorsal  fin  constitute  a 
character  for  separation,  although  it  seems  on  an  average  to  be  a  little 
lower  in  the  European  than  in  the  Greenland  form,  the  longest  ray  in 
the  second  dorsal  fin  in  the  latter  being  of  a  length  that  is  contained 
from  4.9  to  5.8  times  in  the  total  length  (to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin), 
while  in  the  European  form  it  is  from  5.1  to  6.4  times. 

Taking  everything  into  consideration,  I  think  the  idea  of  separating 
the  arctic  sea-scorpion  from  that  of  the  temperate  regions  as  a  definite 
subspecies,  must  be  abandoned. 


July  22,  1900. 
„  26,  1900. 

„  31,  1900. 
Aug.  3,  1900. 
Sept.  19,  1900. 

20,  1900. 


July  12,  1901. 
Aug.  16,  1901. 


Icelus  bicornis  REINHARDT. 
Syn.  Icelus  hamatus  KROYER. 

The    winter    harbour,    Havnefjord,    about    20    fathoms. 
1  specimen,  cf,  61.5  mm. 

West   side    of  the    entrance    to    Stordalen,    Havnefjord, 
about  10  fath.    1  specimen,  cf»  77  mm. 

Fin  rays:    D1.  9,  D2.  20,  A.  16,  P.  18. 
Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord,  10—30  fath.    1  speci- 
men, cf,  64  mm. 

Fin  rays:    D1.  9,  D2.  20,  A.  16,  P.  18. 
Fosheims  Peak    and    the    valley    on   the    west   side   of 
Havnefjord,  from  2  to  20  fath.    Small  stones.    1    speci- 
men, cf,  58  mm. 

Off  Forvisningsdalen,  Gaasefjord,  2—20  fath.    Clay  with 
small  stones.    2  specimens: 

a.  9  91  mm.  D1.  9,  D2.  21,  A.  16,  P.  18, 

b.  cT  63    „      „   9,    „   20,    „  16,    „  18. 

The  interior  of  Gaasefjord,  3—20  fath.    2  specimens: 
a.  9  83  mm.  D1.  9,  D2.  21,  A.  14,  P.  18, 
b.c?57     „ 

Bay  at  Landsend.    1  specimen,  44  mm. 

The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord.    About 7  fath.   3  specimens: 

a.  rf  75.5  mm.  D1.  9,  D2.  19,  A.  16,  P.  18. 

b.  9  73   „ 

c.  cf  48.5 


1898-1902.  No.  25.]  FISHES.  9 

Aug.  30,  1901.    The  head  of  the  Gaasefjord.    8  metres,  small  stones  and 

clay  with  brown  algae.    1  specimen,  cf,  62  mm. 

Aug.    4,  1902.    Gaasefjord,  north  of  the  peninsula,  10—15  fath.    1  spe- 
cimen, 29  mm. 

Thus  the  collection  contains  14  specimens  in  all,  the  largest  male 
among  them  being  77mm.,  while  the  largest  female  as  usual  measures  rather 
more,  namely  91  mm.  In  6  of  them,  the  number  of  fin-rays  was  D1.  9, 
D2.  (1.9)  20-21,  A.  (14)  16,  P.  18. 

The  development  and  distribution  of  the  dermal  plates  is,  as  usual, 
subject  to  great  variation.  The  bony  shields  of  the  lateral  line,  for  in- 
stance, generally  extend  almost  to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin,  but  some- 
times only  to  the  end  of  the  second  dorsal  fin  or  even  less.  The  parie- 
tal protuberance  always  has  a  more  or  less  distinct  ledge  in  front. 

In  a  male,  61.5  mm.  in  length,  the  genital  papilla  is  of  the  fol- 
lowing particulars:  the  base  is  5mm.  long,  clavate,  expanding  distally, 
directed  a  little  obliquely  backwards ;  its  point  is  4.5  mm.  long,  awl- 
shaped,  and  forming  an  angle  with  the  base,  so  that  its  direction  is 
backwards,  almost  parallel  with  the  belly. 

Triglops  pingelii  REINHARDT. 

July   30,  1900.    The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Hnvnefjord.  1  specimen,  81mm. 
This  specimen  has  the  following  number  of  rays: 

D.  37  (DUO,  D2.27),  A.  26,  P.  20. 

In  specimens  from  West  Greenland,  the  following  number  of  rays 
occur  in  the  unpaired  fins: 

D.  34—36(0!.  11—13,  D2.23-25),  A.23— 25. 
In  specimens  from  East  Greenland  the  numbers  are  as  follows: 

D.  34-37  (D1. 11-12,  D2.23— 26),  A.  23-27. 
In  two  specimens  from  Iceland,  I  have  found  the  following  numbers: 

D.3MD1. 10,  D2.21),  A.  21; 
and  in  three  specimens  from  the  Faroe  Islands: 

D.  31-32  (D1. 10—11,  D2.  21),  A.  20-21. 

In  a  fourth  specimen  from  the  Faroe  Islands  there  were  even  only 
27  rays  in  the  dorsal  fins,  DU1  and  D2.16. 

Thus  the  number  of  rays  in  the  unpaired  fins  becomes  smaller  in 
southern  regions1. 

1  Triglops  murrayi,  described  by  GUNTHER  (Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  XV,  1888, 
p.  209)  from  the  north-west  of  Scotland,  of  which  the  small  number  of  rays  (19) 
in  the  second  dorsal  fin  was  said  to  be  characteristic,  is  therefore  scarcely  more 
than  a  southern  form  of  T.  pingelii. 


10  AD.  S.  JENSEN.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 

Cyclopterus  spinosus  0.  F.  MULLER. 

Sept.  20,  1900.  The  interior  of  the  Gaasefjord.  3—20  fath.  1  specimen. 
Although  this  specimen  is  not  very  small  (total  length  38  mm.),  the 
bony  protuberances  are  very  poorly  developed;  the  head  and  tail  are 
altogether  without  them,  and  there  are  only  about  8  to  be  seen  on  each 
side  of  the  body. 

July  8,  1901.    Renbugten.    1  young  specimen,  25  mm. 

Many  spines    have  already   appeared    on   the  head,   body  and  tail, 
the  larger  among  them  being  already  much  branched. 

July  19,  1902.    North  Devon.    3—7  fath.    1    young  specimen,  24.5  mm. 
Although  almost  as  long  as  the  preceding  specimen,  it  has  compara- 
tively few  and  less  developed  spines. 

Liparis  Hparis  LINNE. 

Aug.    16,  1898.    Reindeer  Point,  Foulke  Fjord.    10  fath.    1  specimen. 

May    25,  1899.    Rice  Strait.    1  specimen. 

Sept.  4-7,  1899.    Bay  in  2nd  fjord.    3  specimens. 

July    25,  1900.    The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.    10  fath.    2  specimens. 

July    30,  1900.    The  entrance  to  Stordalen,  Havnefjord.    1  specimen. 

July  31,  1900.  Round  Vestre  Sund,  Havnefjord.  10—30  fath.  1  spe- 
cimen. 

Aug.  3,  1900.  Fosheims  Peak  and  the  valley  on  the  west  side  of  Havne- 
fjord. 2 — 20  fath.  Small  stones.  4  specimens. 

June  28,  1901.    The  entrance  to  Hvalrosfjord.    1  specimen. 

June  29,  1901.    Off  the  camping-ground,  Jammerbugten.    1  specimen. 

July     9,  1901.    Renbugten.    2  specimens. 

July    11,  1901.    Bay  at  Landsend.    About  25  m.    2  specimens. 

July    11,  1901.    Landsend.    2  specimens. 

Aug.  30,  1901.  Gaasefjord,  8  m.  Clay  and  small  stones  with  brown 
algae.  1  specimen. 

July    11,  1902.    St.  Helena.    4  specimens. 

July    15,  1902.    Off  Havhestefjeld,  North  Devon.    1  specimen. 

July    17,  1902.    North  Devon.    2  specimens. 

July  17,  1902.  East  of  the  great  glacier,  North  Devon.  About  3  fath. 
1  specimen. 

July    19,  1902.    North  Devon.    1  specimen. 

July    19,  1902.    North  Devon.    3—7  fath.    1  specimen. 


1898-1902.  No.  25.] 


FISHES. 


11 


There  are  altogether  32  specimens,  and  thus  this  species  is  by  far 
the  most  abundantly  represented  in  the  collection,  presumably  because 
this  fish  attaches  itself  firmly  by  suction  to  objects  on  the  bottom,  and 
comes  up  with  them  in  the  dredge. 

The  following  are  the  dimensions  of  seven  selected  specimens,  and 
the  number  of  rays: 


The 

Locality 

Rice 
Strait 

Bay  in 
2nd  fjord 

Fosheims 
Peak 

Stor- 
dalen 

winter 
harbour 

Landsend 

St.  He- 
lena 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. 

mm. 

Total  length  

175 

139 

128 

128 

128 

101 

95 

Length  of  head   .... 

47 

36 

33 

31.5 

32 

24 

23 

Height  of  body  above 

middle    of   suctorial 

disc   

35.5 

30 

28 

26 

26 

•     20 

18 

Leii'gth  of  eye  

6.25 

5 

4.5 

4 

4.5 

3 

3 

Length  of  longest  rays 

in  pectoral  fin  .... 

35 

26 

25 

27 

24 

18 

19 

Rays  in  dorsal  fin    .  . 

39 

43 

41 

43 

40 

41 

39 

Rays  in  anal  fin    ... 

33 

34 

34 

35 

35 

34 

33 

Rays  in  caudal  fin   .  . 

11 

13 

11 

13 

13 

13 

13 

• 

The  above  measurements,  expressed  as  percentages  of  the  total 
length,  are  as  follows:  the  length  of  the  head  from  23.8  to  26.9  per 
cent,  the  height  of  the  body  above  the  middle  of  the  suctorial  disc 
from  19  to  21.9  per  cent,  the  length  of  the  eye  from  3  to  3.6  per  cent, 
and  the  length  of  the  longest  rays  in  the  pectoral  fin  from  17.8  to  21.1 
per  cent. 

These  figures  exceed  to  no  inconsiderable  extent  the  limits  that  I 
have  given  on  a  previous  occasion  for  L.  liparis1,  but  are  within  the 
values  that  have  since  been  found  by  N.  KNiPowiTscn2. 

The  number  of  rays  in  the  dorsal  fin  (39 — 43),  in  the  anal  fin  (33- 
35),  and  in  the  caudal  fin  (11 — 13),  keep  within  the  limits  of  the  numbers 
found  for  L.  liparis. 


1  AD.  S.  JENSEN  :  The  Fishes  of  East  Greenland,  p.  254.    Medd.  om  Grenland,    vol. 
XXIX,  1904. 

2  N.  KNIPOVVITSCH  :   Zur  Ichthyologie    des  Eismeeres,   p.  44.    Memoires  de  TAcade- 
mie  Imp.   des   Sciences  St.  Petersbourg,    Ser.    VIII,  Cl.  Phys.-Math.,    vol.  XVIII, 

-  No.  5,  1907. 


AD.  S.  JENSEN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Liparis  fabricii  KROYER. 

Aug.  4,  1902.    North  of  the  peninsula,  Gaasefjord.    10—15  fath.    1  spe- 
cimen. 

This  specimen  is  of  the  following  proportions,  given  in  percentages 
of  the  total  length  (111  mm.):  the  length  of  the  head  25.2  per  cent, 
the  height  of  the  body  above  the  middle  of  the  suctorial  disc  26.1  per 
cent,  the  length  of  the  eye  5  per  cent.,  and  the  length  of  the  longest 
rays  in  the  pectoral  fin  18.9  per  cent.  The  dorsal  fin  contains  48  rays, 
the  anal  fin  40,  and  the  caudal  fin  11. 

To  this  species  I  moreover  refer  a  few  small  specimens,    although 
in  much  doubt,  on  account  of  their  bad  state  of  preservation: 
Aug.     30,  1901.    Gaasefjord,    8  m.    Clay  and  small  stones  with    brown 

algae.    2  specimens. 
Aug.  3 — 4,  1902.    Gaasefjord.    1  specimen. 

Regarding  the  relation  between  Liparis  liparis  and  L.  fabricii,  see, 
in  addition  to  the  previously  mentioned  works  of  Knipowitsch  and  myself. 
R.  COLLETT'S  treatise  on  the  fishes  collected  during  the  cruises  of  the 
"Michael  Sars"  in  the  North  Atlantic1. 


Ly codes  mucosus  RICHARDSON. 

July  7,  1899.    Cape  Rutherford. 

Of  this  specimen  there  is  only  the  head  and  the  right  pectoral 
fin;  but  I  nevertheless  considered  that  it  could  be  referred  to  the  above 
species. 

I  has  been  quite  a  large  specimen,  probably  about  300  mm.  total 
length,  as  the  length  of  the  head  is  73  mm.,  reckoned  from  the  point 
of  the  snout  to  the  end  of  the  opercular  flap.  The  greatest  breadth  of 
the  head,  across  the  cheeks,  is  46  mm.,  the  length  of  the  snout  24  mm., 
the  length  of  the  eye  (iris  and  pupilla)  8.5  mm.  and  its  height  5.5  mm., 
the  smallest  breadth  of  the  frontal  bone  between  the  eyes  5  mm. 

The  teeth  are  as  described  by  RICHARDSON,  there  being  yet  only  a 
single  row  of  teeth  in  front  in  the  upper  jaw. 

The  length  of  the  pectoral  fin  is  34  mm.,  and  the  number  of  its 
rays  18. 


1  R.  COLLETT:    Report    on    Norwegian   Fishery   &    Marine   Investigations.    Vol.  II. 
1905,  No.  3,  pp.  94—96. 


1898-1902.  No.  25.] 


FISHES. 


13 


The  under  side  of  the  head  and  the  lips  are  a  yellowish  white. 
Above,  on  the  gill-cover,  there  is  a  light  patch,  and  a  narrow,  light 
hand  runs  right  across  the  occiput,  edged  on  both  sides  with  a  dark 
stripe.  The  lower  margin  of  the  pectoral  fin  is  light,  and  there  are 
some  light  patches  on  the  same  fin. 

The  species  was  first  described  by  Sir  JOHN  RICHARDSON,  from 
two  specimens  taken  on  the  Belcher  Expedition  in  Northumberland 
Sound1.  Another  specimen  was  subsequently  taken  by  the  Howgate 
Polar  Expedition  in  1877—78  in  Cumberland  Sound,  and  described  by 
TARLETON  H.  BEAN2. 


Gymnelis  viridis  FABRICIUS. 

July  12,  1901.    Bay  at  Landsend.    1  specimen,  142  mm. 
Aug.  30,  1901.    Gaasefjord,  8  m.    Clay  and  small  stones  with  bown  algae. 
1  specimen,  114  mm. 

The  first  of  these  specimens,  although  faded  in  colour,  still  shows 
9  light  transverse  bands  across  the  body  and  tail,  and  a  light  patch  by 
the  opercular  flap.  The  other  specimen  has  no  markings,  either  patches 
or  hands. 

The  most  important  measurements  in  these  specimens  are  as 
follows : 


mm. 

mm. 

Total  length  

142 

114 

Length  of  head  

24 

19.5 

Distance  between    point  of  snout  and 

27 

20.5 

Length  of  snout           «          

5 

3.5 

4 

3.5 

Distance  between  point    of  snout  and 

52 

43.5 

Greatest  height  of  body     

13.5 

10.5 

Length  of  pectoral  fin    ...... 

11.5 

9.5 

1  The   Last  of  the   Arctic  Voyages.   Vol.    II.    London,    1855.    P.   362,     PI.  XXVI. 

2  Bull.  Unit.  States  National  Museum.    No.  15,  p.  112.    Washington,  1879. 


14 


AD.  S.  JENSEN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Gad  us  saida  LEPEGHIN. 

Sept.  4—7,  1899.    Bay  in  2nd  fjord.  1  specimen,  224  mm. 

D1. 12,  D2. 17,  D3. 22,  A1. 17,  A2. 19,  P.  18,  V.  6. 

June       6,  1900.    The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.    1  specimen,  74  mm. 
July       19,  1900.    The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.  1  specimen,  235  mm. 

D1. 12,  D2. 18,  D3. 18,  A1. 20,  A2. 19,  P.  21,  V.  6. 
Aug.       9,  1900.    The  winter  harbour,  Havnefjord.    1  specimen,  90  mm. 

Salmo  sp. 

July      25,  1902.    North  Devon.    In  a  brook. 

A  young  specimen,  half  dried,  about  33  mm.  in  length. 


1898-1902.  No.  25.]  FISHES.  15 


Appendix. 

In  addition  to  the  already  mentioned  fishes,  the  Expedition  brought 
back  a  few  species  from  Danish  West  Greenland,  namely: 

Gymnacanthus  tricuspis  REINH. 

July  29,  1898.    Egedesminde.    1  specimen. 

This  specimen,  which  is  84  mm.  in  length,  has  the  following  num- 
ber of  rays:  019,  D2.  16,  A.  16,  P.  18. 

Coitus  scorpius  L. 

Aug.  4—5,  1898.    Upernivik.    4 — 13  fath.    4  specimens. 
The  size  of  these  specimens  is  48 — 105  mm.    The  largest    has  the 
following  number  of  rays:  D1.  10,  D2.  16,  A.  13,  P.  17. 

Gasterosteus  aculeatus  L. 

July  30,  1898.    Godhavn.    1  specimen. 

This  specimen,  which  is  74  mm.  in  length,  belongs  to  the  very 
mailed  form  in  which  the  scale-plates  extend  without  interruption  from 
the  head  to  the  base  of  the  caudal  fin  (G.  loricatus  REINHARDT  = 
G.  trachurus  Guv.). 

Cyclopterus  spinosus  MULL. 

Aug.  4—5,  1898.    Upernivik.    4—13  fath.    5  specimens. 
These  are  young  ones,    12 — 15  mm.  in    length.    By   the   aid    of   a 
magnifying-glass,  incipient  spines  may  be  seen. 

Stichseus  punctatus  FABRICIUS. 

Aug.  4,  1898.    Upernivik.    13  fath.    1  specimen. 

D.  50,  A.  37,  P.  16,  V.  4.    57-64  pores  in  the  lateral  line. 

Mallotus  villosus  MULL 
.    July  30,  1898.    Godhavn.    1  specimen,  <?. 


Printed  6.  December  1910. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  26. 


A.  APPELLOF: 


PYCNOGONIDEN 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF   THE    FRIOTJOF    NANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 

VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET  I  KRISTIAN1A 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 
•    1910 


Material  von  Pycnogoniden  der  zweiten  ,,Fram"-Expedition 
enthalt  nur  folgende  drei  Formen,  von  denen  fast  sammtliche  Exemplare 
an  der  Siidkilste  von  Konig  Oscars  Land  eingesammelt  sind. 

Nymphon  grossipes  FABR. 

Renbugten  (»/7  1901),  Sundet  (5/?  1901),  Rice  strait,  ,,der  Zeltplatz" 
2»/6  1901. 

Ich  bin  mit  MEINERT,  MOBIUS  und  anderen  einverstanden,  wenn  sie 
AT.  mixtum  og  grossipes  zu  einer  Art  vereinigen.  Ebenso  stelle  ich  mit 
MOBIUS  N.  glaciale  LILLJ.  hieher.  Denn  vvenn  auch  diese  Form  in  ihrer 
vollig  ausgepragten  Gestalt  einen  charakteristischen  Habitus  aufweist, 
so  ist  sie  doch,  was  ich  nach  einem  reichlichen  Materiale  aus  dem  Nord- 
meere  konstatieren  kann  und  wie  auch  MOBIUS  gefunden  hat,  durch 
deutliche  Ubergangsformen  mit  grossipes-mixtum  verbunden. 

MOBIUS  zieht  in  den  Variationskreis  der  genannten  drei  Formen 
auch  N.  gracile  (LEACH)  hinein.  Mit  diesem  Namen  sind  indessen  nach 
NORMAN  wenigstens  drei  verschiedene  Arten  belegt,  namlich  A7,  rubrum 
HODGE,  N.  brevirostre  HODGE  und  die  wirkliche  N.  gracile  (LEACH),  (mit 
welcher  N.  gallicum  HOEK  synomyn  ist).  N.  brevirostre  HODGE  ist  die- 
selbe  Art,  welche  SARS  als  N.  gracile  (LEACH)  bezeichnet  und  die  an  der 
Slid-  und  Westkiiste  Norwegens  ziemlich  haufig  in  der  Littoralregion 
zwischen  Hydroiden  etc.  vorkommt.  Wenigstens  soweit  es  diese  an  der 
norwegischen  Kiiste  vorkommende  ^gracile"'  betrifft,  die  aber  jetzt  brew- 
roslre  heissen  muss,  sprechen  mehrere  Umstande  gegen  die  Annahme, 
dass  sie  mit  grossipes  etc.  zusammengeschlagen  wird.  Erstens  die  ganz 
anderen  Grossenverhaltnisse  zwischen  dem  letzten  und  nachstletzten 
(zweiten  und  ersten)  Tarsalglied.  N.  brevirostre  ist  die  einzige  Nymphon- 
Art,  welche  ein  so  kurzes,  erstes  Tarsalglied  besitzt,  das  zweiten  ist 
iibrigens  mehr  gekriimmtals  bei  den  ubrigen  Nymphoniden.  Dies  hangt 
wiederum  rnit  der  Lebensweise  der  Art  zusammen,  indem  diese  die 
einzige  Nymphon-Arl  ist,  die  in  dem  dichten  Gewirr  von  Hydroiden  etc., 
welche  die  Laminarien-Siiele  bedecken,  herumklettert.  Der  Ban  der 


A.  APPELLOF.  [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Tarsalglieder  macht  sie  gerade  fiir  das  Umgreifen  der  Hydroidenzweige 
sehr  geeignet  und  einen  ahnlichen,  aber  noch  mehr  ausgepriigten  Bau 
finden  wir  auch  in  den  Tarsalgliedern  der  Phoxichilus,  Phoxichilidium 
u.  a.,  die  auch  eine  ahnliche  Lebensweise— oft  mit  N.  brevirostre  zusammen 
-  fuhren. —  Bei  einem  Individuum  von  brevirostre  habe  ich  eine  an  dem 
einen  Eitrager  befestigte  Masse  gefunden,  welche  aus  den  leeren,  noch 
zusarnmenhangenden  Eihiillen  besteht.  Dies  zeigt  widerum.  dass  die 
Form  geschlechtsreif  ist  und  also  kein  Jugendstadium  sein  kann.  Gegen 
die  Annahme,  dass  N.  brevirostre  nur  eine  Jugendform  von  mixtum  oder 
grossipes  ware,  spricht  auch  der  Umstand,  dass  die  letztgenannten  Formen 
niemals  mit  brevirostre  zusammen  gefunden  werden. 

Die  von  HANSEN  (1,  s.  649,  2,  s.  127)  erwahnte  N.  gracile  von  dani- 
schen  Kiisten  ist  nach  NORMAN  N.  rubrum  HODGE  und  also  nicht  mit 
der  norwegischen  brevirostre  identisch. 

Nymphon  brevitarse  KR. 

Renbugten  («/7  1901),  1  Ind. 

Ebenso  wenig  wie  MEINERT  kann  ich  mit  WILSON  einverstanden 
sein,  wenn  er  diese  Art  mit  grossipes-mixtum  vereinigt  und  in  ihr  nur 
ein  Jugendstadium  der  letztgenannten  sieht.  Wenn  auch  sonstige  Charak- 
tere  (wie  Langenverhaltnisse  der  Tarsalglieder,  Liinge  des  Halses  etc.) 
mit  dem  Wachstum  Veranderungen  unterliegen,  so  kennt  man  doch, 
soviel  ich  weiss,  kein  Beispiel  einer  Veriinderung  der  Form  des  Augen- 
hiigels.  Und  diese  ist  bei  den  zwei  Formen  vollig  verschieden,  bei  grossipes- 
mixtum  spitz,  bei  brevitarse  deutlich  abgerundet  mit  schwach  hervor- 
tretenden  Seitenteilen. 


Nymphon  (Chsetonymphon)  spinosum  SARS  (nicht  GOODSIR) 

f.  hirtipes  BELL. 

Die  Art  liegt  in  mehreren  Exemplaren  vor.  Gaasefjord  -%  1900, 
3-20  Faden,  Lehm  und  kleine  Steine,  30/v  1900,  Wipterhafen  24/7  1900. 
ca.  45  Faden,  Forvisningsdalen  la/,,  1900,  2—20  Faden,  Lehm  und 
kleine  Steine,  Renbugten  8/7  1901. 

Mit  MEINERT  und  MOBIUS  sehe  ich  in  den  beiden  Formen  spinosum 
und  hirtipes  nur  Varietuten  einer  Art,  wo  die  eine,  spinosum,  nur  eine 
boreale,  die  andere,  hirtipes,  nur  eine  arktische  Verbreitung  hat.  t)ie 
Art  muss  —  weil  sie  ihre  Siidgrenze  an  den  britischen  Inseln  hat  —  von 
urspriinglich  arktischer  Abstarnnung  sein.  Unter  dieser  Voraussetzung 


1898-1902.  No.  26.]  PYCNOGON1DEN.  5 

miissen  wir  auch  annehmen.dass  sie  wuhrend  der  Glacialzeit  in  dern  ganzen 
Nordmeere  verbreitet  war  und  sich  nach  Aufhoren  dieser  Periode  den 
veriinderten  Verhaltnissen  in  dem  borealen  Nordmeergebiete  anpasste. 
Diese  Anpassung  ging  doch  nur  unter  gleichzeitig  eintretenden  kleinen 
Verftnderungen  im  Korperbau  vor  sich,  wodurch  die  Form  spinosum 
ansgebildet  vvurde.  Ahnliche  Beispiele  einer  Zweiteilung  ursprimglich 
arktischer  Formen  liefert  eine  ganze  Reihe  von  Formen  anderer  Tier- 
gruppen  des  Nordmeeres. 

Ein  Merkmal  unter  anderen,  das  von  SARS  als  ein  Unterschied 
zwischen  hirtipes  und  spinosum  angefiihrt,  ist  die  Anzahl  der  warzen- 
formigen  Erhebungen  auf  dem  inneren  (unteren)  Rand  des  vierlen  Gliedes 
der  Gangbeine  bei  den  Mannchen1.  SARS  giebt  an,  dass  hirtipes  etwa 
14,  spinosum  etwa  4 — 5  solche  Erhebungen  hat.  Nach  dem  ziemlich 
reichhaltigen  Materiale  aus  dem  Nordmeere  (besonders  von  der  Form 
hirtipes),  die  ich  untersucht  habe,  habe  ich  feststelien  konnen,  dass  fast 
jede  Anzahl  zwischen  14  und  5  vertreten  ist  und  dass  der  Unterschied 
also  nicht  konstant  ist.  Was  man  behaupten  kann,  ist,  dass  die  Form 
in  arktischen  Gegenden  eine  bestimmte  Tendenz  hat,  eine  grossere  An- 
zahl von  Miindungsfelder  der  mannlichen  Kittdriisen  auszubilden  als  im 
borealen,  dass  aber,  wie  die  vielen  Zwischenformen  zeigen,  dies  Merk- 
mal noch  keine  konstante  geworden  ist.  Dasselbe  gilt  den  tibrigen 
von  SARS  hervorgehobenen  Unterscheidungs-Merkmale  (Haarbekleidung, 
Bau  der  Gangbeine  und  Scheerenkiefer,  Form  des  Augenhiigels):  es 
zeigt  sich  eine  Neigung  der  Individuen  in  den  arktischen  Gegenden  nach 
einer  bestimmten  Richtung  bin  zu  variiren,  in  den  borealen  nach  einer 
anderen  bin,  ohne  dass  doch  die  Divergenzen  so  weit  ausgebildet  sind, 
dass  sie  zur  Aufstellung  zweier  Arten  berechtigten. 


1  An  der  Spitze  dieser  Erhebungen  miinden  die  Kittdriisen,  die  bekanntlich  nur 
den  Mannchen  zukommen.  Das  Miindungsfeld  ist  kreisrund,  diinner  als  die 
iibrige  Chitinbedeckung  und  von  einer  in  dem  Hohlraum  der  Beine  vorspringenden 
Chitinleiste  umsaumt;  das  Feld  hebt  sich  hierdurch  scliarf  von  der  Umgebung 
ab.  Uiese  kreisrunde  Chitinplatte  ist  mit  zahlreichen,  ausserst  'feinen  Poren, 
welche  von  den  Ausfuhrungsgangen  der  Driise  durchsetzt  werden,  versehen ;  eine 
gemeinsame,  aussere  Miindung  giebt  es  also  nicht.  —  Ich  finde  es  zweckmassig 
diese  Bemerkungen  hinzuzufugen,  weil,  soweit  ich  finden  kann,  das  Vorhandensein 
dieser  Mundungen  bei  diesen  und  nahestehenden  Arten  nicht  erwahnt  ist.  Bei 
einer  Anzahl  von  Nymphon- Arten  findet  man  sie  nicht  wieder. 


6  A.  APPELLOF. [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FKAM 

Die  Angaben  iiber  Pycnogoniden  aus  den  hocharktischen  Gegenden 
westlich  von  Gronland  (d.  h.  von  der  neoarktischen  Region  *)  sind  spiirlich, 
und  iiber  die  Circumpolaritat  lasst  sich  fur  die  grosse  Mehrzahl  der 
Arten  nichts  sicheres  sagen.  Aus  dem  ostlichen  Teil  des  neoarktischen 
Gebietes  kennt  man  eine  bedeutend  grossere  Anzahl  als  aus  dem  west- 
lichen,  namlich  : 

Nymphon  grossipes  (FABR.)  (MEINERT,  RODGER,  ORTMANN). 

„        brevitarse  KR.  (KROYER,  MEINERT,  RODGER). 

„        longitarse  KR.  (MEINERT,  KROYER,  ORTMANN,  RODGER). 

„        elegans  HANSEN  (MEINERT,  RODGER). 

„        stromi  KR.  forma  gracilipes  HELLER  (MEINERT,  MiERs).2 

„        hirtipes  BELL  (MEINERT,  MIERS). 

„        robustum  BELL  (MEINERT,  RODGER). 

„        macronyx  (G.  0.  SARS)  (RODGER). 

„        sluiteri  HOEK  (RODGER). 

„        microrhynchum  G.  0.  SARS  (RODGER). 

„        serratuin  G.  0.  SARS  (ORTMANN). 
Cordylochele  inalleolata  G.  0.  SARS  (MEINERT). 
Pseudopallene  circularis  (Gooosm)  (MEINERT,  RODGER,  ORTMANN). 

„        spinipes  (KR.)  (KROYER). 
Phoxichilidium  femoratwm  (RATHKE)  (KROYER).3 
Eurycide  hinpida  (KR.)  (RODGER). 
Colossendeis  proboscidea  (SAB.)  (MEINERT). 

RODGER  erwahnt  ausser  dem  in  der  Ausbeute  seiner  Reise  noch  andere 
Arten,  die  er  als  neu  bezeichnet,  sie  sind  aber  meines  Wissens  spiiter 
nicht  beschrieben.  Ausser  Acht  habe  ich  auch  einige  von  der  Davis- 
strasse  erwahnten  Formen  gelassen,  welche  als  atlantische  zu  betrachten 
sind  und  die  mil  dem  auch  bis  zu  diesen  nordlichen  Gegenden  vordringenden 
atlantischen  Wasser  nach  Norden  gewandert  sind;  das  sind  Arten  also, 
die  atlantischen  und  nicht  arktischen  Ursprunges  sind. 


1  Ich  brauche  wohl  kuum   darauf  aufmerksam   zu  machen,  dass    ich   dem    Begriff 
,,neoarktisch"  betreffs  des  Meeres    nicht    denselben  Umfang  gebe,  wie  es   in  der 
Litteratur    iiber    die    zoogeographischen    Regionen    der    Festlande    der  Fall  ist. 
Unter  neoarktisch  verstehe  ich  nur  das  Meeresgebiet  nordlich   vom  N.  Amerika. 

2  MIERS  sagt    nichts  dariiber,  ob  die    von  ihm   erwahnlen  Exemplare    von    Grant's 
Land  der  Form  gracilipes  zugehorig  ist. 

3  Es  scheint  mir  doch  unsicher,  ob  man  aus  dem    Vorkommen  dieser  Art    an    der 
westgronlandischen  Kiiste  auf  ihre  arktische  Abstamnung  schliessen  darf. 


1898-1902.  No.  26.]  PYCNOGONIDEN. 


Der  vvestliche  Teil  ties  neoarktischen  Gebietes  xwischen  Baffins  Bucht 
und  Bebringsstrasse  ist  in  /oologischer  Hinsicht  bekanntlich  so  wenig 
untersucht,  dass  man  kein  Urteil  iiber  die  Fauna  uberhaupt  aussprechen 
kann.  Von  MURDOCH  sind  nur  zwei  Arten  aus  dem  westlichen  Teil  er- 
wahnt,  namlich  Nymphon  grossipes  und  N.  longitarse.  Dass  die  Pyc- 
nogoniden-Fauna  damit  erledigt  ware,  ist  kein  Grund  anzunehmen. 


Verzeichnis  der  citierten  Litteratur. 


HANSEN,  H.  J.    Fortegnelse  over  de  hid  til  i  de  danske  have  fundne  pycnogonider  eller 
sospindler.  -  Nalurhist  Tidsskrift.  3  R.  14.  1884. 
S0spindler.   —  Zoologia  danica,  Bd.  3.   1890. 

KROYER,  H.  Bidrag  til  kundskab  om  Pycnogoniderne  eller  sespindlerne.  —  Natur- 
hist.  Tidsskrift  2.  R.  1.  Bd.  1844-45. 

MEINERT,  Fr.     Pycnogonida.  —  Den  danske  Ingolf-Expedition.  3  Bd.  1898. 

MIERS,  E.  J.  Report  on  the  Crustacea,  collected  by  naturalists  of  the  arctic  expedi- 
tion in  1875-1876.  -  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  4.  Ser.  20.  1877. 

MURDOCH,  J.  Marine  Invertebrates.  —  Rep.  internal.  Polar  Exp.  Point  Barrow,  Alaska 
p.  151.  Washington  1885. 

MOBIUS.  K.    Arktische  und  subarktische  Pantopoden.  —  Fauna  arctica  Bd.  2.  1902. 

NORMAN,  A.  M.  The  Podosomata  (Pycnogonida)  of  the  temperate  atlantic  and  arctic 
oceans.  -  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  Vol.  30.  Zool.  No.  198.  1908. 

ORTMANN,  A.  E.  Crustacea  and  pycnogonida,  collected  during  the  Princeton  Expedi- 
tion to  North  Greenland.  —  Proc.  acad.  nat.  sc.  Philadelphia.  Vol.  53.  1901. 

RODGER,  A.  Preliminary  account  of  natural  history  collections,  made  on  a  voyage  to 
the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  and  Davis  strait.  Communicated  by  Prof. 
D'ARCvW.  THOMPSON  -  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh.  Vol.  20.  1892-1895. 

SARS,  G.  0.  Pycnogonidea.  —  Den  norske  Nordhavsexpedition  1876—78.  Christiania 
1891. 

WILSON,  E.  B.  Synopsis  of  the  pycnogonida  of  New  England.  —  Transact.  Conn. 
Acad.  Vol.  5.  New  Haven  1878-82. 

Museum,  Bergen  Okt.  1910. 


Gedrurkt  am  23  November  1910. 


REPORT  OF  THE  SECOND  NORWEGIAN  ARCTIC  EXPEDITION 
IN  THE  "FRAM"   1898—1902.     No.  27. 


H.  H.  GRAN: 


PHYTOPLANKTON 


AT    THE    EXPENSE    OF    THE    FR1DTJOF    IS'ANSEN    FUND 
FOR    THE    ADVANCEMENT    OF    SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED    BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET   I    KRISTIANIA 

(THE  SOCIETY  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  OF  KRISTIANIA) 


co- 


KRISTIANIA 

PRINTED  BY  A.  W.  BR0GGER 
1911 


'ie  zweite  norwegische  arktische  Expedition  hat  nur  eine  ganz 
geringe  Zahl  von  Planktonfangen  gemacht.  16  kleine  Proben  wurden 
mir  zur  Bearbeitung  uberliefert,  die  zuerst  vom  Herrn  Professor  Dr 
G.  0.  SARS  fur  die  Untersuchung  der  Copepoden  verwendet  worden 
waren. 

Alle  Proben  wurden  mit  Netzen  aus  MuIIergaze  No.  20  geschopft, 
und  da  einige  ein  dichtes  Diatomeenplankton  enthalten,  sind  ausserdem 
teilweise  Arten  zuruckgehalten  worden,  die  sonst  durch  die  Maschen  der 
Netze  durchschliipfen. 

Leider  stammen  alle  diese  Proben  von  der  Ueberreise  her,  und  nur 
eine  einzige  von  einer  Stelle  innerhalb  der  arktischen  Zone,  namlich  von 
77°  31'  N.  Br.,  73°  8'  W.  L.  Sie  wurde  am  15.  August  1898  geschopft, 
4  Uhr  vormittags,  wahrend  die  Temperatur  des  Wassers  an  der  Meeres- 
oberflache  2°.3  C.  war. 

Die  Fange  wahrend  der  Ueberfahrt  konnen  kein  grosseres  Interesse 
beanspruchen,  da  wir  das  Phytoplankton  dieses  Meeresgebietes,  des 
Atlantischen  Ozeans  sudlich  von  Island,  namentlich  aus  den  Unter- 
suchungen  OSTENFELDS  (1898,  1899,  1900)  ganz  gut  kennen;  die  Ergeb- 
nisse  der  vorliegenden  Untersuchung  geben  jedoch  eine  erweiterte  Kenntnis 
der  Verbreitung  der  verschienenen  Arten,  die  meistens  mit  denjenigen 
identisch  sind,  die  OSTENFELD  aus  diesem  Gebiete  schon  angegeben  hat. 

Darum  gebe  ich  hier  vollstandige  Listen  der  in  jeder  Probe  gefun- 
denen  Arten;  um  die  relative  Haufigkeit  anzugeben,  werde  ich  die  von 
CLEVE  eingefiihrten  Bezeichnungen  benutzen  (cc  sehr  zahlreich,  c  hauh'g, 
+  nicht  selten,  r  selten). 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


1.    57° 31'  N.  Br.,  1°29'  0.  L.    29.  Juni  1898. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  c 
macroceros  (EHR.)  c 
longipes  BAIL.  + 
furca  (£HR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 

Peridinium  depressum  BAIL,  c 
parallelum  BROCH.  r 
diver  gens  EHR.  c 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  r 
Bacillariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  concinnus  W.  SM.  + 
Rliizosolenia  hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  (HENSEN).  r 
Silicoffagellata : 

Dictyocha  fibula  EHR.  r 

Allgemeiner    Charakter:    Nordseeplankton,    nicht    besonders    ausge- 
priigt. 


2.    59°45'N.  Br.,  2° 42'  W.  Lg.     1.  Juli   1898,   westlich  von  Fair   Hill, 
2  Uhr  nachmittags.     Oberflachentemperatur  ll°.l. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  c 
longipes  BAIL.  + 
furca  (EHR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  c- 

Peridinium  depressum  BAIL,  r 
parallelum  BROCH.  c 
divergens  EHR.  + 
ovatum  POUCH.  + 
pallidum  OSTENF.  r 

JSacillariaceae : 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  + 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  r 
Chaetoceras  decipiens  CL.  r 
debile  CL.  r 


1898-1902.  No.  27.1  PHYTOPLANKTON. 


Allgemeiner  Charakter:  Boreal  ozeanisch  mil  schwacher  Beimischung 
von  Kiisteni'ormen  (Ch.  debile).  Die  Hauptmasse  des  Fanges  bestand 
aus  Cyttarocylis  denticulata  (EHR.). 

3.    69°  17'  N.  Br.,  3°  46'  W.  Lg.    2.  Juli  1898,  1  Uhr  vormittags. 

Temperatur  10°.6. 

Peridiniales  : 

Ceratium  tripos  (0,  F.  MULL.)  cc 
macroceros  (£HR.  + 
intermedium  (JoRG.)  cc 
longipes  BAIL,  r 
furca  (EnR.)  cc 
fusus  (EHR.)  cc 

Peridinium  depressum  BAIL.  + 
parallelum  BROCH.  c 
divergens  EHR.  cc 
penfagonum  GRAN  r 
ovatum  POUCH.  + 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  + 
Bacillariacetie : 

Coscinodiscus  concinnus  W.  SM.  r 

centralis  EHR.  r 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  r 
Euodia  cuneiformis  (WALLICH)  r 
Asteromphalus  heptactis  RALFS  r 
Dactyliosolen  antarcticus  CASTR.  + 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTVV.  + 
Chaetoceras  atlanticum  CL.  r 
boreale  BAIL,  r 
convolutum  CASTR.  r 
decipiens  CL.  + 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 
SiHcoSagell&ta, : 

Distephanus  speculum  (£HR.).  27  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter:  Fast  rein  atlantisch,  Plankton  des  Golf- 
stromes  mit  schwacher  Beim'ischung  ans  dem  nordeuroptiischen  Kiisten- 
meere  (C.  macroceros). 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


4.    60°  52'  N.  Br.,  5°  13'  W.  Lg.    2.  Juli  1898,  12  Uhr  mittags. 

Temperatur  10°.6. 
Peridiniales : 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  cc 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL,  cc 
arcticum  (£HR.)  4- 
Hneatum  (EHR.)  r 
furca  (EHR.)  c 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 
Peridinium  depressum  BAIL,  c 

parallelum  BROCH  cc 
diver  gens  EHR.  c 
pentagonum  GRAN  + 
ovatum  POUCH,  c 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  + 
Bacillariaceae : 

Coscinodiscus  centrolis  EHR.  + 

subbulliens  JORG.  c 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHT w.  r 
Chaetoceras  boreale  BAIL,  r 
densum  CL.  + 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  r        20  Arten. 
Allgemeiner  Charakter.     Trotzdem   die   Temperatur  nicht   gesunken 
1st,    zeigt   dieser   Fang  einen  ausgesprochen   mehr  nordlichen  Charakter 
(C.  arcticum,  Dominieren  von  C.  longipes  und  P.  parallelum). 
Keine  Kiistenformen  mehr. 


5.    60° 32'  N.  Br.,  8° 45'  W.  Lg.    3.  Juli  1898,  12 Va  Uhr  Morgens. 

Temperatur  9°.7. 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  c 
intermedium  JORG.  4- 
longipes  BAIL,  c 
arcticum  EHR.  + 

platycorne  v.  DAD.  f.  compressa  (GRAN)  r 
furca  (EHR.)  c 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 


1898-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  7 

Peridinium  depressum  BAIL,  c 
parallelum  BROGH  c 
divergens  EHR.  c 
pentagonum  GRAN  4- 
ovatum  POUCH,  r 
pallidum  OSTENF.  + 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  r 
Bacillariaceae: 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  + 

subbulliens  JORG.  + 
Thalassiosira  subtilis  OSTENF.  r 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  r 

hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  HENSEN  r 
Chcetoceras  atlanticum  GL.  r 

criophilum  CASTR.  + 
convolutum  GASTR.  r 
boreale  BAIL.  f.  solitaria  CL.  4- 
Chaetoceras  decipiens  GL.  r 

debile  CL.  + 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  GL.  &  GRUN.  27  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  fortwahrend  nordlich  (C.  longipes,  arcticum, 

Coscinodiscus-  und  Chaetoceras- Arten),  doch  mit  deutlicher  Beimischung 

von  rein   atlantischen   Arten   sildlichen   Ursprungs   (C.  platycorne   com- 

pressmn,    Thalassiosira  subtilis).     Kiistenformen   sparlich  (Ch.  debile). 

7.     60°  20'  N.  Br.,  12°  15'  W.  Lg.    4.  Juli  1898. 

Peridiniales : 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  + 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL,  r 
lineatum  EHR.  c 
furca  (EHR.)  c 
fusus  (EHR.)  cc 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  r 
depressum  BAIL,  c 
divergens  EHR.  + 
conicum  (GRAN)  + 
ovatum  POUCH,  c 


8 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARGT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Peridinium  pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
pellucidum  (BERGH)  c 
Steinii  JORG.  + 
Granii  OSTENF.  r 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  (BERGH)  -f 
Pyrophacus  horologium  r 
Gonyaulax  polygramma  r 

spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 
Podolampas  palmipes  STEIN  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c. 

rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  + 
acuminatn  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  4- 
Prorocentrum  dentatum  STEIN  r 
Bacillariaceae : 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  + 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  c 
Thfilassiosira  subtilis  (OSTENF.)  c 
Asteromphalus  heptadis  RALFS  + 
Euodia  cuneiformis  (WAI.LICH)  r 
Dactyliosolen  antarcticus  CASTR.  + 

tenuis  CL.  -f 

Corethron  criophilum  CASTR.  r 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  c 

Shrubsolei  CL.  + 
Bacteriastrwn  varians  LAUDER  r 
Chaetoceras  boreale  BAIL,  c 
atlanticum  CL.  c 
criophilum  CASTR.  + 
convolutum  CASTR.  + 
peruvianum  BRIGHTW.  r 
polygonum  SCHUTT  + 
decipiens  CL.  c 
Schilttii  CL.  cc 
laciniosum  SCHUTT  r 
Nitzschia  seriata  CL.  -f- 

delicaiissima  CL.  + 
Silicoflagellata, : 

Distephanus  speculum  (EHR.)  + 
Coccolithophorida : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH)  + 


48  Arten. 


1893-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  9 

Allgemeiner  Charakler:  Rein  atlantisches  Plankton  mil  einer 
charakteristischen  massenhaften  Anhaufung  von  kleinen,  /art  gebauten 
Diatomeen,  die  ich  als  degenerierte  Ktistenformen  auffasse,  hier  beson- 
ders  Ch.  Schuttii  (vgl.  p.  19).  Der  Reichtum  an  kleinen  Peridineen  ist 
wahrscheinlich  durch  die  Zustopfung  des  Netzes  zu  erklaren. 


9.    6i°42'N.  Br.,  17°  12'  \V.  Lg.    7.  Juli  1898,  mittags. 
Temperatur  10°.7. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  c 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
lineatum  EHR.  r 
furca  (EHR.)  c 
fusus  (EHR.)  cc 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  r 
depressum  BAIL.  + 
parallelum  BROCH  + 
divergens  EHR.  + 
ovcttum  POUCH,  r 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
Cerasus  PAULS,  r 
Steinii  JORG.  r 

DiplopsaUs  lenticula  BERGH  + 
Gonyaulax  polygrarnma  STEIN  r 

spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c 

homunculus  EHR.  r 


Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  r 
Coscinosira  Oeslrupi  OSTENF.  + 
Thalassiosira  subtilis  (OSTENF.)  + 
decipiens  (GRUN.)  i- 
Asteromphalus  heptactis  RALFS.  + 
Dactyliosolen  antardicus  GASTR.  + 

tennis  GL.  r 

Corethron  criophilum  GASTR.  r 
Hhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  + 

Shrub  solei  CL.  c 
—  alata  BRIGHTW.  r 


10 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  ERAM 


Bacteriastrum  delicatulum  CL.  r 

Cerataulina  Bergonii  H.  PERAG.  r 

Chaeloceras  atlanticum  CL.  r 
boreale  BAIL,  r 
criophilum  CASTR.  + 
polygonum  SCHUTT  r 
decipiens  CL.  r 
Schutiii  CL.  cc 

Tlialassiothrix  longissima  GL.  &  GRUN.  + 

Nitzschia  seriata  GL.  + 

delicatissima  GL.  cc 
Silicofiagellata  : 

Didyocha  fibula  EHR.  r 
Coccolithophorida, : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH)  r 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  die  vorige  Probe. 


42  Arten. 


10.    61°  28'  N.  Br.,  19°55'-W.Lg.    8.  Juli  1898,  1  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperatur  11°.2. 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  + 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL.  + 
lineatum  (£HR.)  + 
furca  (EnR.)  c 
fusus  (£HR.)  cc 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANH(>FF.  r 
depressum  BAIL,  c 
parallelum  BROCH.  4- 
divergens  EHR.  + 
conicum  (GRAN)  4- 
Thorianum  PAULS,  r 
ovatum  POUCH,  r 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
pellucidum  (BERGH)  + 
Steinii  JC")RG.  + 
Cerasus  PAULS.  + 
Granii  OSTENF.  r 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  c 


1898-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  11 

Gonyaulax  polygramma  STEIN  4- 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  4- 

homunculus  EHR.  r 

rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  r 
Prorocentrum  dentatum  STEIN  r 

Bacillariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  r 

marginatus  EHR.  r 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  4- 
Thalassiosira  subtilis  (OSTENF.)  + 
decipiens  (GRUN.)  r 
Asteromphalus  heptactis  RALFS     c 
Dactyliosolen  antarcticus  CASTR.  c 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHT,  c 
Shrubsolei  GLEVE  + 
alata  BRIGHTW.  r 
Cerataulina  Bergonii  H.  PERAG.  r 
Chaetoceras  criophilum  CASTR.  + 
polygonum  SCHUTT  r 
Schuttii  CL.  c 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 
Nitzschia  delicatissima  CL.  cc 
Coccolithophorida, : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH) 

Pontosphaera  Huxleyi  LOHM.  42  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  die  Proben  7  und  9. 

11.    61°  39'  N.  Br.,  22°  41'  W.  Lg.    9.  Juli  1898.     1  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperatur  10°.9. 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  + 
bucephalum  CL.  r 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL.  + 
furca  (EHR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  + 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  r 
depressum  BAIL.  4- 
parallelum  BROCH  c 


12 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Peridinium  ouatum  POUCH.  + 

pallidum  OSTENF.  4- 
pellucidum  (BERGH)  + 

Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  + 

Gonyaulax  spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 

Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c 

Bacillariaceae  : 

Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  cc 

Shrubsolei  CL.  + 
Chaetoceras  criophilum  CASTH.  r 
decipiens  CL.  r 
Schuttii  CL.  r 
Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 


21  Arten. 


Allgemeiner  Charakter:    Rein  atlantisch,  nicht  so  reich  an  siidlichen 
Formen  wie  die  vorhergehenden  Proben. 


12.    61°  47'  N.  Br.,  25°  39'  W.  Lg.    10.  Juli  1898,  12Va  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperalur  10°.l. 

Peridiniales : 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  + 
bucephalum  CLEVE  r 
intermedium  JORG.  4- 
furca  (EHR.)  c 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 

Peridinium  parallelum  BRCCH  c 
diver  gens  EHR.  + 
pallidum  OSTENF.  r 
Steinii  JORG.  + 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  + 
Gonyaulax  spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  + 


14  Arten. 


Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  cc 
Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  + 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  voriger  Fang. 


1898-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  13 

13.    62°  28'  N.  Br.,  28° 43'  W.  Lg.     11.  Juli  1898,  12  Uhr  mittags. 

Temperatur  9°.7. 

Peridiniales : 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  + 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
lineatum  (EnR.)  + 
furca  (EHR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  -f- 
depressum  BAIL.  + 
parallelum  BROCH  c 
diver  gens  EHR.  r 
conicum  (GRAN)  r 
ovatum  POUCH.  + 
roseum  PAULS,  r 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
pellucidum  BERGH  + 
Stcinii  JORG.  r 
Granii  OSTENF.  r 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  + 
Gonyaulax  spinlfera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 

poly  gramma  STEIN  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c 

acuminata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  + 
rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  r 

Bacillariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  marginatus  EHR.  + 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  r 
Corethron  criophilum  GASTR.  r 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  + 

hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  HENSEN  r 
Chaetoceras  boreale  BAIL,  c 

criophilum  CASTR.  -f 
decipiens  GL.  r 
laciniosum  SCHUTT  r 
Schuttii  CL.  cc 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 
Nitzschia  seriata  GL.  + 

delicatissima  CL.  c 


14 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Coccolithophorida : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH). 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  die  Proben  7,  9  und  10. 


36  Arten. 


14.    61<>  37' N.  Br.,  28°  30'  W.  Lg.    12.  Juli  1898.    121/!  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperatur  9°.8. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULLL.)  + 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
lineatum  (£HR.)  4- 
furca  (£HR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  c 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  + 
depressum  BAIL.  + 
parallelum  BROCH  c 
divergens  EHR.  r 
conicum  (GRAN)  + 
ovatum  POUCH.  + 
roseum  PAULS,  r 
pattidum  OSTENF.  c 
pellucidum  BERGH  r 
Steinii  J<>RG.  r 
Granii  OSTENF.  -f 
Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH  + 
Gonyaulux  spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  + 
Podolampas  palmipes  STEIN  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c 

acuminata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  + 
rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  r 

Bacillarht  ceae : 

Coscinodiscus  marginatus  EHR.  r 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  r 
Thalassiosira  subtilis  OSTENF.  r 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  c 

Shrubsolei  CL.  r 
Chaetoceras  boreale  BAIL,  c 

criopkilwn  CASTR.  cc 
polygonum  SCHUTT  r 


1898-1902.  No.  27.1  PHYTOPLANKTON.  15 

Chaetoceras  Schuttii  CLEVE  cc 
Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 

Coccolithophorida : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH)  r  33  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  die  Fange  7,  9,  10  und  13. 


16.    62«36'  N.  Br.,  31°  18'  W.  Lg.     15.  Juli  1898,  2  Uhr  vormittags. 

Temperatur  9°.l. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  r 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL,  r 
furca  (£HR.)  r 
fusus  (£HR.)  c 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  + 
depressum  BAIL,  r 
parallelum  BROCH  c 
conicum  (GRAN)  r 
ovatum  (PoucH.)  r 
pallidutn  OSTENF.  + 
pellucidum  BERGH  + 
Granii  OSTENF.  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  c 

rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM.  r 


Coscinodiscus  marginatus  EHR.  + 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  r 
Thalassiosira  subtilis  OSTENF.  r 
Ehizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  c 

hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  HENSEN  + 
Chaetoceras  atlanticum  GL.  r 

boreale  BAIL.  c. 

criophilum  CASTR.  c 

decipiens  CL.  r 

Schuttii  CL.  cc 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  GL.  &  GRUN.  c 
Nitzschia  seriata  CL.  + 


16 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Coccolithophorida. : 

Coccolithophora  pelagica  WALLICH. 


Arten. 


Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  die  Fange  7,  9,  10,  13  und  14. 


17.     62°  8'  N.  Br.,  32° 33'  W.  Lg.     15.  Juli  1898,  2  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperatur  9°.6. 

Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  -f 
intermedium  JORG.  + 
longipes  BAIL,  r 
lineatum  (EnR.)  r 
furca  (EHR.)  + 
fusus  (EHR.)  cc 

Peridinium  oceanicum  VANHOFF.  + 
depressum  BAIL.  + 
parallelum  BROCH  + 
divergens  EHR.  r 
ovatum  POUCH.  4- 
pallidum  OSTENF.  + 
pellucidum  BERGH  r 
Granii  OSTENF.  + 
Diplopscdis  lenticula  BERGH  r 
Gonyaulax  spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  r 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR.  + 

acuminata  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

Bacillariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  marginatun  EHR.  + 
Coscinosira  Oestrupi  OSTENF.  4- 
Rhizosolenia  styliformis  BRIGHTW.  c 

liebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  HENSEN  + 
Chaetoceras  atlanticum  CL.  r 

boreale  BAIL,  c 

criopliilum  GASTR.  c 

decipiens  GL.  r 

laciniosum  SCHUTT  r 

Schuttii  GL.  cc 

Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  c 
Nitzschia  seriata  CL.  + 


1898-1902.   No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  17 

Coccolithophorida : 

Goccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLICH).  31  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  wie  7,  9,  10,  13,  14  und  16. 

18.  59027'  N.  Br.,  42015'  W.  Lg.    18.  Juli  1898.    2V3  Uhr  nachmittags. 

Temperatur  2  °.5. 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium  longipes  BAIL,  r 

arcticum  (EHR.)  r 
Peridinium  parallelum  BROCH  r 
ovatum  POUCH,  c 
breve  PAULS.  + 
curvipes  OSTENF.  + 
pallidum  OSTENF.  c 
pellucidum  BERGH  c 
Dinophysis  acuta  EHR. 

BaciUariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  10  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter  ganz  verandert,  ozeanisch,  fast  rein  arktisch. 

19.  77«31'  N.  Br,  73°  8'  W.  Lg.     15.  August  1898,  4  Uhr  vormittags. 

Temperatur  2°.3. 
Peridiniales : 

Ceratium  arcticum  (EHR.)  c 
Peridinium  depressum  BAIL,  cc 

subinerme  PAULS.  + 

pallidum  OSTENF.  cc 

pellucidum  BERGH  c 

roseum  PAULS.  + 
Gonyaulax  triacantha  JORG.  r 
Dinophysis  arctica  MERESCH. 

rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

Bacillariaceae  : 

Coscinodiscus  centralis  EHR.  c 

curvatulus  GRUN.  r 
Coscinosira  poly  chorda  GRAN  + 
Thalassiosira  Nordenskioldii  CL.  + 
gravida  CL.  + 

2 


18 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Asteromphalus  Hookeri  EHR.  r 

Rhizosolenia  hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  HENSEN  cc 

Chaetoceras  atlanticum  CL.  c 

boreale  BAIL,  c 

criophilum  CASTR.  + 

convolutum  CASTR.  + 

decipiens  CL.  c 

contortum  SCHUTT  c 

diadema  (EHR.)  r 

teres  CL.  r 

sociale  LAUDER 

Fragilaria  oceanica  CL.  +  mit  Dauersporen. 
Thalassiothrix  longissima  CL.  &  GRUN.  + 
Nitzschia  seriata  CL.  + 
Silicoflagellata, : 

Dictyocha  speculum  EHR.  29  Arten. 

Allgemeiner  Charakter:    Arktisch,   aus   neritischen   und  ozeanischen 
Arten  gemischt. 


Biologische  Bemerkungen. 

Nachdem  in  den  letzten  Jahren  die  von  der  nFram"  durchfahrene 
Meeresstrasse  namentlich  von  OSTENFELD  (1898,  1899,  1900)  und  PAULSEN 
(1904,  1909,  OSTENFELD  u.  PAULSEN  1904)  ziemlich  eingehend  auf  Phyto- 
plankton  untersucht  worden  ist,  konnen  wir  nicht  erwarten,  dass  eine 
kleine  Reihe  Stichproben,  wie  die  vorliegende,  etwas  wesentlich  Neues 
bieten  wird.  Der  Inhalt  der  Proben  slimmt  auch  bis  auf  Einzelheiten 
mit  denjenigen,  uber  die  OSTENFELD  friiher  berichtet  hat,  uberein;  gerade 
aus  dem  Jahre  1898  ist  sein  Material  sehr  reichhaltig  und  lehrreich  (1899). 

Der  grosste  Teil  unserer  Proben  enthalt  als  Charakterformen  die 
beiden  sehr  kleinen  Diatomeen  Chaetoceras  Schutlii  und  Nitzschia 
delicatissima  und  als  untergeordnete  Bestandteile  des  Planktons  eine 
ganze  Reihe  von  rein  ozeanischen  Arten :  Coscinosira  Oestrupi,  Thalas- 
siosira  subtilis,  Asteromphalus  heptactis,  Dactyliosolen  antarcticus, 
Rhizosolenia  Shrubsolei,  Corethron  criophilum,  Bacteriastrum  delica- 
tulum,  Chaetoceras  polygonum  und  mehrere  andere.  Alle  diese  Arten 
haben  ihr  Verbreitungszentrum  weiter  siidlich,  nur  Nitzschia  delicatissima 


1898-1902.   No. 27.]  IMIYTOPLANKTON.  19 

kann  auch  im  hohen  Norden  massenhaft  gefunden  werden.  Der  Charakter 
dieser  Planktonproben  muss  darum  als  rein  atlantisch  bezeichnet 
werden. 

Es  ist  mir  aber  schon  lange  sehr  auffallend  erschienen,  wie  eine 
Art,  wie  Chaetocerds  Schuttii,  die  an  den  Kiisten  Europas  rein  neritisch 
auftritt,  hier  als  eine  Leitform  in  rein  ozeanischen  Stromungen  vorkom- 
men  kann,  und  diese  Frage  ist  noch  nicht  endgiiltig  gelost.  Zwei  Mog- 
lichkeiten  sind  vorhanden:  Entweder  kommt  die  Art  jeden  Friihling  mil 
Oberflachenstromungen  von  irgend  einer  Kttste  her,  oder  sie  ist  in  diesem 
Gebiete  einheimisch  geworden,  hat  ihre  Fahigkeit  Dauersporen  zu  bilden 
verloren  und  ist  rein  ozeanisch  geworden.  Mit  beiden  diesen  moglichen 
Erklarungen  stimmt  es  uberein,  dass  die  Zellen  durchgehends  viel  kleiner 
und  zarter  sind  als  bei  der  neritischen  Ch.  Schuttii.  Nun  kennen  wir 
viele  Beispiele  dafiir,  dass  neritische  Diatomeen  scheinbar  degenerieren, 
wenn  sie  in  die  monotonen  Verhaltnisse  des  offenen  Ozeans  hinaus- 
getrieben  werden,  und  die  Abweichungen  von  einem  normalen  Ch.  Schuttii, 
die  wir  bei  den  ozeanischen  Individuen  finden,  sind  nicht  grosser,  als 
dass  sie  in  dieser  Weise  wahrscheinlich  entstehen  konnten. 

Sicher  ist  es,  dass  diese  Diatomeen  sich  an  Ort  und  Stelle  jedes 
Jahr  im  Mai  sehr  stark  vermehren,  dass  ihr  Maximum  sich  langsam 
gegen  Norden  und  Westen  verschiebt,  wie  OSTENFELD  es  beschrieben  hat, 
und  dass  sie  im  Oktober  verschwinden  nach  einem  letzten  Aufbliihen 
einerseits  in  der  Danemarkstrasse,  andererseits  in  der  Faroer-Shetland- 
Rinne.  Auf  den  beigefiigten  Karten  habe  ich  nach  OSTENFELD  und 
PAULSEN  die  Beobachtungsstationen  zusammengestellt,  wo  Chaetoceras 
Schuttii  L  oceanica,  wie  ich  sie  nennen  mochte,  in  den  Jahren  1897, 
1898,  1899  und  1903  in  bedeutender  Menge  gefunden  worden  ist  in  den 
Monaten  Mai-Juni  (Fig.  1),  Juli-August  (Fig.  2)  und  September-Oktober 
(Fig.  3). 

Personlich  bin  ich  davon  iiberzeugt,  dass  die  Zellen,  von  denen  die 
dichten  Chaetoceras- Wol ken  stammen,  die  im  Meere  S.  von  Island 
gefunden  werden,  jedes  Jahr  von  einer  Kiiste  heraustreiben.  Von  Island 
konnen  sie  nicht  kommen;  ihr  Verbreitungsgebiet  ist  durch  eine  Zone 
mit  neritischem  Asterionella-Plankion  von  Island  getrennt  (vgl.  PAULSEN, 
1909);  wahrscheinlich  kommen  sie  mit  dem  nordatlantischen  Strom  von 
der  amerikanischen  Kiiste.  Ich  gebe  zu,  dass  diese  Hypothese  noch 

nicht  bewiesen  werden  kann;  wenn  wir  das  Plankton  des  mittleren  Teil 
i 

des  nordatlantischen  Ozeans  (zwischen  40  und  55  °  nordl.  Breite),  das  bis 
jetzt  fast  ganz  unbekannt  ist,  kennen  lernen,  wird  auch  diese  Frage 
gelost  werden  konnen. 


20 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Fig.  1.    Beobachtungen  von  Chaetoceras  Schuttii  f.  oceanica  in  den  Monaten 

Mai  inn!  .Imii. 


Fig.  2.     Chaetoceras  Schuttii  f.  oceanica  in  Juli  — August. 

Die  /ahlfii  be/.»>irlmcii  die  Phmklmislalionen  der  ,,Framu;  diejenigen  wo  Ch.  Schuttii 
niclit  gefunden  wurden,  sind  mil  einem  Kreuz  (-4-)  bezeichnet. 


«r 


Fig.  3.     Chaetoceras  Schuttii  f.  oceanica  in  September— Oktober. 


1898-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  2l 


Systematische  Liste  der  gefundenen  Arten. 

Da  wir  in  dem  Werke  rNordisches  Plankton"  ein  Handbuch  haben, 
in  welchem  die  altere  Literatar  beriicksichtigt  ist,  war  es  uberfltissig,  hier 
die  Synonyme  der  gefundenen  Arten  beizut'iigen.  Die  Reihenfolge  der 
Arten  ist  dieselbe  wie  in  diesem  Werke. 

1.  Prorocentrum  dentatum  STEIN. 

Nur  vereinzelt  gefunden,  wahrcheinlich  doch  haufig  vorhanden; 
mit  Mullergaze  nicht  regelmassig  gefangen.  Fang  7  und  10. 

2.  Dinophysis  acuta  EHR. 

An  alien  atlantischen  Stationen,  meistens  haufig. 

3.  D.  acuminata  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

Mit  dem  dichten  Diatomeenplankton  zusammen  nicht  selten,  sonst 
wahrscheinlich  durch  die  Maschen  durchgeschliipft.  Hat  wahrschein- 
lich  eine  weite  Verbreitung.  Fang  7,  13,  14,  17. 

4.  D.  arctica  MERESCHK. 

Mit  der  vorigen  Art  sehr  nahe  verwandt,  vielleicht  mit  Recht 
von  JORGENSEN  (1900)  nur  als  eine  Varietat  derselben  anzusehen. 
Fang  19  haufig. 

5.  D.  rotundata  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

In  mehreren  Fangen,  meistens  sparlich.  Geht  durch  die  Maschen 
der  Netze. 

6.  D.  homunculus  STEIN. 

Selten.     Fang  9,  10. 

7.  Gonyaulax  triacantha  JORG. 

Fang  19,  sparlich. 

8.  G.  polygramma  STEIN. 

Sparlich  gefangen,  Fang  7,  9,  10,  13. 

9.  G.  spinifera  (CLAP.  &  LACHM.)  DIES. 

Wie  vorige  Art,  etwas  haufiger.     7,  9,  11,  12,  13,  14,  17. 

10.  Diplopsalis  lenticula  BERGH. 

Ziemlich  haufig  an  den  atlantischen  Stationen. 

11.  Peridinium  Cerasus  PAULS.     Nach  BROCH  (1910)   mit  P.  quarne- 

rense  (SCHROD.)  identisch.     Selten.     9,  10. 

12.  P.  roseum  PAULS. 

Selten.     13,  14,  19. 

13.  P.  ovatum  POUCH. 

In  fast  alien  Proben,  teilweise  haufig. 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


14.  P.  curvipes  OSTENF. 

Fang  18,  nicht  selten. 

15.  P.  Steinii  JORG. 

In  den  ozeanischen  Fangen  sparlich  gefunden,  vvahrscheinlich  nur 
gelegentlich  in  den  Netzen  gefangen. 

16.  P.  pellucidum  (BERGH)  SCHUTT. 

Wie  vorige  Art,  aber  weit  haufiger  gefangen. 

17.  P.  pallidum  OSTENF. 

In  alien  Fangen,  dem  ersten  ausgenommen,  meistens  haufig. 

18.  P.  Granii  OSTENF. 

In  den  ozeanischen  Fangen  zusammen  mit  den  kleinen  Diatomeen, 
nicht  sehr  haufig.  7,  9,  13,  14,  16,  17. 

19.  P.  depression  BAIL. 

In  fast  alien  Fangen  gefunden,  meistens  haufig. 

20.  P.  parallelum  BROCH. 

Wie  die  vorige  Art,  aber  noch  haufiger.  Fehlt  in  der  Probe  aus 
der  Davisstrasse  (19),  wo  P.  depressum  massenhaft  auftritt. 

21.  P.  oceanicum  VANHOFF. 

In  den  rein  atlantischen  Fangen  (7 — 17),  nicht  sehr  haufig. 

22.  P.  crassipes  KOFOID. 

Bis  mit  Fang  12  ziemlich  haufig  oder  sehr  haufig,  weiter  westlich 
sparlich  vorhanden.  Ich  bin  nicht  davon  uberzeugt,  dass  diese  Form 
von  dem  typischen  P.  divergens  spezifisch  verschieden  sei,  ftihre 
sie  aber  unter  dem  jetzt  geltenden  Namen  auf,  bis  weitere  Unter- 
suchungen  vorliegen  kftnnen. 

23.  P.  conicum  (GRAN)  OSTENF.  u.  SCHMIDT. 

In  den  atlantischen  Fangen  (7 — 16)  nicht  selten. 

24.  P.  pentagonum  GRAN. 

In  den  ostlichsten  Fangen  (3,  4,  5)  nicht  selten. 

25.  P.  subinerme  PAULS. 

Fang  19  nicht  selten.  t 

26.  P.  Thorianum  PAULS. 

Fang  10,  selten. 

27.  Pyrophacus  horologium  STEIN. 

Fang  7,  selten. 

28.  Ceratium  platycorne  v.  DAD.  f.  compressa  (GRAN). 

Syn.:  C.  (macroceros  subs%).)  compressum  GRAN  1902,  p.  54,  193, 
196,  f.  16.;  C.  compressum  PAULS.  1908,  p.  81,  f.  108. 

Diese  Form,  die  im  vorliegenden  Material  nur  sehr  sparlich  vor- 
handen (Fang  5),  ist  als  ein  Minusvariant  von  C.  platycorne  auf- 


1898-1902.   No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  23 

zufassen,   der  an  der  Nordgrenze  der  Art  auftritt,  wie  ich  aus  dem 
Material  der  Michael  Sars-Expedition  1910  beweisen  kann. 

29.  C,  bucephalum  CLEVE. 

Nur  sehr  sparlich  gefunden.     11,  12. 

30.  C.  tripos  (0.  F.  MULL.)  NITZSCH. 

In  alien  Fangen  mit  Ausnahme  der  beiden  letzten,  namentlich  an 
den  ostlichsten  Stationen  (bis  Fang  9)  haufig.  Die  auftretende  Form 
ist  f.  atlantica  OSTENF. 

31.  C.  macroceros  (EHR.)  CLEVE. 

Fang  1  haufig  (Nordsee),  3  nicht  selten,  weiter  westlich  nicht 
gefunden. 

32.  C.  intermedium  JORG. 

Fang  3  massenhaft,  4 — 17  regelmassig  und  ziemlich  haufig. 

33.  C.  longipes  (BAIL.)  GRAN. 

Fang  4  rnassenhaft,  5  haufig,  sonst  weniger  haufig  und  ziemlich 
luckenhaft  verbreitet  (1—7,  10,  11,  16—18). 

34.  C.  arcticum  (£HR.)  CLEVE. 

Fang  4,  5  nicht  selten,  18  sparlich,  19  haufig. 

35.  C.  lineatum  (EHR.)  CLEVE. 

LOHMANN  (1908)  und  KOFOID  (1909)  wie  auch  neulich  APSTEIN  (1910) 
haben  gezeigt,  dass  die  unter  diesem  Namen  gehende  Form  in  dem 
Entwickelungs/yklus  von  C.  tripos  auftritt.  KOFOID  zeigt  aber  auch, 
dass  eine  sehr  ahnliche  Form,  C.  californicum  aus  C.  Ostenfeldii 
entstehen  kann.  Die  Moglichkeit  ist  vorhanden,  dass  lineatum- 
Formen,  die  kaum  von  einander  zu  unterscheiden  sein  wiirden,  als 
Zvvischengenerationen  bei  mehreren  verschiedenen  Ceratium-Arien 
vorkommen  kiinnen.  Darurn  ist  es  nach  meiner  Ansicht  praktisch, 
vorlaufig  den  alten  Namen  beizubehalten;  wenn  wir  nach  LOHMANN 
und  PAULSEN  »Ceratium  tripos  v.  subsalsa  f.  lineata"  schreiben 
wollten,  wiirden  wir  von  der  geographischen  Verbreitung  der  Ostsee- 
form  C.  tripos  v.  subsalsa  eine  ganz  falsche  Vorstellung  verbreiten. 

Fang  4,  7,  9,  10,  13,  14,  17. 

36.  C.  furca  (EHR.)  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

In  alien  Fangen  mit  Ausnahme  der  beiden  letzten,  durchgehends 
haufig. 

37.  C,  fusus  (EHR.)  CLAP.  &  LACHM. 

Fang  1  bis  17  haufig  bis  massenhaft;  die  haufigste  Ceratium-Art 
des  Materials. 

38.  Podolampas  palmipes  STEIN. 

Selten  (9,  14),  nur  gelegentlich  durch  die  Netze  gefangen. 


24 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Bacillariaceae : 

39.  Thalassiosira  Nordenskioldii  CLEVE. 

Fang  19  nicht  selten. 

40.  T.  decipiens  (GRUN)  JORG. 

9,  10  selten. 

41.  T.  gravida  CLEVE.     19  nicht  selten. 

42.  T.  subtilis  (OSTENF.)  GRAN. 

5—10  haufig,  14,  16  sparlich. 

43.  Coscinosira  polychorda  GRAN. 

19  nicht  selten. 

44.  C.  Oestrupi  OSTENF. 

In  den  atlantischen  Fangen  (3—17)  teilweise  nicht  selten. 
Fang  7  haufig. 

45.  Dactyliosolen  antarcticus  GASTR. 

Fang  3,  7,  9,  10  ziemlich  haufig. 

46.  D.  tennis  (CLEVE)  GRAN. 

7,  9  nicht  sehr  haufig. 

47.  CoscinodiscMS  subbulliens  JORG. 

4,  5  ziemlich  haufig. 

48.  C.  marginatus  EHR. 

10  sparlich,  13—17  ziemlich  haufig. 

49.  C.  centralis  EHR. 

2—12  nicht  sehr  haufig;  18  sparlich,  19  haufig. 

50.  C.  concinnus  W.  SM. 

1,  3,  nicht  weiter  westlich. 

51.  C.  curvatulus  GRUN. 

19  sparlich. 

52.  Asteromphalus  heptactis  RALFS. 

3  sparlich,  7,  9  nicht  selten,  10  haufig. 

53.  A.  Hookeri  EHR. 

Ein  Exemplar  mil  5  +  1  Strahlen  gefunden  im  Fang  19. 

54.  Euodia  cuneiformis  (WALLICH)  GRAN. 

3,  7  sparlich. 

55.  Rhizosolenia  Shrubsolei  CLEVE. 

7—10  ziemlich  haufig,  14  sparlich. 

56.  R.  styliformis  BRIGHTW. 

In   fast   alien   Fangen  (2—17)  mehr  oder  weniger  haufig,  11—12 
massenhaft. 

57.  R.  hebetata  BAIL.  f.  semispina  (HENSEN). 

Sparlich  (1,  13,  16,  17),  nur  im  Fang  19  massenhaft. 


1898-1902.   No.  27.]  I'll  YTOPLANKTON.  25 

58.  R.  alata  BRIGHTW. 

9,  10  sparlich. 

59.  Corethron  criophilum  CASTR. 

7,  9,  13  spiirlich. 

60.  Bacteriastrum  varians  LAUD. 

7  selten. 

61.  B.  delicatulum  GLEVE. 

9,  selten. 

62.  Chaetoceras  atlanticum  GLEVE. 

Fang  7  und  19  haufig,  sonst  sparlich  (3,  5,  9,  16,  17). 

63.  Ch.  polygonum  SCHUTT. 

Sparlich  in  den  atlantischen  Fangen  (7,  9,  10,  14). 

64.  Ch.  densum  CLEVE. 

Nur  im  Fang  4. 

65.  Ch.  convolutum  CASTR. 

3,  5,  7,  19  nicht  haufig. 

66.  Ch.  peruvianum  BRIGHTW. 

Fang  7  vereinzelt. 

67.  Ch.  criophilum  CALTR. 

Fang  5 — 17  regelmassig  und  ziemlich  hauh'g,  14  massenhaft, 
19  nicht  selten. 

68.  Ch.  boreale  BAIL. 

3—9  ziemlich  sparlich,  13 — 17  und  19  haufig. 

69.  Ch.  decipiens  CLEVE. 

In  fast  alien  Fangen,  meistens  aber  sparlich. 

70.  Ch.  teres  CLEVE. 

19  sparlich. 

71.  Ch.  contortum  SCHUTT. 

19  haufig. 

72.  Ch.  Schiittii  CL.   f.   oceanica   n.  nom.;    Ch.  Schuttii   aff.   OSTENF. 
1898,  1900;   Ch.   Willei  OSTENF.  1899.     7,  9,  10,  13-17  sehr  haufig, 
vgl.  S.  19-20. 

73.  Ch.  laciniosum  SCHUTT  f.  pelagica  (GLEVE). 

Syn.:  Ch.  laciniosum  aff.  OSTENF.  1899;  Ch.  Ostenfeldii  GLEVE 
1900;  Ch.  pelagicum  GLEVE  1873. 

Da  diese  Form  nach  meiner  Ansicht  eine  Degenerationsform  von 
Ch.  laciniosum  ist,  wie  die  oben  besprochene  Form  von  Ch.  Schuttii, 
muss  ich  sie  entsprechend  bezeichnen.  Ich  habe  den  Namen  pela- 
gica beibehalten,  trotzdem  es  nach  meiner  Ansicht  auch  fur  CLEVE 
selbst  unmoglich  war,  zu  entscheiden,  ob  die  hochst  ungeniigende 


26 


H.  H.  GRAN. 


[SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FRAM 


Beschreibung  von  1873  wirklich  diese  Form  bezeichnen  sollte.  Da 
aber  keine  Verwechslung  moglich  ist,  und  wohl  kaum  jemand  den 
Versuch  wagen  wird  zu  entscheiden,  welche  Art  mit  Ch.  pelagicum 
eigentlich  gemeint  war,  konnen  wir  gern  auf  die  Autoritat  CLEVES 
bin  den  Namen  beibehalten. 

Diese    Art    war    in    den    vorliegenden    Fangen    nur    sparlich   vor- 
handen  (7,  13,  17). 

74.  Ch.  diadema  (EHR.)  GRAN. 

19  sparlich. 

75.  Ch.  debile  CLEVE. 

2  sparlich,  5  nicht  selten. 

76.  ph.  sociale  LAUDER. 

19  sparlich. 

77.  Cerataulina  Bergonii  H.  PERAG. 

9,  10  sparlich. 

78.  Fragilaria  oceanica  CLEVE. 

19,  mit  Dauersporen,  nicht  selten. 

79.  Thalassiothrix  longissima    CL.  &  GRUN. 

In  den  meisten  Fangen  mehr  oder  weniger  ban  fig. 

80.  Nitzschia  seriata  CLEVE. 

In  den  meisten  der  atlantiscben  Fiinge. 

81.  N.  delicatissima  CLEVE. 

In  atlantischen  Fangen  z.  T.  massenhaft  (9,  10). 

Silicoflagella  ta  : 

82.  Dictyocha  fibula  EHR. 

Nur  vereinzelt  gefunden  (1,  9). 

83.  D.  speculum  EHR. 

Nur  zufallig  gefangen  (3,  7,  19). 

Coccolithophorida : 

84.  Coccolithophora  pelagica  (WALLJCH)  LOHM. 

Trotz  ihrer  Kleinheit  ist  diese  Alge  so  regelmassig  in  den  atlan- 
tischen Fangen  aufgefischt  worden,  dass  sie  wahrscheinlicb  massen- 
haft vorkommt. 

85.  Pontosphaera  Huxleyi  LOHM. 

Nur  in  Schleim  und  Exkrementen  gefunden,  wabrscheinlicb  mas- 
senhaft vorhanden. 


1898-1902.  No.  27.]  PHYTOPLANKTON.  27 


Literatur 1. 

1910  a.     APSTEIN,  C.     Ueber  Knospung  bei  Ceratium.     Kiel  1910.    (Schriften  Naturw. 

Verein  f.  Schlesvs  ig-Holstein,  Bd.  14,  p.  419). 
1910  b.  Knospung  bei   Ceratium.    Leipzig  1910.    (Internationale  Revue  der 

gesamten  Hydrobiologie  u.  Hydrographie,  Bd.  Ill,  Heft  I,  p.  34). 
1910  c.  Biologische   Studie   liber  Ceratium,  tripos  var.  subsalsa  OSTF.     Kiel 

1910.     (Wissensch.  Meeresunters.  Abt.  Kiel,  Neue  Folge,  Bd.  12). 
1910  a.     BROCH,  HJALMAR.     Das  Plankton.    Stockholm  1910.    (Zool.  Ergebn.  d.  schwed. 

Exped.  nach  Spitzbergen  1908.    Kgl.  Svenska  Vet.-Ak.  Handl.  Bd.  45, 

No.  9). 
1910  b.  Die  Peridinium-Arten   des   Nordhafens  (Val  di  Bora)   bei   Rovigno 

im   Jahre    1910.     Jena    1910.     (Archiv    fur    Protistenkunde,    Bd.    20, 

p.  176). 
1873.        CLEVE,  P.  T.     On  Diatoms    from   the  Arctic  Sea.     Stockholm  1873.     (Bihang 

till  K.  Svenska  Vet.  Akad.  Handlingar,  Bd.  1,  No.  13). 
1900.  Notes  on  some  Atlantic  Plankton-Organisms.    Stockholm  1900.   (Kongl. 

Svenska  Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Handlinger,  Bd.  34,  No.  1). 
1902.        GRAN,  H.  H.     Das   Plankton   des   Norwegischen   Nordmeeres.     Bergen  1902. 

(Report  on  Norvv.  Fishery-  and  Marine  Investigations,  Vol.  II,   1902, 

No.  5). 
1905.  Diatomeen.     Kiel  1905.     (Nordisches  Plankton,  XIX). 

Hier  die  systematische  Literatur  iiber  Diatomeen. 
1900.       JORGENSEN,  E.     Protistenplankton  aus  dem  Nordmeere  in  den  Jahren  1897— 

1900.     Bergen  1900.     (Bergens  Museums  Aarbog  1900,  Nr.  6). 
1909  a.     KOFOID,  CH.  A.    Mutations  in  Ceratium.    1909.    (Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zoology  at 

Harvard  College,  Bd.  52). 
1909  b.  On  Peridinium  Steinii  JORGENSEN,  with  a  note  on  the  nomenclatures 

of  the  skeleton  of  the  Peridinidae.    Jena  1909.    (Archiv  fur  Protisten- 
kunde, Bd.  16). 
1902.        LOHMANN,  H.    Die  Coccolithophoridae,  eine  Monographic.   Jena  1902.    (Archiv 

f.  Protistenkunde,  Bd.  1,  p.  89). 
1908.  Untersuchungen    zur    Feststellung    des    vollstandigen    Gehaltes    des 

Meeres  an  Plankton.     Kiel  1908.    (Wiss.  Meeresunt.,  Abt.  Kiel,  N.  F., 

Bd.  10). 

1898.  OSTENFELD,  C.   Nord-Atlantisk  Plankton  i  1897.    K0benhavn  1898.  (lagttagelser 

over  Overfladevandets  Temperatur,  Saltholdighed  og  Plankton  paa 
islandske  og  gronlandske  Skibsrouter  i  1897,  av  C.  F.  WANDEL  og 
C.  OSTENFELD). 

1899.  Plankton  i  1898.     Kobenhavn.  1899.     (Dieselbe   Publikation   fur   das 
Jahr  1898). 

1900.  Plankton  i  1899.     K0benhavn   1900.     (Dieselbe    Publikation   fur  das 
Jahr  1899). 


1  Nur  die  neueste  Literatur  und  diejenigen  alteren  Werke,  die  im  Text  speziell 
zitiert  \vurden,  sind  hier  aufgefuhrt.  Sonst  wird  auf  ,,Nordisches  Plankton" 
hingewiesen. 


28     H.  H.  GRAN.    PHYTOPLANKTON.    [SEC.  ARCT.  EXP.  FR AM  1898- 1902.  No.  27.] 

1902.     OSTENFELD  og  PAULSEN,  0.    Planktonprover  fra  Nord-Atlanterhavet  (ca.  58—60° 

n.  Br.)   samlede   i    1899  af  dr.   K.  I.  V.  STEENSTRUP.     Kebenhavn  1902. 

(Meddelelser  om  GrOnland,  XXVI). 
1904.     PAULSEN,  OVE.     Plankton   Investigations  in   the  waters  round  Iceland  in  1903. 

Kjebenhavn    1904.     (Meddelelser     fra    Kommissionen    for    Havunder- 

SBgelser,  Ser.  Plankton  I,  1). 

1908.  Peridiniales.     Kiel  u.  Leipzig  1908.  (Nordisches  Plankton  XVIII). 
Hier  die  Literatur  iiber  Peridineen. 

1909.  Plankton  Investigations  in  the  waters  round  Iceland  and  in  the  North 
Atlantic  in   1904.     Kobenhavn  1909.     (Meddelelser  fra   Kommissionen 
for  Havundersogelser.     Ser.  Plankton,  I,  8). 


Gedruckt  24.  Februar  1911. 


Q  "Pram"  Expedition 

115       Report  of  the  second 

F73  Norwegian  Arctic  Expedition  in 

v.3  the  "Fran" 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY